JP2019092674A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine which allows an advantageous section to be terminated based the difference in the numbers of game mediums.SOLUTION: The game machine includes: a normal section where notification of an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch cannot be made; an advantageous section where notification of the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch may be made; and a difference counter for storing the accumulated value of difference data indicating the difference between the number of bets with game mediums and the number of paid-out game mediums. A process of updating the difference counter is executed for each game regardless of whether the section is normal or advantageous. The difference counter is set to an initial value (0(H)) based on the advantageous section being started. The advantageous section is terminated when the difference counter in the advantageous section reads a value indicating a termination condition of the advantageous section (that is when 2400(D) is exceeded).SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 255

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of ending an advantageous section based on the value of a difference number counter.

  In a conventional gaming machine, there is known a technique of providing an advantageous section and terminating the advantageous section when the maximum of 1,500 games or 3,000 payouts is reached (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Patent No. 6112524

However, in the above-mentioned prior art, when the advantageous section is set to 1500 games or 3000 pieces at maximum, the advantageous section and the AT become uniform.
The problem to be solved by the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of ending the advantageous section based on the difference number of game media in the advantageous section.

The present invention solves the above-mentioned problems by the following solution means. In parentheses, the configuration of the corresponding embodiment is shown.
The present invention corresponds to the first invention 69 among the first inventions 1 to 75 described later.
The present invention (31st embodiment) is
A normal section in which it is not possible to report an advantageous operation mode (a correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42),
An advantageous section in which an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch may be notified;
A difference number counter storing a value corresponding to an accumulated value of difference number data indicating a difference between the bet number of gaming media and the number of payouts (including addition to credits);
Regardless of whether it is a normal section or an advantageous section, the process of updating the difference number counter can be executed for each game,
Set the value of the difference counter to the initial value (0 (H)) based on the start of the advantageous interval,
When the value of the difference number counter in the advantageous section becomes a value satisfying the end condition of the advantageous section (when it exceeds 2400 (D)), the advantageous section is ended.

According to the present invention, since it is possible to end the advantageous section based on the value of the difference number counter, "the number of games in the game section reaches a predetermined upper limit number of games (for example, 1500 games) or payout in the advantageous section When the number reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3000 sheets), it is possible to end the advantageous section without being caught by the end condition of the advantageous section.
Also, regardless of whether it is a normal section or an advantageous section, the value of the difference number counter can be updated, and the value of the differential number counter is made an initial value based on the start of the advantageous section. It is not necessary to update the value of the difference number counter after determining whether there is any, and simplification of processing and reduction of program capacity can be achieved.

FIG. 18 is a block diagram showing an outline of control of the slot machine in the present embodiment. It is a figure which shows a storage number display LED, an advantageous section display LED, an acquisition number display LED, a settlement switch, and the like. It is a figure which shows the main control board accommodated in the board | substrate case, (a) shows Example 1, (b) shows Example 2. As shown in FIG. It is a figure explaining the detail of a digit and a segment. It is a figure which shows the symbol arrangement of a reel. It is a figure which shows the display window (transparent window) provided in the slot machine, the positional relationship of each reel, an effective line etc. It is a figure (1) which shows the kind of combination, the number of payouts, and the combination of a symbol. It is a figure (2) which shows the combination of the kind of part, the number of payouts, and a symbol. It is a figure (3) which shows the kind of combination, the number of payouts, and the combination of a symbol. It is a figure (4) which shows the combination of the kind of combination, the number of payouts, and a symbol. It is a figure (5) which shows the combination of the kind of part, the number of payouts, and a symbol. It is a figure (6) which shows the kind of combination, the number of payouts, and the combination of a symbol. It is a figure (1) which shows the relationship between a condition apparatus, its winning combination, and pushing order. It is a figure (2) which shows the relationship between a condition apparatus, its winning combination, and pushing order. It is a figure (3) which shows the relationship between a condition apparatus, its winning combination, and pushing order. It is a figure (4) which shows the relationship between a condition apparatus, its winning combination, and pushing order. It is a figure (1) which shows a numerical table. It is a figure (2) which shows a numerical table. It is a figure which shows a pushing order instruction | indication number table. It is a figure which shows the relationship of pushing order instruction | indication number, advantageous pushing order, and a display content. It is a figure which shows a presentation group number table. It is a figure explaining transition of RT. It is a figure which shows the lighting process of the advantageous area display LED. It is a timing chart (example 1 and example 2) which shows a flow of processing of a main control board, acquisition number display LED, and an image display device. It is a timing chart (example 3 and example 4) which shows a flow of processing of a main control board, an acquisition number display LED, and an image display device. It is a figure which shows the flow of the display of pushing order instruction information by acquisition number display LED, and the alerting | reporting of the correct pushing order by an image display apparatus. It is a figure which is a part of RWM, and is a storage area regarding an advantageous section and the total number of games. It is a part of RWM, and is a figure showing the storage area about all the number of payouts. It is a part of RWM, and is a figure showing the storage area about the number of sheets paid out at the time of continuous bonus product activation. It is a part of RWM, and is a figure showing the storage area about the number-of-payouts at bonus game activation time. It is a figure (modification) which is a part of RWM, and shows the storage area about the number of sheets paid out at the time of continuous combination goods operation. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the processing which updates the number of times of games etc. using a register. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example 1 in step S109-S114 of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the specific example 2 in step S109-S114 of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the example 3 in step S109-S114 of FIG. It is a flow chart which shows a flow of processing which updates the number of games etc., without using a register. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of arithmetic processing of an advantageous section ratio. It is a figure explaining the information displayed on management information display LED. It is a figure which shows the example which displays management information on storage number display LED. It is a figure which shows the example which displays management information on acquisition number display LED. FIG. 3 is an external perspective view showing a base portion 1 of the slot machine 10; In 2nd Embodiment, it is a figure which shows the main control board | substrate accommodated in the board | substrate case, (a) shows Example 1, (b) shows Example 2. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the process (example 1) by the side of the main control board in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process (example 2) by the side of the main control board in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process (example 3) by the side of the main control board in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process (example 4) by the side of the main control board in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process (example 5) by the side of the main control board in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process (example 6) by the side of the main control board in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process (example 7) by the side of the main control board in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process (example 8) by the side of the main control board in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process (example 9) by the side of the main control board in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process (example 10) by the side of the main control board in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process (example 1) by the side of the sub control board in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the process (example 2) by the side of the sub control board in 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the image display example (example 1-example 4) of the image display apparatus by a sub control board regarding the addition in AT (3rd Embodiment). In 3rd Embodiment, it is a figure explaining increase of AT frequency | count of a game, change of an effect, etc. FIG. It is a time chart (example 1 and example 2) of the external signal in a 4th embodiment. It is a time chart (example 3) of the external signal in a 4th embodiment. It is a figure which shows RT transfer in Example 1 of 5th Embodiment. In 5th Embodiment, it is a time chart which shows the relationship between RT transfer and AT. It is a figure which shows Example 2 ((a)-(c)) of 5th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows RT transfer in 6th Embodiment. In 6th Embodiment, it is a figure which shows the relationship between the kind of Replay D group drawn by RT3, a winning combination, and pushing order and a display combination. It is a time chart which shows Example 1 and Example 2 of 8th Embodiment. It is a time chart which shows Example 3 of an 8th embodiment. It is a time chart which shows example 4 and example 5 of an 8th embodiment. It is a figure explaining the flow of the game in 9th Embodiment. It is a time chart which shows Example 1 and Example 2 of 11th Embodiment. It is a time chart which shows Example 3 and Example 4 of 11th Embodiment. In 12th Embodiment, it is a time chart which shows ending production etc. It is a figure which shows number table (2) of 13th Embodiment. In 14th Embodiment, it is a time chart which shows extension of an advantageous section. In 15th Embodiment, it is a time chart which shows the relationship between an advantageous section and freeze. (A) is a figure which shows winning number definition (1) in 16th Embodiment, (b) shows Example 1, (c) shows Example 2. [FIG. (A) is a figure which shows the winning number definition (2) in 16th Embodiment, Comprising: It is a figure following FIG. 74 (a), (b) shows Example 1, (c) shows Example 2. And (d) show Example 3 and (e) show Example 4. (A) is a figure which shows the data definition for winning number conversion in 16th Embodiment, (b) shows Example 1, (c) shows Example 2, (d) shows Example 3, (e) ) Shows Example 4. (A) is a figure which shows the winning number conversion table in 16th Embodiment, (b) shows description of "DEFB", (c) shows Example 1, (d) shows Example 2. [FIG. (A) is a figure which shows the data definition for winning number lottery in 16th Embodiment, (b) shows the meaning of each identifier. It is a figure which shows the all RT common lottery table (1) in 16th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the all RT common lottery table (2) in 16th Embodiment, Comprising: It is a figure following FIG. It is a figure which shows the all RT common lottery table (3) in 16th Embodiment, Comprising: It is a figure following FIG. (A) is a figure which shows the all RT common lottery table (4) in 16th Embodiment, and is a figure following FIG. 81, (b) is a figure which shows the non-RT time lottery table in 16th Embodiment. FIG. 24C is a diagram showing an RT 1 o'clock lottery table in the sixteenth embodiment. (A) is a figure which shows the RT 2 o'clock lottery table in 16th Embodiment, (b) is a figure which shows the RT 3 o'clock lottery table in 16th Embodiment. (A) is a figure which shows the RT 4 o'clock lottery table in 16th Embodiment, (b) is a figure which shows the 1BBA lottery table in 16th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the 1BBB time lottery table in 16th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows a flow of lottery processing, such as a condition device number etc. in a 16th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process of the internal lottery 1 in 16th Embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows a flow of processing of lottery determination in a 16th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process of the conditional device number set 1 in 16th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of lottery processes, such as a condition apparatus number in the modification of 16th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of processing at the time of all the reels in the modification of 16th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process of the conditional device number set 2 in the modification of 16th Embodiment. (A) shows the winning number definition (3) in the seventeenth embodiment, (b) shows an example 1, (c) shows an example 2, and (d) shows a data definition for winning number conversion. FIG. (A) is a figure showing a winning number conversion table in the seventeenth embodiment, (b) shows an example 1, (c) shows an example 2, and (d) shows an all RT common lottery table (5) FIG. FIG. 94 is a diagram showing an all-RT common lottery table (6) in the seventeenth embodiment and is a diagram following FIG. 94 (d). It is a figure which shows the all RT common lottery table (7) in 17th Embodiment, Comprising: It is a figure following FIG. (A) is a figure which shows the 2-step lottery address table in 17th Embodiment, (b) is a figure which shows the 2-step lottery table 1, (c) is a figure which shows the 2-step lottery table 2, (D) is a figure which shows the 2-step lottery table 3, (e) is a figure which shows the 2-step lottery table 4, (f) is a figure which shows the 2-step lottery table 5. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of lottery processes, such as a conditions apparatus number in 17th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process of the conditional device number set 3 in 17th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process of the two-step lottery in 17th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process of the setting difference no lottery in 17th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of lottery processes, such as a conditional device number in the modification of 17th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process of the conditional device number set 4 in the modification of 17th Embodiment. (A) is a figure which shows the data definition for winning number lottery in 18th Embodiment, (b) shows the meaning of each identifier. It is a figure which shows the all RT common lottery table (8) in 18th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the all RT common lottery table (9) in 18th Embodiment, and is a figure following FIG. FIG. 107 is a diagram showing an all-RT common lottery table (10) in the eighteenth embodiment, and is a diagram continued from FIG. 106. It is a figure which shows the all RT common lottery table (11) in 18th Embodiment, and is a figure following FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of lottery processes, such as a conditions apparatus number in 18th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process of the advantageous section number acquisition in 18th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process of the conditional device number set 5 in 18th Embodiment. (A) is a figure which shows the winning number definition (4) in 19th Embodiment, (b) is a figure which shows data selection for winning number conversion and an advantageous section shift determination, (c) shows Example 1. , (D) show Example 2. (A) is a figure which shows the winning number conversion table in 19th Embodiment, (b) shows Example 1, (c) shows Example 2. [FIG. It is a figure which shows the all RT common lottery table (12) in 19th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the all RT common lottery table (13) in 19th Embodiment, and is a figure following FIG. It is a figure which shows the all RT common lottery table (14) in 19th Embodiment, and is a figure following FIG. (A) is a figure which shows the advantageous section shift determination random number table in 19th Embodiment, (b) shows description of "DEFW", (c) shows Example 1, (d) shows Example 2 . It is a flowchart which shows the flow of lottery processes, such as a conditions apparatus number in 19th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process of the internal lottery 2 in 19th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process of the conditional device number set 6 in 19th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process of the advantageous section transfer lottery in 19th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of lottery processes, such as a condition apparatus number in the modification of 19th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process of the conditional device number set 7 in the modification of 19th Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the more detailed structure of main CPU in 20th Embodiment, ROM, and RWM. (A) is a figure which shows various LED on the display substrate in 20th Embodiment. (B) is a figure which shows the management information display LED in 20th embodiment more concretely. It is a figure explaining the detail of the digit in a 20th embodiment, and a segment. It is a figure which shows the data table memorize | stored in ROM. In 20th Embodiment, it is a figure which shows the output ports 2-5 provided in the main control board (a reference example is shown collectively). In 20th Embodiment, it is a figure which shows wiring of the electric signal on a main control board. In 20th Embodiment, it is a figure which shows wiring of the electric signal on a main control board. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing wiring of electric signals on a display substrate in the twentieth embodiment. (A) is a figure which shows the relationship between an interrupt, LED display counter (_CT_LED_DSP), and an output signal in 20th Embodiment. (B) is a figure which shows a LED display request | requirement flag (_FL_LED_DSP). It is a flowchart which shows the interrupt processing (I_INTR) by the main control board (main CPU). It is a flowchart which shows LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in 20th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ratio display process (S_LED_OUT) in 20th Embodiment. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing non-returnable error processing 1 (SS_ERROR_STOP1). FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing non-returnable error processing 2 (SS_ERROR_STOP2). FIG. It is a figure which shows the structure of the output port in 21st Embodiment. (A) is a figure which shows the relationship of the digit and segment in 21st Embodiment. (B) is a figure which shows the LED display counter of 21st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in 21st Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ratio display process (S_LED_OUT) in 21st Embodiment. (A) is a figure which shows various LED on the display substrate in 22nd Embodiment. (B) is a figure which shows more concretely management information display LED in 22nd Embodiment. (C) is a figure which shows setting value display LED in 22nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the digit in a 22nd embodiment, and a segment. It is a figure which shows the output port in 22nd Embodiment. FIG. 25 is a circuit diagram showing wiring of electric signals of a main control board in a twenty-second embodiment. FIG. 25 is a circuit diagram showing wiring of electric signals of a main control board in a twenty-second embodiment. FIG. 33 is a circuit diagram showing wiring of electric signals of a display substrate in a twenty-second embodiment. (A) is a figure which shows the relationship between an interrupt, an LED display counter (_CT_LED_DSP) value, and a digit signal and a segment signal in 22nd Embodiment. (B) is a figure which shows a LED display request | requirement flag (_FL_LED_DSP). It is a flowchart which shows LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in 22nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ratio display process (S_LED_OUT) in 22nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the output ports 2-6 in 23rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the digit in a 23rd embodiment, and a segment. (A) is a figure which shows the relationship between an interrupt, an LED display counter (_CT_LED_DSP) value, and a digit signal and a segment signal in 23rd Embodiment. (B) is a figure which shows a LED display request | requirement flag (_FL_LED_DSP). It is a figure showing the output ports 2-7 in a 24th embodiment. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the digit in a 24th embodiment, and a segment. It is a figure which shows Example 1 of the LED display counter in 24th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows Example 2 of the LED display counter in 24th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in 24th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ratio display process (S_LED_OUT) in 24th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows number table (1) in 25th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows number table (2) at the time of non-RT in 25th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows numerical table (2) at the time of RT1 in 25th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows numerical table (2) at the time of RT2 in 25th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows numerical table 2 at the time of RT3 in 25th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the numerical table (2) at the time of RT4 in 25th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows Table (2) at the time of 1BBA operation | movement in 25th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows Number table (2) at the time of 1 BBB operation | movement in 25th Embodiment. (A) is a figure which shows the presence or absence of the advantageous section shift at the time of rare part winning in a 1st embodiment, and the advantageous section display LED lighting, (b) is an advantageous section transition at the time of rare part winning in a 25th embodiment. And it is a figure which shows the presence or absence of the advantageous area display LED lighting. It is a figure which shows the 1BB election probability for every setting value in a 25th embodiment, and the advantageous section shift probability at the time of 1BB election. It is a flow chart which shows the flow of the indication function operation processing in a 25th embodiment. It is a time chart which shows the example which operates an indication function at the time of the first push order bell winning after shifting to the advantageous section which does not have an indication game section in a 25th embodiment. In the twenty-fifth embodiment, after transitioning to the advantageous section having no instruction game section, the time chart showing an example of canceling the operation of the instruction function by winning the special part before the activation of the first instruction function. is there. In a 25th embodiment, in the advantageous section which does not have an indication game section, it is a time chart which shows the example which operates an indication function at the time of the first push order bell winning after satisfying instruction operation conditions once. It is a time chart which shows an example which cancels operation of an indicating function by winning a special part in an advantageous section which does not have an instruction game section in the twenty-fifth embodiment before satisfying an instruction operation condition once. In the twenty-fifth embodiment, in the advantageous section having no instruction game section, the instruction function is selected when the push order bell is won after the number of games in the advantageous section has been consumed (after the count value of the advantageous section counter becomes “0”). It is a time chart which shows an example which makes it operate and ends an advantageous section. In the twenty-fifth embodiment, in an advantageous section having no instruction game section, the special role is won by the number of games played in the advantageous section (before the count value of the advantageous section counter becomes “0”), It is a time chart which shows an example which cancels operation of an indication function. Information on RWM cleared in initialization processing (first initialization processing) at the end of the advantageous section in the twenty-fifth embodiment, information on RWM held even after initialization processing at the end of the advantageous section, and setting change time It is a figure which shows the information on RWM cleared by an initialization process (2nd initialization process). (A) shows a modification of the numerical table (1) of FIG. 160, (b) shows the transition of the advantageous section and the presence or absence of the advantageous section display LED lighting at the time of winning the rare role of FIG. 168 (b). It is a figure which shows the modification of. (A) shows a modification of the numerical table (1) of FIG. 160, (b) shows the transition of the advantageous section and the presence or absence of the advantageous section display LED lighting at the time of winning the rare role of FIG. 168 (b). It is a figure which shows the modification of. (A) shows a modification of the numerical table (1) of FIG. 160, (b) shows the transition of the advantageous section and the presence or absence of the advantageous section display LED lighting at the time of winning the rare role of FIG. 168 (b). It is a figure which shows the modification of. It is a figure which shows the management information displayed by management information display LED in 26th Embodiment. It is a figure showing storage area (1) of RWM53 in a 26th embodiment. It is a figure which shows the storage area (2) of RWM53 in 26th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the blink display conditions of the identification segment in the 26th Embodiment, and a ratio segment. It is a flowchart which shows the program start (M_PRG_START) in 26th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the setting change process (M_RANK_SET) in 26th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the power supply reset process (M_POWER_ON) in 26th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing (M_MAIN) in 26th Embodiment. (A) is a flowchart which shows payout number update in a 26th embodiment. (B) is a flowchart showing an interrupt wait (C_INTR_WAIT) in the twenty-sixth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the interrupt processing (I_INTR) in 26th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ratio set process (S_RATE_SET) in 26th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows count upper limit check (S_LIMIT_CHK) in 26th Embodiment. It is a flow chart showing the number-of-games count (S_GAME_CNT) in the twenty-sixth embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows count up (S_CNT_UP) in a 26th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the advantageous section game frequency count (S_ATGAME_CNT) in 26th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the number-of-payouts sheet count (S_PAYOUT_CNT) in a twenty-sixth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the delivery number setting (S_PAYOUT_SET) in 26th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ring buffer set (S_RINGADR_SET) in 26th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the gift item payout number count (S_BNSPAY_CNT) in a 26th embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the continuous winning combination payout number count (S_RBPAY_CNT) in 26th Embodiment. In the twenty-sixth embodiment, (A) shows a ratio calculation RWM address table (TBL_ADR_CAL) stored in the ROM, and (B) shows a specific ROM storage area (address and data). FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the ratio calculation process (S_CAL_SET) in 26th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the calculated value set (S_VALUE_SET) in 26th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows ratio calculation execution (S_CAL_EXE) in 26th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ring buffer number update (S_RINGNO_SET) in 26th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY) in 26th Embodiment. It is a flow chart showing blink request flag generation (S_LED_FLASH) in a twenty-sixth embodiment. It is a figure which shows the blink / non-corresponding item determination value table (TBL_SEG_FLASH) in 26th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ratio display timer update (S_RATE_TIME) in 26th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the ratio display process (S_LED_OUT) in 26th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the blink bit test | inspection frequency table (TBL_FLASH_CHK). It is a flowchart which shows the ratio set process (S_RATE_SET) in 27th Embodiment (1). It is a flowchart which shows ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY) in 27th Embodiment (1). It is a flowchart which shows ratio calculation management (S_CAL_CTL) in 27th Embodiment (1). It is a flowchart which shows the ratio calculation process (S_CAL_SET) in 27th Embodiment (1). It is a flowchart which shows the main processing (M_MAIN) in 27th Embodiment (2). It is a flowchart which shows the ratio set process (S_RATE_SET) in 27th Embodiment (2). It is a flowchart which shows the setting change process (M_RANK_SET) in 27th Embodiment (3). It is a flowchart which shows power-on time ratio calculation (S_CAL_PWON) in 27th Embodiment (3). It is a flowchart which shows the main processing (M_MAIN) in 27th Embodiment (3). FIG. 202 is a flowchart showing another example of processing in step S2400 and subsequent steps (modification of the twenty-sixth embodiment). It is a figure which shows the address of the data memorize | stored in the use area | region of RWM in 28th Embodiment, a label, and the content. It is a figure which shows LED segment table 1 and 2 memorize | stored in the use area | region of ROM in 28th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the data and address of LED segment table 1 and 2 in 28th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the address of the pushing order designation | designated number table in 28th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the setting change process (M_RANK_SET) in 28th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing (M_MAIN) in 28th Embodiment. It is a flow chart showing push order indication number set processing (M_ORD_INF) in the twenty-eighth embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the medal payout number update process in 28th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the medal payout processing (MS_WIN_PAY) by winning in a 28th embodiment. (1) is a diagram showing a state where "88" (during setting change) is displayed on the acquisition number display LED, and (2) indicates "= 1" (first left stop) on the acquisition number display LED (3) is a diagram showing a state in which "dE" (front door opened) is displayed on the acquisition number display LED, and (4) is a diagram showing "E1" on the acquisition number display LED (5) is a diagram showing a state in which the stored number “50” is displayed on the stored number display LED and the acquired number “9” is displayed on the acquired number display LED. FIG. It is a figure which shows the address of the data memorize | stored in the use area | region of RWM in 29th Embodiment, a label, and the content. It is a figure which shows the relationship of the setting value data in setting of a 29th embodiment, setting value display data, and setting value display. It is a flow chart which shows setting change processing (M_RANK_SET) in a twenty-ninth embodiment. It is a flow chart which shows setting value display data set processing in a twenty-ninth embodiment. (1) is a figure which shows the state which displayed setting value "1"-"6" on the digit 4, (2) displayed "= 1" (left first stop) on the acquisition number display LED It is a figure which shows a state, (3) is a figure which shows the state which displayed acquisition number "9" on the acquisition number display LED. FIG. 40 is a diagram showing the relationship between push order instruction numbers, push order instruction information, and advantageous push orders according to modification examples of the twenty-eighth and twenty-ninth embodiments. It is a figure which shows the relationship between segment AG in the modification of 28th and 29th embodiment, and bit 0-6. FIG. 40 is a view showing the relationship among push order instruction numbers, display data, digit displays and advantageous push orders according to modification examples of the twenty-eighth and twenty-ninth embodiments. FIG. 40 is a diagram showing the relationship between next operation instruction information, display data, digit display, and a stop switch to be operated next in the twenty-eighth and twenty-ninth modified examples. It is the figure which illustrated the relationship of the condition apparatus number in the modification of 28th and 29th embodiment, display data, the display of a digit, and the favorable pushing order about the condition apparatus numbers 11-22. It is a flowchart which shows the setting change process (M_RANK_SET) in the modification of 29th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the storage area of RWM regarding 30th Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing in 30th Embodiment. FIG. 244 is a flowchart showing the game start set (M_GAME_SET) in step S2701. In FIG. 245, it is a flowchart showing the advantageous segment setting (M_ADV_SET) in step S2724. FIG. 246 is a flowchart showing 2-byte countdown (M_W_CNT_DOWN) in step S2742. FIG. 246 is a flowchart showing RWM initialization (M_RWM_CLEAR) in step S2746. In FIG. 244, it is a flowchart which shows the advantageous section classification update in step S2703. FIG. 244 is a flowchart showing a push order designation number set (M_ORD_INF) in step S2704. FIG. 250 is a flowchart showing updating of the maximum payout notification flag in step S2793 in FIG. FIG. 244 is a flowchart showing the game end check process (M_GAME_SET) in step S2705. 252 is a flowchart showing preparation for ending an advantageous section (M_ADVEND_STNBY) in step S2823 in FIG. FIG. 31 is a diagram (slump graph) illustrating the concept of the difference number counter value in the thirty-first embodiment, in which (a) shows Example 1 and (b) shows Example 2. FIG. In 31st Embodiment, it is a figure (slump flag) which shows the relationship of a difference number counter value and an advantageous section, (a) shows Example 1, (b) shows Example 2. FIG. It is a figure which shows the storage area of RWM53 relevant to 31st Embodiment. In the thirty-first embodiment, (a) Example 1 is a diagram showing a calculation method on the assumption that the number of automatic bets is not the number of payouts, and (b) Example 2 is an example in which the number of automatic bets is the number of payouts. It is a figure which shows the calculation method. FIG. 31 is a diagram for explaining update timings of difference number counter values in the thirty-first embodiment, in which (a) shows Example 1 and (b) shows Example 2. FIG. FIG. 35 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between calculation of difference number counter values and the number of bytes of each data in the thirty-first embodiment, where (a) Example 1 shows the case where calculation is performed as in Example 1 of FIG. b) Example 2 shows the case where calculation is performed as in Example 2 of FIG. FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a relationship between a difference number counter value and a sub display in a thirty first embodiment. In the thirty-first embodiment, it is a diagram showing an example in which notification modes are made different.

In the present specification, the meanings of the terms are as follows.
"RT" means that the type (number) of the condition devices (1BB, replay, small part) to be drawn and its winning probability is unique, and "RT transition" means one of By shifting from one RT to another RT, it means that the winning probability of at least one condition device (for example, replay) to be selected for lottery changes. Therefore, the winning probability for each replay type in one RT is a value specific to that RT, and the winning probability for each replay type will be the same for one RT and the other RT. Absent. However, there is no problem that the sum of winning probability of replay becomes the same between one RT and the other RT.

The RT includes non-RT, RT1, RT2, RT3 and RT4 in this embodiment (FIG. 22 described later).
Note that “non-RT” does not mean that it is not included in the concept of RT, and is equivalent to “RT0”. Thus, the term "RT" as used herein includes non-RT.
In the present embodiment, the non-internal part is non-RT, RT1, RT2, or RT3 and the internal part is RT4. The types (numbers) of replays to be drawn by lottery and the winning probability thereof differ between inside and outside.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, 1BBA operation and 1BBB operation are provided as RTs during special game. In this embodiment, each of the 1BBA operation and the 1BBB operation performs at least one replay lottery.
The "combination" is a target of a lottery, and in the present embodiment, the condition device is drawn, and the condition device is set to include at least one combination. Therefore, when any condition device is won, at least one winning combination will be won (with at least one winning combination).

The condition device to be drawn has “subject condition device” that includes any of “special roles (roles)”, and “winning and replay condition device” that includes any of small part or replay. .
The item condition device includes any one of the special roles. When special roles are won, devices (SB (single bonus), RB (type 1 special role; regular bonus), CB (type 2 special role; challenge bonus), etc. that are devices for facilitating the winning of small roles, 1BB (type 1 continuous action device; type 1 big bonus), 2BB (second type continuous action device; type 2 big bonus) operate.

Here, the first-class product continuous operation device (1BB) refers to a device capable of operating the first-class special service (RB) continuously.
Similarly, a second-class continuous acting device (2BB) refers to a device capable of continuously operating a second-class special role (CB).
In this embodiment, only 1BB is provided as a special role, and has two types (1BBA and 1BBB) described later.
During the operation of 1BB, the RB ends when either of the two winning combinations or two games is satisfied, and after that, the RB is operated again on the condition that the end condition of the 1BB operation is not satisfied. .
Further, in the present embodiment, SB, CB, and 2BB are not provided.

On the other hand, the "winning and replay condition device" includes either a small winning combination or replay that does not carry over the winning information after the next game.
In the present embodiment, winning and replay condition device numbers “0” to “30” are provided.
On the other hand, the "item condition device" includes any of RB, 1BB and 2BB which can carry over the winning information after the next game and SB and CB which do not carry over the winning information after the next game. In the present embodiment, only 1BB (1BBA and 1BBB) capable of carrying the winning information after the next game is provided.

When winning a prize condition device that includes any of the special parts that can carry over the winning information after the next game, the special prize winning information until the combination of the symbols corresponding to the special part is stopped on the effective line Carry over to the next game.
Then, a game in which the winning condition information device including a special part that can carry over after the next game is not won is referred to as "non-internal". On the other hand, when the combination condition symbol device is won, but the combination of symbols corresponding to the special combination won is not yet stopped on the effective line, that is, "inside" the game carrying over the special combination winning information It is said. In the present embodiment, although the game winning the item condition device is included in “non-internal”, the game winning the item condition device may be included in “internal”.

  The “preferred operation mode” of the stop switch is an operation mode in which the player with a large number of payouts wins in a game where advantage / convenience occurs in the game result (combination of symbols stopped on the effective line) by the operation mode of the stop switch. Alternatively, it refers to an operation mode in which a player who does not shift (promotion) to an advantageous RT or does not shift (fall) to a disadvantageous RT wins. The "favorable operation mode" is also referred to as the correct operation mode.

The "operation mode" is a concept that indicates the pressing order of the stop switch and / or the operation timing (the timing at which the target symbol is pressed by the stop switch to stop on the effective line).
And, in the present embodiment, “a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch” is a game when a push order bell (small group B, small group C group) is won, double replay (replay B group, replay C group) ) It corresponds to the game when winning.

Furthermore, the bell (small part) that wins when the stop switch is operated in the correct order in the correct order is selected when the push order bell is won, the number of payouts out of the bells of high eyed bells (small combinations of small wins). It may be referred to as a bell (small part) in which the combination of the symbols, such as the most small part, is displayed most advantageously to the player.
On the other hand, when the stop switch is operated in the incorrect push order when the push order bell is won, there are cases in which the low-angle bell wins and the case in which the winning combination occurs according to the operation timing of the stop switch. In the present embodiment, the stopped eyes (combination of symbols on the effective line, also referred to as "spilled eyes") displayed at the time of dropping of the role are referred to as "pattern symbols" in this embodiment, and have pattern symbols 01 to 03.

On the other hand, when replay replay is won (Replay B, Replay C), combinations of different symbols are stopped and displayed according to the pressing order of the stop switch, but no replay occurs when replay is won (PB = 1 described later) ").
In this case, a combination of symbols advantageous to the player, for example, a combination of symbols for transitioning to an RT having a higher probability of winning a replay, or a pressing order for stopping and displaying a combination of symbols for maintaining an RT having a high probability of winning a replay It is called "pushing order" or "promotion pushing order".
On the other hand, the press order in which the combination of symbols transitioning from a favorable RT (for example, a replay winning probability is high) to a disadvantageous RT (for example, a low replay winning probability) for the player is stopped is displayed. It is called "pushing order" or "falling (demotion) pushing order".

The "instruction function" means a function of displaying (notifying) the "advantage operation mode" described above to the player.
In other words, the "instruction function" refers to a device that facilitates winning. On the other hand, when the "instruction function" is a device for facilitating the winning of a small winning combination, the "instruction function" displays the correct push order for winning the correct push order (high-order bell) when the push order bell is won. Replay does not include displaying the order of pressing the correct answer for winning an advantageous replay (replay for transitioning to an advantageous RT, or replay for maintaining an advantageous RT) at the time of replay double winning.

In the following embodiment, the "instruction function" refers to the function of displaying the "advantage operation mode" to the player, and the "operation of the instruction function" is to display the correct push order when the push order bell is won. It is used in the sense that it includes both displaying the correct pressing order which wins the replay which is advantageous at the time of and replay replay winning combination.
In addition, showing "instructions" contents to the player is "display", and notifying the player of instruction contents is "notification". Therefore, the "instruction function" is also a "display function" and a "notification function".
Also, "instruction" is a concept having the meaning of "instruction", but the player is not charged any penalty even if he does not follow "instruction". However, if the correct pressing order displayed by the operation of the instruction function is not obeyed, the high order bell may not be won when the winning order bell is won, or the disadvantageous replay may be won when the replay duplicate is won.

In addition, the “instruction function operation game” is a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (a conditional device having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch (small combination B group, small combination C group, replay B group, replay C Group game) means a game in which the instruction function is operated. For this reason, the instruction function operation game is one game. The instruction function operation game may be also referred to as a notification game.
Moreover, even if it is a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, when the instruction function is not activated, the game is not the instruction function operated game.

In the present embodiment, the “game section” includes the “normal section”, the “standby section”, and the “favorable section”.
First, the "normal section" refers to a signal relating to an instruction function, specifically, a pressing order instruction number to be described later, winning and replay condition device number (information capable of determining the correct pressing order) peripheral substrate (for example, sub-control It refers to a game section that prohibits transmission to a substrate), and does not affect the performance related to the instruction function at all (does not operate the instruction function). In other words, the normal section is a game section in which the instruction function can not be operated, and a game section in which the display of the advantageous operation mode can not be performed. However, in addition to the lottery of the condition device (combination), it is possible to determine whether or not to shift to the advantageous section (lottery, etc.).
In the normal section, the indication function can not be activated, so that pressing order indication information can not be displayed on a predetermined display device (such as an LED) electrically connected to the main control board. Since such a signal is not transmitted to the peripheral substrate, display (notification) of an advantageous operation mode can not be performed by the image display device electrically connected to the sub control substrate described later.

When making a transition decision to an advantageous section in a normal section, it is necessary to make a transition decision in association with a winning conditional device (association).
Here, to determine the transition to the advantageous section in association with the condition apparatus that has won means to decide whether or not to shift to the advantageous section simultaneously with the drawing of the conditional apparatus, and to have won the specific condition apparatus. The case where the lottery of whether or not to shift to the advantageous section on the condition of is separately performed may be mentioned.

  In the present embodiment, at the same time as the drawing of the condition device, it is set to determine whether to shift to the advantageous section. Further, the length (the number of games) of the advantageous section to be determined (winning) differs depending on the condition device that has won. For example, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section when winning in 1BB which will be described later, when it is counted as the initial value after the end of the 1BB game, it becomes an advantageous section of 50 games, When it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, there is a case where it becomes the advantageous section only to execute one indication function operation game (except for the game winning the small winning combination C group, the replay B group and the replay C group). is there.

Furthermore, when determining the transition to the advantageous section in association with the condition apparatus that has won, the conditional apparatus that can be determined to shift to the advantageous section (when performing lottery for whether to shift to the advantageous section separately The condition device serving as the condition for performing the lottery is set so as to satisfy the condition device that the winning probability does not have the setting difference.
Here, the “set value” is to determine the player's degree of advantage, and the higher the set value (or the lower the set value), the more advantageous it is for the player (the expected value of the payout is higher). ) Is set. For example, six levels of setting 1 to setting 6 are provided as setting values.
And "the condition device which does not have a setting difference in the winning probability (setting common)" refers to a condition device in which the winning probability is the same in all the settings.

  It should be noted that it is only possible to determine the transition to the advantageous section in association with the winning of the condition device having no setting difference in the winning probability, and at the time of winning the condition device having no setting difference in the winning probability. It does not mean that you should always shift to the advantageous section, or you must always draw the transition to the advantageous section. It is of course possible not to make any decision regarding the advantageous section even when the condition device is selected with no setting difference in the selection probability.

  On the other hand, "a conditional device having a setting difference in the winning probability (by setting)" indicates that the winning probability is not the same for all settings. For example, in addition to the case where the winning probability is different among all the setting values, the winning probability of one of the setting values is different from the winning probability of another one of the setting values (for example, the winning probability of setting 1 to setting 5) Is “x”, and the winning probability of setting 6 is “y (≠ x)”.

Further, the "advantage zone" is a game zone having a performance related to the instruction function (which may operate the instruction function). Specifically, when the instruction function is operated, the instruction content in the main control board This refers to a game section which can transmit a signal relating to an instruction function to the sub control board only when the pressing order instruction information is displayed so that (advantage operation mode) can be identified. In other words, the advantageous section is a game section in which the instruction function can be operated (the instruction function may be operated), and in which the advantageous operation mode can be displayed (or displayed). The game during the advantageous section may also be referred to as a notification-enabled game. Conversely, the game during the normal section or the game during the standby section may be referred to as a notification impossible game.
However, the sub control board can not output an instruction content issued by the main control board or an effect contrary to the received signal relating to the instruction function.

  And, in the advantageous section of this embodiment, it is possible to obtain the maximum payout number ("9") corresponding to the specified number ("3") in the game (when the character is inactive) capable of executing the instruction function operation game. In a game in which a condition device (small part B group) having an advantageous operation mode is won, at least one game or more is performed to instruct the operation mode of the stop switch in which the part (small part 01) related to the maximum payout number wins It is necessary.

Specifically, in the present embodiment, a small winning combination B group and a small winning combination C group are provided as a so-called pushing order bell condition device.
In the small combination B group, the small combination 01, which is a nine-piece combination, always wins when the pressing order is correct, and when the pressing order is incorrect, the one-piece combination can be won (may be dropped).
On the other hand, in the small winning combination C group, the small winning combination 02, which is the three winning combination, always wins when the pressing order is correct, and the single winning combination always wins when the pressing order is incorrect.

And, the game when executing the indication function operation game is at the time of bonus non-operation (normal game), the specified number (the number of medals to be inserted) in this normal game is "3".
Furthermore, the maximum payout number when the specified number is “3” is “9” (at the time of the small winning combination 01).
For this reason, in the advantageous section of this embodiment, the correct pressing order for winning the small winning combination 01 is achieved by activating the instruction function when the condition device (small winning combination B group) in which the small winning combination 01 can be won is won. It is necessary to execute at least one game to be displayed.

In addition, during the advantageous section, in the game in which the condition device having the advantageous operation mode is won, the indication function may be always operated to display the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch.
On the other hand, even in the advantageous section, even if the game is won in the condition device having the advantageous operation mode, it does not matter if the indication function is not activated.

Furthermore, the "standby section" refers to a game section when it has not been shifted to the advantageous section after deciding to shift to the advantageous section. The waiting section may or may not be provided. That is, the normal section may shift to the advantageous section, or the normal section may shift to the standby section, and further, the standby section may shift to the advantageous section. Note that it is not possible to shift from the advantageous section to the standby section, and always shifts to the normal section after the advantageous section ends. The standby section can be shifted only when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of the condition device that includes the special part that can be carried over after the next game, and corresponds to the special part You must finish by all means in the game where the combination of the symbols is displayed. Of course, it may be finished before the game in which the combination of symbols corresponding to the special part is displayed.
Further, in the standby section, it is not possible to activate the indication function in the main control board or to transmit a signal relating to the indication function to the sub control board. In the case where the instruction function is activated in the main control board and a signal related to the instruction function is transmitted to the sub control board, it is a condition that it is in an advantageous section.

In the advantageous section of this embodiment, the case of executing a single command function operation game (except for the game winning the small winning combination C group, the replay B group and the replay C group) and the case of executing the predetermined number of games Have.
In an advantageous section in which a predetermined number of games are executed, when the condition device having the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch is won, the instruction function is basically operated.
In addition, the termination condition of the advantageous section is not to determine the number of games described above, for example, a lottery is performed at a predetermined timing, and the advantageous section is terminated when the lottery is won, etc. May be

Alternatively, just by shifting to the advantageous section, the execution condition of the instruction function operation game is not satisfied, and it is determined by lottery or the like whether or not the instruction function operational game is to be executed under the condition that it is in the advantageous section. When it is determined to execute the command function operation game, the command function operation game may be executed until a predetermined end condition is satisfied.
In addition, during the advantageous section, it is determined (lottery, etc.) whether or not the (remaining) number of games of the advantageous section is to be added (added).
In addition, the upper limit game frequency is defined in the advantageous zone, and when the upper limit game frequency is reached, the advantageous zone is always ended at that point even if it has the remaining game frequency of the advantageous zone (limiter ), Shift to the normal section.

  Furthermore, when the upper limit game number is reached, the condition device (small part B group) having an advantageous operation mode capable of acquiring the maximum payout number ("9" sheets) may not have been won even once. Even if the combination (small part 01) related to the maximum payout number does not indicate the operation mode of the stop switch to be won at one time, it always ends the advantageous section at that point (the operation of the limiter), Transfer to the section.

As described above, although the content partially overlaps with the above, the advantageous section in this embodiment is defined as follows.
a) In the normal section, the lottery whether to shift to the advantageous section (even when determined simultaneously with the drawing of the condition device) must be linked to the condition device having no setting difference. That is, the transition probability to the advantageous section should not differ according to the set value.
b) The addition lottery for the advantageous section (even if it is determined without drawing) should not refer to the set value. When adding an advantageous section based on the condition device that has won, it is necessary to link to a condition device that does not have a setting difference.

c) Special role in the regular section (means special role to carry over the winning. The same shall apply in this paragraph below.) Inside or during the special role operation, the transfer lot drawing of the advantageous section (also determined simultaneously with the drawing of the condition device Do not go). In addition, within the special role, even during the advantageous section, it is not allowed to carry out the lottery for the addition of the advantageous section. Furthermore, when the special equipment is selected and the special equipment is activated during the special equipment, the special equipment is selected, and the special area additional lottery is performed while the special equipment is in operation. Do not go too.
Here, conventionally, since it was common to perform the AT lottery even after becoming inside, even if becoming inside, without waiting for a special part to win, while keeping inside, waiting for AT winning It was possible. However, in recent years, it has been considered desirable not to play AT's lottery inside. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the special role is won in the normal section and the inside becomes inside, it is determined that the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section can not be made in the inside. Furthermore, when the special role is won during the advantageous section and the inside becomes inside, it is determined that the advantageous section should not be added inside.

d) When it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, in principle, it is shifted from the next game to the advantageous section, and until the advantageous section starts (in the present embodiment, it is determined that the next game bet is possible) In the next game, it is necessary to indicate to the player that it is an advantageous section from the next game (such as lighting of a lamp indicating that it is an advantageous section).
Here, in the prior art, it is common for a certain number of times of games to be consumed (by passing a sign) after the AT is won after the AT is won after the AT is won. The Also, for example, when drawing the AT based on the winning of the role of rare, if the player plays the role of rare in the game, the player is elected to the role of rare and that the AT is drawn based on the role of the rare. Even if the player wins the AT by winning the rare character, the player may stop the game before the AT is notified. After that, when another person played a game on that platform, there was a problem that the other person might enjoy the benefit of AT (the previous player has contributed). However, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, in principle, it is indicated that it is the advantageous section from the next game until the advantageous section starts (in the present embodiment, until the bet of the next game becomes possible). Therefore, the above problems do not occur.
As described above, conventionally, the AT winning is notified after the AT winning (in particular, after passing through the precursor of the AT), whereas in the present embodiment, in principle, the next game bet is possible until it becomes possible. It is different in that it indicates that it is an advantageous section before the advantageous section is started.
Furthermore, although the notification of the conventional AT winning is only performed as a part of the effect, it is displayed to the player that it is an advantageous section from the next game in the present embodiment (a lamp showing an advantageous section And the like) is different in that it is performed to solve the above problem.

Further, the advantageous section ratio refers to the ratio of staying in the advantageous section with respect to all the game sections (the normal section + the waiting section + the advantageous section). Specifically, for example, when the number of games played in all the game sections is "1000" and the number of games played in the advantageous section therebetween is "700", the advantageous section percentage is "70%".
Note that, as described later, in the present embodiment, an advantageous segment ratio is displayed, but the displayed advantageous segment ratio is a numerical value obtained by rounding off the decimal part as a result of calculation.

The draw-in rate (PB) is the probability that the desired pattern to be stopped on the active line can be stopped on the effective line from the moment the stop switch is operated to the time the reel stops. Show.
Then, if the stop switch is not operated at an appropriate reel position (at an operation timing at which the target symbol can be stopped on the active line within the range of the maximum number of moving symbols), the target symbol is stopped on the active line (up to the active line The fact that it can not be pulled in is referred to as "PB (retraction rate) ≠ 1".
On the other hand, regardless of the position of the reel at the moment the stop switch is operated (regardless of the operation timing of the stop switch), the target symbol can always be stopped (pulled in) to the effective line. It is called "1".

And "PB = 1" has a case where all reels are such and a case where it is so only for a specific (partial) reel.
In the present embodiment, the maximum moving number of frames is set to "4", and when the target symbols are arranged at an interval of 5 symbols or less, "PB = 1" and more than 5 symbols (6 symbols or more) When arranged at intervals, "PB ≠ 1". In particular, the number of symbols of the reel according to the present embodiment is set to "20", and if four symbols are arranged at intervals of 5 symbols, the symbol is "PB = 1".

If the game proceeds with "N-1" game, "N" game, "N + 1" game, ... ("N" is an integer of 2 or more), the current game is "N" When it is an eye, the "N" game is referred to as the "current game". Also, the game of the "N-1" game eye is referred to as the "previous game".
On the other hand, the game of the “N + 1” game eye is referred to as “next game”.

"Displacement rate" is a value calculated by medal payout number expected value / medal insertion number, and when it is "1", it is a current maintenance state, and when it exceeds "1", medals increase. In the state, when it is less than "1", the medal is in the state of decreasing.
Further, the “expected value for the number of medals paid out” is calculated as the sum of “probability of winning the winning combination × number of paid out” for all the winning combinations to be drawn in the game.

  Furthermore, the "difference number" is a value calculated by "the number of medals paid out (the number of medals actually paid out or the expected number of medals paid out)-the number of inserted medals". When the medal insertion number is “3”, if the medal payout number (expected value) is “3”, the difference number is “± 0”, and if the medal payout number (expected value) exceeds “3”, When the difference number exceeds “0” and the medal payout number (expected value) is less than “3”, the difference number is less than “0”.

"Bet" means betting on medals (game media) to play a game. In the present embodiment, the number of bets that can be played (prescribed number) is set to 3 at the time when the bonus is not in operation (during normal game). On the other hand, while the bonus (1BB) is in operation, the number of bets (prescribed number) available for playing is set to two. In order to bet medals, the actual medals are maintained from the medal insertion port, or the bet switch is operated to bet on the stored medals.
In the present embodiment, the “gaming medium” is a medal, but in the case of, for example, an enclosed type gaming machine, electronic information is used as the gaming medium. For example, when money (banknote) is inserted into the lending machine, "electronic information" is converted into electronic information corresponding to the money, and part or all of the electronic information is played on the gaming machine Can be stored in a game machine as a game medium for performing the game.
In addition, since it is possible to apply to not only the slot machine but also the ball and ball game machine about the display of the feature ratio etc which will be mentioned later, not only the medal but also the game ball is included in the "game media" Be

  Unlike the above-mentioned "bet", "reserved" refers to crediting a medal inside the slot machine 10. Although "storage" may be used in a meaning including a bet, in the present specification, when "storage" is used, it is used in a meaning not including a "bet". In the present embodiment, the maximum (limit) number of sheets that can be stored is set to “50” regardless of the gaming state or the like. When the small part wins and the medal is paid out, the medal is stored. In addition, when the medals have been placed in maintenance through the medal insertion slot, when the maximum number has been bet, the inserted medals are stored. Therefore, when the medals are placed on the medal insertion slot, there is a case in which the bet is placed and a case in which the medals are stored.

  Note that the slot machine 10 "pays out" the medals to the player is equivalent to the player "gains" the medals. Therefore, in the viewpoint of the slot machine 10, it is "payout of medals", and in the viewpoint of the player, it is "acquisition of medals". For this reason, there are cases where it is called "payout (number of sheets)" (for example, the payout means 67) and when it is called "acquired (number of sheets)" (for example, the number-of-earnings display LED 78).

In the present specification, a numerical value with “B” at the end (especially, 8 bits) means a binary number. Similarly, a number with an "H" at the end means a hexadecimal number. Specifically, for example, a numerical value indicating "16" in decimal is described as "00010000 (B)" in binary, and is described as "10 (H)" in hexadecimal. Moreover, about the numerical value which means a decimal number, it describes with "16 (D)" as needed.
However, when it is clear which of the binary number, the decimal number, and the hexadecimal number is clear, the end symbols of "B", "D" and "H" may be omitted, respectively.

Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings and the like.
First Embodiment
FIG. 1 is a block diagram showing an outline of control of the slot machine 10 in the present embodiment.
A main control board 50 and a sub control board 80 are provided as representative control boards provided in the slot machine 10.
The main control board 50 has an input port 51 and an output port 52, and includes the RWM 53, the ROM 54, the main CPU 55, and the like (not meant to include only those illustrated in FIG. 1).

In FIG. 1, the main control board 50 and peripheral devices for game progression including operation switches such as the bet switch 40 are electrically connected via the input port 51 or the output port 52. The input port 51 is a connection unit to which a signal such as an operation switch is input, and the output port 52 is a connection unit to transmit a signal to peripheral devices such as the motor 32.
In FIG. 1, peripheral devices for input are indicated by arrows directing signals from the peripheral devices to the main control board 50, and peripheral devices for output are arrows indicated from the main control board 50 to the peripheral devices. (The same applies to the sub control board 80).

The RWM 53 is a storage medium capable of storing (updating) various data (variables) based on the progress of a game or the like. Data (total number of games, etc.) necessary for displaying management information described later is stored in the RWM 53.
The ROM 54 is a storage medium for storing programs and various data (for example, data tables) necessary for the progress of the game.

The main CPU 55 refers to a CPU provided on the main control board 50, executes programs necessary for the progress of the game, performs calculations, etc. Specifically, lottery of the winning combination, drive control of the reel 31, and winning time To pay out, etc.
The main CPU 55 incorporates a register. In particular, in the present embodiment, a plurality of registers (for example, A register to L register, transmission register, etc.) are provided.

Further, on the main control board 50, an RWM 53, a ROM 54, an MPU including a main CPU 55, and a register are mounted. The RWM 53 and the ROM 54 may be provided outside as well as those mounted inside the MPU.
An MPU including an RWM 83, a ROM 84, and a sub CPU 85 is mounted on a sub control board 80 described later. The RWM 83 and the ROM 84 may be provided outside as well as those mounted inside the MPU.

In FIG. 1, the medal inserted from the medal insertion slot 43 is sent to the inside of the medal selector.
As shown in FIG. 1, the medal selector includes (but is not limited to) a passage sensor 43a, a blocker 45, and an insertion sensor 44, and is electrically connected to the main control board 50.
When a medal is inserted from the medal insertion slot 43, it is first detected by the passage sensor 43a.

  Furthermore, a blocker 45 is provided downstream of the passage sensor 43a. The blocker 45 is for permitting / disapproving the insertion of medals, and forms a medal passage for returning medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 43 from the payout opening when medal insertion is not permitted. Do. On the other hand, when the insertion of medals is permitted, a medal passage for guiding the medals inserted from the medal insertion slot 43 to the hopper 35 is formed.

  Here, the blocker 45 prohibits the insertion of the medal during the game (from the start of the rotation of the reel 31 to the stop of all the reels 31 and until the end of the payout corresponding to the winning combination when the combination is won). Do. That is, the blocker 45 permits the medals to be inserted at least when no game is played.

  A feed sensor 44 (a plurality of optical sensors) is provided on the further downstream side of the blocker 45. Therefore, after the medal inserted from the medal insertion slot 43 is detected by the passage sensor 43a, the medal is further detected by the insertion sensor 44.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 1, the main control board 50 has a bet switch 40, a start switch 41, (left, middle, right) stop switches 42, and a settlement switch 46 as electric switches operated by the player. Connected.
The bet switch 40 (40a or 40b) is a switch operated by the player when betting the stored medals for the current game. In this embodiment, a 1-bed switch 40a for inserting one medal and a 3-bed switch 40b for inserting three (maximum number or prescribed number) medals are provided.
In addition, you may provide not only this but the bet switch for 2 bets.

  In addition, although the specified number of this embodiment is set to three when the bonus is not in operation and two when the bonus is in operation, two medals when the 1-bed switch 40a is operated twice (pressed). Can be inserted, and when it is operated (pressed) three times, three medals can be inserted. In addition, while the prize is in operation, by operating the 3 bet switch 40b, it is possible to insert two (prescribed number) medals at a time.

The start switch 41 is a switch operated by the player when starting the reels 31 (all for left, middle and right).
Furthermore, three stop switches 42 are provided corresponding to the three (left, middle and right) reels 31, and are switches operated by the player when stopping the corresponding reels 31.
Further, the settlement switch 46 is a switch operated by the player when paying out (payout) medals bet and / or stored (credited) inside the slot machine 10.

Further, as shown in FIG. 1, a display substrate 75 is electrically connected to the main control substrate 50. In practice, a relay board is provided between the main control board 50 and the display board 75, and the main control board 50 and the relay board, and the relay board and the display board 75 are connected, as shown in the figure. In 1, the illustration of the relay board is omitted. As described above, the main control substrate 50 and the display substrate 75 may be directly connected by a harness or the like, but another substrate may be interposed between the two.
Furthermore, the control boards are not limited to being directly connected by a harness or the like, and may be connected via another separate board (relay board or the like). For example, one or more other substrates (relay substrate or the like) may be interposed between the main control substrate 50 and the sub control substrate 80.

  On the display substrate 75, a storage number display LED 76, an advantageous section display LED 77, and an acquisition number display LED 78 are mounted. These LEDs 76 to 78 are provided in the vicinity of the operation switch operated by the player, and are provided at a position where the player can always visually recognize. It is not necessary to provide all the LEDs 76 to 78 on one display substrate 75. For example, a plurality of display substrates 75 such as the display substrates 75A, 75B,. It is sufficient if any of the LEDs 76 to 78 are provided.

FIG. 2 shows the actual positional relationship (arrangement) of the storage number display LED 76, the advantageous section display LED 77, the acquisition number display LED 78, the settlement switch 46, the 1-bed switch 40a, and the 3-bed switch 40b on the front side of the slot machine 10. It is a top view.
Further, in FIG. 2, a display substrate 75 (indicated by a dotted line in FIG. 2) is disposed under the storage number display LED 76, the advantageous section display LED 77, and the acquisition number display LED 78 and inside the slot machine 10. ing.

The storage number display LED 76 is an LED for displaying the number of medals stored in the slot machine 10, and is composed of a digit 1 for displaying the upper digit and a digit 2 for displaying the lower digit. That is, the storage number display LED 76 displays two digits.
Here, “digit” means a display unit (display), and in the present embodiment, in particular, it comprises a seven-segment LED (so-called 7-segment) and a segment DP (decimal point; dot-like LED for displaying a decimal point) It is done.
As shown in FIG. 2, the number of digits mounted on the display substrate 75 is four of the digits 1 to 4, but in the present embodiment, nine digits are provided, and the other digits are the main control substrate It is mounted on the 60 (details will be described later).

The storage number display LED 76 displays the number of medals stored, and in the present embodiment, displays a number between “00” and “50” (integer).
For example, when no medals are betted and stored, the display of the stored number display LED 76 is “00”. Here, when one medal is maintained, the one medal is bet for the game. When two more cards are additionally inserted, three medals are bet for the game (in the case where the specified number is three). Therefore, when the number of medals that have been maintained is three, the medal is bet and is not stored. When the medals are further maintained, the medals are stored in the slot machine 10, and the number of stored medals is displayed by the stored number display LED 76.

  In the present embodiment, up to 50 medals can be stored. Therefore, when the number of stored sheets reaches 50 (when "50" is displayed on the stored number display LED 76), no more medals are stored. In this state, temporarily, when the medals are treated from the medal insertion slot 43, the medals that have been kept by the blocker 45 are returned from the payout slot.

  Here, when a combination with a medal payout (except for replay) is won and medals corresponding to that combination are paid out, priority is given to the inside of the slot machine 10 over the actual payout of medals from the payout opening. Medals are stored. For example, in the case where the number of stored sheets before the winning combination is “10”, when the nine-piece winning combination is won, the display of the stored number display LED 76 is updated from “10” to “19”.

  Furthermore, when the number of stored sheets exceeds “50” at the time of winning of the winning combination, the amount exceeding “50” is actually paid out from the payout port. For example, when the number of stored pieces is “47” before winning a winning combination, and nine medals are paid out by winning a combination of 9 winnings, 3 pieces are stored, the number of stored pieces becomes “50”, and “50” is exceeded. About six pieces are paid out from the payout opening.

  Furthermore, at the time of winning a replay, storage and payout of medals are not performed, and the number of medals betted in the game is automatically betted for replay. For example, when the player plays the game with 3 bets (3 sheets) and a replay is won, 3 medals are automatically betted. And, since the automatic bet based on the replay winning is the insertion of the medal for performing the re-game, the medal can not be settled even if the settlement (return) operation is performed thereafter.

  In the "rules related to the authorization of the gaming machine and the verification of the type (hereinafter simply referred to as" rule ")", when the combination of symbols corresponding to the replay has stopped on the effective line, the condition device It is interpreted that it is an operation and not a "winning". However, in the present application (this specification and the like), Replay is also treated as one of the roles (Replay Role), and the fact that the combination of symbols corresponding to Replay has stopped on the effective line is referred to as "Replay win".

  Further, the advantageous section display LED 77 is constituted by the segment DP of the digit 2. The advantageous section display LED 77 is controlled to be turned off in the normal section and the standby section, but is controlled to be lit during the advantageous section. Therefore, if the player confirms the on / off state of the advantageous section display LED 77, it can judge at a glance whether or not the player is currently staying in the advantageous section.

  In particular, as shown in FIG. 2, the advantageous section display LED 77 is located in the vicinity of the settlement switch 46. Therefore, when ending the game, the player operates the settlement switch 46 when having a stored medal (for example, when "10" is displayed on the stored number display LED 76), but at that time, It can be easily confirmed by the extinguished state of the advantageous section display LED 77 that the advantageous section is not in progress. Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when it is determined to shift to the advantageous section, in principle, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on before the settlement switch 46 becomes operable. This makes it possible to prevent the player from ending the game contrary to the player's will, despite being in the advantageous section (or from the next game to the advantageous section).

Furthermore, the number-of-earnings display LED 78 is an LED for displaying the number of payouts (the number of players who have won) when winning a winning combination, and is composed of a digit 3 for displaying the upper digit and a digit 4 for displaying the lower digit. ing. Therefore, the acquisition number display LED 78 displays two digits as in the case of the storage number display LED 76.
When there are no medals to be paid out, the number-of-earnings display LED 78 is "00". However, for example, when nine medals are paid out and nine medals are paid out, the display of the number-of-earnings display LED 78 is It changes from "00" to "09".
The acquisition number display LED 78 may be controlled to be turned off when there is no medal to be paid out. Alternatively, the upper digit (digit 3) may be turned off and only the lower digit (digit 4) may be displayed as "0".

Moreover, although the acquisition number display LED 78 normally displays the acquisition number, it functions as an LED that displays the content (type) of the error when an error occurs. For example, when the front door of the slot machine 10 is opened and a door open error is detected, an acquisition number display LED 78 displays an error number “dE”.
Furthermore, the acquisition number display LED 78 functions as an LED for displaying an advantageous operation mode (push order instruction information) when the instruction function is activated. Therefore, the acquisition number display LED 78 in the present embodiment is an LED that doubles as an acquisition number, an error content, and an advantageous operation mode display by the operation of the indication function. The notification of the advantageous push order when the instruction function is activated is also performed by the image display device 23 connected to the sub control substrate 80.

Here, in the present specification, the display of the push order using the acquired number display LED 78 by the main control board 50 is referred to as “operation of the instruction function”, and the display of the push order by the sub control board 80 is “notification of push order”. It is called.
Further, as shown in FIG. 20 described later, a number corresponding to an advantageous push order is referred to as a “push order instruction number”.
Furthermore, it is the pushing order displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 by the operation of the instructing function, and information such as “= 1” in FIG. 20, for example, is referred to as “pushing order instruction information”. That is, pressing order instruction information is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 by the operation of the instruction function.

FIG. 3 is a plan view showing other digits (digits 5 to 9) mounted on the main control board 50. As shown in FIG. In FIG. 3, (a) shows Example 1, and (b) shows Example 2.
The main control substrate 50 is housed in a transparent substrate case 16 and sealed in terms of security. Then, the main control board 50 can not be accessed (the board case 16 can not be opened) unless the caulking portion 16a of the board case 16 is broken. In FIG. 3, the main control boards 50 (50A and 50B) are illustrated as seen through without being blocked by the board case 16. The caulking portion 16a may also be referred to as a sealing member.

On the substrate case 16 are affixed stickers that show the certification of the main control substrate 50, the serial number, the unsealing record of the caulking portion 16a, etc. Digits 5 to 9 are mounted on the main control board 50 so as not to occur.
The digit 5 is a setting value display LED 73, and is an LED for displaying the current setting value at the time of setting confirmation or setting change. The set value display LED 73 does not necessarily have to be mounted on the main control board 50, and can be used also as, for example, the back side of the front door, the storage number display LED 76 or the acquisition number display LED 78.

Digits 6 to 9 are management information display LEDs 74. The management information display LED 74 is, for example, in FIG. 3 (a) for one digit housing in order to secure its visibility.
It is preferable to design to a size of width m1 × length nn36 square millimeters. Alternatively, when the management information display LED 74 is a single horizontally long (width m2) digit housing,
It is preferable to design to a size of width m2 × length n = 4 (number of digits) 3636 square millimeters.

In FIG. 3, in the example 1 of (a), the number of the main control board 50 is one, but the present invention is not limited thereto. As in the example 2 of (b) And each substrate may be connected by a harness or the like. However, even if the main control substrate 50 is formed of a plurality of separate substrates, it is necessary to entirely enclose the main control substrate 50 in the substrate case 16 and seal it.
In the example of FIG. 3B, the main control boards 50 are two main control boards 50A and 50B, connectors are provided on the main control boards 50A and 50B, respectively, and the connectors are connected by a harness. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a connector capable of directly connecting the main control boards 50A and 50B may be used, and the harness may not be used (the same applies to FIG. 42B described later).
The set value display LED 73 is provided on the main control board 50A side, but the management information display LED 74 is mounted on the main control board 50B. That is, the main control board 50B doubles as a display board for mounting the management information display LED 74.

  Furthermore, the management information display LED 74 arranges, for example, the digits 6 and 7 in the upper one row as in the example 2 of (b), in addition to the case of making one row as shown in the example 1 of (a). , Digits 8 and 9 may be arranged in the lower row.

FIG. 4 is a diagram showing the relationship between the digits 1 to 9, the segments A to G, and the segment DP.
As described above, each digit is composed of seven rod-like segments A to G and one dot-like segment DP, and so-called seven segments are composed of segments A to G (seven). .

As shown in FIG. 4, for example, of the digit 1, segments A to G constitute 7 segments of the upper digit of the storage number display LED 76, and the segment DP is unused.
Further, among the digits 2, segments A to G constitute 7 segments of the lower digit of the storage number display LED 76, and the segment DP is used as the advantageous segment display LED 77.
Furthermore, each segment A to G of the digits 3 and 4 constitutes 7 segments of the upper digit and the lower digit of the acquisition number display LED 78, respectively, and the segment DP is unused.

  Further, of the digits 5, the segments A to G constitute 7 segments of the setting value display LED 73, and the segment DP is an LED which lights up during the setting change. That is, of the set value display LEDs 73, when only 7 segments are on, it indicates that the setting is being confirmed, and when the 7 segments and the segment DP are on, the setting is being changed. The segment DP of the setting value display LED 73 is not necessarily limited to such usage. For example, the segment DP of the setting value display LED 73 may be a segment that lights up when the setting value is determined during setting change.

  Segments 6 to 9 constitute a management information display LED 74, and segments 6 and 7 display information types in the management information. Also, segments 8 and 9 display numerical values corresponding to the information type displayed in segments 6 and 7 among the management information. Segment DP of digits 6 to 9 is unused. However, when the management information display LED 74 is turned on, it is also possible to turn on the segment DP of the digit 7. Further, by turning on the segment DP of the digit 7, the boundaries between the digits 6 and 7 indicating the information type and the digits 8 and 9 indicating the numerical value can be clarified to facilitate confirmation.

Further, FIG. 4 shows the configuration of segment data. For example, when the digit 1 displays “0”, the segments A to F are turned on and the segments G and DP are turned off, so that the segment data is “00111111 (B)”.
Further, when the digit 2 displays "1" and the segment B, C, and DP are turned on when the segment is in the advantageous section, the segment data is "10000110 (B)". That is, by setting the most significant bit (eighth bit) of the segment data of the digit 2 to "0" or "1", the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned off or lit. Thus, by determining whether the eighth bit of the segment data of the digit 2 is “0” or “1”, it can be determined whether or not it is in the advantageous section.

In FIG. 1, the motor 32 of the symbol display device and the like are electrically connected to the main control board 50.
The symbol display device includes reels (three in the present embodiment) for displaying symbols, a motor 32 for driving each of the reels 31, and a reel sensor 33 for detecting the position of the reels 31.

  The motor 32 is for rotating the reels 31, is connected to the rotation center of each of the reels 31, and is controlled by the reel control means 65 described later. Here, the reel 31 is composed of the left reel 31, the middle reel 31, and the right reel 31, and when the stop switch 42 operated to stop the left reel 31 is the left stop switch 42, the middle reel 31 is stopped. The stop switch 42 to be operated is the middle stop switch 42, and the stop switch 42 operated to stop the right reel 31 is the right stop switch 42.

The reel 31 has a ring shape, and a reel tape on which a plurality of types of symbols (designs constituting a combination of symbols corresponding to a combination) are printed is attached to the outer peripheral surface thereof. The specific arrangement of the symbols on the reel 31 will be described later.
Further, each reel 31 is provided with one (or two or more) indexes. The index is provided in a convex shape, for example, on the circumferential side surface of the reel 31 and is used to detect whether the reel 31 has passed a predetermined position, whether it has made one rotation, or the like. Each index is detected by the reel sensor 33. The signal of the reel sensor 33 is electrically connected to the main control board 50. Then, when the index detects (turns off) the reel sensor 33, the input signal is input to the main control board 50, and it is detected that the reel 31 has passed a predetermined position.

  Further, the symbol on the reference position at the moment when the reel sensor 33 detects the index of the reel 31 is stored in the ROM 54 in advance. Thereby, the pattern on the reference position at the moment when the index is detected can be detected.

  Further, a medal payout device is electrically connected to the main control board 50. The medal payout device includes a hopper 35 for storing medals, a hopper motor 36 which is driven when the medals of the hopper 35 are paid out from the payout port, and a payout for detecting the medals paid out from the hopper motor 36. A sensor 37 is provided.

The medals, which are maintained and accepted from the medal insertion slot 43, are formed to be accommodated in the hopper 35 through a predetermined passage (also referred to as a "shoot portion").
The payout sensor 37 is a pair of optical sensors arranged at a predetermined distance, and is configured to be detected by the other payout sensor 37 after a predetermined time has elapsed since the medal is detected by one payout sensor 37. It is done. Then, based on the timing when each of the pair of payout sensors 37 is turned on / off, it is determined whether or not the medals have been correctly dispensed.

For example, when the signals from both of the payout sensors 37 are off even though the hopper motor 36 is driven, it is determined that the medal is not paid out, and the hopper error (no medal) is detected. Be done.
On the other hand, when at least one of the signals of the payout sensor 37 remains on, it is detected that a medal jam has occurred.

The power switch 11 is a switch that turns on / off the power of the slot machine 10.
The setting key switch 12 is a switch that is turned on when the setting key is inserted from the setting key insertion port and rotated right 90 degrees (clockwise), and is turned on at the time of setting confirmation or setting change.

  The setting switch 13 is a switch operated when changing the setting value. For example, every time the setting is changed, the setting value is incremented by one. In the present embodiment, setting values have setting 1 to setting 6, and during setting change, each time the setting switch 13 is operated, the setting value is “1” → “2” →... →→ “6” → It changes with "1" →. In addition, any setting value is displayed during the setting change, and when the start switch 41 is operated, the displayed setting value is decided.

Further, when the power switch 11 is turned on while turning on this switch, the reset switch 14 is reset, that is, initialization processing is performed, and predetermined data stored in the RWM 53 is cleared.
The door switch 15 is a switch that is turned on when the front door (not shown) of the slot machine 10 is opened, and is for detecting the open / close state of the front door.

Furthermore, an external signal (outer end signal) to the external concentrated terminal plate 100 is output from part of the output port 52.
Here, the “external signal” is a signal for outputting to the outside of the slot machine 10 (hole computer 200, data counter installed in a hole, etc.) via the external concentrated terminal plate 100. In the present embodiment, the external signal (1BB signal, RB signal, advantageous period signal), an external signal indicating that an error or a power failure has occurred in the slot machine 10 and the like, and the opening of the front door of the slot machine 10 are shown. An external signal, a medal insertion signal, a medal payout signal, etc. are provided.

In FIG. 1, the sub control board 80 controls selection, output, and the like of effects (information) during game play and game standby.
Here, the main control board 50 and the sub control board 80 are electrically connected, and the main control board 50 (control command transmission means 71 described later) is unidirectionally connected to the sub control board 80 by parallel communication. Sends information (control command) necessary for output of presentation.
The main control substrate 50 and the sub control substrate 80 are not limited to being electrically connected, but may be connections using optical communication means. Further, both of the electrical connection and the optical communication connection are not limited to parallel communication, but may be serial communication, and serial communication and parallel communication may be used in combination.

Similar to the main control board 50, the sub control board 80 includes an input port 81, an output port 82, an RWM 83, a ROM 84, a sub CPU 85, and the like.
The sub control board 80 is electrically connected to effect peripheral devices such as the following effect lamps 21 as shown in FIG. 1 via the input port 81 or the output port 82. However, peripheral devices for presentation are not limited to these.
The RWM 83 is a storage medium capable of temporarily storing data acquired when the sub CPU 85 controls an effect.
Further, the ROM 84 is a storage medium for storing a program for performing a lottery relating to an effect, various data, and the like as effect data.

  The effect lamp 21 is, for example, an LED or the like, and lights up in a predetermined pattern when a predetermined condition is satisfied. In addition, the effect lamp 21 is a back lamp for illuminating the symbols displayed on the reel 31 (three symbols continuous in the vertical direction seen from the display window 17) disposed on the inner peripheral side of each reel 31 from behind, the reel 31 A fluorescent lamp for illuminating the symbols on the reels 31 from the top of the frame, a frame lamp arranged on the front door of the slot machine 10 and blinking at the time of winning of the winning combination and the like are included.

In addition, the speaker 22 outputs a predetermined sound when a predetermined condition is satisfied in order to perform various effects during the game.
Furthermore, the image display device 23 includes a liquid crystal display, an organic EL display, a dot display and the like, and various effect images (a correct pressing order, an effect corresponding to a lottery result of the condition device, etc.) Game information (such as the number of times of game operation and the number of games acquired during a bonus operation or an advantageous section) is displayed.
In addition, the cross key 24 and the menu button 25 change various settings when displaying information intended by the player (including a two-dimensional code that is a player's game history) or a hole manager (such as a store manager). It is used when you

Subsequently, a combination of symbols and combinations of the present embodiment will be described.
FIG. 5 is a view showing a symbol arrangement of the reels 31 in the present embodiment. In FIG. 5, symbol numbers are shown together. For example, in the left reel 31, the symbol of symbol number 0 is "bell A".
As shown in FIG. 5, in the present embodiment, each reel 31 is equally divided into 20 frames, and a predetermined symbol is displayed on each frame.
In addition, in the figure, "blank" does not mean that a symbol is not displayed at all, but a predetermined symbol corresponding to "blank" is displayed.
In addition, although "bell A", "bell B", and "bell C" are patterns whose appearances are similar, they are respectively different patterns.

6A shows the positional relationship between the display windows (transparent windows) 17 provided on the front door (front door; not shown) of the slot machine 10 and the respective reels 31 and the effective lines (symbols). (Display line for displaying a combination).
Three reels (left reel 31, middle reel 31, and right reel 31) are provided in parallel in the lateral direction in the present embodiment. Furthermore, each reel 31 is arranged so that three designs which are continuous in the vertical direction can be seen from the display window 17. Therefore, a total of nine symbols (pieces) are arranged so as to be visible from the display window 17 of the slot machine 10. The numbers at the lower right of each symbol indicate the symbol number.

Moreover, FIG. 6 (B) has shown the admiration of the symbol position in this specification. In this specification, the symbol position at the time of stopping visible from the display window 17 is referred to as “upper stage”, “middle stage”, and “lower stage” in order from top to bottom for each reel 31. , “Left middle stage”, “lower left stage”.
Furthermore, as shown to FIG. 6 (A), the effective line is set with respect to nine patterns seen from the display window 17. FIG.

  Here, the "effective line" is a line of symbols at the time of stopping the reel 31, and is a symbol combination line (display line) for forming a combination of symbols, and of the symbol corresponding to any one of the roles. When the combination is stopped on the line, it is a line that wins the part. In this embodiment, one effective line ("lower left stage"-"middle middle stage"-straight line passing through "upper right stage") is defined, and all other symbol combination lines become invalid lines. There is.

  An invalid line is a line which is not set as an effective line among symbol combination lines, and even if a combination of symbols corresponding to any of the symbols is stopped at that line, the provision of a profit according to the combination It is a line that does not pay out medals, etc. That is, an invalid line is a line which is not a formation object of a combination of symbols from the beginning.

  Also, conventionally, slot machines having different numbers of valid lines according to the number of medals inserted are known. For example, when the number of medals inserted is one, the number of valid lines is one when the number of medals inserted is three, and when the number of medals inserted is three, the number of effective lines is five. And the like. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, three or two medals are inserted to play a game, and one game shown in FIG. 6A becomes an effective line in all the games. There is no change in the number of valid lines due to the number of medals inserted. Therefore, in the present specification, the term "effective line" refers to the line shown in FIG.

  FIGS. 7 to 12 are diagrams showing combinations of symbol types, types of payouts, etc., and combinations in the present embodiment (combinations etc. included in the condition device selected by the combination lottery means 61 described later). In FIG. 12, pattern symbols 01 to 03 are shown as combinations of symbols displayed when the winning combination is missed, although they are not winning combinations, although they are winning the specific condition device (numbers "101" to "120").

The roles in this embodiment are roughly classified into special roles, replays (replay roles), and small roles.
A combination of symbols corresponding to each combination and the number of payouts at the time of winning are determined. When all the reels 31 are stopped, a combination of symbols corresponding to one of the combinations is stopped on the active line (the combination of winnings is the same). The number of medals corresponding to the combination is paid out.
However, the payout number at the time of winning of the special part is set to zero. Also, in replay, medals are automatically inserted (replay).

  In FIG. 7 to FIG. 12, "the prescribed number 3" displayed on the number of payouts, etc. indicates the number of payouts, etc. when the prescribed number is 3 (when the bonus is inactive, ie, the number of inserted coins in normal game) , “The prescribed number 2” indicates the number of payouts and the like when the prescribed number is 2 (the number of inserted items during bonus game operation, ie, during special game). For example, Replay 01 of the number "3" indicates that the prescribed number of three will be replayed, and the prescribed number of two "-" indicates that the lottery is not made.

In FIG. 7, numbers "1" and "2" correspond to special roles (features). In the present embodiment, only 1BB is provided as a special role, and 1BB has two types (1BBA and 1BBB).
The special part is a part to shift from the normal game to the special game.
When the player wins 1BB, there is no payout of medals in the current game, but the next game is transferred to the 1BB game corresponding to the special game (action of a bonus).
It is an advantageous game for the player who can expect medals to be won more than when the bonus item is inoperative by setting the payout rate to "1" or more during the 1BB game (when the bonus item is in operation). .

Also, Replay (replay role) is a role that enables replay with maintaining the number of medals inserted in the current game (automatic bet on medals).
The replay according to the present embodiment includes replays 01 to 06 (numbers “3” to “13”) as shown in FIG.
Replays 02 and 03 are replays that are to be transferred to another RT when winning in a particular RT. Therefore, these replays are also referred to as transitional replays.

More specifically, when Replay 02 is won in RT2, the game is shifted to RT3 (RT that is advantageous to the player) from the next game. For this reason, Replay 02 is also referred to as promotion Replay.
In addition, when Replay 03 is won in RT3, the next game is shifted to RT2 (RT which is more disadvantageous to the player than RTs up to that time). For this reason, Replay 03 is also referred to as fall (relegation) replay.

  Replays 04 and 05 are first used as control replays aiming to increase the number of types of conditional devices by winning a plurality of replays in duplicate, and in the present embodiment, among the conditional devices to be described later, Replay included in Replay B2, B3, C2, C3 or E. When the player wins the replay B2, B3, C2 or C3, the replay 04 or 05 as the control replay is not stopped at the effective line.

Furthermore, Replays 04 and 05 are secondly used as rear play, and included in Replay E of the condition device described later. When Replay E is won during the advantageous section, the addition of the advantageous section is executed. In addition, the addition lottery may be performed instead of the addition.
Also, Replay 06 is a Replay that is drawn during the 1BB operation, and is included in Replay D of the condition device described later. When Replay D in the advantageous section is won, the addition of the advantageous section is executed. In addition, the addition lottery may be performed instead of the addition.

Further, the small winning combination, as shown in FIG. 7 to FIG. 11, comprises small combinations 01 to 40 (numbers “14” to “100”). The small roles 01 and 02 are small roles (small roles corresponding to high-pitched bells) to be won when the correct answer is made when the correct bell is selected as described later. Further, the small winning combination 03 to 34 is a small winning combination (a small winning combination corresponding to a low bell) which can be won (PB ≠ 1) at the time of incorrect release at the time of winning bell selection.
Furthermore, the minors 35 to 38 are rare minors (a minor corresponding to watermelon or cherry).
Furthermore, the minors 39 and 40 are minors that can be won only when the specified number is two, that is, when the bonus is activated.

  The pattern symbols 01 to 03, as described above, are not the part itself but appear when the winning combination is missed (when the winning combination is not won) when the pushing order is incorrect when the pushing order is elected. It is a combination of symbols. Furthermore, in the pattern pattern, when the combination of the symbols is stopped at the effective line in a specific RT (in this embodiment, non-RT, RT1 or RT3), the RT is shifted (in this embodiment, it is shifted to RT2) It is a combination. In this embodiment, pattern symbols 01 to 03 are always made to appear when the winning combination is missed (when the winning combination is not won) when the winning combination is incorrect when the small winning combination B is won. However, other symbol combinations (not the role itself) may appear.

In each role mentioned above, when the combination of symbols corresponding to the role does not stop on the activated line in the game won by the role, the role carried over after the next game and the role not carried over are defined. .
The part carried over is 1BB in the present embodiment. When the player wins 1BB, it is controlled to carry over the winning information of 1BB after the next game in the game until 1BB wins.

  On the other hand, the 1BB winning is carried over, but the minors and replays other than 1BB are not carried over. In the lottery of the condition device, when the small winning combination or the replay is won, the winning combination becomes effective only in the current game, and the winning is not carried over after the next game. That is, in the game in which these roles have been won, the reel 31 is stop-controlled so that the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning roles can be won, but regardless of the presence or absence of the winning combination, at the end of the game , The right concerning the winning combination disappears.

  When starting the game, the player inserts the medals stored in advance by the operation of the bet switch 40 (reserved bet), or the maintenance insertion of the medals from the medal insertion slot 43 (cared bed). When the start switch 41 is operated with the defined number of medals bet, a signal generated at that time is input to the main control board 50. When the main control board 50 (specifically, the reel control means 65 to be described later) receives this signal, the main control board 50 performs lottery of the roles by the role lottery means 61 and drives and controls all the motors 32 to obtain all reels. Control 31 to rotate. In this manner, the reel 31 is rotated by the motor 32, whereby the design on the reel 31 is moved and displayed up and down in the display window 17 at a predetermined speed.

  Then, the player presses the stop switch 42 to stop the rotation of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 (for example, the left reel 31 corresponding to the left stop switch 42). When the stop switch 42 is operated, a signal generated at that time is input to the main control board 50. When the main control board 50 (specifically, the reel control means 65 described later) receives this signal, the main control board 50 drives and controls the motor 32 corresponding to the stop switch 42 to correspond to the lottery result of the combination lottery unit 61 As described above, stop control of the reel 31 related to the motor 32 is performed.

  Then, the game result of the current game is displayed by the combination of the symbols when all the reels 31 stop. Furthermore, when the combination of symbols corresponding to any one of the winning combinations is stopped on the active line (when the winning combination is achieved), payout of medals corresponding to the winning combination is performed.

Next, the specific configuration of the main control board 50 will be described.
As shown in FIG. 1, the main CPU 55 of the main control board 50 includes the following role lottery means 61 and the like. The following means in the present embodiment are illustrative, and the present invention is not limited to the means shown in the present embodiment.

The role lottery means 61 performs lottery (determination, selection) of the condition device (winning combination). Therefore, the role lottery means 61 is also referred to as a condition device determination (lottery or selection) means, a winning combination determination (lottery or selection) means, or the like.
In addition, “the winning of the condition device” is also referred to as a winning lottery result, a lottery result, a winning number, a winning result, and the like.

  The role lottery means 61 is based on, for example, random number generation means for lottery (hardware random number etc.), random number extraction means for extracting random numbers generated by the random number generation means, and random number values extracted by the random number extraction means. And a determination unit that determines whether or not the condition device has been won and the condition device that has won the condition device.

  The random number generation means generates a random number in a predetermined area (for example, “0” to “65535” in decimal). The random number is, for example, a random number in which a counter that counts 1 in 200 n (nano) sec continues counting as 1 cycle in the range of “0” to “65535”, and while the slot machine 10 is powered on Keep counting.

  The random number extraction means extracts the random number generated by the random number generation means when the start switch 41 is operated (turned on) by the player in the present embodiment at a predetermined time. The determination means collates the random number value extracted by the random number extraction means with a condition device lottery table described later to determine the condition device corresponding to the area to which the random number value belongs. For example, when the extracted random number value belongs to the area of winning and replay condition device number "1" (replay A), it is determined that replay A is won.

13 to 16 are diagrams showing the types of condition devices to be randomly selected by the combination lottery means 61 and the contents of the winning combinations included in the respective condition devices.
In the following description, the description of the condition device is mainly made, and the details of the stop control of the reel 31 based on the pushing order of the stop switch 42 and the operation timing at the time of winning each condition device are explained by the reel control means 65. Do.

As described above, the condition device according to the present embodiment does not carry over the winning information to the next game, "the item condition device" which is a condition device including any of the special roles capable of carrying over the winning information to the next game. It consists of a "winning and replay condition device" which is a conditional device that includes either a small winning combination or a replay.
The winning of the item condition device corresponds to the winning of 1BB in the present embodiment, and includes the item condition device numbers “1” and “2”.
The feature condition device number "0" corresponds to the non-winning of the special role, the feature condition device number "1" corresponds to the winning of 1BBA, and the feature condition device number "2" is the winning of 1BBB. Equivalent to.

Also, for example, when Replay A is won, the item condition device number is “0”, and the winning and replay condition device number is “1”.
On the other hand, when the 1BBA alone is won, the item condition device number is “1”, and the winning and replay condition device number is “0”.

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, there is a case in which 1BB and the small winning combination will be double winning, for example, when 1BBA and the small winning combination D are double winning, the item condition device number is “1”, winning and replay condition device number Will be "26".
When 1BB and the small winning combination or the replay are dually won, the winning combination of the small winning combination or the replay is prioritized in the current game (the priority can be set arbitrarily). Further, since the winning of the small winning combination or the replay is effective only in the current game, it is not carried over to the next game, but the 1BB winning information is carried over to the next game unless it is a prize.

Hereinafter, the winning and replay condition device will be described.
The condition device number “0” corresponds to the non-winning of the part (so-called lost).
Also, Replay A of the condition device number “1” is a single win of Replay 01. When Replay A is won, Replay 01 wins in any pressing order (in any pressing order).

Replays B1 to B3 of condition device numbers “2” to “4” (hereinafter collectively referred to as “replay B group”), replays C1 to C3 of condition device numbers “5” to “7” (hereinafter generically referred to) Each “Replay C Group” is a double winning of multiple types of Replays, and is a double winning including at least one of Replay 01 or 02. Then, according to the pressing order of the stop switch 42, the type of replay to be won is set to be different.
For example, in the replay B1 of the condition device number "2", the replay 02 wins in the pushing order of the left first stop, and the replay 01 wins other than the left first stop (middle or right first stop).

In addition, in the case of repeated replay winning, since the replay (replay role) is won in any pushing order, there is no concept of high / low eye on payout of medals and the like. However, for example, when the player wins the replay B1 in RT2, the RT is promoted (transition from RT2 to RT3) by winning the replay 02 in the left first stop. On the other hand, except for the left first stop, RT2 is maintained by winning a replay 01.
In addition, when the player wins the replay C1 in RT3, the RT1 is maintained by winning the replay 01 in the first left stop. On the other hand, except for the left first stop, RT is made to fall (demotion) (transition from RT3 to RT2) by winning a replay 03.

The replay D with the condition device number “8” is a single replay 06 replay. When Replay D is won, Replay 06 wins in any order.
Similarly, Replay E of the condition device number “9” is a duplicate winning of Replay 04 and 05. When Replay E is won, Replay 04 or 05 wins in any order. These replays 04 and 05 have a role as rear play. In the present embodiment, in particular, when the lottery is made at RT1 and the replay E is won during the RT1 and the advantageous section, the advantageous section is added. In addition, the addition lottery may be performed instead of the addition.

In FIG. 14, the small winning combination A of the condition device number “10” is a so-called common bell, and the small winning combination 01 is a single winning. When the small winning combination A is won, the small winning combination 01 always wins (PB = 1) regardless of the pressing order of the stop switch 42.
Also, in FIG. 14 to FIG. 15, the small roles B1 to B12 of the condition device numbers "11" to "22" (hereinafter collectively referred to as "small group B group") correspond to so-called push order bells , And a small winning combination 01 including at least one of nine small bells (nine bells, nine winning combinations) and a small winning combination 03 to 34 (one winning combination).

  When these condition devices are won, according to the pressing order of the stop switch 42, when it is the correct pressing order, a small winning combination 01 having a high eye bell (9 bells and 9 prizes) with "PB = 1" is won. On the other hand, when the order is incorrect, according to the operation timing of the stop switch 42 (the position of the reel 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated), the small part 03 which is a low bell (one sheet) There is a case where .about.34 wins and a case where none of the small winning combination wins (when a pattern symbol is displayed due to dropping).

In FIG. 16, the small roles C1 to C3 (hereinafter collectively referred to as "small group C group") of the condition device numbers "23" to "25" are so-called pressed as in the small group B group described above. It corresponds to a forward bell, and is a double winning including a small part 02 (three bells, three sheets) and a small part 03 to 10 (one sheet).
When these condition devices are won, according to the pressing order of the stop switch 42, when it is the correct pressing order, the small winning combination 02 having a high eye bell (three bells and three wins) with "PB = 1" is won. On the other hand, in the case of incorrect release order, one of the small prizes 03 to 10, which is a low-order bell (one-piece winning combination), is won with "PB = 1". Therefore, when winning the small winning combination C group, unlike when winning the small winning combination B group, there is no case where the pattern symbol is displayed (dropped). In addition, you may have the case where not only this but any small part wins.

At the time of winning the small part B group, it will be paid out nine sheets at the time of winning the high bell, so when it is the correct order of pressing, there will be three in (insertion number) and nine out (disbursed number), the difference in this game The number is "+6". Therefore, when the pushing order is correct, the number of medals increases, and when the pushing order is incorrect (the number of payouts is one or zero), the medal device decreases.
On the other hand, in the small part C group, since 3 payouts will be made when the high bell is won, 3 ins (number of inserted sheets) and 3 out (number of paid outs) will be obtained in the present game The difference number of is “± 0”. Therefore, at the time of correct pressing, the number of medals is maintained as it is, and at the time of incorrect answering of the pressing order (the number of payouts is one), it becomes a condition device in which the number of medals decreases.

  As described above, the reason for providing both the pushing order bell which gives out 9 sheets in the correct pushing order and the pushing order bell which gives out 3 sheets is for adjusting the payout rate. In particular, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 14 and FIG. 15, at the time of pressing order incorrect at the time of winning the small winning combination B group, the probability of winning one winning combination is 25%, and the other 75% is a pattern symbol Is set to be displayed (no payout at the time of pattern symbol display). On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 16, when the winning combination of the small winning combination C group is incorrect, one winning combination is made with "PB = 1". In this way, by providing two types of push order bells with different payout numbers depending on the push order correct answer time and the incorrect answer time, and by appropriately setting the winning probability, it is possible to set the payout rate to an appropriate range. become.

The minor role D of the condition device number "26" corresponds to the rare minor role (watermelon). The small role D is a single winning of the small portion 35, and is set to "PB」 1 ".
Further, the small combination E1 of the condition device number "27" and the small combination E2 of the condition device number "28" correspond to the rare small combination (cherry) similarly to the small combination D1. The small combination E1 is a double combination of the small combinations 36 and 38, and the small combination E2 is a double combination including the small combination 37 in addition to the small combinations 36 and 38 described above. When the small winning combination E1 or E2 is won, the two-piece winning combination (small winning combination 36 or 38) is won regardless of the pushing order.

The small combination F of the condition device number “29” is a combination to be drawn only during 1BB operation (1BB game), and is a double winning of the small combinations 01 to 39. When the small winning combination F is won, the small winning combination 39, which is a 10-piece winning combination, wins with “PB = 1”.
The small combination G with the condition device number "30" is a combination to be drawn only during 1BB operation (1BB game), and the small combination 40 is a single winning. When the small winning combination G is won, the small winning combination 40, which is a nine-piece winning combination, wins with "PB = 1".

  FIGS. 17 and 18 show the winning probability defined by the lottery table when the lottery of the condition device is performed by the role lottery means 61, and shows the number of item condition devices and winning and replay condition devices for each RT. FIG. If the numerical value shown in FIG.17 and FIG.18 is divided by "65536", it will become a winning probability. For example, in the non-RT and any of RT1 to RT3, the prefix number for 1 BBA is set to “20” and “10” (total of “30”). Therefore, the single winning probability of 1BBA is "30/65536".

FIG. 17 is a table of number tables of condition devices which can be determined to shift to the common setting and the advantageous section, or which can execute the addition of the advantageous section (or perform the additional drawing).
Here, "setting common" indicates that there is no setting difference, that is, setting 1 to setting 6 have the same value.
Then, when the condition device common to the setting is won, it may always be decided to shift to the advantageous section (it is decided to be added during the advantageous section), or whether or not to shift to the advantageous section ( During the advantageous section, it may be determined by lottery. Alternatively, a conditional device that decides to shift to the advantageous section (decides to add during the advantageous segment) and a conditional device that decides not to shift to the advantageous section (decides to not add to the advantageous segment) You may provide.

In the present embodiment, the condition device common to settings shown in FIG. 17 is provided with a condition device which decides to shift to the advantageous section and a condition device which decides not to shift to the advantageous section. Furthermore, during the advantageous section, it is always set as a condition device that decides to add the advantageous section.
In FIG. 17, in the normal section, “o” means deciding to shift to the advantageous section, and “x” means deciding not to shift to the advantageous section. In addition, in the advantageous section, “Δ” means to determine to add the advantageous section, and “x” means to determine to not add the advantageous section.
In FIG. 17, “o” is determined to shift to the advantageous section, and “Δ” is determined to add the advantageous section, but not limited to this, “o” is It means to draw lots whether or not to shift to the advantageous section, and “Δ” may mean to draw whether or not to add the advantageous section.

Further, FIG. 18 shows a condition device and its number which are not determined to shift to the advantageous section, and are not determined to add the advantageous section.
In the present embodiment, the condition device for deciding to shift to the advantageous section or deciding to add the advantageous section is limited to the winning of the condition apparatus shown in FIG. In the case of winning, none of them decide to shift to the advantageous section, nor decide to add the advantageous section.
In FIG. 18, although the setting numbers of setting 1 and setting 6 are representatively illustrated, in practice, as described above, the setting value has six stages of setting 1 to setting 6, and setting There is a fixed number for each value.

In FIG. 17 and FIG. 18, since the conditional devices including 1BBA or 1BBB are drawn only in the non-inside, they are drawn by non-RT, RT1 to RT3. Further, 1BBA and 1BBB have a single winning case and a double winning case with a small player D, E1 or E2. On the other hand, the small role D, E1 or E2 has a single winning case. The conditional device including 1BBA or 1BBB drawn at RT4 is treated as a single winning of the small part D, E1 or E2. Therefore, the storage number for single winning combination of small part D in RT4 is “580” to “585” in total, and the storage number for single winning combination in small part E1 in RT4 is “1030” in total, The suffixes for single winning of the small winning combination E2 in RT4 are “310” to “370” in total.
Also, 1 BBB is set to the winning combination when the conditional device having the setting difference is won, and it is decided to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of 1 BBB, or to decide to add the advantageous section. There is nothing to do.

Also, Replay D is drawn only during 1BB operation. Furthermore, Replay E is drawn only at RT1. Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, after the end of the operation of 1 BBB, it shifts to RT1. Then, when the replay E is won in this RT1, the advantageous section is added (limited to the advantageous section). Therefore, in order to set so as not to appear in other RTs, a lottery for replay E is made only at RT1.
Furthermore, the small roles D and E1 are drawn only when the character is inactive and not when the character is active.
On the other hand, the small roles F and G are not drawn at the time of the non-operation of the item, but are drawn only at the time of the operation of the item.

  Further, in FIG. 17, although the sum of the number of single winning of 1BBA is “30”, in this embodiment, the number “20” determined to shift to the advantageous section in the normal section and the advantageous section It is divided into a unit number "10" which decides not to shift. That is, in the case where the single winning of 1 BBA is made, if the number of “20” is won, when the game is a normal section, the advantageous section is simultaneously won. On the other hand, in the case where the single BBA is won, if it is elected to the number "10", it will be non-winning of the advantageous section.

In addition, when a single BBA is won during the advantageous section, it is determined that the advantageous section is to be added to either of the units "20" and "10".
Similarly, although the combination number for the single winning combination E1 is "1000" in total, in the present embodiment, the combination interval "250" determined to shift to the advantageous interval in the normal interval and the advantageous interval It is divided into "750" which is decided not to shift to

The present invention is not limited to this, and the single winning combination number of the small combination E1 is set to one number “1000” (not divided into the number “250” and the number “750”), and when winning the small combination E1. Alternatively, whether or not to shift to the advantageous section may be determined by lottery separately. For example, it may be decided to shift to the advantageous segment with a probability of 25% and not decided to transition to the advantageous segment with a probability of 75%. As described above, although it is possible to provide a unit number to be elected to the advantageous section from the beginning and a unit number not to be elected to the advantageous section, the unit number itself is one value, and when elected to that unit number, transition to the advantageous section You may make it perform the lottery (two-step lottery) of whether to do or not.
Further, as described above, in this embodiment, when RT4 (inside), it is not determined to shift to the advantageous section, and the advantageous section is not added. Therefore, even at the time of winning the small part D or E1, when it is RT4, it is not decided to shift to the advantageous section, and the advantageous section is not added ("* 3" in FIG. 17). .

In FIG. 18, when the single winning of 1 BBB and the double winning of 1 BBB and the small winning combination D are achieved, the determination regarding the advantageous section is not performed. However, as described later, after the completion of the operation of 1BBB (after the transition to RT1), an opportunity to add an advantageous section is provided.
The small role E2 has a case of double winning with 1BBB and a case of single winning, but neither makes a decision regarding the advantageous section. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 17, when the small winning combination E1 is won, the determination regarding the advantageous section may be made in both the single winning combination of the small winning combination E1 and the double winning combination with 1BBA.

Also, as shown in FIG. 18, each condition device of Replay A, Replay B group, and Replay C group is common in setting, but it is not decided to shift to the advantageous section, and is added in the advantageous section. I do not decide.
However, the present invention is not limited to the examples shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, it is decided to shift to an advantageous section (including a lottery) or to add an advantageous section (including a lottery) when the condition device of these replays is won. ) May be provided. Alternatively, in FIG. 18, in Replay A, Replay B group, and Replay C group, setting numbers are slightly different between Setting 1 and Setting 6 (for example, “1” is different), Replay A, Replay B group, The Replay C group may be set separately.

  In FIG. 18, Replay A is drawn at all RTs when the character is inactive. Also, the replay B1 group is drawn only at RT2. Furthermore, Replay C group is drawn only at RT3. The small combination A, the small combination B group, and the small combination C group all have setting differences between setting 1 and setting 6, but the setting numbers are the same in all RTs.

Further, as shown in the table of “special role and small role” in FIG. 18, in the setting 1 and the setting 6, the winning probability of 1 BB and the small role is set higher in the setting 6. Therefore, in this respect, setting 6 is more advantageous than setting 1.
Furthermore, as shown in the "Replay" table, the winning probability of replay is the highest at RT3. And, in the advantageous section, because it is basically set to stay at RT3, not only increase the medals by the operation of the instruction function at the time of winning bell order, it will be a gaming state with a small reduction of medals by replay winning .

Further, the small combination A, the small combination B group, and the small combination C group are all set in the condition device having the setting difference. Here, the digit number difference between setting 1 and setting 6 of the small winning combination A is “250”, and the digit number difference between setting 1 and setting 6 of the small winning combination B group (whole) is “240 (20 × 12) ". Therefore, the small role A has a larger difference in unit number than the small role B group. As a result, by setting the number of small combination A having no prize difference according to the pushing order to a larger value, it is possible to reliably provide the difference in the payout rate according to the set value.
In addition, since the combination of symbols that can be won when winning a small winning combination A and the combination of symbols that can be won when the pressing combination is correct when winning a small winning combination B group are set the same (described later) The setting value can not be estimated by counting the number of winnings (winnings) of.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 18, the probability of winning in the small winning combination B group is set higher than the probability of winning in the small winning combination C group. Here, the maximum payout number is 9 when the prescribed number is 3, and during the advantageous section, the number of payouts is 9 (maximum payout number with 3 prescribed numbers) at least one of the indicated function operating games. Need to run once. Therefore, in the advantageous section, it is necessary to execute the instruction function activation game at least once when the small winning combination B is won. Therefore, by setting the winning probability of the small winning combination B group to be higher than the winning probability of the small winning combination C group, one-time instruction function operation game (small winning combination C, replay B, replay C) is won Can be reduced the expected number of times of the game in the advantageous section ending only with the played game). Furthermore, despite the fact that the game has been played a predetermined number of times, although it is an advantageous section, it is less likely that the advantageous section can not be ended because it has never won a small winning combination B during the predetermined number of times. be able to.

The explanation is returned to FIG.
The winning flag control unit 62 controls on / off of the winning flag corresponding to each combination based on the lottery result by the combination lottery unit 61. In the present embodiment, a winning flag is provided for each role for all roles. Then, when one of the condition devices is won in the lottery by the combination lottery means 61, the winning flag of the combination included in the condition device is turned on (a winning flag is set).

For example, in a non-internal game, when the player wins the replay B1, the two winning flags of Replay 01 and Replay 02 included in the condition device are turned on, and the winning flags of the other roles are turned off.
Similarly, in a non-internal medium game, when winning a small combination B1, the small combination 01, the small combination 03, the small combination 10, the small combination 11, the small combination 18, the small combination 19 and the small combination included in the condition device The seven winning flags of the role 26 are turned on, and the winning flags of the other roles are turned off.

Furthermore, as mentioned above, since the winnings of small winnings other than 1BB and replays are not carried over, even if the winnings for small playings or replays are made in the game this time and the winning flags of these playings are turned on, the game ends Sometimes the winning flag is turned off.
On the other hand, since the 1BB win is carried over, when the 1BB wins in the game this time and the win flag related to the 1BB won is once turned on, the on state is maintained until the 1BB wins, It will be turned off when 1BB wins.

  In addition, for example, when 1BBA and the small winning combination D are won by the combination lottery means 61, the winning flag of the small winning combination 35 corresponding to the 1BBA and the small winning combination D is turned on, and there is no case that both the combination wins in the game. Therefore, for example, when 1 BBA does not win, the on flag of 1 BBA is maintained and the win flag of small bonus 35 is turned off, regardless of whether or not the small winning combination 35 has or has not won.

Furthermore, for example, when the single lottery is won by the role lottery means 61, the winning flag of the 1BBA is turned on in the current game, and when the 1BBA is not won in the current game, the winning flag of the 1BBA is maintained .
Furthermore, in the next game, when the small winning combination A1 is won, in addition to the 1BBA carrying the winning, the small winning combination 01's winning flag is turned on, and when the 1BBA does not win at the end of the current game, 1BBA On of the winning flag of is maintained, and the winning flag of the small role 01 is turned off.

The pushing order instruction number selecting unit 63 selects the pushing order instruction number based on the lottery result of the condition device by the combination drawing unit 61. FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a push order instruction number table.
In either of the advantageous section and the normal section, the push order instruction number selecting unit 63 may select the push order instruction number, but not limited to this, for example, only in the advantageous section, The selection of the push order instruction number may be performed. In such a case, the pressing order instruction number is always "A0" during the normal section.
Further, the selected push order instruction number can be transmitted to the sub control board 80 only during the advantageous section (except that the push order instruction number “A0” is transmitted during the normal section). Therefore, even if the pushing order instruction number is selected by the pushing order instruction number selection means 63 in the normal section, the pushing order instruction number is not transmitted to the sub control board 80.
In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 19, each condition device is provided with a unique push order instruction number. For example, the push order instruction number corresponding to Replay A is “A0”, and the push order instruction number corresponding to Replay C3 is “A3”. The push order instruction number includes “A0” to “A3”.

FIG. 20 is a view showing the relationship between the push order instruction number, the push order corresponding to the push order instruction number, and the display contents 1 and 2. In FIG. The push order instruction number “A0” does not have a push order that is advantageous for the player (the push order does not result in an advantage / a disadvantage, that is, the push order does not matter).
The push order instruction numbers “A1” to “A3” each have a push order that is advantageous to the player. For example, an advantageous push order corresponding to the push order instruction number "A2" is the middle first stop.

The push order corresponding to the push order instruction number in the replay B group is set to the push order for winning a replay 02 (push order to promote RT).
Further, the pushing order corresponding to the pushing order instruction number in the replay C group is set in the pushing order for winning the replay 01 (maintaining RT).
Similarly, the pushing order corresponding to the pushing order instruction number in the small winning combination B group is set in the pushing order for winning the small winning combination 01 (9 sheets).
Further, the pushing order corresponding to the pushing order instruction number in the small winning combination C group is set in the pushing order for winning the small winning combination 02 (three sheets).

  Further, in FIG. 20, “display content 1” indicates the content displayed by the operation of the instruction function (control of the main control board 50), and in the present embodiment, the pressing order instruction information displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 It shows. In the present embodiment, the push order instruction numbers “A” and “0” to “3” correspond to the display of “=” and “0” to “3” of the LED (7 segments), respectively. When “=” is displayed, segments D and G are lighted in FIG. 4 among 7 segments (see FIG. 26 described later). In addition, in the case of the push order instruction number “A0”, no display may be performed (any segment is not lighted).

Furthermore, “display content 2” indicates the content displayed by the control of the sub control board 80, and in the present embodiment, it is the correct touch order to be displayed on the image display device 23.
"Activation of indication function" means display using the acquisition number display LED 78 by the main control board 50, and display by control of the sub control board 80 corresponds to "activation of indication function" of the present invention. Is not included.
For example, when winning a prize and replay condition device "11" in the advantageous section, the push order instruction number "A1" is selected, and "1" is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 by the operation of the instruction function. Ru. Further, the image display device 23 displays an image such as “1 ○”, for example, which allows the player to understand that the left stop is first.

In FIG. 19, the push order instruction number (* 1) at the time of winning the small winning combination A is as follows.
When the small winning combination A is won, since the small winning combination 01 wins with no pressing order, there is no advantageous pressing order. However, during the advantageous section, any one of “A1” to “A3” is selected as the dummy push order instruction number. The selectivity is “1/3”, respectively. By setting in this manner, when the small winning combination A in the advantageous section is won, the instruction function is activated to display push order instruction information. As a result, the player can not determine whether the small winning combination A or the small winning combination B has been won in the game. The reason for this setting is as follows.

  As shown in FIG. 18, the winning probability (number) of the small winning combination A is higher in setting 6 than in setting 1. Therefore, it becomes possible to estimate the set value by counting the number of times the small combination 01 has won in the game in which the instruction function does not operate during the advantageous section. In order to avoid such capture, when the small winning combination A is won during the advantageous section, the instruction function is activated to display dummy push order instruction information. Of course, by counting the number of times the small winning combination 01 was won in the game activated the indication function, it is not the case that the set value can not be inferred, but the number of times the small winning combination 01 won in the game not activating the indication function The number of trials is required more than when counting and estimating the setting value.

Furthermore, in FIG. 19, push order instruction information (* 2) at the time of winning the small winning combination E1 and E2 is as follows.
As shown in FIG. 17, when the small winning combination E1 is won during the advantageous section, the advantageous section is added. However, as described above, when 1 BB is won during the advantageous section and the inside becomes inside, the additional of the advantageous section is not performed. For this reason, in the advantageous section and the inside (during the game section where the advantageous section is not added), the winning combination of the small part E1 is made, and the combination of the symbols corresponding to the small part E1 (the combination of the symbols expected to be added the advantageous section) When a certain middle stage cherry tree is stopped, the player may be given an impression of wasting. Therefore, when the small winning combination E1 is won during the advantageous section and the inside, the push order instruction number “A3” is selected, the instruction function is operated, and “first right stop” is displayed.

  When the stop switch 42 is operated in the right first stop when the small winning combination E1 is won, as shown in FIG. This makes it difficult to notice the winning of the small combination E1. Note that since the small winnings 36 or 38 that can be won when the small winning combination E1 is won are both two, even if the first right stop is instructed, there is no disadvantage to the player.

Furthermore, as described above, the upper limit number of games is set in the advantageous section, and in this embodiment, it is set within 1,500 games. Therefore, even if there is a remaining game count of the advantageous section, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated unconditionally when the number of games from the start of the advantageous section reaches 1500 games.
In the case of having such a game feature, for example, when the small winning combination E1 is won when the game is close to 1500 games of the advantageous section and the middle row cherry is displayed, the player expects the additional of the advantageous section. Therefore, in the present embodiment, even if the small winning combination E1 is won after reaching 1400 games or more from the start of the advantageous section, the middle row cherries are not displayed as in the internal winning case. , Activate the indication function and display the right first stop.

In addition, when the small winning combination E2 is won, as shown in FIG. 18, the determination regarding the advantageous section is not performed. However, when the small winning combination E2 is won, if the stop switch 42 is operated at the left or middle first stop, the middle row cherry may be displayed. Therefore, when the middle row cherries are displayed when the game reaches 1,400 games or more from inside or from the start of the advantageous section, the player may mislead the player. , Display the right first stop.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the small winning combination E2 is won, since the determination regarding the advantageous section is not performed from the beginning, the above-described instruction function may not be operated, and the middle cherry may be displayed.

In FIG. 1, the effect group number selection means 64 is an effect group number corresponding to the winning condition device, and selects a number to be transmitted to the sub control board 80.
It is also conceivable to transmit the winning prize and replay condition apparatus number itself to the sub control board 80 as a result of the drawing of the condition apparatus. However, in the present embodiment, the winning winning and replay condition device number itself is not transmitted to the sub control board 80. As a result, on the side of the sub control board 80, it is not possible to know the winning and replay condition device number which has been won in the game this time.

  On the other hand, on the main control board 50 side, an effect group number corresponding to the winning condition device is determined in advance. Then, after the lottery of the condition device, the effect group number corresponding to the winning condition device is selected, and the effect group number is transmitted to the sub control board 80. When the sub control board 80 receives the effect group number selected in the current game, the sub control board 80 can select and output an effect corresponding to the effect group number.

FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a presentation group number table.
In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 21, each condition device is provided with a unique effect group number. For example, the effect group number corresponding to the winning of the small role A, the small role B group, and the small role C group is defined as "5". The effect group numbers corresponding to the wins of the small role A, the small role B group, and the small role C group may be different, such as “5”, “6”, and “7”.

Therefore, the main control board 50 selects “5” as the effect group number when the small combination A, the small combination B group or the small combination C group is won as a result of the drawing of the condition device. Then, information of the selected effect group number “5” is transmitted to the sub control board 80.
Upon receiving the information that the effect group number is "5", the sub control board 80 knows that it has won any of the small role A, the small portion B group, or the small role C group in the current game. it can. Thereby, it is possible to output a bell winning effect.

  However, even if the sub control board 80 receives information indicating that the effect group number "5" has been won, the correct control is pressed even when, for example, one of the small winning combination B group is won in the game. I can not know the order. Then, in the present embodiment, the pressing order instruction number corresponding to the correct pressing order is transmitted to the sub control board 80 during the advantageous section, but not transmitted during the normal section or the standby section. Therefore, during the advantageous section, the sub control board 80 may output the effect pressing order corresponding to the winning combination to the small combination A, the small combination B group, or the small combination C group and the pressing order instruction number as an effect it can. On the other hand, in the normal section and the standby section, the sub control board 80 remains in the effect of having won the small part A, the small part B group, or the small part C group (bell), and Can not be output as an effect.

  Further, even if the same pressing order instruction number is transmitted to the sub control board 80, different effects can be output because the effect group numbers are different. For example, since the push order instruction number is "A1" (left first) when winning in replay B1, and the push order instruction number when winning in minor C1 is "A1" (left first), In either case, the same push order instruction number is transmitted to the sub control board 80.

  However, when the replay B1 is won, the effect group number "2" is transmitted, and when the small winning combination C1 is won, the effect group number "5" is transmitted. Therefore, when the effect group number "2" is transmitted, for example, it is possible to notify the correct pressing order using blue indicating replay, and when the effect group number "5" is transmitted, for example, the bell is transmitted. It is possible to notify the correct pressing order by using yellow indicating.

  In FIG. 1, the reel control means 65 starts rotation of all (three) reels 31 when receiving a rotation start instruction of the reels 31, particularly when the start switch 41 is operated in this embodiment. Control. Furthermore, the reel control means 65 refers to the on / off of the winning flag in the current game after the lottery of the condition device is performed by the role lottery means 61, and the stop position determination table corresponding to the on / off of the winning flag. And when the stop switch 42 is operated, based on the timing when the stop switch 42 is operated, the stop position of the reel 31 corresponding to the stop switch 42 is determined, and the motor 32 is driven. Control is performed to stop the reel 31 at the determined position.

  For example, in a game in which at least one winning flag is on, the reel control means 65 sets a combination of symbols corresponding to winning combinations (combinations in which the winning flag is on) within the range of stop control of the reels 31. In addition to stop control of the reel 31 so as to be able to stop on the effective line, stop control of the reel 31 so as not to stop the combination of symbols corresponding to the roles other than the winning combination (combinations in which the winning flag is off) .

Here, "within the range of stop control of the reel 31" means the time from the moment the stop switch 42 is operated to the time the reel 31 actually stops or the amount of rotation of the reel 31 (number of moving pieces (symbols)) It means within the range.
In the present embodiment, the reel 31 is rotated at a speed of about 80 revolutions per minute at a constant speed.
When the stop switch 42 is operated, the time from when the stop switch 42 is operated to when the reel 31 is stopped is set within 190 ms. Thereby, in the present embodiment, the maximum moving number of frames from the symbol at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated to the time the reel 31 is stopped is set to four.

  For example, in FIG. 5, when the left stop switch 42 is operated at the moment when the first "Replay" of the left reel 31 is positioned at the lower left stage (on the effective line), the fourth frame ahead, that is, the fifth "bell" Up to B "is the symbol that can be stopped at the lower left level. Therefore, at the above operation timing, the symbols of No. 1 (bit stop) to No. 5 (4 komasubi) become symbols that can be stopped at the lower left stage.

However, the present invention is not limited to the above, and it is also possible to set the maximum moving frame number to four from the symbol next to the symbol located on the effective line at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated. In this case, for example, when the left stop switch 42 is operated at the moment when the first "Replay" of the left reel 31 is located at the lower left level, from the next symbol, that is, the second "blank", The symbol up to the 6th "Replay" which is the symbol of 4 frames ahead is the symbol that can be stopped at the lower left level. Therefore, at the above-mentioned operation timing, the symbols of No. 2 to No. 6 become symbols that can be stopped at the lower left stage.
In the following description, it is assumed that the maximum number of moving frames is four from the symbol located on the effective line at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated.

  First, at the moment when the operation of the stop switch 42 is detected, the stop switch 42 is operated when any of the symbols within the range of the stop control of the reel 31 is a symbol to be stopped at a predetermined effective line. In addition, the symbol is controlled to stop at a predetermined effective line.

  That is, when the reel 31 is immediately stopped at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated, the stop control of the reel 31 is performed until the reel 31 is stopped when the symbol relating to the winning combination is not stopped at the predetermined effective line. By controlling the rotational movement of the reels 31 within the range of (1), it is controlled to stop the symbol relating to the winning combination on a predetermined effective line as much as possible (retraction stop control).

Conversely, if the reel 31 is stopped immediately at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated, the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination will stop on the effective line, the reel 31 is stopped when the reel is stopped. By rotating and controlling the reel 31 within the range of stop control 31, control is performed so as not to stop the combination of the symbols corresponding to the winning combination not winning the winning line (kicking stop control).
Furthermore, in a game in which a plurality of winning combinations have been won, the priority of winning combinations is determined in advance according to the pressing order of the stop switch 42 and the operation timing of the stop switch 42. Perform the pull-in stop control of the most prioritized symbol.

Further, the reel control means 65 detects the pressing order (operation order) of the stop switch 42. The reel control means 65 detects which of the left, middle and right stop switches 42 is operated when the player operates the stop switch 42.
When the stop switch 42 is operated, a signal indicating that the stop switch 42 is operated is input to the reel control means 65. By determining this signal, the reel control means 65 detects which stop switch 42 has been operated. Then, the stop control of the reel 31 corresponding to the operated stop switch 42 is executed.

  Furthermore, the reel control means 65 is provided with a stop position determination table for each condition device. The stop position determination table defines the stop position of the reel 31 with respect to the position of the reel 31 at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated. Then, in each stop position determination table, for example, when the stop switch 42 is operated at the moment when the first symbol ("Replay" in the case of the left reel 31) passes the lower left stage (on the effective line), The stop position is determined in advance, such as moving control only for the symbols (in what kind of kosbery) and stopping the number of symbols in the lower left stage.

Here, the symbol arrangement in the present embodiment will be described.
First, as shown in FIG. 5, four “Replays” are arranged at intervals of 5 symbols on all the reels 31. Thus, "Replay" of all the reels 31 is arranged as "PB = 1".
Similarly, in the left reel 31, one of "BELL A" and "BELL B" is arranged at five symbol intervals. Thereby, it is "PB = 1" arrangement | positioning by these 2 symbol totals.
Further, in the middle reel 31, four "bells C" are arranged at intervals of 5 symbols. Thereby, the "bell C" of the middle reel 31 is in the "PB = 1" arrangement.
Furthermore, in the right reel 31, one of "BELL A" and "BELL B" is arranged at five symbol intervals. Thereby, it is "PB = 1" arrangement | positioning by these 2 symbol totals.

Furthermore, in the right reel 31, four "cherrys" are arranged at intervals of 5 symbols. Thereby, the "cherry" of the right reel 31 is in the "PB = 1" arrangement.
Further, on the left reel 31, four "black 7" or "watermelon" are arranged at five symbol intervals. Thereby, it is "PB = 1" arrangement | positioning by these 2 symbol totals.
Similarly, in the middle reel 31, one of "Blue 7" and "Cherry" is arranged at five symbol intervals. Thereby, it is "PB = 1" arrangement | positioning by these 2 symbol totals.
Furthermore, similarly, any one of “black 7”, “blue 7”, “blank”, or “red 7” is arranged on the right reel 31 at five symbol intervals. Thereby, it is "PB = 1" arrangement | positioning in these 4 symbol totals.

On the other hand, in the left reel 31, "Cherry" is disposed at the third, eighth, and thirteenth positions, and therefore, it is not the "PB = 1" arrangement.
Similarly, for “watermelon”, the left and middle reels 31 are in the “PB ≠ 1” arrangement, and the right reel 31 are in the “PB = 1” arrangement.

Hereinafter, the stop position determination table corresponding to each condition device will be described based on FIGS. 13 to 16 described above.
First, the stop position determination table at the time of winning and replay condition device winning will be described.
The non-winning table is used in a non-winning game of a combination, and defines a combination of symbols when the reel 31 is stopped so that combinations of symbols corresponding to any combination do not stop on the effective line.

  The Replay A table is used when Replay A is won (Replay 01 single winning), and within the range of stop control of the reel 31, regardless of the pressing order of the stop switch 42, the Replay 01 is stopped at the active line, It defines 31 stop positions. The symbols of each reel 31 pertaining to Replay 01 and Replays 02 to 06 described later are arranged in “PB = 1” in all the reels 31. Therefore, at the time of winning the replay, the replay that is always won (when a plurality of replays are duplicately won, one of the replays that is doublely won) is always prized.

  The replay B1 table is used in the game when the replay B1 is won, and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, the replay 02 is stopped at the effective line at the time of the first left stop (the order of correct pressing) and the first left stop The stop position of the reel 31 is determined so as to stop the replay 01 at the effective line (refer to FIG. 13) except at the time (when the pushing order is incorrect).

First, in the game where the replay B1 table is used, “black 7” or “watermelon” is stopped in the lower left stage at the time of the first left stop (“PB = 1” as described above). In this case, "Replay" is stopped in the upper left column.
Next, at the time of the second middle stop, "replay" is stopped at the middle middle stage. Then, at the time of the third right stop, "Cherry" is stopped at the upper right stage. In this case, "Replay" is stopped at the lower right. As a result, "black 7 / watermelon"-"replay"-"cherry" is stopped on the effective line, and a replay 02 is won. Furthermore, "Replay"-"Replay"-"Replay" is stopped at "upper left row"-"middle middle row"-"lower right corner".

On the other hand, in the game in which the replay B1 table is used, at the first middle stop, "blue 7" or "cherry" is stopped at the middle middle stage ("PB = 1"). In this case, "Replay" is stopped at the middle and upper stages. After that, when the left reel 31 is stopped, “black 7” or “watermelon” is stopped in the lower left stage (“PB = 1”). At this time, as described above, “Replay” stops in the upper left row.
When the right reel 31 is stopped, "Replay" is stopped at the upper right corner ("PB = 1"). As a result, "Black 7 / watermelon"-"Blue 7 / Cherry"-"Replay" is stopped on the effective line, and Replay 01 wins. Furthermore, "Replay"-"Replay"-"Replay" is stopped in the "upper left row"-"middle upper row"-"upper right row".

In the game in which the Replay B1 table is used, the same control as at the middle first stop is obtained also at the first right stop.
Furthermore, with regard to the Replay B2 table at the time of Replay B2 winning and the Replay B3 table at the time of Replay B3 winning, Replay 02 is awarded at the time of pressing accuracy and Replay 01 is awarded at the time of incorrect pressing.

  The replay C1 table is used in the game when the replay C1 is won, and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, the replay 01 is stopped at the effective line when the left first stop (pushing order correct) and the left first stop Other than the time (when the pushing order is incorrect), the stop position of the reel 31 is determined so as to stop the replay 03 on the active line (see FIG. 13).

First, in the game in which the replay C1 table is used, the control to stop the replay 01 on the activated line at the time of the first left stop is the same as the replay B1 table, so the description will be omitted.
In addition, in the game in which the replay C1 table is used, “replay” is stopped in the middle to middle (“PB = 1”) at the first stop in the middle. After that, when the left reel 31 is stopped, “bell A” or “bell B” is stopped at the lower left stage (“PB = 1”). In this case, "Replay" stops in the middle left column. When the right reel 31 is stopped, "watermelon" is stopped in the upper right part ("PB = 1"). In this case, "Replay" stops at the middle right. As a result, "Belle A / Bell B"-"Replay"-"Watermelon" is stopped on the activated line, and Replay 03 is won. Furthermore, "Replay"-"Replay"-"Replay" is stopped in the "left middle row"-"middle middle row"-"right middle row".

In the game in which the replay C1 table is used, the control at the time of the first right stop is the same control as at the time of the first middle stop.
Furthermore, the Replay C2 table at the time of Replay C2 winning, and the Replay C3 table at the time of Replay C3 winning, also make Replay 01 win at the time of pressing order correct and Replay 03 at the time of incorrect pressing order .

The Replay D table is used in the game when Replay D is won, and within the range of stop control of the reel 31, regardless of the pressing order of the stop switch 42, the stop position of the reel 31 is made to stop Replay 06 at the effective line. It was decided. Replay 06 is “PB = 1”.
In addition, the Replay E table is used in the game when Replay E is won, and within the range of stop control of the reel 31, regardless of the pressing order of the stop switch 42, the Reel 04 or 05 is stopped on the active line. It defines 31 stop positions. In this case, it is possible to stop either Replay 04 or 05 with “PB = 1”.

  The small combination A table is used in the game when the small combination A is won, and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, regardless of the pressing order of the stop switch 42, the small combination 01 is stopped so as to stop the small combination 01 at the effective line. It defines the stop position. The combination of the symbols of the small part 01 is “black 7 / watermelon”-“bell C”-“replay”, and “PB = 1” in all the reels 31. Also, when "black 7 / watermelon" stops in the lower left row, "bell A / bell B" stops in the middle left row. Furthermore, when "Replay" stops in the upper right row, "Belle A / Bell B" stops in the middle right row. Therefore, at the time of winning of the small part 01, "Bell A / Bell B"-"Bell C"-"Bell A / Bell B" is stopped at "Left middle row"-"middle middle row"-"right middle row".

  The small combination B1 table is used in the game when winning the small combination B1, and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, the small combination 01 is stopped at the effective line when the left first stop (pushing order correct), Except at the time of the first stop (when the pushing order is incorrect), the one-piece combination included in the winning combination (one of the small combinations 03, 10, 11, 18, 19, 26 when the small combination B1 is won) The stop position of the reel 31 is determined so as to stop on the effective line or to stop any of the pattern symbols 01 to 03.

At the time of the first left stop in the game where the small winning combination B1 table is used (pressing order correct answer), since it is the same as the small winning combination A table, the explanation will be omitted.
When the following tables B2 to B12 are used, the same stop control as the table A is performed when the pressing order is correct.
As a result, when the winning combination of the small winning combination A and the small winning combination B is won, the small winning combination 01 always wins, and the "left middle row"-"middle middle row"-"right middle row", "Bell A / Bell B"-"Bell C"-"Bell A / Bell B" stops. Therefore, even if the small winning combination 01 is won in a game in which the instruction function is not activated, the player does not know whether the small winning combination A is won or the pressing order of the small winning combination B group is right.

Further, even during the advantageous section, when the small winning combination A is elected, if the instruction function is operated with a dummy as described above, it is the player whether the small winning combination A or the small winning combination B group is won I do not know.
As described above, in the present embodiment, since the winning combination number of the small winning combination A has a setting difference, it is possible to estimate the setting value by counting the number of times of winning of the small winning combination A. However, if the stop number is made the same between the winning combination of the small winning combination A and the winning combination of the small winning combination B, only the number of winning combinations of the small winning combination A can not be counted. You will not be able to guess.

Further, in the game in which the small winning combination B1 table is used, more specifically, the following stop control is executed.
First, when the small winning combination B1 is won, as shown in FIG. 14, seven small winning combinations 01, 03, 10, 11, 18, 19, and 26 are won, and the combinations of the symbols are as follows.
Small role 01: "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Bell C"-"Replay" (9 sheets)
Small part 03: "Belle A"-"Belle A"-"Belle A" (1 sheet)
Small role 10: "Bell B"-"Bell B"-"Bell B" (1 sheet)
Small role 11: "Bell C"-"Bell A"-"Blue 7" (1 sheet)
Small role 18: "Red 7"-"Bell B"-"Red 7" (1 sheet)
Minor part 19: "Bell C"-"Blue 7"-"Bell A" (1 sheet)
Small role 26: "Red 7"-"Red 7"-"Bell B" (1 sheet)

Then, the following method can be mentioned as stop control of the reel 31 when a plurality of small winning combinations with different payout numbers are dually won.
As a first priority, when it is possible to stop all of the symbols (of the reel 31) constituting the combination of winning symbols on the effective line, the reel 31 is stopped at that position.

Next, when it is not possible to "stop all symbols that make up the combination of winning symbols on the activated line" (when it is not possible to adopt the first priority), the "number of sheets priority" is given as the second priority. The stop control of the reel 31 is performed by either "or number priority".
Here, “number priority” means that the symbols of the reel 31 that make up the combination of the symbols with the largest number of payouts among the combinations of the symbols winning in duplicate are preferentially stopped (drawn) in the effective line Say Therefore, at the time of winning the small winning combination B group, the small winning combination 01 corresponds to the combination of (9) symbols having the largest payout number.
On the other hand, "number priority" means stopping the symbols of the reel 31 on the effective line so that the number of combinations of symbols that can be stopped on the effective line is the largest.

  For example, when the small winning combination B1 is won and the middle first stop is made, it is not possible to simultaneously stop all the middle reels 31 associated with the winning combination on the activated line. While there are multiple types of symbols of the middle reel 31 of the winning combination, there is only one valid line, so only one type of symbol can be stopped on the valid line.

Therefore, when the small winning combination B is won, the reel 31 is controlled to stop by either the number priority or the number priority. In the present embodiment, the reels are stopped and controlled by giving priority to the number of sheets when the pressing order is correct, and the reels 31 are controlled to be stopped by giving priority to the number when the pressing order is incorrect. When stop control of the reel is given by number priority, the small winning combination 01 (9-piece winning combination) is configured such that one winning combination can be made without winning (it has a case of being dropped).
As described above, the operation mode of the stop switch 42 is performed such that the number of sheets is prioritized in the specific pushing order (the correct pushing order in the present embodiment), and the number priority is given in the other pushing order (the incorrect pushing order in the present embodiment). The number of sheets or the number of sheets is prioritized in accordance with.

In the above example, when giving priority to the number during middle first stop (pressing order incorrect answer), if either "BELL A" or "BELL B" is stopped on the valid line, it will stop on the valid line The number of possible symbol combinations is two each and is the maximum. For example, if "BELL A" is stopped on the active line when the middle reel 31 is stopped, the small winning combination 03 or 11 can be won. Since "Bel A" or "Bell B" of middle reel 31 is "PB = 1" in the 2 symbol addition, when middle reel 31 stops, either "Bell A" or "Bell B" is always stopped It can be done.
Here, it is assumed that “bell A” is stopped when the middle reel 31 stops. In this case, at this time, the small winning combination 03 or 11 can be won.

  Next, when stopping the left reel 31, priority is given to stopping "Bell A" or "Bell C" on the active line. As shown in FIG. 5, in the left reel 31, “bell A” is disposed at No. 15 and No. 0, and “bell C” is disposed at No. 18. For this reason, when the symbol of the left reel 31 at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated is 11th to 19th and 0th, "bell A" or "bell C" can be stopped on the effective line, When the number is 1 to 10, "BELL A" or "BELL C" can not be stopped at the valid line.

Therefore, when the left reel 31 is stopped at random (without aiming at a specific symbol), "bell A" or "bell C" stops on the effective line with a probability of "1/2". In particular, in the present embodiment, since "bell A" can be stopped without stopping "bell C", the symbols on the left reel 31 at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated are the 11th to 19th and 0th If so, always stop "BELL A" on the active line.
In this way, stopping "Bell A" without stopping "Bell C" enables display of pattern symbols described later when the winning combination is lost at the time of the third stop. This is because (when the "bell C" is stopped when the left reel 31 is stopped, the pattern pattern can not be displayed).

  On the other hand, when the "bell A" can not be stopped on the effective line when the left reel 31 is stopped, control is performed so as to stop any pattern pattern on the effective line. As shown in FIG. 12, among the pattern symbols in which the symbol of the middle reel 31 is “bell A”, the symbol of the left reel 31 is “black 7” or “watermelon”. Since "black 7" or "watermelon" of the left reel 31 is "PB = 1" in the two symbol addition, it is possible to always stop any of these symbols.

Therefore, at the time of the first stop in the middle and the second stop on the left, "bell A"-"bell A"-"rotating" or "black 7 / watermelon"-"bell A"-"rotating" .
Furthermore, when "bell A"-"bell A"-"rotating" before right third stop, when "bel A" can be stopped on the effective line when the right reel 31 is stopped, " Stop Bell A '. As shown in FIG. 5, in order to stop "BELL A" on the effective line, if the symbol on the effective line at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated is within the range of No. 4 to No. 13, stop "BEL A" If it is in the other range, it can not stop "Bell A". Therefore, when the right reel 31 is stopped at random, "bell A" stops on the effective line with a probability of "1/2". When "BELL A" is stopped on the effective line when the right reel 31 is stopped, "BELL A"-"BELL A"-"BELL A", and the small winning combination 03 is won.

On the other hand, in the case of "bell A"-"bell A"-"rotating", when "bell A" can not be stopped on the effective line when the right reel 31 is stopped, "cherry" is made effective. Stop it ("PB = 1"). As a result, the combination of symbols on the effective line becomes "bell A"-"bell A"-"cherry", and the pattern symbol 03 stops.
Also, in the case of "black 7 / watermelon"-"bell A"-"rotating", when the right reel 31 is stopped, "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped on the effective line ("PB = 1" ). Thereby, the combination of the symbols on the effective line becomes "black 7 / watermelon"-"bell A"-"bell A / bell B", and the pattern symbol 01 is stopped.

Next, it is assumed that “BELL B” is stopped on the activated line at the first stop (due to wrong order of pressing) when the small winning combination B1 is won. In this case, the small winning combination 10 or 18 can be won at this time.
Next, when the left reel 31 is to be stopped, priority is given to stopping “Bell B” or “Red 7”, which is a symbol related to the small winning combination 10 or 18, at the effective line. As shown in FIG. 5, in the left reel 31, “bell B” is disposed at the fifth and tenth, and “red 7” is disposed at the seventh. For this reason, when the symbol of the left reel 31 at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated is No. 1 to No. 10, "Bell B" or "Red 7" can be stopped at the effective line, otherwise In some cases, "Bell B" or "Red 7" can not be stopped on the active line.

  Therefore, when the left reel 31 is stopped at random (without aiming at a specific symbol), “Bell B” or “Red 7” stops on the effective line with a probability of “1/2”. In particular, in the present embodiment, since “bell B” can be stopped without stopping “red 7”, when the symbol of the left reel 31 at the moment the stop switch 42 is operated is 1 to 10 Will always stop "BELL B" on the active line.

  On the other hand, when "the bell B" can not be stopped to an effective line at the time of stop of the left reel 31, it controls so that one pattern symbol is stopped to an effective line. As shown in FIG. 12, the pattern symbol whose symbol on the middle reel 31 is “bell B” is “black 7” or “watermelon”. Since "black 7" or "watermelon" of the left reel 31 is "PB = 1" in the two symbol addition, it is possible to always stop any of these symbols.

Therefore, at the first stop in the middle and the second stop on the left, "bell B"-"bell B"-"rotating" or "black 7 / watermelon"-"bell B"-"rotating" .
Furthermore, when "bell B"-"bell B"-"rotating" before the third right stop, "bell B" can be stopped at the effective line when the right reel 31 stops. Stop Bell B '. As shown in FIG. 5, in order to stop "BELL B" on the effective line, the symbol of the effective line at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated should be in the range of 14th to 18th, or 19th to 3rd. For example, "bell B" can be stopped, and "bell B" can not be stopped in any other range. Therefore, when the right reel 31 is stopped at random, "bell B" stops on the effective line with a probability of "1/2". When "BELL B" is stopped on the effective line when the right reel 31 is stopped, "BELL B"-"BELL B"-"BELL B", and the small winning combination 10 is won.

On the other hand, in the case of "bell B"-"bell B"-"rotating", if "bell B" can not be stopped on the effective line when the right reel 31 is stopped, "cherry" is made effective. Stop it ("PB = 1"). Thereby, the combination of the symbols on the effective line becomes "bell B"-"bell B"-"cherry", and the pattern symbol 03 is stopped.
Also, in the case of "black 7 / watermelon"-"bell B"-"rotating", when the right reel 31 is stopped, "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped on the effective line ("PB = 1" ). Thereby, the combination of the symbols on the effective line becomes "black 7 / watermelon"-"bell B"-"bell A / bell B", and the pattern symbol 01 is stopped.

From the above, at the time of the first stop at the time of winning the small winning combination B1, the middle reel 31 can stop the symbol pertaining to one winning combination with “PB = 1”, and both the left and right reels 31 are “1 It is possible to stop the symbols related to one piece with the probability of / 2 ". Furthermore, when it is not possible to stop the symbol relating to one piece, it is possible to always stop the pattern symbol. Therefore, at the time of the first middle stop (when the pushing order is incorrect) at the time of winning the small winning combination B1,
One piece: 1/4 probability of winning pattern pattern: 3/4 probability of stopping.
Furthermore, at the time of winning a single role,
"Belle A"-"Belle A"-"Belle A" (small part 03)
"Bell B"-"Bell B"-"Bell B" (small role 10)
It will be either.

Next, when the small winning combination B1 is won, the case of the first right stop will be described. When giving priority to the number when the right reel 31 is stopped, the number of combinations of symbols that can be stopped on the effective line is 2 if either “BELL A” or “BELL B” is stopped on the effective line Become the largest. For example, if "bell A" is stopped on the active line when the right reel 31 is stopped, the small winning combination 03 or 19 can be won. Since “Bell A” or “Bell B” of the right reel 31 is “PB = 1” in the two symbol addition, it is possible to always stop “Bell A” or “Bell B” when the right reel 31 is stopped. it can.
First, it is assumed that "BELL A" is stopped on the effective line when the right reel 31 is stopped. In this case, the small winning combination 03 or 19 can be won at this time.

  Next, when the left reel 31 is to be stopped, priority is given to stopping the "bell A" or "bell C", which is a symbol related to the small part 03 or 19, on the effective line. Here, as in the above, priority is given to stopping the "bell A". "Bell A" can be stopped with the probability of "1/2". In addition, when "bell A" can not be stopped, "black 7" or "watermelon" is stopped ("PB = 1" in 2 symbol summation).

Therefore, at the time of the first right stop and the second left stop, "bell A"-"rotating"-"bell A" or "black 7 / watermelon"-"rotating"-"bell A" .
Furthermore, before the middle third stop, in the case of "bell A"-"rotating"-"bell A", when "bel A" can be stopped on the effective line when the middle reel 31 is stopped, " Stop Bell A '. As shown in FIG. 5, in order to stop "BELL A" on the effective line, if the symbol on the effective line at the moment when the stop switch 42 is operated is within the range of No. 5 to 14, stop "BEL A" If it is in the other range, it can not stop "Bell A". Therefore, when the middle reel 31 is stopped at random, the "bell A" stops on the effective line with a probability of "1/2". When "BELL A" is stopped on the effective line when the middle reel 31 is stopped, "BELL A"-"BELL A"-"BELL A", and the small winning combination 03 is won.

On the other hand, in the case of "bell A"-"rotating"-"bell A", when "bell A" can not be stopped on the effective line when the middle reel 31 is stopped, "blue 7" or "cherry" Stop at the effective line ("PB = 1" in 2 symbol summation). As a result, the pattern symbol 02 is stopped at the effective line.
Further, in the case of "black 7 / watermelon"-"rotating"-"bell A", when the middle reel 31 is stopped, "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped on the effective line ("PB = 1") ). As a result, the pattern symbol 01 is stopped at the effective line.

In addition, it is assumed that “BELL B” is stopped on the effective line when the right reel 31 is stopped for the first time. In this case, the small winning combination 10 or 26 can be won at this time.
Next, when the left reel 31 is to be stopped, priority is given to stopping “Bell B” or “Red 7”, which is a symbol related to the small winning combination 10 or 26, at the effective line. Here, priority is given to stopping "BELL B". "Bell B" can be stopped with a probability of "1/2". In addition, when "bell B" can not be stopped, "black 7" or "watermelon" is stopped ("PB = 1" in 2 symbol summation).

Therefore, at the time of the first right stop and the second left stop, "bell B"-"rotating"-"bell B" or "black 7 / watermelon"-"rotating"-"bell B" .
Furthermore, before the middle third stop, in the case of "bell B"-"rotating"-"bell B", when "bel bell B" can be stopped on the effective line when the middle reel 31 is stopped, " Stop Bell B '. Here, when the middle reel 31 is stopped at random, "Bell B" stops on the effective line with a probability of "1/2". When "BELL B" is stopped on the effective line when the middle reel 31 is stopped, "BELL B"-"BELL B"-"BELL B", and the small winning combination 10 is won.

On the other hand, in the case of "bell B"-"rotating"-"bell B", when "bell B" can not be stopped on the effective line when the middle reel 31 is stopped, "blue 7" or "cherry" Stop at the effective line ("PB = 1" in 2 symbol summation). As a result, the pattern symbol 02 is stopped at the effective line.
Further, in the case of "black 7 / watermelon"-"rotating"-"bell B", when the middle reel 31 is stopped, "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped on the effective line ("PB = 1") ). As a result, the pattern symbol 01 is stopped at the effective line.

From the above, at the time of the first right stop at the time of winning the small winning combination B1, the right reel 31 can stop the symbol related to one winning combination with “PB = 1”, and both the left and right reels 31 are “1 It is possible to stop the symbols related to one piece with the probability of / 2 ". Furthermore, when it is not possible to stop the symbol relating to one piece, it is possible to always stop the pattern symbol. Therefore, at the time of the first right stop at the time of winning the small winning combination B1 (pressing order incorrect answer),
One piece: 1/4 probability of winning pattern pattern: 3/4 probability of stopping.
Furthermore, at the time of winning a single role,
"Belle A"-"Belle A"-"Belle A" (small part 03)
"Bell B"-"Bell B"-"Bell B" (small role 10)
It will be either.
The winning rate and the stopping rate of the pattern symbol are the same as in the middle first stopping.
Therefore, when the small winning combination B1 is won, the small winning combination 01 wins with “PB = 1” at the time of the first stop on the left (when the pressing order is correct). On the other hand, in the middle or right first stop (pressing order incorrect answer), one winning combination is won with a probability of "1/4", and the pattern symbol is stopped with a probability of "3/4". .

Even when the small winning combination B2 is won, the small winning combination B2 table is provided as in the small winning combination B1 winning. The winning combination included when winning the small role B2,
Small role 01: "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Bell C"-"Replay" (9 sheets)
Small part 04: "Belle A"-"Belle A"-"Belle B" (1 sheet)
Small part 09: "Bell B"-"Bell B"-"Bell A" (1 sheet)
Small part 12: "Bell C"-"Bell A"-"Red 7" (1 sheet)
Small part 17: "Red 7"-"Bell B"-"Blue 7" (1 sheet)
Small role 20: "Bell C"-"Blue 7"-"Bell B" (1 sheet)
Small part 25: "Red 7"-"Red 7"-"Bell A" (1 sheet)
It is.

Then, at the time of the first left stop (when the pressing order is correct), the small winning combination 01 is awarded.
Next, at the time of the first first stop (when the pressing order is incorrect), "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped at the effective line by number priority.
First, when "bell A" is stopped at the middle first stop, priority is given to stopping either "bell A" or "bell C" at the time of left stop. Here, since "bell A" can be stopped when "bell C" can be stopped, "bell A" is stopped without stopping "bell C". In addition, when "bell A" can not be stopped, "black 7 / watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, it becomes either "bell A"-"bell A"-"rotating" or "black 7 / watermelon"-"bell A"-"rotating".

When "bell A"-"bell A"-"rotating", when "right" can stop "bell B", "bell B" is stopped. As a result, it becomes a winning of the small role 04. In addition, when "bell B" can not be stopped at the time of right stop, "cherry" is stopped. Thereby, the pattern pattern 03 is stopped.
On the other hand, when "black 7 / watermelon"-"bell A"-"rotating" is reached, "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped at the time of right stop. Thereby, the pattern pattern 01 is stopped.

  Next, it is assumed that the "bell B" is stopped at the middle first stop. In this case, at the time of left stop, priority is given to stopping either "bell B" or "red 7". Here, since “bell B” can be stopped when “red 7” can be stopped, “bell B” is stopped without stopping “red 7”. In addition, when "bell B" can not be stopped, "black 7 / watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, it becomes either "bell B"-"bell B"-"rotating" or "black 7 / watermelon"-"bell B"-"rotating".

When "bell B"-"bell B"-"rotating", when "right" can stop "bell A", "bell A" is stopped. As a result, it becomes a winning of the small role 09. In addition, when "BELL A" can not be stopped at the time of right stop, "CHERRY" is stopped. Thereby, the pattern pattern 03 is stopped.
On the other hand, when "black 7 / watermelon"-"bell B"-"turning", the "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped at the time of right stop. Thereby, the pattern pattern 01 is stopped.

Next, at the time of the first right stop at the time of winning the small winning combination B2 (pressing order incorrect answer), "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped on the effective line by number priority.
First, when "bell A" is stopped at the time of the first right stop, priority is given to stop either "bell B" or "red 7" at the time of left stop. Here, since “bell B” can be stopped when “red 7” can be stopped, “bell B” is stopped without stopping “red 7”. In addition, when "bell B" can not be stopped, "black 7 / watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, it becomes either "bell B"-"rotating"-"bell A" or "black 7 / watermelon"-"rotating"-"bell A".

When "bell B"-"rotating"-"bell A", "bell B" can be stopped when the "bell B" can be stopped at the middle stop. As a result, it becomes a winning of the small role 09. In addition, when "bell B" can not be stopped at the middle stop, "blue 7 / cherry" is stopped. Thereby, the pattern pattern 02 is stopped.
On the other hand, when "black 7 / watermelon"-"rotating"-"bell A", "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped at the middle stop. Thereby, the pattern pattern 01 is stopped.

  Next, it is assumed that "bell B" is stopped at the time of the first right stop. In this case, at the time of left stop, priority is given to stopping either "bell A" or "bell C". Here, since "bell A" can be stopped when "bell C" can be stopped, "bell A" is stopped without stopping "bell C". In addition, when "bell A" can not be stopped, "black 7 / watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, it becomes either "bell A"-"rotating"-"bell B" or "black 7 / watermelon"-"rotating"-"bell B".

When "bell A"-"rotating"-"bell B", "bell A" can be stopped when the "bell A" can be stopped at the middle stop. As a result, it becomes a winning of the small role 04. In addition, when "bell A" can not be stopped at the middle stop, "blue 7 / cherry" is stopped. Thereby, the pattern pattern 02 is stopped.
On the other hand, when "black 7 / watermelon"-"rotating"-"bell B", "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped at the middle stop. Thereby, the pattern pattern 01 is stopped.

From the above, when winning the small part B2, when the pressing order is incorrect,
One piece: 1/4 probability of winning pattern pattern: 3/4 probability of stopping.
Furthermore, at the time of winning a single role,
"Belle A"-"Belle A"-"Belle B" (small part 04)
"Bell B"-"Bell B"-"Bell A" (small part 09)
It will be either.

Also when the small winning combination B3 is won, the small winning combination B3 table is provided as in the small winning combination B1 winning. The winning combination included when winning the small role B3 is
Small role 01: "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Bell C"-"Replay" (9 sheets)
Small part 05: "Belle A"-"Belle B"-"Belle A" (1 sheet)
Small role 08: "Bell B"-"Bell A"-"Bell B" (1 sheet)
Small role 13: "Bell C"-"Bell B"-"Blue 7" (1 sheet)
Small role 16: "Red 7"-"Bell A"-"Red 7" (1 sheet)
Minor part 21: "Bell C"-"Red 7"-"Bell A" (1 sheet)
Small part 24: "Red 7"-"Blue 7"-"Bell B" (1 sheet)
It is.

Then, at the time of the first left stop (when the pressing order is correct), the small winning combination 01 is awarded.
Next, at the time of the first first stop (when the pressing order is incorrect), "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped at the effective line by number priority.
First, when "bell A" is stopped at the middle first stop, priority is given to stop either "bell B" or "red 7" at the left stop. Here, the “bell B” is stopped without stopping the “red 7” as described above. In addition, when "bell B" can not be stopped, "black 7 / watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, it becomes either "bell B"-"bell A"-"rotating" or "black 7 / watermelon"-"bell A"-"rotating".

When "bell B"-"bell A"-"rotating", when "right" can stop "bell B", "bell B" is stopped. As a result, it becomes winning of the small role 08. In addition, when "bell B" can not be stopped at the time of right stop, "cherry" is stopped. Thereby, the pattern pattern 03 is stopped.
On the other hand, when "black 7 / watermelon"-"bell A"-"rotating" is reached, "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped at the time of right stop. Thereby, the pattern pattern 01 is stopped.

  Next, it is assumed that the "bell B" is stopped at the middle first stop. In this case, at the time of left stop, priority is given to stopping either "bell A" or "bell C". Here, "bell A" is stopped without stopping "bell C" as described above. In addition, when "bell A" can not be stopped, "black 7 / watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, it becomes either "bell A"-"bell B"-"rotating" or "black 7 / watermelon"-"bell B"-"rotating".

When "bell A"-"bell B"-"rotating", when "right" can stop "bell A", "bell A" is stopped. As a result, it becomes a winning of the small role 05. In addition, when "BELL A" can not be stopped at the time of right stop, "CHERRY" is stopped. Thereby, the pattern pattern 03 is stopped.
On the other hand, when "black 7 / watermelon"-"bell B"-"turning", the "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped at the time of right stop. Thereby, the pattern pattern 01 is stopped.

Next, at the time of the first right stop at the time of winning the small winning combination B2 (pressing order incorrect answer), "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped on the effective line by number priority.
First, when "bell A" is stopped at the time of the first right stop, priority is given to stopping either "bell A" or "bell C" at the time of left stop. Here, "bell A" is stopped as described above. In addition, when "bell A" can not be stopped, "black 7 / watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, it becomes either "bell A"-"rotating"-"bell A" or "black 7 / watermelon"-"rotating"-"bell A".

When "bell A"-"rotating"-"bell A", the "bell B" is stopped when the "bell B" can be stopped at the middle stop. As a result, it becomes a winning of the small role 05. In addition, when "bell B" can not be stopped at the middle stop, "blue 7 / cherry" is stopped. Thereby, the pattern pattern 02 is stopped.
On the other hand, when "black 7 / watermelon"-"rotating"-"bell A", "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped at the middle stop. Thereby, the pattern pattern 01 is stopped.

  Next, it is assumed that "bell B" is stopped at the time of the first right stop. In this case, at the time of left stop, priority is given to stopping either "bell B" or "red 7". Here, "bell B" is stopped similarly to the above. In addition, when "bell B" can not be stopped, "black 7 / watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, it becomes either "bell B"-"rotating"-"bell B" or "black 7 / watermelon"-"rotating"-"bell B".

When "bell B"-"rotating"-"bell B", the "bell A" is stopped when the "bell A" can be stopped at the middle stop. As a result, it becomes winning of the small role 08. In addition, when "bell B" can not be stopped at the middle stop, "blue 7 / cherry" is stopped. Thereby, the pattern pattern 02 is stopped.
On the other hand, when "black 7 / watermelon"-"rotating"-"bell B", "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped at the middle stop. Thereby, the pattern pattern 01 is stopped.

From the above, when winning the small part B3, when the pushing order incorrect answer,
One piece: 1/4 probability of winning pattern pattern: 3/4 probability of stopping.
Furthermore, at the time of winning a single role,
"Belle A"-"Belle B"-"Belle A" (small part 05)
"Bell B"-"Bell A"-"Bell B" (small role 08)
It will be either.

Also when the small winning combination B4 is won, the small winning combination B4 table is provided as in the small winning combination B1 winning. The winning combination included when winning the small role B4 is
Small role 01: "Black 7 / Watermelon"-"Bell C"-"Replay" (9 sheets)
Small part 06: "Bell A"-"Bell B"-"Bell B" (1 sheet)
Small role 07: "Bell B"-"Bell A"-"Bell A" (1 sheet)
Small role 14: "Bell C"-"Bell B"-"Red 7" (1 sheet)
Small part 15: "Red 7"-"Bell A"-"Blue 7" (1 sheet)
Small role 22: "Bell C"-"Red 7"-"Bell B" (1 sheet)
Small role 23: "Red 7"-"Blue 7"-"Bell A" (1 sheet)
It is.

Then, at the time of the first left stop (when the pressing order is correct), the small winning combination 01 is awarded.
Next, at the time of the first first stop (when the pressing order is incorrect), "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped at the effective line by number priority.
First, when "Bell A" is stopped at the middle first stop, priority is given to stopping either "Bell B" or "Red 7" at the left stop, but here it is the same as above. Stop "Bell B". In addition, when "bell B" can not be stopped, "black 7 / watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, it becomes either "bell B"-"bell A"-"rotating" or "black 7 / watermelon"-"bell A"-"rotating".

When "bell B"-"bell A"-"rotating", when "right" can stop "bell A", "bell A" is stopped. As a result, it becomes a winning of the small role 07. In addition, when "bell B" can not be stopped at the time of right stop, "cherry" is stopped. Thereby, the pattern pattern 03 is stopped.
On the other hand, when "black 7 / watermelon"-"bell A"-"rotating" is reached, "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped at the time of right stop. Thereby, the pattern pattern 01 is stopped.

  Next, it is assumed that the "bell B" is stopped at the middle first stop. In this case, at the time of left stop, priority is given to stopping either "bell A" or "bell C". Here, "bell A" is stopped as described above. In addition, when "bell A" can not be stopped, "black 7 / watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, it becomes either "bell A"-"bell B"-"rotating" or "black 7 / watermelon"-"bell B"-"rotating".

When "bell A"-"bell B"-"rotating", when "right" can stop "bell B", "bell B" is stopped. As a result, it becomes a winning of the small role 06. In addition, when "bell B" can not be stopped at the time of right stop, "cherry" is stopped. Thereby, the pattern pattern 03 is stopped.
On the other hand, when "black 7 / watermelon"-"bell B"-"turning", the "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped at the time of right stop. Thereby, the pattern pattern 01 is stopped.

Next, at the time of the first right stop at the time of winning the small winning combination B4 (pressing order incorrect answer), "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped on the active line by number priority.
First, when "bell A" is stopped at the time of the first right stop, priority is given to stop either "bell B" or "red 7" at the time of left stop. Here, "bell B" is stopped similarly to the above. In addition, when "bell B" can not be stopped, "black 7 / watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, it becomes either "bell B"-"rotating"-"bell A" or "black 7 / watermelon"-"rotating"-"bell A".

When "bell B"-"rotating"-"bell A", "bell A" is stopped when "bell A" can be stopped at the middle stop. As a result, it becomes a winning of the small role 07. In addition, when "bell A" can not be stopped at the middle stop, "blue 7 / cherry" is stopped. Thereby, the pattern pattern 02 is stopped.
On the other hand, when "black 7 / watermelon"-"rotating"-"bell A", "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped at the middle stop. Thereby, the pattern pattern 01 is stopped.

  Next, it is assumed that "bell B" is stopped at the time of the first right stop. In this case, at the time of left stop, priority is given to stopping either "bell A" or "bell C". Here, "bell A" is stopped as described above. In addition, when "bell A" can not be stopped, "black 7 / watermelon" is stopped. Therefore, it becomes either "bell A"-"rotating"-"bell B" or "black 7 / watermelon"-"rotating"-"bell B".

When "bell A"-"rotating"-"bell B", the "bell B" is stopped when the "bell B" can be stopped at the middle stop. As a result, it becomes a winning of the small role 06. In addition, when "bell B" can not be stopped at the middle stop, "blue 7 / cherry" is stopped. Thereby, the pattern pattern 02 is stopped.
On the other hand, when "black 7 / watermelon"-"rotating"-"bell B", "bell A" or "bell B" is stopped at the middle stop. Thereby, the pattern pattern 01 is stopped.

From the above, when winning the small part B4, when the pressing order is incorrect,
One piece: 1/4 probability of winning pattern pattern: 3/4 probability of stopping.
Furthermore, at the time of winning a single role,
"Bell A"-"Bell B"-"Bell B" (small role 06)
"Bell B"-"Bell A"-"Bell A" (small part 07)
It will be either.

In the following, the detailed description of the small role B5 table to the small role B12 table at the time of winning the small portions B5 to B12 will be omitted, and only the outline thereof will be described.
In the small combination B5 table used when winning the small combination B5, the small combination 01 wins at the first stop in the middle of the pressing order correct time, and the small combination 03 or small at the probability of "1/4" The part 10 is won, and the pattern symbol is stopped with the probability of "3/4". That is, the small winning combination that can be won when the pushing order is incorrect is the same as when the small winning combination B1 is won.
In the small combination B6 table used when winning the small combination B6, the small combination 01 wins at the first stop in the middle of the press order correct time, and the combination of the small combination with the probability of “1/4” indicates the small combination 04 Alternatively, the small winning combination 09 is won, and the pattern symbol is stopped with the probability of "3/4". That is, the small winning combination that can be won when the pushing order is incorrect is the same as when the small winning combination B2 is won.

Furthermore, in the small combination B7 table used when winning the small combination B7, the small combination 01 wins at the first stop in the middle of the pressing order correct time, and the small combination with the probability of "1/4" at the pressing order incorrect solution 05 or small part 08 wins, the pattern design stops with probability of 3/4. That is, the small winning combination that can be won when the pushing order is incorrect is the same as when winning the small winning combination B3.
Furthermore, in the small combination B8 table used when winning the small combination B8, the small combination 01 wins at the first stop during the middle order which is the pressing order correct time, and the small combination with a probability of “1/4” at the pressing order incorrect solution 06 Alternatively, the minor player 07 wins, and the pattern symbol stops with the probability of "3/4". That is, the small winning combination that can be won when the pushing order is incorrect is the same as when the small winning combination B4 is won.

In the small combination B9 table used when winning the small combination B9, the small combination 01 wins at the first right stop which is the pressing order correct time, and the small combination 03 or small at the probability of "1/4" The part 10 is won, and the pattern symbol is stopped with the probability of "3/4". That is, the small winning combination that can be won when the pushing order is incorrect is the same as when the small winning combination B1 is won.
Further, in the small combination B10 table used when winning the small combination B10, the small combination 01 is won at the time of the first right stop which is the pressing order correct time, and when the pressing order is incorrect the small combination 04 with a probability of "1/4" Alternatively, the small winning combination 09 is won, and the pattern symbol is stopped with the probability of "3/4". That is, the small winning combination that can be won when the pushing order is incorrect is the same as when the small winning combination B2 is won.

Furthermore, in the small combination B11 table used when winning the small combination B11, the small combination 01 is won at the time of the first right stop which is the pressing order correct time, and the small combination with the probability of "1/4" 05 or small part 08 wins, the pattern design stops with probability of 3/4. That is, the small winning combination that can be won when the pushing order is incorrect is the same as when winning the small winning combination B3.
Furthermore, in the small combination B12 table used when winning the small combination B12, the small combination 01 is won at the time of the first right stop, which is the pressing order correct time, and the small combination 01 with a probability of "1/4" Alternatively, the minor player 07 wins, and the pattern symbol stops with the probability of "3/4". That is, the small winning combination that can be won when the pushing order is incorrect is the same as when the small winning combination B4 is won.

  As is apparent from the above, when the small winning combination B is selected, the winning combination in which the winning combination is incorrect, the single winning combination that can be won is the low winning combination 03 to the low winning combination 10. Therefore, the small winning combination other than the above included in each condition device does not win. What is set in this way relates to a one-piece combination that can be won when a small combination C-group winning, which will be described later, is won.

  The small combination C1 table is used in the game when the small combination C1 is won, and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, the small combination 02 is stopped at the effective line when the left first stop (pushing order correct) Except at the time of the first stop (when the pushing order is incorrect), the one-piece combination (one of the small combinations 03 to 10 when the small combination C1 is elected) included in the winning combination is stopped at the effective line. The stop position of the reel 31 is determined.

  At the time of pressing correct when winning the small winning combination C1 (same small winning combination C2 and C3 to be described later), as in the small winning combination B group winning, to win the small winning combination 02 (three-piece winning combination) by number priority Control. The combination of symbols corresponding to the small part 02, as shown in FIG. 7, is "bell A / bell B"-"blue 7 / cherry"-"watermelon", and "PB = 1" in all reels 31. . Therefore, the small winning combination 02 can always be won when the pushing order is correct.

  Further, at the time of winning the small winning combination C1 (in the middle or at the first right stop), control is made to win one winning combination (small winning combination 03 to 10) by number priority. Here, as shown in FIG. 8, the combination of symbols of the small part 03 to 10 is a combination of symbols of “bell A” or “bell B” for each reel 31. Furthermore, in any reel 31 among combinations of symbols of small part 03-10, "Bell A" is four, "Bell B" is four, and either "Bell A" or "Bell B" Even if stopped, the condition of number priority is met. In particular, at the time of winning the small combination C2 and the small combination C3, although including the small combination 21 and the small combination 22 respectively, even if these small combination is included in the winning combination, there is no change in the type of symbol priority. Moreover, in all the reels 31, "Bell A" or "Bell B" is "PB = 1" in the two symbol addition. Therefore, it is always possible to win one of the small winning combinations 03-10.

  From the above, at the time of winning the small winning combination C1, the small winning combination 02 (three winning combinations) wins ("PB = 1") when the pressing order is correct, and any of the small winning combinations 03 to 10 (1 The winning combination ("PB = 1") is not won, and a drop-off (stopping of the pattern pattern) does not occur as in the case of winning the small winning combination B group.

  The same table as the small combination C1 table is also applied to the small combination C2 table and the small combination C3 table respectively used when the small combination C2 is elected and the small combination C3 is elected. As shown in FIG. 16, when the small winning combination C2 is won, the middle first stop is the correct pressing order, and when the small winning combination C3 is the right first first stopping is the correct pressing order. The stop control for winning the small role 02 or the small roles 03 to 10 is the same as when the small role C1 is won, so the explanation will be omitted.

  Therefore, the one-piece combination (small combination 03 to 10) that can be stopped at the wrong order in the winning combination of the small combination B group win (one small combination 03-10), and the one combination that can be stopped at the depression sequence of the small combination C group win ( Small roles 03-10) become the same. As a result, it is not possible to determine which of the small combination B group or the small combination C group was won in the game just by looking at the small combination winnings of the small combination 03-10.

  The small combination D table is used in the game when the small combination D is won, and the stop position of the reel 31 is determined so as to stop the small combination 35 on the effective line within the range of the stop control of the reel 31. In the small role D table, the pressing order of the stop switch 42 does not matter. The combination of symbols of the small part 35 is “watermelon” as shown in FIG. The “watermelon” is arranged at “PB ≠ 1” for the left and middle reels 31 and is arranged at “PB = 1” for the right reel 31. Therefore, in the game in which the small part D table is used, in the left and middle reels 31, if the stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when the "watermelon" stops on the effective line, the "watermelon" stops on the effective line. When the stop switch 42 is operated at a timing when the "watermelon" does not stop on the effective line, the "watermelon" does not stop on the effective line, and the small role 35 is dropped.

  The small winning combination E1 table is used in the game when the small winning combination E1 is won, and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, the stopping position of the reel 31 is determined so as to stop the small winning combination 36 or 38 on the effective line. It is. Here, as shown in FIG. 16, when the stop switch 42 is operated at the left or middle first stop, it becomes so-called stop form of middle cherry (so that "cherry" stops at middle left) The stop position of the reel 31 is determined. On the other hand, when the stop switch 42 is operated at the first right stop, the stop position of the reel 31 is determined so that the middle cherry does not stop.

  It should be noted that the winning of the small combination E1 includes the small combinations 36 and 38 (and further includes the small combination 37 at the time of the small combination E2 winning described later), but since these small combinations both have two pieces, The above-mentioned number / number priority is not applied, and the reel 31 can be stopped by any predetermined stop control. Therefore, control is made to give priority to the winning of the small winning combination 36 at the left or middle first stop, and control is given to give priority to the winning combination of the small winning combination 38 at the right first stop.

  In FIG. 5, “cherry” of the left reel 31 is the third, the eighth, and the thirteenth (“PB ≠ 1”). Then, when "Cherry" is stopped in the middle left, "Blank" or "Red 7" stops in the effective line which is the lower left. Therefore, in this case, the symbol relating to the small winning combination 36 is stopped for the left reel 31.

For example, when the 7th "Red 7" is stopped at the lower left stage at the first left stop ("Cherry" stop in the middle left), "Blue 7" or "Cherry" is valid when the middle reel 31 is stopped. Stop at the line (“PB = 1”), and when the right reel 31 is stopped, one of “Black 7”, “Blue 7”, “Red 7” or “Blank” (4 symbols totaling “PB =” Stop 1)) on the active line. As a result, it becomes a winning of the small role 36.
Also, when the second reel or the 12th “blank” is stopped at the lower left stage when the left reel 31 stops (the “cherry” stops at the middle left stage), “when the middle reel 31 stops” in the same manner as above. "Blue 7" or "Cherry" is stopped on the effective line, and when the right reel 31 is stopped, "black 7", "blue 7", "red 7" or "blank" is stopped on the effective line . As a result, it becomes a winning of the small role 36.

The stop control is performed in the same manner as described above for the middle first stop. Therefore, the symbols relating to the small winning combination 36 stop at "PB = 1" for the middle and right reels 31, and there are cases where the "red 7" or "blank" stops for the left reel 31 and when it does not stop "PB ≠ 1").
However, when it is not possible to stop “red 7” or “blank” in the lower left stage at the left or middle first stop, “bell A” or “bell B” is stopped. The “bell A” or “bell B” can be stopped at “PB = 1”. The stop form in this case is "bell A / bell B"-"blue 7 / cherry"-"black 7 / blue 7 / red 7 / blank", and the small winning combination 38 is won.

On the other hand, in the game in which the small winning combination E1 table is used, priority is given to winning of the small winning combination 38 at the time of the first right stop. Therefore, in this case, "bell A / bell B"-"blue 7 / cherry"-"black 7 / blue 7 / red 7 / blank" stops, and the minor player 38 wins with "PB = 1". .
Furthermore, at the time of the first right stop, even if "Cherry" can be stopped at the left middle level when the left reel 31 is stopped, "Bell A" or "Bell" at the lower left level without stopping "Cherry" in the left middle level. B "(in this case," Cherry "non-stop in the left middle) is stopped.

The small combination E2 table is used in the game when the small combination E1 is won, and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, the small combination 36 or 38 (or the small combination 37) is stopped on the effective line, the reel 31 The stop position of the
Therefore, since the small winning combination E2 table can perform the same stop control as the small winning combination E1 table, it is possible to use the same stopping position determination table.

  Alternatively, in the case of the left first stop, “Replay” is made effective for the middle reel 31 only when “red 7” or “blank” can be stopped in the lower left stage (at the middle stage cherry stop). It may be stopped (“PB = 1”), and any one of “black 7”, “blue 7”, “red 7” or “blank” may be stopped for the right reel 31. As a result, the minor player 37 wins. Temporarily, if it carries out stop control in this way, it will become stop control which can distinguish whether it is at the time of small winning combination E1 at the middle stage cherry stop, or it is at the small winning combination E2 winning time.

The small part F table is used in the game when the small part F is won, and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, the stop position of the reel 31 is set so as to stop any one of the small parts 01 to 39 on the effective line. It was decided.
In the present embodiment, the small winning combination F is drawn only during 1BB operation.
Further, regardless of the pressing order of the stop switch 42, the small winning combination F table performs stop control with priority to the number of sheets. In this way, the small role 39 is always awarded. In addition, in the left reel 31, since it is "PB = 1" arrangement | positioning by 2 symbol totals of "Cherry" or "Bell C", the small winning combination 39 wins by "PB = 1."

  The small part G table is used in the game when the small part G is won, and within the range of the stop control of the reel 31, the stop position of the reel 31 is determined so as to stop the small part 40 on the activated line. . The small winning combination 40 is a combination of symbols arranged in “PB = 1” for all the reels 31. Therefore, the small winning combination 40 can always be won in the game.

The 1BBA table is used when playing a game when the item condition device number "1" is won (1BBA alone), or when 1BBA is won before the previous game and is not won in the game this time, and stop control of the reel 31 In the range of, while stopping the combination of symbols corresponding to 1BBA on the effective line, and not stopping the combination of symbols corresponding to roles other than 1BBA on the effective line, determine the combination of symbols when the reel 31 is stopped It is
Since the symbol of 1BBA is "Red 7" on all reels 31 (PB) 1), "Red 7" can not be stopped on the effective line unless the eye is pushed.

Similarly, the 1 BBB table is used when the character condition condition device number “2” is won (1 BBB alone), or the 1 BBB is won before the previous game and is not won in the current game, and the reel 31 In the range of stop control of, while stopping the combination of symbols corresponding to 1 BBB on the effective line, and not to stop the combination of symbols corresponding to roles other than 1 BBB on the effective line, The combination is defined.
Since the symbol of 1BBB is “PB ≠ 1” for all reels 31 as in 1BBA, “red 7” and “black 7” can not be stopped at the effective line unless the eyes are pushed.

  In addition, although the detailed explanation is omitted, in the game in which 1BB and the small winning combination or replay are won twice or in the game in which 1BB is won before the previous game and the small winning combination or replay in this game is won, the following stop control Can be mentioned.

For example, first, priority is given to stopping symbols on both the winning 1BB and small winning combination or replay on the effective line, and when it is not possible to stop both symbols on the effective line, the winning small The stop control which gives priority to stopping the symbol of a role or a replay on an effective line is mentioned. In addition, the stop control to stop the symbols of both 1BB and the small winning combination or the replay on the effective line is up to the second stopping, and at the third stopping, it is controlled to win 1BB or the small winning combination or the replay The role of is not a duplicate prize.
Second, priority is given to stopping the winning 1BB and symbols for both the small part and the replay on the active line, and when it is not possible to stop both symbols on the active line, the winning 1BB There is a stop control (opposite to the above) that gives priority to stopping the symbol of the effective line.

  Furthermore, thirdly, although priority is given to stopping the winning combination or symbol of the replay on the effective line, when stopping the winning combination or symbol of the replay on the effective line, additionally, When it is possible to simultaneously stop the winning 1BB symbol on the activated line, stop control may be made to stop at that position.

  When 1BB ("PB ≠ 1") and a small combination or replay of "PB = 1" are won twice (when they are simultaneously selected), the symbol of 1BB won and the combination or small combination or replay It is not necessary to perform control to stop both of the symbol and the effective line, and it is also possible to control to stop only the symbol of "PB = 1" or the symbol of the replay on the effective line. Therefore, since the small roles E1 and E2 are “PB = 1”, only the small roles E1 and E2 are respectively selected when the 1BBA and the small role E1 of this embodiment are double-wined, and when the 1BBB and the small role E2-double-wins. It is also possible to execute stop control to win a prize.

The explanation is returned to FIG.
The prize determination means 66 determines whether or not the combination of symbols of the reel 31 stopped at the effective line matches the combination of symbols corresponding to any of the combinations when the reel 31 is stopped (whether any combination has won Or not). The winning determination means 66 determines the symbol on the activated line by detecting, for example, the angle at which the motor 32 is stopped, the number of steps, and the like.

  The payout means 67 determines that the combination of symbols stopped on the active line when the reel 31 is stopped matches the combination of symbols corresponding to any of the combinations by the prize determination unit 66, and when the combination of the combinations is achieved A predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player according to the winning combination, or processing such as addition of credits is performed. In addition, at the time of winning a replay, control is performed such that the number of medals inserted in the game this time is automatically inserted without paying out medals.

The RT control means 68 determines whether or not the transition condition of RT is satisfied when stopping all reels 31 for each game, and controls to perform the transition of RT when it is determined that the transition condition of RT is satisfied. It is a thing.
FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an RT transition diagram in the present embodiment. As described above, the RT of the present embodiment includes non-RT, RT1 to RT4, 1BBA actuation (1BBA gaming), 1BBB actuation (1BBB gaming). Then, as shown in FIG. 17 and FIG. 18, the types (numbers) of the condition devices to be drawn and the winning probability thereof are different for each RT.

  In this embodiment, the transition timing of RT is set at the time of the stop display of the combination of symbols or the winning of the RT transition combination, that is, the complete stop (at the stop of all the reels 31). Therefore, for example, when the pattern symbol is stopped when all reels 31 are stopped during RT1, RT shifts from RT1 to RT2 when all the reels 31 stop. The transition from non-RT or RT1 to RT3 to RT4 may be made based on the winning of 1BB, or based on the fact that 1BB has not won in the game winning 1BB. It is also good. In the present embodiment, the process shifts to RT4 based on the fact that 1BB has not won in the game winning 1BB.

The non-internal medium game corresponds to non-RT, RT1, RT2 and RT3. In addition, inside during the game, corresponds to RT4.
In addition, during the advantageous section, control is basically made to stay at RT3 as control of the slot machine 10 side, but when a player's push switch mistake of the stop switch 42 or the like occurs, the case of staying at RT2 is also possible. is there. In the case of the advantageous section ending with only one instruction function operation game (except for the game winning the small winning combination C group, the replay B group, and the replay C group), it is not necessary to make it stay at RT3. That is, in the RT2, one command function operation game (excluding the game winning the small winning combination C group, the replay B group, and the replay C group) may be performed to end the advantageous section. Of course, basically, it may be made to stay at RT3.

In the non-RT, non-internal middle game of RT1 to RT3, the lottery of the article condition device is performed. When the player wins 1BB in these RTs and 1BB does not win, the RT control means 68 determines that the transition condition of RT is satisfied, and shifts to RT4 corresponding to the internal middle game.
In addition, when 1BB wins the game which is won by 1BB, in order to start the operation of 1BBA or 1BBB when the game is completely stopped this time, RT4 (internal game) is not passed in this case.

RT 4 is continued until the winning 1 BB wins. When it is determined that 1 BBA or 1 BBB has won in RT4, the RT control means 68 determines that the transition condition of RT is satisfied, and shifts to 1 BBA operation (1 BBA gaming) or 1 BBB operation (1 BBB gaming), respectively.
Once the 1 BBA is in operation, the operation is continued until the 1 BBA operation termination condition is satisfied. In the present embodiment, the operation termination condition of 1BBA is set to the fact that the number of dispensed sheets exceeds 150 sheets.

  The RT control means 68 determines whether or not more than 150 medals have been paid out during each game, 1 BBA operation, and when it is determined that more than 150 medals have been paid out, the termination condition of the 1 BBA operation It is judged that it will satisfy, and it controls to shift to non-RT from the next game.

The same applies to the 1BBB operation as described above. When transitioning during 1BBB operation, the operation is continued until the 1BBB operation termination condition is satisfied. In the present embodiment, the termination condition of the 1 BBB operation is set to the payout of more than 200 medals.
The RT control means 68 determines whether or not each game has been paid out more than 200 medals, and when it is determined that more than 200 medals have been paid out, it determines that the 1 BBB operation end condition is satisfied, From the next game, control to shift to RT1.

  Replay is not included in the counts of 150 or 200 during 1BB operation. As shown in FIG. 17, during the 1BB operation, there is a case in which Replay D may be won, but the automatic bet at the time of Replay winning is not counted in the number of payouts. Therefore, as the replay D is won, the number of games during the 1BB operation increases. Particularly in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 17, since the winning probability of replay D during 1 BBA operation is set to 10 times that during 1 BBB operation, the expected value of the number of games during 1 BBA operation is 1 BBB operation. It will be more than the expected value of the number of games played.

During operation of 1BBA and 1BBB, as described above, continuous operation of RB is performed. The RB ends when either of the two winning combinations or two games is satisfied, and after that, the RB is operated again on the condition that the end condition of the 1BB operation is not satisfied.
Further, as shown in FIG. 18, the winning probability of the small winning combination E2 during the 1BBA operation is set higher in the setting 6 than in the setting 1. When the small winning combination E 36 is won and the small winning combination E 2 is won, the number of payouts is two. As a result, the number of games for setting 6 to reach the end condition (that exceeds 150 sheets) during 1 BBA operation is greater than that for setting 1. Therefore, during the 1 BBA operation in the advantageous section, the expectation value for winning the replay D is higher in the setting 6 than in the setting 1, so the probability that the advantageous section is added becomes high. Details of this point will be described in the control of the advantageous section described later.

  At the time of initialization of RWM53, the game starts from non-RT. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the RT may be maintained even when the RWM 53 is initialized. Here, for example, when the RWM 53 is initialized while carrying over the 1BB winning, the 1BB winning is also maintained (carried over).

In the non-RT mode, the RT control means 68 continues the non-RT mode until the pattern pattern is displayed. In the non-RT, a small winning combination B group is drawn, and one of the small winning combination B groups is won, and when the small winning combination is dropped, a pattern symbol is displayed. When the pattern symbol is displayed in the non-RT mode, the RT control means 68 determines that the transition condition of RT is satisfied, and shifts to RT2 from the next game.
In RT1, as in non-RT, RT1 is maintained until the pattern pattern is displayed. And if a pattern figure is displayed in RT1, it will transfer to RT2.

RT2 is an RT in which the staying rate is highest in the normal section. At RT2, when Replay B is won and Replay 02 is won, it is determined that the transition condition of RT is satisfied, and the next game is shifted to RT3.
On the other hand, in RT3, the pattern symbol is displayed or the Replay C group is won, and Replay 03 continues until it is won. When the pattern symbol is displayed or the Replay 03 wins in RT3, it is determined that the transition condition of RT is satisfied, and the next game is shifted to RT2.

  As described above, in the normal section (and in the non-inside), the RT2 and RT3 are generally moved back and forth, but the RT2 stay rate is the highest in probability. When one BB is won in RT2 and RT3 (including non-RT and RT1), the transition from the next game to RT4 (inside) is as described above.

  In addition, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section during the normal section, when the game decided to shift to the advantageous section is the RT3, the instruction function at the time of winning of the replay C group to maintain the RT3 To display the correct order of pressing the Replay 01. This prevents a fall to RT2. Further, when the small winning combination B is won, the correct pressing order for winning the small winning combination 01 is displayed by operating the instruction function. Similarly, when the small winning combination C group is won, the correct pressing order for winning the small winning combination 02 is displayed by operating the instruction function.

On the other hand, when the game decided to shift to the advantageous section is RT2, the correct answer for winning Replay 02 by activating the indication function at the time of Replay B group winning while activating the indication function as described above The pressing order is displayed, and control is made to shift to RT3.
In addition, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section when it is non-RT or RT1, it shifts to the advantageous section even during non-RT or RT1, but the indication function until the pattern pattern is displayed In the operable game (for example, at the time of winning the small winning combination B group), do not operate the instruction function, and wait until the pattern symbol is displayed. Then, the pattern symbol is displayed in non-RT or RT1, and when it shifts to RT2, the instruction function is operated in the same manner as described above.

The advantageous section control means 69 is a means for executing transition from a normal section to an advantageous section (including a standby section), determination of whether or not to end the advantageous section, addition in the advantageous section, operation control of the indication function, etc. is there.
First, the advantageous section control means 69 determines whether or not to shift to the advantageous section in the normal section and the non-internal middle game.
Further, the advantageous segment control means 69 determines whether or not to add the number of games in the advantageous segment in the advantageous segment and the non-internal middle game.

  In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 17, whether or not to shift to the advantageous section during the normal section is simultaneously selected as the advantageous section when a specific condition device is won in the lottery by the role lottery means 61. Decide to migrate. In addition, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, it is limited to not being inside, and it is not decided to shift from the normal section to the advantageous section inside.

Further, as described above, in the case of determining the transition to the advantageous section in accordance with the combination lottery result (condition device that has won), it is not possible to make the condition of winning of the condition device having a setting difference.
Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 17, there is a case where the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section may be made on condition of winning of the condition device common to the setting.

  As shown in FIG. 17, for example, at the time of single BBA winning, there are cases in which it is decided to shift to the advantageous section and cases in which it is not decided to shift. When the random number value included in the range of “20” is extracted out of “30” of the numbers allocated to single winning of 1 BBA, it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, and the number “10” When the random value included in the range of is extracted, it is decided not to shift to the advantageous section. The same applies to the single winning of “1BBA + small role D”, “1BBA + small role E1”, and small portion E1.

  In addition, when the condition device shown in FIG. 17 is won during the advantageous section, the advantageous section is added on each case. It should be noted that it is possible to perform an additional drawing lottery instead of uniformly adding an advantageous section when winning in these condition devices, or to draw a lottery whether or not to perform an additional drawing lottery. However, in the present embodiment, in order to simplify the explanation, the addition of the advantageous section is uniformly performed.

When it is determined to shift to the advantageous section in the normal section, the advantageous section of the predetermined number of games may be set, or the number of games of the advantageous section may be determined by lottery or the like. Alternatively, instead of determining the termination condition of the advantageous section by the number of games, the termination conditions other than the number of games (for example, the number of payouts, the number of differences, the number of wins of the small winning combination B group, the number of operations of the instruction function, etc.) may be determined. Good. In the present embodiment, when the condition device shown in FIG. 17 is won in the normal section, the process shifts to an advantageous section in which the end condition is set as follows.
Specifically, for example, the following may be defined.
1BBA single winning case (place number "20"): Initial value is counted after the end of 1BB game and it shifts to the advantageous section of 100 games 1BBA + small combination D duplicate winning case (place number "5"): initial value is 1BB After the end of the game count to shift to the advantageous section of 250 games 1BBA + small combination E1 when double winning combination (place number "20"): The initial value is counted after the end of the 1BB game and shift to the advantageous section of 200 games Small When combination D single winning (place number "50"): The advantageous section of the initial value 150 games small combination E1 when alone winning (place number "250"): the advantage section of the initial value 100 games, or one small role Of the advantageous sections ending with the operation of the instruction function at the time of winning the group B (it may be determined by the lottery, or included in the range of the number “120” of the number “250” Initial value is 10 when the When the random number value included in the range of “130” is extracted as an advantageous section of 0 game, it may be an advantageous section ending with the operation of the instruction function at the time of winning one small winning combination B group)

In addition, since the winning probability of the small winning combination D is lower than the winning probability of the small winning combination E1, in order to give a feeling of premiere when winning the small winning combination D, the number of games in the advantageous section when winning the small winning combination D is small It is set more than at the time of winning combination E1. The number of games in the advantageous section at the time of winning the small winning combination E1 may be set to be larger than that at the time of winning the small winning combination D.
In addition, even when the condition device shown in FIG. 17 is won during the advantageous section, for example, when 1BBA is elected alone, the number of games of the advantageous section is increased by “30”, and the small combination E1 is elected (place “250” Is determined by adding "50" to the number of games, "20" by adding the number of games when the small combination E1 alone is won (number "750"), and so on.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 17, in the normal section, when the small combination E1 alone is won, it is decided to shift to the advantageous section with a probability of “1⁄4” (“250” among all “1000”). Do.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 18, the single winning probability of the small winning combination E 2 is set higher for setting 6 than for setting 1.

Therefore, the higher the setting, the higher the appearance ratio of middle-stage cherries, but the probability that it is determined that the middle-stage cherry appears to shift to the advantageous section is higher in setting 1 than in setting 6.
That is, although there is no setting difference in the probability of deciding to shift to the advantageous section, it is possible to give the player an impression that there is a setting difference.
In contrast to this embodiment, setting 1 may be set higher than setting 6 for the single winning probability of the small winning combination E2 in FIG. 18.
In this way, the lower the setting, the higher the appearance probability of the middle cherry, but the lower the probability determined to shift to the advantageous section at the middle cherry appearance.
Further, during the advantageous section, when the small combination E1 alone is won, it is always added to the advantageous section. On the other hand, when the small winning combination E2 alone in the advantageous section is won, the advantageous section is not added. Therefore, the higher the setting, the higher the appearance ratio of middle-stage cherries, but the probability that the advantageous section is added when the middle-stage cherries appear is higher in setting 1 than in setting 6. Therefore, although there is no setting difference in the probability that the advantageous section is added, it is possible to give the player an impression that there is a setting difference.

In addition, 1 BBA is a special combination (except when 1 BBA and a small combination D are double-wined) common to set winning combinations, and 1 BBB is a special combination having a setting difference in winning combinations.
In this case, when the 1BBA is selected during the advantageous section and the 1BBA is activated, the advantageous section can be added during the operation of the 1BBA. On the other hand, when it wins 1 BBB which has a setting difference in an advantageous section, and it becomes in operation of 1 BBB, it is defined that it is not possible to add an advantageous section during operation of 1 BBB. It is defined that when 1BBA and minor player D having a set difference in the advantageous section are dually elected and 1BBA is in operation, it is not possible to add the advantageous section while 1BBA is in operation.

On the other hand, when setting 1 and setting 6 are compared during operation of 1 BBA, the winning probability of the small winning combination A is lower in setting 6 than in setting 1, and the winning probability of small winning combination E 2 is set in setting 6 Higher than. Therefore, since the operation termination condition of the 1BBA is set to a payout exceeding 150 sheets, the number of games (expected value) during 1BBA operation is larger in the setting 6 than in the setting 1.
Therefore, for example, if it is set to add the advantageous section when Replay D is won, the expected value of the number of times to win Replay D during 1 BBA operation is higher in Setting 6 than in Setting 1, so the higher the setting, the better. The advantageous section can be easily added.

Furthermore, during 1 BBA operation, when the number of times of playing reaches a predetermined number of times, it may be set to perform the addition of the advantageous section.
As described above, during the 1 BBA operation, the setting 6 has a larger expected value of the number of games played during the 1 BBA operation than the setting 1.
As described above, the operation termination condition of the 1BBA is set to the fact that there is a payout exceeding 150 sheets. On the other hand, the expected payout number per game during the 1 BBA operation is about “8.664” in setting 1 and about “8.557” in setting 6. Accordingly, the expected value of the number of games for which the number of payouts reaches 150 is approximately “17.3” in setting 1 and approximately “17.5” in setting 6.
Therefore, if the number of games reaches, for example, the 18th game during 1BBA operation, it is decided that the advantage section is unconditionally added, the higher the set value, the easier the advantage section is added be able to.
Furthermore, during the 1 BBA operation, it may be set to perform the addition of the advantageous section each time a certain number of games have passed. Also in this case, the higher the set value, the easier the addition of the advantageous section can be performed.

On the other hand, since 1 BBB is a special part having a set difference, it is not possible to add an advantageous section during 1 BBB operation.
Also, as shown in FIG. 22, when 1BBA is finished, it shifts to non-RT, and when it shifts to non-RT, it stays in non-RT until the pattern symbol is displayed, and the pattern symbol is displayed Migrate to RT2. That is, RT1 is not passed after the end of the operation of 1BBA.

  On the other hand, after 1 BBB operation ends, it shifts to RT1 and stays at RT1 until the pattern pattern is displayed. At RT1, a replay E is drawn, and as shown in FIG. 17, if RT1 is in the advantageous section, the advantageous section is added when the replay E is won. As a result, after completion of the 1 BBB operation, the probability of being added to the advantageous section becomes higher than after the completion of the 1 BBA operation. Then, by setting the number of additional games in the advantageous section at the time of Replay E winning to an appropriate value, it is possible to balance between after the end of the 1 BBA operation and after the end of the 1 BBB operation.

  Then, when maintaining the advantageous section and shifting to RT1, the pattern function is not activated in the game capable of operating the instruction function (for example, at the time of winning the small winning combination B group) until the pattern pattern is displayed, the pattern pattern Wait until is displayed. Then, the pattern symbol is displayed in RT1, and when it shifts to RT2, the indication function is operated. When the transition to RT1 with maintaining the advantageous section, during the advantageous section, by activating the instruction function at the time of winning the small combination B group, the small combination 01 wins (unless there is a push order mistake) pattern The symbol is never displayed. For this reason, when transitioning to RT1 during the advantageous section, it is possible to keep staying at RT1 until the advantageous section ends. The indication function is activated when the small winning combination B is won, not until the end of the advantageous section, but after the predetermined number of games, the indication function can be operated until the pattern symbol is displayed. For example, in the case of winning a small winning combination (group B), the instruction function may not be activated, and the process may wait until the pattern symbol is displayed.

In addition, when it is decided to shift from the normal section to the advantageous section, the advantageous section control means 69 controls to turn on the advantageous section display LED 77 until the predetermined timing comes, and other than the advantageous section (generally When it is a section or a standby section), control is performed to turn off the advantageous section display LED 77.
First, when it is determined that the advantageous section control means 69 shifts to the advantageous section, after the end of the game determined to shift to the advantageous section (all reels 31 are stopped, and when there is a payout, the medal is Until the next game medal insertion (bet) after payout is possible, and when it has stored medals, until the operation of the settlement switch 46 (settlement processing operation) becomes possible, the advantageous section display LED 77 is lighted Control.

Also, secondly, when the transition to the advantageous section is determined based on the winning of the condition device including 1BB capable of carrying over the winning information after the next game, until the combination of the symbols corresponding to 1BB is stopped, Control is performed to turn on the advantageous section display LED 77.
Therefore, if it is determined to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of the condition device that includes the special part, for example, the special part carries over the winning information to the next game like 1BB, 2BB, and RB. In some cases, the advantageous section display LED 77 may be lighted until the combination of symbols corresponding to the special combination is stopped (only in the case where a standby section is provided).

  On the other hand, when the special part is effective only in the game in which the special part has been won like SB, CB, and it is a special part that does not carry over the winning information to the next game, It is necessary to light the advantageous section display LED 77 until the next game medal insertion (bet) is possible and the operation of the settlement switch 46 is possible, as in the case of deciding the transition to the advantageous section based on that. is there.

FIG. 23 is a diagram showing timing 1 and timing 2 as the timing at which the advantageous section display LED 77 is lighted.
In the present embodiment, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, first, as the lighting timing of the advantageous section display LED 77, “After deciding to shift to the advantageous section, after the end of the current game (all Until the reel 31 is stopped and medals for the next game can be inserted (betted) when there is a payout, and the settlement switch 46 can be operated (hereinafter, this timing is referred to as “predetermined timing”). The advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on. Then, when the game start switch 41 is operated next time, the advantageous section starts. That is, in the present embodiment, in principle, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on before the advantageous section starts. This makes it possible to prevent the player from stopping the game without knowing after deciding to shift to the advantageous section.

  In FIG. 23, timing 1 shows an example in this case. In this example, when it is determined that the small winning combination E1 is (independently) and it is decided to shift to the advantageous interval based on the winning of the small winning combination E1, the advantageous interval display LED 77 is turned on by a predetermined timing. As in this example, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of the condition device that does not include the 1BB that can be carried forward after the next game, the winning information is always applied.

Also, secondly, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of the condition device including 1BB capable of carrying over the next game or later, the combination of symbols corresponding to 1BB is displayed By the time, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on. Then, when the start switch 41 of the next game of the game in which the combination of the symbols corresponding to 1BB is displayed is operated, the advantageous section starts. In the present embodiment, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on before the advantageous section starts.
In FIG. 23, timing 2 shows an example in this case. In this example, when 1BBA and the small winning combination E1 are dually won and it is decided to shift to the advantageous section based on this double winning, the advantageous section display is performed by the time the symbol combination corresponding to 1BBA is displayed. Turn on the LED 77. Therefore, as long as the combination of symbols corresponding to 1BBA is displayed, the lighting timing may be before that, for example, timing 1 (in the case where a standby section is not provided, etc.).

  Therefore, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of the condition device that includes the special part that can be carried over after the next game, the combination of symbols corresponding to the special part is displayed uniformly. It may be determined to turn on the advantageous section display LED 77 when it is done. Alternatively, even if the transition to the advantageous section based on the winning of the condition device that includes the special role, it is uniformly decided to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of the conditional device that does not include the special role. Similar to the time, the advantageous section display LED 77 may be lighted by a predetermined timing.

Alternatively, the lighting timing may be determined by lottery or the like when it is determined to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of the condition device including the special part that can be carried over after the next game.
Also, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of the condition device that includes the special part that can be carried over after the next game, for example, other than timing 1 and timing 2 shown in FIG. In the next game of the game winning the special part, when the start switch 41 is operated, during rotation of at least a part of the reels 31, or when the third stop switch 42 is operated (regardless of presence or absence of winning of the part) It may be

  In that case, when the start switch 41 of the next game of the game is operated, the advantageous section will start (the standby section will be ended in the next game of the game won by the special combination). In addition, after the next game after the game for which the special part is won, the game in which it is possible to win the special part, when the start switch 41 is operated, rotation of at least a part of the reels 31 It may be middle or at the time of operation of the third stop switch 42 (regardless of the presence or absence of the winning of the combination) or the like. In that case, when the start switch 41 of the next game of the game is operated, the advantageous section will be started (the standby section will be ended in the game where it is possible to win the special part) ).

Here, for example, at the time of winning of the small combination E1, it is possible to stop the "red 7"-"cherry"-"red 7" (Fig. 9) of the number 59 in the small combination 36. Then, it is assumed that "red 7"-"rotating"-"red 7" has stopped as a result of pinching in the game when 1 BBA is won. Next, the player aimed at "Cherry" at the time of stopping the middle reel 31, but when "Cherry" did not stop on the effective line (it was controlled to kick), the small player E1 was elected in the game concerned It can be seen that Then, in this case, if the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on by a predetermined timing, the player will know that it is a single winning of 1BBA, and in the next game of the 1BBA winning, the symbol of 1BBA It becomes possible to look at the combination of That is, the lighting of the advantageous section display LED 77 functions as a notification of winning of 1BBA. This is because it is not decided to shift to the advantageous section at the time of losing (when not winning). Conventionally, when 1BB is won, etc., there is a tendency to perform 1BB election notification after performing continuous effects (effect to ask if 1BB is won or not), but the advantageous section display LED 77 is displayed by a predetermined timing. If it is turned on, such continuous effects are wasted.
Therefore, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of the condition device that includes the 1BB that can be carried over after the next game, the advantageous section display LED 77 is not turned on until the winning 1BB wins. To have.

On the other hand, when it is determined to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of “1 BBA + small winning combination E1”, if priority is given to the winning combination of the small winning combination E1 in the game, the 1 BBA does not win in the game.
On the other hand, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section based on the single winning combination of the small winning combination E1, it is necessary to turn on the advantageous section display LED 77 by a predetermined timing (since a standby section can not be provided) ).
Therefore, when it is decided to shift to the advantage section based on the winning of "1 BBA + small winning combination E1," if it is made not to light the advantageous section display LED 77 until the winning 1 BBA wins, the small winning combination E1 When the advantageous section display LED 77 is lighted up by a predetermined timing at the time of winning a prize, the player knows that 1 BBA has not been won twice.

  Therefore, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of “1 BBA + small combination E1”, when the advantageous section display LED 77 is lighted by the predetermined timing (the timing 1 shown in FIG. 23), A case (timing 2 shown in FIG. 23) is provided in which the advantageous section display LED 77 is not turned on even after the timing has passed. Which section to use is, for example, distributed according to the unit number at the time of winning "1BBA + small combination E1", or advantageous period at the time of winning "1BBA + small combination E1" (only when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section) A lottery (two-step lottery) may be performed to determine whether the display LED 77 is to be lighted immediately (whether or not a standby section is provided). As a result, even if the advantageous section display LED 77 is lighted by the predetermined timing, it does not mean that 1 BBA is not repeatedly won, and the player's expectation can be continuously felt.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the small combination E1 is set to “PB = 1”, the small combination E1 is always selected either when “1 BBA + small combination E1” is won or when the small combination E1 alone is elected. The small part E1 (small part 36 or 38) is won in the game.
However, it is also possible to set the small combination included in the condition device of the small combination E1 to “PB ≠ 1”. Then, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section when the “1 BBA + small combination E1” is won when the small combination included in the condition device of the small combination E1 is set to “PB ≠ 1”, At the time of winning, the advantageous section display LED 77 is lighted by a predetermined timing, but when the small winning combination E1 is not winning, it is possible to control the advantageous section display LED 77 not to light even after the predetermined timing has passed.

  However, not limited to the above, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of the condition device that includes the special part that can be carried over after the next game, the advantageous section display LED 77 always by a predetermined timing. May be turned on (always at the timing 1 shown in FIG. 23), or the advantageous section display LED 77 may not always be turned on even after the predetermined timing has passed (always shown in FIG. 23). Timing 2).

In addition, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section at the time of single winning of the small winning combination D and at the single winning of the small winning combination E1, it is necessary to light the advantageous section display LED 77 by a predetermined timing (provide a standby section It can not be done), so it becomes a so-called prompt notification and can not meet the expectations of the player.
Therefore, as described above, at the time of single winning of the small combination E1, 2 of the advantageous interval continuing until the predetermined number of games have been digested, and the advantageous interval ending by the operation of the instruction function at the time of one small combination B group winning Provide a type. Then, after turning on the advantageous section display LED 77, during the first winning combination of the small combination B group, an effect that beats the expectation (it is an advantageous section that continues until it digests the predetermined game frequency as a final result By outputting a continuous effect indicating whether or not the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on by a predetermined timing, it is possible to satisfy the expectation of the player thereafter. Even if the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on, it is not known at the time of turning on whether the advantageous section continues until the predetermined game number of times is reached.

It should be noted that even when the small winning combination E1 is won alone, when the transition to the advantageous section is not made, the advantageous section display LED 77 is not lighted at all, so it is necessary to output a continuous presentation Absent.
In addition, when the above-mentioned condition device is won, it is not set to one winning combination of small winning combination B group (one indication function operation game) or a predetermined number of games, but an indicating function at the winning combination of small winning combination B group It is also possible to determine the number of times of operation by lottery, for example, within the range of 1 to 50 times, or the like.

  As a specific process for lighting the advantageous section display LED 77, the eighth bit of the segment data for displaying the digit 2 is changed from "0" to "1". Since segment data for displaying the digit 2 is stored in the RWM 53, the segment data is changed. For example, data obtained by ORing “10000000” with segment data up to that point is stored in the RWM 53 as new data. Thus, in the segment data of digit 2, the value corresponding to the segment DP becomes "1".

Also, as described above, the digit of the present embodiment is provided with a total of nine digits 1 to 9. As a method of lighting these digits, control as follows can be mentioned.
The main control board 50 executes an "interruption process" every 2.235 ms in parallel with the main process, in addition to "the (main process) main process" which is a process repeated every game. In this interrupt processing, lighting control of the LED, drive control of the reel 31, transmission processing of an external signal, and the like are performed. Then, in the present embodiment, dynamic lighting is performed on the digits 1 to 9 so that one digit is lit for each interrupt processing. For example, only the digit 1 is turned on in the current interrupt processing, and the digit 2 is turned on in the next interrupt processing. By repeating this, one digit is lit at a rate of once in nine interrupt processing. Not limited to such dynamic lighting, static lighting may be performed in which a signal line is connected to each digit.

  Accordingly, when it is time to light the advantageous section display LED 77, the segment data is changed as described above. After the change, when the lighting timing of the digit 2 comes by the interrupt processing, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on.

  Further, in the game in which the instruction function should be operated during the advantageous section, the advantageous section control means 69 obtains the number of winnings by operating the instruction function separately from the notification of the correct pressing order by the sub control board 80 described later. The display order information is displayed on the display LED 78. For example, when the small winning combination B1 is won, pressing order instruction information "= 1" corresponding to the pressing order instruction number "A1" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78. This control corresponds to the “operation of the indication function” in the present embodiment.

It is to be an indication function operation game during the advantageous section,
1) Non-RT and RT1: When the small winning combination C is won (when the small winning combination B is won, there is no operation of the instruction function since the pattern symbol is desired to be displayed)
2) RT2: Replay B group winning, Small winning combination B winning, and Small winning combination C winning 3) RT3: Replay C winning combination, Small winning combination B winning, and Small winning combination C winning .

Furthermore, as described above, when the small winning combination A is won, the instruction function is activated as a dummy. When winning the small role A, since the small portion 01 wins with no order of pressing, it is not disadvantageous to the player no matter which order of pressing is indicated, so even if a specific pressing order is displayed, the game is played It does not harm the fairness of
Specifically, when the small winning combination A is won, it is possible to select any one of the push order instruction numbers “A1” to “A3” by lottery using a random number or the like.

  Further, when the small winning combination E1 is won when approaching the upper limit of the advantageous section, the advantageous section control means 69 selects the pushing order instruction number "A3" and displays the pushing order of the right first stop. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the middle stage cherry from appearing when approaching the upper limit of the advantageous section.

  In the present embodiment, during the advantageous section, the advantageous section is added when the small combination E1 is won, and the advantageous section is not added when the small combination E2 is elected, so always when the small combination E2 is selected during the advantageous section The first right stop may be displayed so that the middle row cherry is not displayed. In particular, since the advantageous section is always added when the small winning combination E1 in the advantageous section is won, it is possible to give the player an impression that the advantageous section is added by the middle row cherry being displayed. Therefore, when it is not desired to display the middle row cherry in a game in which the advantageous section is not added (when the small winning combination E2 is won), the right first stop is displayed.

  In addition, for example, when approaching the upper limit of the advantageous section (when the advantageous section can not be added), it is either of the winning of the small combination E1 and the winning of the small combination E2 to prevent the middle row cherry from being displayed. Also, the right first stop is displayed by the operation of the instruction function, and the middle row cherry is not displayed.

In the present embodiment, the upper limit game number of the advantageous section is set to “1500 games”. Therefore, for example, when the small winning combination E1 (and E2) is won when the number of games from the start of the advantageous section is "1400 games" or more, the right first stop is displayed by operating the instruction function. .
As described above, the "operation of the indication function" in the present invention refers to the display of the operation mode of the stop switch 42 which is advantageous to the player, but in the present embodiment, the appearance of the middle stage cherry is avoided The display of the order of pressing is also included in the "operation of the indication function". Of course, such a case may not be included in the "operation of the indication function", and the display of the order of pressing may be performed only on the image display device 23.

In the present embodiment, an advantageous interval counter 69a and an upper limit counter 69b are provided as counters for counting the number of games regarding the advantageous interval (see FIG. 1).
When it is determined to shift to the advantageous section, the advantageous section counter 69a sets an initial value of the number of times of playing (for example, “100”) determined at that time. Then, every time one game is consumed, the count value is decremented, and when it becomes "0", the advantageous section is ended. The decrement may be performed from the game shifted to the advantageous section, or may be performed after the end of the 1BB game. In addition, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, the advantageous section counter 69a does not have to set the initial value of the number of games (for example, "100") determined at that time, and after the end of the 1BB game The initial value may be set.
Furthermore, when the advantageous section is added during the advantageous section, a value corresponding to the added value is added to the current count value of the advantageous section counter 69a.

  For example, when the count value of the advantageous section counter 69a is "55", it is determined to add the advantageous section, and when the number of added games is "30", the count value is set from "55" to "55". Update to "85". Then, every time one game is digested, "84", "83", etc. are decremented one game at a time.

  In addition, when it becomes during 1 BBA operation (except those based on the double winning of 1 BBA and small part D), although it continues the count with the advantageous section counter 69a, when 1 BBB becomes active, the advantageous section counter 69a Stop counting by. In this embodiment, in this embodiment, it is possible to add an advantage section during 1 BBA operation (except for those based on double winning of 1 BBA and a small player D), but during 1 BBB operation, it is possible to add Since the addition is not performed, in order to balance the two (as during the 1BBB operation during the advantageous section is not extremely disadvantageous to the player than during the 1BBBA operation) is set as described above. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and the counting by the advantageous section counter 69a may be continued during any of 1BBA and 1BBB, or during any of 1BBA and 1BBB, the advantageous section counter. The counting by 69a may be interrupted.

  On the other hand, after winning 1BBA or 1BBB during the advantageous section, counting by the advantageous section counter 69a is continued until 1BBA or 1BBB is won (inside), respectively. When the 1BB is won or when it is notified that the 1BB is won, the counting by the advantageous segment counter 69a may be interrupted at that time. Even when it is decided to interrupt the counting by the advantageous section counter 69a when 1BB is won, the number of remaining games of the advantageous section displayed on the image display device 23 is until it is notified that 1BB has been won. Alternatively, one game may be decremented.

It should be noted that there is a case in which a condition device in which 1BB is included in the normal section is won (for example, a double winning of 1BBA and a small winning combination E1) and transition to an advantageous section is made based on the selection of the condition device. In this case, the standby section is started from the next game (only when the standby section is provided), and the inside of the 1BB is reached.
On the other hand, when the conditional device in which the 1BB is included in the advantageous section is won, the advantageous section and the inside of the 1BB are included, and the addition of the advantageous section is not performed during the inside of the 1BB in the advantageous section.

Therefore, when the condition device including 1BB is won in the normal section and the transition to the standby section is made and the transition to the advantageous section has not been made yet, it is notified that the longer lingering effect (1BB is elected or not It is considered that, even if, for example, a continuous effect for a plurality of games is output, it is not so disadvantageous to the player. During the waiting period, since it is not in the advantageous period, the counting (decrement) by the advantageous period counter 69a and the counting (decrement) of the upper limit counter 69b described later are not performed.
On the other hand, when the conditional device in which 1BB is included in the advantageous section is won and the inside becomes internal, even after being inside, the count (decrement) by the advantageous section counter 69a and the upper limit counter 69b described later Count (decrement) is performed. In this case, since it is not possible to add an advantageous section, it is preferable to early notify of the 1BB winning without performing a long-turn effect longer than necessary.
Specifically, for example, it is possible to set the average number of games for the former to a beat effect, and set the average number of games for the toe effect to 2 games.

  On the other hand, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section in which the instruction function is activated at the time of one small winning combination B group winning in the small winning combination E1 alone, in the present embodiment, the advantageous interval counter 69a is counted. Do not set the value. In this case, regardless of the count value of the advantageous section counter 69a, the advantageous section is continued until the small winning combination B is won. When the small winning combination B is won and the instruction function is activated, it is determined that the termination condition of the advantageous section is satisfied in the present game, and the advantageous section is ended.

  When the number of operations of the instruction function at the time of winning the small winning combination B group is given in advance as the termination condition of the advantageous section, a counter (decrement counter) for counting the number of games at the time of winning the small winning combination B group is provided. "1" may be set. Then, once activating the instruction function at the time of winning the small winning combination B group, the count value becomes “0”, and it may be determined that the termination condition of the advantageous section is satisfied.

It should be noted that it is possible to determine whether or not the current game is an advantageous section by providing something like an advantageous section flag and turning "on" during the advantageous section.
However, in the present embodiment, the eighth bit in the segment data of digit 2 plays the role of the advantageous interval flag. As described above, when it is determined that the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied in the game this time, or when the count value of the advantageous section counter 69a becomes "0", the eighth bit in the segment data of the digit 2 is "0. Execute the process to

  In addition, when it is elected to the small winning combination E1 alone and it is decided to shift to the advantageous segment, it shifts to the advantageous segment of fixed number of times of playing, or by the operation of the indication function at the time of one small winning combination B group winning A lottery is made to decide whether to shift to an advantageous section (a so-called fake advantageous section) that ends. Here, how to allocate the probability between the former and the latter is arbitrary.

Then, for example, when it is decided to win the small winning combination E1 alone and to shift to the advantageous section, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on by a predetermined timing, and an effect is output to show which advantageous section has been shifted. (It may be continued until the small winning combination B is won). Next, when the small winning combination B is won, after activating the instruction function in the game, if it is an advantageous section ending with the operation of one instruction function, the advantageous section ends with the current game (advantage Turn off the zone display LED 77). On the other hand, when shifting to the advantageous section of the predetermined number of games, the advantageous section is continued even after the next game (the lighting of the advantageous section display LED 77 is maintained).
In the above example, it is assumed that the small winning combination B is won before the predetermined number of games is reached from the start of the advantageous section.

  Also, the upper limit counter 69b always starts counting (when it is determined to shift to the advantageous section or at the start of the advantageous section, "1500" is set) when the advantageous section is started, and then the advantageous Until the end of the section, the count value is decremented by one for each game without interrupting the count in any case. Also, for example, counting is continued even during 1BB operation. This point is different from the advantageous interval counter 69a. Note that the advantageous section counter 69a and the upper limit counter 69b may increment the count value from "0" every "1" every one game.

  And, when the value of the upper limit counter 69b becomes "0", the advantageous section control means 69 sets the advantageous section in the current game even if the count value of the advantageous section counter 69a exceeds "0". Forced to end (update the count value of the advantageous section counter 69a to "0"), turn off the advantageous section display LED 77 (update the 8th bit in the segment data of digit 2 to "0"). Thus, the count value of the upper limit counter 69b is given top priority in the advantageous section, and when the count value of the upper limit counter 69b becomes "0", the advantageous section is ended even if 1BB is in operation.

In addition, during the advantageous section, it is necessary to execute at least once an instruction function operation game in which the number of payouts is nine (the maximum number of payouts in a specified number of three). Therefore, in the advantageous section, it is necessary to execute the instruction function activation game at least once when the small winning combination B is won, but when the value of the upper limit counter 69 b becomes “0”, the small winning combination B is performed only once. Even if the command function operation game has not been executed at the time of winning the group, or even if it has not won the small role B group at least once, the advantageous section is terminated (forced) in the game this time, and the advantageous section display LED 77 Turn off the light.
Further, with reference to the values of the advantageous section counter 69a and the upper limit counter 69b, the number of remaining games or the number of digested games may be displayed as an image in the image display device 23.

In FIG. 1, the external signal transmission unit 70 transmits an external signal to the external concentrated terminal board 100. The external signal is a signal indicating the start of the advantageous section, the end of the advantageous section, the start of the 1BB operation, the end of the 1BB operation, and the like.
The main control board 50 executes a game end check process for each game, and updates the external signal control number at the game end check process.
In the present embodiment, the “external signal control number” is a number that takes different values according to the start of the advantageous section, the end of the advantageous section, the start of the 1BB operation, and the end of the 1BB operation.

  Also, when the start switch 41 is operated, the external signal flag is updated so as to have a value corresponding to the external signal control number. Then, after the external signal flag is updated, the external signal transmission unit 70 transmits an external signal corresponding to the external signal flag from the output port 52. This external signal is transmitted to the hall computer 200 when input to the external concentrated terminal plate 100. Then, the external signal is output to, for example, a data counter.

The control command transmission unit 71 transmits information (control command) necessary for the effect output from the sub control substrate 80 to the sub control substrate 80.
The control command includes, for example, a first control command and a second control command. Each of the first control command and the second control command is, for example, 8-bit 1-byte data. One control command is a pair of the first control command and the second control command. Furthermore, the first control command is data indicating a type of control command, and the second control command is data indicating a parameter (variable).

For example, in the case of a control command indicating RT, the first control command is “33 (H)” (00110011 (B)) in the present embodiment. Further, when the parameter of RT is, for example, RT1, it becomes “00000001 (B)” in the present embodiment. Therefore, 2-byte data combining these, “00110011/00000001” (“/” indicates between the first control command and the second control command, and is not actually) is a control command of RT. As, the main control board 50 is transmitted to the sub control board 80.
As for the push order instruction number (only in the advantageous section), the effect group number, and the item condition device number, the first control command is the type data and all the second control commands are RWM 53 as in the case of the RT. Data stored in the

  The control command transmission unit 71 does not transmit the winning and replay condition device numbers to the sub control board 80. For example, when the pushing order bell is won, there is a possibility that the wrong pushing order may be known based on the winning and replay condition device number due to the injustice. On the other hand, the item condition device number has no risk of such fraudulent acts as described above. Therefore, for example, when 1 BBA has been won, an item condition device number "1" is transmitted to the sub control board 80.

In addition, when the player wins a conditional device having an order of correct answer pressing during an advantageous section, an order-of-pressing instruction number corresponding to the order of correct answer pressing is acquired and stored in the RWM 53. On the other hand, when the conditional device which is in the advantageous section and does not have the correct pressing order is elected, acquisition of the pressing order instruction number and storage in the RWM 53 are not performed. Here, at the start of each game, the data of the push order instruction number of RWM 53 is cleared, but the data after the clear is "A0". Therefore, the data of the push order instruction number of the RWM 53 is “A0” except during the advantageous section and when the condition device having the correct push order is won.
In addition, during the normal section or the standby section, even if the condition device having the correct touch order is won, the acquisition of the push order instruction number and the storage in the RWM 53 are not performed.

Then, at the time of winning of the condition device in the advantageous section and having the correct touch order, the control command transmission unit 71 transmits a push order instruction number to the sub control board 80.
The control command transmission unit 71 transmits information of “A0” as a push order instruction number except in the advantageous section and at the time of winning of the condition device having the correct touch order.
Furthermore, when not in the advantageous section, the control command transmission unit 71 does not transmit the push order instruction number to the sub control board 80. When not in the advantageous section, the control command transmission unit 71 may uniformly transmit the push order instruction number of “A0”, but in the present embodiment, the push order instruction is not issued in the advantageous section. The number is not transmitted to the sub control board 80.

In FIG. 1, the sub CPU 85 of the sub control board 80 includes an effect output control unit 91.
As described above, the effect output control means 91 controls the control command transmitted from the main control board 50, specifically, each control such as the RT number, push order instruction number, effect group number, role condition condition device number, etc. Based on the command, at what timing (when operating the start switch 41, when operating each stop switch 42, etc.), what effect is to be output (how to turn on, blink or extinguish the lamp 21) The specific effect contents such as what kind of sound is to be output from the speaker 22 and what kind of image is displayed on the image display device 23 are determined by lottery.

  And the effect output control means 91 controls the output of the effect lamp 21, the speaker 22, and the image display apparatus 23 according to the determination. In addition, during the 1BB operation and during the advantageous section, the number of games acquired, the number of games (the number of remaining games or the number of digested games) and the like are displayed as images. Furthermore, during the advantageous section, when the instruction function is activated, the correct pressing order is notified (image display). For example, when the small winning combination B1 is won in the game during the advantageous section and the control command corresponding to the push order instruction number "A1" is received, the correct push order "First stop left" or "1- ○ The player informs the player of contents that the player can easily know the pressing order, such as “-○” and the like. In the advantageous section, when the push order instruction number of “A0” is received, the push order is not notified.

  Furthermore, it can be said that the control command of the effect group number does not include information on which condition device has actually been won, but includes rough win information. For example, when the control command corresponding to the effect group number "5" is received, the sub control board 80 can not know whether the small combination A, the small combination B or the small combination C is won. . However, it is possible to know whether the player has won the small role A, the small role B group, or the small role C group. Therefore, it is possible to output effects such as displaying a symbol of "bell" or lighting a frame lamp with "yellow" that is a corresponding color of "bell".

Here, when the small winning combination A is won, the small winning combination 01 always wins even when the stop switch 42 is operated in any pressing order, so immediately after the start switch 41 is operated, that is, the first stop switching It is possible to perform a bell (yellow) effect before the is operated.
On the other hand, when the small winning combination B or small winning combination C is won during the normal section, the bell (yellow) effect may be performed when the small winning combination 01 is decided, that is, after the first stop switch 42 is operated. preferable. Of course, it may be after the operation of the second stop switch 42 or after the operation of the third stop switch 42.

However, if the output timing of the effect when winning the small winning combination A and the output timing of the effect when winning the small winning combination B group or the small winning combination C group are different, based on the difference in the timing, Since it is possible to determine whether the winning combination has been won or the small winning combination B or small winning combination C, it is possible to count the number of winning combinations of the small winning combination A, and it is possible to estimate the set value.
Therefore, when the small winning combination A is won in the normal section, the same timing as the pressing order correct answer at the small winning combination B or small winning combination C group start, for example, the bell effect output starts immediately after the operation of the first stop switch 42 If so, it can be made impossible to determine which of the small combination A, the small combination B and the small combination C has been won. In particular, in the present embodiment, when the player wins any of the small role A, the small role B group, or the small role C group, the control command corresponding to the same effect group number “5” is transmitted. . Thus, on the side of the sub control board 80 which has made the same effect group number ("5") of the small role A, the small portion B group, and the small role C group and received the effect group number, for example, the first stop switch If the effect is designed to be output at the timing immediately after the 42 operations, the effect group numbers of the small player A, the small player B group, and the small player C group are made different (“5” to “7”) Design that is more efficient than in the previous case (in the latter case, even when any of the effect group numbers “5” to “7” is received, the effect is output immediately after the operation of the first stop switch 42, for example) It is inefficient because it must be designed to

FIGS. 24 and 25 show the timing of transmitting the control command of the push order instruction number, the effect group number, and the item condition device number, and the display of push order instruction information by the acquisition number display LED 78 (operation of the instruction function ) And the notification (the notification on the sub side) of the pressing order of the correct answer by the image display device 23). FIG. 24 and FIG. 25 show four examples 1 to 4.
In FIG. 24 and FIG. 25, first, when the start switch 41 is operated by the player, the lottery of the condition device is performed by the combination lottery means 61, and the effect group number corresponding to the condition device which has won is determined. In addition, when it is in the advantageous section, the pushing order instruction number corresponding to the winning conditional device is determined.

  Furthermore, the main control board 50 transmits, to the sub-control board 80, control commands of the push order instruction number (only during the advantageous section), the effect group number, and the feature condition device number. When the sub control board 80 is in the advantageous section, the sub control board 80 notifies the correct pressing order based on the received pressing order instruction number. On the other hand, when the main control board 50 is in the advantageous section, the pressing order instruction information corresponding to the pressing order instruction number is displayed by the operation of the instruction function.

  In the “example 1” of FIG. 24, when the pushing order instruction number is determined, the pushing order instruction information is first displayed by the operation of the instructing function by the main control board 50. Thereafter, the push order instruction number is transmitted, and then the effect group number and the feature condition device number are transmitted. Next, the sub control board 80 determines that the start switch 41 has been operated in response to the reception of the item condition device number, and notifies the correct pressing order based on the received pressing order instruction number. The display of the pressing order instruction information and the notification of the correct pressing order are performed before the reel 31 reaches the constant speed rotation.

  Further, as in the present embodiment, when the correct pressing order is the so-called 3 choice (first stop), the notification of the correct pressing order by the image display device 23 operates the first (first) stop switch 42. Until On the other hand, for example, when the correct answer pressing order is a so-called six option, the notification of the correct answer pressing order by the image display device 23 is until the third (last) stop switch 42 is operated. As in the present embodiment, even if the correct pressing order is a so-called three choice, it is needless to say that notification of the correct pressing order may be continued until the third (last) stop switch 42 is operated. is there.

  In the present embodiment, when the first stop switch 42 is operated, the control command is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80 as described above, so the sub control board 80 receives this control command. Thus, it can be determined that the first stop switch 42 has been operated. When the first stop switch 42 is operated, the notification of the pressing order of the correct answer by the image display device 23 is ended. It is a matter of course to continue the effects other than the correct touch order, for example, the image display (display of a character, etc.) peculiar to the advantageous section.

Furthermore, the display of the pressing order instruction information by the number-of-acquisitions display LED 78 is until a winning determination is made on the main control board 50. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the correct touch order is 3 options as in the present embodiment, the display of the push order instruction information may be performed until the first stop switch 42 is operated.
The display of the acquisition number display LED 78 after the display of the push order instruction information is “00” (upper digit and lower digit indicate “0”), “* 0” (upper digit is off (*), lower digit is “ “0” is displayed, “**” (upper digit and lower digit are unlit), “−−” (both upper digit and lower digit are lighting segment G only), and the like.

  In "Example 2" of FIG. 24, after the push order instruction number is transmitted to the sub control board 80 by the main control board 50, the push order indication information is displayed on the number-of-gains display LED 78 by operation of the indication function. Send the number and item condition device number. After receiving the effect group number and the character article condition device number, the sub control board 80 notifies the correct pressing order.

  In the “example 3” of FIG. 25, after the main control board 50 transmits the pressing order instruction number, the effect group number, and the feature condition device number, the sub control board 80 performs the correct pressing order with the image display device 23. After notification, the main control board 50 displays pressing order instruction information by the operation of the instruction function at the moment (or immediately before) the reel 31 has been rotated at a constant speed. In Examples 1 and 2 described above, the operation of the instruction function by the main control board 50 (display of push order instruction information) is performed at a timing earlier than notification of the correct push order by the sub control board 80. . On the other hand, in the third example, the notification of the pressing order of the correct solution by the sub control board 80 is performed at a timing earlier than the operation of the instruction function by the main control board 50 (display of pressing order instruction information).

  “Example 4” in FIG. 25 is to perform operation of the instruction function by the main control board 50 (display of push order instruction information) and notification of the correct push order by the sub control board 80 at substantially the same timing. . When performing control in this manner, for example, the indication function is activated after “N” ms has elapsed since the push order indication number or the character article condition device number is transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80 (push order indication The display of information is started, and the sub control board 80 controls to start notification of the correct push order after “N” ms has elapsed since the push order instruction number or the character article condition device number is received. Can be mentioned.

Although four examples are shown in FIG. 24 and FIG. 25, it is preferable that the operation of the instruction function (display of push order instruction information) is performed after the start switch 41 is operated until the reel 31 reaches constant speed rotation. . Moreover, it is preferable to perform the pushing order notification by the sub control board 80 side after the operation of the instruction function by the main control board 50 side. By setting in this manner, the main control board 50 transmits an incorrect push order instruction number to the sub control board 80, or the sub control board 80 reports a push order different from the received push order instruction number. Even in this case, since the main control board 80 has already displayed the pressing order instruction information, the player notices an error in notification by the sub control board 80, and the player also suffers a disadvantage. Absent.
In addition, although the operation of the instruction function (display of push order instruction information) by the main control board 50 side is performed until the winning determination time, it may be until the third reel 31 is stopped.

  Subsequently, the operation of the instruction function (display of push order instruction information) and the case of performing notification of the correct press order will be described more specifically. FIG. 26 is a diagram for explaining the flow of the game (flow from top to bottom in the drawing), the display of the number-of-ears display LED 78, and an example of notification by the image display device 23. The example of FIG. 26 corresponds to the timing of “example 1” of FIG.

In the command function operation game during the advantageous section, first, when the start switch 41 is operated, the main control board 50 operates the command function and displays the pressing order command information on the number-of-gains display LED 78. The example of FIG. 26 shows an example in which the small winning combination B1 is won. Therefore, the acquisition number display LED 78 displays push order instruction information corresponding to the push order instruction number “A1”, that is, “= 1”.
Then, before the reel 31 reaches constant speed rotation, the image display device 23 notifies the correct pressing order. The example of FIG. 26 shows an example in which “1 ○” is displayed.

Next, when the first (first) stop switch 42 is operated and the left stop switch 42 is operated, that is, when it is the correct pressing order, the effect that the pressing order is correct by the image display device 23 Output (correct answer effect). On the other hand, when the pressing order is incorrect, the image display of the correct pressing order is deleted.
In this embodiment, since the pressing order correct / incorrect answer is determined by the operation of the first stop switch 42, the notification (image display) regarding the correct pressing order is ended when the first stop switch 42 is operated. In the case of 6 options, it is possible to continue to notify the correct pressing order until the second stop switch 42 is operated or until the third stop switch 42 is operated.

  Further, in the example of FIG. 26, the operation of the instruction function (display of push order instruction information) continues to be displayed until the winning determination is made (the same applies to Example 1 of FIG. 24). However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the incorrect pressing order is reached, the operation of the instruction function (display of the number-of-acquisitions display LED 78) may be ended as in the notification of the correct pressing order by the image display device 23. . Further, as in the present embodiment, when the correct pressing order is 3 options, when the first stop switch 42 is operated, an instruction (even if the first stop switch 42 is operated in the correct pressing order) The function may be terminated.

  However, it is desirable to end the operation of the instruction function after the notification by the image display device 23 is stopped. This is to prevent the pressing order notification from being performed on the sub control board 80 side even though the instruction function is not operated on the main control board 50 side. However, of course, the operation of the instruction function may be ended simultaneously with the end of the notification by the image display device 23, or the operation of the instruction function may be ended before the end of the notification by the image display device 23.

Of course, even if the pressing order is incorrect, the notification of the pressing order may be continued for the image display device 23 as well.
However, if the pressing order notification by the image display device 23 is stopped when the pressing order is incorrect, it is possible to switch to another effect.

  When all the reels 31 stop, a winning determination is made. Here, when the small part 01 gets a prize and nine medals are paid out, the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 shows that nine medals have been paid out from the display “1” of the pressing order instruction information. It changes to "09" shown. When one winning combination is won due to a pushing order error or the like, “01” is displayed, and when the combination is dropped, “00” (or “**”) is displayed. It should be noted that "= 1" → "00" (in order to temporarily reset the display, "00" is displayed from "= 1" of the push order instruction information to the display of the medal payout number "09". ) → "09" may be displayed.

Alternatively, “= 1” → “**” (the upper digit and the lower digit are turned off to temporarily reset the display) → “09” may be displayed.
Furthermore, when the player operates the bet switch 40 or the medal is placed after the maintenance of the medal, and the medal is bet, the display content is changed to "00" in order to clear the content of the acquired number displayed on the acquired number display LED 78. Allow ("**" may be used).

In FIG. 1, the management information control unit 72 is a unit that controls (stores, calculates, displays, etc.) management information displayed on the management information display LED 74.
In the present embodiment, the information to be displayed on the management information display LED 74 is
(1) Ratio of advantageous intervals (total)
(2) Continuous role ratio (6000 games (15 sets in total))
(3) Character ratio (6000 games (15 sets total))
(4) Continuous role ratio (total)
(5) Role ratio (total)
(See FIG. 38 described later).

First, “percentage of advantageous section (percentage of stay in advantageous section)” is the ratio of advantageous sections to all game sections (normal section + standby section + advantageous section) (in the advantageous section with respect to all game sections) Ratio). For example, in the gaming section of "10000" number of times of playing, when the number of times of playing of the advantageous section is "7000", the advantageous section ratio is "70 (%)".
Further, in the present embodiment, one set is set as the "400" game frequency. Then, the total of 15 sets, that is, the "6000" number of games is set as the "total", and each ratio in the "6000" number of games is calculated.

  Furthermore, “total” refers to the sum of the numerical values that have been continuously counted so far, and in the present embodiment, it is counted for the purpose of becoming at least “175000” game times or more. Then, when the cumulative total is less than the "175000" number of games, the cumulative value is displayed by blinking display, for example, and when it is equal to or more than the "175000" number of games, the cumulative value is displayed by lighting, for example. The cumulative total continues to be added until the value (upper limit value) which can be stored in the predetermined address of the RWM 53 is reached even after the number of times “175000” is reached or more.

“Continuous role ratio” refers to the ratio of the number of medals obtained when the first type special role (RB) is activated to the total number of medals obtained. Therefore, in the present embodiment, “the number of medals acquired during 1BB operation with respect to the total number of medals acquired”.
For example, when the medal acquisition number in the “6000” game number is “2000,” and the medal acquisition number in the “first class special role (RB)” operation is “500,” “continuous role The item ratio (6000 games) is "25 (%)".

Also, the “feature ratio” refers to the ratio of the number of medals obtained at the time of feature operation to the total number of medals obtained. Here, in addition to the above-mentioned first-class special features, the "features" means second-class special features (CB), 2BB (second-type continuously acting device, CB continuously operating), SB (Single bonus) is included.
And in this embodiment, since CB, 2BB, and SB are not provided, a character item ratio becomes the same value as a continuous character ratio.

  FIGS. 27 to 31 (FIG. 31 shows a modification of FIG. 29) is a view showing a partial storage area of the RWM 53 controlled by the management information control means 72. In the figure, the four-digit numerical value starting with "F" indicates the address of RWM 53. For each address, a buffer (storage area) of 1 byte (8 bits) data is provided.

  First, FIG. 27 shows a buffer for storing data concerning the advantageous section. As information regarding the advantageous section, there are three storage areas of the advantageous section game number corresponding value, the total number of games, and the advantageous section ratio. And the memory area of the advantageous section game frequency corresponding value is 4 bytes ("F004" to "F001"), the memory area of the total game frequency is 3 bytes ("F007" to "F005"), and the advantageous zone ratio The storage area of is one byte ("F008").

In the present embodiment, the total number of games is updated so that the value of the total number of games is incremented by one every time one game is digested.
On the other hand, during the advantageous section, a value obtained by multiplying the value of the advantageous section game count by 100 (referred to as "the advantageous section game number corresponding value") is added every time one game is digested. Therefore, a 3-byte storage area is provided for the total number of games, and a 4-byte storage area is provided for the advantageous section game number corresponding value.

In the present embodiment, the total game number is intended to store at least “175000” times or more. This is to display the advantageous interval ratio, the continuous character ratio, and the character ratio when the total number of games is “175000” or more.
Here, since "175000 (D)" has "18" digits in binary number, it can be stored in 3 bytes of "24" digits.

In addition, assuming that all the game numbers “175000 (D)” are in the advantageous section, the advantageous section game number corresponding value is “175000 × 100” (D), and this value is “25 digits in binary number. Therefore, although 3 bytes of "24" digits are not enough, storage is possible with 4 bytes of "32" digits.
For the above reasons, the storage area of the total number of games is 3 bytes, and the storage area of the advantageous section game numbers corresponding value is 4 bytes.

In addition, about total game frequency, although "1" is added for every one game, it is not limited to this but adds numerical values (total game frequency corresponding value) other than "1" and It is also good.
On the other hand, since the advantageous section ratio is “100 (D)” at the highest value, the value has “7” digits in binary number, so that storage is possible with 1 byte of storage capacity.

The total number of games continues to update the number of games every game, and when the 3-byte storage area reaches the upper limit (3 bytes full, ie, “FFFFFF (H)”, approximately 16.78 million in decimal), At the point in time, the count ends and the number of games is not updated from the next game.
In the advantageous section game frequency corresponding value, "+100" is added for each game during the advantageous section, but the value of the total game frequency becomes 3 bytes full even if all games are assumed to be the advantageous section It is possible to count up to. Then, when the count of the total number of games is finished, the count of the advantageous section game number corresponding value is also finished.

The advantageous section ratio is a value calculated by "the advantageous section game number corresponding value / total number of games" (as will be described later, subtraction is actually performed and division is not performed). Since the advantageous section game frequency corresponding value is a value obtained by multiplying the advantageous section game frequency by 100, the ratio itself can be calculated by the above calculation. The main CPU 55 of this embodiment uses an assembler, can not handle decimal points, and can not perform division using a value exceeding 2 bytes, so adopting the above-described calculation method Calculation is possible.
Further, in the present embodiment, an advantageous interval ratio stores an integer and discards the decimal part. For example, when the total number of games is "1100 (D)" and the advantageous section game number corresponding value is "56000 (D)", the advantageous section ratio is "50 (D)", and "F008" 00110010 (B) is stored.

  In addition, although the advantageous section rate can be updated every game, for example, when there is a display request for the advantageous section percentage, the advantageous section percentage is calculated from the value corresponding to the advantageous section game number and the total number of games, It may be stored in "F008". And the numerical value of the decimal number based on the value memorize | stored in "F008" is displayed as an advantageous section ratio.

FIG. 28 is a diagram showing a buffer for storing data on the total payout number. When the medal is paid out by the small winning combination, the value stored in the predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 is updated.
As shown in FIG. 28, there is provided a ring buffer in which 15 storage areas (01 set to 15 sets) of 2-byte data (for example, "F012 (upper digit)" and "F011 (lower digit)") are provided.
And, in each 2 byte data, the payout number during the 400 games is stored. For example, when nine winning combinations are won and nine payouts are made, "9 (D)" is added to the total payout number.
Here, in the regular slot machine, the maximum payout number in one game is determined to be “15” or less, and assuming that there is 15 games per game, “6000” in 400 games. It becomes. Since "6000 (D)" has 13 digits in binary, it can be stored in 2 bytes (16 digits).

Furthermore, when there is a payout from the first game to the 400th game, the number of payouts is stored in the 01-th set ("F012" and "F011"). From the next 401st game to the 800th game, the payout number is stored in the second set ("F014" and "F013").
In this way, 400 games are considered as one set, and values are stored in different buffers for each set.

In addition, a storage area (3 bytes) of total payout number of 15 sets (6000 games) is provided (in FIG. 28, "F031" to "F02F"). This storage area is for storing 15 sets, that is, the total number of payouts during 6,000 games.
In addition, assuming that 15 pieces of payout have been made in all 6000 games, it is necessary to store up to the value of "90000 (D)", but "90000 (D)" has 17 digits in binary, so It can be stored in 3 bytes (24 digits).

For example, up to the first fifteenth set, the total number of payouts in the number of games which does not satisfy 6000 games is stored in "F031" to "F02F".
Then, when reaching the 6000th game, the number of payouts for 400 games is stored in all the buffers of 01st set to 15th set (each 2 bytes), so the total payout number of 15 sets (6000 games) total In addition, it becomes the total value of 6000 game minutes.
Next, when shifting to the 6001 game, clear the 2-byte data ("F012" and "F011") of the 01 set, and store the total number of payouts from the 6001 game to the 6400 game in this buffer. Go. In addition, from 6000 games to 6399 games, the total payout number (3 byte data) of 15 sets in total is maintained without changing.

Then, when it becomes the 6400 game, and addition to the 2-byte data of the 01 set is completed, the total payout number for 15 sets is calculated (total 2-byte data from 01-st set to 15-th set is added), The calculated total payout number for 15 sets is updated.
Similarly to the above, after 6401 game, when it is shifted to 6401 game, the 2-byte data ("F014" and "F013") of the 02 set is cleared, and in this buffer, 6401 game ~ 6800 game The total number of payouts up to is stored.
In the above method, the total payout number of 15 sets is updated every 400 games, but when all 15 sets are replaced with new data, the total payout number of 15 sets is calculated. It may be updated to that value.

The total payout number (total) ("F034" to "F032") is a 3-byte storage area storing the total number of payout numbers. The cumulative total of the payout numbers is determined in order to calculate each ratio (a continuous winning product operation ratio, etc. described later) when there are 175,000 games or more. However, the cumulative payout number continues to be stored even after 175000 games have passed, and the update is terminated when the 3-byte storage capacity reaches the upper limit (3-byte full).
Assuming that 175,000 games are paid out and 15 medals are paid out, the binary number has 22 digits, so it can be stored with 3-byte storage capacity.

FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a buffer for storing data on the number of payouts related to the continuous role among the RWM 53.
As shown in FIG. 29, the ring buffer is provided with 15 storage areas each consisting of 3-byte data (for example, the 01th set includes "F043 (most significant digit)" to "F041 (most significant digit)"). .

Then, in each 3-byte data, a value obtained by multiplying the number of medals paid out at the time of the continuous combination product operation by 100 (referred to as "payout number corresponding value") is stored. For example, when the 10-piece winning combination is won at the time of continuous-services operation and there are 10 payouts, “+1000” is set as the payout number corresponding value.
The reason for storing the value multiplied by 100, not the value of the payout number itself, is the same reason as the value corresponding to the number of times played in the advantageous section game, and the ratio is an integer To be calculated.

Further, in each 3-byte data, a payout number corresponding value at the time of continuous bonus product operation during 400 games is stored. Specifically, from the first game to the 400th game, when there is a payout number at the time of continuous combination product operation, the payout number corresponding value is stored in the 01th set ("F043" to "F041") Do. From the next 401st game to the 800th game, the payout number corresponding value is stored in the second set ("F046" to "F044").
In this way, 400 games are considered as one set, and values are stored in different buffers for each set.
In addition, assuming that 15 medals have been paid out for each game in 400 consecutive games, the payout number corresponding value is “600000 (D)”, which is 20 digits in binary, so 3 bytes Can be stored in

In addition, a storage area (3 bytes) corresponding to the continuous combination product payout number corresponding value of 15 sets (6000 games) is provided ("F070" to "F06E"). This storage area is a storage area for storing 15 sets, that is, a payout number corresponding value for 6000 games.
In addition, assuming that 15 medals have been paid out in every 6,000 games, the payout number corresponding value is “9000000 (D)”, which is 24 digits in binary, so 3 bytes It can be stored.

For example, up to the first fifteenth set, “F070” to “F06E” store the value corresponding to the number of consecutive bonus product payouts in the number of games less than 6000 games. Then, when the 6000th game is reached, the payout number corresponding value in the 400th game is stored in all the buffers of the 01st set to the 15th set (3 bytes each). In addition, the continuous bonus game payout number corresponding value of 15 sets (6000 games) in total is a total value for 6000 games.
Then, when it shifts to the 6001 game, it clears the 3-byte data ("F043" to "F041") of the 01 set, and in this buffer, the number of payouts during the continuous role operation from the 6001 game to the 6400 game Remember the corresponding value. In addition, from 6000 games to 6399 games, the corresponding value corresponding to the number of consecutive bonus items paid out for 15 sets in total is maintained without being changed.

  Then, when it becomes 6400 game eyes and 3 byte data of 01 set is decided, it calculates the corresponding value corresponding to the number of consecutive prizes paid out in 15 sets, and calculates 3 byte data of each of 01 set to 15 set Addition) Update the calculated value corresponding to the number of continuous-service-work-outs for the total of 15 sets calculated.

Similarly to the above, after 6401 game, when it is shifted to 6401 game, clear 3-byte data ("F046" to "F044") of the 02 set, and in this buffer, 6401 game to 6800 game Up to, update 02 bytes of 3-byte data.
In the above method, the 15-minute total continuous-service-paid-out number corresponding value is updated every 400 games, but when all 15 sets are replaced with new data, the total of 15 sets is continuous It is also possible to calculate and update the value corresponding to the number-of-payouts-on-time-outs.

Cumulative continuous role product payout number corresponding value (“F074” to “F071”) is a storage area for storing the cumulative total of the continuous character function payout number corresponding value, and the cumulative payout amount corresponding value is calculated Is to calculate a continuous bonus operating ratio when there are 175,000 games or more. However, the cumulative value corresponding to the number of consecutive serving items paid out continues to be stored even after 175000 games have passed, and updating ends when the 4-byte storage capacity reaches the upper limit (4-byte full).
Assuming that each game and 15 medals continue to be paid out, each game “1500 (D)” continues to be added, so that 4 bytes can store up to about 286,000 games.

  In addition, the continuous role product operation ratio (6000 games) ("F075"), "total game number corresponding to the continuous game operation of 6000 games (" F070 "~" F06E ") / total payout number of 6000 games (Figure 28 Middle, it is a buffer which stores the value of "F031"-"F02F").

In addition, the continuous combination product operation ratio (total) ("F076"), "total continuous combination product payout number corresponding value (" F074 ~ "F071") / cumulative total payout number (F034 in Figure 28, " “To“ F 032 ”) is a buffer for storing values.
The above ratio stores up to the maximum value "100 (D)" in decimal notation, and therefore can be stored in one byte.
In addition, although it is possible to update each game, it is also possible to update the continuous combination product operation ratio (6000 games) and the continuous combination product operation ratio (total), but for example, calculation is performed when there is a display request of these ratios. The calculation result may be stored in each storage area ("F075" or "F076"), and the value may be displayed.

  FIG. 30 is a diagram showing a buffer for storing data on the number of payouts of bonus products in the RWM 53. Although it is clear if FIG. 30 and FIG. 29 are compared, it is provided also about the buffer which memorize | stores the delivery number corresponding | compatible value of a role similarly to the buffer which memorize | stores the delivery number corresponding | compatible value of continuous combination. The buffer storing the payout amount corresponding value etc. of the prize has the same configuration as the buffer storing the payout amount corresponding value etc. of the continuous role.

That is, for every 400 games, a storage area for 15 sets capable of storing 3-byte data as a payout number corresponding value at the time of bonus operation, and a bonus amount corresponding number of bonus games at 6000 games (15 sets) A 3-byte buffer to be stored and a 4-byte buffer to store a cumulative value of the bonus game payout number corresponding value. In addition, as a buffer (1 byte) for storing the bonus operation ratio, there are provided two types, for 6000 games and for cumulative use.
The method of storage in each of these buffers is the same as that during continuous service operation, so the description will be omitted.

In addition, since the continuous winning combination corresponds to 1BB (including RB) of the present embodiment, when the medal is paid out during 1BB operation, it is stored in the continuous winning combination at-action payout number corresponding value shown in FIG.
In addition, when medals are paid out during operation for all the prizes including the successive prizes, the prizes are stored in the figure corresponding value at the time of prize actuation shown in FIG.
Here, in the present embodiment, only 1BB (and RB), which is a continuous character, is provided as the character, in such a case, the value stored in the buffer shown in FIG. The values stored in the buffer shown in FIG.

FIG. 31 is a view showing a modification of the ring buffer, and in this example, a modification of FIG. 29 is shown.
In FIG. 29, a ring buffer consisting of 3-byte each of the 01th set to the 15th set is provided, and further, 15 sets of total values are stored.
On the other hand, in the example of FIG. 31, the point of calculating 15 sets of total values is the same as that of FIG. 29, but 16 sets are provided as ring buffers.

In FIG. 31, the points corresponding to the number-of-payouts are stored in three bytes of 01 set to 15 sets from 1 game to 6000 games, as in FIG.
Here, when it is desired to calculate the total payout number corresponding value for the first game to the 6000th game, each 3-byte data from 01 set to 15 sets is added and calculated.

Next, the payout number corresponding values from the 6001th game to the 6400th game are stored in the sixteenth set of 3-byte buffers ("F070" to "F06E").
Then, when it comes to the 6401 game, it clears the 3-byte data ("F043" to "F041") of the 01 set, and the payout number corresponding value from the 6401 game to the 6800 game to the 3-byte data of the 01 set. I will remember.

When calculating the payout number corresponding value of 6000 games (15 sets) in total between 6401 game eyes to 6800 game eyes, each 3-byte data of 02 set to 16 sets is added and calculated.
Furthermore, when 6800 games are reached, when calculating the payout number corresponding value of 6000 games (15 sets) in total, calculation is performed by adding each set of 3-byte data of 1 set to 15 sets.
In this way, one of the 16 sets of 3-byte buffers is used as the 3-byte buffer currently being updated, and the other 15 sets of 3-byte buffers are used to calculate the payout amount corresponding value for the total of 15 sets. Used when

The data stored in the storage area of the RWM 53 shown in FIGS. 27 to 30 is not initialized only by turning on / off the power switch 11, and the data is maintained.
Further, even in the initialization of the predetermined storage area at the time of setting change (at the time of RAM clear), the storage area of RWM 53 shown in FIGS. 27 to 30 becomes an exception of the initialization, and the data is maintained without being initialized. Ru. Here, to shift to the setting change mode, it is based on turning on the power switch 11 under a situation where the setting key switch 12 is turned on (rotated 90 degrees to the right) when the power switch 11 is off. Migration is possible. Further, the initialization of the predetermined storage area at the time of the setting change described above is executed before the setting value becomes changeable (setting change mode) based on the operation of the setting switch 13.

However, when the non-returnable error occurs, the above data is initialized upon the return of the error. On the other hand, when a recoverable error occurs, the data is not initialized but is maintained.
Here, the “impossible return error” refers to a serious error that can not be returned unless the power is turned off and the above-described setting change mode is entered. For example,
1) If the read setting value is not within the setting 1 to 6 range (setting value error),
2) When a symbol (kicking symbol) that should not be displayed originally is displayed as a result of determining the stop symbol (symbol combination error),
3) Update error of random number determined for each interrupt processing,
4) When the power failure recovery data is not a normal value, etc. may be mentioned.

  When a non-returnable error occurs, the power switch 11 is turned off, the setting key is inserted, the setting key switch 12 is turned on by rotating the setting key clockwise 90 degrees, and then the power switch 11 is turned on. As a result, a predetermined range of RWM 53 (data of each buffer in FIGS. 27 to 30, setting value information, RT information, and winning condition apparatus information) is cleared. Then, the setting value is set, and if there is no other error, return processing is performed.

On the other hand, “returnable error” refers to an error that can be recovered without turning on / off the power switch 11 or the like. For example, medal clogging error, medal retention error, medal illegal passage error, abnormality of passage sensor 43a, abnormality of insertion sensor 44, abnormality of payout sensor 37, medal abnormal insertion error, etc.
When a recoverable error occurs, the error contents are displayed and the main processing is stopped. However, if the store clerk executes the error release operation (removes the cause of the error) and operates the reset switch 14, the error is released If it is determined that the error has been canceled, processing is resumed.

Subsequently, the update processing of the advantageous section game number corresponding value and the total game number will be described. In the flowcharts of FIG. 32 to FIG. 37 below, the advantageous section game frequency corresponding value is abbreviated as “favorable section corresponding value”.
FIG. 32 shows an example of updating the advantageous section game frequency corresponding value and the total game frequency using the register. Further, FIG. 33 is a flow chart showing a specific example 1 of the part surrounded by a dotted line in FIG. 32, FIG. 34 is a flow chart showing a specific example 2 of the part surrounded by a dotted line, and FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the example 3 of a part. Further, FIG. 36 is an example of updating the advantageous section game frequency corresponding value and the total game frequency without using the register.

  FIG. 32 is executed every game, for example, at the end of the game. Further, in the method of using the registers, in the chip of this embodiment, the A, B, C, D, E, H and L registers (seven registers) can be used at the time of operation. In particular, since the advantageous section game frequency corresponding value ("F004" to "F001") is 4 bytes, and the total game frequency ("F007" to "F005") is 3 bytes, it becomes 7 bytes in total, and can be used. The number of registers matches the number of bytes.

In FIG. 32, in step S101, the upper 1 byte (data of "F007" in FIG. 27) of the total number of games is set in the A register. In the next step S102, the lower 2 bytes of the total number of games (data of "F006" and "F005" in FIG. 27) are set in the DE register.
Further, in step S103, the upper two bytes (data of "F004" and "F003" in FIG. 27) of the advantageous section game number corresponding value are set in the BC register. In the next step S104, lower 2 bytes (data of "F002" and "F001" in FIG. 27) of the advantageous section game number corresponding value are set in the HL register.

In step S105, "1" is added to the total game number lower 2-byte register, that is, the DE register value in this example. In the next step S106, it is determined whether or not a digit overflow has occurred in the lower 2 bytes of the total number of games by adding "1" in step S105. For example, when the lower 2 bytes of data is "FFFF (H)" before the start of this flowchart, an overflow occurs due to the addition of "1" in step S105 (flag register (F register built in main CPU 55) The carry flag of) becomes "1"). If it is determined that the digit overflow has occurred, the process proceeds to step S107, and if it is determined that the digit overflow does not occur (the carry flag ≠ "1"), the process proceeds to step S109. Note that after “1” is added in step S105, it is determined in step S106 whether a digit overflow has occurred. Therefore, at step S106, the DE register value when the digit overflow occurs is “0. It is ".
In the present embodiment, the "0" bit of the F register (flag register) is set to the carry flag. The carry flag is a flag that is set to "1" when a carry occurs or a carry (also referred to as a carry overflow) occurs by an operation using a register.

  In step S107, “1” is added to the total game number upper one byte register, ie, the A register value in this example. In the next step S108, it is determined whether the total number of games has reached the upper limit. Here, “upper limit” means the upper limit of the count. Since the total number of games in this embodiment is counted in 3 bytes, when 3 bytes are full, specifically, when the value becomes "FFFFFF (H)", no more additions can be made. , Judge that the upper limit has been reached. It should be noted that after “1” is added to the A register value in step S107, it is determined that the upper limit is reached when there is a current overflow in the A register value (when the carry flag is “1”). is there. It can be reworded as when the A register value becomes "0" (zero flag = "1"). If it is determined that the upper limit has been reached, the processing according to this flowchart is ended, and if it is determined that the upper limit has not been reached, the process proceeds to step S109.

  Therefore, when the total number of games according to the present embodiment becomes 3 bytes full, and the number of decimals becomes about 16.78 million times, the total number of games is not added more than that. However, even when 3 bytes are full, the flow of FIG. 32 is executed every game, but every game, “Yes” is determined in step S108, and this flowchart is ended.

If it progresses to step S109 from step S106 or step S108, it will be judged whether a game is in an advantageous section this time. In addition, it is possible to determine whether or not the current game is an advantageous section by providing an advantageous section flag that is turned on during the advantageous section, and determining on / off of the advantageous section flag. Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, it can be determined whether or not the advantageous section is in the advantageous section by determining whether the eighth bit of the segment data of the digit 2 is “1”. It is.
If it is determined in step S109 that it is in the advantageous section, the process proceeds to step S110. If it is determined that the advantageous section is not in progress, the advantageous section game number corresponding value is not updated, and the process proceeds to step S114.

  In step S110, "100 (D)" is added to the lower 2-byte register value of the advantageous section game number corresponding value, that is, the HL register value in this example. Then, the process proceeds to step S111, and it is determined whether a digit overflow has occurred. In the present embodiment, since “100 (D)” is added during the advantageous section, it is “100 (D)” in “FFDC (H) (65500 (D))” that overflow occurs in 2 bytes. ) Is added to become “0040 (H) (65600 (D))”. If it is determined that a digit overflow has occurred, the process proceeds to step S112, and if it is determined that no digit overflow has occurred, the process proceeds to step S113.

  In step S112, "1" is added to the upper 2-byte register of the advantageous section game number corresponding value, that is, the BC register in this example. Then, the process proceeds to step S113, and the updated BC register value and HL register value are written to "F004" to "F001" in FIG. Thereby, the advantageous section game number corresponding value (RWM 53) is updated. Further, in the next step S114, the updated A register value and DE register value are written to "F007" to "F005" in FIG. Thereby, the total number of games (RWM 53) is updated. Then, the processing according to this flowchart is ended.

  In the flowchart of FIG. 32, before the total number of games reaches 3 bytes full, the value corresponding to the number of advantageous section games does not become 4 bytes full. As described above, although the total number of games can count about 16.78 million games, assuming that all of the total games are in an advantageous segment, even if the value of about 16.78 million is multiplied by 100, Because it does not reach 4 bytes full. Therefore, even if “1” is added to the upper 2-byte register value of the advantageous section game frequency corresponding value in step S112, correct arithmetic processing can be realized without making a determination as to whether or not the digit overflow has occurred. It becomes possible to realize simplification of arithmetic processing.

  Further, in the flowchart of FIG. 32, each data of the RWM 53 is set (copied) in a register and calculation is executed, and when it is determined in step S108 that the total game number has reached the upper limit, the total game number is The processing according to this flowchart ends without returning the set register value to the RWM 53. Therefore, the total number of games stored in RWM 53, that is, 3-byte data stored in "F 007" to "F 005" of RWM 53 remains "FF FFFF (H)", before and after the start of this flowchart. There is no change in the data of the total number of games played.

Next, in FIG. 32, a specific example of the process of steps S109 to S114 will be described.
FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing a specific example 1 of the steps in between. In FIG. 33, steps S109 to S112 are the same as in FIG. In FIG. 33, when it is determined “No” in step S109, the process proceeds to step S123.

After step S112, if it progresses to step S121, the value of upper 2 bytes of the advantageous section game frequency corresponding value will be updated. Specifically, the value of the BC register is written to "F004" and "F003" in FIG. In the next step S122, the value of the lower 2 bytes of the advantageous section game number corresponding value is updated. Specifically, the value of the HL register is written to "F002" and "F001" in FIG.
Next, in step S123, the total number of games is updated collectively for 3 bytes. Specifically, the A register value and the DE register value are written to "F007", "F006", and "F005" in FIG. 27, respectively.

FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing a second specific example of steps S109 to S114 in FIG. Steps S109 to S112 in FIG. 34 are the same as those in FIG. In FIG. 33, when it is determined “No” in step S109, the process proceeds to step S123.
After step S112, if it progresses to step S131, the advantageous section game frequency corresponding value will be updated collectively for 4 bytes. Specifically, the BC register value and the HL register value are respectively written in "F004", "F003", "F002", and "F001" in FIG. And if it progresses to step S123, the total game frequency will be updated collectively for 3 bytes similarly to the example 1.

FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing a specific example 3 of steps S109 to S114 in FIG. In FIG. 35, when it is determined “No” in step S109, the process proceeds to step S141.
Each step of FIG. 35 is the same as that of FIG. In FIG. 35, the difference from FIG. 34 is that even if it is determined that the advantageous section is not in progress in step S109, the process proceeds to step S131, and the advantageous section game number corresponding value is updated. That is, in this case, the advantageous section game number corresponding value is not added "100 (D)", but based on the BC register value and the HL register value set in step S103 and step S104 in FIG. In FIG. 27, "F004", "F003", "F002", and "F001" are written. In this case, the same value as in the previous game is written again.

The examples of FIGS. 32 to 35 described above are examples in which the total game count and the advantageous section game count corresponding value are updated (using) through the register.
On the other hand, FIG. 36 is an example in which the total game number and the advantageous section game number corresponding value are updated without passing the register in principle.
In FIG. 36, in step S201, "1" is added to the lower 2 bytes of the total number of games. Specifically, "1" is added to the data of "F006" and "F005" in FIG.

  In the next step S202, it is determined whether an overflow has occurred in the addition in step S201. That is, it is determined whether the carry flag has become "1" by adding "1" to the data of "F006" and "F005". It may be determined whether or not the data of "F006" and "F005" has become "0000 (H)". If it is determined that a digit overflow has occurred, the process proceeds to step S203, and if it is determined that no digit overflow has occurred, the process proceeds to step S207.

  In step S203, "1" is added to the upper 1 byte of the total number of games. Specifically, “1” is added to the data of “F007” in FIG. In the next step S204, it is determined whether the total number of games has reached the upper limit. The determination here is that “F007” is overflowed by adding “1” in step S203, and it is determined whether or not the carry flag has become “1”, and the carry flag becomes “1”. It is determined that the upper limit has been reached. Note that it may be determined whether the data of "F007" has become "0 (H)", and when it has become "0 (H)", it may be determined that the upper limit has been reached. If it is determined that the upper limit has been reached, the process proceeds to step S205, and if it is determined that the upper limit is not reached, the process proceeds to step S207.

In step S205, "1" is subtracted from the upper 1 byte of the total number of games. When the process proceeds to step S205, a digit overflow also occurs in the upper one byte in the addition in step S203, and "0 (H)" is obtained. Therefore, "1" is subtracted from this value, thereby the process in step S203. The data before adding "1" is returned to "FF (H)".
Next, proceeding to step S206, “1” is subtracted from the lower 2 bytes of the total number of games. Thereby, the values of "F006" and "F005" become "FFFF (H)". Then, the process according to this flowchart is ended.

  On the other hand, when the process proceeds from step S202 or step S204 to step S207, it is determined whether or not the current game is in the advantageous section. This determination is the same as step S109 in FIG. Then, when it is determined that the advantageous section is not in progress, there is no need to update the advantageous section game number corresponding value, so the processing according to this flowchart is ended. On the other hand, when it is judged that it is in the advantageous section, it progresses to step S208. In step S208, "100 (D)" is added to the lower 2 bytes of the advantageous section game number corresponding value, that is, "F002" and "F001" in FIG. Here, since the assembler can not directly add the value of "100 (D)" to the RWM 53, first, the data of "F002" and "F001" are stored in the HL register. Then, the data of "F002" and "F001" is updated by storing the result of adding the value of "100 (D)" to the HL register in "F002" and "F001".

  In the next step S209, it is determined in the calculation of step S208 whether an overflow has occurred. Here, it is determined whether or not the carry flag has become "1", and when the carry flag has become "1", it is determined that a digit overflow has occurred.

  If it is determined in step S209 that a digit overflow has occurred, the process proceeds to step S210, and if it is determined that a digit overflow has not occurred, the processing according to this flowchart ends. In step S210, "1" is added to the upper 2 bytes of the advantageous section game number corresponding value, that is, "F004" and "F003" in FIG. Then, the process according to this flowchart is ended.

Next, the calculation processing of the advantageous section ratio will be described.
In the present embodiment, since the total number of games and the advantageous section game number corresponding value are stored, in order to calculate the advantageous section ratio, simply by “advantage zone game number corresponding value / total game number” It can be calculated. However, in the slot machine 10, with a chip that satisfies the rule, only 2-byte operation can be performed, and division of 2-byte or more numeric values can not be performed. Therefore, the ratio is calculated by the following subtraction.

Specifically, when the advantageous section game number corresponding value = x and the total game number = y, “x ÷ y” can be calculated by repeating the following subtraction.
xy = a (> 0)
a−y = b (> 0)
b-y = c (> 0)
c-y = d (<0)
As described above, since the number of times "> 0 (greater than" 0 ")" is "3" as a result of repeatedly subtracting the total game number y, the quotient of "x」 y "is" 3 ". It can be calculated that there is. And in this embodiment, since a decimal part is round off, in the above-mentioned example, an advantageous section rate is computed with "3".

FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the calculation processing of the advantageous section ratio.
First, in step S301, data of RWM 53 is acquired in a register. Similarly to the above, seven registers of A, B, C, D, E, H and L are used.
In this step S301, each data of "F001" to "F007" shown in FIG. 27 is stored in the register. Specifically, it is as follows.
A register: stores data of "F007" D register: stores data of "F006" E register: stores data of "F005" B register: stores data of "F004" C register: stores data of "F003" H register: Stores data of "F002" L register: Stores data of "F001"

Next, the process proceeds to step S302, and the advantageous section ratio (RWM 53) is initialized. In this processing, the data stored in “F008” in FIG. 27 is cleared (“0”).
Then, the process proceeds to step S303, where the lower byte is subtracted. This process subtracts the data (lower 2 bytes of the total number of games played) stored in the DE register from the data (lower 2 bytes of the advantageous section game frequency corresponding value) stored in the HL register, and calculates the operation result Store in HL register.

Next, proceeding to step S304, it is determined whether a borrow has occurred. If the result of the operation of step S303 (result of subtracting the value of DE register from the value of HL register) and the carry flag is not set (when the carry flag is "1"), it is determined as "No".
If it is determined that the carry flag is set (if there is a borrow), the process proceeds to step S305. If it is determined that there is no borrow, the process proceeds to step S307.

In step S305, it is determined whether the upper 2 bytes of the advantageous section game number corresponding value, that is, the BC register value is "0". When it is “0”, since the subsequent subtraction can not be performed, the processing according to this flowchart ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not "0", the process proceeds to step S306.
In step S306, "1" is subtracted from the upper byte of the advantageous section game number corresponding value. Specifically, “1” is subtracted from the BC register value, and the operation result is stored in the BC register.

In the next step S307, the upper byte is subtracted. Specifically, the A register value (upper 1 byte of the total game number) is subtracted from the BC register value (upper 2 bytes of the advantageous section game frequency corresponding value), and the calculation result is stored in the BC register. Then, the process proceeds to step S308, and it is determined whether the calculation result at step S307 is less than "0", that is, whether the carry flag is set or not by the calculation at step S307. If the carry flag is set, "Yes" is determined in the step S308, and further subtraction can not be performed, so the processing according to the flowchart is ended. On the other hand, when it is judged as "No" by step S308, it progresses to step S309.
In step S309, the HL register value is stored in the stack area (a part of the storage area of the RWM 53).

In the next step S310, the data (ratio of advantageous sections) stored in "F008" is stored in the HL register, and "1" is added to the data stored in the address (F008) indicated by the HL register. In step S311, the data stored in the stack area in step S309 is stored in the HL register. After step S311, the process returns to step S303, and the above process (subtraction) is repeated.
By the above processing, the total game count is subtracted from the advantageous section game count corresponding value, and the advantageous section percentage is incremented by one each time one subtraction is performed. Therefore, after the processing of FIG. 37, the advantageous section percentage value calculated from the advantageous section game number corresponding value and the total game number stored in “F001” to “F007” is stored in “F008”.
As is apparent from the above, each time the processing in steps S303 to S311 in FIG. 37 is executed once, the advantageous section proportion is incremented by one. That is, the number of times of execution (the number of repetitions) of steps S303 to S311 is the advantageous segment ratio.

  In addition, although the quotient of the number of times corresponding to the advantageous section game frequency (the value obtained by multiplying the advantageous section game frequency by 100) and the total number of games is calculated above, and it is regarded as the advantageous section percentage (%) Calculate the continuous character ratio (6000 games (15 sets)), character ratio (6000 games (15 sets)), continuous character ratio (total), and character ratio (total) by (repeating subtraction) be able to.

  More specifically, the corresponding value corresponding to the number of continuous game operations paid out for 6000 games (15 sets) ("F070" to "F06E" in FIG. 29), and the total number of payouts for 6000 games (15 sets) (Fig. 28). , “F031” to “F02F”), by repeating the same subtraction as described above, calculate the quotient of “the value corresponding to the number of payouts for continuous combination of 6000 games and the total number of payouts for 6000 games”, A value is memorize | stored in "F075" in FIG. 29 as a continuous bonus item operation ratio (6000 games).

  In addition, from the total number of consecutive rolled product payouts corresponding values ("F074" to "F071" in FIG. 29) and the total payout number of cumulative totals ("F034" to "F032" in FIG. 28), " The quotient of the total number of consecutive rolled product payouts corresponding to the total number of paid-out total rolled sheets is calculated, and the value is stored in “F076” in FIG. 29 as a continuous rolled product operating ratio (total).

  Similarly, based on the bonus game payout number corresponding value of 6000 games ("F0B0" to "F0AE" in FIG. 30) and the total payout number of 6000 games ("F031" to "F02F" in FIG. 28) , Calculate the quotient of "the value corresponding to the number of bonus game payouts of 6,000 games / the total payout number of 6,000 games", and store the value as "FYB5" in FIG. 30 as a bonus game operating ratio (6000 games). .

  Also, based on the cumulative value of the number of payouts corresponding to the number of payouts ("F0B4" to "F0B1" in FIG. 30) and the total payout number of cumulative totals ("F034" to "F032" in FIG. 28) The quotient of the number-of-payouts-corresponding-to-the-off-pieces value / the total number of paid-out sheets in total is calculated, and the value is stored in “F0B6” in FIG.

FIG. 38 shows the "interest rate ratio" calculated as described above, "continuous character ratio (6000 games (15 sets))", "character ratio (6000 games (15 sets))", "continuous characters" It is a figure which shows the example of a display of a ratio (cumulative | total) and a "character-object ratio (cumulative)." These five pieces of information are displayed by an information type and a numerical value, and are displayed on the management information display LED 74.
The five pieces of information shown in FIG. 38 are merely examples, and the present invention is not limited to these pieces of information, and information other than these may be displayed, or part of the information shown in FIG. Only information may be displayed. Further, the display order is not limited to the order shown in FIG. 38, and the display order is arbitrary.

The reason for displaying the management information as described above is as follows.
In the gaming machines, those that conform to the type test prescribed by the Winding Law are permitted to set up a hall. Here, in the type test, the character ratio and continuous character ratio when carrying out 6000 games do not exceed predetermined values (70% for character ratio and 60% for continuous character ratio) There is a defined rule.
In addition, at the time of type testing, a document will be attached that describes the average value of the game item ratio and continuous character item ratio of the applied gaming machine (In the future, the average value will also be described for the advantageous segment ratio. May be asked).

In this case, a clerk or a third party in the hall can easily check whether the gaming machine installed in the hall has the same specifications as the one that conforms to the specification (whether or not the gaming machine is tampered with). It is desirable to
For example, with regard to a gaming machine having a compatible gaming machine and a separated numerical value, there is also a possibility that the gaming machine may differ from the conforming gaming machine, and in this case, the manufacturer is requested to confirm the gaming machine. Fraud, etc. can be confirmed early.
Therefore, if a function for calculating and displaying management information is provided as in the present embodiment, it can be easily and reliably confirmed whether the information conforms to the suitable one.

  In this embodiment, when the front door of the slot machine 10 is opened (thereby, the door switch 15 is turned on), and the setting key is inserted and rotated 90 degrees clockwise, the setting key switch 12 is turned on. . This state is under so-called setting confirmation. Therefore, the current setting value is displayed on the setting value display LED 73. Since the setting change is different during the setting confirmation, the setting value is not changed even if the setting switch 13 is operated.

Then, in the present embodiment, when the setting switch 13 is pressed once during this setting confirmation, the “advantage percentage” is displayed on the digits 6 to 9 in FIG. 3. First, the digits 6 and 7 display the information type. In the example of FIG. 38, the advantageous section ratio is displayed as "U7". Also, in this example, assuming that the advantageous segment ratio is “50 (%)”, digits 7 and 8 are displayed as “50”. Therefore, "U750" is displayed on the management information display LED 74 (digits 6 to 9).
In addition, when displaying the numerical value of management information, it is a decimal notation.

Next, when the setting switch 13 is pressed once more, "Continuous role ratio (6000 games (15 sets))" is displayed, and "y6" is displayed as the type of this information. In this example, the ratio is "45". "(%)" Is displayed.
Further, when the setting switch 13 is pressed once more, “character ratio (6000 games (15 sets))” is displayed, and “y7” is displayed as the type of this information. In this example, the ratio is “60 (% Is displayed.

Similarly, when the setting switch 13 is pressed once more, "continuous role ratio (total)" is displayed, and "A6" is displayed as the type of this information. In this example, the ratio is "48 (%)". it's shown.
Furthermore, in the same manner, when the setting switch 13 is pressed once more, "character item ratio (total)" is displayed, and "A7" is displayed as the type of this information. In this example, the ratio is "52 (%)"it's shown.
Further, when the setting switch 13 is pressed again, the display is returned to the first display, and the advantageous section "U750" is displayed.
Further, the display of the management information may be turned off when the setting switch 13 is not operated for a predetermined time (for example, 10 seconds). After the light is turned off, when the setting switch 13 is pressed, the advantageous section proportion "U750" which is the first display is displayed.

Further, while the opening of the front door is detected by the door switch 15, the management information is continuously displayed (each digit 6 to 9 is kept lit), and it is detected that the front door is closed by the door switch 15. At this time, the digits 6 to 9 may be turned off.
In this case, when the opening of the front door is detected by the door switch 15, the advantageous section "U750" may be displayed before the setting key switch 12 or the setting switch 13 is turned on, or the door switch 15 Thus, the digits 6 to 9 may not be turned on only when the opening of the front door is detected, and when the setting key switch 12 and the setting switch 13 are turned on, the advantageous section "U750" may be displayed.

In addition, regardless of whether the front door is detected to be open by the door switch 15 or not, after the power switch 11 is turned on, a predetermined cycle (for example, every about 3 seconds (the number of interrupt processing is 1,500 for each interrupt) 38) may be displayed on the management information display LED 74 sequentially.
Here, the management information shown in FIG. 38 includes information whose ratio depends on the setting value such as the continuous winning product ratio.
On the other hand, there is a high possibility that the front door will be opened while the hall is open (when the player can play a game),
a) An error that occurs when it is determined that the medals in the hopper 35 are empty,
b) An error that occurs when it is determined that the medal has stagnated in the medal selector,
c) An error that occurs when it is determined that the medal has stagnated in the payout opening of the hopper 35,
d) An error occurs when the medal 35 is full in the hopper 35 (provided at the side of the hopper 35 and the sub storage box for storing the medals overflowing from the hopper 35 is full) (all can be restored as described above) Errors that belong to errors).

When such an error occurs, if the person in charge of the hall opens the front door, the player may see the management information and may infer the set value. In order to solve such a problem, when at least one of all the errors a) to d) or the errors a) to d) occurs, the management information display LED 74 does not perform lighting display. It is desirable to configure (to turn off). The present invention is not limited to the above-described errors a) to d), and can be configured not to perform lighting display by the management information display LED 74 even when another error occurs.
Also, if the above-mentioned unrecoverable error occurs, there is a doubt about the reliability of the displayed management information, or after clearing the unrecoverable error, clear the data that is the basis of the displayed management information. It is desirable not to display it.

  In order to view the management information displayed on the main control board 50, the front door must be opened, and if the front door is opened, the door opening error always occurs, but management is performed by operating the various switches described above. It is safe to display the information.

In addition, the above information types "U7", "y6", "y7", "A6" and "A7" are exemplification, and an arbitrary display is performed by a 2-digit alphabet, a symbol, or a numerical value, or a combination thereof. be able to.
In the above example, different numerical examples are shown for the continuous character ratio and the character ratio, but when only the continuous characters are included as in this embodiment, the continuous character ratio and the character ratio have the same value. It becomes.

  When the above display is performed, for example, when the door switch 15 is turned on, the setting key switch 12 is turned on, and the setting switch 13 is turned on, the control information display mode is entered, and "U7 The segment data displaying “proportion” is read and displayed on digits 6 and 7. Specifically, if "U7" is displayed, the segment data will be "00111110 (B)" and "00100111 (B)".

  Furthermore, when displaying a numerical value, for example, if it is an advantageous section ratio, the data of "F008" in FIG. 27 described above is read and converted into segment data. When the advantageous section ratio is "50 (D)", the data stored in "F008" is "00110010". When the value is converted into segment data, it becomes “01101101 (B)” and “00111111 (B)”.

  Further, when displaying the advantageous section percentage, the total number of games ("F007" to "F005") is read to determine whether the total number of games has reached "175000 (D)". When it is determined that the total number of games has not reached the "175000" game, the numerical value of the advantageous section percentage is displayed in a blinking manner. On the other hand, when it is determined that the total number of games has reached the "175000" game, the numerical value of the advantageous section percentage is lit and displayed. In this way, the display pattern is made different depending on whether or not the total number of games has reached "175000 games".

As a specific example to be blinked and displayed, for example, displaying in a pattern of repeating turning off and lighting at intervals of "0.5 seconds", turning off time repeating "0.5 seconds", and lighting time repeating "one second" It can be listed as a pattern. When the lighting time is longer than the lighting-off time as compared with the case where the lighting-off time and the lighting time are set to the same time, the display time of the management information can be made longer and the illumination such as a hole is dim The visibility can be improved even under the circumstances.
The display pattern may be made different so that it can be determined whether or not the "175000" game has been reached. Therefore, not only blinking or lighting, for example, the display of "U7" of the information type is "U7"(" The display different from 175000 "game or more), for example," U1 "(less than" 175000 "game) may be displayed. Alternatively, when the game is less than the “175000” game, “U7” may be displayed in a blinking manner, and the numerical value may be displayed in a lit state.

Similarly to the above, when displaying the continuous character ratio (6000 games) and the character ratio (6000 games), when the total number of games has not reached "6000" game, the continuous character ratio and Flashes and displays the character ratio. On the other hand, when the total number of games has reached the "6000" game, the numerical values of the continuous symbol ratio and the symbol ratio are respectively lit and displayed.
Therefore, when displaying the continuous character ratio (6000 games) and the character ratio (6000 games), the value of the total number of games ("F007" to "F005") in FIG. It is read and it is determined whether or not the "6000" game has been reached, and the display pattern is made different according to the result.

Furthermore, similarly, when displaying the continuous character ratio (total) and the character ratio (total), when the total number of games has not reached the "175000" game, the continuous character ratio (total) and each The figure of the character ratio (total) is displayed blinking. On the other hand, when the total number of games has reached the "175000" game, the numerical values of the continuous character ratio (total) and the character ratio (total) are respectively lit and displayed.
Therefore, when displaying the continuous character ratio (total) and the character ratio (total), the values of the total number of times played ("F007" to "F005") are read in FIG. It is determined whether or not it has reached, and the display pattern is made different according to the result.

In particular, it is possible to distinguishably indicate whether or not the advantage section ratio, the continuous character product ratio, and the character product ratio are 6000 games or more and 175000 games or more (such as making the display mode different) , Has the following advantages.
For example, when it is determined whether or not the gaming machine is an unauthorized gaming machine based on the management information of the currently displayed advantage section ratio, the continuous part ratio, and the part ratio, the number of times of the management information By referring to whether the value is a value for, it is possible to more accurately determine whether or not the game is an unauthorized gaming machine.

For example, it is assumed that the design value (average value) of the advantageous segment ratio was 55 (%) at the time of type application of the gaming machine.
At this time, for example, when the ratio of the advantageous section in 1000 games is 80 (%) and when the ratio of the advantageous section is 80 (%) in 175000 games or more, the judgment as to whether it is incorrect or not is different. . As for the advantageous section ratio in 1000 games, the possibility that the value has not yet converged is also considered sufficiently. On the other hand, since the advantageous section ratio in 175000 games is a value for a sufficient number of games, it is considered that the value has converged. Therefore, the latter can be judged to have a high possibility of fraud.

As described above, even if the value is the same, as the number of games increases, the numerical value converges to the design value. Therefore, if the number of games and the numerical value are combined to determine whether it is an unauthorized gaming machine, More accurate judgment can be made.
In addition, as described above, when the total number of games has not reached the predetermined number of games (6000 games or 175000 games), the blinking display is made, and when the predetermined number of games has been reached, the lighting display is displayed. Conversely, when the total number of games has not reached the predetermined number of games, the display may be lit, and when the predetermined number of games has been reached, the blinking may be displayed.

  In the above example, the digits 6 to 9 are mounted on the main control board 50 and the management information display LED 74 is provided. However, for example, management information may be displayed using the storage number display LED 76 or the acquisition number display LED 78. It is possible. This setting results in cost reduction since it is not necessary to provide the digits 6 to 9 separately.

FIG. 39 is a diagram showing an example of displaying management information using the storage number display LED 76. As shown in FIG.
In the example of FIG. 39, the example which has nine medals as a credit is shown. For this reason, initially, the display of the stored number display LED 76 is “09”.
Then, even if the front door is opened and the door switch 15 is turned on, there is no change in the display of the stored number display LED 76 (in order to display the door open error by the acquired number display LED 78 described later).

  Then, when the setting switch 13 is pressed once, the storage number display LED 76 displays “U7” indicating that it is an advantageous section ratio. Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed, “50”, which is a numerical value of the advantageous section ratio, is displayed. If this state is left, "U7" and "50" are displayed alternately every two seconds.

Then, when the setting switch 13 is pressed next, the stored number display LED 76 displays “y6” indicating that it is “continuous role ratio (6000 games)”. Then, when the predetermined time has elapsed, the numerical value "45" of the "continuous role ratio (6000 games)" is displayed. Then, as in the above, when this state is left, “y6” and “45” are alternately displayed every 2 seconds.
In the example of FIG. 39, an arrow is shown to shift from the display of “50” to the display of “y6”, but even if the setting switch 13 is pressed while “U7” is displayed, “y6” is displayed. Of course (the same applies to the other figures).

  In addition, when the setting switch 13 is pressed during the display of "y6" or "45", the stored number display LED 76 displays "y7" indicating that it is "feature ratio (6000 games)", When the predetermined time has elapsed, a numerical value "60" of "character ratio (6000 games)" is displayed. Then, similarly to the above, when this state is left, “y7” and “60” are alternately displayed every 2 seconds.

Furthermore, when the setting switch 13 is pressed during the display of “y7” or “60”, the stored number display LED 76 displays “A6” which indicates that “continuous character ratio (total)”. When the fixed time has elapsed, the numerical value "48" of the "continuous character ratio (total)" is displayed. Then, in the same manner as described above, when this state is left, "A6" and "48" are alternately displayed every two seconds.
Furthermore, similarly, when the setting switch 13 is pressed during the display of "A6" or "48", the storage number display LED 76 displays "A7" which indicates that it is "character / character ratio (total) When the predetermined time has elapsed, the numerical value "52" of the "character and character ratio (total)" is displayed. Then, similarly to the above, when this state is left, “A7” and “52” are alternately displayed every 2 seconds.

Further, when the setting switch 13 is further pressed in this state, the display returns to the display of the first advantageous section proportions “U7” and “50”.
When the display as described above is performed, when the front door is closed and the door switch 13 is turned off, the display is switched to the storage number display "09".

FIG. 40 is a diagram showing an example in which management information is displayed using the acquisition number display LED 78.
The example of FIG. 40 shows an example in which "09" is displayed as the number of acquisitions.
Then, when the front door is opened and the door switch 15 is turned on, a door open error is detected. As a result, the acquisition number display LED 78 displays “dE” indicating a door open error. In this state, when the setting switch 13 is pressed once, the acquisition number display LED 78 displays "U7" indicating that it is an advantageous section ratio. Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 2 seconds) has elapsed, “50”, which is a numerical value of the advantageous section ratio, is displayed. If this state is left, "U7" and "50" are displayed alternately every two seconds.

  Thereafter, as in the example of FIG. 39, each time the setting switch 13 is operated, predetermined management information (information type and numerical value) is displayed. Next, the front door is closed, and when the door switch 15 is turned off, the error content "dE" is displayed again (a door open error can not be resolved only by closing the front door). Then, in order to eliminate this error display, an error release operation is performed. For example, the door key is inserted into a keyhole provided in the front door, and the error is eliminated by turning the door key counterclockwise, for example. When the error release operation is performed in this manner, the number of acquisitions “09” before the display of “dE” is displayed again on the acquisition number display LED 78.

  In the example of FIG. 39 and FIG. 40, when the continuous character ratio (6000 games) and the character ratio (6000 games) do not reach the total number of games played "6000", at least one of the information type and the numerical value blinks indicate. Similarly, when the continuous character ratio (total) and the character ratio (total) do not reach the total number of times played "175000", at least one of the information type and the numerical value is displayed in a blinking manner.

Second Embodiment
Subsequently, a second embodiment of the present invention will be described.
In the second embodiment, the management information display LED 74 (digits 6 to 9) mounted on the main control board 50 (in the case where the main control boards 50A and 50B are divided, the main control board 50) , Lights up.
There are various ways to display the five pieces of information shown in FIG. 38 when constantly lit, but, for example, updating of the management information to be displayed can be mentioned every five seconds. Specifically, “U750” (displayed for 5 seconds) → “y645” (displayed for 5 seconds) →... “A752” (displayed for 5 seconds) → “U750” (displayed for 5 seconds) →. Can be mentioned. A digit turn-off time of about 0.5 to 1 second may be provided between each information display.

FIG. 41 is an external perspective view showing the base portion 1 of the slot machine 10. As shown in FIG. In FIG. 41, the front door is not shown. The front door opens / closes the front surface of the base portion 1 with the "front door opening / closing axis" (left side in the figure) as the support axis in FIG. Moreover, although FIG. 41 is used by description of 2nd Embodiment, the structure of 1st Embodiment is also the same as FIG.
As shown in FIG. 41, a power supply unit including a power switch 11, a medal payout device including a hopper 35, a symbol display device including three reels 31 and the like are accommodated in the base unit 1.
Further, the sub control substrate 80 is attached to the left side surface on the inner surface side of the base unit 1. On the other hand, the substrate case 16 and the main control substrate 50 accommodated in the substrate case 16 are attached to the inner back of the inner surface of the base 1. Furthermore, the substrate case 16 and the main control substrate 50 are attached above the symbol display device so that when the front door is opened, the condition of the caulking portion 16a of the substrate case 16 can be easily confirmed visually. In order to do this, it is mounted at a relatively easy-to-see position in the base portion 1.
For this reason, the management information display LED 74 mounted on the main control board 50 can also be checked relatively easily visually.

In the slot machine 10, in addition to a method in which medals are automatically replenished to the hopper 35a when the medals in the hopper 35 are exhausted, a store clerk in the hall opens the front door each time the hopper 35 is exhausted. There is known a method of replenishing the hopper 35 with medals.
However, when the front door is opened, the management information is always displayed on the management information display LED 74 mounted on the main control board 50, so that the player can view the management information. . As a result, it is possible to know the advantageous section ratio of the table on which the player is currently playing, the continuous character ratio, and the like. Therefore, there is a possibility that the set value can be estimated based on these values.
Therefore, in the second embodiment, the management information is always displayed on the management information display LED 74 mounted on the main control board 50, but it is not easily seen from the player.

FIG. 42 is a view showing the substrate case 16 and the main control boards 50 (50A and 50B) in the second embodiment, and is a view corresponding to FIG. 3 of the first embodiment. In FIG. 42, Example 1 of (a) shows an example in which one main control board 50 is formed, and Example 2 of (b) is formed of two main control boards 50A and 50B. An example is shown (this point is the same as FIG. 3 of the first embodiment).
42A, the management information display LED 74 is different from the first embodiment in that the management information display LED 74 is disposed as close to the left as possible as viewed from the front of the main control board 50. In FIG. 41, since the opening and closing axis of the front door is provided on the left side when viewed from the front in the figure, if the management information display LED 74 is disposed on the left as far as possible viewed from the front, the front door is opened. , It becomes difficult for the player to see.

  Further, in the example of FIG. 3B, the arrangement of the main control boards 50A and 50B is reversed from that of FIG. 3B. Then, the management information display LED 74 is mounted on the main control board 50B, but in the board case 16, it is positioned to the left.

Furthermore, in the second embodiment, the distance (distance) between the management information display LED 74 and the caulking portion 16a is made longer. In FIG. 42, assuming that the position of the management information display LED 74 is closer to the left, when the caulking portion 16a of the substrate case 16 is moved away from the management information display LED 74, as shown in FIG. Is the right end of the substrate case 16.
In this way, even when the caulking portion 16a is broken and the main control board 50 (50A and 50B) is accessed, the management information display LED 74 is scratched or damaged when the caulking portion 16a is broken. Can be prevented more effectively.

  The caulking portion 16a is for breaking when the substrate case 16 is opened, but in addition to the caulking portion 16a, a body caulking portion (not shown) for fixing the gaming machine and the substrate case 16 is You may have. At this time, when removing the substrate case 16 from the gaming machine, it is also necessary to destroy the body caulking portion. Also in this case, as with the caulking portion 16a, the first position for providing the body caulking portion is to prevent the management information display LED 74 from being accidentally damaged or broken when the body caulking portion is broken. When the position (for example, the upper end portion of the substrate case 16), the position where the management information display LED 74 is provided is the second position away from the first position (for example, the lower portion with respect to the central portion of the main control substrate 50, right It is desirable to provide it on the side or left side).

As described above, by arranging the management information display LED 74 in a position direction different from the position direction in which the caulking portion 16 a and / or the body caulking portion is provided, it is possible to effectively prevent the damage and the like of the management information display LED 74. it can.
In addition, although the position of the caulking part 16a is made into the right end part, it is not restricted to this, For example, it can also design as an upper end part. At this time, the management information display LED 74 is a lower portion, a right side portion, or a left side portion with reference to the central portion of the main control board 50, so that the management information display LED 74 is damaged by mistake when the caulking portion 16a is broken. And can be prevented from being damaged.

As mentioned above, although one Embodiment of this invention was described, this invention is not limited to the said embodiment, For example, the following various deformation | transformation are possible.
(1) The upper limit value of the number of games in the advantageous section is set to 1,500, but it is not limited to this. For example, 3000 payouts, 2000 differentials, an instruction function operation game (when winning small group B) It is also possible to set using a variable other than the total number of games, such as the number of games 100 times. Alternatively, it is also possible to set a plurality of conditions such as 1500 games or 3000 sheets, and determine that the upper limit has been reached when any one of the conditions is satisfied.

(2) Although the advantageous section display LED 77 uses the segment DP of the storage number display LED 76, the present invention is not limited to this, and a dedicated display (such as an LED) may be provided to display whether or not it is an advantageous section. However, cost can be reduced if it can be covered by the existing LED as in the above embodiment.
Here, the advantageous section is managed by the main control board 50 (main management), and the sub control board 80 does not manage the advantageous section. Therefore, the lamp for displaying the advantageous section needs to be electrically connected to the main control board 50. For example, the effect lamp 21 electrically connected to the sub control board 80 displays the advantageous section. It can not be a lamp.
However, even a lamp that appears to be a kind of effect lamp can be used as a lamp for displaying an advantageous section, as long as the lamp is controlled by the main control board 50.

  Further, although the advantageous section display LED 77 is configured from the segment DP of the digit 2 of the storage number display LED 76, it may be configured from the segment DP of the digit 4 of the acquisition number display LED 78, for example.

  Furthermore, when the player ends the game, the menu button 25 may be operated to display a game history (two-dimensional code). Therefore, by arranging the advantageous section display LED in the vicinity of the menu button 25, it is possible to make the player notice that it is in the advantageous section at the end of the game. For example, even if storage number display LED 76 (segment DP of digit 2 is set as advantageous section display LED 77) or acquisition number display LED 78 (segment DP of digit 4 is set as advantageous section display LED 77) near menu button 25 Good. Of course, as shown in FIG. 2, it is also effective to provide the advantageous section display LED 77 in the vicinity of the settlement switch 46. Furthermore, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, by turning on the advantageous section display LED 77 before the menu button 25 becomes operable, the player can recognize the transition to the advantageous section without making the menu button 25 Can be prevented (displaying a game history (two-dimensional code)).

  (3) When the power switch 11 is turned off while the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit, the advantageous section control means 69 turns on / off the power when the power switch 11 is turned on again. In order to maintain the advantageous section before and after, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on again. Therefore, for example, when closing the store with the advantageous section display LED 77 lit in the hall, if it is desired to turn off the advantageous section display LED 77 at the start of business the next day, the setting is changed (including resetting of the same set value) Can be mentioned. By changing the setting, the predetermined area of the RWM 53 is initialized, and the display data of the storage number display LED 76 (data of the advantageous section) is also initialized. It becomes ".

  (4) During the advantageous section, in the game in which the condition device capable of operating the instruction function is won, the instruction function is operated. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is not necessary to activate the instruction function even in a game in which the condition device capable of activating the instruction function is won during the advantageous section. The advantageous section is a game section in which the operation of the instruction function is "possible". Therefore, after shifting to the advantageous section, whether or not to execute the instruction function operation game, or the number of times of the instruction function operation game is determined by lottery or the like, and the instruction function operation game is executed for the determined number of times It is also good. And, even if the number of times of the game is over, if the continuation condition of the advantageous zone is satisfied, it is possible to continue staying in the advantageous zone and again determine the number of times of executing the instruction function operation game by lottery or the like It is. Furthermore, during the advantageous section, the lottery that falls from the advantageous section to the normal section is won based on winning every game or a specific condition device (for example, a common set such as a small winning combination D or a small winning combination E1). It may be determined.

(5) In the present embodiment, the advantageous section game number corresponding value stores a value obtained by multiplying the game number by 100. Similarly, the value corresponding to the number of consecutive paid-out coins at the time of continuous serving and the corresponding value for the number of paid-out payouts at the combination are each stored a value obtained by multiplying the number of paid-out sheets by 100. However, it is possible to store the number of times of playing itself and the number of payouts itself without being multiplied by 100 depending on the advantageous section ratio, the continuous character ratio, and the calculation method of the character ratio (CPU used). It is not necessarily limited to storing the value multiplied by 100.
Similarly, although the value of the total number of games is stored the number of games itself, it is not limited to this, depending on the convenience of the calculation, a value obtained by adding a predetermined number to the total number of games or a predetermined value The corresponding value may be stored.
In this case, when the advantageous section ratio, the continuous character product ratio, and the character product ratio are calculated, the number of games itself and the storage area data in which the number of payouts is stored is multiplied by 100 and the above-mentioned subtraction processing is repeatedly executed. By performing the process (for example, FIG. 37), it is possible to calculate.

  (6) The advantageous section ratio, the continuous product operation ratio, and the product operation ratio are calculated every game or every predetermined number of games regardless of the presence or absence of display of the management information, and stored in the predetermined area of RWM 53 respectively You may leave it. On the other hand, the advantageous section ratio, the continuous product operation ratio, and the product operation ratio are calculated when displaying the management information (when display is requested), and the calculation result is stored in a predetermined area of RWM 53 and the calculation The results may be displayed.

(7) In the above embodiment, each time the setting switch 13 is pressed, the management information is displayed in order. However, the switch is not limited to the setting switch 13 and may be another switch, for example, the bet switch 40 or the like, or a switch dedicated to display of management information may be separately provided.
Moreover, although the setting switch 13 and the reset switch 14 are separately provided in the present embodiment, it is conceivable to configure the setting switch and the reset switch from one switch as the setting change / reset switch. In this case, if the operation of the setting change / reset switch does not overlap with the reset (initialization) operation, management information can be displayed by the operation of the setting change / reset switch. In the case where the setting switch 13 and the reset switch 14 are separately provided as in this embodiment, the same applies to the case where the management information is displayed by the operation of the reset switch 14.

Specifically, when an error is detected, the mode is not shifted to the display mode of the management information, and the mode is shifted to the display mode of the management information on the condition that no error occurs.
For example, when a medal retention error occurs in the medal selector among the recoverable errors, the mode is not shifted to the management information display mode unless the error is eliminated.

  Further, in the above embodiment, the management information is displayed each time the setting switch 13 is pressed. That is, after the setting switch 13 is turned on, even if the operator releases the operation switch 13, the management information remains displayed. On the other hand, the management information may be displayed only while the setting switch 13 is pressed, and when the operator releases the setting switch 13, the display of the management information may be ended. For example, in the example shown in FIG. 3, when the setting switch 13 is pressed first, the first management information "U750" is displayed, but when the user releases the setting switch 13, the display is ended (digits 6 to 6). Turn off 9). Next, when the setting switch 13 is pressed, the second management information “y 645” is displayed. However, when the hand is released from the setting switch 13, it is also possible to control to end the display. When the switch for displaying the management information is a switch other than the setting switch 13, the same control as described above is possible.

Thus, various switches are used as a switch for displaying the management information, and how the relationship between the operation of the switch for displaying the management information and the display pattern (displaying time) is used. Is not limited to what is shown in the present embodiment.
Furthermore, for example, when the management information display LED 74 is mounted on the main control board 50, as a display pattern of management information,
a) Display pattern for constantly displaying management information b) Pattern for displaying management information when the front door is opened (when the door switch 15 is turned on) c) Open the front door, and a predetermined switch D) open the front door, insert the setting key, turn on the setting key switch 12, and select a pattern that displays the management information when the user operates a predetermined switch. Be
However, when an operation for transitioning to the setting change mode is performed and transitioning to the setting change mode, the transition to the management information display mode is not made, and the management information is not displayed. That is, in the setting change mode, the digit 5 is turned on, but the digits 6 to 9 are turned off.

(8) In the present embodiment, the total number of games is counted until the count value of the total number of games reaches 3 bytes full ("FFFFFF (H)"). However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the total reaches a predetermined value, the counting may be ended even if the upper limit of the storage capacity is not reached.
Further, when the total number of games has reached a predetermined value, the data value of the total number of games may be cleared and counting of the total number of games may be started again.
The above is also true for the total payout number.

  (9) The slot machine 10 of the present embodiment is designed such that the advantageous section ratio is "70" (%) or less. Therefore, in the market, it is not assumed that the percentage of favorable segments exceeds “70” (%). However, for example, when a goto act is performed, the possibility that the advantageous section ratio exceeds “70” (%) can not be denied. Therefore, for example, the data value of "F008" storing the advantageous section ratio is monitored, and when the value exceeds "70 (D)", some kind of warning is output or the display of the advantageous section ratio Different from normal times (displaying that it is abnormal) may be mentioned. For example, among the displays of the information type "U7" of the advantageous section percentage, there is a method in which the upper digit "U" and the lower digit "7" are alternately flashed at high speed.

Similarly, in the case where the upper limit of the design value is set to, for example, "60 (%)" also for the continuous character ratio or the character ratio, if the continuous character ratio or the character ratio exceeds the design value upper limit, There is a method of outputting a warning or displaying the display of the information type in the same manner as described above.
Alternatively, the information of the advantageous interval ratio etc. may be transmitted to the hall computer 200 using the external signal transmission means 70, and for example, when the advantageous interval ratio exceeds "70" (%), the information related to the warning may be transmitted. It can be mentioned.

(10) As described above, if the advantageous section ratio is set to "70" (%) or less for all the game sections, the other can be set relatively freely.
In addition, the winning of the advantageous section from the normal section may be set to less than "1/32".
Furthermore, as described above, during the advantageous section, the indicator function may be activated whenever the indicator function wins the condition device that can be activated, but the transition to the advantageous section does not activate the indicator function, and the instruction is issued The instruction function may be activated when the player has won the lottery whether to activate the function. Alternatively, when transitioning to an advantageous section, it is always set as an advantageous section that activates the indication function or is set as an advantageous section that activates the indication function only when winning the lottery whether to activate the indication function , May be determined by lottery or the like.

  Furthermore, the transition from the advantageous section to the normal section (end of the advantageous section) may be shifted when the number of games determined in advance is absorbed at the time of transition to the advantageous section, or without determining the number of games It is also possible to make a transition (fall) lottery from an advantageous section to a normal section every game or when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and to shift from the advantageous section to the normal section when winning this lottery. However, when the count value reaches the upper limit by the upper limit counter 69b, control is performed to end the advantageous section and shift to the normal section unconditionally.

  (11) In FIG. 3, the management information display LED 74 provided on the main control board 50 is composed of four digits, but may be composed of, for example, two digits. Then, for example, as shown in the examples of FIG. 39 and FIG. 40, when the setting switch 13 is pressed, the information type “U7” is displayed, the numerical value “50” is displayed after a predetermined time has elapsed, and thereafter the predetermined time "U7" and "50" may be alternately displayed repeatedly as time elapses.

(12) As the advantageous section ratio, the continuous character product ratio, and the character product ratio have been calculated by rounding off the decimal point, accurate values may not always be displayed. In that sense, the advantage section ratio, the continuous character item ratio, and the character item ratio respectively correspond to (equivalent to) a value corresponding to the advantageous character area ratio, the value corresponding to (corresponding to) the continuous character product ratio, to (part ) Is also referred to as
In addition, the ratio of the advantageous section, the ratio of consecutive items, and the ratio of items are not limited to the numbers rounded off after the decimal point, but the numbers rounded off after the decimal point, the numbers rounded up after the decimal point, the last digit is "5" or " It may be a numerical value or the like converted into 10 'increments.

(13) In the present embodiment, the combination of symbols stopped on the activated line is the same between when the small winning combination E1 is won and when the small winning combination E2 is winning. For example, at the time of the left or middle first stop at the time of the small winning combination E1 or E2 winning, it becomes possible to stop the middle cherry (stop for the small winning 36), and when the right first stop, the middle cherry does not appear It becomes (the winning combination of the small role 38). Therefore, regardless of the presence or absence of the middle stage cherry, it was not possible to determine which of the small roles E1 and E2 was won.
However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the middle row cherry is not caused to appear, the stopping points may be made different.
For example, when the small winning combination E1 or E2 is won, the middle cherry is made to appear when the left or middle first stop, and when the middle cherry appears, the player determines which of the small winning combination E1 or E2 is won. Make it impossible.

  On the other hand, at the time of the first right stop at the time of winning the small winning combination E1 or E2, similarly to the above, control is made not to appear middle cherry, and instead of not appearing middle cherry, It is possible to cause the player to make a stop appearance which allows the player to determine which one has been won.

Specifically, for example, control may be performed as follows.
First, the minors included in the winning of the minor E1 are the minors 36 and 38, as in the above embodiment.
On the other hand, the minors included in the winning of the minor E2 are minors 36 and 41 (smaller 41 is newly added).
Then, when the small combination E1 or E2 is won, the small combination 36 (middle cherry) can be stopped at the left or middle first stop when the small combination E1 or E2 is selected, and the small combination 38 is stopped at the right first stop when the small combination E1 is won. On the other hand, the small winning combination 41 is stopped at the time of the first right stop when the small winning combination E2 is won.

  As a combination of the symbols of the small part 41, for example, "bell A / bell B"-"replay"-"black 7 / blue 7 / red 7 / blank" are used. As a result, the symbol of the middle reel 31 is different between the stop of the small winning combination 38 and the stop of the small winning combination 41. While “replay” does not stop on the middle reel 31 when the small role 38 stops, “replay” always stops on the middle reel 31 when the small role 41 stops. Thereby, it is possible to determine the winning of the small role 38 (small portion E1) or the small portion 41 (small portion E2).

  Furthermore, regardless of the pressing order of the stop switch 42, the small combination 38 is stopped when the middle row cherry is not stopped when the small combination E1 is won, and the small combination 41 is stopped when the middle row cherry not stopped when the small combination E2 is won. May be In this way, it is possible to determine which of the small combination E1 or the small combination E2 is won when the middle stage cherry is not stopped even at the left or middle first stop.

Other examples include the following method.
The small winning combination included in the winning of the small winning combination E1 is the low winning combination 36 and 38, as in the above embodiment. Further, the small winning combination included in the winning of the small winning combination E2 is also set to the small winning combination 36 and the small winning combination 37 and 38 as in the above embodiment. When the small combination E1 or E2 is won, the small combination 36 (middle cherry) can be stopped at the left or middle first stop, and at the right first stop when the small combination E1 is won, the small combination 38 is operated by the operation timing of the stop switch 42. At the time of the first right stop at the time of winning the small winning combination E2, the small winning combination 38 is stopped by the operation timing of the stop switch 42.
Then, when the small combination 38 is dropped when the small combination E1 or E2 is won, the combination of different symbols is stopped. Thereby, the small winning combination E1 or E2 may be determined.

  (14) When winning the 1BBA + small winning combination E1 and lighting the advantageous section display LED 77 before the predetermined timing of the game comes next time, the effect (such as continuous effect) on whether to shift to the advantageous section is not output Is preferred. Because the advantageous section display LED 77 is on, it is known that the player has shifted to the advantageous section. However, it is possible to output continuous rendering whether or not 1 BBA (special role) is won. In addition, when it is decided that the 1BBA + small winning combination E1 is won and it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, the advantageous section display LED 77 is not always turned on even after the predetermined timing has passed (always At timing 2) shown in 23, the small section E1 is independently elected by turning on the advantageous section display LED 77 by the time the predetermined timing of the next game of the game in which the small combination E1 is won comes, and to the advantageous section In such a case, it is not necessary to output an effect or the like asking whether or not 1BB has been won, since it is understood that it has been decided to shift.

(15) In the present embodiment, it is possible to win one winning combination at the time of incorrect pressing order when the small winning combination B is won. However, the present invention is not limited to this, the small combination that can be won at the time of pressing the wrong combination when winning the small combination B group may be a combination of any number. Furthermore, although the dropout rate at the time of pressing wrong order at the time of winning the small winning combination B group is 75% in this embodiment, it is not limited to this and can be set variously such as 50%.
Further, even when the winning combination in the small winning combination C group winning is incorrect, it is possible to set the winning combination to be dropped with a certain probability as in the small winning combination B group winning.

(16) In the above embodiment, during 1 BBA operation, the number of games (expected value) for setting 6 is increased relative to setting 1, and it is advantageous, for example, when the number of games during 1 BBA operation reaches a predetermined number. I tried to add the section.
However, conversely to the above, during 1 BBA operation, the probability of winning a small winning combination of setting 6 with respect to setting 1 is increased and the winning probability of small winning combination E2 is decreased, so that the game with a smaller setting 6 is It may be the number of times (expected value). In this case, for example, when the operation of 1 BBA is completed with a small number of games (setting 6 is easier to achieve than setting 1), it is possible to add an advantageous section.

  (17) In the present embodiment, when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section at the time of the single winning of the small winning combination E1, for example, the conditional device which does not include the special winning combination which can carry over the winning is advantageous by the predetermined timing. The section display LED 77 is turned on. Here, the “predetermined timing” is not limited to the timing shown in the above embodiment, and can be set variously. For example, in the game when the small winning combination E1 is won, when the winning determination is finished, when there is a payout of medals in the game, the payout of medals is finished, and the like.

  In addition, although it does not occur in the present embodiment, for example, when it is determined to shift to an advantageous section in a game in which the replay is won, the automatic bet is ended based on the replay win, or the next game (replay) starts. When the switch 41 is operated, lighting the advantageous section display LED 77 may be mentioned.

(18) When “1 BBA + small winning combination E1” is won, if the small winning combination 36 can be won by operating the stop switch 42 at the left or middle first stop, the middle row cherry can appear. However, when the winning flag is only the small winning combination E1, the middle row cherry is allowed to appear, and when the 1 BBA winning flag is also set, the middle row cherry does not appear in any pushing order (all, the small winning combination 38 is made to win). You may stop control.
When controlled in this manner, there is a disadvantage that the middle row cherry can not be displayed and the player can not be beaten even when it is decided to shift to the advantageous section when "1 BBA + small combination E1" is won.

On the other hand, even when the small winning combination E1 alone is won after being inside the 1BBA, the standing winning flag is "1BBA + small winning combination E1", so the same stop control as described above can be adopted.
As described above, since it is not possible to determine the transition to the advantageous section in the inside, after the player knows that the inside is inside, even if the player wins the small part E1 and the middle cherry appears, the player is not , I have the impression that I wasted. On the other hand, if the stop control as described above is performed, since the middle cherry does not appear at all inside, it is possible to avoid giving the player the impression of having made a waste draw.

In particular, there are "Belle A / Bell B"-"Cherry"-"Black 7 / Blue 7 / Red 7 / Blank" (Fig. 11) as a combination of symbols of small part 38, and this combination of patterns and patterns The pattern 02 "bell A / bell B"-"cherry"-"bell A / bell B" is similar. Therefore, by causing the combination of the above-mentioned symbols of the small winning combination 38 to appear, it is possible to show a dropout at the time of the small winning combination B group winning (do not show the rare combination).
The above is also true when the player wins the small winning combination E1 after winning the small winning combination E1 after being in the inside of the 1 BBB or winning the small winning combination E2 after being in the inside of the 1 BBB. It is.

  (19) As shown in FIG. 17, the winning probability of replay is the same (number of units is “8978”) for non-RT and RT1. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the winning probability of replay of RT1 may be set higher than the winning probability of replay of non-RT.

  (20) In the present embodiment, after the 1 BBB operation is finished, it is shifted to RT1, and the lottery of Replay E is performed in RT1, and the winning of Replay E is performed to add the advantageous section. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when it is shifted to RT1 during the advantageous section, it is possible to set the advantageous section as an additional specialization zone (a state in which the frequency of additional addition is high, a state in which the number of additional games increases). Then, the pattern symbol is displayed, and the additional specialization zone is continued until it shifts to RT2, and the addition of the advantageous section is executed each time a predetermined condition is satisfied in this RT1 (not limited to the winning of replay E). It is also good.

  (21) In the present embodiment, RT after the end of 1 BBA operation is non-RT, and RT after the end of 1 BBB operation is RT1. However, instead of shifting to different RTs in this way, it is also possible to shift to the same RT. For example, it may be transitioned to non-RT after the end of 1 BBB operation. In this case, after the 1 BBB operation in the advantageous section is completed, the advantageous section may be set as an additional specialization zone.

(22) In the present embodiment, as the management information, the advantageous section ratio (total), the continuous character ratio (6000 games and total), and the character ratio (6000 games and total) are displayed. It is also possible to calculate and display management information, for example, a payout rate.
As a calculation method of the payout rate, for example, the following method may be mentioned.
a) "Total number of payouts x 100" 総 "Total number of games excluding replays after replay win"
b) "(total payout number + number of replay winnings x 3) x 100" ÷ "total number of games"
And when adopting a), each buffer which memorizes "the total payout number x 100" and "the total number of games excluding the replay after the replay winning" is provided. Further, when adopting b), a buffer for storing “(total payout number + replay winning number × 3) × 100” is provided. Note that buffers of “total payout number × 100” and “replay winning number × 300” may be separately provided, and the values of both may be added.

In addition, "3" of "the number of times of replay winning × 3" means the number of bets of the game when the replay is won. For example, when the bet number fluctuates depending on the gaming state etc., it is not limited to "3", and a value bet on the game when the replay is won (for example, "2" or "1") There may be a game to play.
In addition, it has a storage area for storing the total number of games itself, the total number of payouts itself, the number of replay winnings itself (which may be "the number of replay winnings × the value bet on the game when the replay wins"). When calculating, the value may be multiplied by 100 and then calculated.

Furthermore, as the calculation method of a) and b), a method of repeating subtraction is adopted as in the above-described calculation method.
Then, the payout rate is displayed as one of the management information, and if it is compared with the designed payout rate, it is possible to determine whether or not the gaming machine is unauthorized. Furthermore, in this case as well, if the lighting mode is made different depending on whether the total number of games is 6000 games or more and 175000 games or more, it is more accurately an illegal gaming machine or not It becomes possible to determine the
The display of the information type indicating the payout rate may be any display as long as it can be distinguished from other management information. For example, digit 6 is displayed as "P.", and digits 7 to 9 are displayed. The payout rate (three figures) can be displayed using.

(23) In the present embodiment, it has been described that the upper limit counter 69b may be a decrement counter or an increment counter. Here, adopting the increment counter as the upper limit counter 69b has the following merits.
When the count value of the upper limit counter 69b becomes the upper limit value, for example, when the count value becomes "1500" when it is an increment counter, the advantageous section is forcibly terminated, so various parameters related to the advantageous section (stored in RWM 53) Initialize the value). The parameters to be initialized include, for example, the number of games played during the advantageous section counter 69a, the upper limit counter 69b, and the indication function activation game (when the indication function is activated when the small winning combination B is won). And "0" is optimal as the value at the time of initialization. Furthermore, it is preferable that the addresses of the RWM 53 which store parameters to be initialized be continuous. Specifically, for example, "F100", "F101", "F102", and so on.

This is simple because, similar to the initialization process of RWM 53 accompanying the setting change, the process of putting "0" in the address of RWM 53 within a predetermined range can be performed by repeatedly performing the process while shifting the address one by one. It is because it can execute by the processing which The parameter cleared with the advantageous section as the upper limit value is also initialized at the time of setting change.
Note that the address of RWM 53, which stores parameters to be initialized, is assigned with regularity (for example, "F100", "F102", "F104", etc.), and the address is "0". Even when the initialization process is performed by repeatedly performing the process of entering while shifting the address by a predetermined value (in the above case, “2”), the process can be performed with a simplified process.

Here, in the case where the upper limit counter 69b is a decrement counter, when the count value is "0", whether it is "0" due to being initialized or the advantageous section has an upper limit value (1500 games It can not be known from the count value whether or not it becomes “0”. Therefore, when determining whether or not the upper limit of the advantageous interval is determined based on the count value of the upper limit counter 69b, the count value of the upper limit counter 69b and data indicating whether or not it is the advantageous interval (in the predetermined area of RWM 53 Needs to be done on the basis of
On the other hand, when the upper limit counter 69b is the increment counter, the count value of the upper limit counter 69b is read, and when it is "1500", it can be determined that it is the upper limit of the advantageous section. That is, it can be determined whether or not the upper limit is achieved only by the count value of the upper limit counter 69b.

(24) Update of RWM 53 data shown in FIG. 27 to FIG. 30, and the processes in FIG. 32, FIG. 36 and FIG. 37 are executed at the end of the game of each game, more specifically, after the prize determination process .
On the other hand, in the second embodiment, since the management information such as the advantageous segment ratio is continuously displayed, the same management information (for example, the advantageous segment ratio) may be displayed a plurality of times in one game, for example. .
And an advantageous section ratio etc. can also be considered at the time of a display whenever it calculates.
From the above, in one game, the same management information (e.g., an advantageous section ratio) may be calculated a plurality of times.
(25) The above embodiment and various modifications are not limited to being implemented alone, but can be implemented in combination as appropriate.

Subsequently, third and subsequent embodiments of the present invention will be described.
In the third and subsequent embodiments, the meanings of the terms are as follows.
The "instruction game section" refers to a game section in which an instruction function activation game is always executed or a frequency of execution is increased in a game having an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch in an advantageous section.
The "instruction game section" is similar to the conventional AT (abbreviation for "assist time". In the case where AT is executed in RT with a high probability of replay win, "ART"). In the following description, the "instruction game section" will be referred to as "AT" as necessary.

"Always execute the instruction function operation game" is a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, specifically, at the time of replay B group winning of the embodiment, at the time of replay C group, at the time of small combination B group winning , And in the small winning combination C group, it means that the instruction function must be activated.
Since the AT of this embodiment is executed in principle at RT3 (replay probability), it is basically "ART", but may fall to RT2 due to a player's mistake in operation of the stop switch. Even if it falls from RT3 to RT2, continue AT. Furthermore, the AT may be executed by RTs other than RT3 and RT2. Therefore, the AT at RT which is not a high probability of replay like RT3 is not strictly "ART". When the player falls from RT3 to RT2 during AT, the instruction function is activated at the time of replay B-group winning to display the correct pressing order by the operation of the instruction function in order to return to RT3.

On the other hand, "the execution frequency has been increased" means that the instruction function is not activated at "100%", for example, at the time of the small winning combination B group winning or the small winning combination C group winning, for example 95% It is a concept that includes
As will be described later, in the command game period, when the small winning combination B is won, a lottery is performed to determine whether to activate the instruction function, and when the lottery is won, it is conceivable to activate the instruction function. In such a case, it was defined that "the execution frequency was increased" because it does not mean "always activate the indication function".

As described above, since the instruction game section is a game section for executing the instruction function operation game, it is necessary that it is an advantageous section as its premise. Therefore, when the instruction game section is always an advantageous section, and the instruction game section is a normal section or a standby section (hereinafter, the normal section and the standby section may be collectively referred to as "non-advantage section"). There is no.
Further, the start and end of the instruction game section can be set arbitrarily. For example, the instruction game section may be started simultaneously with the start of the advantageous section. Alternatively, even when the advantageous section is started, the instruction game section may be started when the start condition of the instructed game section is satisfied in the advantageous section without immediately starting the instructed game section.

Furthermore, the termination condition of the instruction game section may be determined at the start of the instruction game section, or the termination condition may not be determined at the start of the instruction game section.
In the case where the termination condition of the instruction game section is determined by the start of the instruction game section, the instruction game section may be extended after the instruction game section is started.
Here, various parameters (variables) can be used to determine the command game section. For example, firstly, the ending condition of the instruction game section may be set by the number of games. Specifically, at the start of the command game section, setting the number of games in the command game section to, for example, the "50" game or the "100" game may be mentioned.

  Second, the end condition of the instruction game section may be set by the number of payouts. If it sets in this way, it will become the same termination conditions as a special game. Specifically, the end condition of the instruction game section may be set to, for example, "the number of payout sheets has exceeded 300".

Furthermore, thirdly, the end condition of the instruction game section may be set by the difference number. Specifically, the ending condition of the instruction game section may be set to "the difference number exceeding 200".
Fourthly, the termination condition of the instruction game section may be set by the number of times of operation of the instruction function at the time of winning the small winning combination B group and the small winning combination C group (or only the small winning combination B group). Specifically, in the game in which the termination condition of the instruction game section is set to "the number of times of the designated function operation at the time of winning the small winning combination B group and the small winning combination C group is 50 times" It can be mentioned that the instruction game section is ended.

In the command game section determined as described above, when the command game section is extended, the parameters defining the command game section are changed (also referred to as "extension", "overlay", or "addition").
For example, in the instruction game section of 100 games, when the extension of the instruction game section is performed on the 50th game and the game count is loaded on 30 games, the remaining game count of the instruction game section is from 50 to 80 Be changed.
When the instruction game section is set by the payout number of sheets, the difference sheet number, or the number of times of operation of the instruction function, the value to be added to these parameters is determined when extending the instruction game section as described above. Add (add) the value.

Also, based on the transition of the gaming state, the instruction game section (AT) may be started and ended.
Here, the “playing state” may include a control state controlled by the main control board 50 in addition to the above-described RT (lottery state). That is, the gaming state is a concept including both the lottery state and the control state.
Further, the “control state” is a gaming state that can be determined regardless of RT (a control state may be linked to RT as described later).
As the control state, for example, concepts such as precursor, CZ (abbreviation of "chance zone"), AT, and the like can be mentioned. More specifically, as the control state performed in the advantageous section, the state (high probability state) or low state (low probability state) in which the transition probability to the instructed game section (AT) is high, or the indicated game section (AT) As the control state, various control states in consideration of game characteristics such as a state (such as an additional specialization zone) in which the additional winning probability of the instruction game section (AT) is high or a low state may be mentioned.
The control state of the normal section is normal, and the control state of the advantageous section is the precursor, CZ, or AT.

For example, at the same time as the transition to the advantageous section, the control state is changed from "normal" to "predictive". In this precursor, there is a case of transition (promotion) to CZ and a case of transition (fall) normally. In the omen, transition to CZ is performed when the transition conditions to CZ are satisfied, and transition to the normal mode is performed when transition conditions to the normal are satisfied.
In addition, when transitioning to CZ, there are cases of transitioning to AT (promotion) and cases of transition to a precursor or normal (falling). When the transition condition to AT is satisfied in CZ, transition to AT is performed, and when the transition condition to precursor or normal is satisfied, transition to precursor or normal is made, respectively.

  In addition, in this embodiment, when it transfers to AT, when performing RT transfer (FIG. 22) similar to 1st Embodiment, it is controlled to be made to stay in RT3. For example, when it is decided to shift to AT in RT2, when the replay B group is won, the correct pressing order for shifting to RT3 is displayed by the operation of the instruction function. Furthermore, after the shift to RT3, in order to prevent the player from falling from RT3, when the replay C group is won, the correct pressing order for maintaining RT3 by the operation of the instruction function is displayed.

Also, for example, a finite RT may be provided, and may be AT while staying in the finite RT. In this case, the AT terminates when moving from that finite RT to another RT.
In addition, "limited RT" stays at the RT until it digests the predetermined game frequency, and when the predetermined game frequency is digested, it satisfies the termination condition of the RT and shifts to another RT.
For example, when transitioning to a limited RT after the end of the special game, it is possible to execute the AT in this limited RT. Then, when the predetermined number of games is digested with the limited RT, it shifts to the RT corresponding to the normal section, and ends the AT, ie, the instructed game section and the advantageous section.
Further, as in the first embodiment, in the case of transitioning to RT4 (internal middle RT) when winning a special combination, for example, RT transition may be performed when winning a special combination in a limited RT. In this case, the limited RT ends with the winning of the special part, and after the end of the special game, it is possible to start from a predetermined RT different from the limited RT (for example, non-RT in FIG. 59).
On the other hand, in the case of the specification that does not shift to RT due to the winning of the special part, even if winning the special part during the limited RT does not end the limited RT, and after the end of the special game, it was running until then It can be resumed from the middle of a finite RT.

  Further, since the precursor and CZ are executed in the advantageous section, they are game sections in which the instruction function can be operated. Therefore, although it is optional whether or not to activate the indication function, since it is during AT that constantly or frequently activates the indication function, the indication function is not activated during the precursor or CZ during AT. During aura or CZ, there are cases where the indication function is operated at a small rate or the indication function is activated only once. In addition, with the specification that shifts from normal to precursor with transition from normal segment to advantageous segment, and may fall to normal (normal segment) before moving to CZ or AT from that precursor, precursor or CZ During the section), it is necessary to execute the instruction function activation game at least once.

In particular, when transitioning to the advantageous section, the instruction function may be activated at the first winning combination of the B-group B winning in order to early achieve "at least one command function activation game is executed in the advantageous section". .
Further, since it is premised that AT is an advantageous section, when the advantageous section ends, AT also ends. Therefore, for example, when having the remaining game number of AT, when reaching 1500 games which is the upper limit of the advantageous section, the advantageous section and the AT end.

"Freeze" is to pause the progress of the game for a predetermined period and delay it, for example, accepting medals, accepting bet switch 40, accepting start switch 41, and stop switch 42. The function related to (acceptance of the stop operation of the reel 31) is to be temporarily stopped. While performing such a freeze, outputting various effects during the freeze period may be mentioned.
Freezing is performed, for example, at the end of the AT. On the other hand, if only CZ is executed after transition to the advantageous section (when AT is not executed), freezing is not executed. Therefore, after moving to the advantageous section, there are cases where freezing is performed and not performed at the end of the advantageous section.

Third Embodiment
The third embodiment is characterized in that it is possible to add the number of AT games.
As described above, there are various AT parameters, but in the third embodiment, the termination condition of AT is determined by the number of games.
In the third embodiment, FIG. 43 (Example 1) to FIG. 52 (Example 10) will be described as processing on the main control board 50 side.
Further, as processing on the sub control board 80 side, Example 1 (FIG. 53) and Example 2 (FIG. 54) will be described.
Also, in the following example, the AT is started simultaneously with the start of the advantageous section. Then, the advantageous section is ended simultaneously with the end of the AT. That is, "AT = advantageous section".
However, as in the first embodiment described above and the fourth embodiment described later, it is a matter of course that it is an advantageous section but there is a case where it is a non-AT period (for example, precursor, CZ, withdrawal period, special game, etc.) (This point will be described later).

Furthermore, the upper limit counter described in the following example corresponds to the upper limit counter 69b of the first embodiment. Furthermore, in the following Examples 1 to 10, an AT counter, an additional counter, an advantageous interval counter, and the like are provided (this does not mean that these three counters are always provided in all the examples).
In the flowcharts of FIG. 43 (example 1) to FIG. 52 (example 10), the same processes are denoted by the same step numbers. The description of the same step numbers as the already described step numbers will be omitted as appropriate.
Moreover, the count value by a counter is abbreviated as "counter value."
Furthermore, “clearing” of the counter value means initializing the counter value (in the increment counter, setting the counter value to “0”).

In the third embodiment, when a condition device (condition device shown in FIG. 17) corresponding to the addition of the advantageous section in the first embodiment is won during AT, the number of AT games is added. The number of games to be added may be predetermined according to the condition device, or the number of games to be added may be determined by lottery when the condition device to be added is won.
For example, in FIG. 17, when winning a small combination E1 of storage number "250", the number of additional games is determined to "50" (50%), "100" (40%) or "200" (10%) To be mentioned. In addition, when winning a small combination E1 of the number "750", it is mentioned that the number of additional games is set to "30" (50%), "50" (30%) or "100" (20%) Be
In addition, regardless of the above example, it is possible to predetermine the number of AT addition games based on the control state and the condition device, or to draw the AT addition number of games based on the control state and the condition device. Good. In this case, even when, for example, the same condition device is won, it is possible to make the number of additional games to be determined or selected differ depending on the control state being executed.

In the third embodiment, as described above, “AT = advantage zone”, and as in the first embodiment, the upper limit of the advantage segment is 1,500 games. Therefore, the maximum AT will be 1500 games.
Here, when starting the AT, an initial value of the AT's game frequency is determined, and during the AT, the (remaining) game frequency of the AT is added according to the condition device that has won.
When adding the AT game frequency, the AT total game frequency (meaning the sum of the AT game frequency and the remaining game frequency. The same applies hereinafter) is unlimited regardless of whether it exceeds "1500". There are a case where the addition is performed and a case where the addition exceeding “1500” is not performed.
As a result of adding the number of AT games, even if the total number of AT games exceeds “1500”, the number of AT games to be executed is limited to “1500”.

Furthermore, when the number of games is added during AT, the method of executing addition under the same conditions from the beginning to the end and the difficulty of being added as the upper limit of 1500 games is approached (the expected value of the addition decreases) ) Method. As an example of the latter, when the initial value of the number of AT play is, for example, "100" and the addition is not performed at all, for example, 80 in the case where the condition device to be added first is won When the total number of ATs is "1000" or more, for example, when the winning condition is the same as the above, for example, the probability of 80% is added. It is a case where the number "50" is selected.
In addition, also when it controls in this way, the case where addition is continued even if the total game number of ATs exceeds "1500", and the case where addition is canceled are mentioned.
Furthermore, if the AT continues to be added even if the total number of games exceeds "1500", a method of storing the value even if the value exceeds "1500", and "minutes exceeding" 1500 " And the method of clearing the value.

FIG. 43 (example 1) below is an example of executing addition (adding to a counter) without any limitation, even if the total game count of AT exceeds “1500” (regardless of the total game count).
Further, FIG. 44 (example 2) to FIG. 46 (example 4) are examples in which the addition is not performed (not added to the counter) when the total number of times of AT play exceeds "1500". In this case, the addition lottery itself is not executed, and the addition lottery itself is executed, but after the addition lottery, it is determined whether the total number of AT games exceeds "1500", and when it exceeds "1500", There are cases where the additional lottery result is cleared. The latter is adopted in FIG. 44 (example 2) to FIG. 46 (example 4).

In addition, when it is decided to add, freeze may occur. It is for generating freeze and, during that time, outputting an additional effect (the number of games to be added, etc.).
However, if it is decided to add the number of games and freeze is generated, then if the total number of ATs of AT exceeds “1500” and clears the number of additions, it is added even if the freeze occurs. It happens that it is not done.
For this reason, for example, as a result of winning the condition device to be added in the game this time and performing the addition lottery, it is decided to add, and it is determined that the number of additions is added to the remaining game number of AT. For example, in the next game, control may be performed such that a freeze is generated along with the additional effect.

  Furthermore, in FIG. 47 (example 5) to FIG. 49 (example 7), when the total game count of AT is "1000" or more (that is, as the upper limit "1500" is approached), the expected value of the additional number decreases This is an example of Here, in the case of reducing the expected value of the additional number, it is possible to lower the additional winning probability, to reduce the additional number, and to execute both of them.

Furthermore, in FIG. 50 (example 8) to FIG. 52 (example 10), when the total game number of AT is "1000" or more (that is, as the upper limit "1500" is approached), the winning combination (conditional apparatus winning) This is an example of lowering the grade of and performing an additional lottery. Here, "degrading the winning combination" is, for example, the following method.
As shown in the first embodiment, as the condition device to be subjected to the addition lottery, as shown in FIG. 17, a small combination E1 of "250" and a small combination E1 of "750" are provided. Shall be
Here, the small combination E1 of the storage number "250" is a condition device which is difficult to win because the storage number is smaller than the small combination E1 of the storage number "750". In such a case, the expected value of the additional number when winning the small combination E1 of the numeral "250" is x1, the expected value of the additional number when winning the small combination E of the numeral "750" is x2 ( It is assumed that x2 <x1).
Further, as an example of changing the expected value of the additional number, a method is employed in which a plurality of types of lottery tables are provided in advance, and the lottery table used in the additional lottery is changed.

Then, if the AT total game number is less than "1000", when winning the small combination E1 of the storage number "250", the lottery is performed with the expectation value x1 and the small combination E1 of the storage number "750" is won At this time, a lottery is performed with an expectation value x2.
Next, when the total game number of AT is "1000" or more, either when winning the small combination E1 of the storage number "250" or when winning the small combination E1 of the storage number "750", Perform an additional lottery with the expected value x2.
As a result, when the small winning combination E1 of “250” is won, the grade is reduced to the small winning combination E1 of “750”, and the additional drawing lottery is performed.

Alternatively, when the total game number of AT is "1000" or more, when winning the small combination E1 of the storage number "250", the lottery is performed with the expectation value x2 and the small combination E1 of the storage number "750" When winning, an additional lottery may be performed with the expectation value x3 (x3 <x2).
In addition, although said expectation value x1-x3 assumes the value which exceeds "0", it may be "0", for example. The expected value “0” of the added number is, for example, setting the winning probability of added to “0” or winning in the added lottery itself, but winning of the added number “0” may be mentioned. .

Further, for example, it is assumed that the expected value of the additional number at the time of winning the small winning combination E1 is x11, and the expected value of the additional number at the time of winning the small winning combination D is x12 (x12 <x11).
In this case, if the total game number of AT is less than "1000", the winning lottery is performed with the expectation value x11 when the small winning combination E1 is won, and the winning lottery with the expected value x12 is performed when the small winning combination D is won. .
Next, in the case where the total game number of AT is “1000” or more, when the small winning combination E1 is won, it is replaced with the small winning combination D, and the additional lottery is performed with the expectation value x12.
Even if the winning combination is replaced with a low-grade winning combination in order to lower the grade of the winning combination, the winning combination itself does not change.

  Further, in the above example, the threshold value of the total game number of ATs for which the expected value of the additional number is changed is set to "1000", but the present invention is not limited thereto. "500", "800", "1200" “1300”, “1400”, etc. can be set variously according to the specifications of the slot machine.

(Example 1)
FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing an example 1 of control processing on the main control board 50 side.
First, the main control board 50 includes, as counters, an AT counter that counts the number of digested games in AT, and an upper limit counter that counts the upper limit number of games “1500” of the advantageous section.
In the third embodiment, “100” is given as an initial value (number of games) at the start of AT. Therefore, "100" is set to the AT counter at the start of AT. And every game, "1" is decremented one by one (decrement counter).

The upper limit counter is set to an initial value "1500" at the start of AT. And every game, "1" is decremented one by one (decrement counter).
From the above, when the AT counter or the upper limit counter becomes “0”, the end condition of AT is satisfied.
In addition, if the 1BB is won during AT, the AT counter is not updated until the end of the 1BB game (counting is interrupted). On the other hand, the upper limit counter updates every game even during 1BB game. That is, since the AT counter is not updated during the internal middle game and the 1BB game, after the end of the 1BB, it resumes from the AT counter value at the time of the 1BB winning.
Furthermore, the advantageous section flag corresponds to the eighth bit in the segment data of digit 2 in the first embodiment, and "1" is set during the advantageous section, and "0" when it is not the advantageous section. Is set.

  In FIG. 43A, in step S401, the main control board 50 (main CPU 55) performs command transmission processing at the time of game start to the sub control board 80. This process is a process shown in FIG. Next, at step S402, control at the time of operation of the start switch 41 is executed. In step S402, it is continued to detect whether the start switch 41 has been operated, and when it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process proceeds to the next step S403.

In step S403, an internal lottery process is performed. This process is the same as the lottery of the combination by the combination lottery means 61 in the first embodiment. In the next step S404, an additional lottery is performed. Here, "overlaying" is the addition of the number of AT games. Therefore, when the game is not in the AT (in the normal section and in the advantageous section but not the AT), the additional drawing of step S404 is not executed. The additional lottery of step S404 is a process shown in (c) in the figure.
In the present embodiment, it is assumed that an AT-added lottery is executed when the condition device shown in FIG. 17 of the first embodiment is won.
Further, it is assumed that the additional number and the winning probability thereof are determined in a lottery table described later.

Next, in step S405, the main control board 50 transmits a command to the sub control board 80 when the start switch 41 is operated. This process is a process shown in (d) in the figure described later.
In the next step S406, it is continuously determined whether all the reels 31 have stopped. If it is determined that all the reels 31 have stopped, the process proceeds to step S407. In step S407, variable update processing is performed as processing at the end of the game. This process is a process shown in (e) in the figure. Then, the process according to this flowchart is ended.

If it progresses to step S401 of Fig.43 (a), command transmission processing at the time of game start of the figure (b) will be performed.
First, in step S411, the AT counter value is transmitted. In the next step S412, the upper limit counter value is transmitted. Further, in the next step S413, the value of the advantageous section flag is transmitted. The value of the advantageous section flag transmits "1" when in the advantageous section, and transmits "0" when it is not in the advantageous section. Then, the process according to this flowchart is ended. By the above processing, the main control board 50 transmits three parameters of the AT counter value, the upper limit counter value, and the value of the advantageous section flag to the sub control board 80.

When the process proceeds to step S404 of FIG. 43 (a), an additional lottery of FIG. 43 (c) is executed.
First, in step S421, a lottery table is set. The lottery table is stored in advance in the ROM 54, and defines the additional number corresponding to the winning combination and the winning probability thereof. Specifically, for example, when winning a combination of "250" at the time of winning the small combination E1 alone, the probability of determining the number of additions to "50" is 60%, the probability of determining the number of additions to "40" Setting to 40% can be mentioned. In addition, when winning a combination of "750" at the time of winning the small winning combination E1 alone, the probability of determining the number of additions to "30" is set to 50%, and the probability of determining the number of additions to "20" is set to 50%. Can be mentioned. The winning probability and the number of extras are also determined for other condition devices.

  In the next step S422, an addition lottery is performed using the lottery table set in step S421. Then, the process proceeds to step S423, and the result (the determined number of additions) selected in step S422 is added to the AT counter value. For example, if the AT counter value up to that point is "50" (remaining game number) and the additional number is determined to be "20", the AT counter value is updated to "70". Then, the processing according to this flowchart is ended.

When the process proceeds to step S405 in FIG. 43 (a), command transmission at the time of start switch operation in FIG. 43 (d) is executed.
Here, the AT counter value is transmitted in step S431. Then, the process according to this flowchart is ended. Therefore, when the game is started, the AT counter value is transmitted in step S411, but in step S431, the AT counter value is transmitted again. When it is not determined to add the number of AT games in the game, the same value is transmitted in step S411 and step S431.

On the other hand, when it is determined to add the number of AT games, in step S431, the updated AT counter value is transmitted. When the sub control board 80 receives the AT counter value in step S411 and then receives the AT counter value again in step S431, the sub control board 80 receives the AT counter value stored in the sub control board 80 in step S431. Rewrite to AT counter value.
Before step S431, it is determined whether AT addition is executed in the game, and only when AT addition is executed, the second AT counter value in the game is transmitted in step S431. It is also good.

When the process proceeds to step S407 of FIG. 43 (a), the variable updating process of FIG. 43 (e) is executed.
First, at step S441, the AT counter value is decremented by "1". Next, at step S442, the upper limit counter value is decremented by "1". In the next step S443, it is determined whether the upper limit counter value is "0". If it is determined to be "0" (that is, when the number of games played in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit "1500"), the processing proceeds to step S445 and subsequent steps to end the AT and the advantageous section. On the other hand, if it is determined that it is not "0", the process proceeds to step S444.

In step S444, it is determined whether the AT counter value is "0" and the number of executions of the instruction function operation game is "1" or more. Here, when the AT counter value is “0”, it means that the remaining game number of AT is “0”.
Further, in order to determine whether or not the number of times of execution of the indication function operation game is “1” or more, for example, an indication function operation counter or an indication function operation flag may be provided.
The indication function operation counter can cite, for example, an increment counter which increments “1” each time the indication function is operated, and if the counter value is “1” or more, the number of times of execution of the indication function operation game is It can be determined that it is "1" or more.

  In addition, the indication function activation flag is turned off when the indication function activation game has not been executed even once after executing the advantageous section and AT, and turned on (also after) when the first indication function activation game is executed. Is a flag that When the instruction function operation flag is on, it can be determined that the number of times of execution of the instruction function operation game is "1" or more.

  In addition, as described in the first embodiment, when transitioning to the advantageous section, at least once, the indication function operation game (winning of the combination with the largest number of payouts among the games having the advantageous push order of the stop switch 42) In the first embodiment, the game at the time of winning the small winning combination B group (the same applies hereinafter) can not end the advantageous section. In this way, performing at least one pointing function activation game during the advantageous section is prioritized over the termination condition of the AT.

  However, it is possible to end the advantageous section when it reaches 1500 games which is the upper limit of the advantageous section without executing the instruction function operation game once (see an eleventh embodiment (FIG. 69 described later)). ). Therefore, in Example 1 of FIG. 43, it is first determined in step S443 whether or not the upper limit counter value is “0”, and when it is “0”, the advantageous interval and AT are determined without performing the determination in step S444. To finish.

  If it is determined in step S444 that “the AT counter value is“ 0 ”and the number of times the instruction function operation game is executed is“ 1 ”or more”, the end condition of the advantageous section and the AT is satisfied. move on. On the other hand, when it is judged as "No" in Step S444, processing by this flow chart is ended (the next game continues AT and an advantageous section).

  In step S445, the AT counter value is cleared (set to "0"). Next, proceeding to step S446, the upper limit counter value is cleared (set to "0"). Further, the process proceeds to step S 447, where the value of the advantageous section flag is cleared (set to “0”). In this way, when the advantageous section ends, it is necessary to clear (reset) all the parameters related to the advantageous section. Then, the processing according to this flowchart is ended.

(Example 2)
FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing an example 2 of control processing on the main control board 50 side. In Example 2 of FIG. 44, an AT counter (initial value “100”, decrement counter), an additional counter (initial value “0”, increment counter), and an upper limit counter (initial value “1500”, decrement counter) are provided as counters. . Furthermore, as in the first example, the advantageous section flag is provided.
The additional counter adds the additional number each time the number of games is added during AT.

In FIG. 44, (a) and (b) are the same as Example 1 of FIG.
Further, in the addition lottery process of FIG. 44C, after the addition lottery is executed in step S422, the process proceeds to step S451, and it is determined whether the addition counter value exceeds a specified number. Here, the specified number is set to "1400". That is, "100" is set as the initial value of the AT game frequency, and when the AT additional game frequency reaches "1400", the total AT game frequency becomes "1500" in total, and the upper limit of the advantageous section To reach. For this reason, it is set so as not to perform an addition exceeding the number of times of playing "1400".

When it is determined in step S451 in FIG. 44C that the addition counter value exceeds the specified number (“1400”), addition of the addition number is performed even if the number of additions is determined in the lottery of step S422. Then, the process according to this flowchart is ended.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S451 that the added counter value is less than or equal to the specified number, the process proceeds to step S452. In step S452, the lottery result (determined number of additions) in step S422 is added to the addition counter value. The process of the next step S423 is the same as that of the first example described above. From the above, for example, when the AT counter value before the additional lottery is “50”, the additional counter value is “200”, and the determined additional number is “30”, the AT counter value after the additional is “80”, the additional The counter value is "230".

In addition, in the command transmission process at the time of the start switch operation of FIG. 6D, the superimposition counter value is transmitted to the sub control board 80 in step S461. In the first example, the AT counter value is transmitted to the sub control board 80, but in the second example, the additional counter value is transmitted. When the superimposition counter value reaches “1400”, the sub control board 80 can determine that the superimposition has been performed until the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached.
Furthermore, in the figure (e), steps S441 to S447 are the same processes as in FIG. 43 (example 1). In addition, after step S447, the process proceeds to step S471, and the addition counter value is cleared. At the end of the advantageous section, all parameters relating to the advantageous section are cleared.

(Example 3)
FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing Example 3 of the control process on the main control board 50 side.
In Example 3 of FIG. 45, as a counter, an AT counter (set to an initial value “0” and an increment counter that increments “1” each time AT is consumed for one game), an additional counter (initial value “100” , Increment counter), and upper limit counter (same as example 1). Furthermore, the prescribed number is set to "1500" which is the upper limit game number of the advantageous segment.

In FIG. 45, (a) and (b) are processes similar to FIG. 43 (example 1).
Further, in FIG. 6C, steps S421 and S422 are the same processes as in the first example. After step S422, the process proceeds to step S451, and it is determined whether the added counter value has exceeded a specified number ("1500"). The fact that the additional counter value exceeds the specified number "1500" means that the total number of AT games has exceeded "1500" in the third example. Therefore, when the addition counter value exceeds the prescribed number "1500", even if the number of additions is determined in step S422, the number of additions is not added, and the processing according to this flowchart is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S451 that the additional counter value is less than or equal to the specified number, the process proceeds to step S452, and the determined additional number is added to the additional counter value. Note that step S 423 (addition of the number of additions to the AT counter value) shown in example 1 of FIG. 43 is not performed. In this example 3, the AT counter is only for counting the number of games played in the AT.

FIG. 44D shows the same process as that of FIG. 44 (example 2).
Furthermore, in the same figure (e), "1" is added to the AT counter value in step S481. During AT, the AT counter value is incremented. The next steps S 442 and S 443 perform the same process as in the first example. In the next step S 482, it is determined whether the AT counter value is equal to or greater than the additional counter value. In Example 3, when the number of AT games is equal to or greater than the number of additional games, it is determined that the end conditions of the AT and the advantageous section are satisfied.

  In Example 3 of FIG. 45, the initial value of the AT counter value is “0”, and the initial value of the additional counter value is “100”. Then, when the AT game count reaches "100" without the AT game count addition being performed even once, the AT counter value becomes "100" and the add-on counter value becomes "100," "AT counter value It will satisfy を 満 た す over counter value 値. When it is judged as "Yes" in Step S482, it progresses to Step S483. On the other hand, when it is judged as "No", since the termination condition of an advantageous section and AT is not satisfied, processing by this flow chart is ended.

In step S483, it is determined whether or not the number of times of execution of the instruction function operation game is "1" or more. When it is “1” or more, since the termination condition of the advantageous section and AT is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S445. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not "1" or more, the processing according to the present flowchart is ended in order to continue the AT and the advantageous section next time for the next game.
The process after step S445 is the same process as that of FIG. 44 (example 2).

(Example 4)
FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing an example 4 of the control process on the main control board 50 side.
In Example 4 of FIG. 46, the counter is set to an additional counter (an increment counter set to an initial value "100"), an advantageous interval counter (initial value "0", and every game during AT and during an advantageous interval. It has an increment counter) which is incremented by one.
In Example 4, no AT counter is provided. The number of AT games is counted by the advantageous section counter. That is, the advantageous interval counter of the fourth example has the same function as the AT counter (increment counter) of the third example.
Furthermore, in Example 4, the upper limit counter provided in Example 1 and the like is not provided. In Example 4, the advantageous interval counter doubles as the upper limit counter. The prescribed number is “1500” as in the third example.

In Example 4 of FIG. 46, (a), (c) and (d) are the same processes as in FIG. 45 (Example 3).
Further, in FIG. 7B, when step S401 is started, the advantageous section counter value is transmitted to the sub control board 50 in step S491. Next, the process proceeds to step S413, and the value of the advantageous section flag is transmitted to the sub control board 50 as in the example 1 and the like.

  Furthermore, in the same figure (e), "1" is added to the advantageous section counter value in step S501. In the next step S502, it is determined whether the advantageous segment counter value is "1500" or more. If it is determined that the advantageous segment counter value is "1500" or more, it means that the upper limit of the advantageous segment has been reached, so the process proceeds to step S504 in order to end the advantageous segment and AT. On the other hand, when it is determined that the advantageous segment counter value is not "1500" or more, the process proceeds to step S503.

In step S503, it is determined whether the advantageous section counter value is greater than or equal to the additional counter value. Similar to step S 482 in FIG. 45 (example 3), when the advantageous section counter value becomes equal to or greater than the additional counter value, it means that there is no remaining game count of AT. If "Yes" is determined in the step S503, the process proceeds to the step S483, and if "No" is determined, the processing according to the flowchart is ended (the next game is continued with the advantageous section and AT).
Step S483 is processing similar to that of FIG. 45 (example 3). When it is judged as "Yes" at Step S483, it progresses to Step S504, and when it is judged as "No", the processing by this flowchart is ended.
In step S504, the advantageous section counter value is cleared. The next steps S 447 and S 471 are the same processes as in FIG. 45 (example 3).

(Example 5)
FIG. 47 is a flowchart of an example 5 of the control process on the main control board 50 side.
In Example 5 of FIG. 47, the counter is set to an AT counter (a decrement counter which is set to an initial value “100” and decrements by “1” during AT), an added counter (set to an initial value “0” and added) An increment counter for adding the number of additions each time, and an upper limit counter (a decrement counter which is set to an initial value "1500" and which is decremented by one for each game in an advantageous section). Furthermore, the prescribed number is set to "1000".

In Example 5 of FIG. 47, (a) and (b) are the same processes as in FIG. 43 (Example 1).
In addition, in the figure (c), two types of lottery tables A and B are provided for the lottery of the number of additions. The lottery table is not limited to two types, and three or more types (for example, super high probability, high probability, low probability, etc.) may be provided.

The lottery table A is a lottery table in which the probability that the number of AT games is added is set to a normal probability or a high probability. On the other hand, the lottery table B is a lottery table in which the probability that the number of AT games is added is set lower than that of the lottery table A.
The lottery table A is not limited to this, and the expected value of the additional number may be set to x1, and the lottery table B may have the expected value of the additional number set to x2 (x2 <x1).
Furthermore, combining the both, the lottery table A has a high probability of winning in addition, and the expected value of the number of additionals is set to medium to large, and the lottery table B has a low probability of winning in additions, and the expected value of the numbers of superposition It may be set to small.

  In FIG. 7C, first, in step S511, the lottery table A is set as a standard lottery table for addition. In the next step S451, it is determined whether the added counter value is greater than or equal to a specified number ("1000"). If it is determined that the addition counter value is not greater than or equal to the specified number, the process proceeds to step S422, and if it is determined that the addition counter value is greater than or equal to the specified number, the process proceeds to step S512.

In step S512, the lottery table A set in step S511 is reset to the lottery table B. Then, the process proceeds to step S422. By this processing, when the number of additions is less than "1000", the addition lottery is performed using the lottery table A, and when the number of additions is "1000" or more, the addition lottery is performed using the lottery table B. Therefore, the ease of being added is changed with the number of additions “1000” as a threshold.
The process after step S422 is the same process as FIG. 44 (example) 2. Also, FIGS. (D) and (e) are the same processes as FIG. 44 (example 2).

(Example 6)
FIG. 48 is a flowchart illustrating an example 6 of the control process on the main control board 50 side.
In Example 6 of FIG. 48, the counter is set to an AT counter (an increment counter which is set to an initial value “0” and increments by “1” in AT), an overlay counter (set to an initial value “100” and is overlaid) An increment counter for adding the number of additions each time, and an upper limit counter (a decrement counter which is set to an initial value "1500" and which is decremented by one for each game in an advantageous section). Furthermore, the prescribed number is set to “1000” as in FIG. 47 (example 5).

When Example 6 of FIG. 48 and Example 5 of FIG. 47 are compared, the following points are different.
Since the AT counter is an increment counter with an initial value "0" as in FIG. 45 (example 3), the addition number is not added to the AT counter when the addition lottery is performed.
In Example 6 of FIG. 48, (a) and (b) are the same processes as in FIG. 47 (Example 5).
Further, in FIG. 48C, after the addition lottery in step S422, the process proceeds to step S452, the addition number is added to the addition counter value, and the process according to this flowchart is ended (step S423 of FIG. 47 (example 5). Do not process).
Further, (d) of the figure shows the same processing as that of FIG. 47 (example 5). Furthermore, FIG. 45E shows the same process as that of FIG. 45 (example 3).

(Example 7)
FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing an example 7 of the control process on the main control board 50 side.
In Example 7 of FIG. 49, the counter does not have an AT counter as in FIG. 46 (Example 4), and is an increment counter (set to an initial value “100” and increments the number of additions each time it is added. And an upper limit counter (an initial value "0", and an increment counter which is incremented by one for each game during an advantageous section). Furthermore, the prescribed number is set to “1000” as in FIG. 47 (example 5).
In Example 7 of FIG. 49, the upper limit counter also plays the role of an AT counter (a counter that counts the number of ATs played).

In Example 7 of FIG. 49, (a), (b), and (d) are the same processes as in FIG. 46 (Example 4). Further, (c) of the figure shows the same processing as that of FIG. 48 (example 6).
Furthermore, in the same figure (e), "1" is added to the upper limit counter value in step S521. Next, in step S522, it is determined whether the upper limit counter value is equal to or greater than "1500". If it is determined that the upper limit counter value is equal to or greater than "1500", the upper limit to the continuation of the advantageous section has been reached, so the process proceeds to step S446 in order to end the advantageous section and AT.

  On the other hand, when it is judged as "No" by step S522, it progresses to step S523. In step S523, it is determined whether the upper limit counter value is greater than or equal to the additional counter value. The upper limit counter is a counter that adds “1” to each game during the advantageous section, while the additional counter is a counter that adds an additional number as an initial value “100”, so “upper limit counter value When it becomes 上 over counter value, it means that there is no remaining game number of AT. If "Yes" is determined in the step S523, the process proceeds to the step S483, and if "No" is determined, the processing according to the flowchart is ended because the next game is also continued to be AT.

In step S483, as described above, it is determined whether or not the instruction function operation game has been performed one or more times. If it has been performed, the process proceeds to step S446 in order to end the advantageous section and the AT. On the other hand, when it is judged as "No" by step S483, since next game also continues AT, the process by this flowchart is complete | finished.
The processes in steps S446, S447, and S471 are the same as those in FIG. 47 (example 3). Then, the processing according to this flowchart is ended.

(Example 8)
FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing an example 8 of control processing on the main control board 50 side.
In Example 8 of FIG. 50, the counter includes an AT counter, an overlay counter, and an upper limit counter similar to those of FIG. 44 (Example 2). Further, the prescribed number is set to “1000” as in FIG. 47 (example 5).
In the example 8 of FIG. 50, in the flowchart of (a), after the internal lottery of step S403, the process proceeds to step S531, and the conditional device group setting process is performed. The other processing of (a) is the same processing as that of FIG. 43 (example 1).
FIG. 44B shows the same process as that of FIG. 44 (example 2).

The figure (c) is a flow chart which shows condition device group set processing in Step S Step S531.
First, in step S 541, “0” is set as the condition device group number.
Here, the “condition device group number” is a number obtained by dividing the condition device to be the target of the addition lottery among the plurality of condition devices drawn in the internal lottery into a plurality of groups and giving each group a group.

In this example, two “0” and “1” are illustrated as the condition device group numbers. And, for each condition device group number, there is a lottery table for additional lottery.
Furthermore, let the lottery table corresponding to the conditional device group number “0” be a lottery table A, and let the lottery table corresponding to the conditional device group number “1” be a lottery table B.
Further, the lottery table B is set so that the expected value of the number of additions is smaller than that of the lottery table A.

Specifically, for example, in the first embodiment, the expected value of the additional number when the single winning combination E1 is won alone is set to “x1”, and the expected value of the additional number when winning the small combination D is set to “x2” It is assumed that Then, it is assumed that “x1> x2” (the small winning combination E1 has a higher expected value of the number of additionals than the small winning combination D wins).
In this case, the condition device group number corresponding to the small winning combination D is “1”, and the condition device group number corresponding to the small winning combination E1 is “0”.

Therefore, when the small winning combination D is won, since the condition device group number is "1", the lottery table B is set. On the other hand, when the small winning combination E1 is won, since the condition device group number is "0", the lottery table A is set.
Then, the expected value of the additional number when the additional lottery is performed using the lottery table A is "x1", and the expected value of the additional number when the additional lottery is performed using the lottery table B is "x2" .

Description will be returned to FIG. 50 (c).
If the condition device group number "0" is set in step S541, the process proceeds to step S542. In step S 542, it is determined whether the added counter value is equal to or greater than a specified number (“1000”). If it is determined that the number is not greater than the specified number, the processing according to this flowchart is ended. On the other hand, if it is determined that the addition counter value is equal to or more than the specified number, the process proceeds to step S543, and the condition device group number "1" is set. Then, the process according to this flowchart is ended.

  Therefore, in the above example, when the small winning combination D is won, since the condition device group number corresponding to the small winning combination D is originally "1", it remains "1". On the other hand, when the small winning combination E1 is won, the condition device group number "0" is set in principle, but when the added counter value is "1000" or more, the condition device group number "1" is again Is set.

In (d) of the drawing, a lottery table corresponding to the condition device group number is set in step S551. In the above example, the lottery table A (expected value “x1”) is set when the conditional device group number “0”, and the lottery table B (expected value “x2”) is set when the conditional device group number “1”. Ru. The subsequent processing after step S422 is similar to that shown in FIG. 44 (example 2).
Moreover, in the example 8 of FIG. 50, (e) and (f) are processes similar to (d) and (e) of FIG. 44 (example 2), respectively.

  Although two types of “0” and “1” are listed as the condition device group numbers in the above example, three or more types may be provided. For example, assuming that the expected value of the additional number is “x1> x2> x3” and the additional counter value is less than “1000”, the lottery table of the expected value “x1” is used and the additional counter value is greater than “1000” and less than “1200”. Then, the lottery table of the expected value “x2” is used, and when the added counter value is “1200” or more, the lottery table of the expected value “x3” is used.

  As described above, in FIG. 50 (example 8), when the small winning combination E1 is won, the additional drawing is performed so as to correspond to the expected value of the small combination E1, but when the additional counter value is “1000” or more Is to be added to match the expectation value of the small part D. That is, when the number of additional games increases and approaches the upper limit value "1500" of the advantageous section, the grade of the winning combination is lowered to perform the additional lottery.

(Example 9)
FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing an example 9 of the control process on the main control board 50 side.
In Example 9 of FIG. 51, the counter includes an AT counter, an overlay counter, and an upper limit counter similar to those of FIG. 45 (Example 3). Further, the prescribed number is set to “1000” as in FIG. 47 (example 5).
The processes (a), (b), (e) and (f) in FIG. 51 are the same as (a), (b), (d) and (e) in FIG. 45 (example 3), respectively. It is a process.
Further, in FIG. 51, the process (c) is the same process as (c) in FIG. 50 (example 8).
Furthermore, the process of (d) in FIG. 51 is different from (d) of FIG. 50 (example 8) in that step S423 is not included. Others are processes similar to (d) of FIG. 50 (example 8).

(Example 10)
FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing an example 10 of the control process on the main control board 50 side.
In the example 10 of FIG. 52, the counter is provided with the upper counter and the upper limit counter similar to those of FIG. 49 (example 7) (without the AT counter). Further, the prescribed number is also set to “1000” as in FIG. 49 (example 7).
In FIG. 52, the processes (a), (b), (e) and (f) are the same as (a), (b), (d) and (e) in FIG. 49 (example 7) respectively. It is a process.
Also, in FIG. 52, the process (c) is the same process as (c) in FIG. 50 (example 8).
Furthermore, the process of (d) in FIG. 52 is the same process as that of FIG. 51 (example 9).

As described above, although FIG. 43 (example 1) to FIG. 52 (example 10) have been described, basically, an AT counter for counting the number of AT games, an additional counter for counting the number of AT games, An upper limit counter (advantage interval counter) for counting the upper limit "1500" of the interval is provided.
Also, these counters may be incremented or decremented.
Furthermore, the AT counter may not be provided as shown in FIG. 46 (example 4) or 49 (example 7). In this case, the AT game frequency is substantially counted by another counter.
Furthermore, in the above examples 1 to 10, the additional drawing is performed according to the condition device that has won. Here, when a condition device to be added is won, a predetermined number may be added unconditionally without performing a lottery.

In addition, when performing the addition lottery, as shown in FIG. 43 (example 1), the number of additions may be determined regardless of the number of additions so far.
On the other hand, when performing the addition lottery, as shown in FIG. 47 (example 5) and FIG. 50 (example 8), the number of additions may be determined in consideration of the number of additions up to the present time.
“In consideration of the number of additions” is to make the number of additions smaller (the expected value of the number of additions smaller) in the subsequent addition lottery as the number of additions increases. This makes it possible to moderate the rate of increase in the number of games added.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 43 (example 1), it is also possible to execute the addition without restriction. If the addition is executed without limit, for example, the remaining game count of AT may be "2000", "3000", and the like. However, even if such a game count is reached, since the upper limit game count "1500" of the advantageous section is prioritized (FIG. 43E, in step S443), the AT ends at that point.

However, as shown in FIG. 43 (example 1), when the AT game number is added without restriction, if the number of the added number is notified to the player as it is, the upper limit game number "1500" of the advantageous section is added. In some cases, the number may be reported. In this case, the player may misunderstand that the player can play the game beyond the upper limit number of times "1500".
Therefore, the sub control board 80 performs various controls as described below with respect to the notification of the number of AT games and the number of added games in response to the above-described point.

FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing an example 1 of the control process related to the advantageous section and the AT on the side of the sub control board 80 and the addition.
In the example 1 of FIG. 53, (a) is a process of receiving a command transmitted from the main control board 50.
For example, when FIG. 43 (example 1) is taken as an example, the process of receiving the command transmitted in steps S411 to S413 in FIG. 43B and step S431 in FIG. 43D is executed.
In the above examples 1 to 10, the AT counter value or the additional counter value is transmitted. However, in the examples of FIGS. 53 and 54, it is assumed that the AT counter value and the additional number are transmitted.

  In FIG. 53 (a), in step S601, processing for receiving an AT counter value is executed. This process is a process of receiving the AT counter value and storing it in the RWM 83 of the sub control board 80. In the next step S602, a process ((b) in the figure) for receiving the number of additions is executed. In the next step S603, reception processing of the advantageous segment flag is executed. This process is a process of receiving the value (“0” or “1”) of the advantageous section flag and storing the value in the RWM 83 of the sub control board 80 as in step S601. Further, in the next step S604, processing ((d) in the figure) for receiving the effect group number (see FIG. 21) is executed.

When the process proceeds to step S602, the process (b) in FIG.
First, in step S611, the received addition number is added to the addition counter. The overlay counter is provided on the sub control board 80 side. Next, proceeding to step S612, it is determined whether the added counter value exceeds a specified number. Here, the specified number is set to "1500". Therefore, in this example, as in the case of FIG. 45 (example 3), it is determined that the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached when the added counter value exceeds “1500”. If it is determined in step S612 that the addition counter value exceeds the specified number ("1500"), the process proceeds to step S613, and if it is determined that the number is less than or equal to the specified number, the process proceeds to step S614.

In step S613, the additional effect suppression flag is set to "1". Then, the process proceeds to step S614. Here, the “addition effect suppression flag” does not output the addition effect when the addition number is already “1500”, and enables the addition effect when the addition number is “1500” or less. , It is a flag for making the judgment.
In step S614, the number of additional games in the game is stored (in RWM 83 of the sub control board 80). Then, the processing according to this flowchart is ended.

Further, when the process proceeds to step S604, the process of (c) in the drawing is executed.
First, in step S621, it is determined whether or not there is an additional number in the game. This determination is performed by determining whether the number of additions stored in step S614 is "0". Then, if it is determined that the additional number is included, the process proceeds to step S 622. If it is determined that the additional number is not included, the process proceeds to step S 625.
In step S 622, it is determined whether the additional effect suppression flag is “1”. If it is determined that it is "1", the process proceeds to step S623. If it is determined that it is not "1", the process proceeds to step S624.

  In step S623, an effect with no additional effect is selected. That is, even if the additional number has reached the specified number (“1500”) and even if the additional lottery is won in the game, it is not possible to add more than the current one, so control is performed so as not to output additional effects. The effect selected here is a normal effect or an effect corresponding to the received effect group number (for example, at the time of replay winning, an effect (blue etc.) suggesting replay winning). Then, the process according to this flowchart is ended.

On the other hand, when it is judged as "No" by step S622 and it progresses to step S624, the effect with additional production is made selectable. For example, an effect of notifying all or a part of the additional number in the game may be mentioned. In addition, it is not necessary to necessarily select the effect with the additional effect in the game for which the number of additions has been determined, for example, transition to the continuous effect, etc., and then select the effect with the additional effect in several game digestion It is also good.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S621 that the game does not have an additional number and the process proceeds to step S625, a normal effect is output. As the normal effect, as described above, it is possible to output an effect corresponding to the winning combination (effect group number) in the game. Then, the processing according to this flowchart is ended.

FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing an example 2 of the control process related to the advantageous section and the AT on the side of the sub control substrate 80 and the addition.
In the example 2 of FIG. 54, (a) is a process of receiving a command transmitted from the main control board 50. First, in step S631, a process of receiving the ball-out suppression flag is executed. Here, the output ball suppression flag is a flag (command) transmitted from the main control board 60 to the sub control board 80, and when it is "1", it means that the additional effect is suppressed, " When it is “0”, it means that the additional effect is not suppressed. That is, when the pop-out ball suppression flag "1" is transmitted from the main control board 50, it becomes an instruction to suppress the additional effect.
In Example 1 of FIG. 53, as shown in (b), the process of setting the additional effect suppression flag is performed on the sub control substrate 80 side. On the other hand, in Example 2 of FIG. 54, it is determined by the main control board 60 whether or not to suppress the additional effect, and the determination result is transmitted to the sub control board 80 as the ball-out suppression flag.

As a method of the main control substrate 50 transmitting the ball-out suppression flag, for example, the following method may be mentioned.
Taking FIG. 44 (example 2) as an example, when “Yes” is determined in step S451 in FIG. 44C, the ball-out flag set on the main control board 50 is turned on. Then, in FIG. 44 (d), after the step S461, the ball-out suppression flag is transmitted.

The example 2 of FIG. 54 is the same as the example 1 of FIG. 53 except for steps S631 and S632.
In step S631, the process (b) in the figure is performed.
First, in step S 641, when the ball-out suppression flag is received, it is determined whether the value is “1”. If it is determined that it is "1", the process proceeds to step S642. If it is determined that it is not "1", the process proceeds to step S643.

In step S 642, “1” is set in the additional effect suppression flag stored in the RWM 83 of the sub control board 80, and the process according to this flowchart ends. On the other hand, if it progresses to step S643, "0" will be set to an addition production suppression flag, and the process by this flowchart will be complete | finished.
Therefore, the top effect suppression flag on the side of the sub control board 80 is set to “1” when the received ball withdrawal suppression flag is “1”, and the overhead effect suppression flag is set when the received ball withdrawal suppression flag is “0”. Is set to "0". Therefore, in example 2 of FIG. 54, the additional effect suppression flag is switched according to the information transmitted from the main control board 60.

In FIG. 54C, as in FIG. 53 (example 1), it is not necessary to judge whether the added counter value exceeds the specified number, so the added number is added to the added counter in step S611, and the next step is performed. Save the number of additions in S614.
Further, the effect group number reception process of (d) in the figure is the same process as that of FIG. 53 (example 1).

  When the sub control board 80 outputs the additional effect, for example, when the additional number determined in the game is "200", all ("200") of the additional number may be notified in the effect of the game. However, it is also possible to inform in small increments (divide the number of additions and notify) in a plurality of games (for example, continuous effects) including the game. Specifically, when the additional number in the game is "200", the additional number "100" is notified in the game, "50" is notified in the next game, and "50" in the next game. And the like.

FIG. 55 is a diagram showing an example of image display of the image display device 23 by the sub control substrate 80 regarding superimposition in the AT, and is a diagram showing Examples 1 to 4.
First, in Example 1, the image display device 23 before being added is "digested G (meaning" digested game number of AT "" 1200 "," remaining G (meaning "number of remaining game number of AT") 300 "" Shows an example displayed. Therefore, since “the number of times of AT-digested games + the number of remaining games = 1500”, the number of executable AT games has already reached the upper limit.
In this case, in Example 1, even if 500 games are internally added (meaning, for example, the case of step S 423 in FIG. 43 (c)), the effect on the display change of the number of additions and the addition is performed Absent. Therefore, the display after the addition remains as it is before the addition.

Of course, "500" may be added to the counters (AT counter, superimposing counter, etc.) held on the side of the sub control board 80 when 500 games are added. The number of AT games and the number of added games may be real number values managed by a counter, and only display may be performed as in Example 1. In the case of such control, an internal counter and a display counter are provided on the sub control board 80 side.
Alternatively, the counter may not be updated even if it is loaded on 500 games.
By controlling the image display as in the first example, it is possible to suppress an effect relating to unnecessary addition.

  In the second example, when the number of digested games at AT is 1200 and the number of remaining games is 200, when 500 games are internally added, the correct value for the number of remaining games (the number of remaining games after the addition is given) Is an example of switching to another display without displaying. In Example 2, the number of remaining games may be displayed as "Congratulations" or "Congratulations". In addition, it may be displayed as "?".

  In the second example, when the total of the number of digested games and the number of remaining games of AT is “1500” or less, the number of remaining games is displayed. However, by performing additional addition, the total number of games of AT is “ When it exceeds 1500 ", the display of the number of remaining games is not displayed so that the player can grasp. The player can grasp that the addition has been performed by the display of the remaining game number of AT from the specific numerical value and the display other than the numerical value. However, since a specific numerical value is not displayed for the remaining game number of AT, the player can not grasp the remaining game number of AT.

It should be noted that if "500" is added in the case of "1200" and "200" for the number of ATs with the number of digested games before the addition, the number of remaining ATs may be set as "700" on the counter. Alternatively, it may be "300".
In addition, when the display of the remaining game number of AT becomes "Congratulation" or "Congratulations", if it is a specification that AT continues up to 1500 times of the upper limit, "1500-AT digested game The player can calculate the remaining game number of AT by calculating the number of times.
Furthermore, the display of "Congratulations" or "Congratulations" informs the player that the total number of AT games has exceeded "1500" and indicates that no further addition will be made. It becomes.

  The example 3 shows an example in which "500" is added in the case where the number of times the AT has been digested is "1200" and the number of remaining games is "200", as in the example 2. Then, in Example 3, the remaining game number of AT (although not shown in FIG. 55) is “+100” and is “300”. That is, by the addition this time, the total game number of AT has reached "1500".

In the third example, when the total number of times played by the AT is "1500" or more, the display of both the number of times played by the AT and the number of remaining games is canceled and replaced with an ending effect (movie). The ending effect lasts at least a plurality of games (for example, several tens of games), and is executed until the number of AT-digested games reaches “1500”. If the final image of the ending effect prepared in advance is reached before the number of AT-games reaches "1500", the final image is continued to be displayed or the beginning of the ending effect is returned to and the image is repeated The method is mentioned.
By outputting the ending effect, it is possible to play a role of informing the player that no further addition of the number of games is to be performed.

In the fourth example, as shown in the second example, when only the number of AT-digested games is displayed and the number of remaining games is displayed as "congratulations" etc., as described above, the player can select the remaining AT. I can not know the number of games, for example, when the remaining number of AT games is "10", like "it will finish in 10 more games", the game information that AT will not be executed beyond 1500 games It is something to display. Note that the “remaining 10 games” shown in the example 4 is an example, and it is optional about how many remaining games the display of the game information is started. In addition, the player can know the remaining game number of AT by displaying the game information that the game number of AT is not executed beyond “1500”.
Example 4 can also be used in combination with Examples 1 to 3.

Further, when the addition exceeding 1500 games occurs, the addition effect itself may be displayed as "Congratulations" or "Congratulations".
Furthermore, when an addition exceeding 1,500 games occurs, a bonus image may be displayed that can be displayed only when an addition exceeding 1,500 games occurs.
Furthermore, "the occurrence of the addition exceeding 1500 games" may be set as a mission in the game Mythro. For example, when the occurrence of "the occurrence of the addition of more than 1,500 games" is generated a predetermined number of times, it is determined that the mission is achieved, and the player is given some benefit.

As described above, even if an additional game exceeding 1500 games occurs, the additional game can not be executed, but instead, a benefit (a profit) is set to prevent the player's motivation from decreasing. Is preferable.
In particular, when an additional event exceeding 1500 games occurs, it is assumed that the player is elected as a rare player, but when the player is elected a rare player, the total number of games is "1500" or more and outputs something It is unnatural to do.
In addition, "mythro game" is like what is described, for example in Paragraph No. "0680" etc. of "Unexamined-Japanese-Patent No. 2016-104442."

FIG. 56 is a diagram for explaining how effects and the like change as the number of AT games increases in the third embodiment.
In the third embodiment, since “AT = advantageous section”, the number of obtained sheets continues to increase during the advantageous section (AT). And, in the example of FIG. 56, in order to simplify the graph, the AT is continued from “0 G” to “1500 G” for the number of games, and the number of winning is continuously increasing.
In FIG. 56, (a) is a diagram showing the relationship between the number of AT games and the effect.
In FIG. 56, the horizontal axis indicates the number of AT games, and the vertical axis indicates the number of winning. The example of (a) is an example in which 500 games are added when the number of times of digestion game of AT (advantage zone) becomes "1200" as shown in example 2 of FIG.

The AT ends at the same time as the end of the advantageous section, even when the number of games in the advantageous section reaches 1,500 games, even when it has the remaining number of games at that time.
Further, although the additional effect is performed until 1200 games, when the 500 game is won, the additional effect for the winning is not performed. Also, even if the player wins an additional event after that, no additional effect is given.

  On the other hand, the effects relating to the AT in AT continue until the number of games on the advantageous section reaches 1,500. In addition, although the display of the number of digested games and the number of remaining games of AT is performed up to 1200 games, the AT remaining number of games is displayed as shown in Example 2 of FIG. 55 when 500 games are won by 1200 games. Or stop displaying both the AT's number of digested games and the number of remaining games, as shown in Example 3 of FIG. 55, and other displays (“Holiday” shown in Example 2 of FIG. 55, Example 3 Switch to the ending effect shown).

FIG. 56 (b) shows an example (indicated by a solid line in the figure) of gradually decreasing the added lottery probability with the completion of the AT game number when the AT continues the "1500" game (in the figure, (2) It is a figure which shows the example (it shows with a dotted line in the figure) which reduces instruction | indication frequency gradually.
For example, as shown in FIG. 47 (c), the above (1) uses the lottery table A until the number of AT games is less than the "1000" game, and when it becomes "1000" or more, the lottery table B Or, as shown in FIG. 50 (c), until the AT game frequency is less than the "1000" game, the additional lottery is performed in the grade corresponding to the winning combination, but it became "1000" game or more The time corresponds to an example in which the grade of the winning combination is lowered and the additional drawing is performed.

  In the example of (1), when the AT game frequency is less than "500" games, the added lottery probability is a high probability, and when "500" games or more and less than "1000" games, the added lottery probability is a normal probability. In the case of the "1000" game or more, the additional lottery probability is a low probability. It should be noted that even if the AT addition probability is gradually lowered as the number of games is consumed, as long as the remaining number of ATs is held, the increase rate of the number of obtained with respect to the number of games does not change. , It becomes the same as that of FIG. 56 (a).

On the other hand, in the example of (2), the instruction frequency is controlled to be gradually lowered according to the number of AT game times.
Here, the “instruction frequency” refers to how often the instruction function is activated when the small combination B or small combination C (pushing order bell) is won during AT (the correct order It is determined what to display. For example, when the AT game frequency is less than "500" game, the instruction frequency is 100% (instruction frequency "high"), and when "500" game or more and less than "1000" game, the instruction frequency is 90% (instruction In the case of "1000" or more games, the instruction frequency may be set to 80% (instruction frequency "low") or the like.

In addition, for example, when the instruction frequency is 90%, a lottery (winning with a probability of 90%) of whether or not to operate the instruction function is performed on the small combination B group or the small combination C group (push order bell). Activate the instruction function when winning the lottery.
In addition, when the repeat frequency is less than 100% and the replay repeat winning for promoting or maintaining the RT, the correct pressing order may be always instructed, or the same as the pressing order bell winning. Frequency may determine whether to indicate or not.

If the instruction function does not operate at the time of replay double winning, it may fall to a disadvantageous RT. For example, in the first embodiment (FIG. 22), Replay 03 is displayed when Replay C is won during RT3 and falls to RT2.
Further, as in the first embodiment, when a pattern symbol is displayed in RT3, it falls to RT2. Therefore, in the example as in the first embodiment, if the instruction function does not operate at the time of winning the push order bell, it may fall to a disadvantageous RT.
If the instruction frequency is gradually reduced as the AT game frequency is consumed, the increase in the number of wins will increase gradually as the push order bell wins, so the increase in the number of wins is greater than when the instruction frequency is 100%. It becomes difficult to increase. (2) of FIG. 56 (b) shows this state.

In the third embodiment, "AT = advantageous section".
On the other hand, as in the first embodiment described above and the fourth embodiment described later, there is an advantageous section but a non-AT period (a sign, a CZ, a withdrawal period, a special game, etc .; the same applies hereinafter). Of course, having.
For example, it is a case where an AT is started after an advantageous section is started and the above non-AT period is played for "n".
In this case, at the start of the AT, the advantageous section has already digested the "n" game.
In this case, as shown in FIG. 55, in the case of displaying the number of digested games etc. as an image, when displaying the number of digested games in the advantageous section including a part or all of the "n" games (example 1), In the case of n 'game, although it is reflected on the internal counter (upper limit counter shown in FIG. 43 etc.), the image display is not performed (example 2).
In the case of Example 1, it is a specification that displays the number of times of digested games in a part or all of the advantageous sections other than AT to the player, and in the case of Example 2, a specification in which only the number of times of digested game of AT is displayed to the player Become.
Furthermore, in the case of Example 1, both a) a case of displaying only the number of times of digested games in the advantageous section (not displaying the number of times of digested games of AT) and b) both of the number of digested games of advantageous areas and the number of digested games of AT There is a case to display.

Furthermore, in the third embodiment, for example, as shown in FIG. 56 (b), the additional lottery probability is high when the number of games is less than "500", and the additional lottery is more than "500" and less than "1000". The probability is a normal probability, and when the number of games is "1000" or more, the added lottery probability is a low probability.
Here, similarly to the above, it is assumed that after transitioning to the advantageous section, AT is started after a non-AT period of 600 games.
It should be noted that when the command function operation game is hardly executed from the start of the advantageous section to 600 games, the graph of FIG. 56 is a graph (the lower right) in which the obtained number decreases as the number of games is consumed. Become. Then, when the AT is started from 600 games, it becomes a graph (upper right) in which the number of winning points turns to increase after 600 games.

  In the above example, since the advantageous section has already consumed 600 games at the start of the AT, the maximum remaining game count of the advantageous section at the start of the AT is 900 games. Therefore, if this example is applied to FIG. 56 (b), for example, if the number of AT digested games is less than "300", the added lottery probability is high probability, and if the number of AT digested games is "300" or more and less than "600", the added lottery The probability is a normal probability, and when the number of AT-digested games is "600" or more, the additional lottery probability is set to a low probability.

Furthermore, similarly to the above, when the AT is started after transitioning to the advantageous section and after a non-AT period of 600 games, for example, in “(c) Add lottery” in FIG. When it is more than ""("Yes" in step S451), setting of the lottery table B and the like can be mentioned.
Here, the specified number is set to "600" because, as described above, when the maximum remaining number of games played in the advantageous section at the start of AT is "900", the number of game digests at "2/3" Is set as the threshold.
Thus, when the advantageous section is not always AT, for example, when starting the AT after the predetermined number of games without starting the AT at the start of the advantageous section, the expected additional value (the additional lottery probability etc.) When changing based on the number of times of digestion, it is necessary to make settings that also take account of the number of remaining games in the advantageous section.

Fourth Embodiment
Subsequently, a fourth embodiment will be described.
As shown in FIG. 1, in the first embodiment, the main control board 50 is provided with an external signal transmission means 70, and an external signal (sometimes referred to as “outer end”) to the external concentrated terminal plate 100. Send The fourth embodiment is specifically characterized in what kind of external signal is output and at what timing it is turned on / off.
Also, BB in the fourth embodiment is 1BBA or 1BBB or the like in one embodiment, and BB gaming is 1BBA gaming or 1BBB gaming or the like.

FIG. 57 is a diagram showing Example 1 (upper stage) and Example 2 (lower stage) of the time chart of the external signal in the fourth embodiment. FIG. 58 is a diagram of a third example of the time chart of the external signal.
In the example of FIG. 57 and FIG. 58, an external signal 1 indicating that BB is in operation (in BB gaming) and an external signal 2 indicating that AT is in progress are output as external signals. In addition to these external signals, it is also possible to provide an external signal (for example, a signal which is turned on when any one of AT and special game is satisfied) indicating that the player is in an advantageous state. It is.

  In the third embodiment, the AT is started simultaneously with the start of the advantageous section, and the advantageous section is ended simultaneously with the end of the AT. On the other hand, in the fourth embodiment, the start of the advantageous section does not always immediately start the AT. For example, when the start condition of the AT is satisfied during the advantageous section, the AT is started. However, the point at which the advantageous section ends when the AT ends is the same as the third embodiment.

Example 1 of FIG. 57 is one in which the AT is started after the predetermined number of games have elapsed after the start of the advantageous section. When AT is started, the external signal 2 meaning AT signal is turned on. Then, it is assumed that BB is won during AT and BB game is started. At the start of the BB game, the external signal 1 indicating that the BB game is in progress is turned on. Note that the AT is interrupted based on the start of the BB game, and the AT is resumed after the end of the BB game. However, the external signal 2 maintains the on state even during the BB game.
When the BB game is over, the external signal 1 is turned off. Thereafter, when AT ends, the external signal 2 is turned off. Along with the end of AT, the advantageous section is also ended (the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned off). In this example, the AT and the advantageous section end before the arrival of 1500 games which is the upper limit of the advantageous section.
In addition, when it reaches 1500 games which is the upper limit of the advantageous section, the advantageous section and the AT end even if it is the case that the AT has the remaining number of games at that time.

  In Example 2 of FIG. 57, after starting the advantageous section, the point of starting AT after the elapse of a predetermined number of games is the same as Example 1. Moreover, it is the same as Example 1 also about the point which transfered to BB game during AT. And Example 2 is an example which satisfied the termination condition of the advantageous section during BB game. Therefore, when the end condition of the advantageous section is reached, the BB game has not ended yet. Then, after the end condition of the advantageous section has elapsed, the BB game is ended.

In this case, both the external signal 1 indicating that the BB gaming is in progress and the external signal 2 indicating that the AT is in progress are on until the BB gaming is over. Then, with the end of the BB game, the external signal 1 and the external signal 2 are turned off. Note that since the advantageous section is of course ended by satisfying the end condition of the advantageous section, the advantageous section display LED 77 is also turned off at the end of the advantageous section. In addition, since AT is executed within the advantageous section, the AT also ends with the end of the advantageous section.
As described above, in the second example, the AT is ended when the end condition of the advantageous section is reached, but the external signal 2 is turned on even after the end condition of the advantageous section. Thereby, the output of the external signal 2 can be prevented from being turned off at an unnatural timing.

  As in Example 2, as an example satisfying the termination condition of the advantageous section during BB gaming, for example, first, the number of AT gaming is set in advance at the start of AT, and the number of gaming is during BB gaming There is also a case where it is subtracted. Second, there is a case where the upper limit (1500 games) of the advantageous section is reached during the BB game. For example, when the AT game frequency is set to "50" and the AT is started, when transitioning to the BB game during that AT, the AT game frequency count may be interrupted. However, with regard to the count of the upper limit "1500" game of the advantageous section, it is continued also during the BB game.

Example 3 shown in FIG. 58 is an example in which the AT is started after the predetermined number of games has elapsed after the start of the advantageous section, as in the example 1 of FIG. When AT is started, the external signal 2 is turned on. In Example 3, it is assumed that BB is not won during the advantageous section (does not shift to BB game).
Further, Example 3 is an example in which addition of the number of games is performed during AT, and the number of remaining games of AT is also reached when reaching 1500 games which is the upper limit of the advantageous section. Even in the case of having AT's remaining game count when reaching 1500 games which is the upper limit of the advantageous section, the advantageous section and the AT are ended. Based on this, when reaching 1500 games which is the upper limit of the advantageous section, the external signal 2 is turned off.

  In addition, when winning the special part near the end of the advantageous section, when ending the 1500 game of the advantageous section while inside the special part, during the special game that the special part wins and shifts, “the advantageous section It is not possible to output an effect such as "How many times a special game is inside." This is because data on the advantageous section is reset by reaching 1500 games of the advantageous section. However, although the actual advantageous section ends, it is possible to output an effect as if the advantageous section (AT) continues even during the special game in terms of the appearance of the effect.

At the end of the advantageous section, the data regarding the advantageous section stored in the main control board 50 is cleared, but the data regarding the advantageous section stored in the sub control board 80 (transmitted from the main control board 50 The data stored based on the incoming command may be cleared or not cleared.
If not cleared, it is also possible to display a numerical value exceeding “1500” for the number of games during the advantageous section during the special game.
In addition, when the special winning combination is won near the end of the advantageous section, when an effect such as an ending effect has been output, the ending effect may be canceled and the special winning combination may be notified immediately.

Fifth Embodiment
Subsequently, a fifth embodiment will be described. In the fifth embodiment, the AT is started or the AT is ended along with the transition of the gaming state (RT or control state). In the fifth embodiment, the following example 1 and example 2 will be described.
FIG. 59 is a diagram showing RT transition in Example 1 of the fifth embodiment, and is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 22 of the first embodiment.
In Example 1 of the fifth embodiment, the advantageous section is started simultaneously with the start of the BB game. Therefore, in the figure, during 1 BBA operation and 1 BBB operation, it becomes an advantageous section.
In addition, both at the end of the 1 BBA operation and at the end of the 1 BBB operation, transition to non-RT (this point is different from the first embodiment).

  Non-RT maintains a favorable interval. In non-RT, the Replay A alone is not drawn, and the Replay C group is drawn (as in RT3 of the first embodiment). When the replay C group is won, the instruction function is not activated. Therefore, Replay 01 or Replay 03 is won by the operation (luck) of the player's stop switch 42. Then, when Replay 01 wins, it shifts to RT5 (RT newly provided in the fifth embodiment), and when Replay 03 wins, it shifts to RT2.

It should be noted that when the Replay C group is won in non-RT, the instruction function may not always be operated, and the instruction function may always be operated (the push order for winning Replay 01 is displayed). Alternatively, it may be determined by lottery whether or not the instruction function is to be activated when the Replay C group is won.
Alternatively, when transitioning to non-RT based on the end of operation of 1 BBA, the instruction function is activated when winning replay C group, and when transitioning to non-RT based on the end of actuation 1 BBB, instruction function when winning replay C group Not operate, etc.

RT5 is a limited RT and continues 50 games. When 50 games are consumed at RT5, it shifts to RT2.
And, in the fifth embodiment, RT5 is performed in the advantageous section and AT is performed. On the other hand, when it transfers to RT2 from non-RT or RT5, it is set as a normal area (non-AT).
Therefore, when Replay 01 is won in the non-RT (advantage zone and non-AT), the next game is shifted to RT5, and the advantageous zone and AT (50 games) are executed. And, when 50 games are consumed, it shifts to RT2 (normal section and non AT).
On the other hand, when Replay 03 is won in the non-RT (advantage zone and non-AT), the next game is shifted to RT2 (normal zone and non-AT).
And in RT2, the lottery of the advantageous section and AT is performed.

FIG. 60 is a time chart showing the relationship between the RT transition and the AT described above. (A) shows an example of transition to AT. The example of FIG. 60 shows an example in which the player wins 1BB in RT2 and shifts to 1BB game without passing through RT4 (inside). The transition from RT2 to 1BB gaming starts an advantageous section. Then, when the 1BB game is over, it shifts to non-RT, and when Replay 01 wins in this non-RT, it shifts to RT5. In RT5, 50 ATs are executed. When the AT of 50 games is finished, the advantageous section and the AT are finished, and it shifts to RT2.
On the other hand, in the example shown in FIG. 6B, the 1BB game is over and the non-RT mode is entered, and Replay 03 is won in this non-RT mode. In this case, it does not shift to RT5 (AT), shifts to RT2 and ends the advantageous section.

FIG. 61 is a diagram showing Example 2 ((a) to (c)) of the fifth embodiment.
In the fifth embodiment, as described above, the start and end of the advantageous section and the AT are controlled by RT (lottery state) or controlled by the main control board 50. It does not matter whether RT is different or identical. In the example 1 of FIG. 60 described above, the RT transition starts the advantageous section and the AT, and the RT transition ends the advantageous section and the AT.
On the other hand, in Example 2 of FIG. 61, the transition of the control state starts the advantageous section and the AT, and the transition of the control state ends the advantageous section and the AT.

In FIG. 61, (a) includes the control states of state 1 to state 3. In this example, State 1 and State 2 are advantageous sections, and State 3 is a normal section.
The states 1 to 3 are mainly the states when moving between RT2 and RT3 in the first embodiment (FIG. 22). State 3 is so-called normal, state 2 is a pullback period after a precursor or AT end, and state 1 is AT.

In state 3 (normal), a lottery for an advantageous section is executed. The lottery of the advantageous section is, for example, the same as that shown in the first embodiment. And if it elects to an advantageous section in state 3 and shifts to an advantageous section, it shifts to the precursor which is state 2. Therefore, when it transfers to a precursor, advantageous section display LED77 lights.
The precursor corresponds to a preparation period until AT is started. For example, the number of precursor games is determined at the time of transition from state 3 to state 2, and in state 2 is a stay until the number of games is digested Do. In addition, the indication function does not operate during the aura. Then, when the number of times of gaming in state 2 (precursor) is digested, the transition from the next game to AT which is state 1 is made. During state 1 (AT), the pointing function is activated.

State 1 (AT) continues until the end condition of state 1 (AT) is satisfied. For example, the number of games in state 1 (AT) may be fixed as “50”, or may be possible to be added as shown in the third embodiment.
Then, when the end condition of the state 1 (AT) is satisfied, the state shifts to a state 2 (drawback period of AT). In this withdrawal period, the maximum number of games is predetermined (for example, "20" game).

If a predetermined condition is satisfied during the period of the state 2 (retraction period) (for example, when winning the rare role, or when winning the AT lottery executed when, for example, the rare role is won), the state 1 ( Transition to AT). On the other hand, if the predetermined condition is not satisfied during the pullback period, which is the state 2, then the state 3, the normal transition is made. Then, at the same time as transitioning to the state 3, the advantageous section is ended, and transition is made to the normal section.
As described above, when the normal section which is the state 3 is set as the normal section, and the other states 1 and 2 are set as the advantageous section and transition to the advantageous section, depending on whether the transition condition is satisfied, Transition to AT (state 1) or transition to state 2 (AT withdrawal period).

  In the example of FIG. 61 (a), it is also possible to set an upper limit to the number of AT transitions. For example, when the upper limit number of times of AT is set to “5”, the state 1 is shifted to the state 3 without shifting to the AT withdrawal period (state 2) after the end of the fifth AT. And, it is also possible to end the AT and the advantageous section.

FIG. 61 (b) has AT, CZ (chance zone), precursor, and normal as control states.
And usually, it is a normal section, and precursor, CZ, and AT are advantageous sections.
First, during the normal time, a lottery for transition to an advantageous section is performed in the same manner as in the first embodiment and the like, and when winning the advantageous section, transition to an advantageous section from the next game and start the precursor. The omen is up to 32 games (the number of omen games is determined by lottery). Then, after digesting the number of prognostic game numbers, it shifts to CZ. CZ is executed until the transition condition to AT or the ending condition of CZ is satisfied. When the transition condition to AT is satisfied during CZ, transition to AT is made. In addition, when CZ end condition is satisfied before satisfying the transition condition to AT during CZ, transition is made to normal.

Specifically, as a condition for shifting to AT during CZ, for example, (a) when winning a transition lottery according to the winning combination, (b) when winning a transition lottery to be performed every game regardless of the winning combination, (C) When a predetermined specific combination is won, (d) When the number of predetermined combination wins exceeds a prescribed number, (e) When transitioning to a specific RT, (f) A predetermined Various transition conditions can be determined according to the game characteristics, such as when winning a special part.
In addition, the termination condition of CZ is similarly (a) when the transition condition to AT is not satisfied during CZ, (b) when winning a specific winning combination, (c) regardless of winning combination for each game Various termination conditions can be determined according to the game characteristics, such as when winning a fall lottery to be made.
Furthermore, the transition condition to AT in CZ and the termination condition of CZ mentioned here may be set as conditions reverse to each other.

  AT is performed in the same manner as (a) above. Then, when the end condition of AT is satisfied, it shifts to CZ. CZ after AT is positioned in the pullback period of (a) above. The transition to the AT can be made if the transition condition to the AT is satisfied again during the CZ, but the transition is made to the normal when the termination condition of the CZ is satisfied without satisfying the transition condition to the AT. At the same time as the transition to the normal state, the advantageous section is ended, and the transition to the normal section is made.

In addition, although it is during AT as a rule to execute an instruction function operation game, since it is an advantageous section during state 2 of FIG. 61 (a) or during CZ or precursor of FIG. 61 (b), the instruction function It is possible to perform an operating game.
In particular, since it is necessary to execute at least one command function operation game after transitioning to the advantageous section, in the example of FIG. 61 (a), it is initially small during state 2 (predictive state) transitioning from state 3 It can be mentioned that the game in which the combination B is won is designated as an instruction function operation game.
Similarly, in the example of FIG. 61 (b), a game in which the small winning combination B is first won is selected as an instruction function operation game, out of the 32 games within the precursor.

FIG. 61 (c) is an example having control states of precursor, CZ, and AT, as in the case of FIG. 61 (b). However, in this example, unlike (b), an example in which the transition to AT can not be made is shown.
As shown in (c) in the figure, when the transition from the normal to the precursor is made, the transition to the CZ is made after passing a predetermined number of games (maximum 32 games). If the transition condition to AT is satisfied during this CZ, the transition is made to AT as shown in (b), but if the termination condition of CZ is satisfied before satisfying the transition condition to AT (for example, a predetermined number of games (32 games ) Is transferred to the withdrawal period. In the pullback period, the transition lottery to the CZ is performed again, and the transition to the CZ is performed if the transition condition to the CZ is satisfied before the transition condition to the normal condition (for example, the predetermined number of games played (32 games) is satisfied) In the figure, (c) shows an example in which transition to CZ is made again (example of successful pull-back).

  Then, during the CZ, as described above, a lottery for transition to the AT is performed, but if the termination condition of the CZ is satisfied before satisfying the transition condition to the AT, the transition to the pullback period is performed again. And, in the example of (c) in the figure, in the second pullback period, before the transition condition to CZ is satisfied, the CZ end condition (for example, digestion of a predetermined number of games (32 games)) is satisfied (pullback failure) This is an example of transition to normal.

As described above, in the fifth embodiment, the start and end of the advantageous section can be controlled along with the shift to RT, and AT and the like can be freely executed during the advantageous section.
Alternatively, a plurality of control states not related to RT may be provided, and a control state corresponding to a normal state may be set as a normal section, a transition lottery to an advantageous section is made during this normal, and a transition lottery to an advantageous section is won. It shifts to any control state corresponding to the section. Then, in the control state corresponding to the advantageous section, the end condition is set (for example, the predetermined number of games has been completed), and transition to another control state corresponding to the advantageous section is made or the advantageous section is ended. It shifts to the control state corresponding to the normal section.

  In the example of FIG. 61, when AT is executed, ART can be executed if AT is executed with RT of replay high probability. Therefore, for example, in the case of realizing the example of FIG. 61 in the RT transition of the first embodiment, when the transition condition to the AT is satisfied, the instruction function is activated when the Replay B group is won in RT2, and Replay 02 is performed. It is possible to display the pressing order to be displayed and to shift to RT3.

As described above, by arbitrarily defining the termination condition of the advantageous section, it is possible to freely design a plurality of control states (precursor, CZ, AT). Further, the present invention is not limited to the examples shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, and all of them can be combined. Furthermore, it is also possible to set a plurality of termination conditions in one advantageous section, and in this way, a wider range of gameplay can be designed.
For example, the example of FIG. 60 (a) shows that the advantageous section ends when the number of RT5 games executed during the advantageous section reaches 50 games.
Further, the example of FIG. 60 (b) indicates that the advantageous section ends by transitioning from non-RT to RT2 by displaying Replay 03 during non-RT. That is, in the example of FIG. 60, two conditions of “RT 50 game digestion” and “transition from non-RT to RT 2” are set as the termination condition of the advantageous section. In other words, non-RT is positioned like a CZ that either promotes to AT (RT5) or falls to normal (RT2). A large concept is a specification that ends the advantageous section triggered by a specific RT transition.

Furthermore, in the example of FIG. 61, the advantageous section and the normal section are shifted according to the control state regardless of which RT is staying.
In the example of FIG. 61 (a), state 1 and state 2 (a precursor or AT withdrawal period) are the advantageous sections, and state 3 is set to the normal section. The transition from the state 3 to the state 1 or the state 2 indicates that the advantageous period starts, and the transition from the state 1 or 2 to the state 3 indicates that the advantageous period ends.
Similarly, in the example of FIGS. 61 (b) and (c), the normal state of the control state is a normal section, and the precursor of the control state, CZ, and AT are advantageous sections. The transition from normal to precursor, CZ, or AT indicates that the advantageous segment starts, and transition from the precursor, CZ, or AT to normal indicates that the advantageous segment ends.

  As described above, in the example of FIG. 61, when the control state is normal, it is the normal section, but when the control state is different from the normal state, the advantageous section is executed. However, even during the advantageous section, the AT is not executed for the precursor, CZ, and the like, and in order for the AT to be executed, it is necessary to satisfy the transition condition of the AT with the precursor, the CZ, and the like. On the other hand, even if it falls from AT to CZ (FIG. 61 (b)) or from CZ to a withdrawal period (precursor) (FIG. 61 (c)), the advantageous section does not end. The advantageous section ends when the control state shifts to normal.

In addition to the examples described in FIGS. 60 and 61, the following examples may be mentioned.
(1) An example in which the first limited RT (20 games) and the second limited RT (60 games) are provided, and the termination condition of the advantageous section is set to the digestion of the first finite RT or the second finite RT such an advantageous section For example, by setting the end condition of the case, transitioning from a non-RT in an advantageous section to a first limited RT of 20 games and a case of transitioning to a second limited RT of 60 games, profit for the player Can be different.
More specifically, a specific replay is drawn at a non-RT in the advantageous section, and a symbol combination transitioning to the first finite RT or a symbol combination transitioning to the second finite RT is displayed according to the push order at the time of specific replay winning. Let Then, at the time of specific replay winning, according to the pressing order operated by the player, by transitioning to the first limited RT of 20 games or the second limited RT of 60 games, it is shifted to which limited RT, about 3 It can be made playable that can generate a double profit difference.

In addition, the main control board 50 may notify the player of the pressing order at the time of specific replay winning during non-RT. In that case, a specification is considered to determine which of the first limited RT and the second limited RT to be notified of the pushing order in consideration of the winning combination and the game situation prior to the specific replay winning during the non-RT. Be At this time, the winning probability of the specific replay may have a setting difference, or may not have a setting difference, or may not.
Furthermore, the end condition of the advantageous section may be determined only to the digestion of the first finite RT, and may be set so as not to end the advantageous section in the digestion of the second finite RT. Thus, when transitioning from the non-RT to the second limited RT of 60 games, the second limited RT and the non-RT can be performed by shifting the non-RT to the non-RT again without ending the advantageous section even after the 60 games are digested. It is possible to play a game like looping.

  In this case, in the case of transition from non-RT to the first limited RT, the advantageous section ends when the limited RT of 20 games is digested, but in the case of transition from the non-RT to the second limited RT, the limited of 60 games After digesting RT, it can give a sense of expectation to shift from non-RT to second RT again. As described above, it is not possible to add an advantageous section by winning a combination having a setting difference in the advantageous section, but in the case of such a game characteristic, it is a case where the specific replay has a setting difference. However, there is no problem because it only serves as a transition role to finite RTs with different numbers of games. Thus, by devising the termination condition of the advantageous section, the substantial 20 games or 60 games added by the winning combination having the setting difference (transition to the first limited RT of 20 games, or the second of the 60 games It is possible to realize transition to finite RT.

(2) An example in which the termination condition of the advantageous section is set to the transition from non-RT to RT1 after the termination of CZ or the end of the special game By setting the termination condition of such advantageous section, for example, during the advantageous section Run up to 32 games of CZ, and set the clearing conditions for this CZ as special role winning. Then, the advantage section ends when 32 games are consumed without winning the special part during CZ. On the other hand, if the special part is won during CZ, the special game is ended, and then it is shifted to non-RT. In the non-RT, the specific replay is drawn similarly to the example of the above (1), and the specific replay is pushed In order, the symbol combination transitioning to RT1 or the symbol combination transitioning to RT2 is displayed.

  Then, “the transition from non-RT to RT1 after the end of the special game” is set as the ending condition of the advantageous section. Therefore, when the specific replay is won, the transition to RT1 is made by pushing order, and the advantageous section ends. On the other hand, after the end of the special game, when transitioning from non-RT to RT2, AT starts. Here, according to the control state and the winning combination, when the specific replay having no setting difference is won, the pressing order to shift to RT2 can be notified. This means that the special part winning in CZ is not limited to the special part having no setting difference, and may be a special part having a setting difference. During CZ in the advantageous section, by winning the special part regardless of the presence or absence of the setting difference, the playability that can be substantially granted AT (specificity won during non-RT after the end of the special game) In Replay, it is possible to realize the pressing order in which the symbol combination to be transferred to RT2 is displayed).

Furthermore, in the examples of (1) and (2) described above, RT is used as the control state. However, various control states may be used instead of RT. For example, in the example of (1), although two types of limited RT (the first limited RT and the second limited RT) different in non-RT and the number of games are adopted, these are the game state 1, the game state 2, and the game It may be replaced with state 3. Here, the gaming state is a control state executed during the advantageous section, and is the above-mentioned CZ, AT, or the like, but the winning probability of replay does not change as in the RT.
By this replacement, it is possible to set the game state 1 in which the instruction function does not operate in the advantageous section, the game state 2 of 20 games in which the instruction function operates in the advantageous section, and the game state 3 of 60 games in which the instruction function operates in the advantageous section. . In addition, as RT is not limited to transition conditions (for example, a specific symbol combination is displayed, special part winning, special part winning, special game ending, special game end, etc.), various conditions are free. It can be set to
Specifically, taking the above (1) as an example, conditions such as "winning bell five times within 20 games" and "computing bell consecutively for three consecutive games" in gaming state 1 during the advantageous section It is also possible to design to shift to the game state 2 when achieving the above.

Sixth Embodiment
The sixth embodiment ends the advantageous section before reaching the upper limit of 1500 games when it approaches 1500 games which is the upper limit of the advantageous section during the advantageous section and AT, and after the end of the advantageous section, it is relatively advantageous By providing the situation where the section and AT are easy to win, it is possible to repeatedly execute the advantageous section and the AT which do not reach the upper limit game number. Thereby, it is feasible to create a more advantageous state than the advantageous section and AT that execute up to the upper limit of 1500 games.

FIG. 62 is a diagram showing an RT transition in the sixth embodiment, and is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 22 of the first embodiment. The RT transition diagram of the sixth embodiment is different from the first embodiment in that it has RT6. RT6 is a limited RT and ends with the end of 50 games.
RT6 can be migrated only from RT3. Furthermore, after RT6 ends, it shifts to non-RT.

  In the sixth embodiment, in any RT except inside (RT4), the transition lottery to the advantageous section is performed during the normal section. Moreover, the transition lottery from the normal section to the advantageous section is executed irrespective of the winning of the condition device. That is, the lottery of the advantageous section is executed without being tied to the winning of the condition device having no setting difference. The winning probability is “1/32”, which is common to all RTs.

  In addition, after the end of 1 BBA operation and 1 BBB operation, AT has the right to execute. It transfers to non-RT after the completion | finish of 1 BBA, It transfers to RT1 after the completion | finish of 1 BBB. In addition, when the pattern figure is displayed in non RT or RT1, it moves to RT2. After that, RT2 and RT3 are exchanged (here, the rare case where RT3 accidentally shifts to RT6) is not considered.

  In the above, non-RT, RT1, RT2 and RT3 execute the transition lottery to the advantageous section with a winning probability of "1/32", and therefore, when the transition lottery to the advantageous section is won, 1BBA operation or 1BBB In the situation where it has the right to execute AT based on the operation, it starts the advantageous section and AT. In addition, since AT can be performed on condition that it is an advantageous section (because it is necessary to operate an indication function), it is advantageous even if it shifts to non-RT or RT1 after the operation of 1 BBA or 1 BBB respectively. Before winning the section, AT will not start even if it has AT rights.

  When the advantageous section and AT are started in the non-RT or RT1, the instruction function is not activated at the time of winning the small winning combination B group until the pattern symbol is displayed. This is to display the pattern and make it shift to RT2 as early as possible. When the small winning combination C group is won, the instruction function is activated. After transitioning from non-RT or RT1 to RT2, both the small combination B and small combination C group wins activate the indication function. When the replay B group is won in RT2, the instruction function is activated to shift to RT3. Thus, the AT is executed until the termination condition of the AT is satisfied.

In the sixth embodiment, unlike in the first embodiment, in RT3, instead of the replay C group, a replay D group is drawn. FIG. 63 is a diagram showing the relationship between the types of Replay D group to be randomly selected at RT3, the winning combinations, the pushing order, and the display combinations, corresponding to FIG. 13 of the first embodiment.
The Replay D group includes Replay D1 to Replay D3. Replay D1 to Replay D3 respectively include Replay 01, Replay 03, and Replay 06.
Then, when any Replay D group is won, Replay 01 wins in one push order, Replay 03 wins in the other push order, and Replay 06 in the other one push order. Is set to win a prize.

Here, when Replay 01 is displayed in RT3, RT3 is maintained, and when Replay 02 is displayed, the point of falling to RT2 is the same as Replay C group of the first embodiment. On the other hand, when Replay 06 wins in RT3, it shifts to RT6 (see FIG. 62).
In the sixth embodiment, unlike in the first embodiment, the lottery for Replay 06 is not performed during 1BBA operation and 1BBB operation. In the sixth embodiment, Replay 06 is included only in Replay D group.

In the sixth embodiment, when staying at RT 3 and being in the advantageous section and AT, when the number of games in the advantageous section is less than “1400”, when the Replay D group is won, Replay 01 is won The push order to be held, that is, the push order to maintain RT3 is displayed by the operation of the instruction function.
On the other hand, when staying at RT 3 and in the advantageous section and AT, when the number of digested games in the advantageous section becomes “1400” or more, that is, when the advantageous section remains “100” or less. In the game in which the replay D group is won after that, the pressing order for winning the replay 06 is displayed by the operation of the instruction function.

Thereby, since Replay 06 wins in the game concerned, it shifts to RT6 from the next game. The transition from RT3 to RT6 is set to the advantageous segment and the end condition of the AT. Therefore, with the transition to RT6, the advantageous section and the AT end.
As described above, it is desirable that the Replay D group does not have a setting difference because it is a duplicate replay of replay having a possibility to shift RT (of course, there is a setting difference in the winning probability of the Replay D group Does not prevent them from

RT6 is a limited RT, and 50 games are executed. When 50 games have been consumed in RT6, it is determined that the termination condition of RT6 is satisfied, and it shifts to non-RT.
Further, as described above, in RT6, as in the other RTs, the drawing of the advantageous section is performed with a winning probability of "1/32". And if it wins to an advantageous section in RT6, the right to execute AT is granted. That is, when the number of games played in the advantageous section in RT3 is "1400" or more and it shifts to RT6, the advantageous section and the AT end, and "winning in the advantageous section lottery in RT6" is the execution of AT ) Is set to the condition.
In RT6, since the winning probability of the advantageous section is "1/32" and the number of games is "50", the probability of winning in the advantageous section during RT6 is about 79.6%.

  When an advantageous section is won in RT6, the advantageous section will be started from the next game and the execution condition of the AT will be satisfied. In this case, the AT may start at any time. For example, the AT may be started while staying at the next game of the game won in the advantageous section, ie, RT6. Alternatively, the AT may be started after transitioning to non-RT when transitioning to non-RT, or further transitioning from non-RT to RT2. Here, in order to simplify the explanation, it is assumed that the AT is started from the next game of the game won in the advantageous section.

  In RT6, when you start the advantageous section and AT at the same time from the next game of the game won in the advantageous section, to have the continuity possibility of AT up to the limit of 1500 games which is the upper limit number of games of the advantageous section. Can. Since the count of 1500 games of the advantageous section is performed even in the controlled state such as the precursor or CZ performed during the advantageous section, the AT is compared with the game property in which the AT is performed via such a control state. It can be made to run for a long time.

  When RT6 ends, it shifts to non-RT. Non-RT continues until the pattern pattern is displayed. And if a pattern figure is displayed in non-RT, it will shift to RT2. When the lottery for the advantageous section is won at RT6, the pressing order for activating the instruction function at RT2 when the replay B group is won is displayed at RT2.

When the player wins the AT in RT6, when it shifts to RT3, the AT is executed while maintaining RT3. The AT is executed up to a predetermined number of games. When the predetermined number of games are finished, the AT ends and the advantageous section ends, and the next game shifts to the normal section.
In addition, an initial value is determined at the time of winning the AT, and the number of games is added by the above-described addition during AT execution. Then, during the execution of the AT, when it becomes 1400 games or more after the start of the advantageous section, it is shifted to RT6 in the same manner as described above.

  On the other hand, during the normal section, the lottery of the advantageous section is performed also with RT2 and RT3 with the winning probability of "1/32". That is, in the sixth embodiment, even when staying at any RT except RT4, the lottery of the advantageous section is performed with the probability of "1/32", and when the lottery of the advantageous section is won, the advantageous section is started from the next game. Migrate to

In RT2 and RT3, when only shifting to the advantageous section, the instruction function is activated at the time of the first winning combination of the small group B winning. Thereby, since the condition capable of ending the advantageous section “execution of the at least one command function operation game” is satisfied, the advantageous section is ended in the game, and the next game is shifted to the normal section.
Therefore, in RT2 and RT3 (normal sections) not via 1BBA game or 1BBB game, the advantageous section is drawn with a winning probability of "1/32", and when it is won in the advantageous section, it starts the advantageous section from the next game. When one instruction function operation game (when the small winning combination B is won) is executed in the section, the transition from the next game to the normal section is repeated.
The present invention is not limited to this, and when it moves to the advantageous section, the predetermined number of games (for example, 32 games) may be continued, and after the predetermined number of games have been completed, the normal section may be transferred. In this case, it is necessary to execute at least one designated function activation game in the predetermined number of games.

In RT2 and RT3 (so-called normal), an AT lottery is separately performed. When the player has won the AT lottery, he / she has the right to execute the AT. For example, when the small winning combination E1 shown in the first embodiment is won, there is a right to execute AT. Alternatively, when the small winning combination E1 is won, whether or not to grant the right to execute the AT may be determined by lottery, and when the lottery is won, the right to execute the AT may be granted.
The AT game frequency is initially set to an initial value, and thereafter, the addition lottery is performed as shown in the third embodiment, and the game frequency is added.

Furthermore, if the game winning the AT is an advantageous section, the advantageous section and the AT can be started from the next game. It should be noted that the AT may be started from the next game of the game winning the AT, or, as shown in the fifth embodiment, the AT may be started after passing through a sign or a CZ. After starting the AT, the AT is executed while staying at RT3 (ART) as described above. If the AT is continuing even if it becomes 1400 games or more after shifting to the advantageous section, it shifts to RT6 as described above.
On the other hand, if the game won the AT is a normal section, while having the right to execute the AT, it waits to win the advantageous section. And if it wins to an advantageous section, AT will be performed after that.

Moreover, when performing AT lottery as mentioned above during stay of RT2 or RT3, it is also possible to set via RT6 as start conditions of AT.
Therefore, in RT2 and RT3, on the basis of having won the small winning combination E1 etc., "the right to execute AT" is granted. When this right is won, it waits to be elected in the advantageous section when it is not the advantageous section, and when it becomes the advantageous section or in the advantageous section, it activates the indication function, and when it is RT2, the replay B group Display the push order to shift to RT3 when winning. Furthermore, when it is RT3, the pressing order to shift to RT6 when the replay D group is won is displayed. Moving to RT6 ends the advantageous section, as described above. And among 50 games of RT6, when it is elected to the advantageous section, it shall fulfill start conditions of AT. The flow after the start condition of AT is satisfied in RT6 is the same as described above.

  In addition, the lottery of the advantageous section is not limited to the above, and a specific combination having a winning probability of "1/32" may be drawn by all RTs, and the advantageous interval may be started based on the winning of the specific combination. . In addition, the specific part in this case is a part which does not have a setting difference, as described in the first embodiment.

The above-described sixth embodiment is summarized again, and has the following features (including effects).
(1) Before reaching the upper limit (1500 games) of the advantageous section, by intentionally ending the advantageous section and shifting to the re-lottery state of the advantageous section, it is practically the upper limit of 1500 advantageous sections. It becomes possible to carry out the advantageous section beyond. For example, it becomes possible to play games such as "advantage section (1200 games)-> non-advantage section (50 games)-> advantageous section (1200 games)".
In particular, since the transition to RT6 (finite RT) is set as the termination condition of the advantageous section, although the advantageous section ends at the time of transition from RT3 to RT6, during 50 games of RT6, the replay winning probability is It is possible to maintain a high advantageous state.
(2) In addition, in normal times, with each game, with the winning probability of "1/32", the transition lottery to the advantageous section is performed. In particular, a transition opportunity without a setting difference is necessary as an opportunity to shift to an advantageous section, but in both RT6 and normal times, a transition lottery to an advantageous section with a winning probability of always "1/32" Can do that.

Furthermore, depending on the design, as in the third embodiment, "start of AT = start of advantageous section", 1500 games which is the maximum number of games of the advantageous section are fully used, for example, 1500 The AT can be realized (except when starting the AT triggered by the winning of a special role).
(3) At the time of transition to the advantageous section, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute the AT by referring to the RT being executed. Although the transition lottery of the advantageous section is performed with the winning probability of each game “1/32”, when winning this transition lottery, refer to the RT (whether it is RT 6 or not) which was staying at the time of the winning. Then, it can be determined whether to execute AT at the transition to the advantageous section.

Seventh Embodiment
In the seventh embodiment, as a result of the addition of the number of games during AT, even when the total number of games of AT exceeds "1500", it brings a merit to the player, and further, the total of AT It is characterized in that the more the number of times the number of games is added exceeds 1500, the more advantageous the player is.

In the seventh embodiment, an “over 1500 counter” is provided to count the number of times the total game count of AT exceeds “1500” by the addition during AT. At the start of the advantageous interval and AT, the over 1500 counter value is "0".
Further, in the seventh embodiment, as shown in FIG. 44 (example 2) of the third embodiment, as a result of the addition lottery, when the total number of AT games exceeds "1500", the determined addition number is determined. It shall clear without adding.

  Therefore, when the total game number of AT is “1500” or less, the over 1500 counter remains “0”. Here, for example, when it is determined in step S451 in FIG. 44 (b) that the number of additions exceeds the specified number, the “over 1500 counter” changes from “0” to “1”. Similarly, if it is determined that the number of additions exceeds the specified number in step S451 in FIG. 44 (b), the "over 1500 counter" changes from "1" to "2". In this way, the counter for more than 1500 is added each time the total game number of ATs exceeds "1500".

On the other hand, in the seventh embodiment, after the start of the advantageous section and AT, the game upon winning the first small winning combination B group activates the instruction function. After that, when the over 1500 counter is “0”, that is, when the total number of AT games has never exceeded “1500” by the additional lottery, do you activate the indication function at the time of winning the small winning combination B group? Whether or not is decided by lottery.
Here, when the small winning combination B is won, the ratio at which the instruction function is operated is referred to as “the instruction function operation rate”.

  Then, the indication function operation rate when the over 1500 counter is “0” is set to “95%”. Therefore, in the advantageous section and AT, when the small winning combination B is won, for example, the lottery whether or not to operate the pointing function (lottery winning at 95%) is performed. Thus, the indication function operates with a probability of 95%, and the indication function does not operate with a probability of 5%. Assuming that the winning ratio for the small combination B when the pointing function is activated is 100% and the winning ratio for the small combination B when the pointing function is not activated is "1/3", the percentage of operating the indication function is 95%. The winning rate for the small group B in Japan is approximately 96.7%.

  Next, it is assumed that the total number of AT games has exceeded "1500" as a result of the addition during AT. Then, it is assumed that the over 1500 counter has become "1". Here, the indication function operation rate when the over 1500 counter is “1” is set to “97.5%”. Therefore, during the advantageous section and AT, when the small winning combination B is won, the indication function operates with a probability of 97.5%, and the indication function does not operate with a probability of 2.5%.

After that, when the total AT number of games exceeds “1500” as a result of further addition, the over 1500 counter becomes “2”. In this case, the indication function operation rate is set to “98.75%”. Therefore, during the advantageous section and AT, when the small winning combination B is won, the pointing function operates with a probability of 98.75%, and the pointing function does not operate with a probability of 1.25%.
As described above, when the counter value exceeds 1500, "0", "1", "2", ..., the indication function operating rate = "95", "97.5", "98.75" It is determined that ....

  If set as described above, the more the total AT number of games exceeds “1500”, that is, the larger the value of the over 1500 counter value, the closer to 100% the command function operation rate becomes. Here, even if the total game number of AT is over 1500, since the upper limit of the advantageous section is actually 1500, it is impossible to play the game for more than 1500 It is. However, according to the seventh embodiment, when the AT total game number of times of addition exceeding “1500” is performed, it becomes more advantageous to the player than before the addition is performed (expected number of coins expected) It can be set to increase the value).

Eighth Embodiment
In the eighth embodiment, BBs having no set difference in winning probability (if the first embodiment is taken as an example, a single winning of 1BBA, a double winning of 1BBA and small part D, a duplicate of 1BBA and small part E1) When it is determined to shift to the advantageous section on the basis of the winning), the advantageous section is started thereafter. In addition, after the BB game ends, there is a case where AT is started.
Further, for the end of the advantageous section, the following Examples 1 to 5 can be mentioned.
(1) Example where the advantageous section ends before the end of 1BB game (example 1)
(2) Example in which the advantageous section ends at the end of 1BB game (example 2)
(3) An example in which the advantageous section does not end at the end of the 1BB game, AT starts after the end of the 1BB game, and the advantageous section also ends at the end of the AT (example 3)
(4) The advantageous section does not end at the end of the 1BB game, but the advantageous section ends after a predetermined number of games (for example, 5 games) have elapsed after the end of the 1BB game (example 4)
(5) The advantageous section does not end at the end of the 1BB game, and the AT starts after a predetermined number of games (for example, 5 games) have elapsed after the end of the 1BB game.
Then, when it is determined to shift to the advantageous section, it is simultaneously determined in which of the first to fifth examples the advantageous section is ended. Of course, it does not necessarily have to be determined among the five of Examples 1 to 5. For example, it may be determined among the three of Examples 1 to 3, or between two of Example 2 and Example 3. You may

64 to 66 are time charts showing the above examples 1 to 5. FIG.
The example 1 of FIG. 64 is an example in which the advantageous section is started from the start of the 1BBA game (when the 1BBA is activated) after winning the 1BBA. The start timing of this advantageous section is the start time of the 1BBA game, but as described in the first embodiment, the start time of the next game of the game in which the 1BBA is won from the start of the next game of the game won in the 1BBA ( The advantageous section may be started at any timing up to the start of the first game of the 1BBA game. Further, as described in the first embodiment, when the advantageous section is started, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on.
Also, although the advantageous section is started simultaneously with the start of the 1BBA game, AT is not started because 1BBA is in operation (in the first example, in the example 1, the AT is not started during the advantageous section).

And, in Example 1, before the end of the 1BBA game, for example, when the last game of the final game of the 1BBA game is ended, or when the final game of the 1BBA game is started, etc., the advantageous section is ended.
Furthermore, in this example 1, the output of the continuous effect is started in the middle of the 1BBA game. Similar to the first embodiment, the continuous rendition is a series of renditions over a plurality of games (a rendition of raising anticipation whether AT will be executed after the end of the 1BBA game), and at the end of the continuous rendition, 1 BBA Outputs an effect to inform the player whether to start AT after the end of the game. In addition, the advantageous section ends with the end of the continuous effect.

Therefore, in Example 1, during the final game of the 1BBA game or in the previous game, the continuous effect is ended (finally, it is informed that the AT is not started), and at the end of the game where the continuous effect is ended, or continuously When the effect is ended, the advantageous section is ended. In Example 1, the advantageous section is ended before the end of the 1BBA game, and the AT is not started after the end of the 1BBA game.
However, at the start of the 1BBA game, even if it is decided to end the advantageous section before the end of the 1BBA game, etc., the player is won the rare role (for example, the small part D) during the 1BBA game, etc. When the extension condition of the advantageous section (also referred to as the changing condition of the advantageous section, hereinafter the same) is satisfied, the advantageous section is not ended before the end of the 1BBA game, and the advantageous section is continued even after the end of the 1BBA game. Good. Of course, the AT may be started after the end of the 1BBA game. For example, changing the end of the advantageous section from Example 1 to Example 3 can be mentioned.

  Example 2 of FIG. 64 is an example in which the end time of the 1BBA game is matched with the end time of the advantageous section. In this example 2, as in the example 1, the continuous effect is started from the middle of the 1BBA game, and the 1BBA game is performed at the end of the final game of the 1BBA game (when the last stop switch 42 is operated, etc.) It is informed whether or not to start AT game after the end of. In Example 2, since the advantageous section ends simultaneously with the end of the 1BBA game, AT is not started after the end of the 1BBA game. Therefore, at the end of the continuous effect, it is informed that the AT is not started.

In addition, as in Example 1 and Example 2, when the advantageous section ends by the end of the special game (1BBA game), the advantageous section is ended even if the instruction function activation game has not been performed even once. It is possible to do that. This is because there are already many medals acquired during the special game (1 BBA game), and there is no need to extend the end of the advantageous section just to perform one pointing function activation game. Rather, the delay may increase player dissatisfaction.
Also, as in Example 1, at the start of the 1BBA game, even when it is decided to end the advantageous section at the end of the 1BBA game, when the extension condition of the advantageous section is satisfied during the 1BBA game ( For example, when the player wins the rare role), the advantageous section may not end at the end of the 1BBA game, and the advantageous section may be continued after the end of the 1BBA game. Of course, the AT may be started after the end of the 1BBA game. For example, changing the end of the advantageous section from Example 2 to Example 3 can be mentioned.

Example 3 of FIG. 65, like Example 2, is to start continuous effect from the middle of the 1BBA game. Example 3 is an example of starting the AT after the end of the 1BBA game. In this case, at the end of the final game of the 1BBA game (or when the last stop switch 42 is operated, etc.), it is informed that the AT is to be started after the end of the 1BBA game. And AT is started from the next game of the final game of 1BBA game. Of course, it is not necessary to start immediate AT after the end of the 1BBA game. For example, the AT may be started from the next game of the game shifted to RT3, the next game of the game shifted to RT3, or the next game of replay B group. In this case, it is preferable to at least activate the indication function to shift to RT3 even before starting the AT.
Note that the AT ends when the conditions for ending the AT, such as the predetermined number of times of game play, are satisfied, and at the end of the AT, the advantageous section also ends simultaneously. However, the AT may be ended or the advantageous section may be continued thereafter.

  Although it is not known at the start of the 1BBA game, which of the above example 1 or example 2 or example 3 is, since the advantageous section display LED 77 is lighted at the start of the 1BBA game, it is possible to shift to the advantageous section When it is determined, the advantageous section display LED 77 turns on (determines to shift to the advantageous section) or does not light at the start of the 1BBA game (the advantageous section, as in the example 3). It is possible to prevent the player from having a monotonous game characteristic that raises a sense of expectation only by saying that it does not shift to (1), and it is possible to get the player's sense of expectation even during 1 BBA gaming.

  Example 4 in FIG. 66 continues the advantageous section even after the end of the 1BBA game, and starts continuous effects after the end of the 1BBA game, and whether or not to start AT from now on in the continuous effect (the advantageous section continues) Or not) is notified. After the end of the 1BBA game, the continuous effect is started, and the example 4 shows an example of performing the continuous effect 5 games. Of course, any number of continuous effects may be played. And, it is informed whether or not to start AT in the final game of continuous effect. Example 4 shows an example in which AT is not started. And, the advantageous section ends with the game at the end of the continuous effect. Of course, the continuous effect may be started from the next game after the end of the 1BBA game, or may be started from the next game or the like.

Thus, in Example 4, the advantageous section is continued even after the end of the 1BBA game, and the advantageous section is executed during 5 games during the normal game (the game after the end of the 1BBA game).
On the other hand, as described above, it is necessary to "execute at least one instruction function operation game during the advantageous section".
Here, based on BB's winning, it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, and in the case where the advantageous section is started at the same time as the start of the BB game (of course, it may not be simultaneously) After that, when ending the advantageous section with several games, it is conceivable to control as follows.

(1) If the small winning combination B is never won among the five games, the advantageous section is ended without executing the indication function activation game even once.
(2) When the small winning combination B is won in 5 games, the instruction function activation game is executed in the game.
(3) Even when the small winning combination B is won in the 5 games, the advantageous section is ended without executing the instruction function operation game.
(4) If the player has never won the small role B group among the 5 games, the advantage section is extended until the small role B group is won first, and the instruction is given when the small role B group is won first The function operation game is executed, and the advantageous section is ended in the game.
Of the above, any control may be performed.
As described above, the control of (1) to (3) may seem to be undesirable because it is necessary to “execute at least one pointing function activation game during the advantageous section”, but in Example 4 As described above, when the BB game is being performed during the advantageous section, since many medals have already been acquired during the BB game, the end of the advantageous section is performed only in order to perform one command function activation game. It is thought that there is no need to extend it. Rather, the delay may increase player dissatisfaction.
In Example 4 of FIG. 66, a case where an instruction is issued (instruction function operation game is executed) is shown by a two-dot chain line in five games.

Example 5 of FIG. 66 continues the advantageous section even after the end of the 1BBA game, as in Example 4, and starts the continuous effect after the end of the 1BBA game, and determines whether to start AT by the continuous effect or not It is an example to inform. Then, in the fifth example, it is informed that AT is to be started in the final game of the continuous effect. Then, start the AT from the next game. When the AT ends, the advantageous section also ends. Of course, it is not necessary to start AT from the next game. For example, the AT may be started from the game transferred to RT3, the next game to the game transferred to RT3, or the next game to the replay B group. In this case, it is preferable to at least activate the indication function to shift to RT3 even before starting the AT.
It is not known at the start of the 1BBA game whether the above example 4 or example 5 is, but since the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on at the start of the 1BBA game, even during the 1BBA game and after the end of the 1BB game It becomes possible to hear the player's expectation.

In the eighth embodiment, whether or not to execute AT (examples 1 to 5), and the initial game frequency of AT is before the start of 1BBA game (for example, when 1BBA is won) or the start of 1BBA game It may be determined by lottery or the like, or it may be determined whether to execute the AT based on the condition device won during the 1 BBA game. For example, when 1 BBA is won, it is determined to be Example 1, Example 2 or Example 4, and it is determined whether to change to Example 3 or Example 5 based on the condition device won during 1 BBA gaming. . In addition, for example, when “1 BBA + small combination E1” in the first embodiment is won, AT determination may be made (example 3 or example 5).
Furthermore, whether or not to execute the AT, or the AT's initial number of games may be determined based on the conditions satisfied in the 1BBA game. After deciding to execute the AT (in the case of Example 3 or Example 5), the number of AT games may be added based on the winning of the condition device during 1 BBA gaming or during AT.
Furthermore, when the start of 1BBA game is determined as in Example 4, when the extension condition of the advantageous section is satisfied during the 1BBA game, or during the continuous rendering period of 5 games after the end of the 1BBA game (for example, The case of winning the rare role may be changed to example 5 (execution of AT).

At the start of the 1BBA game, it is not necessary to determine whether to execute the AT after the end of the 1BBA game. In this case, it is determined whether or not to execute AT after the end of the 1BBA game, depending on whether the extension condition of the advantageous segment is satisfied during the 1BBA game.
When it is determined whether or not to execute the AT after the end of the 1BBA game during the 1BBA game, the end of the advantageous section is set at the end of the 1BBA game as shown in Example 2 of FIG. And, when it is decided to execute AT during the 1 BBA game, the end of the advantageous section is extended (changed), and the advantageous section is continued even after the end of the 1 BBA game, and the AT is executed.

The Ninth Embodiment
In the ninth embodiment, when starting the advantageous section based on the winning of the condition device including the special part (for example, 1BBA), it is determined when to start the advantageous section (timing to start the advantageous section). In particular, it is characterized in that the advantageous section is started from the game in which the winning special part has become winning possible.
In the ninth embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the conditional device including the winning of the special combination (1BBA) is won, and the advantageous section is started based on the decision to shift to the advantageous section. Here, in the first embodiment, when it is determined that the conditional device including the special part is to be shifted to the advantageous section, it is possible to bet and settle in the next game of the winning game. By the time it becomes, until the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on or the combination of symbols corresponding to the special combination is stopped (or bet can be made in the next game of the game in which the combination of symbols corresponding to the special combination is stopped) The advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on during the state and the state where the accountable state can be reached).

In addition, it is at the start of the next game (when the start switch 41 is operated) of the game won by the condition device including the special part, or at the first game start of the special game (for example, 1BBA game) to start the advantageous section When the start switch 41 was operated). Therefore, in the latter case, when the advantageous section is started based on the winning of the special part, the start timing is wide.
And, in the ninth embodiment, when the player wins a condition device including a special part and it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, the special section starts the advantageous section from the game where the winning is possible. Do.

Therefore, for example, to cite an example in the first embodiment, when it is possible to win 1BBA alone, it is possible to win 1BBA in the game, so the advantageous section is started from the game.
On the other hand, when the player wins "1 BBA + small winning combination E1", priority is given to the small winning combination of small winning combination E1 in the game, and it is impossible to stop the combination of symbols corresponding to 1 BBA. do not do. In particular, in the first embodiment, in the game in which “1 BBA + small combination E1” is won, since the small combination E1 is given priority over 1 BBA and the small combination E1 is “PB = 1”, 1BBA never wins. The 1BBA won in the game is carried over to the next game.

  Furthermore, when the player wins "1 BBA + small role D", priority is given to the winning of the small role D in the game, but the small role 35 (watermelon) corresponding to the small role D is "PB ≠ 1". Therefore, when the stop switch 42 is operated at a timing when the symbol ("watermelon") related to the small part 35 can not be stopped and when the symbol ("red 7") related to 1BBA can be stopped, the 1BBA It is possible to win a prize. For example, in FIG. 5, the middle stop switch 42 is operated at a timing at which the middle first stop is made and the third "red 7" can be stopped at the effective line.

However, when the stop switch 42 is operated at a position at which any symbol of 1BBA and the small winning combination 35 can be stopped, priority is given to stopping the symbol associated with the low winning combination 35. For example, it is a case where the right stop switch 42 is operated at a timing at which the first right stop is possible and any symbol of No. 2 “Red 7” and No. 5 “Watermelon” can be stopped on the effective line.
On the other hand, even if the left stop switch 42 is operated at a timing at which the 7th "red 7" can be stopped to the effective line at the first left stop, the 4th or 9th "watermelon" is stopped to the effective line No. 7 "Red 7" does not stop on the active line because it takes precedence.
For this reason, when the left stop switch 42 is operated at the above-mentioned timing, the stop control is executed so as not to stop the seventh "red 7" at the effective line. As a result, the game when the “1 BBA + small player D” is won in the first embodiment is set so as not to correspond to the “1 BBA can be won”. Of course, when the middle stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when the first stop in the middle and the third "red 7" can be stopped in the effective line, 1BBA can be won in the game, so "1BBA May be a game that can be won.

  In the case where it is determined that the special device is included in the condition device and it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, and the game does not fall under the special combination game, the lottery of the condition device in the next game is When it is not winning, the special part carrying over the winning can be won, so the advantageous section is started from the game. In the above example, when the start switch 41 is operated in the next game, a lottery for the conditional device is made and it becomes non-winning, so the start section 41 is operated and the advantageous section immediately after the lottery for the conditional device is performed. Start (at the same time or immediately before it, the advantageous zone display LED 77 lights up).

On the other hand, as a result of winning the small winning combination or replay in the next game, for example, and prioritizing the winning combination of the small winning combination or the replay winning in the relevant game, as a result of the game in which the special combination can not be won, the advantageous section is not started.
Also, for example, in a game carrying over the winning of a special part, in a game in which a small part of "PB 当選 1" is won, and when the small part can not be won, As with the above-mentioned "1 BBA + small player D" winning, the game does not start the advantageous section. Of course, in the game where the special part carrying over the winning can win, the advantageous section may be started in the game.

FIG. 67 is a view for explaining the flow of the game in the ninth embodiment. In the example of FIG. 67, an example is shown in which an “N” game is won as “1 BBA + small combination E1” and an “N + 3” game is played with 1 BBA.
First, when the player wins "1 BBA + small combination E1" in the "N" game, only the small combination E1 can be won in the game, and 1 BBA can not be won, so the advantageous section is not started in the game.

  Next, after the "N + 1" game, the 1 BBA win is carried over. The “N + 1” game shows an example in which Replay A is won. When Replay A is won, Replay 01 wins with “PB = 1”, and 1BBA carrying over the win can not be won, so the advantageous section is not started in the game.

  Next, in the “N + 2” game, an example is shown in which the player is not elected in the lottery of the combination by the combination lottery means 61. Therefore, in the game, the 1BBA carrying the winning can be won. Therefore, the advantageous section is started from the "N + 2" game. Here, at the start of the "N + 2" game, that is, the start switch 41 is operated, and as a result of the lottery of the condition device being performed, it is advantageous based on the fact that it is not won (1 BBA becomes possible to win). Since the section is started, the lighting start of the advantageous section display LED 77 is also when the start switch 41 is operated.

  The player who has won the 1BBA in the “N + 2” game can eliminate the consumption of useless number of games during the advantageous section. As described above, the player who has won the 1BBA in the "N + 2" game, can not perform the addition, etc. (including the lottery of whether or not to execute the AT in the eighth embodiment) in the internal middle game, It is not necessary to start the advantageous section. Also, as described above, the upper limit number of games (for example, 1500 games) is set for the advantageous section, and when the advantageous section starts in the internal middle game, the maximum advantageous that can be executed after the end of the 1BBA game The number of game runs on the section is reduced by the amount consumed in the internal game. For example, when playing 10 games in the internal game, 1 game in which 1BBA was won, and 16 games in 1BBA game, in the game after the end of 1BBA game, only 1473 games at most can be played in the advantageous section It can not be done.

  However, the player who has made 1BBA a prize in the “N + 2” game does not have the portion consumed in the internal game (0 game in the internal game, 1 game in the game having 1BBA, and 16 games in the 1BBA game) When the game is over, in the game after the end of the 1BBA game, up to 1483 games can also play in the advantageous section), so it is better than the player who could not win the 1BBA in the “N + 2” game. May be advantageous. On the other hand, the player who can not win the 1BBA in the "N + 2" game will continue the internal middle game while starting the advantageous section. The example of FIG. 67 shows an example in which 1BBA can not be won in the “N + 2” game.

  Furthermore, in the “N + 3” game, as in the “N + 2” game, an example is shown in which the winning of the role by the role lottery means 61 is not won. Therefore, in the game, the 1BBA carrying the winning can be won. And the example which was able to win 1BBA by the "N + 3" game eye is shown. Thus, the 1BBA game is started from the "N + 4" game.

Here, for example, if it is set to start the advantageous section from the start of the 1BBA game uniformly, the number of games fluctuates depending on the skill of the player's eye-pushing from the time of winning 1BBA to the prize (consumption of medals Although there is a difference in the number), there is no difference in the length of the advantageous section after the end of the 1BBA game.
On the other hand, by setting as in the ninth embodiment, the player's skill (if the special role has been noticed or not or if the special The number of games in the advantageous section, which is wasted, fluctuates depending on whether or not the user has been able to make a push to stop the combination of the corresponding symbols on the effective line.

For example, if it is possible to win the special part in the first game in which the special part can be won, after the start of the advantageous section, the advantageous section is not wasted in the internal middle game.
On the other hand, if it is not possible to win the special part due to a failure in eye catching or the like in the first game in which the special part can be won, the special part will be able to be won again after the next game. You have to wait until However, since the advantageous section starts from the first game in which the special part can be won, the advantageous section will be wasted in the meantime.
In this manner, it is possible to make the substantial number of games (the number of games after the end of the special game) of the advantageous section differ according to the skill of the player.

As a modification of the ninth embodiment, the following example may, for example, be mentioned.
(Modification 1)
When it is determined to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of the special part (or when shifted to the standby section), the number of games until transition to the advantageous section is determined by lottery or the like. Then, the game is transferred to the advantageous section, whichever is earlier, either when the game having digested the number of times of the game or the next game or the special game is started (the next game of the game in which the combination of symbols corresponding to the special part is stopped). .
(Modification 2)
When it is determined to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of the special part (or when shifted to the standby section), the number of games until transition to the advantageous section is determined by lottery or the like. Then, the game is transferred to the advantageous section in the game which has digested the number of times of the game or the next game, or the first game in which the winning special part becomes possible, whichever is earlier.

(Modification 3)
Even in the case where the winning special role starts the advantageous section from the first game in which winning is possible, the ending condition of the advantageous section may not be affected.
For example, it is assumed that, based on the winning of the special part, an advantageous segment in which 50 ATs are executed after the end of the special game is won. In this case, for the AT of 50 games after the end of the special game, 50 games are counted simultaneously with the start of the AT. Therefore, even if the winning special role starts the advantageous section from the first game in which winning is possible, the 50 AT games start counting simultaneously with the start of the AT after the end of the special game. On the other hand, the "1500" game, which is the upper limit of the advantageous section, is counted from the first game in which the winning special part becomes possible. By doing this, as the number of games in the advantageous section approaches 1500 games (as the addition of the number of AT games is performed, etc.), the player's skill is affected.

(Modification 4)
In the ninth embodiment, when the player wins a conditional device including a special part and it is determined to shift to the advantageous section, the special section starts the advantageous section from the game in which the winning is possible. The advantage zone may be started from the next game of the game in which the special part has become available for winning (the advantage zone display LED 77 lights up by the time the bet is possible and the account can be settled in the next game) ). By doing this, when the special part is awarded in the first game in which the special part can be won, the game in which the special part has been won is not counted as a game of the advantageous section, so a player with a skill is May be even more advantageous than a non-skilled player.

  In the ninth embodiment, a game winning a conditional device (for example, 1BBA + small role E1) including winning of a special part (1BBA), or a continuous effect (special part (for example, 3 games) from the next game) It may be an effect to ask whether or not 1BBA) has been won, and may be output to indicate that the special role (1BBA) has been won for the final game. Of course, a game that has won a special equipment (1BBA) winning condition is not included in the condition device (for example, small role E1), or from the next game to a series of effects (special role (1BBA)) over multiple games (for example, 3 games) It is an effect to show whether or not it is done, and it is necessary to output an effect indicating that the special role (1 BBA) has not been won in the final game.

  Then, when a continuous effect is being output (in particular, before the effect indicating that the special part (1BBA) is won is performed, for example, two games when the continuous effect is output from the next game to the third game) When the 1BBA can be won in the eyes (that is, the "N + 2" game), it is known that the player has won the 1BBA by turning on the advantageous section display LED 77 in the game. Therefore, instead of this continuous effect, an effect indicating that the player has won the 1BBA may be output. When it is the last game of the continuous effect, the continuous effect may be output as it is to the end, or instead of the continuous effect, an effect indicating that 1 BBA has been won may be output.

  Alternatively, during a plurality of games in which continuous effects are output, even if 1 BBA can be won, the advantageous section may not be started and the advantageous section display LED 77 may not be turned on. Specifically, a game that has been won by a condition device (for example, 1BBA + small role E1) including the winning of a special part (1BBA), or a predetermined number of times from the next game (the same number as the number of times of outputting the continuous effect or more) During the period, the special zone (1BBA) does not start the advantageous section even if it becomes possible to win (the advantageous zone display LED 77 is not lighted), but after the predetermined number of games, the special special (1BBA) can be won first From this point on, the advantageous section may be started (the advantageous section display LED 77 is also turned on).

Tenth Embodiment
In the tenth embodiment, when the AT is being executed (that is, during the advantageous section), the player wins 1BBA and shifts to the 1BBA game, and after the end of the 1BBA game, shifts from RT2 to RT3 (returns to AT) Sometimes, it is characterized in that it is possible to execute the addition of the AT game frequency (ie, the game frequency of the advantageous segment).
In the tenth embodiment, the RT transition diagram is similar to that of the first embodiment (FIG. 22).
Here, when AT is being executed at RT3 (for example, when it is decided to shift to an AT of 100 games (that is, an advantageous segment) when winning a small winning combination E1 and when AT is being executed), It is assumed that 1 BBA is won (either single BBA single winning or double winning of 1 BBA and minor player E1). If 1 BBA is won, if 1 BBA does not win in the game, it shifts to RT 4 (inside). Then, when 1 BBA wins, it shifts to 1 BBA in operation (1 BBA game). When 1 BBA in operation (1 BBA game) end condition is satisfied, it moves to non RT.

  When 1BBA game is over and it shifts to non-RT, restart AT from that point or AT preparation (for example, the game which moved to RT3, the next game of the game which moved to RT3, any of Replay B group The AT is resumed from the next game played if the game was won, so it is preferable to activate at least the instruction function to shift to RT3 even before starting the AT during AT preparation. Of course, it is an advantageous section during AT preparation. When it is set to start AT from that point in time, when the pattern figure is displayed in non-RT, it shifts to RT2. When one of the Replay B group is won in RT2, a pressing order for activating Replay 02 by operating the instruction function is displayed. When Replay 02 wins in RT2, it shifts to RT3. Then, continue the AT while maintaining RT3. In addition, when it sets during AT preparation until RT2, basically it transfers to RT3 and restarts AT.

  Here, on the basis of the transition from RT2 to RT3, it is possible to execute the addition of the number of AT games (that is, the advantageous section). This addition may be performed at all times, or it may be determined whether or not to be added by lottery. As a trigger for the addition, Replay B is won (that is, even if it does not shift from RT2 to RT3, it will be added. Of course, when AT preparation is under way, AT can be started from this point) (Preferred), Replay 02 winning, transition from RT2 to RT3.

  Further, in the tenth embodiment, it is possible to execute the addition based on the transition from RT2 to RT3 via a non-RT after the end of the 1BBA game. For this reason, 1 BBA winning, 1 BBA gaming execution, or non-RT stay is stored. For example, storing using a flag can be mentioned. And, when it moves from RT2 to RT3 (it may be when Replay B is won or Replay 02 is won), it is judged whether the flag is on or not and it is judged that it is on. As a condition, it is possible to execute addition of the number of AT games. Also, when the addition or the addition lottery is executed, the flag is turned off.

  In this manner, if it is determined whether or not the addition is possible using the flag, for example, a state in which only RT2 and RT3 are exchanged (simply misordering during execution of AT, and shifts to RT2, In the case of transitioning to RT3 again, since the flag is off, there is no additional when transitioning from RT2 to RT3.

In the above example, 1BBA is taken as an example, but even if it is a 1BBB, that is, when a conditional device including a special combination having a setting difference is won, it can be implemented if it is added as described above.
Similarly to the above, the 1 BBB winning, the execution of the 1 BBB game, or the stay of RT1 is stored in the flag. Then, after the end of the 1 BBB game, it moves from RT 1 to RT 2 and then moves to RT 3 (it may be when Replay B is won or Replay 02 is won) to be able to perform the addition . As a result, even when the player wins 1 BBB having a setting difference that should not be able to perform addition etc. during the winning or BB game (when transitioning to 1 BBB gaming), the player is expected to give an expectation of addition. Can.

Also, the addition may be executable based on the transition from non-RT or RT1 to RT2. For example, it may be possible to perform the addition based on winning of the small combination B group in non-RT or RT1 or display of the pattern pattern and transition from non-RT or RT1 to RT2.
As shown in FIG. 22, the transition to non-RT is also performed at the time of initialization of RWM 53, but since the above-described flag is turned off along with the initialization of RWM 53, transition from non-RT to RT2 and further from RT2 to RT3. Even then, the addition will not be executed. Moreover, if it is an ordinary section, the addition is never performed.
Further, when the player wins 1BBA or 1BBB during execution of AT and shifts to RT4 (inside), the number of AT games is not added at RT4.

Furthermore, in the tenth embodiment (the first embodiment), after the end of the 1BBA game, it shifts to non-RT, and after the end of the 1BBB game, it shifts to RT1. However, not only this but the following methods are also possible.
After the end of the 1 BBA game, and after the end of the 1 BBB game, it is shifted to RT 5 (newly added). Then, in RT5, a condition device which is a duplicate winning of a plurality of replays is drawn, and the condition device is won, and it is possible to shift from RT5 to RT3 based on a predetermined replay winning. Alternatively, it is possible to shift from RT5 to RT3 based on the display of the pattern pattern. Also, non-RT, RT2 and RT3 are set not to shift to RT5.
In this way, the transition from RT5 to RT3 (the winning of the condition device in RT5, the display of a predetermined replay, the winning in small group B in RT5, the pattern symbol is displayed On the basis of (RT5 or RT3), it is possible to execute addition of the number of ATs, and it is not necessary to provide the flag as described above.

Eleventh Embodiment
In the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 17, as a single winning combination of the small winning combination E1, the small winning combination E1 (number “250”) to shift to an advantageous interval when winning in the normal interval and the winning in the normal interval Also, a small combination E1 (number “750”) that does not shift to the advantageous section is provided.
On the other hand, in the eleventh embodiment, any small winning combination E1 also shifts to the advantageous section when it is won in the normal section. Here, in the eleventh embodiment, the small combination E1 of the numeral “250” is referred to as “small combination E1a”, and the small combination E1 of the numeral “750” is referred to as the “small combination E1 b”.
Furthermore, small part E2, 1BBA and small part E2 were deleted.
By doing this, in the game in which the small winning combination 36 has won, the transition from the next game to the advantageous section is invariably made (the advantageous section display LED 77 is lighted by then).

In addition, the advantageous section when winning a small winning combination E1b can be ended by executing the instruction function operation game only once (for example, it ends in five games after the instruction function operation game is executed once) in the advantageous section is there. Such an advantageous section may also be referred to as an AT gas omen among the AT omen.
On the other hand, the advantageous section when winning a small winning combination E1a is an advantageous section that executes AT after AT precursor, and the number of times of the game is after AT precursor (In addition, AT precursor has indicated function operation game once) It will be set to 50 games) which will end in 5 games after execution. It should be noted that the count of 50 games may be started immediately after anticipation of AT, may be started when transitioning to RT3 (or the next game thereof), and when Replay B is won (or the next game thereof) Or may be started with staying at RT 3 (or the next game). Furthermore, when the condition device having an advantageous operation mode (small combination B group, small combination C group, replay B group, or replay C group) is won during 50 games, the instruction function operation game is executed in principle.

  In addition, temporarily, it has the small combination E1 which moves to the advantageous section E1 (number “250”), the small combination E1 which does not shift to the advantageous area E (number “750”), and the small combination E2 which does not shift to the advantageous section When winning a small winning combination E1 (placement number "250") to shift to an advantageous segment, when shifting to an advantageous segment in which 50 ATs can be executed, from the game in which the small winning combination 36 is won or the next game As in the prior art, it is meaningless to output a continuous rendition to get the player's sense of expectation. This is because it can be determined whether or not to shift to the advantageous section by seeing whether or not the advantageous section display LED 77 is lighted. The eleventh embodiment is conceived to output a continuous rendition to capture the player's sense of expectation as in the prior art.

FIG. 68 is a time chart showing an advantageous section and the like at the time of winning the small winning combination E1b (example 1) and the small winning combination E1a (example 2) in the eleventh embodiment.
In the example 1 of FIG. 68, when the small winning combination E1 b is won, the advantageous section is started from the next game (the advantageous section display LED 77 is lighted). Then, wait until the small winning combination B is won. After the start of the advantageous section, in the game in which the first small winning combination B is won, the instruction function is activated to display an advantageous push order (execution of the instruction function operation game). From the next game of this instruction function operation game, a continuous effect is output (during the continuous effect, it is in the pre-emption of AT). Of course, continuous effects may be output from the instruction function operation game. In this example, the continuous effect executes 5 games. Then, in the fifth game, an effect of whether or not the advantageous section (AT) continues is output. At the time of winning the small winning combination E1b, since it is possible to end the advantageous section (AT precursor) in one indication function operation game, the advantageous section (AT precursor) is ended in the game in which the continuous effect is ended, and it shifts to the normal section .
In addition, when the small winning combination B is won among the 5 games in the continuous effect, the instruction function operation game may be executed, but the instruction function operation game is not executed in the present embodiment.

On the other hand, in Example 2 of FIG. 68, when the small winning combination E1a is won, the advantageous section is started (the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on), and the instruction function activation game is executed by the game winning the first small combination B group, The continuous effect (5 games) from the next game is output (the above is the same as when the small winning combination E1b is won). Then, when the small winning combination E1a is won, in the fifth game of the continuous effect, an effect that means to continue the advantageous section (AT) is output after that. And AT starts from the next game after the end of the continuous effect.
In addition, when the small winning combination B is won for five consecutive games, the instruction function activating game is not executed as at the small winning combination E1 b winning. Of course, when the player is to execute the instruction function activation game when the small combination B is further won among the 5 games in the continuous production after winning the small combination E1 b, after the small combination E1 a is won It is preferable to execute the instruction function operation game even when the small winning combination B is won among the five games in the continuous effect of. In this way, when the small combination E1b is won and when the small combination E1a is elected, the command function activation game is executed / not executed during the continuous rendition, but it is different accordingly. This is because it can be determined whether or not to continue the advantageous section (AT) after that.

Here, when the small winning combination E1a is won, it is determined to execute AT of 50 games. Instead of this, the advantageous section (AT without AT precursor) may be ended at the 50th game from the start of the advantageous section (the next game when the small winning combination E1a is won). Alternatively, after transition to the advantageous section, 50 games may be counted with the first indication function operation game as the first game (AT precursor up to the previous game of this game and start AT from this game).
In addition, 50 games may be counted from the next game of the game in which the winning combination (Replay B group including Replay 02) which can be shifted to a specific RT (for example, RT3 in FIG. 22) is won. In the case of 50 games from the next game winning a replay capable of transitioning to a specific RT, in the game winning a replay B group, the pushing order for shifting to a specific RT is notified. Furthermore, even if the player does not follow the notification in the game in which the Replay B group is won (even if Replay 02 is not displayed), the AT of 50 games will be executed from the next game. Become. As a result, it is possible to prevent an attack or the like that the player performs a stop operation so as not to intentionally shift to a specific RT.

  Furthermore, in the specification where the advantageous section is started from the next game of the game winning the small winning combination E1a, if the small winning combination E1a is won under the situation staying at the specific RT, the specific winning RT from the other RT A notification to maintain a specific RT when winning a winning combination (pattern combination 01 to 03 or a winning combination that can be displayed by Replay 03) that may shift to RT (for example, RT2 in FIG. 22) You may And, the start of the AT counting may be performed from the game in which the notification for maintaining the specific RT is given, or the predetermined game after the notification for maintaining the specific RT (may be the next game You may go from). By setting in this way, it is possible to reduce the number of games until it shifts to a specific RT again after shifting to another RT once, so it is advantageous in terms of the upper limit number of advantageous sections (1500 games). There are many opportunities to give a game.

In the above example, the winning combination of the small combination E1a and the small combination E1b is 5 games, but the present invention is not limited to this. The first command function operation game or its next game is an AT of 50 games It may be a game (1 game) that outputs an effect of whether or not to execute. Further, the number of AT games is not limited to 50, and may be determined by lottery or the like.
Furthermore, when the small winning combination E1b (setting number "750") is won, it is an advantageous section (AT after writing the AT leading warning) to execute 50 games AT after the AT warning, and when the small winning combination E1a (setting number "250") is winning, 1 It is good also as an advantageous section (AT precursor) which makes it possible to end by the instruction function operation game of time.

Furthermore, when the small winning combination E1a is won, the AT number of times of playing "m" is determined, and when the small winning combination E1a and the small winning combination E1 b are elected, the number of times of playing "n" until the first indication function operation game can be executed We decide by lottery. Then, when the number of times of game play "n" is determined, the instruction function is not activated even when the small winning combination B group is won until the number of times of game play "n" has elapsed. After the passage of the number of times of the game "n", the instruction function operation game is executed in the game when the first small winning combination B group is won.
Also, when the determined number of games "n" includes, for example, "n1" and "n2" (n1 <n2), and when the small winning combination E1a is won, the number of AT games determined is "m1" “N1” may be easily determined, and “n2” may be easily determined when the determined AT game frequency is “m2” which is larger than “m1”. In addition, "n1" may be easily determined even when the small winning combination E1b is won. Furthermore, when the small winning combination E1a is won, “n1” may be more easily determined when the small winning combination E1 b is won than when the determined AT game count is “m1”.
In this way, the longer the number of games “n” until the first command function activation game is executed after shifting to the advantageous section, the higher the possibility that the larger AT game frequency is determined, You can expect. Of course, as the number of times of game play "n" until the first indication function activation game is executed is shorter, the possibility that the number of times of game play of the larger AT is determined may be increased.

  In the eleventh embodiment, continuous effects are output from the next game when the first small winning combination B group is won. In this way, as in the prior art, the continuous effect is output from the next game of the game in which the player simply wins the small player E1a or the small player E1b (the continuous game is executed for 5 games). For the advantageous section (AT) when winning a small part E1a, the AT may be finished after 50 games (after the AT precursor ends in 5 games). Even if the advantageous section (AT precursor) at the time of winning E1b is to end in 5 games, if the instruction function activation game has not been executed at least once during 5 games, it is 5 games of continuous effect After that, although the effect which means not continuing the advantageous section (AT) is outputted, there is a possibility that the disadvantage that the advantageous section (AT precursor) does not end may occur.

  In addition, even if the advantageous section (AT precursor) when winning a small winning combination E1b is to end in a single command function operation game, if the command function operation game is always executed in the fifth game of the continuous effect There is a possibility that the advantageous section (AT precursor) will end in the third game of continuous effects, and the advantageous section (AT precursor) will not end even after the fifth game of continuous effects. Because there is Of course, even if the advantageous section (AT precursor) when winning a small winning combination E1b is to end in five games after one execution of the instruction function operation game, the instruction function operation game is always executed in the first game of continuous effect Since it is not always the case, there is a possibility that the advantageous section (AT precursor) will not end even after the fifth game of the continuous effect.

However, in the advantageous section (AT) when winning a small winning combination E1a, the AT ending of AT present (note that the AT presiding ends with one execution of the instruction function operation game) shall end with 50 games, When it is assumed that the advantageous section (AT precursor) when winning a small winning combination E1b is to end in one pointing function operation game, continuous effect is started from the game which started the advantageous section regardless of which one is won Continue to produce effects until the first small winning combination B is won, and when the first small winning combination B is won, activate the instruction function, and continue the advantageous section (AT in the game or the next game) Or not may be notified.
When this is done, the number of games until the first small winning combination B is won is indeterminate, so an effect image that means that the continuous effect used in the game in which the continuous effect is continued, and the advantageous section An effect image meaning not to continue the (AT) and an effect image meaning to continue the advantageous section (AT) may be prepared, and the continuous effect may be output.
In addition, when winning a small combination E1a (or a small combination E1b) during an advantageous section (for example, during continuous rendering) based on winning a small combination E1b, 50 AT after the AT. May be changed to carry out (continue the advantageous section).

FIG. 69 is a time chart showing Example 3 and Example 4 of the eleventh embodiment.
As described above, when the small winning combination E1 is won, the continuous effects are not output until the first small winning combination B group is won, but the continuous playing is output from the next game at the small winning combination B group winning.
On the other hand, Example 3 in FIG. 69 does not output continuous effects until the first small winning combination B is won at the small winning combination E1 etc., and from the next game when the small combination B winning This is an example in which continuous effects are not output, and an advantageous section is started when the AT of 30 games is executed from the next game when the small winning combination E1 is won. Of course, the ending condition of the advantageous section in the example 3 is not limited to this, and performs AT of 30 games (the number of times of game is free) after the AT omen (In addition, the AT omen may end in 5 games etc.) The other end conditions of the various advantageous sections described above may be applied. Of course, an advantageous section of different end conditions may be started when the small winning combination E1a is won and when the small winning combination E1b is won.

  Furthermore, when the small winning combination E1 is won, there may be times when the advantageous section is started and when the advantageous section is not started. In Example 3 of FIG. 69, after starting the advantageous section, the small winning combination B group is never won by the end condition of the advantageous section set first (for example, AT for 30 games is executed). Example. If the small winning combination B is won before reaching the end condition of the advantageous section, and the indication function activation game is executed, as shown by a two-dot chain line in Example 3 of FIG. When the end condition is reached (when 30 ATs are executed), the advantageous section is ended.

  On the other hand, when the termination condition of the advantageous section is reached, when the instruction function operation game has not been executed even once (for example, when the small combination B has never won), the small combination B is subsequently performed. A group will be won, and at least the advantageous section will be extended until the instruction function activation game is executed. Example 3 in FIG. 69 shows an example in which the advantageous section is extended, and then the instruction function operation game is executed (by winning the small winning combination B group), and the advantageous section is ended in the game. In Example 3, the advantageous section ends after less than 1,500 games from the start of the advantageous section.

On the other hand, Example 4 of FIG. 69 does not execute the instruction function operation game once (after never winning the small winning combination B group) since the start of the advantageous section, and 1500 which is the upper limit of the advantageous section It is an example which reached the game. In other words, although the end condition of the advantageous section was reached, when the advantageous section was extended, the upper limit was reached, or there was an increase in the advantageous section, etc., and the end condition of the advantageous section was not reached. This is an example of when it arrives.
Unlike the case of Example 3, in the rare case as in Example 4, the advantageous section is ended when the upper limit is reached, even if the instruction function operation game is not performed even once. This gives priority to "when the upper limit of the advantageous section (1500 games) is reached, end the advantageous section" rather than "during at least one command function operation game during the advantageous section". In order to Because, as in the case of Example 3, when the upper limit of the advantageous section is not reached, even if the advantageous section is extended, if the player plays a prize such as a small part E1 during that time, the advantageous section Although it is possible to carry out the addition etc. (as a matter of course, it is not necessary to carry out), as shown in Example 4, when the upper end of the advantageous section is reached, even if the advantageous section is extended, Since it is impossible for the player to take advantage of the addition of the advantageous section, etc., the regular section is advantageous for the player (If the player has won the role of rare during the regular section, a new advantageous section starts) Because there are

Twelfth Embodiment
In the twelfth embodiment, when the advantage section continues up to 1,500 games which is the upper limit (for example, when the small winning combination E1 etc. is won, and the addition etc. is performed during the started advantage section, it is determined to continue) Or, during the advantageous section, when it is determined that the game is continued by 1BB game etc., etc.), the ending effect is to be output, for example, from the 1450 game (when the upper limit is approached). The feature is (the point of outputting the ending effect is the same as that of the example 3 of FIG. 55 (third embodiment)). In addition, it is not limited to the 1450 game, and can be set variously, such as a 1400 game or a 1470 game.
The ending effect starts from the 1450 game and ends at the 1500 game. Here, the "ending effect" is, for example, a moving image, also referred to as a movie image, which is not divided for every single game (a moving image for which the image is not switched every unit game but for which a predetermined time is set). .

  By the way, the length of the ending effect is set so that even if the player plays the shortest game, it can be viewed to the end in just 50 games (a game in which the advantageous section ends). When it reaches the end, it repeats from the beginning or displays the last image as a still image. As described above, it is preferable that the ending effect is set to a length that can be seen until the end of the advantageous section even if the player plays at the shortest. At the end of the ending effect (at the end of the 1500th game), the total number of medals acquired in the advantageous section, the difference between the total number of medals acquired and the total number of medals inserted, and the total number of games (1500 games) indicate. Of course, the total number of medals acquired in the advantageous section (total number of acquired numbers), the difference between the total number of medals acquired and the total number of medals inserted (total number of acquired differences), the total number of games (1500 games), ending effect It may be displayed not as the last of, but as another effect to be output after that (such as an effect to be output during freeze which is executed at the end of the advantageous section (at the end of the 1500th game)) .

FIG. 70 is a time chart showing an example in which the ending effect is started from the 1450th game in the advantageous section, the ending effect is ended in the 1500th game, and the advantageous section is ended.
In FIG. 70, (a) shows an example in which 1BB (1BBA, 1BBB, etc. in the first embodiment) is won in the middle of the advantageous section and 1BB game is executed. In the example of (a), at the end of the 1BB game, the 1450 game in the advantageous section is not reached. In such a case, the execution of the 1BB game does not affect the end of the ending effect. Therefore, the ending effect is started from the 1450 game, and the ending effect is ended in the 1500 game (the ending effect is ended with the end of the advantageous section).

On the other hand, in FIG. 70, (b) shows an example in which the ending effect is started from the 1450th game in the advantageous section, and then 1BB is won in the 1490th game and the 1BB game is executed. And, an example is shown in which the end time of the 1BB game exceeds 1500 games which is the upper limit of the advantageous section.
Even in such a case, since there is no exception to the upper limit of the advantageous section, the advantageous section is ended after 1500 games (the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned off). By the way, when ending the advantageous section, it does not execute freezing. Therefore, the advantage section ends in the middle of the 1BB game, and the 1BB game continues even after the end of the advantage section (which is a normal section).

  In such a case, the ending effect in the present embodiment ends at the end of the 1BB game (not at the end of the advantageous section). This is because, as shown in (a), when the upper limit game number of the advantageous section is reached when 1BB is not in play, it is advantageous at the end of the ending effect or the effect output during the freeze at the end of the advantageous section It is necessary to display the total number of games played in the section, the total number of winning, etc. (in particular, the number of sets of AT executed in the advantageous segment, the total number of games played in AT, the total number of winning in AT, etc.). On the other hand, as shown in (b), when the upper limit game number of the advantageous section is reached during the 1BB game, the 1BB game is executed even after that (it is a normal section), and the ending effect is ended at this time. In this way, it is possible to execute freeze at the end of the ending effect or end the advantageous section, and to display the total number of games played in the advantageous section and the total number of obtained sheets by the effect output during the freeze, 1BB It is not preferable because it also hinders the game.

  In the first place, when ending 1BB game, freeze at the end of the effect in 1BB game, or at the end of 1BB game, and in the effect output during the freeze, the total number of games played in 1BB game and total In the case of (b) or the like, the winning number is displayed, and even when the upper limit game number of the advantageous segment is reached, the ending effect is not ended at this time, and the 1BB game is ended, The ending effect is to be ended, the freeze is executed at the end of the ending effect, or the end of the 1BB game, and in the effect outputted during the freeze, the total number of games played in the advantageous section, the total number of winning etc. It would be preferable to display the number of ATs executed in the advantageous section, the total number of games played in the AT, the total number of wins in the AT, etc.). .

  In addition, since 1BB gaming after reaching the upper limit game number of the advantageous section is 1BB game during the normal section, strictly the total number of games in the advantageous section, the total number of winning etc etc (especially, it was executed in the advantageous section If you want to display the number of AT sets, the total number of games played in AT, the total number of wins in AT, etc., the total number of games played and the total number of wins during the regular interval and 1BB game is not included. Although it is good, if it is not obliged to display strictly, it may be displayed including the total number of games played and the total number of winnings during (in the normal section and during 1BB game). The player's sense of satisfaction is more pronounced when it is displayed. For example, although the advantageous section can execute only up to 1,500 games, the display is more than 1,500 games, so there is a sense of satisfaction.

  Furthermore, during the 1BB game, when displaying the total number of games played and the total number of winnings in the 1BB game together with the ending effect, the total number of games played during the advantageous section, the total number obtained, etc. (especially, the advantageous segment When displaying the set number of AT executed in, the total number of games played in AT, the total number of wins in AT, etc., the display shows 1BB in game after reaching the upper limit number of games played in the advantageous section Also continue. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 55 (example 3) described above, when the ending effect is output, the total number of games played during 1BB and the total number obtained, the total number of games played during the advantageous section, the total number obtained, etc. If you do not display the number of ATs executed in the advantageous section, the total number of games played in the AT, the total number of wins in the AT, etc., during 1BB gaming after reaching the upper limit number of games played in the advantageous segment, Do not display.

In addition, the length of the ending effect is generally set to be seen until the end of the game by the end of the advantageous section even if the player plays the shortest game (if it goes to the end, it is after that) Repeating from the beginning, or displaying the last image as a still image) repeats the ending effect from the beginning even when the ending effect is output even after the end of the advantageous section as in the example of (b), or The last image of the ending effect is continuously displayed as a still image.
The ending effect is not to switch the image every unit game (divided into 1 game), but a moving image with a predetermined time, a moving image segmented into a predetermined number of games, a still image not segmented into 1 game, or It may be any of still images etc. divided into predetermined number of games.

13th Embodiment
In the thirteenth embodiment, the same RT transition as in FIG. 22 shown in the first embodiment is performed.
The thirteenth embodiment is characterized by the following points.
(1) The winning probability of the condition device (Replay B group, Replay C group, Small combination B group) related to the RT shift is made to have no setting difference.
(2) In RT2 which is shifted from non-RT or RT1, based on winning Replay B group, the advantageous section is added (enabled). On the other hand, when transitioning from RT3 to RT2, when transitioning from RT2 to RT3, the addition of the advantageous section is not executed.
(3) The winning probability of Replay A is set to have a setting difference.
(4) The winning probability of the small role D is set to have a setting difference.

  FIG. 71 is a diagram showing the numerical table (2) of the thirteenth embodiment and is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 18 of the first embodiment. In the first embodiment, the condition device for “small part D” is provided in FIG. 17, but in the present embodiment, since the small part D has a setting difference, the small part D is added to the table (2 Provided in Also in the thirteenth embodiment, a number table (1) similar to that shown in FIG. 17 shown in the first embodiment is provided (the number of small symbols D is not included).

  As in the first embodiment (FIG. 22), when transitioning from non-RT or RT1 to RT2, it is necessary to win the small winning combination B group and display the pattern symbol. Here, in order to display a pattern pattern, it is necessary to win a small winning combination B group. And when there is a setting difference in the winning probability of the small winning combination B group, the ease of transition from non-RT or RT1 to RT2 is different according to the setting value (the ease of transition from RT3 to RT2 is also different) ). Therefore, in the thirteenth embodiment, in the non-RT and RT1, the winning probability of the small winning combination B group does not have a setting difference. In the example shown in FIG. 71, the setting numbers of the small combination B1 to small combination B12 are set to “770” in common for all settings (not limited to this value). In addition, in order to make the appearance rate of each of the small roles B1 to B12 the same, all of the small roles B1 to B12 are the same.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 71, the Replay B group is drawn only at RT2, and the number of Replays B1 to B3 is “2800” common to all settings. Furthermore, the Replay C group is drawn only at RT3, and all of the Replays C1 to C3 have a prefix “12000” common to all settings. These points are the same as in the first embodiment.
Further, in the thirteenth embodiment, in RT2 shifted from non-RT or RT1, the addition of the advantageous section is executed at the time of replay B group winning (may be at the time of displaying replay 02 or at the time of transition from RT2 to RT3). In addition, the top of the advantageous section may always be topped, or it may be determined by lottery whether to top. In addition, the number of games to be added may also be a fixed number of predetermined games, or the number of games may be determined by lottery.

  Note that "over advantageous zone" can be replaced with "over AT" in all embodiments. For example, when the Replay B group is won in the AT2 (for example, when the AT's remaining game count is "5"), the special part is won, and the RT2 shifted from non-RT or RT1 after ending the special game is won, It is possible to execute an additional lottery to increase the number of remaining AT games, and to increase the number of remaining AT games (for example, to set the number of remaining AT games to "25") when the lottery is won.

It is similar to the tenth embodiment described above to execute the addition of the advantageous section at the time of the replay B-group winning in RT2 shifted from non-RT or RT1.
In the thirteenth embodiment, the Replay B group is a condition device that does not have a setting difference in the winning probability (number of places), so that it is possible to execute the addition of the advantageous section linked to the winning of the condition device. Thereby, it is possible to make the setting probability not have in the probability of the addition.
Further, as in the tenth embodiment, when the transition from RT3 to RT2 is made, in the RT2, even if it is elected to Replay B group (whether Replay 02 is displayed or RT2 to RT3) Do not carry over the advantageous section.
Furthermore, at RT2, when the Replay B group is won, RT2 is maintained or moves to RT3. Therefore, the replay B group is a condition device capable of transferring RT. Then, since the replay B group is a condition device having no setting difference in the winning probability, it is possible to make the setting probability not to have a setting difference (probability of transition) from RT2 to RT3.

  At RT3, when the Replay C group is won, RT3 is maintained or moves to RT2. Therefore, the replay C group is a condition device capable of transferring RT. Then, since the replay C group is a condition device having no setting difference in the winning probability, it is possible to make the setting probability of transition from RT3 to RT2 (ease of transition) not have a setting difference.

Similarly, when the small winning combination B is won in non-RT, RT1 or RT3 and the pattern symbol is displayed, it shifts to RT2. Therefore, the small role group B is a condition device capable of transferring RT. And since the small winning combination B group is a condition device which does not have a setting difference in the winning probability, it does not have a setting difference in the probability of shifting from non-RT, RT1 and RT3 to RT2 (ease of transition) can do.
In addition, since the small winning combination C group does not correspond to the condition device capable of transferring RT, it may have a setting difference or may not have a setting difference. In the example of FIG. 71, there is a setting difference.

As described above, the RT transition rate is not affected by the setting difference by not giving a setting difference to the winning probability in the condition device (the condition device related to the RT transition) in which RT can be transferred. can do.
However, RT4 (inside) transitioning based on the winning of the special part is excluded. For example, as shown in FIG. 71, the winning probability of “1 BBA + small combination E2”, 1 BBB, “1 BBB + small combination D” has a setting difference, but it shifts due to carrying over the winning of a special combination. ) Is an exception (may be affected by setting differences). This is because RT4 (inside) is shifted based on the winning of the special part, and is not shifted by the pushing order of the player, so the nature is different from that described above. Furthermore, RT4 (inside) is different in nature from the above because it is intended to stay only for a short period of time before winning 1BB. Also, RT4 (inside) can not determine the transition to the advantageous section even during the normal section originally, and can not perform the addition even during the advantageous section, so This is because there is no difference in setting between the transition probability and the addition probability.

Furthermore, in the thirteenth embodiment, the winning probability (number) of replay A has a setting difference. Note that Replay A has a different winning probability (number) for each RT. Since RT does not shift when Replay A is won, setting a setting difference does not affect the RT transition rate. As described above, the higher the winning probability of Replay A, the higher the probability of playing Replay. Therefore, when calculating the payout rate including the Replay, the higher the winning probability of Replay A, the higher the payout rate. Get higher.
Then, in the example of FIG. 71, the winning probability of Replay A is set higher in the setting 6 than in the setting 1. For this reason, since the setting 6 can make the non-winning probability (probability of losing) lower than the setting 1, it is possible to increase the payout rate accordingly.

  In the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 17, as a single winning combination of the small winning combination E1, the small winning combination E1 (number “250”) to shift to an advantageous interval when winning in the normal interval and the winning in the normal interval Also, a small combination E1 (number “750”) that does not shift to the advantageous section is provided. Temporarily, when winning a small combination E1 of the number "250", the advantageous section (50 counts of games may be started immediately when 50 ATs are executed, when it shifts to RT3 (or the next game) ) May be started, or may be started when Replay B is won (or the next game), or may be started with staying at RT 3 (or the next game)) It is defined that transition is to be made (Others, the end conditions of various advantageous sections described above may be applied). Even with the same 50-game AT, the one with a high probability of winning Replay A (low probability of non-winning) is more newly inserted than when the probability of winning Replay A is low (high probability of non-winning) Because there is no need to (consumer), the payout rate will be higher accordingly. As described above, even if there is no setting difference in the probability determined to shift to the advantageous section, the setting difference can be added to the pop-out rate in the advantageous section.

  Furthermore, in the first embodiment described above, as shown in FIG. 17, the small winning combination D is a condition device having no setting difference. On the other hand, in the thirteenth embodiment, the condition device has a setting difference. Further, although not shown in FIG. 71, the number of payouts when the small winning combination D is won and the small winning combination 35 (watermelon) is won is set to 15 (five in the first embodiment). Therefore, the small role D is a small portion having the maximum payout number among the small portions.

  In addition, since the small combination 35 related to the small combination D is “PB ≠ 1”, the small combination 35 can not be won without looking. For this reason, for example, when the small winning combination D is won, an effect may be output that indicates that the small winning combination D has been won, such as giving a green notification. Here, when the player of "PB ≠ 1" wins a condition device that can win a prize, outputting an effect that suggests the winning is not "activation of the instruction function". Although it is true that the small part 35 wins and does not win at the timing of the eye-pushing, the small part 35 is correct when the small part D is won, regardless of the non-election. If the stop switch 42 is operated at the operation timing, it is a role that can be made to win always. In this point, as in the case of the small combination B according to the present invention, it is different from the small combination in which the winning rate is different depending on the presence or absence of the operation of the instruction function. For example, in order to win the small winning combination 01 at the time of winning the small winning combination B1, if it is always operated by the left first, it is not possible to win the small winning combination 01 at the time of winning the small combination B5.

For example, when the left reel 31 is stopped, the left stop switch 42 is operated at the timing when the "watermelon" of No. 4, 9, or 14 in FIG. If the middle stop switch 42 is operated at the timing at which the 8th or 13th "watermelon" can stop at the effective line, (the right reel 31 may have any timing because "watermelon" is "PB = 1"), The small winnings 35 can always be won (without any notification).
In the invention of the present application, there is no role of "PB 以外 1" other than the small winning combination 35 (does not include the pressing order incorrect answering time at the small winning combination B group winning), so every game, stop at the above timing If the switch 42 is operated, the drop of the small role 35 does not occur.
As described above, the game when the small winning combination D is won does not fall under the “game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch” in the present invention.

Thereby, when the advantageous section is started, it is necessary to activate the indicating function at least once during the advantageous section upon winning of the condition device which is the maximum payout by the activation of the indicating function. The condition device for achieving the maximum payout according to the above is not the small combination D but the small combination B group.
Although not shown in FIG. 71, as in the first embodiment, a small winning combination E1 (two payout number) is provided as a condition device having no setting difference.

From the above, in the thirteenth embodiment,
Winning probability of small part D: With setting difference (15 pieces of payout number)
Winning probability of small winning combination B group: There is no setting difference (in pressing order correct answer, payout number 9)
Winning probability of the small winning combination E1: There is no difference in settings (two payouts)
And the size relationship of the number of payouts is
Small part D> Small part B group (during correct order)> Small part E1
It becomes.

  Temporarily, when it is made for the game when winning a small winning combination D to correspond to the "game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch" in the invention of the present application (a winning combination was made a small winning percentage different depending on the presence or absence of the instruction function In this case, the “conditional device that provides the maximum payout due to the operation of the instruction function” is not the small role B group but the small role D. In such a case, since the winning probability of the small winning combination D is low, it may occur frequently that the small winning combination D has not been won until the ending condition of the advantageous interval is satisfied (cannot be ended even though it is desired to end the advantageous interval). However, if the probability of winning the small role D is high (if it is higher than the probability of winning the small role B group), it is highly likely that the small role D has been double-picked with 1 BBB (the role of rare) (It is because most single player D's single winning won't be expected to be a double winning with 1 BBB).

For this reason, the number of payouts when the small winning combination D wins must be made smaller than the number of payouts when the small winning combination B is correctly pressed. Then, even if it is made to have the setting difference in the winning probability of the small role D, it does not become the change of the large withdrawal rate (The dropout rate greatly changes because the small combination with a large number of payouts has the setting difference Because it will However, if there is a setting difference in the winning probability of the small winning combination B group having a large number of payouts at the time of pressing order correctness, then the setting difference will occur in the ease of RT transition.
Therefore, in the thirteenth embodiment, the payout rate varies according to the setting value using the small winning combination D having a large number of payouts (the higher the setting rate, the higher the payout rate (the payout rate increases according to the setting value) V.) can be set, and RT transition can be made insusceptible to the setting difference.

In the thirteenth embodiment, the small part D is “PB ≠ 1”, but if “watermelon” is arranged as “PB = 1” for all the reels 31, for example, the player is It will be possible to win) regardless of workmanship.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 71, since the small winning combination D has a case in which the double winning combination with 1 BBB is made, the small winning combination 35 is more likely to appear as the high setting is set. be able to. Specifically, when the set value is set to “1”, the probability that 1 BBB is won at the appearance of the small winning combination 35 is “20/520” = “0.038 (approximately 3.8% When the set value is set to “6”, the probability that 1 BBB is won at the time of the appearance of the small bonus 35 is “25/625” = “0.040 (approximately 4.0% ). Therefore, when the small winnings 35 appear, the higher the setting value, the higher the possibility that 1 BBB has won, so providing the player with an element for estimating the setting value to increase the operation rate of the gaming machine. You can also.

  In addition, although it can be said to all the embodiments, in FIG. 17, FIG. 18 and FIG. 71, it is free to set the part marked “o” to “x” and it is “x”. It is free to set the point to “O” unless the condition device has no setting difference and won only in a specific RT (except during RT4, 1 BBA playing, 1 BB B playing), “X” It is free to make the part where it becomes “Δ” as long as the condition device has no setting difference.

Fourteenth Embodiment
In the fourteenth embodiment, after the start of the advantageous section, before the end of the advantageous section (before the end condition is reached), the condition for changing the end condition of the advantageous section (extension condition of the advantageous section) is satisfied Is characterized by extending the advantageous section.
For example, when the number of games (initial value) of the advantageous section is 30 games at the start of the advantageous section (for example, when the previous game was the winning of the small part D in the first embodiment), it is advantageous during the advantageous section When the extension condition of the section (for example, the winning of the small winning combination E1 in the first embodiment, etc.) is satisfied, the number of games is further added to extend the advantageous section. In the fourteenth embodiment, the termination condition of the advantageous section is set to 30 games, but in addition, the termination conditions of various advantageous sections described above may be applied.

FIG. 72 is a time chart explaining the fourteenth embodiment.
In the example 1 of FIG. 72, when the advantageous section is started, the instruction function activation game is executed in the game when the first small winning combination B group is won. And in Example 1, the game frequency of the advantageous section set initially is set to 30 games. In Example 1, the extension condition of the advantageous section is satisfied during the 30 games, and the number of times of the game is added by “50”. When the extension condition is not satisfied among the first 30 games of the advantageous section, the advantageous section ends at the 30th game, as indicated by a two-dot chain line in the figure. On the other hand, in Example 1, since the extension condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the number of games in the advantageous section is extended by 50 games.

  In this case, if at least one instruction function activation game is being executed at the end of the first 30 games, in the subsequent 50 games, even if it has never won the small winning combination B group, ie 1 The advantageous section can be ended without executing the command function operation game any time. This is because a single instruction function operation game is executed in a total of 80 games.

On the other hand, in FIG. 72, as in Example 1, in the example 2, the number of games played for the advantageous section initially set is 30 games, and during this 30 games, the extension condition for the advantageous section is satisfied and 50 games are extended. An example is shown.
And, in Example 2, in the first 30 games and 50 games extended (total 80 games), we have never won the small role B group (that is, no instruction function operation game has been executed even once) It is an example. In such a case, even if the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied (80 games are reached), the advantageous section is not ended.

In Example 2 of FIG. 72, when a small winning combination B is won among 50 extended games and an instruction function activation game is executed (two-dot chain line A in the drawing) is an advantageous section in the 50th extended game. Can be completed (in the figure, a two-dot chain line B).
On the other hand, when a total of 80 games, ie, the instruction function activation game has not been executed even once from the start of the advantageous section, it waits for the small combination B to win, and when the small combination B is elected, the indication function activation Run a game. Then, the advantageous section ends.

  In the example of FIG. 72, the number of games in the first advantageous section is set to 30 and the number of extended games is set to 50, however, in these advantageous sections, a Gasse AT precursor (for example, CZ or AT If the transition conditions are not satisfied, one that ends in 32 games (the number of games is free), or one that ends in one (the number of times is free) instruction function activation game, etc.), AT precursor (for example, transition conditions to AT) Even if not satisfied, after 32 games (the number of games is free) is 50 games (the number of games is free, and the start timing of counting the number of games may apply the various timings described above) etc.) , CZ (for example, if the conditions for transition to AT are not satisfied, the game ends in 10 games (the number of games is free), or one (the number of times is free) of the instruction function activated game, etc. A omen and All, it is easy to meet the transition conditions to AT, AT (If you do not meet the extension conditions, 30 games (the number of games is free, count timing of the number of games may start to apply various timings mentioned above) Can be provided in a variety of ways, such as

  For example, when transitioning to CZ (corresponding to “30” game in FIG. 72) at the start of the advantageous section and the transition condition to “AT” (corresponding to “extension condition”) is satisfied in this CZ, AT (“50 (Corresponding to the extension of the game) (to extend the termination condition of the advantageous section). On the other hand, when CZ does not satisfy the transition condition to AT, when the CZ end condition is satisfied, the advantageous section is ended, and the transition to the normal section (normal to CZ, AT, etc.) (example) Among them, a two-dot chain line) can be mentioned.

Furthermore, besides the above,
(1) Assuming that the first advantageous section is CZ (for example, one that ends with 30 games), and the extension condition of the advantageous section is satisfied during this CZ, the CZ with a longer number of games is added ("20" for the number of games is added) Change to).
(2) The first advantageous section is "an advantageous section (Gase AT precursor, or CZ) ending with a predetermined number of times (for example, once) command function operation game", and the advantageous section until the first command function operation game is executed CZ (a predetermined number of times of game play, or an instruction function activated game ends at a predetermined number of times) when an extension condition (CZ transition condition or AT transition condition, for example, winning of a small winning combination E1) is satisfied. Or change to AT (which ends in a predetermined number of games).
(3) The first advantageous section is "an advantageous section (gasse AT precursor or CZ) ending with a predetermined number of times (for example, once) command function operation game", and the advantageous section before the first command function operation game is executed When an extension condition (extension condition or CZ transition condition) of is satisfied, “a favorable section (Gasse AT precursor, or CZ) ending with a predetermined number of times or more (for example, three times) instructing function operation game” Change to
(4) The first advantageous section is an AT of 30 games, and when the extension condition of the advantageous section is satisfied during this AT, the AT is changed to an AT of 100 games (the number of games is increased by 70).
And the like.

In FIG. 72, when the first 30 games in the advantageous section are CZ, the instruction function activation game is executed only when the first small combination B group is won, and thereafter (30 games from the first game) is the small combination B group The player does not have to execute the instruction function operation game even if
On the other hand, two or more instruction function operation games may be executed during CZ (30 games).
In addition, even when the transition condition to AT is satisfied during CZ, if one instruction function operation game has already been executed during CZ, the subsequent AT does not execute the instruction function operation game May be In addition, it is the same as when the conditions for transition to CZ or AT are satisfied in the Gas AT precursor. That is, it is sufficient that one pointing function activation game should be executed between the start and the end of the advantageous section.

The fifteenth embodiment
The fifteenth embodiment is characterized in that freezing is performed and not performed when ending the advantageous section.
FIG. 73 is a time chart showing the relationship between the advantageous section and the freeze in the fifteenth embodiment.
In the fifteenth embodiment, when it is determined to execute the advantageous section (for example, when the small winning combination E1 is won), the beginning of the advantageous section starts CZ. When CZ meets the transition condition to AT, AT starts after CZ ends. Of course, it is not limited to this. Some start CZ as the beginning of the advantageous section, and some may start AT from the beginning.

In FIG. 73, in the first CZ (favorable section), the condition for transition to AT is not satisfied, and the advantageous section ends with CZ alone. The next CZ (advantage zone) is an example in which the transition condition to AT is satisfied, and after CZ, AT is executed to end the AT and the advantage zone. When the transition condition to AT is satisfied during CZ, CZ may be terminated immediately and AT may be executed, or may be waited until CZ is terminated and AT may be executed. It is not limited to the embodiment).
In addition, although not illustrated in FIG. 73, even in the case of ending only with CZ, since transition to the advantageous section is performed, it is necessary to execute at least one instruction function operation game.
In the fifteenth embodiment, the freeze is not performed (the two-dot chain line in the drawing) at the end of the first CZ (when the AT is not performed after the CZ ends and the advantageous section is ended). On the other hand, when transitioning from CZ to AT, freeze is executed at the end of AT (advantage zone).
In addition, at the time of freezing, at least the total number of AT games, the total number of winning, etc. are displayed as an image. Of course, the total number of games played in CZ and the total number of won may be displayed as an image, and when transitioning from CZ to AT via AT precursor, CZ and / or AT precursor may be displayed. An image may be displayed that includes the total number of games and the total number of winnings.

As described above, it is determined in advance in which advantageous sections the freeze is performed at the end and in which advantageous sections the freeze is performed at the end.
For example, as an expected value such as the total number of games played in the advantageous section and the total number of obtained sheets, the first end condition (for example, the end of the advantageous section only with CZ (Gasse AT precursor)) and the expected value rather than the first end condition When there is a large second end condition (for example, after CZ, when performing AT or when only AT is performed), freezing is not performed when the advantageous section ends with the first end condition, and the advantageous section When ending with the second end condition, it is possible to execute freezing. The reason is that the freeze is executed until the expected value such as the total number of games in the advantageous section or the total number of wins is small (for example, 10 games as the total number of games, 12 total wins, etc.) This is because there is a high possibility that the player's feeling of shame will be increased (the interest will be reduced) if the image display is made to display the total number of winnings and the like.
Even in the advantageous section, unlike AT, there are cases where the purpose is to give the player many medals (to increase the total number of winnings), such as the Gase AT precursor, AT precursor, CZ, etc. It is not preferable to execute freeze uniformly at the end of the advantageous section.

  Note that, for example, a freeze flag may be provided as a determination as to whether or not to perform the freeze. This freeze flag remains off only at the start of CZ but turns on when AT is executed. Then, at the end of the advantageous section, it is determined whether or not the freeze flag is on. If it is on, the freeze is executed. If the freeze is executed, the freeze flag is turned off. It should be noted that immediately before the end of the advantageous section, it is determined whether or not the freeze flag is on. If it is on, the freeze is executed, and when the advantageous section is ended, information on the advantageous section including the freeze flag It may be initialized.

By controlling in this manner, it is possible not to perform freezing at the end of the advantageous section which does not bring much merit to the player, for example, when the advantageous section is started but ended only by CZ.
In addition, information (“1” to “4”, etc.) specifying the type of advantageous section (CZ, Gasse AT precursor, AT precursor, AT, etc.), or “0” to “4” etc. For example, “0” is a normal section, “1” is CZ, “2” is a Gasse AT precursor, “3” is an AT precursor, and “4” is an AT etc.). Then, at the end of the advantageous section, or immediately before the end of the advantageous section, this information may be determined and the freezing may be performed.

  In addition, freezing is not limited to one time. For example, when the AT executes 50 games as one break, the freeze is executed every 50 games (for example, even if it is 100 games AT), while the freeze is being executed, the AT continues even after the next game It is possible to output an effect as to whether or not to. In addition, every 50 games, the total number of games played at that time and the total number of winnings can be displayed as an image, and an effect as if the advantageous section is over (it was an AT of 50 games) can be output.

In addition, when it reaches 1500 games which is the upper limit of the advantageous section while executing AT, it executes freezing, during that freezing, it displays the total game number in AT and the total number of acquisition etc etc as a picture .
In this case as well, if CZ or AT precursor is being executed before executing AT, even if the image including the total number of games played and the total number of winning cards in CZ and / or AT precursor is displayed as an image Good.
In addition, when CZ and AT prognostics are being executed, freeze is executed also when reaching 1500 games which is the upper limit of the advantageous section, and during the freeze, the advantageous section (a part of the advantageous section such as CZ) Alternatively, the total number of games played or the total number of winnings may be displayed as an image.

However, as shown in FIG. 70 (b), when reaching the upper limit of 1500 games, which is the upper limit of the advantageous section during 1BB operation (for example, 1BB is activated while AT is being executed, and 1BB is activated. When reaching 1500 games, etc., do not execute freeze at the time of 1500 games arrival (because 1BB game is in progress) and execute freeze at the end of 1BB game (during that freeze, the total number of games played during AT or The total number of winnings etc. will be displayed as an image.
In addition, when freeze is performed, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned off after the end of the freeze. Of course, prior to the execution of the freeze, the advantageous zone display LED 77 may be turned off, or during the freeze, the advantageous zone display LED 77 may be turned off. The timing of initialization is also the same as the turn-off timing of the advantageous section display LED 77.

Further, in FIG. 73, it is also possible to provide a condition device in which the advantageous section ends with CZ alone, and a condition device in which it is determined to execute both CZ and AT. For example, in FIG. 17 of the first embodiment, when the small winning combination E1 alone with the digit number “750” is elected, it is an advantageous section ending with only CZ. To be an advantageous section to carry out. By setting in this manner, it is possible to decide to execute the AT without performing a drawing of whether or not the transition condition to the AT is satisfied during the CZ.
Of course, even in this case, a lottery may be made during CZ to determine whether the transition condition to the AT is satisfied (it may be performed only in the case of an advantageous section ending with only CZ). In addition, it is also possible to output a continuous effect as to whether or not to execute the AT before several games in which CZ ends. And also in this case, whether or not to execute freezing is as described above.

As mentioned above, although 3rd-15th embodiment of this invention were described, it is not limited to the content mentioned above, For example, the following various modifications are possible.
(1) In the third embodiment (FIGS. 43 to 52), an example of information (command) transmitted from the main control board 50 to the sub control board 80 has been described. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. 50 may be any one as long as the sub control board 80 side transmits parameters (number of digested games, number of remaining games, number of added games, number of wins, number of command function activations, etc.) necessary for display during advantageous period (AT) .

(2) Also, in FIGS. 43 to 52, in order to manage the advantageous section (AT) by the number of games, parameters related to the number of games (AT counter value, additional counter value, upper limit counter value, etc.) are transmitted. If the upper limit of (AT) is managed by, for example, the number of winnings (for example, 3000), information of the number of winnings is transmitted every game.
In addition, every game, the main control board 50 transmits information indicating that it is in the advantageous section and information indicating that it is in AT, and counts the number of advantageous sections and the number of AT games on the sub control board 80 side. It is also possible to provide a counter and count the number of games on the sub control board 80 side.

(3) In FIGS. 47 to 49 of the third embodiment, lottery tables A and B are provided as lottery tables used in the additional lottery, and the lottery used according to whether or not the specified number is "1000" or more as the threshold. I switched the table. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and any number of lottery tables may be provided. Moreover, although the specified number "1000" was illustrated as a threshold value, it is not restricted to this.
For example, four types of lottery tables A>B>C> D are provided as lottery tables having different values of the expected value to be added. And, when the prescribed number (the number of AT games) is less than 500, the lottery table A is used, and when the prescribed number is 500 or more and less than 1000, the lottery table B is used, and the prescribed number is more than 1000 or more than 1300. Can use the lottery table C, and when the specified number is 1300 or more, the lottery table D can be used.

(4) As shown in Examples 1 to 3 of FIG. 55, when the total number of games in the advantageous section (AT) reaches the upper limit, it is specific when the total number of games in the advantageous section (AT) reaches the upper limit Although the information is displayed, it is not limited to these Examples 1 to 3.
a) A display that allows the player to identify that the total number of games played in the advantageous section (AT) has reached the upper limit b) A display different from the display before the total number of games played in the advantageous section (AT) has reached the upper limit What is necessary is just a thing, It is not limited to the display content of Example 1-3.

  (5) In addition, in the example 1 of FIG. 55, when the total game number of AT exceeds 1500 games due to the addition, the display of the digested game count and the remaining game count is not changed. Although the display font of the remaining game number is made different, the character size is made different, the display color is made different, etc., the information on the digested game number and the remaining game number is not changed, but the display mode is made different. Thus, the player may be notified that the total number of AT games has exceeded 1,500.

  (6) In Example 4 of FIG. 55, when the advantage section (AT) is a little left, a display such as "It will finish in 10 more games" is displayed, but at the start of the advantage section (AT) It is also possible to give advance notice such as “This advantageous section (AT) can not be played beyond 1500 games”.

  (7) In the fourth embodiment, the AT signal is transmitted as the external signal 2. However, for example, in the case of a slot machine of a specification in which the advantageous section and the AT do not match, the advantageous section and the AT can be distinguished. An external signal may be transmitted. For example, two external signals can be used to transmit external signals that can distinguish “non-advantage zone (non-AT)”, “advantage zone and non-AT”, and “advantage zone and AT”.

(8) In the fourth embodiment, the BB is won immediately before reaching the upper limit of the advantageous section, and the start time of BB gaming is at the upper limit of the advantageous section (1500 game from the start of the advantageous section) or immediately after reaching the upper limit (for example, advantageous) When it is the 1501 game from the start of the section), start BB game in the non advantageous section, turn on only the external signal 1 (BB) and turn off the external signal 2 (AT) (the advantageous section and AT) To finish).
In addition, when the end of the BB game is at the upper limit of the advantageous segment (1500 game from the start of the advantageous segment) or immediately before the upper limit is reached (for example, 1499 from the start of the advantageous segment), the external at the end of the BB game At the same time as turning off signal 1 (BB), turning off external signal 2 (AT) (terminating the advantageous section and AT) can be mentioned.

  (9) In the fifth embodiment, AT, CZ, precursor, and normal are exemplified as control states controlled by the main control board 50. For example, an additional specialization zone is shifted when a predetermined condition is satisfied during AT. It is also possible to provide This additional specialization zone is continued until, for example, the predetermined number of games are consumed, or the predetermined combination is won a predetermined number of times, and during that period, each time a condition device (for example, small combination B group) to be added is elected. There is a possibility to add the number of AT games.

(10) In the example of (a) in FIG. 61 in the fifth embodiment, after AT (state 1) ends, transition to the AT pullback period (state 2) is made, and in this state 2, when the AT can not be pulled back Transition to normal (state 3). Moreover, in the example of (b), it was made to shift to CZ after AT completion, and when it was not possible to pull back AT in this CZ, it was shifted to normal. Furthermore, in the example of (c), after completion of CZ, transition to the CZ withdrawal period is made, and when CZ can not be withdrawn during this CZ withdrawal period, transition is made to the normal.
However, the above state transition is an example and is not limited thereto.

For example, in FIG. 61 (a), after AT (state 1) ends, the process may shift to normal (state 3) without passing through the AT withdrawal period (state 2).
Further, in FIG. 61 (b), the transition may be made as normal → CZ → AT, or may be made transition as normal → precursor → AT. After the end of AT, the transition may be made from AT to normal, or from AT to precursor (CZ withdrawal period) to normal.
Furthermore, in FIG. 61 (c), the transition may be made from CZ to CZ without passing from a normal sign. Furthermore, it may be made to shift normally from CZ without going through a pullback period.

(11) In the eighth embodiment, although the output of the continuous effect is started near the end of the 1BBA game, for example, the output of the continuous effect is started simultaneously with the start of the 1BBA game, and the AT is kept all the time during the 1BBA game. You may continue to output an effect indicating whether to start or not.
In addition, the output of the continuous effect may be started from the start of the 1BBA game, and the effect of finally notifying whether to start the AT may be output in the first half of the 1BBA game. Alternatively, an effect may be provided in which the execution of the AT is determined when the effect is output during the continuous effect, and the effect may be output in the middle of the continuous effect.
In the eighth embodiment, the continuous effects are not necessarily necessary effects. Therefore, it is optional whether or not to output the continuous effect. Further, for example, it is also possible to output an effect of whether or not to continue the advantageous section, for only one game.

(12) In the ninth embodiment, when starting the advantageous section based on the winning of the condition device including the special part, for example, there may be a case where the instruction function is activated at the time of winning the small part B group in RT4 (inside). . When the instruction function is activated at RT4, the payout rate at RT4 exceeds "1". In such a case, it is necessary to start the advantageous section from the start of RT4 which is the next game of the game winning the special part.
On the other hand, when the instruction function is not activated even if it shifts to RT4, the advantageous section may be started by the start of the special game.

(13) In the third embodiment, when the upper limit value of the advantageous section approaches, the winning probability of the AT addition lottery in the main control board 50 is designed to be low, or the addition effect in the sub control board 80 is suppressed. By doing this, it is possible to make the player not as discouraged as possible even if the upper limit value of the advantageous section approaches.
As another method, there is also a method of preventing the player from being discouraged as much as possible by changing the execution probability of the freeze effect based on the number of executed games in the advantageous section and the like. For example, in FIG. 17, when winning a small combination E1 of storage number "250", the number of additional games is "50" (50%), "100" (40%), or "200" (10%) The setting is made so that the possibility of the freeze effect being executed increases as the number of times of the additional game increases.

In such a specification, when "200" is determined as the additional game number when the game number in the advantageous section is less than a predetermined value (for example, 1300), the freeze effect is performed with probability X (including 100%) When the number of games in the advantageous section is equal to or more than the predetermined value, the freeze effect is executed with a probability Y (including 0%) lower than the probability X when "200" is determined as the number of additional games.
By this configuration, when the upper limit of the advantageous section approaches, the execution probability of the freeze effect can be lowered, and the player can be prevented from being overwhelmed excessively by the freeze effect. That is, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged as much as possible when the freeze effect is performed.
(14) The embodiments described above are not limited to being implemented alone, and may be implemented by combining a plurality of embodiments as appropriate.

Sixteenth Embodiment
Subsequently, a sixteenth embodiment of the present invention will be described.
In the present embodiment, as the advantageous sections, "the advantageous section 1" and "the advantageous section 2" are provided. And if it wins to the advantageous section 1 (decided to shift), it shifts to the gaming state of the cassette which does not have the right to shift to ART, and if it wins to the advantageous section 2, it can shift to ART Move to ART after the aura.

Further, although the contents partially overlap with those of the first embodiment, the meanings of terms in the present embodiment are as follows.
The "conditional device" is a lottery object consisting of one or more winning combinations. If one condition device is won, the part included in the condition device is won.
The condition device relating to the special role (characters; bonus) is referred to as the “item condition device”, the condition device relating to the small role is referred to as the “winning condition device”, and the condition device relating to the replay is referred to as the “replay condition device” . Also, the winning condition device and the replay condition device are collectively referred to as "winning and replay condition device".

The "condition device number" is a number for identifying the condition device, and is determined for each condition device.
The number for identifying the item condition device is referred to as the "item condition device number", the number for identifying the prize condition device is referred to as the "winning condition device number", and the number for identifying the replay condition device is It is called "Replay condition device number". In addition, the winning condition device number and the replay condition device number are collectively referred to as "winning and replay condition device number".
The "winning number" is a number determined based on the random number value acquired from the random number generation means. One winning number is determined based on one random number value.

Further, as described in the first embodiment, the combination lottery means 61 is a means for performing a lottery (determination or selection) of the condition device (winning combination). Therefore, the role lottery means 61 is also referred to as a condition device lottery (determination or selection) means, a winning combination lottery (determination or selection) means, and the like.
Further, it is the same as the first embodiment that the combination lottery means 61 includes a random number generation means and a random number acquisition means for acquiring the random number generated by the random number generation means.
Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the role lottery means 61 is a condition device that determines the condition device number based on the winning number determining means that determines the winning number based on the random number value acquired by the random number acquiring means and the determined winning number. And a number determination means.

  The random number generation means generates a random number in a predetermined range (for example, “0” to “65535” in decimal). For example, it is possible to set a range of “0” to “65535” as one cycle, include a counter that counts one in 200 n (nano) sec, and use the count value of this counter as a random number. This counter continues to count random numbers while the slot machine 10 is powered on. This point is the same as the first embodiment.

The random number acquisition unit acquires the random number generated by the random number generation unit when the start switch 41 is operated (turned on) by the player. This point is the same as the first embodiment.
Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the start switch 41 is operated (turned on), the random number acquisition unit acquires (latches) the random number value from the above counter and stores (stores) it in the random number value register.
Here, the random value register is a register built in the main CPU 55, and from the program, it is not possible to write and is a register that can only be read.
Further, when the program reads the random number value stored in the random number value register, the random number value register is cleared.

The winning number determination means determines the winning number based on the random number value acquired by the random number acquisition means.
In the present embodiment, the winning number determination means corresponds to the processing of internal lottery 1 of FIG. 87 and lottery determination of FIG. 88 described later.
The conditional device number determining means determines the conditional device number based on the winning number determined by the winning number determining means.
In the present embodiment, the condition device number determination means corresponds to the process of the condition device number set 1 of FIG. 89 described later.

FIG. 74 (a) is a diagram showing a winning number definition (1) in the present embodiment. FIG. 75 (a) is a diagram showing the winning number definition (2) in the present embodiment, and is a diagram following FIG. 74 (a).
The winning number definition defines the correspondence between the winning number and the condition device number or the like.
As shown in FIG. 74 (b), “@NB_REP_A EQU 1; Replay A condition device number” indicates that “@NB_REP_A” indicates “Replay A condition device number”, and “Replay A condition device number” is “1. It means that the winning number corresponding to “@ NB_REP_A” is “1”.
Then, when the winning number is determined to be "1", the "Replay A condition device" is won alone. The winning numbers “2” to “9” are the same as the winning number “1”.

Also, as shown in FIG. 74 (c), “@NB_WIN_A EQU 10; small role A condition device number” indicates that “@NB_WIN_A” indicates “small role A condition device number”, “small role A condition device It means that the "number" is "10", and the winning number corresponding to "@ NB_WIN_A" is "10".
Then, when the winning number is determined to be “10”, it becomes a single winning of “small winning combination A condition device”. The winning numbers “11” to “30” are the same as the winning number “10”.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 75 (b), “@ BBA_WIN_E2 EQU 31; 1 BBA + small winning combination E2 double winning” indicates that “@ BBA_WIN_E2” indicates “1 BBA and small winning combination E2 double winning”, “@ BBA_WIN_E2 It means that the winning number corresponding to “is“ 31 ”.
Then, when the winning number is determined to be “31”, the “1 BBA condition device” and the “small winning combination E2 condition device” will be double winning.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 75 (c), “@BBB EQU 32; 1 BBB won alone” indicates that “@BBB” indicates “1 BBB alone won”, and the winning number corresponding to “@BBB” is “@ Means "32".
Then, when the winning number is determined to be "32", it becomes a single winning of "1 BBB condition device".

Also, as shown in FIG. 75 (d), "@BBA EQU 34; 1BBA single winning + additional" means that "@BBA" indicates "1BBA single winning and advantageous section topping", "@BBA" Means that the winning number corresponding to is "34".
Then, when the winning number is determined to be "34", it becomes a single winning of the "1 BBA condition device", and it is determined to add the number of games of the advantageous section.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 75 (e), "@ AT1_BBA_WD EQU 44; 1 BBA + small combination D winning combination + advantage section 1", "@ AT1_BBA_WD" is "1 BBA and small combination D double winning and advantageous section 1 Indicates that the winning number is "44", which corresponds to "@ AT1_BBA_WD".
Then, when the winning number is determined to be “44”, it is determined that “1 BBA condition device” and “small winning combination D condition device” will be double winning and transition to the advantageous section 1.

As shown in FIGS. 74 (a) and 75 (a), in the present embodiment, the winning numbers are determined from the "1" to the "52". Then, the winning number determination means determines any one of the numerical values "0" to "52" as the winning number.
Further, as shown in FIG. 74 (a), the winning numbers “1” to “9” correspond to the replay condition device numbers “1” to “9” respectively, and the winning numbers “10” to The “30” number corresponds to the winning condition device numbers “10” to “30”, respectively.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 75 (a), the winning numbers “31” to “33” correspond to the single winning of the item condition device or the double winning of the item condition device and the winning and replay condition device. Correspondingly, the winning numbers "34" to "42" correspond to the addition of the advantageous section, and the winning numbers "43" to "47" correspond to the transition to the advantageous section 1, and the winning number " The 48 th to the 52 th correspond to the transition to the advantageous section 2.

In the present embodiment, when the winning number is determined to be "34" to "42" during the advantageous section, the number of games in the advantageous section is added, but the present invention is not limited thereto. .
For example, when ART is being executed during the advantageous section, when the winning number is determined to be "34" to "42", it is possible to execute ART during the advantageous section uniformly or by lottery. The number may be increased.

Also, for example, in the case where a Gase game (a gaming state in which the advantageous segment display LED 77 is on but not having the right to shift to ART) is being executed during the advantageous segment, the winning number is “34” to When it is determined to be "42", the right to shift to ART may be granted uniformly or by lottery.
As described above, instead of adding the number of games in the advantageous section, the gaming state (performance of the advantageous section) in the advantageous section may be changed to be advantageous to the player.

The phrase "when the winning number is determined to be" 34 "to" 42 "means that the winning number is determined to be any of" 34 "to" 42 ".
Further, the number of games to be added to the number of games in the advantageous section, and the change contents of the gaming state (performance of the advantageous section) in the advantageous section can be appropriately set according to the type of the determined winning number.

FIG. 76 (a) is a diagram showing data definition for winning number conversion.
The winning number conversion data definition defines the definition of data used when determining the condition device number from the winning number.
As shown in FIG. 76 (b), “@NB_TRNS EQU @ BBA_WIN_E2; conversion start number” indicates that “@NB_TRNS” indicates “conversion start number”, and the value corresponding to “@NB_TRNS” is “@ BBA_WIN_E2”. Means to be.
As shown in FIG. 75 (a), “@ BBA_WIN_E2” = “31”.
Therefore, “@NB_TRNS” = “@ BBA_WIN_E2” = “31”.
Then, when the winning number determined by the winning number determination means is equal to or more than the "conversion start number", the condition number is determined from the winning number using the winning number conversion table.

Also, as shown in FIG. 76 (c), “@ NB_TRNS_AT EQU @ AT1_BBA; advantageous section conversion start number” corresponds to “@ NB_TRNS_AT” that “@ NB_TRNS_AT” indicates “advantageous section conversion start number”. It means that the value is "@ AT1_BBA".
As shown in FIG. 75 (a), “@ AT1_BBA” = “43”.
Therefore, “@NB_TRNS_AT” = “@ AT1_BBA” = “43”.
Then, when the winning number determined by the winning number determination means is equal to or more than the “favorable section conversion start number”, the winning section will be elected (determined to shift) to the advantageous section 1 or the advantageous section 2.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 76 (d), “@ NB_1 BBA EQU 1; 1 BBA condition device number” indicates that “@ NB_1 BBA” indicates “1 BBA condition device number”, and the value corresponding to “@ NB_1 BBA” is It means that it is "1". That is, it means that the "1 BBA condition device number" is "1".
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 76 (e), in "@ NB_AT1 EQU 1; advantageous section number 1", "@ NB_AT 1" indicates "advantageous section number 1", and the value corresponding to "@ NB_AT 1" is " It means that it is 1 ".

FIG. 77A shows a winning number conversion table.
The winning number conversion table is a table that defines data used when determining the condition device number from the winning number, and is stored in the ROM 54 of the main control board 50.
As shown in FIG. 77 (a), the winning number conversion table corresponds from the winning numbers determined when the winning numbers determined by the winning number determining means are “31” th to “52”. It is used when determining the condition device number and the advantageous section number.
Here, “DEFB” is a pseudo-instruction “assess an area of 1 byte (8 bits) in memory and store data there” in assembly language.
When a plurality of data are described by being separated by commas in the DEFB line, a plurality of 1-byte areas are secured in the address order in the memory, and each data divided by the comma is sequentially stored in each reserved area. It means to do.

  As shown in FIG. 77 (c), "DEFB @ NB_1 BBA, @ NB_WIN_E2, 0; winning number 31" stores "@ NB_1 BBA" at address ### 0 (for example, address 1600 (H)), address # It means that "@ NB_WIN_E2" is stored in ## 1 (for example, the address 1601 (H)) and "0" is stored in the address ### 2 (for example, the address 1602 (H)).

As shown in FIG. 76 (a), “@ NB_1 BBA” = “1”, and as shown in FIG. 74 (a), “@ NB_WIN_E2” = “28”.
Therefore, "1" is stored in the address ### 0, and "28" is stored in the address ### 1.

That is,
Address # # # 0 (address 1600 (H)) 1: Feature condition device number Address # # # 1 (address 1601 (H)) 28: prize and replay condition device number Address # # # # 2 (address 1602 (H)) 0) It becomes advantageous zone number.
Then, each data stored from the address ### 0 to the address ### 2 is used when the winning number is determined to be "31".

Also, as shown in FIG. 77 (d), "DEFB @ NB_1 BBB, 0, 0; winning number 32" stores "@ NB_1 BBB" at address #### 3 (for example, address 1603 (H)), It means that "0" is stored in ### 4 (for example, address 1604 (H)) and "0" is stored in address ### 5 (for example, address 1605 (H)).
As shown in FIG. 76 (a), “@ NB — 1 BBB” = “2”.
Therefore, "2" is stored in the address ### 3.

That is,
Address ### 3 (address 1603 (H)) 2: Feature condition device number Address # # # 4 (address 1604 (H)) 0: Prize winning and replay condition device number Address # # # # 5 (address 1605 (H)) 0) It becomes advantageous zone number.
Then, each data stored from address ### 3 to address ### 5 is used when the winning number is determined to be "32".

FIG. 78 (a) is a diagram showing data definition for winning number lottery.
The winning number lottery data definition defines the data to be used when determining the winning number from the random number value in the lottery determination.
The “winning number identifier” is an identifier indicating that the data includes winning number data.
The “winning number data” is data indicating a winning number determined in the lottery determination.

"@LT_NUM EQU 10000000B; winning number identifier" means that "@LT_NUM" indicates "winning number identifier" and that the data corresponding to "@LT_NUM" is "10000000 (B)".
Also, for “@BT_NUM EQU 7”, when the bit corresponding to the winning number identifier is “bit 7” and bit 7 is “1”, the winning number identifier is on and bit 7 is “0”. In some cases, it means that the winning number identifier is off.

The “repetition count identifier” is an identifier indicating that the data includes repetition count data.
The "repetition count data" is data indicating the number of repetitions of the process of the determination of success or failure in the lottery determination.
And "@LT_LOP EQU 01000000B; repetition number identifier" means that "@LT_LOP" indicates "repetition number identifier" and that the data corresponding to "@LT_LOP" is "01000000 (B)".
In “@BT_LOP EQU 6”, when the bit corresponding to the repetition number identifier is “bit 6”, when the bit 6 is “1”, the repetition number identifier is on, and when the bit 6 is “0” Means that the repetition count identifier is off.

The “setting value classified identifier” is an identifier indicating that probability data is defined for each setting value.
The “probability data” is data indicating the winning range among the entire range taken by the random number value.
Therefore, the winning probability = “probability data / total range taken by random value”.
For example, when the whole range taken by the random number is “65536” and the probability data is “125”, the winning probability is “125/65536”.
The probability data may also be referred to as a determination value, determination data, prefix, and prefix data.

And "@LT_RNK EQU 00100000B; identifier according to setting value" means that "@LT_RNK" indicates "identifier according to setting value" and that data corresponding to "@LT_RNK" is "00100000 (B)" Do.
In “@BT_LOP EQU 5”, when the bit corresponding to the set value identifier is “bit 5” and the bit 5 is “1”, the set value identifier is on and the bit 5 is “0”. In the case of, it means that the repetition number identifier is off.

The “2-byte data identifier” is an identifier indicating that the probability data is 2-byte data.
And "@LT_WRD EQU 00010000B; 2 byte data identifier" means that "@LT_WRD" is "2 byte data identifier" and that the data corresponding to "@LT_WRD" is "00010000 (B)" Do.
In “@BT_WRD EQU 4”, if the bit corresponding to the 2-byte data identifier is “bit 4” and bit 4 is “1”, the 2-byte data identifier is on and bit 4 is “0”. Indicates that the 2-byte data identifier is off.

The “1 byte data identifier” is an identifier indicating that the probability data is 1 byte data.
And "@LT_BYT EQU 00001000B; 1 byte data identifier" means that "@LT_BYT" is "1 byte data identifier" and that the data corresponding to "@LT_BYT" is "00001000 (B)" Do.
In “@BT_BYT EQU 3”, when the bit corresponding to 1-byte data identifier is “bit 3” and bit 3 is “1”, 1-byte data identifier is on and bit 3 is “0”. In the case of, it means that the 1-byte data identifier is off.

The “determination end identifier” is an identifier indicating that the lottery determination is to be ended.
Further, “@LT_END EQU 00H” means that “@LT_END” is a “determination end identifier” and that data corresponding to “@LT_END” is “00H”.

  FIG. 79 shows an all-RT common lottery table (1). FIG. 80 is a diagram showing the all RT common lottery table (2) and is a diagram following FIG. Furthermore, FIG. 81 is a diagram showing the all RT common lottery table (3) and is a diagram following FIG. Further, FIG. 82 (a) is a diagram showing the all RT common lottery table (4) and is a diagram following FIG.

FIG. 82 (b) is a diagram showing a non-RT lottery table. Furthermore, FIG. 82 (c) is a diagram showing an RT 1 o'clock lottery table. Further, FIG. 83 (a) is a diagram showing the RT 2 o'clock lottery table. FIG. 83 (b) is a diagram showing the RT 3 o'clock lottery table. Furthermore, FIG. 84 (a) is a diagram showing the RT 4 o'clock lottery table. Further, FIG. 84 (b) shows the 1 BBA lottery table. FIG. 85 is a diagram showing a 1 BBB lottery table.
These lottery tables are used in an internal lottery (a lottery for determining a winning number from random number values), and are stored in the ROM 54 of the main control board 50.

  Further, the all RT common lottery table is used in common among non-RT, RT1, RT2, RT3, and RT4. That is, the all RT common lottery table is a lottery table used when determining the winning number regardless of the RT state except when the 1BB (first class product continuous operation device; first class big bonus) is operated. Means Furthermore, the non-RT lottery table is used in the non-RT, the RT1 lottery table is used in the RT1, and the RT2 lottery table is used in the RT2, and the RT3 lottery is performed. The table is used at RT3 and the RT4 lottery table is used at RT4.

At the time of non-RT, first, lottery determination is performed using the all RT common lottery table. At this time, when the winning number is determined to be "00 (H)", next, a lottery determination is performed using the non-RT lottery table.
On the other hand, when the winning number is determined to a value other than “00 (H)” in the lottery determination using the all RT common lottery table, the internal lottery is ended without using the non-RT lottery table.
The details will be described later, but that the winning number is "00 (H)" in the lottery determination using the all RT common lottery table, the winning number is not determined in the lottery determination using the all RT common lottery table It means that
In addition, that the winning number is a value other than “00 (H)” in the lottery determination using the all RT common lottery table means that any winning number is determined in the lottery determination using the all RT common lottery table It means that.

At RT1, RT2, RT3 or RT4 as well as at the non-RT time, the lottery determination is first performed using the all RT common lottery table. At this time, when the winning number is determined to be "00 (H)", next, a lottery determination is performed using a lottery table according to RT.
On the other hand, when the winning number is determined to a value other than "00 (H)" in the lottery determination using the all RT common lottery table, the internal lottery ends without using the lottery table according to RT. .
Further, at 1 BBA, lottery determination is performed using a 1 BBA lottery table, and at 1 BBB, a lottery determination is performed using a 1 BBB lottery table.

“TBL_LOT_DAT1” in FIG. 79 indicates the all RT common lottery table.
In addition, when the all RT common lottery table is set as the lottery table, first, the "notice of 1BBA + small winning combination E2 condition device lottery data" is performed to determine the acceptance or rejection. At this time, when the player wins, the winning number is determined to “@ BBA_WIN_E2” (= “31”), and the lottery determination is finished.
On the other hand, if it becomes non-winning by "I BBA + data for lottery with small winning combination E 2 conditions device", then non-winning, next, I will perform the determination of yes or no using "data for 1 BBB condition device lottery".

In addition, the determination of the status is performed using “1 BBB condition device lottery data”, and at this time, when winning, the winning number is determined to “31 + 1” (= “32”), and the lottery determination is ended.
On the other hand, if it becomes non-winning by the determination of success or failure using the “1 BBB condition device lottery data”, next, the success / failure determination is performed using “1 BBB + small combination D condition device lottery data”.
When the winning number data is included as in "1 BBA + small winning combination E2 condition device lottery data", the winning number determination is performed using the winning number data.
Furthermore, as in “1 BBB condition device lottery data”, when the winning number data is not included, the current winning or not using the data obtained by adding “1” to the winning number data used in the previous determination of success or failure. Make a decision.

As described above, when the winning number data becomes a serial number, the data obtained by adding "1" to the winning number data used in the previous pass / fail judgment can be used for the current pass / fail judgment. Since it is not necessary to determine the winning number data, the use amount of the ROM 54 by the lottery table can be reduced.
In addition, when the winning number data does not become a serial number, the winning number data is determined in the lottery table, and the winning number data is not serial number by performing the qualification determination using the winning number data (for example, Or return), it is possible to obtain an appropriate lottery result.

The same applies to “1 BBB + small winning combination D condition device lottery data” and later as “1 BBA + small combination E2 condition device lottery data” and “1 BBB conditional device drawing data”.
And if it reaches to "determination end" without being determined to be won in the success / failure determination, the lottery determination using the all RT common lottery table is ended.

In addition, “DEFB @ LT_NUM OR @ BBA_WIN_E2; winning number identifier;; + winning number data” in FIG. 79 is data obtained by ORing “@LT_NUM” and “@ BBA_WIN_E2” as “1 BBA + small role It is shown that it is stored in the first line of the data for E2 condition device lottery.
Here, as shown in FIG. 78, “@LT_NUM” indicates a winning number identifier, and the value is “10000000 (B)”.
Also, as shown in FIG. 75 (a), “@ BBA_WIN_E2” indicates a winning number corresponding to 1BBA + small winning combination E2 double winning, and its value is “31” (“00011111 (B)” in binary). is there.

Furthermore, ORing “@LT_NUM” and “@ BBA_WIN_E2” gives
10000000 (B): @LT_NUM
00011111 (B): @ BBA_WIN_E2
10011111 (B): data after OR operation.
In other words, "DEFB @ LT_NUM OR @ BBA_WIN_E2" indicates that "10011111 (B)" is stored in a predetermined 1-byte storage area on the ROM 54.

Thus, the winning number identifier and the winning number data can be represented by one 8-bit data. In this case, of the 8-bit data, bit 0 to bit 6 indicate winning number data, and bit 7 indicates a winning number identifier.
Further, the comment “; winning number identifier;; + winning number data” indicates that the data includes the winning number identifier and the winning number data.
When bit 7 is "1", as in "10011111 (B)", it is determined that the winning number identifier is on, and it is determined that the data includes winning number data, and bit 0 Use bit 6 as the winning number data.

In addition, “DEFB @ LT_BYT OR @ LT_RNK; 1-byte data identifier;; + identifier according to setting value” in FIG. 79 represents “1 BBA It is shown that it is stored in the second line of the data for the small winning combination E2 condition device lottery.
Here, as shown in FIG. 78, “@LT_BYT” indicates a 1-byte data identifier, and the value thereof is “00001000 (B)”.
Also, “@LT_RNK” indicates an identifier according to setting value, and the value is “00100000 (B)”.

Furthermore, ORing “@LT_BYT” and “@LT_RNK” gives
00001000 (B): @LT_BYT
00100000 (B): @LT_RNK
00101000 (B): data after OR operation.

In other words, "DEFB @ LT_BYT OR @ LT_RNK" indicates that "00101000 (B)" is stored in a predetermined 1-byte storage area on the ROM 54.
Thus, the 1-byte data identifier and the set-value-based identifier can be represented by one 8-bit data.
Further, the comment “; 1-byte data identifier;; + identifier according to setting value” indicates that the data includes 1-byte data identifier and identifier according to setting value.

When the probability data is 1 byte, data with 1 byte data identifier turned on (bit 3 is set to “1”) is stored, and when the probability data is 2 bytes, 2 byte data identifier is turned on To store the data of which bit 4 is “1”.
As described above, data in which either one-byte data identifier or two-byte data identifier is turned on is stored, and data in which both one-byte data identifier and two-byte data identifier are turned on is not stored.
In addition, when probability data is determined for each setting value, data for which the identifier for each setting value is turned on (bit 5 is set to “1”) is stored, and probability data common to all setting values is determined. When the set value identifier is turned off (bit 5 is set to "0"), the data is stored.

As described above, when the probability data is different in setting 1 to setting 6, the probability data for each setting value is determined in the lottery table, and data in which the identifier for each setting value is turned on is stored. As a result, it is possible to perform the lottery of the winning number with different probability for each setting value.
When the probability data is common to setting 1 to setting 6, one probability data is defined in the lottery table, and data in which the identifier for each setting value is turned off is stored. As a result, since it is sufficient to set one probability data in the lottery table, the amount of use of the ROM 54 by the lottery table can be reduced.

Further, “DEFB 10; probability data (setting 1)” in FIG. 79 indicates that “10” (“00001010 (B)” in binary) is stored as probability data to be used in setting 1. It shows.
Although probability data is actually defined for each setting value of setting 1 to setting 6, in FIG. 79, probability data of setting 1 and setting 6 are representatively shown, and probabilities of setting 2 to setting 5 The illustration of the data is omitted. “:” In FIG. 79 means that illustration of probability data of setting 2 to setting 5 is omitted. The same applies to the lottery tables shown in FIG.

Then, based on which one-byte data identifier or two-byte data identifier is on, which one of the set value identifiers is on or off, and based on the set value when the set value identifier is on, The address of the probability data to be used is calculated (designated), and the probability data corresponding to the calculated (designated) address is used to make a yes / no decision.
The method of acquiring the probability data will be described later.

Here, in the present embodiment, the information related to the setting value is stored in a predetermined storage area (setting value data storage area “_NB_RANK”) of the RWM 53.
Further, as the information on the setting value, any one of “0” to “5” is stored in the setting value data storage area “_NB_RANK”.
When "0" is stored in the set value data storage area "_NB_RANK", "1" is displayed on the set value display LED 73, and "5" is stored in the set value data storage area "_NB_RANK". When set, the setting value display LED 73 displays "6".

That is, when “N” (N is an integer) is stored in the set value data storage area “_NB_RANK”, the main control board 50 controls the set value display LED 73 so that “N + 1” is displayed. Ru.
Therefore, the description about the set value such as the set value “1” and the set value “6” is a numerical value displayed on the set value display LED 73 and is not necessarily information stored in the set value data storage area “_NB_RANK”. There is no limit.
Of course, one of “1” to “6” may be stored in the setting value data storage area “_NB_RANK” as the information on the setting value.

Also, “DEFB @ LT_LOP OR 12; repetition number identifier ;; + repetition number data” in FIG. 81 ORs “@ LT_LOP” and “12 (D)” (“00001100 (B)” in binary)). It shows that the data obtained by the calculation is stored in the first line of "data for small winning combination B1 condition device lottery-data for small combination B12 conditional device drawing lottery".
Here, as shown in FIG. 78, “@LT_LOP” indicates a repetition number identifier, and its value is “01000000 (B)”.

In addition, OR operation of “@LT_LOP” and “12 (D)” (“00001100 (B)” in binary)
01000000 (B): @LT_LOP
00001100 (B): 12 (D)
01011000 (B): data after OR operation.
In other words, “DEFB @ LT_LOP OR 12” indicates that “01001100 (B)” is stored in a predetermined 1-byte storage area on the ROM 54.

Thereby, the repetition number identifier and the repetition number data can be represented by one 8-bit data. In this case, of 8-bit data, bit 0 to bit 5 indicate repetition count data, and bit 6 indicates a repetition count identifier.
Further, the comment “; repetition number identifier;; + repetition number data” indicates that the data includes the repetition number identifier and the repetition number data.
When bit 6 is “1” as in “01001100 (B)”, it is determined that the repetition count identifier is on, and it is determined that the data includes repetition count data, and bits 0 to Use bit 5 as the repeat count data.

FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the flow of the lottery process of the condition device number and the like.
In step S1001, the main CPU 55 continues to determine whether the start switch 41 has been operated in a state where a prescribed number of gaming media are bet (bet bet). When it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process proceeds to the next step S1002.
In step S1002, the main CPU 55 acquires (latches) the random number value from the random number generation means (counter), and stores (stores) the acquired random number value in the random number value register. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1003.
In the step S1003, the main CPU 55 controls the blocker 45 so that the medal insertion is not permitted. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1004.

At step S1004, the main CPU 55 executes the internal lottery 1 (FIG. 87). The internal lottery 1 is a process of determining a winning number from random number values. And if internal lottery 1 is performed, it will progress to following step S1005.
At step S1005, the main CPU 55 executes the conditional device number set 1 (FIG. 89). The conditional device number set 1 is a process of determining the conditional device number and the advantageous section number from the winning number. Then, when the conditional device number set 1 is executed, the process proceeds to the next step S1006.
In step S1006, rotation of all the reels 31 is started, and the player can stop the rotating reels 31 by operating the stop switch 42. Then, when the rotation of all the reels 31 is stopped, the process according to this flowchart is ended.

FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing the flow of the internal lottery 1 process.
Further, the internal lottery 1 is a process of determining a winning number from random number values. The processing of the internal lottery 1 of FIG. 87 and the lottery determination of FIG. 88 described later correspond to the winning number determination means.
In step S1011, the main CPU 55 stores the random number value stored in the random number value register in the DE register. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1012.

In step S1012, the main CPU 55 stores, in the HL register, the top address of the lottery table according to the operating state of the accessory (when 1BBA is activated, when 1BBB is activated, or when the accessory is not activated).
Specifically, at the time of 1 BBA operation, the top address of the 1 BBA lottery table (TBL_LOTDAT_1 BBA) shown in FIG. 84 (b) is stored in the HL register. That is, the address indicating the storage area of the data of "DEFB @ LT_NUM OR @ NB_REP_D" in FIG. 84 (b) is stored in the HL register.

In addition, at the time of 1 BBB operation, the top address of the 1 BBB lottery table (TBL_LOTDAT_1 BBB) shown in FIG. That is, the address indicating the storage area of the data of “DEFB @ LT_NUM OR @ NB_REP_D” in FIG. 85 is stored in the HL register.
Furthermore, when the item is inoperative, the top address of the all RT common lottery table (TBL_LOT_DAT1) shown in FIG. 79 to FIG. That is, the address indicating the storage area of the data of "DEFB @ LT_NUM OR @ BBA_WIN_E2" in FIG. 79 is stored in the HL register.

In the next step S1013, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the accessory is in operation.
Here, “_FL_ACTION” is a 1-byte storage area on the RWM 53 that stores a flag indicating the operation state of the item.
Further, when the value of a predetermined bit (for example, bit 2) of “_FL_ACTION” is “1”, it indicates that the bonus is in operation, and when it is “0”, it indicates that the bonus is not in operation.

Then, in step S1013, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not it is at the time of bonus product operation by determining whether or not the value of the predetermined bit of the storage area "_FL_ACTION" of the RWM 53 is "0".
Here, when the value of the predetermined bit of “_FL_ACTION” is “0”, the main CPU 55 determines that the accessory is not in operation (No), and proceeds to the next step S1014.
On the other hand, when the value of the predetermined bit of “_FL_ACTION” is “1”, the main CPU 55 determines that it is at the role operation time (Yes), skips steps S1014 to S1016, and proceeds to step S1017. move on.

In step S1014, the main CPU 55 executes lottery determination (FIG. 88) using the lottery table set in step S1012. Further, the lottery determination is a process of determining whether or not a winning is made using probability data. And if lottery determination is performed, it will progress to following step S1015.
In step S1015, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the player has won the lottery determination.
Here, at the end of the lottery determination, a value indicating the winning number is stored in the C register. Also, when the value stored in the C register is "00 (H)", it indicates that the player has not won the prize in the lottery determination, and the value stored in the C register is other than "00 (H)". When it is, it shows that it was elected by lottery determination.

Then, in step S1015, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the lottery determination has been won by determining whether the value stored in the C register is "00 (H)".
Here, when the value stored in the C register is "00 (H)", the main CPU 55 determines that the lottery determination did not win (No), and proceeds to the next step S1016.
On the other hand, when the value stored in the C register is other than "00 (H)", the main CPU 55 determines that the lottery determination is won (Yes), and skips steps S1016 and S1017. The processing according to this flowchart is ended.

In step S1016, the main CPU 55 stores the top address of the lottery table according to the RT state (non-RT, RT1, RT2, RT3, or RT4) in the HL register.
Specifically, at the non-RT time, the top address of the non-RT time lottery table (TBL_LOTDAT_RT0) shown in FIG. 82 (b) is stored in the HL register. That is, the address indicating the storage area of the data of "DEFB @ LT_NUM OR @ NB_REP_A" in FIG. 82 (b) is stored in the HL register.

Further, at the time of RT1, the top address of the RT 1 o'clock lottery table (TBL_LOTDAT_RT1) shown in FIG. 82 (c) is stored in the HL register. That is, the address indicating the storage area of the data of “DEFB @ LT_NUM OR @ NB_REP_A” in FIG. 82 (c) is stored in the HL register.
At RT2, RT3 and RT4 are the same as at non-RT and RT1.
When the top address of the lottery table according to the RT state is stored in the HL register, the process proceeds to the next step S1017.

In step S1017, the main CPU 55 executes lottery determination (FIG. 88) using the lottery table set in step S1012 or S1016.
Specifically, at the time of role operation, the lottery determination is performed using the lottery table set at step S1012, and at the time of role non-operation, when the lottery determination of step S1014 results in non-winning, at step S1016 A lottery determination is performed using the set lottery table. Then, the process according to this flowchart is ended.

In this manner, at the time of role non-operation (when "No" in step S1013), the lottery determination is performed at least once in step S1014, and the lottery determination is performed twice at maximum in steps S1014 and S1017. .
On the other hand, at the time of role operation (when "Yes" in step S1013), the lottery determination is performed only once in step S1017.

In addition, when the item is inoperative, in step S1014, the first lottery determination is performed using the all RT common lottery table. At this time, if it is not elected, then in step S1017, the lottery table according to RT. Make a second lottery decision using.
As described above, in any of the non-RT, RT1, RT2, RT3, and RT4, probability data is defined in the all RT common lottery table for the condition devices having the same winning probability. Thereby, since the lottery table can be made common, the usage of the ROM 54 by the lottery table can be reduced.

FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing a flow of lottery determination processing.
Further, the lottery determination is a process of determining whether or not a winning is made using probability data.
If it progresses to lottery determination of step S1014 or S1017, first, in step S1021, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the winning number identifier is on (which is data including the winning number identifier).
Here, at the start of the lottery determination process, the top address of the lottery table according to the operation state of the product is stored in the HL register (step S1012 in FIG. 87). For example, when the item is not in operation, the HL register stores an address indicating a storage area of data of "DEFB @ LT_NUM OR @ BBA_WIN_E2" in FIG.

Also, when bit 7 of the data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register is "1", it indicates that the winning number identifier is on, and when bit 7 is "0", the winning number identifier is off. Indicates that.
Then, in step S1021, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the bit 7 of the data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register is "1", whereby the winning number identifier is on (including the winning number identifier). It is judged whether it is data).

Here, when the bit 7 of the data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register is “1”, the main CPU 55 determines that the winning number identifier is on (Yes), and proceeds to the next step S1022.
On the other hand, when the bit 7 of the data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register is "0", the main CPU 55 determines that the winning number identifier is not on (No), and skips step S1022 and step It progresses to S1023.
When the determination in step S1021 is "No", the main CPU 55 maintains the value of the C register. The value stored in the C register at this time is, for example, the value updated in step S1028 described later. The value stored in the C register is determined as the winning number when it is determined that the winning (Yes) is made in step S1027 described later.

In step S1022, the main CPU 55 acquires winning number data from the lottery table.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 sets bit 7 of data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register to "0" and stores the bit 7 in the C register.

For example, the data of “DEFB @ LT_NUM OR @ BBA_WIN_E2” in FIG. 79 is “10011111 (B)”.
Also, among “10011111 (B)”, bit 0 to bit 6 indicate winning number data, and bit 7 indicates a winning number identifier.
Then, the main CPU 55 sets the bit 7 of “10011111 (B)” to “0”, and stores “00011111 (B)” as the winning number data in the C register.
After that, the main CPU 55 adds “1” to the value of the HL register to obtain a new value of the HL register. That is, the value of the HL register (the address of the data for lottery) is updated. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1023.

In step S1023, the main CPU 55 determines whether the repetition count identifier is on (data including the repetition count identifier).
Here, when bit 6 of the data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register is “1”, it indicates that the repetition number identifier is on, and when bit 6 is “0”, the repetition number identifier is off Indicates that there is.
Then, in step S1023, the main CPU 55 determines that the repetition count identifier is on by determining whether bit 6 of the data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register is “1” (including the repetition count identifier It is judged whether it is data).

Here, when the bit 6 of the data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register is “1”, the main CPU 55 determines that the repetition number identifier is on (Yes), and proceeds to the next step S1024.
On the other hand, when the bit 6 of the data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register is "0", the main CPU 55 determines that the repetition count identifier is not on (No), and skips step S1024, Go to S1025.
When "No" in the step S1023, the main CPU 55 sets "1" in the B register. At this time, “1” set in the B register indicates that the number of determinations of success (the number of repetitions) is one.

At step S1024, the main CPU 55 acquires repetition count data from the lottery table.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 sets bit 6 of data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register to "0" and stores the bit 6 in the B register.

For example, the data of “DEFB @ LT_LOP OR 12” in FIG. 81 is “01001100 (B)”.
Further, among “01001100 (B)”, bit 0 to bit 5 indicate repetition count data, and bit 6 indicates a repetition count identifier.
Then, the main CPU 55 sets bit 6 of “01001100 (B)” to “0”, and stores “00001100 (B)” in the B register as repetition count data. In other words, data indicating that it is repeated 12 times is stored in the B register.
Also, "0" is stored in the A register as an initial value.
After that, the main CPU 55 adds “1” to the value of the HL register to obtain a new value of the HL register. Thereby, the value of the HL register is an identifier (one-byte data identifier or two-byte data identifier) indicating how many bytes the probability data is, and an identifier indicating whether the probability data differs depending on the setting value (setting It indicates the address of the storage area in which the data including the identifier by value) is stored. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1025.

At step S1025, the main CPU 55 acquires probability data from the lottery table.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 first saves the value of the HL register and the value of the BC register in the stack area of the RWM 53.
Next, data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register is stored in the B register. Thereby, in the B register, an identifier (1-byte data identifier or 2-byte data identifier) indicating how many bytes the probability data is, and an identifier (setting value indicating whether the probability data differs according to the setting value Data including another identifier is stored.

Thereafter, “1” is added to the value of the HL register to obtain a new HL register value. As a result, the value of the HL register indicates the top address of the storage area in which the probability data is stored.
Thereafter, based on the data stored in the B register (data indicating whether the probability data is 1-byte data or 2-byte data, and whether the probability data differs depending on the set value), probability data The address of is calculated (designated), the probability data corresponding to the calculated (designated) address is acquired from the lottery table, and stored in the HL register or the A register. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1026.

Here, the method of acquiring the probability data will be described in more detail.
As described above, in the predetermined storage area (setting value data storage area “_NB_RANK”) of the RWM 53, any value of “0” to “5” is stored as information on the setting value.
Further, "0" is stored in the A register as an initial value.

Example 1) When the 1-byte data identifier is on and the set value identifier is off, add the value of register A ("0") to the value of register HL to obtain a new value of register HL. In this case, the value of the HL register is maintained (not changed). Then, the value of the HL register is used as an address of probability data, and probability data corresponding to this address is acquired from the lottery table.
When the probability data is 1 byte data, the acquired probability data is stored in the A register.

Example 2) When the 1-byte data identifier is ON and the identifier according to setting value is ON: Since the identifier according to setting value is ON, the value of the setting value data storage area "_NB_RANK" is stored in the A register. Thereby, “N” (N is a value corresponding to the set value; any value of “0” to “5”) is stored in the A register.
Thereafter, the value of the A register ("N") is added to the value of the HL register to obtain a new value of the HL register.

  Here, when “0” is stored in “_NB_RANK” (when the set value is “1”), the value of the HL register is maintained (unchanged). Thus, the value of the HL register indicates the address of the storage area in which the first probability data is stored. For example, in the case of data for 1BBA + small winning combination E2 condition device lottery in the all RT common lottery table (1) of FIG. 79, the address of “DEFB 10; probability data (setting 1)” will be shown.

In addition, when “5” is stored in “_NB_RANK” (when the set value is “6”), “5” is added to the value of the HL register. Thus, the value of the HL register indicates the address of the storage area in which the sixth probability data is stored. For example, in the case of data for 1BBA + small winning combination E2 condition device lottery in the all RT common lottery table (1) of FIG. 79, the address of “DEFB 20; probability data (setting 6)” will be shown.
Then, the value of the HL register is used as an address of probability data, and probability data corresponding to this address is acquired from the lottery table.
Storing the acquired probability data in the A register is the same as that of the first example.

Example 3) When the 2-byte data identifier is on and the set value identifier is off The value of the A register ("0") is added to the value of the HL register to obtain a new HL register value. Further, the value (“0”) of the A register is added to make a new HL register value. That is, it is repeated twice to add the value of the A register to the value of the HL register to obtain a new value of the HL register. In this case, the value of the HL register is maintained (not changed). Then, the value of the HL register is used as an address of probability data, and probability data corresponding to this address is acquired from the lottery table.
When the probability data is 2-byte data, the acquired probability data is stored in the HL register.

Example 4) When the 2-byte data identifier is ON and the identifier according to setting value is ON: Since the identifier according to setting value is ON, the value of the setting value data storage area "_NB_RANK" is stored in the A register. Thereby, “N” (N is a value corresponding to the set value; any value of “0” to “5”) is stored in the A register.
Furthermore, the value of the A register ("N") is added to the value of the HL register to obtain a new HL register value, and the value of the A register ("N") is further added thereto to obtain a new HL register And the value of That is, it is repeated twice to add the value of the A register ("N") to the value of the HL register to obtain a new value of the HL register.

  Here, when “0” is stored in “_NB_RANK” (when the set value is “1”), the value of the HL register is maintained (unchanged). Thus, the value of the HL register indicates the address of the storage area in which the first probability data is stored. For example, in the case of the data for the small winning combination A condition device lottery in the all RT common lottery table (3) of FIG. 81, the address of “DEFW 1000; probability data (setting 1)” is indicated.

In addition, when “5” is stored in “_NB_RANK” (when the set value is “6”), “10” is added to the value of the HL register. Thus, the value of the HL register indicates the address of the storage area in which the sixth probability data is stored. For example, in the case of the data for the small winning combination A condition device lottery in the all RT common lottery table (3) of FIG. 81, the address of “DEFW 1250; probability data (setting 6)” is indicated.
Then, the value of the HL register is used as an address of probability data, and probability data corresponding to this address is acquired from the lottery table.
Storing the acquired probability data in the HL register is the same as in the third example.

  As described above, the HL register stores the top address (the address of the first probability data) of the storage area in which the probability data is stored, and the HL register uses the value stored in the A register as the offset value. The probability data corresponding to the set value is obtained by adding to the value of.

Here, when the set value identifier is off, the initial value (“0”) stored in the A register is added as an offset value to the value of the HL register.
When the set value identifier is on, the value of the set value data storage area "_NB_RANK" is stored in the A register, and the value of the A register is added as the offset value to the value of the HL register.
As a result, since the processing can be commonized when the probability data is common to all the setting values and when it varies depending on the setting values, it is possible to reduce the usage of the ROM 54 by the program.

When the probability data is 1 byte data, the value of the A register is added once to the HL register, and when the probability data is 2 bytes data, the value of the A register is added twice to the HL register.
Thus, the process of calculating (designating) the address of the probability data can be simplified, so that the amount of use of the ROM 54 by the program can be reduced.

In step S1026, the main CPU 55 performs a pass / fail determination.
Here, when making a lottery determination using 2-byte data probability data and random number values, the main CPU 55 first subtracts the value of the HL register from the value of the DE register to obtain a new value of the DE register. .
When the lottery determination is performed using 1-byte data probability data and a random number value, the main CPU 55 first subtracts the value of the A register from the value of the DE register to obtain a new value of the DE register.
Thus, the value of the DE register is updated.
As described above, the random number is stored in the DE register (step S1011 in FIG. 87). Then, in step S1026, the probability data is subtracted from the value of the DE register to obtain a new value of the DE register.

Thereafter, the value of the HL register and the value of the BC register which were saved in the stack area of the RWM 53 are restored.
Thereby, the value of the HL register is an identifier (one-byte data identifier or two-byte data identifier) indicating how many bytes the probability data is, and an identifier indicating whether the probability data differs depending on the setting value (setting It indicates the address of the storage area in which the data including the identifier by value) is stored. Also, the value of the B register indicates the number of repetitions, and the value of the C register indicates the winning number.

In the next step S1027, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not a win is made.
Here, by subtracting the probability data from the value of the DE register, when the value of the DE register becomes smaller than “0” (when a borrow occurs), “1” is set to the carry flag of the flag register. That is, the carry flag is set. Also, "carry occurs" means that the carry flag is set to "1".
Then, in step S1027, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the winning is achieved by determining whether or not the carry flag is set to "1".

Here, when “1” is not set in the carry flag, the main CPU 55 determines that it has not won (No), and proceeds to the next step S1028.
On the other hand, when the carry flag is set to "1", the main CPU 55 determines that it is won (Yes), skips steps S1028 to S1033, and ends the processing of this flowchart.
In addition, the value stored in the C register when “Yes” in step S1027 indicates the winning number determined in the lottery determination.

At next step S1028, the main CPU 55 updates the winning number data.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 adds “1” to the value of the C register to obtain a new value of the C register. That is, the value of the C register is updated. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1029.
In step S1029, the main CPU 55 updates the repetition count data.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 subtracts “1” from the value of the B register to obtain a new value of the B register. That is, the value of the B register is updated. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1030.

In step S1030, the main CPU 55 determines whether the number of repetitions has ended.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 determines whether the value of the B register is “0”.
Here, when the value of the B register is “0”, it indicates that the number of repetitions has ended, and when the value of the B register is not “0” (larger than “0”), the number of repetitions has ended. Indicates no
Then, in step S1030, the main CPU 55 determines whether the number of repetitions has ended by determining whether the value of the B register is “0”.

Here, when the value of the B register is “0”, the main CPU 55 determines that the number of repetitions has ended (Yes), and proceeds to the next step S1031.
On the other hand, when the value of the B register is not “0”, the main CPU 55 determines that the number of repetitions has not ended (No), and returns to step S1025.

In addition, in the case of “No” in step S1030, in order to maintain the value of the HL register, the propriety determination of step S1026 is performed again using the same probability data as the previous time.
As described above, since it is determined to use the same probability data as the previous one repeatedly, it is not necessary to repeatedly determine the same probability data in the lottery table, so that the amount of use of the ROM 54 by the lottery table can be reduced.

In step S1031, the main CPU 55 sets the address of the next lottery data.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 updates the value of the HL register according to the following example 1) to example 4).
Example 1) When the 1-byte data identifier is on and the set-value-based identifier is off: Add 1 + 1 (= "2") to the value of the HL register to obtain a new value of the HL register.

Example 2) When the 1-byte data identifier is on and the identifier according to setting value is on, "6 + 1" (= "7") is added to the value of the HL register to obtain a new value of the HL register.
Example 3) When the 2-byte data identifier is on and the identifier according to setting value is off, add “1 × 2 + 1” (= “3”) to the value of the HL register, and add the value of the new HL register Do.
Example 4) When the 2-byte data identifier is on and the identifier according to set value is on, add “6 × 2 + 1” (= “13”) to the value of the HL register, and add the value of the new HL register Do.

As described above, in step S1026, the value of the HL register saved in the stack area of the RWM 53 is restored.
Therefore, at the time of proceeding to step S1031, whether the value of the HL register is an identifier (1-byte data identifier or 2-byte data identifier) indicating how many bytes the probability data is, and whether the probability data differs according to the setting value It indicates the address of the storage area in which the data including the identifier (the identifier according to setting value) indicating whether or not it is stored.

Then, when the 1-byte data identifier is on and the identifier according to set value is off, the data for lottery (for example, data for 1BBA condition device lottery in all RT common lottery table (1) in FIG. 79) The number of bytes of probability data is 1 byte.
Therefore, by adding “2” to the value of the HL register, the value of the new HL register is the next lottery data (for example, 1 BBA + small winning combination D condition device in the all RT common lottery table (1) of FIG. 79). This indicates the start address (for example, the address of the storage area where the data of "DEFB @ LT_BYT; 1 byte data identifier" is stored) of the storage area of the lottery data).

Further, when the 1-byte data identifier is on and the identifier according to set value is on, the data for lottery (for example, for 1BBA + small winning combination E2 condition device lottery in all RT common lottery table (1) in FIG. 79) The number of bytes of probability data in the data) is 6 bytes.
Therefore, by adding "7" to the value of the HL register, the value of the new HL register is the next lottery data (for example, the data for the 1 BBB condition device lottery in the all RT common lottery table (1) of FIG. 79). This indicates the start address of the storage area of) (for example, the address of the storage area where data of "DEFB @ LT_BYT OR @ LT_RNK; 1-byte data identifier ;; + identifier according to setting value" is stored).

Furthermore, when the 2-byte data identifier is on and the set value identifier is off, the lottery data (for example, for the small winning combination D condition device lottery in the all RT common lottery table (1) of FIG. 79) The number of bytes of probability data in the data) is 2 bytes.
Therefore, by adding "3" to the value of the HL register, the value of the new HL register is the next lottery data (for example, the small winning combination E1 condition device lottery in the all RT common lottery table (1) of FIG. 79). This indicates the start address (for example, the address of the storage area where the data of “DEFB @ LT_WRD; 2-byte data identifier” is stored) of the storage area of

Furthermore, when the 2-byte data identifier is on and the identifier for each setting value is on, the data for the lottery (for example, the data for the small winning combination A condition device lottery in the all RT common lottery table (3) of FIG. The number of bytes of probability data in) is 12 bytes.
Therefore, by adding "13" to the value of the HL register, the value of the new HL register is the next lottery data (for example, the small winning combination B1 to small winning combination in the all RT common lottery table (3) of FIG. 81). B12 indicates the start address (for example, the address of the storage area where the data of “DEFB @ LT_LOP OR 12; repetition number identifier” is stored) of the storage area of the B12 conditional device lottery data).

In the next step S1032, the main CPU 55 determines whether the data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register is a determination end identifier (“00 (H)”).
Here, when the data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register is “00 (H)”, the main CPU 55 determines that it is the determination end identifier (Yes), and proceeds to the next step S1033.
On the other hand, when the data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register is not "00 (H)", the main CPU 55 determines that it is not the determination end identifier (No), and returns to step S1021.

At the next step S1033, the main CPU 55 sets non-winning data.
Here, when the process proceeds to step S1033, the data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register is “00 (H)” (determination end identifier). Then, in step S1033, the main CPU 55 stores “00 (H)”, which is data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register, in the C register as non-winning data. Then, the process according to this flowchart is ended.

Further, the value stored in the C register at the end of the flow chart (lottery determination) indicates the winning number determined by the lottery determination.
When the process proceeds to step S1033, the value stored in the C register at the end of the flowchart is “00 (H)”. In this case, it is not won (no condition device is won).

Thus, when the data of the determination end identifier indicating the end of the lottery determination process is set to "00 (H)", when any condition device is not won in the lottery determination process, the non-election is achieved. The winning number “0” indicating “loss” is stored in the C register, and this flowchart ends. The winning number less than "31" corresponds to the winning and replay condition device number.
In other words, the winning number indicating non-winning can be stored in the C register by acquiring the data of the determination end identifier without newly setting a winning number indicating non-winning.
On the other hand, when “Yes” is determined in step S1027, the value stored in the C register at the end of the flowchart is other than “00 (H)”. In this case, one of the condition devices is won (decided to a winning number other than “0”).

  Here, for example, a lottery result (also referred to as pushing order small part) or the like in which the degree of advantage (the number of payouts) differs depending on the operation mode (pushing order) of the stop switch 42 like the small winning combination B1 condition device to the small winning combination B12 condition device As for the Replay B1 condition device to Replay B3 condition device, for the lottery result accompanied by RT transition by the operation mode of the stop switch 42, the advantage degree and the ratio of RT transition are not biased by the operation mode of the stop switch 42 It is preferable to do so. That is, it is preferable not to give a bias to the frequency of appearance of correct answers by pushing order.

For this reason, it is preferable to define the same probability data so that advantageous operation modes corresponding to the type of lottery result (conditional apparatus) become equal in each operation mode. That is, it is preferable to define the same probability data so that the frequency of appearance of correct answers becomes uniform in each push order.
In such a case, the number of repetitions is determined, and the same probability data is repeatedly used to perform lottery determination, thereby reducing the amount of use of the ROM 54 by the lottery table and equalizing the appearance frequency of correct answers in each push order Because it is possible, it is possible to exert a greater effect.

Furthermore, as described in step S1028, the process of updating the winning number data is in the lottery determination process, and therefore it is not necessary to store the winning number data in the lottery table.
Then, by determining the winning number using the number of repetitions and the same probability data, the relevant condition device (for example, small combination B1 condition device to small combination B12 condition device, replay B1 condition device to replay B3 condition For the device), the consecutive winning numbers (from small B1 condition device to small B12 condition device are “12” to “22”, from Replay B1 condition device to Replay B3 condition device is 2 number You can get "4" from the turn.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the winning number less than “31” corresponds to the winning and replay condition device number.
In addition, at least in the normal section, the winning and replay condition device number is not transmitted to the sub control board 80, but is transmitted as the effect group number.
In such a case, consecutive winning numbers (for example, “12” to “22”) can be obtained for the related condition devices (for example, the low winning combination of B1 to the low winning combination of B12). By doing this, when executing the process of converting the winning number into the effect group number, the effect group number can be determined by determining to which range the acquired winning number belongs.
For this reason, since it is not necessary to have a table for determining which effect group number the acquired winning number is, it is possible to further reduce the amount of use of the ROM 54.

FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing a process flow of the conditional device number set 1.
Condition device number set 1 is a process of determining the condition device number and the advantageous section number from the winning number. The processing of the condition device number set 1 corresponds to the condition device number determination means.
If it progresses to condition apparatus number set 1 of step S1005, first, in step S1041, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the winning number determined by the internal lottery 1 and the lottery determination is smaller than the conversion start number.

Here, at the start of the processing of the condition device number set 1, a value indicating the winning number determined by the internal lottery 1 and the lottery determination is stored in the C register.
In step S1041, the main CPU 55 first stores the value of the C register (winning number) in the A register, and then subtracts "@NB_TRNS" from the value of the A register. As shown in FIG. 76 (a), "@NB_TRNS" indicates a conversion start number, and the value is "@ BBA_WIN_E2". Further, as shown in FIG. 75 (a), “@ BBA_WIN_E2” indicates the double winning of 1BBA and the small winning combination E2, and the value is “31”. Therefore, “@NB_TRNS” = “31”.

Then, the main CPU 55 subtracts “31” from the value of the A register, and when a carry is generated by the subtraction, the main CPU 55 determines that the winning number is smaller than the conversion start number (Yes) and skips steps S1042 to S1046. Proceed to step S1047.
On the other hand, when the carry is not generated by the subtraction, the main CPU 55 determines that the winning number is equal to or more than the conversion start number (No), and proceeds to the next step S1042.
In step S1041, although "31" is subtracted from the value of the A register (winning number) to determine whether or not a carry has occurred, the value of the A register is maintained without being updated even if the subtraction is performed. That is, even after subtraction, the value of the A register indicates the "winning number".

In step S1042, the main CPU 55 acquires the condition device number and the advantageous section number from the winning number.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 first stores the calculation result of “TBL_CNDNO_DAT” − “@ NB_TRNS” × 3 in the HL register.
Here, "TBL_CNDNO_DAT" indicates the start address of the winning number conversion table (FIG. 77 (a)).
For example, assume that “TBL_CNDNO_DAT” = “1600 (H)”.
Also, as described above, “@ NB_TRNS” = “31”.
In this case, the value of the HL register is
"1600 (H)"-"31 (D)" x 3
= "1600 (H)"-"5 D (H)"
= "15A3 (H)"
It becomes.

Next, the main CPU 55 repeats the process of adding the value of the A register to the value of the HL register to obtain a new value of the HL register three times.
For example, it is assumed that the value of the A register (indicating the winning number) is "32".
Also, “32 (D)” = “20 (H)”.
In this case, the value of the HL register is
“15A3 (H)” + “20 (H)” = “15C3 (H)” (first time)
"15C3 (H)" + "20 (H)" = "15E3 (H)" (the second time)
"15E3 (H)" + "20 (H)" = "1603 (H)" (the third time)
It becomes.
As a result, “the address of the conditional device number and the advantageous section number corresponding to the winning number” is set in the HL register.

Next, the main CPU 55 stores data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register in the C register.
For example, when the value of the HL register is “1603 (H)”, the data corresponding to this address is “@ NB — 1 BBB” (= “2”). Also, this data indicates the "items condition device number" (FIGS. 77 (a) and (d)).
In this case, the main CPU 55 stores “2” in the C register. As a result, "2" indicating the "item condition device number" is stored in the C register. Thereafter, the value of the C register is maintained until the present flow chart (condition device number set 1) is ended.
After that, the main CPU 55 adds “1” to the value of the HL register to obtain a new value of the HL register. As a result, the value of the HL register becomes “1604 (H)”.

Next, the main CPU 55 stores data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register in the A register.
For example, when the value of the HL register is "1604 (H)", the data corresponding to this address is "0". Also, this data indicates the "winning and replay condition device number" (FIGS. 77 (a) and (d)).
In this case, the main CPU 55 stores “0” in the A register. As a result, "0" indicating the "winning and replay condition device number" is stored in the A register. Thereafter, the value of the A register is maintained until the present flow chart (condition device number set 1) is completed.

After that, the main CPU 55 adds “1” to the value of the HL register to obtain a new value of the HL register. As a result, the value of the HL register becomes “1605 (H)”. Thereafter, the value of the HL register is maintained until the present flow chart (condition device number set 1) is ended.
When the value of the HL register is “1605 (H)”, the data corresponding to this address is “0”. Also, this data indicates "advantage zone number" (FIGS. 77 (a) and (d)).

In step S1043, the main CPU 55 determines whether the character article condition device number is “0”.
Here, “_NB_CND_BNS” is a 1-byte storage area on the RWM 53 storing the item condition device number.
Further, when the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is “0”, it indicates that the item condition device has not been won, and when other than “0”, it indicates that the item condition device has been won.

Furthermore, when the previous game is a non-internal game and the item condition device is won in the current game, the main CPU 55 stores the item condition device number in “_NB_CND_BNS” in step S1046 described later.
Furthermore, when the combination of symbols corresponding to the special part included in the winning item condition device stops on the active line, the main CPU 55 clears the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” (makes “0”).

Therefore, when the previous game is a non-internal game and the item condition device is won in the current game, the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is “0” in step S1043.
Further, in step S1043, when the value of "_NB_CND_BNS" is other than "0", the combination condition symbol corresponding to the special combination included in the combination condition device which was elected to the item condition device before the previous game and is elected Means that it has not yet stopped at the effective line. That is, it means that it is a game in the inside which carries over the winning combination information of the special part.

Then, in step S1043, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the combination condition device is won by determining whether or not the value of the storage area “_NB_CND_BNS” of the RWM 53 is “0”. That is, it is determined whether it is inside.
Here, when the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is “0” (Yes), the main CPU 55 determines that the combination condition device has not been won, and proceeds to the next step S1044.
On the other hand, when the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is other than “0” (No), the main CPU 55 determines that the character article condition device is won, and skips steps S1044 to S1046 and step S1047. Go to

In step S1044, the main CPU 55 determines whether the advantageous section number is “0”.
Here, “_NB_CND_AT” is a 1-byte storage area on the RWM 53 that stores the advantageous section number.
In addition, when the value of “_NB_CND_AT” is “0”, it indicates that the player is not elected to the advantageous segment (decided to shift), and when it is “1”, it indicates that the advantageous segment 1 is elected. In the case of "2", it indicates that the advantageous section 2 has been won.

Furthermore, the previous game is a game in the normal section, and when the player wins the advantageous section 1 or the advantageous section 2 in the current game, the main CPU 55 stores the advantageous section number in “_NB_CND_AT” in step S1045 described later.
Furthermore, based on having won the advantageous section 1 or the advantageous section 2, it shifts to the advantageous section 1 or the advantageous section 2, and thereafter, when the advantageous section 1 or the advantageous section 2 ends and returns to the normal section, the main CPU 55 Clear the value of "_NB_CND_AT" (set it to "0").

For this reason, the previous game is a game in the normal section, and when it is elected to the advantageous section 1 or the advantageous section 2 in the current game, the value of “_NB_CND_AT” is “0” in step S1044.
In addition, in step S1044, when the value of "_NB_CND_AT" is other than "0", it wins in the advantageous section 1 or the advantageous section 2 before the previous game, and the advantageous section 1 or the advantageous section 2 shifted based on this winning. Means not yet finished. That is, it means that it is a game of a waiting section, the advantageous section 1 or the advantageous section 2.

Then, in step S1044, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the advantageous section 1 or the advantageous section 2 is won by judging whether or not the value of the storage area "_NB_CND_AT" of the RWM 53 is "0". Do.
Here, when the value of “_NB_CND_AT” is “0” (Yes), the main CPU 55 determines that the advantageous section 1 or the advantageous section 2 is not won, and proceeds to the next step S1045.
On the other hand, when the value of “_NB_CND_AT” is other than “0” (No), the main CPU 55 determines that the advantageous section 1 or the advantageous section 2 is won, and skips step S1045, and step Go to S1046.

In step S1045, the main CPU 55 stores the advantageous section number.
Specifically, at the time of proceeding to step S1045, the HL register stores a value indicating the address of the advantageous section number.
Then, the main CPU 55 stores data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register in the storage area “_NB_CND_AT” of the RWM 53. Thereby, the advantageous section number is stored.

At step S1046, the main CPU 55 stores the character article condition device number.
Specifically, at the time of proceeding to step S1046, a value indicating an item condition device number is stored in the C register.
Then, the main CPU 55 stores the value of the C register in the storage area “_NB_CND_BNS” of the RWM 53. This saves the item condition device number.

At step S1047, the main CPU 55 stores the winning and replay condition device number.
Here, when “Yes” is determined in the step S1041 and the process proceeds to the step S1047, a value indicating “a winning number” is stored in the A register. Also, when “Yes” is made in step S1041 (when the winning number is smaller than the conversion start number), as shown in FIG. 74 (a), “winning number” = “winning and replay condition device number” It is determined in Therefore, when “Yes” is determined in step S1041 and the process proceeds to step S1047, the value of the A register indicates “winning and replay condition device number”.

In step S1042, a value indicating "winning and replay condition device number" is stored in the A register. For this reason, also when proceeding to step S1047 via step S1042, the value of the A register indicates the "winning and replay condition device number".
Thus, at the time of proceeding to step S1047, the value indicating the winning and replay condition device number is stored in the A register.

Also, “_NB_CND_NOR” is a 1-byte storage area on the RWM 53 that stores winning and replay condition device numbers.
Then, the main CPU 55 stores the value of the A register in the storage area “_NB_CND_NOR” of the RWM 53. Thereby, the winning and replay condition device number is stored.
As described above, the winning and replay condition device number is determined when the result of step S1041 is "Yes" and the process proceeds to step S1047, and when the process proceeds to step S1042 and proceeds to step S1047 through step S1042. The processing stored in "_NB_CND_NOR" can be made common, and the amount of use of the ROM 54 by the program can be reduced.
The main CPU 55 clears the value of “_NB_CND_NOR” (makes “0”) at the end of the game or before it becomes possible to receive the operation of the start switch 41 in the next game.

As described above, in the condition device number set 1, it is determined whether the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is “0” before the timing (step S1046) of storing the item condition device number in “_NB_CND_BNS”. (Step S1043).
Thereby, even if it does not have a flag indicating whether it is inside or not, whether it is inside (whether the item condition device has been won in the current game, or the item condition device is won before the previous game) The amount of RWM 53 used can be reduced accordingly.

In conditional device number set 1, it is determined whether the value of "_NB_CND_BNS" is "0" (step S1043), and when it is determined that it is "0", the advantageous section number is set to "_NB_CND_AT". After storing the item condition condition device number in "_NB_CND_BNS" (step S1046), the winning and replay condition device number is stored in "_NB_CND_NOR" (step S1047).
As a result, it is possible to decide to shift to the advantageous section 1 or the advantageous section 2 without requiring complicated processing in the game in which the item condition device is won.

Also, when the winning number is determined to be "31" to "36", "43" to "45", or "48" to "50" in the game, the article condition device Will be won.
In this case, when it is determined that “0” is stored in “_NB_CND_BNS” in step S1043, the process proceeds to step S1044, so that the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” and the value of “_NB_CND_AT” can be updated.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1043 that a value other than "0" is stored in "_NB_CND_BNS", steps S1044 to S1046 are skipped, so the value of "_NB_CND_BNS" and the value of "_NB_CND_AT" are maintained. It will be done.

Thus, when "0" is stored in "_NB_CND_BNS", the value of "_NB_CND_BNS" and the value of "_NB_CND_AT" can be updated, and a value other than "0" is stored in "_NB_CND_BNS". When, the value of "_NB_CND_BNS" and the value of "_NB_CND_AT" are maintained.
Thereby, it is possible to properly process the decision to shift to the winning and advantage section of the item condition device within a certain range of RWM 55 usage without requiring complicated processing.

In addition, in the game, when the winning number is determined to be "43" to "47", the player is elected to advantageous section 1 (decided to shift), and the winning number is "48" to "52". When it is determined to be the turn, it is elected to the advantageous section 2 (decided to shift).
In this case, when it is determined in step S1044 that "0" is stored in "_NB_CND_AT", the process proceeds to step S1045, and the value of "_NB_CND_AT" can be updated.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1044 that a value other than "0" is stored in "_NB_CND_AT", step S1045 is skipped, and the value of "_NB_CND_AT" is maintained.

Thus, when "0" is stored in "_NB_CND_AT", the value of "_NB_CND_AT" can be updated, and when a value other than "0" is stored in "_NB_CND_AT", "_NB_CND_AT" Maintain the value of.
This makes it possible to properly process the decision to shift to the advantageous section within a certain range of RWM 55 usage without requiring complicated processing.

In the present embodiment, the process of storing the advantageous section number in “_NB_CND_AT” (step S1044) is skipped, or the process of storing the item condition device number in “_NB_CND_BNS” (step S1046) is skipped. The value of "_NB_CND_BNS" and the value of "_NB_CND_AT" were maintained.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, by storing (overwriting) the same advantageous section number in "_NB_CND_AT" or storing (overwriting) the same item condition device number in "_NB_CND_BNS", the "_NB_CND_BNS" You may maintain the value or the value of "_NB_CND_AT".

In the current game, when the winning number is determined to be less than "31", "Yes" is made in step S1041, and the process proceeds to step S1047. At this time, the winning number is stored in the A register. Then, in step S1047, the value of the A register is stored in "_NB_CND_NOR" as a winning and replay condition device number.
That is, when the winning number is less than “31”, it is determined that “winning number” = “winning and replay condition device number”.

Then, only when the winning number is "31" or more, the conditional device number is determined from the winning number using the winning number conversion table which defines the correspondence between the winning number and the conditional device number.
For this reason, for the number less than “31”, the correspondence between the winning number and the condition device number need not be defined in the winning number conversion table, so the amount of use of the ROM 54 by the winning number conversion table can be reduced.

  In the present embodiment, the lottery concerning the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section has been described, but for example, a value other than “0” is stored in “_NB_CND_AT” (storage area of advantageous section number) at the start of the current game Even in the case where it is the case, it relates to the addition of the advantageous section (including changing the performance so that the gaming state in the advantageous section becomes advantageous to the player, and adding the number of AT games in the advantageous section). A lottery may be executed, and the value of “_NB_CND_AT” may be changed according to the result.

For example, under the situation where "1" is stored in "_NB_CND_AT" and the value of "_NB_CND_BNS" (storage area of the item condition device number) is "0", the winning number is determined to be "37". A control process may be performed to store "2" in "_NB_CND_AT" based on
In addition, under the circumstance that “1” is stored in “_NB_CND_AT” and the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is “0”, the drawing on the addition of the advantageous section based on the winning number being determined to be “37”. May be performed.

Furthermore, although the winning numbers "43" to "52" are treated as drawing for drawing on the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section, it is also advantageous when these winning numbers are determined in the advantageous section. You may perform the lottery about the addition of the section.
As described above, when the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is “1” (so-called inside), for example, even if the winning number is determined to be “37”, the lottery regarding the addition of the advantageous section is not executed.

Modification of the sixteenth embodiment
Subsequently, a modification of the sixteenth embodiment of the present invention will be described.
The modification of the sixteenth embodiment is different from the sixteenth embodiment in the processing of the condition device number set.
In the process of the condition device number set 1 of the sixteenth embodiment, the advantageous section number is stored in “_NB_CND_AT”, and then the item condition device number is stored in “_NB_CND_BNS”.
On the other hand, in the condition device number set 2 of the modification of the sixteenth embodiment, the character article condition device number is stored in "_NB_CND_BNS", and thereafter, the advantageous section number is stored in "_NB_CND_AT".

FIG. 90 is a flow chart showing a flow of lottery processing of the condition device number etc. in the modification of the sixteenth embodiment.
Steps S1001 to S1004 and step S1006 are the same as in the sixteenth embodiment.
In the present embodiment, when the internal lottery 1 is executed in step S1004, the process proceeds to step S1051.

Furthermore, when the process proceeds to step S1051, the conditional device number set 2 (FIG. 92) is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1006.
Furthermore, in step S1006, it is possible to start the rotation of all the reels 31 and stop the rotating reels 31 by the operation of the stop switch 42 by the player. Then, when the rotation of all the reels 31 is stopped, the process proceeds to step S1052, and all reels stop processing (FIG. 91) is executed.
Then, when the all reels stop processing is executed in step S1052, the processing according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 91 is a flow chart showing a flow of all reels stop processing in a modification of the sixteenth embodiment.
Further, the all reels stop processing is processing for controlling the on / off of the in-internal flag which indicates that the winning combination of the special part is carried over after the rotations of all the reels 31 have been stopped.
In step S1052, the main CPU 55 determines whether the combination of symbols corresponding to the special combination has stopped at the effective line.

Here, when it is determined that the combination of symbols corresponding to the special part has stopped on the activated line (Yes), the process skips steps S1062 and S1063 and proceeds to step S1064.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the combination of symbols corresponding to the special part is not stopped at the effective line (No), the process proceeds to the next step S1062.

In step S1062, the main CPU 55 determines whether the character article condition device number is “0”.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the combination condition device is won by determining whether the value of the storage area “_NB_CND_BNS” of the RWM 53 is “0”.
Here, when the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is other than “0” (No), the main CPU 55 determines that the combination condition device is selected, and proceeds to the next step S1063.
On the other hand, when the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is “0” (Yes), the main CPU 55 determines that the combination condition device has not been won, and ends the processing according to this flowchart.

At step S1063, the main CPU 55 turns on the internal flag.
Here, “_FL_PRD_LOT” is a 1-byte storage area on the RWM 53 that stores an internal flag.
The "internal flag" is a flag indicating that the game is an internal game carrying over the winning combination of the special part.
Furthermore, when the value of “_FL_PRD_LOT” is “FF (H)”, it indicates that the in-internal flag is on, and when it is “0”, it indicates that the in-internal flag is off.

Then, in step S1063, the main CPU 55 stores “FF (H)” in the storage area “_FL_PRD_LOT” of the RWM 53. Then, the process according to this flowchart is ended.
At step S1064, the main CPU 55 clears the internal flag.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 sets the value of the storage area “_FL_PRD_LOT” of the RWM 53 to “0”. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1065.
At step S1065, the main CPU 55 clears the character article condition device number.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 sets the value of the storage area “_NB_CND_BNS” of the RWM 53 to “0”. Then, the process according to this flowchart is ended.

FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing a process of the conditional device number set 2.
Condition device number set 2 is a process of determining the condition device number and the advantageous section number from the winning number.
If the process proceeds to condition device number set 2 in step S1051, first, in step S1071, the main CPU 55 determines whether the winning number is smaller than the conversion start number.
Further, the contents of specific processing in step S1071 are the same as step S1041 in FIG.

When it is determined in step S1071 that the winning number is smaller than the conversion start number (Yes), steps S1072 to S1074 are skipped, and the process proceeds to step S1075.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1071 that the winning number is equal to or more than the conversion start number (No), the process proceeds to the next step S1072.
In step S1071, although "31" is subtracted from the value of the A register (winning number) to determine whether or not a carry has occurred, the value of the A register is maintained without being updated even if the subtraction is performed. That is, even after subtraction, the value of the A register indicates the "winning number".

At step S1072, the main CPU 55 acquires the condition device number and the advantageous section number from the winning number.
Here, in step S1042 of FIG. 89, a value indicating “character item condition device number” is stored in the C register.
On the other hand, in step S1072, a value indicating the "subject condition device number" is stored in the E register.
The condition device number set 2 uses the value of the C register (winning number) in steps S1071 and S1076, so that the value of the C register (winning number) is not destroyed in step S1072.
Other than that, the content of the specific process in step S1072 is the same as that of step S1042 in FIG.

At step S1073, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the character article condition device number is “0”.
Also, the contents of specific processing in step S1073 are the same as step S1043 in FIG.
If it is determined in step S1073 that the item condition device number is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to the next step S1074.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1073 that the item condition device number is other than "0" (No), step S1074 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S1075.

In step S1074, the main CPU 55 stores the character article condition device number.
Specifically, at the time of proceeding to step S1074, the E register stores a value indicating an item condition device number.
Then, the main CPU 55 stores the value of the E register in the storage area “_NB_CND_BNS” of the RWM 53. This saves the item condition device number.

At step S1075, the main CPU 55 saves the winning and replay condition device number.
Here, when “Yes” is determined in the step S1071 and the process proceeds to the step S1075, a value indicating “a winning number” is stored in the A register. Also, when “Yes” in step S1071 (when the winning number is smaller than the conversion start number), as shown in FIG. 74 (a), “winning number” = “winning and replay condition device number” It is determined in Therefore, when “Yes” is determined in step S1071 and the process proceeds to step S1075, the value of the A register indicates “winning and replay condition device number”.

In step S1072, a value indicating "winning and replay condition device number" is stored in the A register. For this reason, also when proceeding to step S1075 through step S1072, the value of the A register indicates the "winning and replay condition device number".
Thus, at the time of proceeding to step S1075, the value indicating the winning and replay condition device number is stored in the A register.
Then, the main CPU 55 stores the value of the A register in the storage area “_NB_CND_NOR” of the RWM 53. Thereby, the winning and replay condition device number is stored.

  As described above, the winning and replay condition device number is determined when the result of step S1071 is "Yes" and the process proceeds to step S1075 and when the process proceeds to step S1072 and proceeds to step S1075 through step S1071. The processing stored in "_NB_CND_NOR" can be made common, and the amount of use of the ROM 54 by the program can be reduced.

In step S1076, the main CPU 55 determines whether the winning number is smaller than the advantageous section conversion start number.
Specifically, at the time of proceeding to step S1076, the value indicating the winning number is stored in the C register.
In step S1076, the main CPU 55 first stores the value of the C register (winning number) in the A register, and then subtracts "@NB_TRNS_AT" from the value of the A register. As shown in FIG. 76 (a), "@ NB_TRNS_AT" indicates an advantageous segment conversion start number, and the value is "@ AT1_BBA". Further, as shown in FIG. 75 (a), "@ AT1_BBA" indicates a single winning of 1BBA and a winning of advantageous section 1, and the value is "38". Therefore, “@NB_TRNS_AT” = “38”.

Then, the main CPU 55 subtracts “38” from the value of the A register, and when a carry is generated by the subtraction, the main CPU 55 determines that the winning number is smaller than the advantageous section conversion start number (Yes) and skips steps S1077 to S1079. Then, the processing according to this flowchart is ended.
On the other hand, when the carry is not generated by the subtraction, the main CPU 55 determines that the winning number is equal to or more than the advantageous segment conversion start number (No), and proceeds to the next step S1077.

In step S1077, the main CPU 55 determines whether the advantageous section number is “0”.
Further, the contents of specific processing in step S1077 are the same as step S1044 in FIG.
When it is determined in step S1077 that the advantageous section number is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to the next step S1078.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1077 that the advantageous section number is other than "0" (No), steps S1078 and S1079 are skipped, and the processing according to this flowchart is ended.

In step S1078, the main CPU 55 determines whether the in-internal flag is on.
Specifically, in step S1078, the main CPU 55 determines whether the internal flag is on by determining whether the value of the storage area "_FL_PRD_LOT" of the RWM 53 is "FF (H)". To judge.
Here, when the value of “_FL_PRD_LOT” is “FF (H)” (Yes), the main CPU 55 determines that the in-internal flag is on, and skips step S1079 to execute the processing according to this flowchart. finish.
On the other hand, when the value of “_FL_PRD_LOT” is “0” (No), the main CPU 55 determines that the in-internal flag is off, and proceeds to the next step S1079.

At step S1079, the main CPU 55 stores the advantageous section number.
Specifically, at the time of proceeding to step S1079, the HL register stores a value indicating the address of the advantageous section number.
Then, the main CPU 55 stores data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register in the storage area “_NB_CND_AT” of the RWM 53. Thereby, the advantageous section number is stored. Then, the process according to this flowchart is ended.

As described above, in the condition device number set 2, it is determined whether the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is “0” (step S1073), and when it is determined “0” (Yes), the bonus condition device number Are stored in "_NB_CND_BNS" (step S1074), and thereafter, the advantageous segment number is stored in "_NB_CND_AT" (step S1079).
Therefore, in the condition device number set 2, even if it is determined whether or not the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is “0” in the step before storing the advantageous section number in “_NB_CND_AT”, the character condition condition device in the present game It is not possible to judge whether the player has won or the item condition device has been won before the previous game.

Therefore, in condition device number set 2, whether or not the internal flag is on in step S1078 before storing the advantageous section number in "_NB_CND_AT" (whether the value of "_FL_PRD_LOT" is "FF (H)" or not) It is determined whether the player has won the item condition device in the current game or whether the player has won the item condition device before the previous game.
Then, when the internal flag is off (the value of “_FL_PRD_LOT” is “0”), it is determined that the item condition device is won in the current game, and the advantageous section number is stored in “_NB_CND_AT” (step S1079) ).

Here, in the condition device number set 2, in step S 1072, a value indicating “character article condition device number” is stored in the E register, and a value indicating “winning and replay condition device number” is stored in the A register. Thereafter, in step S1074, the value of E register (subject item condition device number) is stored in "_NB_CND_BNS", and in step S1075, the value of A register (winning and replay condition device number) is stored in "_NB_CND_NOR".
Therefore, even if the value of the E register is destroyed after step S1074, the item condition device number is not lost, and even if the value of the A register is destroyed after step S1075, winning and replaying are not performed. The condition device number is never lost.

Also, in step S1076, the value of register C is stored in register A, and then the winning number is smaller than the start of the advantageous section conversion start number by subtracting "@NB_TRNS_AT" (= "43") from the value of register A. Determine if it is or not.
Therefore, even if the value of the C register is destroyed after step S1076, no problem occurs in the process of storing the advantageous section number.

As described above, the conditional device number set 2 can use the E register for other processing after step S1074. Similarly, after step S1075, the A register can be used for other processing, and after step S1076, the C register can be used for other processing.
Note that, as another process, for example, an AT (instruction game section) addition lottery in the advantageous section can be mentioned.

In condition device number set 2, it is determined in step S1078 whether or not the internal flag is on (whether the value of "_FL_PRD_LOT" is "FF (H)" or not) to determine the bonus condition for the current game. It was determined whether the device was won or the item condition device was won before the previous game.
However, it is not limited to this. In the present embodiment, the inside transitions to RT4. Therefore, for example, in step S1078, it is determined whether or not it is the corresponding RT4 in the inside, whether it has won the item condition device in the game this time, or has won the item condition device before the previous game You may decide the

Seventeenth Embodiment
Subsequently, a seventeenth embodiment of the present invention will be described.
FIG. 93A shows a winning number definition (3) in the present embodiment.
Here, the winning number definition (3) in FIG. 93 (a) indicates winning number definitions for the winning numbers “31” to “42”.
The winning number definitions for the winning numbers “1” to “30” are the same as the winning number definition (1) of the sixteenth embodiment shown in FIG. 74 (a).

As shown in FIG. 93 (b), “@ BBA EQU 38; 1 BBA single winning + transition lottery” indicates that “@ BBA” indicates “1 BBA single winning” and “execution of transition lottery”, “@ BBA Means that the winning number corresponding to “is“ 38 ”.
Then, when the winning number is determined to be "38", it becomes single winning of "1 BBA condition device" and whether or not to shift from the normal section to the advantageous section, or from the normal section to any type of advantageous section It is possible to execute a transition lottery to decide whether to
As a type of advantageous section, there are an advantageous section 1 and an advantageous section 2. And if it wins to the advantageous section 1 (decided to shift), it shifts to the gaming state of the cassette which does not have the right to shift to ART, and if it wins to the advantageous section 2, it can shift to ART Move to ART after the aura.

As shown in FIG. 93 (c), “@BBA_WD EQU 39; 1BBA + small combination D winning combination + transition lottery” is “@BBA_WD” is “1BBA and small combination D double winning” and “transition lottery execution” Indicates that the winning number corresponding to "@BBA_WD" is "39".
Then, when the winning number is determined to be “39”, “1 BBA condition device” and “small role D condition device” will be double winning, and whether to shift from the normal section to the advantageous section, or from the normal section It becomes possible to execute a transition lottery that determines which type of advantageous segment to transition to.

As shown in FIGS. 74 (a) and 93 (a), in the present embodiment, the winning numbers are determined from the "1" to the "42". Then, the winning number determination means determines any one of the numerical values "0" to "42" as the winning number.
Also, as shown in FIG. 93 (a), in the present embodiment, the winning numbers “31” to “33” indicate the single winning of the item condition device or the combination condition device and the winning and replay condition device. Corresponding to the double winning of, the winning numbers "34" to "37" correspond to the addition of the advantageous section, and the winning numbers "38" to "42" correspond to the execution of the transition lottery .

The winning numbers “38” to “42” may correspond to the addition of the advantageous section. Then, when the winning number is determined to be "38" to "42", the transition lottery may be made executable, and addition of the advantageous section may be made executable.
Also, "when the winning number is determined to be" 38 "to" 42 "means that the winning number is determined to be any of" 38 "to" 42 ".
Further, the number of games to be added to the number of games in the advantageous section, and the change contents of the gaming state (performance of the advantageous section) in the advantageous section can be appropriately set according to the type of the determined winning number.

FIG. 93 (d) is a diagram showing data definition for winning number conversion in the present embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 93 (d), “@ NB_TRNS EQU @ BBA_WIN_E2; conversion start number” indicates that “@ NB_TRNS” indicates “conversion start number”, and the value corresponding to “@ NB_TRNS” is “@ BBA_WIN_E 2”. Means to be. As shown in FIG. 93A, “@ BBA_WIN_E2” = “31”. Therefore, “@NB_TRNS” = “@ BBA_WIN_E2” = “31”.
Then, when the winning number determined by the winning number determining means is equal to or more than the "conversion start number", using the winning number conversion table, from the winning number, the item condition device number and the winning and replay condition device number Get (store)

In addition, as shown in FIG. 93 (d), “@ NB_TRNS_UP EQU @ RE; Add conversion start number” indicates that “@ NB_TRNS_UP” indicates “Add conversion start number”, and the value corresponding to “@ NB_TRNS_UP” is It means "@ RE". As shown in FIG. 93 (a), “@ RE” = “34”. Therefore, “@ NB_TRNS_UP” = “@ RE” = “34”.
And, when the winning number determined by the winning number determining means is equal to or more than the “additional conversion start number”, there is a case where the advantageous section is added.

Also, as shown in FIG. 93 (d), "@ NB_TRNS_AT EQU @ BBA; advantageous section conversion start number" corresponds to "@ NB_TRNS_AT" that "@ NB_TRNS_AT" indicates "advantageous section conversion start number". It means that the value is "@BBA". As shown in FIG. 93 (a), “@BBA” = “38”. Therefore, “@NB_TRNS_AT” = “@ BBA” = “38”.
Then, when the winning number determined by the winning number determination means is equal to or more than the "favorable section conversion start number", there is a case where a transition lottery is performed to determine whether or not to shift to the advantageous section.

FIG. 94 (a) is a diagram showing a winning number conversion table in the present embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 94 (a), the winning number conversion table corresponds from the winning number determined when the winning number determined by the winning number determining means is the "31st" to the "42". It is used to determine the item condition device number and the winning and replay condition device number.

  As shown in FIG. 94 (b), "DEFB @ NB_1 BBA, @ NB_WIN_E2; winning number 31" stores "@ NB_1 BBA" at address ### 0 (for example, address 1600 (H)), and address ### It means that "@ NB_WIN_E2" is stored at 1 (for example, at address 1601 (H)). As shown in FIG. 93 (d), “@ NB_1 BBA” = “1”, and as shown in FIG. 74 (a), “@ NB_WIN_E2” = “28”. Therefore, "1" is stored in the address ### 0, and "28" is stored in the address ### 1.

That is,
Address ### # (address 1600 (H)) 1: Title condition device number Address # # # 1 (address 1601 (H) address) 28: winning and replay condition device number.
Then, each data stored in the address ### 0 and the address ### 1 is used when the winning number is determined to be "31".

  As shown in FIG. 94 (c), "DEFB @ NB_1 BBB, 0; winning number 32" stores "@ NB_1 BBB" at address ### 2 (for example, address 1602 (H)), and address #### 3. This means that "0" is stored in (for example, address 1603 (H)). As shown in FIG. 93 (d), "@ NB-1 BBB" = "2". Therefore, "2" is stored in the address ### 2.

That is,
Address ### 2 (address 1602 (H)) 2: role condition condition device number Address # ## 3 (address 1603 (H) address) 0: winning combination and replay condition device number.
Then, each data stored in the address ### 2 and the address ### 3 is used when the winning number is determined to be "32".
The winning number lottery data definition is the same as the winning number lottery data definition of the sixteenth embodiment shown in FIG. 78 (a).

FIGS. 94 (d), 95, and 96 are diagrams showing an all-RT common lottery table in the present embodiment.
FIG. 94 (d) is a diagram showing an all RT common lottery table (5). FIG. 95 is a diagram showing the all RT common lottery table (6) and is a diagram following FIG. 94 (d). Furthermore, FIG. 96 is a diagram showing the all RT common lottery table (7) and is a diagram following FIG.
The non-RT lottery table, the RT 1 lottery table, the RT 2 lottery table, the RT 3 lottery table, the RT 4 lottery table, the 1 BBA lottery table, and the 1 BB lottery table are the same as those in the sixteenth embodiment.

At the non-RT, RT1, RT2, RT3 or RT4, first, a lottery determination is made using the all RT common lottery table, and when the winning number is determined to be "00 (H)" at this time, Next, a lottery determination is performed using a lottery table according to RT, and when the winning number is determined to a value other than "00 (H)", the internal lottery is ended without using a lottery table according to RT. Is the same as in the sixteenth embodiment.
Furthermore, at 1 BBA, the lottery determination is performed using the 1 BBA lottery table, and at 1 BBB, the lottery determination is performed using the 1 BBB lottery table, as in the sixteenth embodiment.

FIG. 97 (a) shows a two-step lottery address table. FIG. 97 (b) is a diagram showing a two-stage lottery table 1, FIG. 97 (c) is a diagram showing a two-stage lottery table 2, and FIG. 97 (d) is a two-stage lottery table 3 FIG. 97 (e) is a diagram showing a two-stage lottery table 4, and FIG. 97 (f) is a diagram showing a two-stage lottery table 5.
Here, the two-step lottery address table and the two-step lottery tables 1 to 5 are used in the two-step lottery in FIG. 100 and the setting difference lottery in FIG. 101 described later, and are stored in the ROM 54 of the main control board 50 ing. In the two-step lottery and the setting difference lottery, it is determined whether or not to shift from the normal section to the advantageous section. That is, the transition lottery that determines whether to shift from the normal section to the advantageous section corresponds to a two-stage lottery and a setting difference lottery.

The two-step lottery address table defines which one of the two-step lottery tables 1 to 5 is used.
As shown in FIG. 97 (a), when the winning number is determined to be "38", "TBL_2NDAT_LOT1" (two-step lottery table 1) is used.
Similarly, when the winning number is determined to be “39”, “TBL_2NDAT_LOT2” (2-step lottery table 2) is used, and when the winning number is determined to be “40”, “TBL_2NDAT_LOT3” (2-step Use the lottery table 3).
Also, when the winning number is determined to be “41”, “TBL_2NDAT_LOT4” (two-step lottery table 4) is used, and when the winning number is determined to be “42”, “TBL_2NDAT_LOT5” (two-step lottery) Use Table 5).

Further, the two-step lottery table 1 is used when the winning number is determined to be “38”, and defines winning data and probability data.
The first line “DEFB 2; winning data” indicates that the winning data is “2”.
The second line “DEFB 85; probability data (win data 2)” indicates that “85” is defined as probability data, and when winning using this probability data, the win data is “2”. It shows that it is decided.

The third line “DEFB 85; probability data (win data 1)” indicates that “85” is defined as probability data, and when winning using this probability data, the win data is “1”. It shows that it is decided.
The fourth line “; // DEFB 86; probability data (win data 0)” is a comment indicating that the probability that the win data is determined to be “0” is “86/256”, and data is stored in the ROM 54 Not stored as
The two-step lottery tables 2 to 5 are also similar to the two-step lottery table 1.

FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing the flow of the lottery process of the condition device number etc. in the seventeenth embodiment.
Steps S1001 to S1004 and step S1006 are the same as in the sixteenth embodiment.
In the present embodiment, when the internal lottery 1 is executed in step S1004, the process proceeds to step S1101.
Further, in step S1101, the conditional device number set 3 (FIG. 99) is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1006.
Then, in step S1006, the rotation of all the reels 31 is started, and it becomes possible to stop the rotating reels 31 by the operation of the stop switch 42 by the player. Then, when the rotation of all the reels 31 is stopped, the process according to this flowchart is ended.

FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing the process of the condition device number set 3.
The conditional device number set 3 is a process of determining (acquiring, storing, determining) the conditional device number and the advantageous section number from the winning number.
In step S1111, the main CPU 55 determines whether the winning number is smaller than the conversion start number.
Also, the contents of specific processing in step S1111 are the same as step S1041 in FIG.

When it is determined in step S1111 that the winning number is smaller than the conversion start number (Yes), the process skips steps S1112 to S1118 and proceeds to step S1119.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1111 that the winning number is equal to or greater than the conversion start number (No), the process proceeds to the next step S1112.
In step S1111, it is determined whether or not a carry is generated by subtracting "31" from the value of the A register (winning number), but the value of the A register is maintained without being updated even after the subtraction. That is, even after subtraction, the value of the A register indicates the "winning number".

In step S1112, the main CPU 55 acquires the condition device number corresponding to the winning number from the winning number conversion table of FIG. 94 (a).
Specifically, the main CPU 55 first stores the calculation result of “TBL_CNDNO_DAT” − “@ NB_TRNS” × 2 in the HL register.
For example, assume that “TBL_CNDNO_DAT” = “1600 (H)”.
Also, as shown in FIGS. 93 (a) and 93 (d), "@ NB_TRNS" = "@ BBA_WIN_E2" = "31".
In this case, the value of the HL register is
"1600 (H)"-"31 (D)" x 2
= "1600 (H)"-"3 E (H)"
= "15C2 (H)"
It becomes.

Next, the main CPU 55 repeats the process of adding the value of the A register to the value of the HL register to obtain a new value of the HL register twice.
For example, it is assumed that the value of the A register (indicating the winning number) is "32".
Also, “32 (D)” = “20 (H)”.
In this case, the value of the HL register is
"15C2 (H)" + "20 (H)" = "15E2 (H)" (first time)
"15E2 (H)" + "20 (H)" = "1602 (H)" (the second time)
It becomes.
As a result, "the address of the condition device number corresponding to the winning number" is set in the HL register.

In other words, the address stored in the HL register ("15C2 (H)" in this embodiment) is used as the reference address, and the winning number stored in the A register is used as the offset value (in this embodiment, stored in the A register). By using the value obtained by doubling the winning number as the offset value), it is possible to calculate (designate) the address at which the conditional device number corresponding to the determined winning number is stored.
Here, the value of register A is incremented twice (a value obtained by doubling the winning number is taken as an offset value) corresponds to two data (data indicating a feature condition device number, for one winning number, And two of the data indicating winning and replay condition device numbers are stored in the winning number conversion table.

  As in the sixteenth embodiment, three data (data indicating an item condition device number, data indicating a winning and replay condition device number, and data indicating an advantageous interval number) for one winning number are included. If stored in the winning number conversion table, the condition device number corresponding to the winning number is stored by adding the value of the A register three times (setting the winning number tripled as the offset value). It is possible to calculate (designate) the address that is being

Next, the main CPU 55 stores data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register in the E register.
For example, when the value of the HL register is “1602 (H)”, the data corresponding to this address is “@ NB — 1 BBB” (= “2”). Also, this data indicates the "items condition device number" (FIGS. 94 (a) and (c)).
In this case, the main CPU 55 stores “2” in the E register. As a result, "2" indicating the "item condition device number" is stored in the E register. Thereafter, the value of the E register is maintained until the present flow chart (condition device number set 3) is ended.
After that, the main CPU 55 adds “1” to the value of the HL register to obtain a new value of the HL register. As a result, the value of the HL register becomes “1603 (H)”.

In step S1042 of FIG. 89, a value indicating “character item condition device number” is stored in the C register.
On the other hand, in step S1112, a value indicating the "subject condition device number" is stored in the E register.
The condition device number set 3 uses the value of the C register (winning number) in steps S1111 and S1115 so that the value of the C register (winning number) is not destroyed in step S1112.

Next, the main CPU 55 stores data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register in the D register.
For example, when the value of the HL register is "1603 (H)", the data corresponding to this address is "0". Also, this data indicates the "winning and replay condition device number" (FIGS. 94 (a) and (c)).
In this case, the main CPU 55 stores "0" in the D register. As a result, "0" indicating the "winning and replay condition device number" is stored in the D register. Thereafter, the value of the D register is maintained until the present flow chart (condition device number set 3) is ended.

In step S1042 of FIG. 89, a value indicating “winning and replay condition device number” is stored in the A register.
On the other hand, in step S1112, a value indicating "winning and replay condition device number" is stored in the D register.
In the condition device number set 3, the A register is used in step S1115 described later. Therefore, before saving the winning and replay condition device number in step S1119 described later, it is to prevent the value indicating the winning and replay condition device number from being lost.

In step S1113, the main CPU 55 determines whether “0” is stored in “_NB_CND_BNS” (storage area for the item condition device number) of the RWM 53.
In other words, it is determined whether or not the current game is a game within the bonus.
If “0” is stored in “_NB_CND_BNS” of RWM 53, it is determined that the game is a bonus non-internal game, and if a value other than “0” is stored, the current game Is determined to be the game inside the bonus.
Of course, other information such as an RT number may be referred to in order to determine whether the current game is a game within the bonus.

Further, the contents of specific processing in step S1113 are the same as step S1043 in FIG.
When it is determined in step S1113 that the item condition device number is “0” (Yes), the process proceeds to the next step S1114.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1113 that the character article condition device number is other than "0" (No), steps S1114 to S1117 are skipped, and the process proceeds to step S1118.

In step S1114, the main CPU 55 determines whether the advantageous section number is “0”.
Further, the contents of specific processing in step S1114 are the same as step S1044 in FIG.
When it is determined in step S1114 that the advantageous section number is “0” (Yes), the process proceeds to the next step S1115.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1114 that the advantageous section number is other than "0" (No), steps S1115 and S1116 are skipped, and the process proceeds to step S1117.

In step S1115, the main CPU 55 determines whether the winning number is smaller than the advantageous section conversion start number.
Specifically, at the time of proceeding to step S1115, the value indicating the winning number is stored in the C register.
In step S1115, the main CPU 55 first stores the value of the C register (winning number) in the A register, and then subtracts “@NB_TRNS_AT” from the value of the A register. As shown in FIGS. 93 (a) and 93 (d), “@NB_TRNS_AT” = “@ BBA” = “38”.

Then, the main CPU 55 subtracts “38” from the value of the A register, and when a carry is generated by the subtraction, the main CPU 55 determines that the winning number is smaller than the advantageous section conversion start number (Yes) and skips step S1116. The process proceeds to step S1117.
On the other hand, when the carry is not generated by the subtraction, the main CPU 55 determines that the winning number is equal to or more than the advantageous segment conversion start number (No), and proceeds to the next step S1116.
In step S1115, "38" is subtracted from the value of the A register (winning number) to determine whether or not a carry has occurred, but the value of the A register is maintained without being updated even after the subtraction. That is, even after subtraction, the value of the A register indicates the "winning number".

In step S1116, the main CPU 55 executes a two-step lottery (FIG. 100). When the two-step lottery is completed, the process proceeds to the next step S1117.
In step S1117, the main CPU 55 stores the character article condition device number.
Specifically, at the time when the process proceeds to step S1117, the E register stores a value indicating an item condition device number.
Then, the main CPU 55 stores the value of the E register in the storage area “_NB_CND_BNS” of the RWM 53. This saves the item condition device number.

In the next step S1118, the main CPU 55 moves the winning and replay condition device number.
Here, in step S1112, a value indicating "winning and replay condition device number" is stored in the D register. Therefore, when the process proceeds to step S1118 through step S1112, the value of the D register indicates the "winning and replay condition device number".
Thus, at the time of proceeding to step S1118, the D register stores a value indicating the winning and replay condition device number.
Then, in step S1118, the main CPU 55 stores the value of the D register in the A register.

In the next step S1119, the main CPU 55 saves the winning and replay condition device number.
Here, when “Yes” is determined in the step S1111 and the process proceeds to the step S1119, a value indicating “a winning number” is stored in the A register. Also, when “Yes” in step S1111 (when the winning number is smaller than the conversion start number), as shown in FIG. 74 (a), “winning number” = “winning and replay condition device number” It is determined in Therefore, when "Yes" is determined in step S1111 and the process proceeds to step S1119, the value of the A register indicates "winning and replay condition device number".

Also, when the process proceeds from step S1118 to step S1119, the value of the A register indicates the "winning and replay condition device number".
Then, in step S1119, the main CPU 55 stores the value of the A register in the storage area “_NB_CND_NOR” of the RWM 53. Thereby, the winning and replay condition device number is stored.
Then, the process according to this flowchart is ended.

As described above, in the condition device number set 3, in step S1118, the value of the D register (indicating the winning and replay condition device numbers) is stored in the A register.
As described above, winning conditions and replay conditions are satisfied when the result is "Yes" in step S1111 and the process proceeds to step S1119, and when the process proceeds to step S1111, "No" and the process proceeds from step S1118 to step S1119 through step S1112. The process of storing the device number in “_NB_CND_NOR” can be made common, and the amount of use of the ROM 54 by the program can be reduced.

FIG. 100 is a flowchart showing the flow of the two-step lottery process.
The two-step lottery is a process of acquiring an advantageous section number from the winning number.
When the two-step lottery in step S1116 is performed, first, in step S1121, the main CPU 55 sets a two-step lottery table.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 first stores the calculation result of "TBL_2NDDAT_ADR"-"@ NB_TRNS_AT" in the HL register.

Here, "TBL_2NDDAT_ADR" indicates the start address of the two-step lottery address table (FIG. 97 (a)).
For example, it is assumed that “TBL_2NDDAT_ADR” = “1700 (H)”.
Further, as shown in FIGS. 93 (a) and 93 (d), “@ NB_TRNS_AT” = “@ BBA” = “38”.
In this case, the value of the HL register is
"1700 (H)"-"38 (D)"
= "1700 (H)"-"26 (H)"
= "16 DA (H)"
It becomes.

Next, the main CPU 55 adds the value of the A register (winning number) to the value of the HL register to obtain a new value of the HL register.
As described above, in step S1115 of FIG. 99, "38" is subtracted from the value of the A register (winning number) to determine whether or not a carry has occurred, but even if the subtraction is performed, the value of the A register is updated Keep it without. That is, even after subtraction, the value of the A register indicates the "winning number". Therefore, even when the process proceeds to step S1121, the value of the A register indicates the "winning number".

For example, it is assumed that the value of the A register (winning number) is "39".
Also, “39 (D)” = “27 (H)”.
In this case, the value of the HL register is
"16 DA (H)" + "27 (H)" = "1701 (H)"
It becomes.

In other words, the address indicated by the HL register ("16 DA (H)" in this embodiment) is used as the reference address, and the winning number stored in the A register is used as the offset value, thereby corresponding to the winning number determined. It becomes possible to calculate (designate) the address of “address designation data”.
Further, “address designation data” is data stored in the two-step lottery address table, and is data for calculating (designating) the leading address of the two-step lottery tables 1 to 5.

“DEFB TBL — 2 NDAT_LOT1-$; winning number 38” in the two-step lottery address table of FIG. 97 (a) is address designation data for calculating (specifying) the top address of the two-step lottery table 1.
Similarly, "DEFB TBL_2NDAT_LOT2-$; winning number 39" is address designation data for calculating (designating) the top address of the two-step lottery table 2, "DEFB TBL_2NDAT_LOT3-$; winning number 40" is 2 This is address designation data for calculating (specifying) the top address of the stage lottery table 3.
Also, "DEFB TBL_2NDAT_LOT4-$; winning number 41" is address designation data for calculating (specifying) the top address of the two-step lottery table 4, "DEFB TBL_2NDAT_LOT5-$; winning number 42" is two-step It is address designation data for calculating (specifying) the top address of the lottery table 5.

Next, the main CPU 55 stores data (address designation data) corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register in the A register.
For example, when the value of the HL register is "1701 (H)", the data (address designation data) corresponding to this address is "DEFB TBL_2NDAT_LOT2-$; winning number 39" as shown in FIG. 97 (a). It is.

Here, "TBL_2NDAT_LOT2" indicates the top address of the two-step lottery table 2 (Fig. 97 (c)).
For example, assume that “TBL_2NDAT_LOT2” = “1708 (H)”.
Also, "$" indicates the current address. As described above, the current address is "1701 (H)".
In this case, the value of the A register is
"TBL_2NDAT_LOT2"-"$"
= "1708 (H)"-"1701 (H)"
= "7 (H)"
It becomes.

Next, the main CPU 55 adds the value of the A register to the value of the HL register to obtain a new value of the HL register.
When the value of the HL register is “1701 (H)” and the value of the A register is “7 (H)”, the value of the new HL register is
"1701 (H)" + "7 (H)"
= "1708 (H)"
It becomes.

Then, “1708 (H)”, which is the value of the HL register, indicates the top address of the two-step lottery table used in the next step S1122 of the setting differenceless lottery.
The "1708 (H)" address indicates the top address of the two-step lottery table 2 of FIG. 97 (c).
Thus, in step S1121, a two-step lottery table is set. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1122.

When the process proceeds to step S1122, the main CPU 55 executes a setting differenceless lottery (FIG. 101). Then, when the setting difference-less lottery is finished, the process proceeds to the next step S1123.
In step S1123, the main CPU 55 saves the winning value in the setting difference lottery as the advantageous section number.
Specifically, at the time when the process proceeds to step S1123, the winning value in the no setting difference lottery is stored in the A register.
Then, in step S1123, the main CPU 55 stores the value of the A register in the storage area "_NB_CND_AT" of the RWM 53 as the advantageous section number. Thereby, the advantageous section number is stored.
Then, the process according to this flowchart is ended.

Here, the following points are mentioned as a merit which calculates the start address of a 2-step lottery table using a 2-step lottery address table (designation).
In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 97 (b) to (f), 3-byte data is stored (stored) in each of the two-step lottery tables 1 to 5.
Therefore, the start address ("1705 (H)") of the two-step lottery table 1 and the start address ("1708 (H)") of the two-step lottery table 2 are separated by 3 bytes.

Similarly, the start address ("1708 (H)") of the two-step lottery table 2 and the start address ("170B (H)") of the two-step lottery table 3 are separated by 3 bytes.
Also, the start address ("170B (H)") of the two-step lottery table 3 and the start address ("170E (H)") of the two-step lottery table 4 are separated by 3 bytes.
Further, the start address ("170E (H)") of the two-step lottery table 4 and the start address ("1711 (H)") of the two-step lottery table 5 are separated by 3 bytes.

In such a case, for example, “72 (H), which is a value obtained by multiplying“ @ NB_TRNS_AT ”(“ 26 (H) ”) from the start address (“ 1705 (H) ”) of the two-step lottery table 1 “1693 (H)” is calculated by subtracting “)”, and this is stored in the HL register as a reference address. The reason why "@NB_TRNS_AT" is tripled is that the data stored in each two-step lottery table is 3 bytes. If N bytes of data are stored in each two-step lottery table, "@ NB_TRNS_AT" is multiplied by N.
Then, the address of the two-step lottery table corresponding to the winning number is calculated (designated) by adding a value obtained by multiplying the data of the winning number stored in the A register by three times the reference address. You can also. When N-byte data is stored in each of the two-step lottery tables, a value obtained by multiplying the data of the winning number by N is added.

That is, the calculation result of "1705 (H)"-"@ NB_TRNS_AT" x 3 is stored in the HL register as a reference address.
In this case, the value of the HL register is
"1705 (H)"-"@ NB_TRNS_AT" x 3
= "1705 (H)"-"26 (H)" x 3
= "1693 (H)"
It becomes.

Next, the main CPU 55 repeats the process of adding the value of the A register to the value of the HL register to obtain a new value of the HL register three times.
For example, it is assumed that the value of the A register (indicating the winning number) is "39".
Also, “39 (D)” = “27 (H)”.
In this case, the value of the HL register is
"1693 (H)" + "27 (H)" = "16 BA (H)" (first time)
"16 BA (H)" + "27 (H)" = "16 E 1 (H)" (the second time)
"16E1 (H)" + "27 (H)" = "1708 (H)" (third time)
It becomes.
As a result, “the address of the conditional device number and the advantageous section number corresponding to the winning number” is set in the HL register.

However, at the development stage of the slot machine 10, the contents of the two-step lottery tables 1 to 5 may be changed.
For example, with regard to the two-stage lottery table 1, the winning probability of the advantageous section number "1" may be set to 0%, and the winning probability of the advantageous section number "2" may be set to 100%.
In this case, in the two-step lottery table 1, since the number of the advantageous section numbers to be elected is one, the interval between the leading addresses of the two-step lottery tables 1 to 5 is not 3 bytes each.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 97 (a), by providing a two-step lottery address table for specifying the top address of the two-step lottery table corresponding to the winning number, a two-step lottery is performed in the development stage of the slot machine 10. Even if the intervals between the start addresses of the tables 1 to 5 are not equal, the start addresses of the two-step lottery table can be specified, so that it is possible to flexibly cope with the specification change.

Also, without using the two-step lottery address table, the top address of the corresponding two-step lottery table can be specified from the determined winning number.
However, in this case, in step S1121 of FIG. 100, it is first determined whether or not the winning number is "38", and if it is determined that it is "38", the top address of the two-step lottery table 1 If "1705 (H)" is specified and it is determined that it is not "38", it is next determined whether or not the winning number is "39".

If it is determined that the winning number is "39", then "1708 (H)", which is the top address of the two-step lottery table 2, is specified, and if it is not determined to be "39", , It is determined whether or not the winning number is "40".
Such processing is repeated until the top address of the two-step lottery table corresponding to the winning number is specified.

For this reason, the process until the top address of the two-step lottery table is specified becomes long.
In addition, a program for specifying the top address of the two-step lottery table is also required.
On the other hand, specifying the top address of the two-step lottery table using the two-step lottery address table makes it possible to shorten the process until the top address of the two-step lottery table is specified. Since it is not necessary to define a program for specifying an address, the amount of use of the ROM 54 by the program can be reduced.

FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing a process flow of the setting differenceless lottery.
In addition, the setting difference no lottery is a process of determining the advantageous section number based on the two-step lottery table set in step S1121 of FIG.
In step S1122, the main CPU 55 acquires a random number in step S1131.
In the present embodiment, a counter that counts in the range of “0” to “255” as one cycle is provided. Then, the main CPU 55 acquires a 1-byte random number value from the counter for the setting difference lottery, and stores it in the A register.
The lower 1 byte of the 2-byte counter may be acquired as a random number value.

At the next step S1132, the main CPU 55 acquires winning data from the two-step lottery table.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 stores data in which the bit 7 of data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register is “0” in the B register. At this time, the data itself corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register is the data before setting the bit 7 to “0”.
Here, in the two-step lottery tables 1 to 5 in FIGS. 97 (b) to 97 (f), "2 (D)" is determined as the winning data.

However, in the case where the winning data is determined as "2", "10000010 (B)" can be defined as the winning data.
Similarly, in the case where the winning data is determined as "1", "10000001 (B)" can be defined as the winning data.
In this case, of the 8-bit data, bit 0 to bit 6 indicate winning data, and bit 7 indicates "winning confirmation data".
Further, the “winning decision data” is data indicating that the winning data is decided as the winning value.

At the next step S1133, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not winning determination data is included.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the bit 7 of the data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register is “1”.
When the bit 7 is “1”, it is determined that the winning determination data is included (Yes), and steps S1134 to S1138 are skipped, and the process proceeds to step S1139. As a result, among the 8-bit data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register, bit 0 to bit 6 (winning data) are decided as the winning value.
On the other hand, when the bit 7 is "0", it is determined that the winning determination data is not included (No), and the process proceeds to the next step S1134.

At step S1134, the main CPU 55 acquires probability data from the two-step lottery table.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 adds “1” to the value of the HL register. Thus, the value of the HL register indicates the address of the probability data.
When the process proceeds to the next step S1135, the main CPU 55 performs a yes / no determination.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 subtracts the data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register from the value of the A register, and stores the subtraction result in the HL register.

When the process proceeds to the next step S1136, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not a win is made.
Specifically, main CPU 55 determines whether or not a carry has been generated by the subtraction in step S1135.
Here, when a carry is generated by the subtraction, it is determined that the player has won (Yes), and steps S1137 and S1138 are skipped, and the process proceeds to step S1139.
On the other hand, when the carry is not generated by the subtraction, it is determined that the winning is not made (No), and the process proceeds to the next step S1137.

At step S1137, the main CPU 55 subtracts “1” from the winning data.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 subtracts “1” from the value of the B register to obtain a new value of the B register.
In the next step S1138, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the winning data is "0".
Specifically, the main CPU 55 determines whether the value of the B register is “0”.

Here, if it is determined that the value of the B register is not “0” (No), the process returns to step S1134.
If it is determined that the value of the B register is “0” (Yes), the process proceeds to the next step S1139.
In step S1139, the main CPU 55 acquires winning data as a winning value.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 stores the value of the B register in the A register. Thus, the winning data is stored in the A register as a winning value. Then, the process according to this flowchart is ended.

As described above, in the condition device number set 3, when the winning numbers determined by the internal lottery 1 and the lottery determination are the “38” th to the “42” th, “No” in the step S1111 of FIG. Therefore, it becomes possible to execute a two-step lottery and a setting difference lottery (transition lottery).
In this case, when a value other than “0” is stored in “_NB_CND_AT” (when “No” in step S1114 of FIG. 99; the advantageous section number is stored), steps S1115 and S1116 are performed. Since the process skips to step S1117, the two-step lottery and the setting differenceless lottery are not executed.
In this way, it is possible to appropriately perform the process regarding the transition to the advantageous section within a certain range of RWM 55 usage without requiring complicated processes.

When “No” in step S1114 in FIG. 99 (when a value other than “0” is stored in “_NB_CND_AT”), steps S1115 and S1116 are skipped to shift from the normal section to the advantageous section. It does not only execute the lottery (2-step lottery and setting difference lottery) for the transition.
Then, even when "No" in step S1114 of FIG. 99 (when a value other than "0" is stored in "_NB_CND_AT"), the addition of the advantageous section (the gaming state in the advantageous section is the player) It is possible to carry out a lottery for changing the performance to be advantageous for the player or for adding the number of AT games played in the advantageous section.

When the winning number determined by internal lottery 1 and lottery determination is "38" to "42", when a value other than "0" is stored in "_NB_CND_AT" (the advantageous section number is (When stored), the process may proceed to step S1116 of FIG. 99, and a two-step lottery and a setting difference lottery may be executed. In this case, step S1123 of FIG. 100 is skipped. Thereby, the value stored in "_NB_CND_AT" is maintained.
Even in this case, the process relating to the transition to the advantageous section can be appropriately performed within a certain range of RWM 55 usage without requiring complicated processes.

Further, as described above, when the winning numbers determined by the internal lottery 1 and the lottery determination are the “38” th to the “42” th, it becomes possible to execute a two-step lottery and a lottery without setting difference. In this case, when a value other than “0” is stored in “_NB_CND_BNS” (when “No” in step S1113 of FIG. 99; the item condition device number is stored), step S1114-4 is performed. Since the process skips S1117 and proceeds to step S1118, the two-step lottery and the setting differenceless lottery are not executed.
In this way, it is possible to appropriately perform the process regarding the transition to the advantageous section within a certain range of RWM 55 usage without requiring complicated processes.

When a value other than “0” is stored in “_NB_CND_BNS” when the winning number determined by internal lottery 1 and the lottery determination is “38” to “42” (the article condition apparatus When the number is stored, the process may advance to step S1116 in FIG. 99, and a two-step lottery and a setting difference lottery may be executed. In this case, step S1123 of FIG. 100 is skipped. Thereby, the value stored in "_NB_CND_AT" is maintained.
Even in this case, the process relating to the transition to the advantageous section can be appropriately performed within a certain range of RWM 55 usage without requiring complicated processes.

  In addition, when the winning number determined by internal lottery 1 and lottery determination is "38"-"40", it becomes winning of the article condition device, and it is possible to execute a two-step lottery and a setting difference lottery Become. In this case, a two-step lottery and a setting difference lottery are executed (step S1116), and thereafter, an article condition device number is stored in "_NB_CND_BNS" (step S1117).

Furthermore, when the winning number determined by the internal lottery 1 and the lottery determination is the "39" number or the "40" number, the combination condition winning device and the winning condition device become double winning, and there is no two-step lottery and setting difference It becomes possible to execute the lottery. In this case, a two-step lottery and a setting difference lottery are executed (step S1116), and then the item condition device number is stored in "_NB_CND_BNS" (step S1117), and the prize condition device number is stored in "_NB_CND_NOR" ( Step S1118).
Thereby, in the game in which the item condition device is won, processing relating to the transition to the advantageous section can be executed without requiring complicated processing.

<Modification of Seventeenth Embodiment>
Subsequently, a modification of the seventeenth embodiment of the present invention will be described.
The modification of the seventeenth embodiment is different from the seventeenth embodiment in the processing of the condition device number set.
In the process of the condition device number set 3 of the seventeenth embodiment, a two-step lottery is performed to store the advantageous section number in "_NB_CND_AT", and thereafter, the bonus condition device number is stored in "_NB_CND_BNS", and winning and The replay condition device number is stored in "_NB_CND_NOR".

  On the other hand, in the condition device number set 4 of the modification of the seventeenth embodiment, the character article condition device number is stored in "_NB_CND_BNS", and the winning and replay condition device number is stored in "_NB_CND_NOR", and thereafter, Perform a two-step lottery and store the advantageous section number in "_NB_CND_AT".

FIG. 102 is a flow chart showing a flow of lottery processing of the condition device number etc. in the modification of the seventeenth embodiment.
Steps S1001 to S1004 and step S1006 are the same as in the sixteenth embodiment.
Step S1052 is similar to that of the modification of the sixteenth embodiment.
Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the internal lottery 1 is executed in step S1004, the process proceeds to step S1141.
Then, in step S1141, the conditional device number set 4 (FIG. 103) is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1006.

FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing a process of the conditional device number set 4.
The condition device number set 4 is a process of determining the condition device number and the advantageous section number from the winning number.
In step S1151, the main CPU 55 determines whether the winning number is smaller than the conversion start number.
Further, the contents of specific processing in step S1151 are the same as step S1041 in FIG.

If it is determined in step S1151 that the winning number is smaller than the conversion start number (Yes), steps S1152 to S1154 are skipped, and the process proceeds to step S1155.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1151 that the winning number is not less than the conversion start number (No), the process proceeds to the next step S1152.
In step S1151, "31" is subtracted from the value of the A register (winning number) to determine whether or not a carry has occurred, but the value of the A register is maintained without being updated even if the subtraction is performed. That is, even after subtraction, the value of the A register indicates the "winning number".

In the step S1152, the main CPU 55 acquires the condition device number from the winning number.
Here, in step S1112 of FIG. 99, a value indicating "winning and replay condition device number" is stored in the D register.
On the other hand, in step S1152, a value indicating "winning and replay condition device number" is stored in the A register.
Other than that, the content of the specific process in step S1152 is the same as that of step S1112 in FIG.

  In the condition device number set 3 of FIG. 99, before the winning and replay condition device numbers are stored in step S1119, a value indicating the winning number is stored in the A register in step S1115. Therefore, in order to prevent the value indicating the winning and replay condition device number from being lost, in step S1112, the value indicating the winning and replay condition device number is stored not in the A register but in the D register.

In step S1153, the main CPU 55 determines whether the character article condition device number is “0”.
Further, the contents of specific processing in step S1153 are the same as step S1043 in FIG.
If it is determined in step S1153 that the item condition device number is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to the next step S1154.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1153 that the item condition device number is other than "0" (No), step S1154 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S1155.

In step S1154, the main CPU 55 saves the item condition device number, and in the next step S1155, the main CPU 55 saves the winning and replay condition device number.
Further, the contents of the specific processing in step S1154 are the same as step S1074 in FIG. 92, and the contents of the specific processing in step S1155 are the same as step S1075 in FIG.

  In step S1151, "Yes" is determined and the process proceeds to step S1155, and in step S1151 is determined "No", and the process proceeds to step S1155 after step S1152, the prize and replay condition device number is "_NB_CND_NOR The processing stored in “can be made common, and the amount of use of the ROM 54 by the program can be reduced.

In step S1156, the main CPU 55 determines whether the winning number is smaller than the advantageous segment conversion start number.
The specific content of the process in step S1156 is the same as that in step S1115 of FIG.
If it is determined in step S1156 that the winning number is smaller than the conversion start number (Yes), steps S1157 to S1116 are skipped, and the processing according to this flowchart ends.
If it is determined in step S1156 that the winning number is greater than or equal to the conversion start number (No), the process proceeds to the next step S1157.

In step S1157, the main CPU 55 determines whether the advantageous section number is "0".
The contents of the specific processing in step S1157 are the same as step S1044 in FIG.
When it is determined in step S1157 that the advantageous section number is other than “0” (No), steps S1158 and S1116 are skipped, and the processing according to this flowchart is ended.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1157 that the advantageous section number is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to the next step S1158.

In step S1158, the main CPU 55 determines whether the in-internal flag is on.
The specific content of the process in step S1158 is the same as that of step S1078 in FIG.
If it is determined in step S1158 that the in-internal flag is on, step S1116 is skipped, and the processing according to this flowchart ends.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1158 that the in-internal flag is off, the process proceeds to the next step S1116.

In step S1116, the main CPU 55 executes a two-step lottery (FIG. 100). Then, when the two-step lottery is finished, the process of this flowchart is finished.
The contents of the two-step lottery process in step S1116 are the same as in the seventeenth embodiment.

As described above, in the condition device number set 4, when the winning numbers determined by the internal lottery 1 and the lottery determination are the “38” th to the “40” th, the prize condition condition device is won, and 2 It becomes possible to execute the step lottery and the setting difference lottery.
In this case, when the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is “0” (when “Yes” in step S1153), the item condition device number is stored in “_NB_CND_BNS” (step S1154), and the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” When the value is other than 0 (when "No" in step S1153), the value of "_NB_CND_BNS" is maintained (step S1154 is skipped).

In addition, when the winning number determined by internal lottery 1 and lottery determination is "39" or "40", it becomes dual winning of the prize condition device and the winning condition device, and there is no two-step lottery and setting difference It becomes possible to execute the lottery.
In this case, depending on the value of "_NB_CND_BNS", the character article condition apparatus number is stored in "_NB_CND_BNS" or the value of "_NB_CND_BNS" is maintained, and thereafter, the winning condition apparatus number is stored in "_NB_CND_NOR" ( Step S1155).

After that, when the value of "_FL_PRD_LOT" is "0" (when "No" in step S1158), a two-step lottery and a setting difference lottery (transition lottery) are executed (step S1116), and the value of "_FL_PRD_LOT" Is “FF (H)” (“Yes” in step S1158), the two-step lottery and the setting differenceless lottery are not executed (step S1116 is skipped).
Thereby, in the game in which the item condition device is won, processing relating to the transition to the advantageous section can be executed without requiring complicated processing.

Further, in the condition device number set 4, when the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is “0” (when “Yes” in step S1153), the item condition device number is stored in “_NB_CND_BNS” (step S1154), After that, a two-step lottery and a setting difference lottery are executed (step S1116).
For this reason, in the condition apparatus number set 4, even if it is judged whether the value of "_NB_CND_BNS" is "0" in the step before executing the two-step lottery and the setting difference lottery, it is a bonus condition for the current game. It can not be determined whether the device has been won or the item condition device has been won before the previous game.

Therefore, in the condition device number set 4, in step S1158 before performing the two-step lottery and the setting difference lottery, it is determined that the internal condition flag is on in this time by determining whether the inside flag is on or not. It is determined whether or not the item condition device has been won before the previous game.
Then, when the internal flag is off, it is determined that the bonus condition device has been won in the current game, and a two-step lottery and a setting differenceless lottery are executed (step S1116).

Further, in the condition device number set 4, in step S1152, a value indicating "character item condition device number" is stored in the E register, and a value indicating "winning and replay condition device number" is stored in the A register. Thereafter, in step S1154, the value of the E register (subject item condition device number) is stored in "_NB_CND_BNS", and in step S1155, the value of the A register (winning and replay condition device number) is stored in "_NB_CND_NOR".
Therefore, even if the value of the E register is destroyed after step S1154, the item condition device number is not lost, and even if the value of the A register is destroyed after step S1155, winning and replaying are not performed. The condition device number is never lost.

Also, in step S1156, the value of register C is stored in register A, and then the winning number is smaller than the start of the advantageous section conversion start number by subtracting "@NB_TRNS_AT" (= "38") from the value of register A. Determine if it is or not.
As described above, the conditional device number set 4 can use the E register for other processing after step S1154. Similarly, after step S1155, the A register can be used for other processing, and after step S1156, the C register can be used for other processing.
Note that, as another process, for example, an AT (instruction game section) addition lottery in the advantageous section can be mentioned.

  In condition device number set 4, it is determined in step S1158 whether the internal flag is on or not, so that the item condition device is won in the current game, or the item condition device is selected before the previous game. It is judged whether it is made, but it is not limited to this, for example, by judging whether it is RT4 corresponding inside or not, whether it wins the item condition device in this game or the condition condition device before the previous game You may decide whether you have won.

  In the present embodiment, a two-step lottery and a setting difference lottery are described as the transition lottery from the normal section to the advantageous section, but for example, at the start of the current game, “_NB_CND_AT” (storage area of advantageous section number) Even when a value other than “0” is stored, the addition of the advantageous section (the performance is changed so that the gaming state in the advantageous section becomes advantageous for the player, or the AT game in the advantageous section ) May be performed, and the value of “_NB_CND_AT” may be changed according to the result.

For example, under the situation where "1" is stored in "_NB_CND_AT" and the value of "_NB_CND_BNS" (storage area of the item condition device number) is "0", the winning number is determined to be "37". A control process may be performed to store "2" in "_NB_CND_AT" based on
In addition, under the circumstance that “1” is stored in “_NB_CND_AT” and the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is “0”, the drawing on the addition of the advantageous section based on the winning number being determined to be “37”. May be performed.

Furthermore, although the winning numbers "38" to "42" are treated as performing the transition lottery from the normal section to the advantageous section, the advantageous section is also obtained when these winning numbers are determined in the advantageous section. You may run a lottery on the top of the board.
As described above, when the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is “1” (so-called inside), for example, even if the winning number is determined to be “37”, the lottery regarding the addition of the advantageous section is not executed.

Eighteenth Embodiment
Subsequently, an eighteenth embodiment of the present invention will be described.
The winning number definitions for the winning numbers “1” to “30” are the same as the winning number definition (1) of the sixteenth embodiment shown in FIG. 74 (a).
Also, the winning number definitions for the winning numbers “31” to “42” are the same as the winning number definition (3) of the seventeenth embodiment shown in FIG. 93 (a).
Furthermore, the winning number conversion data definition is the same as the winning number conversion data definition of the seventeenth embodiment shown in FIG. 93 (d).
Furthermore, the winning number conversion table is the same as the winning number conversion table of the seventeenth embodiment shown in FIG.

FIG. 104 (a) is a diagram showing data definition for winning number lottery in the present embodiment.
The winning number identifier, the repetition number identifier, the identifier for each setting value, the 2-byte data identifier, the 1-byte data identifier, and the determination end identifier are the same as in the sixteenth embodiment.
The “advantage zone number 1 identifier” is an identifier indicating that the advantageous zone 1 has been won (decided to shift).

The “advantage zone number 2 identifier” is an identifier indicating that the advantageous zone 2 has been won (decided to shift).
The advantageous section number 1 identifier and the advantageous section number 2 identifier are collectively referred to as an "advantageous section number identifier".
The “favorable section number mask data” is data for masking (making “0”) bit data (bit 3 to bit 7) corresponding to identifiers other than the advantageous section number identifier.

And "@ LT_AT1 EQU 00000001B; advantageous section number 1 identifier" indicates that "@ LT_AT1" indicates "advantageous section number 1 identifier" and that the data corresponding to "@ LT_AT1" is "00000001 (B)" Means
Also, "@ LT_AT2 EQU 0000010 B; advantageous section number 2 identifier" indicates that "@ LT_AT2" indicates "advantageous section number 2 identifier" and that the data corresponding to "@ LT_AT2" is "00000010 (B)" Means
Furthermore, in "@MSK_AT 00000 001111B; advantageous section number mask data", "@MSK_AT" indicates "advantageous section number mask data", and the data corresponding to "@MSK_AT" is "00000111 (B)". It means that.

105 to 108 are diagrams showing the all RT common lottery table in the present embodiment.
FIG. 105 is a diagram showing an all-RT common lottery table (8). FIG. 106 is a diagram showing the all RT common lottery table (9) and is a diagram following FIG. Furthermore, FIG. 107 is a diagram showing the all RT common lottery table (10) and is a diagram following FIG. Further, FIG. 108 is a diagram showing the all RT common lottery table (11) and is a diagram following FIG.
The non-RT lottery table, the RT 1 lottery table, the RT 2 lottery table, the RT 3 lottery table, the RT 4 lottery table, the 1 BBA lottery table, and the 1 BB lottery table are the same as those in the sixteenth embodiment.

At the non-RT, RT1, RT2, RT3 or RT4, first, a lottery determination is made using the all RT common lottery table, and when the winning number is determined to be "00 (H)" at this time, Next, a lottery determination is performed using a lottery table according to RT, and when the winning number is determined to a value other than "00 (H)", the internal lottery is ended without using a lottery table according to RT. Is the same as in the sixteenth embodiment.
Furthermore, at 1 BBA, the lottery determination is performed using the 1 BBA lottery table, and at 1 BBB, the lottery determination is performed using the 1 BBB lottery table, as in the sixteenth embodiment.

Here, “DEFB @ LT_BYT OR @ LT_AT1; 1-byte data identifier;; + advantageous section number 1 identifier” in FIG. 106 is data obtained by ORing “@LT_BYT” and “@ LT_AT1”. It indicates that it is stored in the second line of "1 BBA condition device lottery data".
Here, as shown in FIG. 104A, “@LT_BYT” indicates a 1-byte data identifier, and its value is “00001000 (B)”.
Further, as shown in FIG. 104 (a), "@ LT_AT1" indicates an advantageous section number 1 identifier, and the value thereof is "00000001 (B)".

Furthermore, ORing “@LT_BYT” and “@ LT_AT1” gives
00001000 (B): @LT_BYT
00000001 (B): @ LT_AT1
00001001 (B): Data after OR operation.

In other words, "DEFB @ LT_BYT OR @ LT_AT1" indicates that "00001001 (B)" is stored in a predetermined 1-byte storage area on the ROM 54.
Thereby, the 1-byte data identifier and the advantageous section number 1 identifier can be represented by one 8-bit data.
Also, the comment “; 1-byte data identifier;; + advantageous section number 1 identifier” indicates that the data includes 1-byte data identifier and advantageous section number 1 identifier.

Furthermore, when “00001001 (B)” and “@MSK_AT” are ANDed,
00001001 (B): @LT_BYT OR @ LT_AT1
00000111 (B): @ MSK_AT
00000001 (B): Data after AND operation.
Thereby, “00000001 (B)” = “@ LT_AT1” (advantage zone number 1 identifier) can be acquired.

When the probability data is 1 byte and the winning of the advantageous section 1 is made, data including the 1 byte data identifier and the advantageous section number 1 identifier is stored in the lottery table.
In addition, when the probability data is 1 byte and winning in the advantageous section 2, data including the 1 byte data identifier and the advantageous section number 2 identifier is stored in the lottery table.

Furthermore, when the probability data is 2 bytes and winning in the advantageous section 1, data including the 2-byte data identifier and the advantageous section number 1 identifier is stored in the lottery table.
Furthermore, when the probability data is 2 bytes and the winning of the advantageous section 2 is made, data including the 1-byte data identifier and the advantageous section number 1 identifier is stored in the lottery table.

Moreover, the decision to shift to the advantageous section 1 or the advantageous section 2 must be linked to the condition device having no setting difference. That is, depending on the set value, the probability of shifting to the advantageous section 1 or the advantageous section 2 must not be different.
Therefore, one 8-bit data including the set value identifier and the advantageous section number 1 identifier is not stored in the lottery table.
Similarly, one 8-bit data including the set value identifier and the advantageous section number 2 identifier is not stored in the lottery table.

"Data for 1BBA condition device lottery" is defined in the all RT common lottery table (8) of FIG. 105, and "data for 1BBA condition device lottery" is also determined in the all RT common lottery table (9) of FIG. Also in the all RT common lottery table (10) of FIG. 107, “data for 1 BBA condition device lottery” is defined.
Here, when “data for 1BBA condition device lottery” in FIG. 105 is used, “@BBA” = “38” is set as the winning number data, and “10” is set as the probability data. Then, if it is determined at this time that the winning determination is made, the winning number is determined to be “38”, but since the advantageous section number identifier is not determined, the advantageous section is not elected.

Also, when “1 BBA condition device lottery data” in FIG. 106 is used, “@ BBA” = “38” is set as the winning number data, and “10” is set as the probability data. At this time, if it is determined to be a win in the judgment of success or failure, the winning number is determined to be “38” and the advantageous section number 1 identifier is determined.
Furthermore, even when “1 BBA condition device lottery data” in FIG. 107 is used, “@ BBA” = “38” is set as the winning number data, and “10” is set as the probability data. Then, at this time, if it is determined that the winning determination is made, the winning number is determined to be “38”, and the advantageous section number 2 identifier is determined, so that the advantageous section 2 is won.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the all RT common lottery table associates winning number data “38” with probability data “10”, and does not associate the advantageous section number identifier (data for 1BBA condition device lottery) 105), 1BBA condition device lottery data (FIG. 106) in which winning number data “38”, probability data “10” and advantageous section number 1 identifier are associated, winning number data “38” and probability data “10” "1 BBA condition device lottery data (FIG. 107)" in which the "2" and the advantageous section number 2 identifier are associated with each other is defined.
That is, a plurality of probability data are defined corresponding to one piece of winning number data. Then, among the plurality of probability data corresponding to one winning number data, one probability data is associated with data indicating transition from the normal section to the advantageous section 1 or the advantageous section 2, and the other one The probability data is not associated with data indicating transition from the normal section to the advantageous section.

For this reason, as described above, even when the winning number is determined to be the same "38" (if the single BBA condition device is elected alone), the advantageous section 1 is not selected and the advantageous section 1 is selected. There are times when the winning will be made and when the advantageous section 2 will be won.
Also for "1 BBA + small winning combination D condition device lottery data", "1 BBA + small winning combination E1 condition device lottery data", "small winning combination D condition device drawing data", and "small winning combination E1 condition device drawing data" This is the same as “1 BBA condition device lottery data”.

Further, in FIG. 105, “data for 1 BBA condition device lottery”, “data for 1 BBA + small player D condition device lottery”, “data for 1 BBA + small player E1 condition device lottery”, “data for small player D condition device lottery”, And about "the data for small winning combination E1 condition device lottery", what becomes non-winning in the advantageous section is defined as a group.
Furthermore, in FIG. 106, "data for 1BBA condition device lottery", "data for 1BBA + small player D condition device lottery", "data for 1BBA + small player E1 condition device lottery", "data for small player D condition device lottery" , And “small winning combination E1 condition device lottery data”, those which are elected to the advantageous section 1 are defined as a group.

Furthermore, in FIG. 107, “data for 1 BBA condition device lottery”, “data for 1 BBA + small player D condition device lottery”, “data for 1 BBA + small player E1 condition device lottery”, “data for small player D condition device lottery”, And "small part E1 condition device lottery data", those which are elected in the advantageous section 2 are defined as a group.
Thus, "group of lottery data not winning in advantageous section" → "group of lottery data winning in advantageous section 1" → "group of lottery data winning in advantageous section 2" By defining the data in the lottery table, it is sufficient to determine the winning number data only in the “1 BBA condition device lottery data”, and therefore, the amount of use of the ROM 54 by the lottery table can be reduced.

Specifically, the winning number definitions for the winning numbers “31” to “42” in the present embodiment are the same as the winning number definition (3) of the seventeenth embodiment shown in FIG. 93 (a).
That is, the winning number corresponding to “1BBA single winning” is “38”, the winning number corresponding to “1BBA + small winning combination D winning” is “39”, corresponding to “1BBA + small winning combination E1 double winning” The winning number is "40", the winning number corresponding to "small winning combination D single winning" is "41", and the winning number corresponding to "small winning combination E1 single winning" is "42".

Thus, from "1 BBA single winning" to "small winning combination E1 single winning", corresponding winning numbers are continuous.
Therefore, as shown in FIG. 105, if "@BBA" (= "38") is defined as winning number data for "1BBA condition device lottery data", for "1BBA + small winning combination D condition device lottery" As for the data, a value ("39") obtained by adding "1" to the winning number data ("38") of the "1 BBA condition device lottery data" can be used as winning number data.

Similarly, for “1 BBA + small combination E1 condition device lottery data”, a value obtained by adding “1” to the winning number data (“39”) of “1 BBA + small combination D condition device lottery data” "40" can be made the winning number data.
In addition, for “data for small part D condition device lottery”, the value (“41”) obtained by adding “1” to the winning number data (“40”) of “1BBA + small member E1 condition device lottery data” ) Can be the winning number data.
Furthermore, for "data for small winning combination E1 condition device lottery", a value ("42") obtained by adding "1" to the winning number data ("41") of "data for small winning combination D condition device drawing" Can be the winning number data.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 105, if the winning number data is determined only for "1BBA condition device lottery data", "1BBA + small combination D condition device lottery data", "1BBA + small combination E1 condition device lottery" Since it is not necessary to determine the winning number data for the data "data for the small winning combination D condition device lottery" and "data for the small winning combination E1 condition device lottery", the amount of use of the ROM 54 by the lottery table is reduced. Can.
Also from FIG. 106 “data for 1 BBA condition device lottery” to “data for small combination E 1 condition device lottery” and from “data for 1 BBA condition device lottery” in FIG. 107 to “data for small combination E 1 condition device lottery” From "data for 1 BBA condition device lottery" of 105, it is the same as "data for small winning combination E1 condition device lottery".

For example, “data for 1BBA condition device lottery not winning in advantageous section” → “data for 1BBA condition device lottery winning for advantageous section 1” → “data for 1BBA condition apparatus lottery winning for advantageous section 2” It is also possible to define data in the lottery table in the order of "."
However, in this case, since it is necessary to determine the winning number data for each lottery data, the use amount of the ROM 54 by the lottery table is increased accordingly.

Specifically, for example,
1BBA condition device lottery data DEFB @LT_NUM OR @BBA; Winning number data identifier
; + Winning number data DEFB @ LT_BYT; 1-byte data identifier DEFB 10; probability data (common to all settings)

1BBA condition device lottery data DEFB @LT_NUM OR @BBA; Winning number data identifier
; + + Winning number data DEFB @ LT_BYT OR @ LT_AT1; 1-byte data identifier
+; Advantageous section number 1 identifier DEFB 10; probability data (common to all settings)

1BBA condition device lottery data DEFB @LT_NUM OR @BBA; Winning number data identifier
; + + Winning number data DEFB @ LT_BYT OR @ LT_AT 2; 1-byte data identifier
+; Advantageous section number 2 identifier DEFB 10; probability data (common to all settings)
Thus, three types of "1 BBA condition device lottery data" can be determined continuously.

Then, for example,
; 1 BBA + data for the low winning combination D condition device lottery DEFB @ LT_NUM OR @ BBA_WD; winning number data identifier
+; Winning number data DEFB @ LT_BYT; 1-byte data identifier DEFB 5; Probability data (common to all settings)

; 1 BBA + data for the low winning combination D condition device lottery DEFB @ LT_NUM OR @ BBA_WD; winning number data identifier
; + + Winning number data DEFB @ LT_BYT OR @ LT_AT1; 1-byte data identifier
+; Advantageous section number 1 identifier DEFB 2; probability data (common to all settings)

; 1 BBA + data for the low winning combination D condition device lottery DEFB @ LT_NUM OR @ BBA_WD; winning number data identifier
; + + Winning number data DEFB @ LT_BYT OR @ LT_AT 2; 1-byte data identifier
+; Advantageous section number 2 identifier DEFB 3; probability data (common to all settings)
As described above, three types of “1 BBA + small combination D condition device lottery data” can be determined continuously.
However, in this case, since it is necessary to determine the winning number data for each lottery data, the use amount of the ROM 54 by the lottery table is increased accordingly.

FIG. 109 is a flow chart showing a flow of lottery processing of the condition device number etc. in the eighteenth embodiment.
Steps S1001 to S1004 and step S1006 are the same as in the sixteenth embodiment.
In the present embodiment, when the internal lottery 1 is executed in step S1004, the process proceeds to step S1201.

Furthermore, in step S1201, acquisition of advantageous section numbers (FIG. 110) is performed, and the process proceeds to step S1202.
Further, in step S1202, conditional device number set 5 (FIG. 111) is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1006.
In step S1006, rotation of all the reels 31 is started, and the player can stop the rotating reels 31 by operating the stop switch 42. Then, when the rotation of all the reels 31 is stopped, the process according to this flowchart is ended.

FIG. 110 is a flow chart showing a process flow of advantageous section number acquisition.
Moreover, advantageous section number acquisition is processing for acquiring an advantageous section number from data defined in the lottery table.
In step S1211, the main CPU 55 acquires data corresponding to the winning number.
Specifically, at the time of proceeding to step S1211, the HL register stores a value indicating the address of the data on the lottery table used in the internal lottery 1 (FIG. 87) and the lottery determination (FIG. 88).

For example, when “data for 1 BBA condition device lottery” of FIG. In this case, at the time of proceeding to step S1211, the HL register stores a value indicating the address of “DEFB @ LT_BYT”.
In addition, when “data for 1BBA condition device lottery” in FIG. 106 is used, it is determined that the winning determination is made by the determination of success or failure. In this case, at the time of proceeding to step S1211, the HL register stores a value indicating the address of “DEFB @ LT_BYT OR @ LT_AT1”.

Furthermore, it is assumed that when the “1 BBA condition device lottery data” of FIG. In this case, at the time of proceeding to step S1211, the HL register stores a value indicating the address of "DEFB @ LT_BYT OR @ LT_AT2".
Further, the process proceeds to “determination end” of FIG. In this case, at the time of proceeding to step S1211, the HL register stores a value indicating the address of “DEFB @ LT_END”.

Then, in step S1211, the main CPU 55 stores data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register in the B register.
For example, when the value indicating the address of “DEFB @ LT_BYT” in FIG. 105 is stored in the HL register, “DEFB @ LT_BYT” = “00001000 (B)” is stored in the B register.
When the value indicating the address of “DEFB @ LT_BYT OR @ LT_AT1” in FIG. 106 is stored in the HL register, “DEFB @ LT_BYT OR @ LT_AT1” = “00001001 (B)” is stored in the B register. .

Furthermore, when the value indicating the address of “DEFB @ LT_BYT OR @ LT_AT2” in FIG. 107 is stored in the HL register, “DEFB @ LT_BYT OR @ LT_AT2” = “00001010 (B)” is stored in the B register. Do.
Furthermore, when the value indicating the address of “DEFB @ LT_END” in FIG. 108 is stored in the HL register, “DEFB @ LT_END” = “00 (H)” is stored in the B register.
Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1212.

At step S1212, the main CPU 55 generates an advantageous section number from the acquired data.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 performs an AND operation on the data of the B register and "@ MSK_AT" (advantage zone number mask data = "00000111 (B)"), and the data obtained by this operation is added to a new B register. Data of

For example, when the data in register B is "00001000 (B)", "00000000 (B)" can be obtained by ANDing "00001000 (B)" and "00000111 (B)". Then, the obtained "00000000 (B)" is stored in the B register. In this case, the advantageous section is not won.
Further, when the data in the B register is "00001001 (B)", "00000001 (B)" is obtained by ANDing "00001001 (B)" and "00000111 (B)". Then, the obtained “00000001 (B)” (= “@ LT_AT1”: advantageous section number 1) is stored in the B register. In this case, it will be elected to the advantageous section 1 (decided to shift).

  Furthermore, when the data in the B register is "00001010 (B)", "00000010 (B)" is obtained by ANDing "00001010 (B)" and "00000111 (B)". Then, the obtained “00000010 (B)” (= “@ LT_AT2”: advantageous section number 2) is stored in the B register. In this case, it will be elected in the advantageous section 2 (decided to shift).

Furthermore, when the data in the B register is "00 (H)", "00000000 (B)" can be obtained by ANDing "00 (H)" and "00000111 (B)". Then, the obtained "00000000 (B)" is stored in the B register. In this case, the advantageous section is not won.
Then, the process according to this flowchart is ended.
In this embodiment, even when the winning number is determined to any number by internal lottery 1 and lottery determination, acquisition of the advantageous section number of FIG. 110 is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1212, and the advantageous section number is generated. , Store this in the B register.

FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing a process flow of the conditional device number set 5.
In step S1221, the main CPU 55 determines whether the winning number is smaller than the conversion start number.
Also, the contents of the specific processing in step S1221 are the same as step S1041 in FIG.

When it is determined in step S1221 that the winning number is smaller than the conversion start number (Yes), the process skips steps S1222 to S1226 and proceeds to step S1227.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1221 that the winning number is not less than the conversion start number (No), the process proceeds to the next step S1222.
In step S1221, it is determined whether or not a carry is generated by subtracting "31" from the value of the A register (winning number), but the value of the A register is maintained without being updated even after the subtraction. That is, even after subtraction, the value of the A register indicates the "winning number".

In the step S1222, the main CPU 55 acquires the condition device number from the winning number.
Here, in step S1112 of FIG. 99, a value indicating "character item condition device number" is stored in the E register, and a value indicating "winning and replay condition device number" is stored in the D register.
On the other hand, in step S1222, a value indicating "character item condition device number" is stored in the C register, and a value indicating "winning and replay condition device number" is stored in the A register.
Other than that, the content of the specific processing in step S1222 is the same as that of step S1112 in FIG.

In step S1223, the main CPU 55 determines whether the value stored in “_NB_CND_BNS” (storage area for the item condition device number) of the RWM 53 is “0”.
In other words, it is determined whether or not the current game is a game within the bonus.
If “0” is stored in “_NB_CND_BNS” of RWM 53, it is determined that the game is a bonus non-internal game, and if a value other than “0” is stored, the current game Is determined to be the game inside the bonus.

Also, the contents of specific processing in step S1223 are the same as step S1043 in FIG.
When it is determined in step S1223 that the item condition device number is “0” (Yes), the process proceeds to the next step S1224.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1223 that the item condition device number is other than "0" (No), steps S1224 to S1226 are skipped, and the process proceeds to step S1227.

In step S1224, the main CPU 55 determines whether the value stored in “_NB_CND_AT” (storage area of the advantageous section number) of the RWM 53 is “0”.
In other words, it is determined whether or not the current game is a game of a normal section.
In addition, when "0" is memorize | stored in "_NB_CND_AT" of RWM53, it is judged that a game is a game of a normal area this time, and when "1" is memorize | stored, a game is an advantageous area 1 of this time. It is determined that the game is a game, and when "2" is stored, it is determined that the current game is a game of the advantageous section 2.

Also, the contents of specific processing in step S1224 are the same as step S1044 in FIG.
When it is determined in step S1224 that the advantageous section number is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to the next step S1225.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1224 that the advantageous section number is other than "0" (No), step S1225 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S1226.

At step S1225, the main CPU 55 stores the advantageous section number.
Specifically, at the time of proceeding to step S125, the B register stores a value indicating an advantageous section number.
Then, the main CPU 55 stores the value of the B register in the storage area “_NB_CND_AT” of the RWM 53. Thereby, the advantageous section number is stored.

In the step S1226, the main CPU 55 stores the character article condition device number.
Specifically, at the time of proceeding to step S1046, a value indicating an item condition device number is stored in the C register.
Then, the main CPU 55 stores the value of the C register in the storage area “_NB_CND_BNS” of the RWM 53. This saves the item condition device number.

In the step S1227, the main CPU 55 stores the winning and replay condition device number.
Here, when “Yes” is determined in the step S1221 and the process proceeds to the step S1227, a value indicating “a winning number” is stored in the A register. Also, when “Yes” in step S1221 (when the winning number is smaller than the conversion start number), as shown in FIG. 74 (a), “winning number” = “winning and replay condition device number” It is determined in Therefore, when “Yes” is determined in step S1221 and the process proceeds to step S1227, the value of the A register indicates “winning and replay condition device number”.

Further, at step S1222, a value indicating "winning and replay condition device number" is stored in the A register. For this reason, also when proceeding to step S1227 via step S1222, the value of the A register indicates the "winning and replay condition device number".
Thus, at the time of proceeding to step S1227, the value indicating the winning and replay condition device number is stored in the A register.
Then, the main CPU 55 stores the value of the A register in the storage area “_NB_CND_NOR” of the RWM 53. Thereby, the winning and replay condition device number is stored.

As described above, when the result in step S1221 is "Yes" and the process proceeds to step S1227 and in step S1221 the process proceeds to "No", and the process proceeds to step S1227 through step S1222, the winning and replay condition device number is The processing stored in "_NB_CND_NOR" can be made common, and the amount of use of the ROM 54 by the program can be reduced.
Then, the process according to this flowchart is ended.

  In the present embodiment, the lottery concerning the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section has been described, but for example, a value other than “0” is stored in “_NB_CND_AT” (storage area of advantageous section number) at the start of the current game Even in the case where it is the case, it relates to the addition of the advantageous section (including changing the performance so that the gaming state in the advantageous section becomes advantageous to the player, and adding the number of AT games in the advantageous section). A lottery may be executed, and the value of “_NB_CND_AT” may be changed according to the result.

For example, under the situation where “1” is stored in “_NB_CND_AT” and the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” (storage area of the item condition device number) is “0”, a lottery may be executed regarding the addition of the advantageous section .
In addition, in the situation where “1” is stored in “_NB_CND_AT” and the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is “0”, the lottery concerning the addition of the advantageous section is executed, and “2” is made to “_NB_CND_AT” according to the result. A control process may be performed to store
In addition, when the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is “1” (so-called inside), the lottery regarding the addition of the advantageous section is not executed.

Nineteenth Embodiment
Subsequently, a nineteenth embodiment of the present invention will be described.
FIG. 112 (a) is a diagram showing a winning number definition (4) in the present embodiment.
Here, the winning number definition (4) in FIG. 112A indicates winning number definitions for the winning numbers “31” to “36”.
The winning number definitions for the winning numbers “1” to “30” are the same as the winning number definition (1) of the sixteenth embodiment shown in FIG. 74 (a).

As shown in FIGS. 74 (a) and 112 (a), in the present embodiment, the winning numbers are determined from the "1" to the "36".
Further, as shown in FIG. 112A, in the present embodiment, the winning numbers “31” and “35” correspond to the single winning of the item condition device, and the winning numbers “32” to “34”. The “number” and the “36” number correspond to the double winning of the item condition device and the winning and replay condition device.

FIG. 112 (b) is a diagram showing data definitions for winning number conversion and transition to advantageous section transition in the present embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 112 (c), “@ LOT_TRNS_AT1 EQU 167 + @ LOT_TRNS_AT2; advantageous section 1 transition judgment random number” corresponds to “@ LOT_TRNS_AT1” that “@ LOT_TRNS_AT1” indicates “advantage section 1 transition judgment random number”. The value to be stored means "167 + @ LOT_TRNS_AT2".
Also, “@ LOT_TRNS_AT2” = “178”.
Therefore, “@ LOT_TRNS_AT1” = “167 + 178” = “345”.

As shown in FIG. 112 (d), "@ LOT_TRNS_AT2 EQU 178; advantageous section 2 transition judgment random number" indicates that "@ LOT_TRNS_AT2" indicates "advantage section 2 transition judgment random number", a value corresponding to "@ LOT_TRNS_AT2" Means "178". That is, "@ LOT_TRNS_AT2" = "178".
The advantageous section 1 transition judgment random number and the advantageous section 2 transition judgment random number are collectively referred to as “advantage section transition judgment random number”.

FIG. 113 (a) is a diagram showing a winning number conversion table in the present embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 113 (a), the winning number conversion table corresponds from the winning number determined when the winning number determined by the winning number determining means is "31st" to "36th". It is used to determine the item condition device number and the winning and replay condition device number.

  As shown in FIG. 113 (b), "DEFB @ NB_1 BBA, 0; winning number 31" stores "@ NB_1 BBA" at address ### 0 (for example, address 1600 (H)), and address ### 1. This means that "0" is stored in (for example, the address 1601 (H)). As shown in FIG. 112 (b), “@ NB — 1 BBA” = “1”. Therefore, "1" is stored in the address ### 0, and "0" is stored in the address ### 1.

That is,
Address # # # 0 (address 1600 (H)) 1: Title condition device number Address # # # 1 (address 1601 (H) address) 0: winning and replay condition device number.
Then, each data stored in the address ### 0 and the address ### 1 is used when the winning number is determined to be "31".

  As shown in FIG. 113C, "DEFB @ NB_1 BBB, @ NB_WIN_D; winning number 32" stores "@ NB_1 BBB" at address ### 2 (for example, address 1602 (H)), and address ### It means that "@NB_WIN_D" is stored at 3 (for example, at address 1603 (H)). As shown in FIG. 112 (b), “@ NB — 1 BBB” = “2”. Further, as shown in FIG. 74, “@ NB_WIN_D” = “26”. Therefore, "2" is stored in the address ### 2 and "26" is stored in the address ### 3.

That is,
Address ### 2 (address 1602 (H)) 2: role-condition condition device number Address # ## 3 (address 1603 (H) address) 26: winning and replay condition device number
Then, each data stored in the address ### 2 and the address ### 3 is used when the winning number is determined to be "32".

The winning number lottery data definition is the same as the winning number lottery data definition of the sixteenth embodiment shown in FIG. 78 (a).
FIGS. 114, 115 and 116 are diagrams showing the all RT common lottery table in the present embodiment.
FIG. 114 is a diagram showing an all RT common lottery table (12). FIG. 115 is a diagram showing the all RT common lottery table (13) and is a diagram following FIG. Furthermore, FIG. 116 is a diagram showing the all RT common lottery table (14) and is a diagram following FIG.
The non-RT lottery table, the RT 1 lottery table, the RT 2 lottery table, the RT 3 lottery table, the RT 4 lottery table, the 1 BBA lottery table, and the 1 BB lottery table are the same as those in the sixteenth embodiment.

At the non-RT, RT1, RT2, RT3 or RT4, first, a lottery determination is made using the all RT common lottery table, and when the winning number is determined to be "00 (H)" at this time, Next, a lottery determination is performed using a lottery table according to RT, and when the winning number is determined to a value other than "00 (H)", the internal lottery is ended without using a lottery table according to RT. Is the same as in the sixteenth embodiment.
Furthermore, at 1 BBA, the lottery determination is performed using the 1 BBA lottery table, and at 1 BBB, the lottery determination is performed using the 1 BBB lottery table, as in the sixteenth embodiment.

FIG. 117 (a) is a figure which shows an advantageous section shift determination random number table.
The advantageous section transition determination random number table is used in the advantageous section transition lottery of FIG. 121 described later, and defines “@ LOT_TRNS_AT2” as a standard when it is determined that the advantageous section 2 is won (decided to shift). At the same time, "@ LOT_TRNS_AT1" is defined as a criterion for determining that the advantageous section 1 is won.
Then, when the random number value acquired from the random number generation means (counter) is smaller than "@ LOT_TRNS_AT2" (= "178"), it is determined to be elected in advantageous section 2, and from "@ LOT_TRNS_AT1" (= "345") When it is smaller, it is determined that the advantageous section 1 is won.

Here, “DEFW” is an assembly language that “secures two 1-byte (8-bit) areas in the address order in the memory, stores the lower 1 byte of 2-byte data in the previous address, and Stores the upper one byte of 2-byte data in
As shown in FIG. 117 (c), “DEFW @ LOT_TRNS_AT2; advantageous section number 2” is “@ LOT_TRNS_AT2” (= “178 (D)” = “=” at address ### 0 (for example, address 1700 (H)). "B2 (H)" which is the lower 1 byte of "00 B2 (H)" is stored, and "00 (H) which is the upper 1 byte of" @ LOT_TRNS_AT2 "at address ### 1 (for example, address 1701 (H)) Means to memorize ").

  As shown in FIG. 117 (d), “DEFW @ LOT_TRNS_AT1; advantageous section number 1” is “@ LOT_TRNS_AT1” (= “345 (D)” = “=” at address ### 2 (for example, address 1702 (H)). The lower one byte “59 (H)” of “0159 (H)” is stored, and the upper one byte “01 (H) of“ @ LOT_TRNS_AT1 ”is stored at address ### 3 (for example, address 1703 (H)). Means to memorize ").

That is,
Address ### 0 (address 1700 (H)) B2 (H): lower 1 byte address ## 1 (address 1701 (H)) 00 (H): upper 1 byte address ## # 2 (1702 (H) Address 59 (H): Lower 1 byte Address ### 3 (address 1703 (H)) 01 (H): Upper 1 byte.

FIG. 118 is a flow chart showing a flow of lottery processing of the condition device number etc. in the nineteenth embodiment.
Steps S1001 to S1003 and step S1006 are the same as in the sixteenth embodiment.
Further, in the present embodiment, if the blocker 45 is controlled so that the medal insertion is not permitted in step S1003, the process proceeds to step S1301.

Furthermore, when the processing proceeds to step S1301, the internal lottery 2 (FIG. 119) is executed, and the processing proceeds to step S1302.
Further, in step S1302, conditional device number set 6 (FIG. 120) is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1006.
In step S1006, rotation of all the reels 31 is started, and the player can stop the rotating reels 31 by operating the stop switch 42. Then, when the rotation of all the reels 31 is stopped, the process according to this flowchart is ended.

FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing the flow of the internal lottery 2 process.
In step S1311, the main CPU 55 stores a random number value in “_BF_RAND” (random number buffer).
Here, “_BF_RAND” is a 2-byte storage area on the RWM 53 that stores a random number value.
Then, when the main CPU 55 proceeds to step S1301, the random number value stored in the random number value register is first stored in the HL register, and then the random number value stored in the HL register is stored in the storage area “_BF_RAND of the RWM 53 Remember. By this, the random number value is stored in the random number buffer. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1312.

In step S1312, the main CPU 55 stores a random number value.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 stores the random number value stored in the HL register in the DE register. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1313.
In step S1313, the main CPU 55 sets a lottery table according to the operating state of the accessory (when 1BBA is activated, 1BBB is activated, or the accessory is not activated).
Also, the contents of specific processing in step S1313 are the same as step S1012 in FIG. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1314.

In step S 1314, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the bonus is at work.
Also, the contents of the specific processing in step S1314 are the same as step S1013 in FIG.
Then, when it is determined that it is at the time of the prize product operation (Yes), the process skips steps S1315 to S1317 and proceeds to step S1318.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the accessory function is not in operation (No), the process proceeds to the next step S1315.

In step S1315, the main CPU 55 executes lottery determination (FIG. 88) using the lottery table set in step S1313. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1316.
In step S1316, the main CPU 55 determines whether a lottery determination has been made.

Further, the contents of the specific processing in step S1316 are the same as step S1015 in FIG.
Then, if it is determined that the lottery determination is won (Yes), the processing according to this flowchart is ended by skipping steps S1317 and S1318.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the lottery determination did not win (No), the process proceeds to the next step S1317.

In step S1317, the main CPU 55 sets a lottery table according to the RT state (non-RT, RT1, RT2, RT3 or RT4).
Also, the contents of specific processing in step S1317 are the same as step S1016 in FIG. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1318.
In step S1318, the main CPU 55 executes lottery determination (FIG. 88) using the lottery table set in step S1313 or S1317. Specifically, at the time of role operation, lottery determination is performed using the lottery table set at step S1313, and at the time of role non-operation, the lottery determination is performed using the lottery table set at step S1317. Then, the process according to this flowchart is ended.

FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing a process flow of the conditional device number set 6.
In the condition device number set 6 in step S1302, the main CPU 55 first determines in step S1321 whether the winning number is smaller than the conversion start number.
Further, the contents of specific processing in step S1321 are the same as step S1041 in FIG.

When it is determined in step S1321 that the winning number is smaller than the conversion start number (Yes), step S1322 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S1323.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1321 that the winning number is equal to or more than the conversion start number (No), the process proceeds to the next step S1322.
In step S1321, although "31" is subtracted from the value of the A register (winning number) to determine whether or not a carry has occurred, the value of the A register is maintained without being updated even after the subtraction. That is, even after subtraction, the value of the A register indicates the "winning number".

In step S1322, the main CPU 55 acquires the condition device number corresponding to the winning number from the winning number conversion table of FIG. 113 (a).
Also, the contents of specific processing in step S1322 are the same as step S1222 in FIG. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1323.

In the step S1323, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the accessory is in operation.
Also, the contents of specific processing in step S1323 are the same as step S1013 in FIG.
Then, when it is determined that it is at the time of bonus function operation (Yes), the process skips steps S1324 to S1327 and proceeds to step S1328.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the accessory function is not in operation (No), the process proceeds to the next step S1324.

At step S1324, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the value stored in “_NB_CND_BNS” (storage area of the product condition device number) of the RWM 53 is “0”.
In other words, it is determined whether or not the current game is a game within the bonus.
Further, the contents of the specific processing in step S1324 are the same as step S1043 in FIG.

When it is determined in step S1324 that "0" is stored in "_NB_CND_BNS" of RWM 53 (Yes), it is determined that the current game is a bonus non-internal game, and the process proceeds to the next step S1325 .
On the other hand, when it is determined that the value other than "0" is stored ("No") in "_NB_CND_BNS" of RWM 53 in step S1324, it is determined that the current game is a game inside a bonus, and step S1325 Through S1327, the process proceeds to step S1328.

In step S 1325, the main CPU 55 determines whether the value stored in “_NB_CND_AT” (storage area of the advantageous section number) of the RWM 53 is “0”.
In other words, it is determined whether or not the current game is a game of a normal section.
Further, the contents of the specific processing in step S1325 are the same as step S1044 in FIG.

If it is determined in step S 1325 that “0” is stored in “_NB_CND_AT” of RWM 53 (Yes), it is determined that the current game is a game in the normal section, and the process proceeds to the next step S 1326.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1325 that "_NB_CND_AT" of RWM 53 stores a value other than "0" (No), it is determined that the current game is a game of the advantageous section, and step S1326 is performed. Skip and proceed to step S1327.

In step S 1326, the main CPU 55 executes an advantageous section transition lottery (FIG. 121). Then, when the advantageous section transition lottery is executed, the process proceeds to the next step S1327.
At step S1327, the main CPU 55 stores the character article condition device number.
Specifically, at the time of proceeding to step S1327, the C register stores a value indicating an item condition device number.
Then, the main CPU 55 stores the value of the C register in the storage area “_NB_CND_BNS” of the RWM 53. This saves the item condition device number. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1328.

In the step S1328, the main CPU 55 stores the winning and replay condition device number.
Here, when “Yes” is determined in the step S1321 and the process skips the step S1322 and proceeds to the step S1328, a value indicating “a winning number” is stored in the A register. Also, when “Yes” in step S1321 (when the winning number is smaller than the conversion start number), as shown in FIG. 74 (a), “winning number” = “winning and replay condition device number” It is determined in Therefore, when the determination in step S1321 is "Yes" and the process skips step S1322 and proceeds to step S1328, the value of the A register indicates "winning and replay condition device number".

In addition, "No" is determined in step S1321, and when the process proceeds to step S1322, a value indicating "winning and replay condition device number" is stored in the A register. For this reason, "No" is determined in step S1321, and after step S1322, when the process proceeds to step S1328, the value of the A register indicates "winning and replay condition device number".
Thus, at the time of proceeding to step S1328, the value indicating the winning and replay condition device number is stored in the A register.

Then, in step S1328, the main CPU 55 stores the value of the A register in the storage area “_NB_CND_NOR” of the RWM 53. Thereby, the winning and replay condition device number is stored.
As described above, when "Yes" is made in step S1321 and step S1322 is skipped, the process proceeds to step S1328 and when "No" in step S1321 and after step S1322 proceeds to step S1328, winning is achieved. The processing for storing the replay condition device number in “_NB_CND_NOR” can be made common, and the amount of use of the ROM 54 by the program can be reduced.
Then, the process according to this flowchart is ended.

FIG. 121 is a flowchart showing a flow of processing of the advantageous section transition lottery.
In addition, in the advantageous section transition lottery, random number values acquired from the random number generation means (counter), “@ LOT_TRNS_AT1” (the advantageous section 1 transition judgment random number) and “@ LOT_TRNS_AT2” (the advantageous section) defined in the advantageous section transition judgment random number table (2) It is a process of determining whether to shift to the advantageous section 1, to shift to the advantageous section 2, or not to shift to the advantageous section based on (2 transition judgment random numbers).

In step S 1326, the main CPU 55 sets an initial value of the number of determinations.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 stores “2” in the B register as an initial value of the number of determinations. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1332.
In the step S1332, the main CPU 55 sets an address of the advantageous section transition judgment random number.

Specifically, the main CPU 55 stores the top address of “TBL_AT_RAND” (advantage zone shift determination random number table) in the HL register. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1333.
At step S1333, the main CPU 55 acquires a random number value.
Specifically, at the time of proceeding to step S1333, the storage area “_BF_RAND” (random number buffer) of the RWM 53 stores the random number value acquired from the random number generation means (counter). Then, the main CPU 55 stores the random number value stored in “_BF_RAND” in the DE register. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1334.

In step S1334, the main CPU 55 determines whether the acquired random value is smaller than the advantageous section transition determination random number.
Specifically, main CPU 55 subtracts data (advantage zone shift judgment random number) corresponding to the address indicated by HL register from the data (random number value) of DE register, and judges whether or not carry is generated by subtraction. Do.

Here, when it is determined that a carry is generated by the subtraction, it is determined that the random number value is smaller than the advantageous section shift determination random number (Yes), and steps S1335 to S1337 are skipped, and the process proceeds to step S1338.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the carry is not generated by the subtraction, it is determined that the random number value is equal to or more than the advantageous section shift determination random number (No), and the process proceeds to the next step S1335.
In step S1334, data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register (random transition determination random number) is subtracted from the data (random number value) of the DE register to determine whether a carry has occurred or not. Even the data in the DE register is maintained without updating. That is, even after the subtraction, the data in the DE register indicates a "random number value".

In step S 1335, the main CPU 55 updates the address of the advantageous section transition determination random number.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 repeats twice adding “1” to the value of the HL register to obtain a new value of the HL register. That is, "2" is added to the value of the HL register. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1336.
In step S1336, the main CPU 55 updates the number of determinations.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 subtracts “1” from the value of the B register to obtain a new value of the B register. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1337.

In step S1137, the main CPU 55 determines whether to end the determination.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 determines whether the value of the B register is “0”.
If it is determined that the value of the B register is “0” (Yes), the process proceeds to the next step S1338.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the value of the B register is not “0” (No), the process returns to step S1334.
Thereby, it is determined at the first time whether or not a carry is generated by subtracting the advantageous section 2 transition judgment random number from the random number value, and for the second time, the advantageous section 1 transition judgment random number is subtracted from the random number value to carry It will be determined whether or not it has occurred.

In step S1338, the main CPU 55 stores the number of determinations as an advantageous section number.
Specifically, the main CPU 55 stores the value of the B register in the storage area “_NB_CND_AT” of the RWM 53. Thereby, the advantageous section number is stored.
Then, the process according to this flowchart is ended.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when predetermined conditions are satisfied (not at the time of item operation ("No" in step S1323 in FIG. 120)) and not inside ("Yes" at step S1324) And when it is not an advantageous section ("Yes" in step S1325), an advantageous section transition lottery is executed (proceed to step S1326).

In addition, in the advantageous section transition lottery, when the random number value acquired from the random number generation means is smaller than "@ LOT_TRNS_AT2" (the advantageous section 2 transition judgment random number = "178"), it is elected to the advantageous section 2 ).
That is, when the random number value acquired from the random number generation means belongs to the range of “0” to “177”, the advantageous section 2 is won.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 114, “probability data” is totaled for “small part D condition device and advantageous section No. 2 lottery data” to “1 BBA + small part E1 condition apparatus and advantageous section No. 2 lottery data”. Then, “30” + “125” + “10” + “3” + “10” = “178”.
For this reason, in the lottery of the condition device, when the random number value obtained from the random number generation means falls within the range of “0” to “177”, as shown in FIG. The combination winning combination of the combination E1 condition device, the combination selection of the 1 BBA condition device, the combination of the 1 BBA condition device and the small combination D condition device, or the combination of the 1 BBA condition device and the small combination E1 condition device.

Further, in the advantageous section transition lottery, when the random number value obtained from the random number generation means is smaller than "@ LOT_TRNS_AT1" (the advantageous section 1 transition judgment random number = "345"), it is elected to the advantageous section 1 (decided to shift ).
However, as described above, when the random number value acquired from the random number generation means falls within the range of “0” to “177”, the advantageous section 2 is won.
Therefore, when the random number value acquired from the random number generation means belongs to the range of "178" to "344", the winning of the advantageous section 1 is made.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 114, “probability data” is totaled for “small part D condition device and advantageous section No. 1 lottery data” to “1 BBA + small part E1 condition apparatus and advantageous section No. 1 lottery data”. Then, “20” + “125” + “10” + “2” + “10” = “167”.
Furthermore, “Probability data” is “178” when “Probability data” is summed up from “Small-player D condition device and advantageous section number 2 lottery data” to “1BBA + small-combination E1 conditional device and advantageous section number 2 lottery data”. It becomes "345" if "167" is added to.

  For this reason, in the lottery of the condition device, when the random number value acquired from the random number generation means falls within the range of "178" to "344", as shown in FIG. The combination winning combination of the combination E1 condition device, the combination selection of the 1 BBA condition device, the combination of the 1 BBA condition device and the small combination D condition device, or the combination of the 1 BBA condition device and the small combination E1 condition device.

Further, the all RT common lottery table is commonly used in non-RT, RT1, RT2, RT3 and RT4, and when this all RT common lottery table is used, A single winning combination, a single winning combination of a small winning combination E1 condition device, a single winning combination of a 1 BBA limiting device, a double winning combination of a 1 BBA limiting device and a small winning combination D condition device, or a double winning combining of a 1 BBA limiting device and a small winning combination E1 conditional device.
For this reason, in the present embodiment, although the replay condition device has non-RT, RT1, RT2, RT3 and RT4 having different winning probabilities, the random number value acquired from the random number generation means falls within the range of "0" to "344". The condition device to be won when belonging is the same regardless of whether it is non-RT, RT1, RT2, RT3, or RT4.

  In the present embodiment, the lottery concerning the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section has been described, but for example, a value other than “0” is stored in “_NB_CND_AT” (storage area of advantageous section number) at the start of the current game Even in the case where it is the case, it relates to the addition of the advantageous section (including changing the performance so that the gaming state in the advantageous section becomes advantageous to the player, and adding the number of AT games in the advantageous section). A lottery may be executed, and the value of “_NB_CND_AT” may be changed according to the result.

For example, under the situation where “1” is stored in “_NB_CND_AT” and the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” (storage area of the item condition device number) is “0”, a lottery may be executed regarding the addition of the advantageous section .
In addition, in the situation where “1” is stored in “_NB_CND_AT” and the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is “0”, the lottery concerning the addition of the advantageous section is executed, and “2” is made to “_NB_CND_AT” according to the result. A control process may be performed to store
In addition, when the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is “1” (so-called inside), the lottery regarding the addition of the advantageous section is not executed.

<Modification of Nineteenth Embodiment>
Subsequently, a modification of the nineteenth embodiment of the present invention will be described.
The modification of the nineteenth embodiment is different from the nineteenth embodiment in the processing of the condition device number set.
In the processing of the condition device number set 6 of the nineteenth embodiment, an advantage segment transition lottery is performed to store the advantage segment number in "_NB_CND_AT", and thereafter, the article condition device number is stored in "_NB_CND_BNS", and a winning is achieved. And the replay condition device number is stored in "_NB_CND_NOR".

  On the other hand, in the condition device number set 7 of the modification of the nineteenth embodiment, the character article condition device number is stored in "_NB_CND_BNS", and the winning and replay condition device number is stored in "_NB_CND_NOR", and thereafter, Perform an advantageous section transition lottery and store the advantageous section number in “_NB_CND_AT”.

FIG. 122 is a flow chart showing a flow of lottery processing of the condition device number etc. in the modification of the nineteenth embodiment.
Steps S1001 to S1003 and step S1006 are the same as in the sixteenth embodiment.
Step S1301 is similar to that of the nineteenth embodiment, and step S1052 is similar to that of the modification of the sixteenth embodiment.
Furthermore, in the present embodiment, when the internal lottery 2 is executed in step S1301, the process proceeds to step S1341.
Then, in step S1341, the conditional device number set 7 (FIG. 123) is executed, and the process proceeds to step S1006.

FIG. 123 is a flowchart showing a process of the condition device number set 7.
In step S1351, the main CPU 55 determines whether the winning number is smaller than the conversion start number.
Further, the contents of the specific processing in step S1351 are the same as step S1041 in FIG.

When it is determined in step S1351 that the winning number is smaller than the conversion start number (Yes), steps S1352 to S1354 are skipped, and the process proceeds to step S1355.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1351 that the winning number is not less than the conversion start number (No), the process proceeds to the next step S1352.
In step S 1351, “31” is subtracted from the value of the A register (winning number) to determine whether or not a carry has occurred, but the value of the A register is maintained without being updated even after the subtraction. That is, even after subtraction, the value of the A register indicates the "winning number".

In the step S1352, the main CPU 55 acquires the condition device number corresponding to the winning number from the winning number conversion table of FIG. 113 (a).
Further, the contents of specific processing in step S1352 are the same as step S1222 in FIG. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1323.

In step S1353, the main CPU 55 determines whether the character article condition device number is “0”.
Further, the contents of the specific processing in step S1353 are the same as step S1043 in FIG.
If it is determined in step S1353 that the item condition device number is “0” (Yes), the process proceeds to the next step S1354.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1353 that the character article condition device number is other than "0" (No), step S1354 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S1355.

At step S1354, the main CPU 55 stores the character article condition device number.
Specifically, at the time of proceeding to step S1354, the C register stores a value indicating an item condition device number.
Then, the main CPU 55 stores the value of the C register in the storage area “_NB_CND_BNS” of the RWM 53. This saves the item condition device number. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S1355.

In step S1355, the main CPU 55 saves the winning and replay condition device number.
Here, when “Yes” is determined in the step S1351 and the process skips the step S1352 and proceeds to the step S1355, a value indicating “a winning number” is stored in the A register. Also, when “Yes” in step S 1351 (when the winning number is smaller than the conversion start number), as shown in FIG. 74 (a), “winning number” = “winning and replay condition device number” It is determined in Therefore, when the determination in step S1351 is "Yes" and the process skips step S1352 and proceeds to step S1355, the value of the A register indicates "winning and replay condition device number".

Also, “No” is determined in step S1351, and when the process proceeds to step S1352, a value indicating “winning and replay condition device number” is stored in the A register. For this reason, "No" is determined in step S1351, and after step S1352, when the process proceeds to step S1355, the value of the A register indicates "winning and replay condition device number".
Thus, at the time of proceeding to step S1355, the value indicating the winning and replay condition device number is stored in the A register.

Then, in step S1355, the main CPU 55 stores the value of the A register in the storage area “_NB_CND_NOR” of the RWM 53. Thereby, the winning and replay condition device number is stored.
As described above, when the result in step S1351 is "Yes" and the process proceeds to step S1355, and in step S1351 is "No" and the process proceeds to step S1355 through step S1352, the winning and replay condition device number is The processing stored in "_NB_CND_NOR" can be made common, and the amount of use of the ROM 54 by the program can be reduced.

In step S1356, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the bonus is in operation.
Also, the contents of the specific processing in step S1356 are the same as step S1013 in FIG.
Then, when it is determined that it is not at the time of bonus product operation (No), the process proceeds to the next step S1357.
On the other hand, when it is determined that it is at the time of bonus product operation (Yes), the processing according to this flowchart is ended by skipping steps S1357 to S1326.

In step S1357, the main CPU 55 determines whether the in-internal flag is on.
The specific content of the process in step S1357 is the same as that in step S1078 in FIG.
If it is determined in step S1357 that the internal flag is off (No), the process proceeds to the next step S1358.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step S1357 that the in-internal flag is on (Yes), steps S1358 and S1326 are skipped, and the processing according to this flowchart ends.

In step S1358, the main CPU 55 determines whether the advantageous section number is "0".
The specific content of the process in step S1358 is similar to that of step S1044 in FIG.
When it is determined in step S1358 that the advantageous section number is "0" (Yes), the process proceeds to the advantageous section transition lottery in step S1326 (FIG. 121).
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S1358 that the advantageous section number is other than "0" (No), the advantageous section transition lottery in step S1326 (FIG. 121) is skipped, and the processing according to this flowchart is ended. .

In step S 1326, the main CPU 55 executes an advantageous section transition lottery (FIG. 121). Then, when the advantageous section transition lottery is ended, the processing according to the present flowchart is ended.
The contents of the processing of the advantageous section transition lottery in step S1326 are the same as in the nineteenth embodiment.

Here, in the condition device number set 7, when the winning numbers determined by the internal lottery 2 and the lottery determination are the “31” th to the “36th”, the prize condition device wins.
In this case, when the value of "_NB_CND_BNS" is "0" (when "Yes" in step S1353), the item condition device number is stored in "_NB_CND_BNS" (step S1354), and the value of "_NB_CND_BNS" is " When the value is other than 0 (when “No” in step S1353), the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is maintained (step S1354 is skipped).

Also, in condition device number set 7, when the role is in operation (when the value of "_FL_ACTION" is not "0"), the internal flag is on (the value of "_FL_PRD_LOT" is "FF (H)". When there is no) and the advantageous section number is not “0” (the value of “_NB_CND_AT” is not “0”), the advantageous section transition lottery is not executed (step S1326 is skipped).
And, it is at the time of role non-operation (the value of “_FL_ACTION” is “0”), and the internal flag is off (the value of “_FL_PRD_LOT” is “0”), and the advantageous section number is When it is “0” (when the value of “_NB_CND_AT” is “0”), the advantageous section transition lottery is executed (proceed to step S1326).
This makes it possible to execute processing relating to the advantageous section transition lottery without requiring complicated processing.

Further, in the condition device number set 7, the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” when the winning number determined by the internal lottery 2 and the lottery determination is the “31” number to the “36” number for winning the item condition device. If is "0"("Yes" in step S1353), the character article condition device number is stored in "_NB_CND_BNS" (step S1354), and then an advantageous section transition lottery is executed (step S1326).
For this reason, in the condition device number set 7, even if it is judged whether the value of "_NB_CND_BNS" is "0" in the step before executing the advantageous section transition lottery, the item condition device is won in the game this time It is not possible to determine whether the player has won the item condition device before the previous game.

Therefore, in condition device number set 7, it is determined whether or not the inside flag is turned on in step S1357 before the advantageous section transition lottery is executed, and whether or not the item condition device was won in the current game, or last time It is determined whether or not the item condition device is won before the game.
Then, when the internal flag is off, it is determined that the item condition device has been won in the current game, and an advantageous section transition lottery is executed (step S1326).

  Further, in the condition device number set 7, in step S1352, a value indicating "character item condition device number" is stored in the C register, and a value indicating "winning and replay condition device number" is stored in the A register. Thereafter, in step S1354, the value of the C register (subject item condition device number) is stored in "_NB_CND_BNS", and in step S1355, the value of the A register (winning and replay condition device number) is stored in "_NB_CND_NOR".

Therefore, even if the value of the C register is destroyed after step S1354, the item condition device number is not lost, and even if the value of the A register is destroyed after step S1355, winning and replaying are not performed. The condition device number is never lost.
Therefore, condition device number set 7 may use C register for other processing after step S1354, and may use A register for other processing after step S1355. it can.
Note that, as another process, for example, an AT (instruction game section) addition lottery in the advantageous section can be mentioned.

In condition device number set 7, it is determined in step S1357 whether the internal flag is on or not, so that the item condition device is won in the current game, or the item condition device is selected before the previous game. I judged what I did.
However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, by determining whether or not the corresponding RT4 is inside in step S1357, whether or not the item condition device is won in the current game, or in the item condition device before the previous game You may decide whether you have won.

Furthermore, in condition device number set 7, it is at the time of combination product non-operation ("No" at step S1356), and the internal flag is off ("No" at step S1357), and the advantageous section number is "0." When it is ""("Yes" in step S1358), the advantageous section transition lottery is executed (step S1326).
However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, when the accessory is in operation, when the internal flag is on, and when the advantageous section number is not "0", the advantageous section transition lottery may be executed. In this case, even if the advantageous section transition lottery is executed, the advantageous section number is maintained by skipping step S1338 of FIG. 121 (the value of “_NB_CND_AT” is maintained).

The sixteenth to nineteenth embodiments of the present invention have been described above. However, the present invention is not limited to the contents described above, and various modifications may be made as described below, for example.
(1) In the sixteenth to nineteenth embodiments, two types of the advantageous section 1 and the advantageous section 2 are provided as the advantageous sections. In addition, in the normal section, it was determined whether to shift to the advantageous section 1 or the advantageous section 2. And if it wins in the advantageous section 1 (decided to shift), it shifts to the gaming state of the cassette which does not have the right to shift to ART, and if it wins in the advantageous section 2, it can shift to ART After the precursory, it was transferred to ART. However, it is not limited to this.

For example, only one type of advantageous section may be used, and in a normal section, it may be determined whether to shift to the advantageous section.
Then, when winning in the advantageous section (deciding to shift), it may be uniformly shifted to the upper limit of 1500 gaming advantageous sections.
In this case, the value of “_NB_CND_AT” is, for example, “00000000 (B)” in the normal section, and “00000001 (B)” in the advantageous section. Thereby, it is possible to manage whether it is a normal section or an advantageous section by 1-bit data.

Furthermore, in the game of the advantageous section, the conditions for falling to the normal section (for example, the fact that the number of executed games for ART has become a specific value, the winning of the falling lottery, the execution of the predetermined number of games, etc.) are satisfied. It may be made to shift to a normal section at the same time.
Further, for example, three types of the advantageous section 1 to the advantageous section 3 may be provided as the advantageous section, and in the normal section, it may be determined to which of the advantageous section 1 to the advantageous section 3 to shift. And if it wins in advantageous section 1, it will shift to the advantageous section of 500 games, if it wins in advantageous section 2, it will shift to the advantageous section of 1000 games, and if it wins in advantageous section 3, it will shift to the advantageous section of 1500 games It is also good.

(2) In the sixteenth to nineteenth embodiments, it is determined whether to add the number of games in the advantageous section. However, it is not limited to this.
For example, in the case where ART is executed during the advantageous section, when the winning number corresponding to the addition of the advantageous section is determined, the number of games that can be executed ART in the advantageous section is increased uniformly or by lottery. You may

Also, for example, in the case where a Gase game (a gaming state in which the advantageous section display LED 77 is on but not having the right to shift to ART) is executed during the advantageous section, a winning corresponding to the addition of the advantageous section When the number is determined, the right to transition to ART may be granted uniformly or by lottery.
As described above, instead of adding the number of games in the advantageous section, the gaming state (performance of the advantageous section) in the advantageous section may be changed to be advantageous to the player.

(3) In the normal section, when winning in the advantageous section (decided to shift), the next game may be shifted to the advantageous section, and the next game is shifted to the standby section, and then the standby section It is possible to shift to the advantageous section.
That is, in the sixteenth to nineteenth embodiments, "winning in the advantageous section" is not limited to shifting from the next game to the advantageous section, and shifts from the next game to the standby section, and thereafter from the standby section It is a concept that includes transitioning to an advantageous section.
Also, when transitioning from a normal section to a standby section, information indicating that it is a standby section is stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53, and when transitioning from a standby section to an advantageous section is information indicating that it is an advantageous section. May be stored in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53.

(4) In the sixteenth to nineteenth embodiments, when the value of bit 2 of “_FL_ACTION” is “1”, it indicates that the accessory is in operation, and when it is “0”, the bonus is in non-operation. Showed that.
Also, when the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is “0”, it indicates that the item condition device has not been won, and when other than “0”, it indicates that the item condition device has been won.
Furthermore, when the value of “_NB_CND_AT” is “0”, it indicates that the player is not elected to the advantageous section (decided to shift), and when it is “1”, it indicates that the advantageous section 1 is elected. , "2" indicates that it has been elected to the advantageous section 2.

Furthermore, when the value of “_FL_PRD_LOT” is “FF (H)”, it indicates that the in-internal flag is on, and when it is “0”, indicates that the in-internal flag is off.
However, it is possible to appropriately set not only the value “1” / “0” of the value of the bit 2 of “_FL_ACTION” but also indicating when the item is in operation or not in operation.
The winning / non-winning of the item condition device, the winning / non-winning of the advantageous section, and the on / off of the internal flag can similarly be set appropriately without being limited to the above embodiment.

(5) In the sixteenth to nineteenth embodiments, a 1-byte storage area on the RWM 53 is secured as “_NB_CND_AT”. However, the storage area for storing the advantageous section number is not limited to a 1-byte storage area.
As described above, for example, it is possible to determine only one type of advantageous section, and in a normal section, whether or not to shift to the advantageous section. In this case, a specific bit (for example, bit 0) of the 1-byte storage area on the RWM 53 can be used as a storage area for storing the advantageous section number. That is, the 1-bit storage area may be a storage area for storing the advantageous section number or information indicating that the current game section is the advantageous section.

Similarly, “_NB_CND_BNS” is not limited to a 1-byte storage area.
For example, of the 1-byte storage area on RWM 53, a specific bit (for example, bit 0) is a storage area for storing an advantageous interval number, and a predetermined bit (for example, bit 1) is a storage for storing an item condition device number It can be an area.
This makes it possible to reduce the amount of RWM 53 used by the program.

  (6) In the sixteenth embodiment, when it is determined in step S1043 of FIG. 89 that "_NB_CND_BNS" stores a value other than "0", steps S1044 to S1046 are skipped to set "_NB_CND_BNS". The value and the value of "_NB_CND_AT" were maintained. However, it is not limited to this.

For example, when “00000001 (B)” is stored in “_NB_CND_BNS” and “00000001 (B)” is stored in “_NB_CND_AT”, “0000001 (B)” is overwritten in “_NB_CND_BNS”, and The value of “_NB_CND_BNS” and the value of “_NB_CND_AT” may be maintained by overwriting “0000001 (B)” on “_NB_CND_AT”.
As described above, in the sixteenth to nineteenth embodiments, when maintaining the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” or the value of “_NB_CND_AT”, the same value is not limited to the case of maintaining by skipping (not updating). You may maintain by doing.

  (7) In the sixteenth embodiment, the winning number is determined as shown in FIGS. 74 (a) and 75 (a). In the seventeenth embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 74 (a) and 93 (a), the winning number is determined. Furthermore, in the eighteenth embodiment, the winning number is determined as shown in FIGS. 74 (a) and 112 (a). About these, it has regularity as shown below, and, thereby, there exists an effect as shown below.

  A. As shown in FIG. 74 (a), for winning numbers less than “31”, “winning number” and “winning and replay condition device number” are determined to match, and “1” to “1. It is determined that the number 30 'is continuous.

As described above, for the winning numbers less than the specific value (for example, "31"), the winning numbers determined in the lottery determination can be determined by matching the "winning number" and the "winning and replay condition device number". When it is determined that the number is less than the specific value, the "winning number" determined in the lottery determination can be made a predetermined storage area ("_NB_CND_NOR") of the RWM 53 as the "winning and replay condition device number". .
Therefore, the process of storing the "winning and replay condition device number" in "_NB_CND_NOR" can be simplified, so that the amount of use of the ROM 54 by the program can be reduced.

B. As shown in FIG. 74 (a), the “winning number” and the “winning and replay condition device number” are determined to coincide with each other for the winning numbers less than “31”, and FIG. 112 (a) As shown, for a winning number of “31” or more, a lottery result including the item condition device is obtained (a single selection of the item condition device, or a double winning of the item condition device and the prize condition and replay condition device) To be
In this way, for winning numbers less than a specific value (for example, "31"), "winning number" and "winning and replay condition device number" are determined to match, and for winning numbers more than a specific value, It can be determined to be a lottery result including the role condition device.

In this case, it is determined whether or not the winning number determined in the lottery determination is less than the specific value.
Then, when it is determined that it is less than the specific value, the "winning number" determined by the lottery determination is stored as a "winning and replay condition device number" in a predetermined storage area ("_NB_CND_NOR") of the RWM 53.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the specified value or more, for example, using the "winning number conversion table" shown in FIG. 113 (a), from the "winning number" determined in the lottery determination, "character item conditions The device number and the winning and replay condition device number are obtained respectively. Then, the acquired "subject condition apparatus number" is stored in a specific storage area ("_NB_CND_BNS") of RWM 53, and the acquired "winning and replay condition apparatus number" is stored in a predetermined storage area ("_NB_CND_NOR") of RWM 53. Store in).

As described above, the winning number equal to or higher than the specific value can be determined by dividing the winning number corresponding to the winning and replay condition device number and the winning number resulting in the lottery result including the item condition device with reference to the specific value. Since it is only necessary to determine the winning number conversion table, it is possible to reduce the usage of the ROM 54 by the winning number conversion table.
In addition, it is possible to determine whether or not the winning number requiring the winning number conversion table can be determined by determining whether the winning number determined in the lottery determination is less than the specific value. Can be simplified, so that the amount of use of the ROM 54 by the program can be reduced.

  Furthermore, by determining one winning number based on one random number value by lottery determination, a lottery result in which the winning condition and the replay condition device become single winning, a lottery result in which the item condition device becomes single winning, It is possible to obtain a lottery result in which the combination condition condition device and the winning and replay condition device are dually won. Therefore, the process of lottery determination (the process of determining the winning number from the random number value) can be simplified, so that the amount of use of the ROM 54 by the program can be reduced.

C. As shown in FIG. 75 (a), for the winning numbers “34” to “42”, it is determined that the process relating to the addition of the advantageous section can be performed.
Further, in FIG. 75 (a), it is determined that processing relating to the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section (the advantageous section 1 or the advantageous section 2) can be performed for the winning numbers “43” to “52”. However, when the winning number is determined to be "43" to "52" in the advantageous section, it may be determined that the process relating to the addition of the advantageous section can be performed.

  In addition, the addition of the number of games in the advantageous section means adding (increasing, increasing) the number of games in the advantageous section, and when performing ART during the advantageous section, the number of games of ART in the advantageous section is added (additional, In the case of performing increase), Gasse game during the advantageous section (playing state where the advantageous section display LED 77 is on but not having the right to shift to ART), the transition is made to ART in the advantageous section It is a concept that includes

As described above, it is determined that the process relating to the addition of the advantageous section can be executed for the winning numbers above the predetermined value (for example, “34”), and the winning numbers determined by the lottery determination are at the predetermined value or more. When it is determined that there is, it is possible to execute processing concerning the addition of the advantageous section.
Therefore, the program can be simplified because it can be determined whether or not the process relating to the addition of the advantageous section is to be performed by determining whether or not the winning number determined in the lottery determination is equal to or greater than a predetermined value. As a result, the amount of use of the ROM 54 by the program can be reduced.

D. As shown in FIG. 75 (a), for the winning numbers "43" to "52", it is determined that processing relating to transition from the normal section to the advantageous section (the advantageous section 1 or the advantageous section 2) can be performed. ing.
In addition, when it wins in the advantageous section 1 (decided to shift), it shifts to the gaming state of the cassette which does not have the right to shift to ART, and when it wins in the advantageous section 2, it can shift to ART Move to ART after the aura.

As described above, the winning number determined in the lottery determination is determined by defining that the process relating to the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section can be performed for the winning numbers above the prescribed value (for example, "43"). When it is determined that the value is equal to or greater than the specified value, processing relating to the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section can be performed.
Therefore, it can be determined whether or not the process relating to the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section can be performed by determining whether or not the winning number determined in the lottery determination is equal to or greater than the specified value. Since the program can be simplified, the amount of use of the ROM 54 by the program can be reduced.

  (8) In the sixteenth to nineteenth embodiments, all RT common lottery tables (e.g., FIG. 79 to FIG. 79) are selected regardless of the RT state (non-RT, RT1, RT2, RT3 or RT4) except during 1BB operation. A lottery determination was made using FIG. 82 (a). Then, when the winning number is determined to be "00 (H)" in the lottery determination using the all RT common lottery table, next, the lottery determination is performed using the lottery table according to the RT state.

Specifically, at non-RT time, the lottery determination is performed using the non-RT time lottery table (FIG. 82 (b)), and at RT1, the lottery determination is performed using the RT 1 o'clock lottery table (FIG. 82 (c)). The
At RT2, the lottery determination is performed using the RT2 lottery table (FIG. 83 (a)), and at RT3, the lottery determination is performed using the RT3 lottery table (FIG. 83 (b)). A lottery determination was made using the hour lottery table (FIG. 84 (a)).

In this regard, for example, an RT state lottery address table (TBL_LOT_RTTBL) as shown below is provided, and the start address of the lottery table according to the RT state is calculated (designated) using this RT state lottery address table. be able to.
TBL_LOT_RTTBL:
Non-RT lottery table DEFB TBL_LOTDAT_RT1-$; RT1 lottery table DEFB TBL_LOTDAT_RT2-$; RT2 lottery table DEFB TBL_LOTDAT_RT3-$; RT3 lottery table DEFB TBL_LOTDAT_RT4-$

Here, the RT state-specific lottery address table can be stored, for example, in the ROM 54 of the main control board 50.
“TBL_LOTDAT_RT0” indicates the top address of the non-RT lottery table, and “TBL_LOTDAT_RT1” indicates the top address of the RT1 lottery table.
Similarly, “TBL_LOTDAT_RT2” indicates the start address of the RT2 lottery table, “TBL_LOTDAT_RT3” indicates the start address of the RT3 lottery table, and “TBL_LOTDAT_RT4” indicates the start address of the RT4 lottery table.

Also, "$" indicates the current address.
Therefore, "TBL_LOTDAT_RT0-$" indicates the difference (the number of data, the number of bytes) from the current address to the top address of the non-RT lottery table.
Similarly, "TBL_LOTDAT_RT1- $" indicates the difference from the current address to the top address of the RT1 lottery table, and "TBL_LOTDAT_RT2- $" indicates the difference from the current address to the top address of the RT2 lottery table. .
"TBL_LOTDAT_RT3- $" indicates the difference from the current address to the top address of the RT3 lottery table, and "TBL_LOTDAT_RT4- $" indicates the difference from the current address to the top address of the RT4 lottery table.

Further, information on the RT state can be stored, for example, in a predetermined storage area (RT state data storage area “_NB_RT”) of the RWM 53.
Furthermore, any one of “0” to “4” is stored in “_NB_RT” as information on the RT state.
Specifically, "0" is stored in "_NB_RT" at the time of non-RT, and "1" is stored at "_NB_RT" at the time of RT1.
Further, at RT2, "2" is stored in "_NB_RT", at RT3, "3" is stored in "_NB_RT", and at RT4, "4" is stored in "_NB_RT".

The calculation (designation) of the start address of the lottery table according to the RT state can be performed as follows.
First, "TBL_LOT_RTTBL" is stored in the HL register. Thereby, the top address of the lottery address table for each RT state is stored in the HL register.
Next, the value of "_NB_RT" is stored in the A register. Thus, a value indicating the RT state is stored in the A register.

Next, the value of the A register (the value indicating the RT state) is added to the value of the HL register (the start address of the lottery address table for each RT state) to obtain a new value of the HL register. Thus, the HL register stores the address of “address designation data” corresponding to the RT state.
Here, the “address designation data” is data stored in the RT address-specific lottery address table, and is data for calculating (specifying) the start address of the non-RT lottery table to the RT4 lottery table. .
Specifically, "TBL_LOTDAT_RT0-$" is address designation data for calculating (specifying) the top address of the non-RT lottery table.

Similarly, "TBL_LOTDAT_RT1- $" is address designation data for calculating (specifying) the start address of the RT1 lottery table, and "TBL_LOTDAT_RT2- $" calculates (designates) the start address of the RT2 lottery table. Address specification data to do this.
Also, "TBL_LOTDAT_RT3- $" is address designation data for calculating (specifying) the start address of the RT3 lottery table, and "TBL_LOTDAT_RT4- $" calculates (designates) the start address of the RT4 lottery table. Address specification data.

Next, data (address designation data) corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register is stored in the A register. Thereby, "address designation data" corresponding to the RT state is stored in the A register.
Next, the value of the A register is added to the value of the HL register to obtain a new value of the HL register. Thus, the top address of the lottery table according to the RT state is stored in the HL register.

Here, the top address of the lottery address table by RT state (TBL_LOT_RTTBL) is set to “1500 (H)”. In this case, the address of “DEFB TBL_LOTDAT_RT 0 − $; non-RT lottery table” is also “1500 (H)”.
Also, let the address of "DEFB TBL_LOTDAT_RT1-$; RT1 lottery table" be "1501 (H)", and the address of "DEFB TBL_LOTDAT_RT2-$; RT 2 lottery table" be "1502 (H)".
Further, the address of "DEFB TBL_LOTDAT_RT3-$; RT3 lottery table" is "1503 (H)", and the address of "DEFB TBL_LOTDAT_RT4-$; RT 4 lottery table" is "1504 (H)".

Further, the head address of the non-RT lottery table (TBL_LOTDAT_RT0) is set to “1505 (H)”.
In this case, as shown in FIG. 82 (b), 5-byte data is stored in the non-RT lottery table, so the start address of the RT1 lottery table (TBL_LOTDAT_RT1) is "1505 (H)". + “5 (H)” = “150 A (H)”.
Further, as shown in FIG. 82C, 9-byte data is stored in the RT 1 o'clock lottery table. For this reason, the start address of the RT 2 o'clock lottery table (TBL_LOTDAT_RT2) is "150A (H)" + "9 (H)" = "1513 (H)".

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 83A, 9-byte data is stored in the RT 2 o'clock lottery table. For this reason, the start address of the RT 3 o'clock lottery table (TBL_LOTDAT_RT3) is “1513 (H)” + “9 (H)” = “151 C (H)”.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 83 (b), 10-byte data is stored in the RT 3 o'clock lottery table. For this reason, the start address of the RT 4 o'clock lottery table (TBL_LOTDAT_RT4) is “151C (H)” + “A (H)” = “1526 (H)”.

Hereinafter, calculation (designation) of the start address of the lottery table according to the RT state will be described in more detail, taking RT3 o'clock as an example.
First, the top address = “1500 (H)” of “TBL_LOT_RTTBL” is stored in the HL register.
Next, the value of “_NB_RT” = “3 (H)” is stored in the A register.
Next, the value “3 (H)” of the A register is added to the value “1500 (H)” of the HL register to obtain a new value “1503 (H)” of the HL register.

Next, "TBL_LOTDAT_RT3-$" corresponding to the value "1503 (H)" of the HL register is stored in the A register.
Here, “TBL_LOTDAT_RT3” = “151 C (H)”.
When the value of the HL register is “1503 (H)”, “$” = “1503 (H)”.
Therefore, the value stored at the address corresponding to the value "1503 (H)" of the HL register is "19 (H)" (= "151 C (H)-1503 (H)"). "19 (H)" is the value of the A register.

Next, the value “19 (H)” of the A register is added to the value “1503 (H)” of the HL register to obtain a new value of the HL register.
Here, “1503 (H)” + “19 (H)” = “151 C (H)”.
Therefore, the value of the new HL register is "151C (H)".
Then, the value “151C (H)” of the HL register indicates the top address of the RT3 o'clock lottery table (TBL_LOTDAT_RT3).
In this manner, the head address of the lottery table according to the RT state can be calculated (designated) based on the values of the RT state lottery address table (TBL_LOT_RTTBL) and the RT state data storage area “_NB_RT”.

The RT address-specific lottery address table defines which of the lottery tables (non-RT lottery table to RT4 lottery table) corresponding to the RT condition is to be used, and the non-RT lottery table to RT4 "Address specification data" for calculating (specifying) the start address of the lottery table is defined.
For this reason, the RT state-specific lottery address table may be also referred to as an "addressing data selection table" or an "addressing data table".

The two-step lottery address table of the seventeenth embodiment defines which one of the two-step lottery tables 1 to 5 is used, and calculates (designates) the top address of the two-step lottery tables 1 to 5 It defines "addressing data" for
Therefore, the two-step lottery address table may also be referred to as an "addressing data selection table", an "addressing data table", or the like, similarly to the RT state-based lottery address table.

Note that it is also possible to specify the top address of the lottery table according to the RT state from the value indicating the RT state without using the RT state-specific lottery address table.
However, in this case, it is first determined whether the value indicating the RT state is "0", and when it is determined that it is "0", "1505 (H)" which is the top address of the non-RT lottery table. When it is determined that “0” is not designated, it is next determined whether the value indicating the RT state is “1”.

When it is determined that the value indicating the RT state is "1", "150 A (H)", which is the start address of the RT1 lottery table, is specified, and when it is determined that it is not "1", It is determined whether the value indicating the RT state is "2".
Furthermore, when it is determined that the value indicating the RT state is “2”, “1513 (H)”, which is the start address of the RT2 lottery table, is specified, and when it is determined that it is not “2” Then, it is determined whether the value indicating the RT state is "3".

Furthermore, when it is determined that the value indicating the RT state is “3”, “151 C (H)”, which is the start address of the RT3 lottery table, is specified, and when it is determined that it is not “3”, RT4 Designate "1526 (H)" which is the top address of the lottery table.
Since such a process is performed, the process until the top address of the lottery table according to the RT state is specified becomes long.
In addition, a program for designating the top address of the lottery table according to the RT state is also required.

  On the other hand, if the head address of the lottery table according to the RT state is specified using the RT address-specific lottery address table, the process until the head address of the lottery table according to the RT state can be shortened. At the same time, since it is not necessary to define a program for specifying the top address of the lottery table according to the RT state, the amount of use of the ROM 54 by the program can be reduced.

(9) In the sixteenth to nineteenth embodiments, all RT common lottery tables (e.g., FIG. 79 to FIG. 79) are selected regardless of the RT state (non-RT, RT1, RT2, RT3 or RT4) except during 1BB operation. A lottery determination was made using FIG. 82 (a). Then, when the winning number is determined to be "00 (H)" in the lottery determination using the all RT common lottery table, next, the lottery determination is performed using the lottery table according to the RT state. However, it is not limited to this.
For example, except during 1BB operation, the lottery determination may first be performed using a lottery table according to the RT state. Then, if the winning number is determined to be “00 (H)” in the lottery determination using the lottery table according to the RT state, then the lottery determination may be performed using the all RT common lottery table .

(10) In the sixteenth to nineteenth embodiments, when “0” is stored in “_NB_CND_AT” (the storage area of the advantageous section number) at the start of the current game, a lottery concerning the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section When he was elected (decided to shift to the advantageous section), he stored a value other than "0" in "_NB_CND_AT". That is, the value of "_NB_CND_AT" was updated. However, it is not limited to this.
For example, even if a value other than “0” is stored in “_NB_CND_AT” at the start of the game this time, addition of the advantageous section (changing the performance so that the gaming state in the advantageous section becomes advantageous for the player, You may perform the drawing | lottery regarding the addition of the game | playing number of AT in the advantageous area, and may change the value of "_NB_CND_AT" according to the result.

For example, under the situation where “1” is stored in “_NB_CND_AT” and the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” (storage area of the item condition device number) is “0”, a lottery may be executed regarding the addition of the advantageous section .
In addition, in the situation where “1” is stored in “_NB_CND_AT” and the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is “0”, the lottery concerning the addition of the advantageous section is executed, and “2” is made to “_NB_CND_AT” according to the result. A control process may be performed to store
In addition, when the value of “_NB_CND_BNS” is “1” (so-called inside), the lottery regarding the addition of the advantageous section is not executed.

(11) For example, as shown in FIG. 79, in the sixteenth to nineteenth embodiments, lottery data relating to the item condition device (1BBA, 1BBB, etc.) is defined in the all RT common lottery table.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and lottery data relating to the item condition device may not be determined in the all RT common lottery table, but may be determined only in the lottery table according to the RT state.
More specifically, since the RT4 lottery table is a lottery table used in RT4 (inside), lottery data relating to the item condition device is not determined in the all RT common lottery table and the RT4 lottery table, Only the RT 1 o'clock lottery table, the RT 2 o'clock lottery table, and the RT 3 o'clock lottery table may be defined.

(12) For example, when probability data differ for every setting value, it is preferable to equalize the number of bytes of each probability data.
For example, in the data of 1BBA + small winning combination E2 condition device lottery of all RT common lottery table (1) in FIG. 79, the probability data differs for each set value. And each probability data is set to 1 byte.
Further, in the data for the small winning combination A condition device lottery of the all RT common lottery table (3) of FIG. 81, the probability data is different for each set value. And each probability data is set to 2 bytes.

Thus, if the probability data differs for each set value, either set either probability data to 1 byte or 2 bytes, so that 1 byte probability data and 2 bytes probability data are mixed Not set to
As a result, the process of lottery determination can be simplified, so that the amount of use of the ROM 54 by the program can be reduced.

(13) In the sixteenth to nineteenth embodiments, the range from “0” to “65535” is one cycle, and a counter that counts one in 200 n (nano) sec is provided, and the count value of this counter is a random number value. .
However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a value obtained by computing (for example, adding or subtracting) a predetermined value (for example, another random number or a specific value) to a count value obtained from a counter may be used as a random value. Good.

(14) In the sixteenth to nineteenth embodiments, the carry flag is turned on (“1”) by storing the random value in a predetermined register and subtracting the probability data from the value of the predetermined register It was judged whether or not the carry occurred), and when the carry flag was turned on, it was judged that the player was won.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, it may be determined whether the carry flag is turned on by storing random number values in a predetermined register and adding probability data to the value of the predetermined register. Good.

When the carry flag is turned on, it is determined that the player has won.
On the other hand, when the carry flag is not turned on, the value obtained by adding the probability data to the value of the predetermined register is stored as a new predetermined value of the register. That is, the value of the predetermined register is updated. Thereafter, by adding new probability data to the value of the predetermined register after updating, it is repeated to determine whether the carry flag is turned on or not until the carry flag is turned on.
As described above, determining whether or not a winning is made based on the value stored in a predetermined register and the probability data may be referred to as a comparison operation.

(15) How to determine the winning number shown in the sixteenth to nineteenth embodiments, how to determine the conditional device number, the correspondence between the winning number and the conditional device number, the correspondence between the conditional device number and the conditional device (winning role) Relationship, type of condition device (winning combination) corresponding to winning number, correspondence relationship between winning number and probability data, probability data to be won (decided to shift) to an advantageous section, elected to an advantageous section And the winning number etc. which is won (decided to be added) on the top of the advantageous section is merely an example, and can be appropriately set according to the game content.
For example, when winning a 1 BBA condition device, winning in an advantageous segment (deciding to shift) with 100% probability, etc., etc., winning in an advantageous segment with 100% probability when winning a predetermined winning number Thus, probability data etc. can be determined.

(16) In the flowcharts shown in the sixteenth to nineteenth embodiments, the order of processing is not limited to the order shown in the figure, and when the order of processing can be changed, the order of processing should be changed Is also possible.
(17) In the sixteenth to nineteenth embodiments, the lottery relating to the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section has been described, but the lottery other than the lottery relating to the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section (e.g. The present invention is also applicable to lottery, AT lottery, RT transition lottery).
(18) In the sixteenth to nineteenth embodiments, the slot machine 10 has been exemplified as an example of the gaming machine, but the present invention is also applicable to a ball and ball game machine, an enclosed type game machine and the like.
(19) The sixteenth to nineteenth embodiments and the various modifications described above are not limited to being implemented alone, but can be implemented in combination as appropriate.

The Twentieth Embodiment
Subsequently, twentieth to twenty-fourth embodiments of the present invention will be described.
The twentieth to twenty-fourth embodiments relate to lighting control of LEDs such as the management information display LED 74.
FIG. 124 is a diagram for explaining a more detailed configuration of the main CPU 55, the ROM 54, and the RWM 53 in the twentieth embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 1, the main CPU 55, the RWM 53, and the ROM 54 are provided on the main control board 50.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 20, a one-chip microprocessor (hereinafter, simply referred to as a "chip") is mounted on the main control board 50, and the main control board 50 is mounted on the main control board 50. A CPU 55 is provided. Furthermore, the main CPU 55 has a built-in memory, which has a (built-in) ROM 54 and a (built-in) RWM 53. The addresses of the ROM 54 and the RWM 53 are continuous.

The storage capacity of the ROM 54 is set to “16 KB or less” in the present embodiment, and has a use area of a capacity “7.5 KB or less” and an area outside the use area other than that. Furthermore, the use area has a control area of a capacity of “4.5 KB or less” and a data area of a capacity of “3.0 KB or less”.
Here, the "use area" refers to a storage area where information other than the information necessary for preventing unauthorized alteration or other change is stored or will be stored (the same as in the ROM 54 and RWM 53).
Further, the “control area” indicates a storage area other than the data area in the use area, and various programs executed by the main control unit 50 are stored. The control area may also be referred to as a "program area".
Furthermore, the "data area" refers to a storage area in which only information other than the program is stored or to be stored among the used areas, and data used when the program is executed is stored.

Furthermore, "outside the used area" includes the control area and the data area as in the used area. The control area of the use area may be referred to as a first control area, and the control area outside the use area may be referred to as a second control area. In a control area (second control area) outside the use area, a program (for example, a program used at the time of testing, a program for preventing fraud, etc.) which is not related to the progress of the game is stored. This point will be described later.
In addition, the storage capacity of the RWM 53 is “1,024 K or less” in this embodiment, and has a use area of a capacity “512 KB or less” and an area outside the use area other than that.
Both the used area and the area outside the used area include a work area and a stack area. In the use area of the RWM 53, an LED display counter or the like described later is stored.

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 124, the ROM 54 is provided with a program management area and the like as other areas in addition to the used area and the area outside the used area.
Furthermore, the RWM 53 includes an unused area as another area in addition to the used area and the area other than the used area.
Further, of the storage areas of the entire built-in memory, a built-in register area, an unused area, and the like are provided as areas other than the ROM 54 and the RWM 53.
As described above, for example, the A register to the L register, the transmission register, etc. are provided in the built-in register area.

  FIG. 125 (A) shows various LEDs on the display substrate 75 in the twentieth embodiment, and FIG. 125 (B) shows the management information display LED 74 in the twentieth embodiment more specifically. . FIG. 125 (A) is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 2 of the first embodiment, and FIG. 125 (B) is a diagram corresponding to the management information display LED 74 shown in FIG. 3 (a) of the first embodiment. .

In FIG. 125A, in the twentieth embodiment, similarly to the first embodiment, the stored number display LED 76 configured of digit 1 (upper digit) and digit 2 (lower digit), and digit 3 (upper digit). And digit 4 (lower digit) and an acquired number display LED 78.
However, unlike the first embodiment, each of the digits 1 to 4 uses a 7-segment display that is not provided with dot segments (segment DP (hereinafter, simply referred to as "segment P"). In the embodiment, the segment P of the digit 2 does not constitute the advantageous section display LED 77 as shown in Fig. 2. In the twentieth embodiment, the advantageous section display LED 77 is provided independently. , I omit the explanation about this point.

In addition, seven LEDs are mounted on the display substrate 75, and these seven LEDs are collectively referred to as a status display LED 79.
First, the 1-bet display LED 79a to the 3-bet display LED 79c are LEDs for displaying the number of medals bet at that time. When one medal is betted, only the 1-bet display LED 79a is lit. When two medals are betted, the 1-bet display LED 79a and the 2-bet display LED 79b light. When three medals are betted, all of the 1-bet display LED 79a, 2-bet display LED 79b, and 3-bet display LED 79c are configured to light.

The game start display LED 79d is an LED that lights up when a medal is inserted and the start switch 41 becomes operable. Therefore, when the medal is not bet (or the replay is not automatically inserted), it does not light.
The insertion display LED 79e is an LED that lights up when it is possible to insert a medal. In other words, it lights up before the game is over and the medal for shifting to the next game is inserted, indicating a so-called bet waiting state. In addition, even after the replay is activated, it lights up when it is possible to bet according to the stored number.

The replay display LED 79f is an LED that lights up at the time of winning a replay, and when an automatic bet based on a replay is played, the replay display LED 79f lights up to notify the player that the automatic betting is being performed.
The effect display LED 79g is an LED used to display various effects, and may also be used as a settlement display LED (an LED that lights up during the settlement process).

In FIG. 125 (B), four digits 6 to 9 used for the management information display LED 74 are seven segment displays each having a dot segment (segment P), unlike the above described digits 1 to 4. The digits 6 to 9 are respectively the same as the first embodiment in that the information type upper, information type lower, numerical upper, and lower numerical values are displayed.
Also, the segment P with digit 7 (lower than the information type) functions as a digit grouping display LED. The digit display LED is used to clarify the division between the information type and the numerical value.

  Also, the digit P, the digit 8 and the segment P of the digit 9 are LEDs that light up when an unrecoverable error occurs. Unlike the digits 1 to 4, the segments 6 are provided in the digits 6 to 9, but when the segments are physically provided in this manner, it is required to light at any timing. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when a non-returnable error occurs, control is performed so that all the segments P of the digits 6 to 9 light up.

FIG. 126 is a diagram for explaining the details of the digit and the segment in the twentieth embodiment, and is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 4 of the first embodiment.
In the twentieth embodiment, as described above, the 7-segments of the digits 1 to 4 themselves are composed of the segments A to G, and the dot segment (segment P) is not provided.
However, segments P of digits 1, 3 and 4 constitute any one of the status display LEDs 79 described above. As shown in FIG. 126, for example, the segment P of the digit 1 constitutes a game start LED 79d.
In addition, the segment P of the digit 3 constitutes an input display LED 79e.
Furthermore, the segment P of the digit 4 constitutes a replay display LED 79f.

Although not shown, in the twentieth embodiment, the set value display LED 73 (digit 5) uses a 7-segment display that does not have dot segments (segments P), as in the case of the digits 1-4. The segment P of the digit 5 constitutes an effect display LED 79g.
The segment P of the digit 2 is unused in the twentieth embodiment.
Furthermore, the segments P of the digits 6 to 9 are as described above.

FIG. 127 shows a data table stored in the ROM 54. As shown in FIG. The data table is a table for storing display data and display offset data when the digits 1 to 9 are lighted.
As shown in FIG. 127, in the data table, the in-use area data table stored in the data area of the use area of the ROM 54 (address “1200H ̃” in FIG. 124) and the data area outside the use area of the ROM 54 (figure And an out-of-use area data table stored at an address "2300H" in 124.

The in-use area data table includes an LED segment table 1 (TBL_SEG_DATA1) and an LED segment table 2 (TBL_SEG_DATA2).
The LED segment table 1 is a table for storing display data (English character data) used when displaying error information on the acquisition number display LED 78 (digits 3 and 4).
Further, the LED segment table 2 is a table storing data for displaying “=” when displaying numeric display data and push order instruction information.
In FIG. 127, “DEFB” indicates that 1 byte (8 bits) data is stored in the assembler language.

In FIG. 127, for example, "C" display data is "00111001 B". That is, the segments A, D, E, and F are “1 (on; lit)”, and the segments B, C, and G are “0 (off, extinguished)”. Therefore, in FIG. 126, when segments A, D, E, and F are turned on, “C” is displayed in seven segments.
In addition, “=” display data is “01001000B”. That is, in FIG. 126, segments D and G become “1 (on; lit)”, the central and lower horizontal segments light, and “=” is displayed by 7 segments.

  The LED segment table 1 (TBL_SEG_DATA1) and the LED segment table 2 (TBL_SEG_DATA2) are stored at consecutive addresses. For example, assuming that the start address of the "C" display data is "1811", each display data of the LED segment table 1 is stored sequentially from "1811". In this case, the top address of the LED segment table 2 is “1816”, and the display data of the LED segment table 2 are stored sequentially from “1816”.

Thereby, each display data of the LED segment table 1 can be represented by the offset value from the top address "1811". Similarly, each display data of the LED segment table 2 can be represented by an offset value from the start address “1816”.
For example, when reading the display data of LED segment table 2, when the head address "1816" is specified and the content to be displayed is "5", an address obtained by adding the offset value "5" to the head address "1816" That is, if the data of "181 B" is read, the "5" display data can be read.

On the other hand, the non-use area data table is a data table storing data for displaying the management information display LED 74 (digits 6 to 9), an identification segment offset table (TBL_SEGID_DATA), and a ratio display segment data table (TBL_SEGRATE_DATA). And). The identification segment offset table and the ratio display segment data table are stored at continuous addresses, as in the LED segment tables 1 and 2 described above.
Note that “identification segment” is used as an abbreviation of “information type”.

Further, in the identification segment according to the twentieth embodiment, the English letters and the numerical values are set reverse to the information type shown in FIG.
In particular,
Interesting area ratio: U7 → 7U
Continuous role ratio (6000 games): y6 → 6y
Character ratio (6000 games): y7 → 7y
Continuous role ratio (total): A6 → 6A
Role ratio (total): A7 → 7A
I assume.

For example, as shown in FIG. 127, the display offset data of "7U" indicating the identification segment of the advantageous section percentage is "07AH", but "7" indicates the offset value of the upper digit (digit 6; 1000 digits) , “A” indicates the offset value of the lower digit (digit 7; 100 digits). Furthermore, the offset value here indicates the offset value from the top address of the ratio display segment data table.
Therefore, the offset value "7" designates the "7" display data (for ratio), and the offset value "A" designates the "U" display data.
In order to distinguish “7” displayed on the management information display LED 74 (digits 6 to 9) and “7” displayed on the digits 1 to 5, the display data is made different. “7” displayed on the digits 6 to 9 is data determined to light the segment F (the fifth bit is “1”) in FIG.

As described above, except for the "7" display data, the numerical display data is the same data as the LED segment table 2. Nevertheless, the reason why the in-use area data table and the in-use area data table are stored separately is as follows.
Control of lighting display of the storage number display LED 76 (digits 1 and 2), the acquisition number (or error) display LED 78, and the setting value display LED 73 (digit 5) is control performed in the use area. Therefore, data of control performed in the use area is stored in a data area in the use area.
On the other hand, controlling the lighting display of the management information display LED 74 (digits 6 to 9) is control performed outside the use area. For this reason, data of control performed outside the use area is stored in a data area outside the use area.

FIG. 128 is a diagram showing output ports 2 to 5 provided on the main control substrate 50 and each signal in the twentieth embodiment. In FIG. 128, the left side column is the twentieth embodiment, and the right side column is also described as a “reference example” prior to the present invention.
The “reference example” is an example where the digits 6 to 9 are not provided, and is an example described for comparison with the twentieth embodiment, and means a known technique or a well-known technique for the present invention. It is not a thing.
Moreover, although the output port has illustrated the output ports 2-5 in FIG. 128, in fact, many more output ports are provided. The other output ports are not shown (the same applies to the output port drawings of the other embodiments).
As shown in FIG. 1 of the first embodiment, the main control board 50 is provided with an input port 51 and an output port 52.

The input port 51 includes, for example, input ports 0 to 2 (in fact, other input ports are also provided).
The input port 0 is a port to which signals of the settlement switch 46, the bet switch 40, the start switch 41, and the stop switch 42 are input.
Further, the input port 1 is a port to which signals of the passage sensor 43a, the setting key switch 12, the setting switch 13, the reset switch 14, the (left, middle, right) reel sensor 39 are input.
Furthermore, to the input port 2, signals of a power interruption signal (a signal output when a power interruption occurs), a closing sensor 44, a payout sensor 37, and the like are input.

  And, as the information processing for advancing the game, a main process to be performed once per game is provided. In the main processing, detection of inserted medals, winning processing after all the reels 31 are stopped, and the like are performed.

  During this main processing, the main processing is left once, and interrupt processing (timer interrupt processing) is executed (FIG. 133 described later; I_INTR). Then, in the interrupt process, the process of detecting the input ports 0 to 2 (step S1407 in FIG. 133) is executed, and after the process is executed, the process of returning to the main process is periodically performed. The interval of the interruption time is 2.235 ms in the present embodiment. That is, the data of the input ports 0 to 2 is acquired for each interrupt processing of 2.235 ms interval.

  Then, based on the acquired data, level data (data indicating on / off of each bit) and rising data of the input port (previous interrupt is off, current interrupt is on) for each of the input ports 0 to 2 Data indicating which bit the data has become) and falling data of the input port (data indicating which bit is on when the previous interrupt was on and the current interrupt was off) And remember. Therefore, these data are updated every 2.235 ms.

The output port is, for example, provided with an output port 0-10. Of these output ports, FIG. 128 illustrates output ports 2 to 5 related to the twentieth embodiment.
The feature of the output port of the twentieth embodiment is that two output ports (digit ports) for transmitting digit signals (output ports 2 and 4) and one output port (segment port) for transmitting segment signals (The output port 3).

First, the output port 2 is a port that outputs three bet indication signals and digit 1 to 5 signals. The 1-bet display signal to the 3-bet display signal are signals for lighting the 1-bet display LEDs 79a to 3-bet display LED 79c, respectively.
The digit 1 to digit 5 signals are drive signals for digit 1 to digit 5, respectively.
For example, when the signal of "01111001" is output from the output port 2, it means that the drive signal of digits 1 to 4 and the 1-bet display signal are output.

The output port 3 is a port that outputs the segment A signal to the segment P signal. For example, as shown in FIG. 127, when displaying "0", "00111111" is output.
The segment signal of the output port 3 is a segment signal which doubles as all of the digits 1-9.
The output port 4 is a port that outputs drive signals of the digit 6 signal (D0) to the digit 9 signal (D3).
Therefore, which digit is to be turned on is determined by the signal output from the output port 2 or 4, and which segment is to be turned on by the signal output from the output port 3.

  Here, the output port of this embodiment can simultaneously output signals (one byte each, a total of two bytes) of two consecutive output ports. Therefore, the signals of output ports 2 and 3 can be simultaneously output, and the signals of output ports 3 and 4 can be simultaneously output. For this reason, the output port 2 and the output port 4 are set as ports for outputting the digit 1 to 5 signals and the digit 6 to 9 signals, respectively, and the output port 3 between them is set as a port for outputting segment signals. .

  Thus, for example, when outputting a signal that displays digit 1 as "1", the signal output from output port 2 is "00001000 (assuming other than digit 1 signal is" 0 ")", and the output port The signal output from 3 is "00000110". Therefore, “00001000/00000110” (“/” indicates the boundary between the signal output from the output port 2 and the signal output from the output port 3) is output from the output ports 2 and 3.

The output port 5 outputs an external (outer end) signal to the external concentrated terminal board 100, and in the present embodiment, the external signals 1 to 5, data strobe signal, medal insertion signal, and medal payout signal are output.
Here, the “external signal” is a signal for outputting to the outside of the slot machine 10 (hole computer 200, data counter installed in a hole, etc.) via the external concentrated terminal plate 100. Specifically, for example, an AT, a specific RT, an external signal 1 to 3 indicating that a special game is in progress, an external signal 4 indicating that an error or a power failure has occurred in the slot machine 10, or the like An external signal 5 is provided which indicates the opening of the front door of the machine 10.

The data strobe signal is a signal to be transmitted to the sub control board 80. When receiving the data strobe signal, sub control substrate 80 controls to acquire the sub control data signal from the buffer provided in sub control substrate 80 based on the rise of the data strobe signal.
From output ports other than the output ports 2 to 5 mentioned above, for example, a signal of the motor 32, a signal of the blocker 45, a drive signal of the hopper motor 36, a condition device signal (so-called winning number), a sub control data signal, a test signal etc. It is output.

129 to 131 are circuit diagrams showing wiring of electric signals of the main control board 50, the display board 75, the digits 1 to 9, and the state display LED 79. FIG.
FIGS. 129 and 130 show the wiring of electric signals on the main control substrate 50, and FIG. 131 shows the wiring of electric signals on the display substrate 75. FIG.
As shown in FIG. 125, the digits 1 and 2 constituting the storage number display LED 76, the digits 3 and 4 constituting the acquisition number display LED 78, and seven status display LEDs 79 are mounted on the display substrate 75. There is. On the other hand, the setting value display LED 73 (digit 5) and the management information display LED 74 (digits 6 to 9) are mounted on the main control board 50 as shown in FIG. 3 of the first embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 129, on the main control board 50, a main CPU 55 and three ICs (IC2, IC3 and IC4) are mounted. Although the main control board 50 is actually provided with an IC other than these three, the illustration is omitted in the present embodiment.
The output from the D0 to D7 output terminals of the IC2 to IC4 continues until the input of the clock input terminal is turned on.

The IC 2 is an IC for controlling the bet indication signal and the digits 1 to 5 signals, and the IC 3 is an IC for controlling the segment signal. Also, IC 4 is an IC related to control of digit 6 to 9 signals.
Each of the IC2 to IC4 has a clock signal input terminal. On the other hand, the main CPU 55 has XCS2, XCS3 and XCS4 output terminals, the XCS2 output terminal and the clock input terminal of IC2 are connected, the XCS3 output terminal and the clock input terminal of IC3 are connected, and the XCS4 output terminal And the clock input terminal of the IC 4 are connected.

The main CPU 55 also has D0 to D7 output terminals. The D0 to D7 input terminals of the IC 2 and the D0 to D7 output terminals of the main CPU 55 are connected.
Furthermore, the D0 to D7 output terminals of the main CPU 55 and the D0 to D7 input terminals of the IC 3 are connected respectively.
Furthermore, the D0 to D3 output terminals of the main CPU 55 and the D0 to D3 input terminals of the IC 4 are connected to one another. The D4 to D7 input terminals of the IC 4 are connected to the ground.

The IC 2 has an output port 2 (see FIG. 128) including D0 to D7 output terminals, and the D0 to D7 input terminals and the D0 to D7 output terminals correspond to each other. Then, 1 bet display signal line to 3 bet display signal line are respectively output from the D0 to D2 output terminals, and in FIG. 131, 1 bet display signal line (terminal 16) of display substrate 75, 2 bet display signal line (17 It connects with terminal No. 3) and 3 bet display signal line (terminal No. 18).
Further, among output port 2, digit 1 signal line to digit 5 signal line are outputted from D3 to D7 output terminals, respectively, and these five signal lines are the display substrate 75 (terminal 3 to 7 in FIG. 131) The digit 5 signal line is connected to the drive signal line of the digit 5 (set value display LED 73) mounted on the main control board 50.

The IC 3 also has an output port 3 (see FIG. 128) including D0 to D7 output terminals, and the D0 to D7 input terminals correspond to the D0 to D7 output terminals, respectively. Then, the segment A signal line to the segment P signal line are output from the D0 to D7 output terminals, respectively, and these signal lines are firstly connected to the segment A to segment P of the digit 5, respectively, and secondly, the digit It is connected to each of the segments A to P of 6 to 9 (FIG. 130), and thirdly connected to the display substrate 75 (terminals 8 to 15 in FIG. 131).
Furthermore, the IC 4 has an output port 4 (see FIG. 128) including D0 to D3 output terminals, and the D0 to D3 input terminals correspond to the D0 to D3 output terminals, respectively. As shown in FIGS. 128 and 129, the D4 to D7 output terminals of the output port 4 are unused (NC).

Then, digit 6 signal lines to digit 9 signal lines are output from the D0 to D3 output terminals, respectively, and these signal lines are connected to the drive signal lines of the digits 6 to 9, respectively.
In FIG. 129, for example, the signal lines from the D0 to D2 output terminals of output port 2 and the signal lines from D0 to D7 of output port 3 pass through transistors and resistors, respectively, to digit and display substrate 75, respectively. Although connected, in FIG. 129, illustration of these transistors and resistors is omitted.

In FIG. 130, digit 6 signals to digit 9 signals are connected to drive signal lines of digits 6 to 9, respectively.
The digits 6 to 9 each have eight LEDs (LEDs constituting the segments A to G and P). Then, the LEDs constituting the segments A to G and P of the digits 6 to 9 are connected to the segments A to G and P signal lines, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 131, the display substrate 75 is provided with digits 1 to 4. The output terminals (terminals 3 to 6) of the digit 1 signal line to the digit 4 signal line of the display substrate 75 and the drive signal lines of the digits 1 to 4 are connected.
Moreover, all of the digits 1 to 4 have seven LEDs (LEDs constituting the segments A to G), as in the case of the digit 5 described above. The LEDs of the segments A to G of the digits 1 to 4 are connected to the output terminals of the segments A to G signal lines (terminals 8 to 14).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 131, the display substrate 75 includes seven LEDs (see FIG. 125) constituting the status display LED 79, specifically, one bet display LED 79a, two bet display LED 79b, and three bet display LED 79c. , A game start display LED 79d, an insertion display LED 79e, a replay display LED 79f, and an effect display LED 79g.

Then, four of the game start display LED 79d, the insertion display LED 79e, the replay display LED 79f, and the effect display LED 79g are connected to the output terminal (15th terminal) of the segment P signal line.
Further, the game start display LED 79d is connected to the output terminal (No. 3 terminal) of the digit 1 signal line, the closing display LED 79e is connected to the output terminal (No. 5 terminal) of the digit 3 signal line, and the replay display LED 79f is the digit 4 signal The effect display LED 79g is connected to the output terminal (No. 7 terminal) of the digit 5 signal line.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 131, the output terminals (16th to 18th terminals) of the 1- to 3-bet display signal lines of the display substrate 75 are connected to the 1- to 3-bet display LEDs 79a to 79c, respectively. There is. Furthermore, the +5 V power supply voltage terminals (terminals 1 and 2) of the display substrate 75 and the 1- to 3-bet display LEDs 79a to 79c are connected.

  In the above configuration, in FIG. 129, the main CPU 55 normally applies a high level (about 5 V, the same applies hereinafter) voltage to the XCS2 to XCS4 output terminals, and changes from high level to low level (approximately zero V). The same applies hereinafter) (when the voltage is changed by a switch (circuit) provided in the main CPU 55), it becomes active. For example, when it is desired to drive (select, designate) IC2, the XCS2 output terminal is activated. As a result, an active signal (chip select signal) is output from the XCS2 output terminal and input to the clock input terminal of the IC2. As a result, the IC 2 is in a driving state (also referred to as a selected state or a designated state). If the XCS3 and XCS4 output terminals are activated in the same manner as described above, then IC3 and IC4 are driven.

In addition, a low level voltage is normally applied to the D0 to D7 output terminals of the main CPU 55, and a high level voltage is applied when data (data signal) of "1" is output.
For example, when a data signal of "1" is output from the D0 output terminal of the main CPU 55, the data signal is input to the D0 input terminals of IC2 to IC4, respectively, but when the XCS2 output terminal is active at this moment, IC2 The data signal is input to the D0 input terminal of

  Furthermore, a high level voltage is normally applied to the output port 2 of the IC 2, and a low level voltage is applied to the output terminal corresponding to the input terminal to which the data signal is input. For example, when the data signal of "1" is output from the D7 output terminal of the main CPU 55, and the XCS2 output terminal is active at this moment, the data signal is input to the D7 input terminal of IC2, so Then, when the D7 output terminal of the IC 2 is set to the low level, current can flow to the LEDs of the segments A to G of the digit 5.

Furthermore, when the data signal of "1" is output from the D0 and D1 output terminals of the main CPU 55 and the XCS3 output terminal is activated, the data signal is input to the D0 and D1 input terminals of the IC3.
A high level voltage is normally applied to the output port 3 of the IC 3. When a high level voltage is applied, the circuit after the transistor (not shown) in FIG. 129 is in a high impedance state (neither low nor high).

Then, when the D0 and D1 output terminals of IC3 are made low, a current flows from the emitter of the transistor linked to the high level (+5 V) to the collector along with the change of the current between the emitter and the base, and to the segment A and B signal lines A current flows.
Therefore, as described above, when the D7 output terminal of IC2 is set to low level and current can flow to each LED of the segments A to G of digit 5, as described above, D0 and D1 of IC3 When the output terminal is set to low level, current flows to the segment A and B signal lines, and the LEDs of the segments A and B of the digit 5 light.

  In other words, although current flows in the segment A and B signal lines of all the digits, a voltage of about 5 V is applied to the digits other than digit 5, so that no potential difference occurs, and digits 1 to 4 and 6 to 9 The LEDs of the segments A and B corresponding to are not lighted. That is, the current flows only to the digit 5 to which about 0 V is applied, and the LEDs of the segments A and B of the digit 5 are turned on.

Further, for example, the D3 output terminal (digit 1 signal) of the IC 2 is set to the low level.
Further, when the D7 output terminal (segment P signal) of the IC 3 is set to low level, current flows from the emitter connected to the high level to the collector and current flows to the segment P signal line according to the change of current between emitter and base. As a result, in FIG. 131, the game start display LED 79d lights up.

  In other words, although current flows in the segment P signal lines of all the digits, a voltage of about 5 V is applied to the digits other than digit 1, so that no potential difference occurs, and they are associated with the digits other than digit 1. The input display LED 79e, the replay display LED 79f, and the effect display LED 79g do not light up. That is, the current flows only to the digit 1 to which about 0 V is applied, and the game start display LED 79 d associated with the digit 1 is lit.

Furthermore, a low level voltage is normally applied to the D0 to D7 output terminals of the output port 2 of the IC2. Then, when a high level voltage is applied to any of the D0 to D2 output terminals of the IC2, a current flows from the collector of the transistor to the emitter, and the collector side of the transistor becomes low level.
On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 131, a high level voltage is always applied to the power supply voltage terminals (No. 1 terminal and No. 2 terminal) connected to the upstream side of 1st to 3rd display LEDs 79a to 79c. There is. Therefore, for example, when the D0 output terminal of IC2 is set to high level in FIG. 129, the 16th terminal of 1-bet display signal becomes low level in FIG. 131, current flows to 1-bet display LED 79a, and 1-bet display LED 79a lights up. Do.

In the present embodiment, only one of the digits 1 to 9 is set to be capable of lighting. Here, in order to enable all digits to be individually lit, it is necessary to provide independent wiring for each digit and for each segment. However, this setting increases the number of wires, increases the cost, and also increases the assembly burden.
On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 129 to 131, for example, in the case of segment A signals, the number of wires can be reduced if the circuit configuration is connected to the segment A signals of all digits 1 to 9.

And even if it is a circuit configuration like this embodiment, if digit switched on every interruption processing is changed one by one, it will be substantially the same as the state where all digits are simultaneously lighted simultaneously (simultaneously when viewed by human) Can be shown as if
In addition, by making the LEDs to be lighted different for each interrupt processing, it is possible to suppress power consumption and to suppress burn-in of the LEDs.
Furthermore, the luminance can be increased by repeating the point emission as compared to the LED that is always lit.

FIG. 132A is a diagram showing the relationship between the interrupt, the LED display counter (_CT_LED_DSP), and the output signal in the twentieth embodiment.
Further, FIG. 7B is a diagram showing an LED display request flag (_FL_LED_DSP).
As described above, in the present embodiment, the interrupt processing is performed once every 2.235 ms in parallel with the main processing.
On the other hand, a storage area of the LED display counter is provided at a predetermined address of the use area of the RWM 53. The LED display counter is 1-byte data, and is a counter that keeps being updated for each interrupt.

  The LED display counter of the twentieth embodiment takes a value "00000001" as an initial value. Then, update is performed to shift bit "1" to the left by one digit every interrupt processing. When this update is continued, in FIG. 132, when the interrupt "8" changes to "9", the bit "1" overflows and becomes "00000000". When the LED display counter value becomes "00000000", initialization processing of the LED display counter is executed in the next interrupt processing. The initialization process is to set the D0 bit to "1", that is, to set the LED display counter to "00000001". Therefore, as shown in FIG. 132, “1” → “2” →... → “9” → “1” →. For this reason, the LED display counter is a counter of which one cycle is nine interrupts.

  First, when the LED display counter value is "00000001", the output signals are the 1-bet display signal and the digit 6 signal, and therefore the 1-bet display LED 79a and the digit 6 are to be lit (this At this point, the LED display request flag described later is not considered (the same applies hereinafter). Therefore, in the interrupt process when the LED display counter value becomes "00000001", the output port 2 and 4 outputs a signal "00000001". As a result, a 1-bet display signal is output from the D0 output terminal of the output port 2, and a digit 6 signal is output from the D0 output terminal of the output port 4. Thus, the 1-bet display LED 79a and the digit 6 can be lighted.

  In FIG. 132, “in use area” and “out of use area” indicate programs and data for performing lighting control of 1 bet to 3 bet display LEDs 79a to 79c and digits 1 to 5. Is stored in the use area of the ROM 54, and the program and data for performing the lighting control of the digits 6 to 9 are out of the use area of the ROM 54, so that the use area is stored. The inside and the outside of the use area are displayed separately.

Similarly, in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value becomes "00000010", the output ports 2 and 4 output a signal of "00000010". As a result, the 2-bet display signal is output from the D1 output terminal of the output port 2, and the digit 7 signal is output from the D1 output terminal of the output port 4. Therefore, the 2 bet display LED 79b and the digit 7 can be lighted. Also, when the digit 7 is lit, the segment P (digit separated display LED) is always lit.
As for the digits 6, 8 and 9 other than the digit 7, the segment P is not lit in the interrupt process. The segment P of these digits is turned on at the time of non-return error which interrupt processing is inhibited (the details of this point will be described later).

Next, in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value becomes “00000100”, a signal of “00000100” is output from the output ports 2 and 4. As a result, a 3-bet display signal is output from the D2 output terminal of the output port 2, and a digit 8 signal is output from the D2 output terminal of the output port 4. Therefore, the 3-bet display LED 79c and the digit 8 can be lighted.
Further, in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value becomes "00001000", the signal "00001000" is output only from the output port 2 (no output from the output port 4). As a result, the digit 1 signal is output from the D3 output terminal of the output port 2. Therefore, the game start display LED 79d corresponding to the digit 1 and the segment P of the digit 1 can be lighted.

Furthermore, in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value becomes "00010000", a signal of "00010000" is output only from the output port 2. Thus, the digit 2 signal is output from the D4 output terminal of the output port 2. Thus, the digit 2 can be lit. There is no LED assigned to the segment P of the digit 2 (FIG. 126).
Furthermore, in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value becomes "00100000", a signal of "00100000" is output only from the output port 2. As a result, the digit 3 signal is output from the D5 output terminal of the output port 2. Therefore, the input display LED 79e corresponding to the digit 3 and the segment P of the digit 3 can be lighted.

Further, in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value becomes “01000000”, the signal “01000000” is output only from the output port 2. As a result, the digit 4 signal is output from the D6 output terminal of the output port 2. Therefore, the replay display LED 79f corresponding to the digit 4 and the segment P of the digit 4 can be lighted.
Furthermore, in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value becomes "10000000", a signal of "10000000" is output only from the output port 2. As a result, the digit 5 signal is output from the D7 output terminal of the output port 2. Thus, the effect display LED 79g corresponding to the digit 5 and the segment P of the digit 5 can be lighted.

Next, in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value becomes "00000000", the signal "00001000" is output only from the output port 4 (no output from the output port 2). As a result, the digit 9 signal is output from the D3 output terminal of the output port 4. Thus, the digit 9 can be lit.
The LED display counter is 8-bit data, and if it is intended to manage nine digits with 8-bit data, one digit can not be allocated to each bit, and one bit will be missing. . Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the LED display counter is "0", the output timing of the digit 9 signal is set.

Further, the LED display request flag shown in FIG. 132 (B) is a flag indicating which LED has a lighting request, and is a predetermined address in the use area of RWM 53 as 1 byte data consisting of 8 bits (D0 to D7) Is stored in
The digits 1 to 5 and the digits 6 to 8 corresponding to the respective bits of the LED display request flag are set to the same bits as the LED display counter. Further, D0 to D2 bits of the LED display request flag correspond to 1 bet to 3 bets.
There is no bit corresponding to the digit 9 in the LED display request flag. As described above, it is because the bit corresponding to the digit 9 can not be provided.

In the LED display request flag, for example, during normal operation (in game and in game standby), the set value display LED 73 (digit 5) is turned off, 1 to 3 bets, and digits 1 to 4 and 6 to 8 can be lighted. Because there is, it becomes "011111111". The bit "1" of the LED display request flag indicates that lighting is possible, and the bit "0" indicates that lighting is not possible.
During setting change, the D7 bit is "1" because the setting value is displayed on the digit 5, and the D3 and D4 bits are "0" because the digits 1 and 2 (storage number display LED 76) are not displayed. The D5 bit and the D6 bit become "1" in order to display "88" indicating that the setting is being changed on the digits 3 and 4 (acquisition number display LED 78). Therefore, the LED display request flag during setting change is "11100000B".

  Furthermore, during setting confirmation, since the setting value is displayed on the digit 5 as in the setting change, the D7 bit becomes "1". Furthermore, “8” is displayed on the digits 1 to 4. Therefore, the LED display request flag during setting confirmation is “11111000B”.

Then, when performing the LED display control ("I_LED_OUT" described later) in the interrupt processing, the LED display counter and the LED display request flag are ANDed with each other, and the digit signal is output corresponding to the operation result ( Turn on the digit).
For example, as shown in FIG. 132A, in the case of the interrupt "4", the LED display counter is "00001000", and assuming that the time is normal, the LED display request counter becomes "01111111". Therefore, when both of them are ANDed, "00001000" is obtained, so that the signal output at the time of the interrupt processing is only the digit 1 signal (upper digit of the storage number display LED 76).
Further, in the case of the interrupt “8”, the LED display counter is “10000000”, and assuming that the time is normal, the LED display request counter becomes “01111111”. Therefore, when both are ANDed, "00000000" is obtained, and therefore, the signal output at the time of the interrupt processing is absent.

FIG. 133 is a flowchart showing an interrupt process (I_INTR) by the main control board 50 (main CPU 55). As described above, the main control board 50 performs the interrupt process shown in FIG. 133 in a 2.235 ms cycle (but not limited to the cycle) in parallel with the main process.
First, when the process proceeds to the interrupt process in step S1401, in step S1402, as an initial process, save processing of the register value and prohibition process of the overlap interrupt are performed. Here, since the register of the main CPU 55 used in the main processing is used in the interrupt processing, the current register value is saved in the stack area of the RWM 53. Furthermore, the interrupt prohibition flag is turned on so that the next interrupt processing is not started during the interrupt processing. This is done because, for example, an interrupt process execution request may be issued while the power-off process is being performed.

In the next step S1403, it is determined whether a power off has been detected. Here, when the power supply voltage falls below a predetermined value by a voltage monitoring device (power cut-off detection circuit) (not shown) provided on the main control board 50, a power-off detection signal is given to a predetermined bit of a predetermined input port Since it is input, it is detected whether or not there is an input of the signal.
If it is determined that the power has been disconnected, the process proceeds to the power off process of step S1419. If it is determined that the power is not disconnected, the process proceeds to step S1404.

In step S1404, the interrupt counter value is updated.
In the next step S1405, timer measurement is performed. This process is a process of subtracting the time set in the main process. Specifically, for example, it may be mentioned whether or not the minimum game time (4.1 seconds) has elapsed.
Next, proceeding to step S1406, LED display control (I_LED_OUT; FIG. 134) is performed. Here, it is a process of lighting the LEDs (digits 1 to 5) in accordance with the state of the slot machine 10. Details of this process will be described later.

  The errors that occur in the slot machine 10 include non-returnable errors and returnable errors. In non-returnable errors, an error display is output by the main processing as described later, but the display of the returnable errors is an interrupt process. The LED display control is performed every hour.

  In step S1407, the input port 51 is read. As a result, whether or not the bet switch 40, start switch 41, stop switch 42, etc. have been operated, switch signals, and input signals of various sensors are read, and data based on the input port 51 (level data, rising data, Fall data) is generated and stored at a predetermined address of RWM 53.

  In the next step S1408, it is determined whether the set value is in the normal range. Here, the setting value data stored in the predetermined address of the RWM 53 is read, and it is determined whether or not the range of the setting value is within the normal range (is within the range of “1” to “6”). If it is determined that the set value is within the normal range, the process advances to step S1409. If it is determined that the set value is not within the normal range, the process advances to step S1420 and shifts to return impossible error processing 2 (FIG. 137 described later). The error in this case is referred to as an "E6" error in this embodiment, and the fact that it is "E6" is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78.

Here, the recoverable error and the recoverable error will be described.
The recoverable error is an error that can be recovered without turning on / off the power, and when there is no medal in the hopper 35, for example, a front door open error, a medal clogging error and the like can be mentioned.
On the other hand, an unrecoverable error is an error that can not be recovered unless the power is turned off and the power is not turned on again. Specific non-recoverable errors include the following. However, it is not limited to these non-recoverable errors.
“E1” error: When it is judged that the return from power-off is not normal “E5” error: When it is judged that the display (stop symbol) error occurred when the reel 31 is stopped “E6” error: step S1408 If it is determined that the set value is not within the normal range, error "E7": When it is determined that a random number error has occurred in step S1410

Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the E1 error and the E5 error are referred to as a non-returnable error 1, and the E6 error and the E7 error are referred to as a non-returnable error 2.
A program for determining the non-returnable error 1 is stored in the used area. Furthermore, a program (FIG. 136 described later; SS_ERROR_STOP1) when the non-returnable error 1 occurs is stored in the control area in the used area of the ROM 54. Therefore, the process is also referred to as in-use area process.
On the other hand, a program for determining the non-returnable error 2 is stored outside the use area. A program for executing steps S1408 and S1410 in the above-described interrupt processing corresponds to this. Further, the program processing (FIG. 137 described later; SS_ERROR_STOP2) when the non-returnable error 2 occurs is stored in the control area outside the use area of the ROM 54. Therefore, the process is also referred to as out-of-use area process.

Return to the description of the flowchart.
In step S1409, built-in random number check processing is performed. In the present embodiment, a flag that is turned on when an error occurs in the built-in random number is provided, and it is determined whether this flag is turned on.
Specifically, for example, when a clock frequency abnormality (for example, when the update of the random number is late) of the random number for the role lottery is detected, the error flag is turned on.
Then, in step S1410, it is determined whether an error occurs in the built-in random number (whether an error flag is on). If it is determined that an error does not occur, the process proceeds to step S1411, and the error is If it is determined that the error has occurred, the process proceeds to step S1420 and proceeds to return impossible error processing 2. The error display content at this time is "E7".

  In step S1411, drive control of the reel 31 is performed. This control is performed on a reel 31 basis (left, middle, right), and may be stopped, constant speed, acceleration, deceleration, deceleration start, and standby depending on the operation state. When drive control of the reel 31 is completed, the process proceeds to step S1412, and port output processing is performed. In this process, the excitation output of the motor 32 (for reel) and the hopper motor 36 and the excitation output of the blocker 45 are performed.

In the next step S1413, an input error check process is executed. This process is a process of determining whether or not there is an abnormality in various sensors.
In the next step S1414, transmission processing of control command is performed. This processing is processing for transmitting the set control command (unsent control command stored in the command buffer of the RWM 53) to the sub control board 80.
Specifically, when the control command is set in the command buffer, this step S 1414 is performed in the interrupt process after that point (when the command buffer is empty, in principle, the interrupt process which comes after that point). The control command is transmitted to the sub control board 80 by this.

In the next step S1415, data for an external signal stored in RWM 53 is stored in a register. Then, in the next step S1416, data is written (set) in the output port 5 to output an external signal (transmit a signal to the external concentrated terminal plate 100).
Next, in step S1417, random number update processing is performed. In the next step S1418, the register value saved in step S1402 is restored, and the next interrupt is permitted. Specifically, the register data stored at the start of the interrupt processing is restored, and the interrupt prohibition flag is turned off so that the next interrupt processing can be started. Then, the processing according to this flowchart is ended.

As shown in the above processing, the on / off of the storage number display LED 76, the acquisition number display LED 78, the status display LEDs 79 (79a to 79g), and the setting value display LED 73 is controlled by the interrupt processing every 2.235 ms.
Furthermore, when a control command that has not been transmitted to the sub control board 80 is stored in the command buffer for each interrupt processing, the transmission processing is performed.

Note that interrupt processing is not performed during non-returnable error processing (interrupt processing is interrupted until normal return).
A non-returnable error is a serious error that can not normally occur, and processing such as update of RWM 53 data based on data from input port or transmission of control command to sub control board 80 is performed based on abnormal data. In order to prevent this, the interrupt itself is disabled.
If an unsent command is stored in the control command buffer when a non-returnable error occurs, the command is not sent to the sub control board 80. This is because the control command stored in the buffer may not be correct.

FIG. 134 is a flowchart showing the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in step S1406 of FIG.
First, in step S1431, the output ports 2 and 3 are turned off. The output port 2 is an output port corresponding to the digit 1 signal to the digit 5 signal, and the output port 3 is an output port corresponding to the segment A to segment P signal. By outputting “00000000” for these output ports 2 and 3, it is temporarily made not to output the digits 1 to 5. As a result, when switching the display of the LEDs, it is prevented that the different LEDs are simultaneously turned on and viewed (the display is covered) even in a moment (preventing the afterimage).

  In the next step S1432, the output port 4 is turned off as in step S1431. The output port 4 is an output port corresponding to the digit 6 signal to the digit 9 signal. Also for this output port 4, by outputting "00000000", the output of the management information display LED 74 is temporarily prevented. Thereby, the same effect (preventing afterimage) as described above is exhibited.

In the next step S1433, the LED display counter (_CT_LED_DSP) is updated. The update of the LED display counter is a process of shifting the bit "1" to the left by one digit. The updated value is stored at a predetermined address of the RWM 53. Then, the process proceeds to step S1434.
In step S1434, it is determined whether the LED display counter has been updated nine times. Here, when the LED display counter before update is "00000000", it is determined that the update is performed nine times. If the LED display counter before update is "00000000", the process proceeds to step S1435. On the other hand, if the LED display counter is not "00000000", the process proceeds to step S1436.

In step S1435, the LED display counter is initialized. Here, the LED display counter value is set to “00000001” and stored in a predetermined address of the RWM 53. Then, the process proceeds to step S1436.
In step S1436, the LED display counter and the LED display request flag are acquired. The LED display counter and the LED display request flag are both stored in a predetermined address of the RWM 53. Then, the value of the LED display counter is stored in the E register, and the value of the LED display request flag is stored in the A register.
Next, proceeding to step S1437, the segment display confirmation set of the digit to be displayed this time is performed. In this process, the LED display request flag value and the LED display counter value are ANDed to create data of the LED to be lighted this time.

For example,
LED display counter value: 00001000B
LED display request flag value: 01111111B
After AND operation: 00001000B
It becomes.
Or, for example,
LED display counter value: 10000000B
LED display request flag value: 01111111B
After AND operation: 00000000 B
It becomes.
Then, the calculation result is stored in the A register. Furthermore, the value stored in the A register is stored in the D register.

Next, proceeding to step S1438, it is determined whether the A register value (value obtained by ANDing the LED display counter value and the LED display request flag value) is "0". If it is determined that the value is "0", it is determined that there is no display request, and the process proceeds to step S1456. On the other hand, if it is determined that the value is not "0", it is determined that the display request is present, and the process proceeds to step S1439.
In step S1439, error display data is acquired. When an error occurs, the error indication data is stored at the address indicating the error indication data in the RWM 53, so the data is read and stored in the B register.
In the next step S1440, the LED segment table 2 is set. The LED segment table 2 is “TBL_SEG_DATA2” shown in FIG. 127, and is stored in the used area of the ROM 54. The start address of this data is read, and the value is stored in the HL register.

  Next, proceeding to step S1441, the setting value display data is acquired. Here, the current setting value stored at the predetermined address of the RWM 53 is read and stored in the A register. Next, proceeding to step S1442, it is determined whether there is a setting value display request. In this judgment, it is judged whether the D7 bit (bit corresponding to the digit 5) of the AND value stored in the D register is "1" (whether "10000000B" or not). Then, when it is "1", it is determined that the setting value display request has been made, and the process proceeds to step S1455. On the other hand, if it is determined that there is no setting value display request, the process proceeds to step S1443.

In step S1443, the stored sheet number data stored at the predetermined address of RWM 53 is acquired and stored in the A register. In the next step S1444, the upper digit offset is obtained. This process is a process of dividing the stored sheet data acquired in step S1443 by "10 (decimal number)", storing the quotient value in the A register, and storing the remainder value in the C register.
In the next step S1445, it is determined whether there is a display request for the upper digit of the stored number. This processing determines whether the D3 bit (bit corresponding to digit 1) of the AND-processed value stored in the D register is "1", and determines "Yes" if it is "1". Do. If it is determined that there is a display request for the upper digit of the stored number, the process proceeds to step S1455. If it is determined that the display request is not performed, the process proceeds to step S1446.

  In step S1446, it is determined whether there is a display request for the lower digit of the stored number. This processing determines whether the D4 bit (bit corresponding to digit 2) of the AND-processed value stored in the D register is "1", and determines "Yes" when it is "1". And proceed to step S1454. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is no display request for the lower digit of the stored sheet number, the process proceeds to step S1447.

  In step S1447, the setting change display data, the acquired sheet number data, or the push order instruction number is acquired and stored in the A register. This process is a process of reading the acquired number data stored at a predetermined address of the RWM 53 and storing it in the A register. At the timing of displaying the acquired number, acquired number data is stored in the predetermined address, and at the timing of displaying the pushing order instruction number in the ART, the pushing order instruction number is stored in the predetermined address. There is. Furthermore, when the setting is being changed, data for displaying “8” is stored.

  In the next step S1448, it is determined whether or not an error is indicated. In this process, it is determined whether the B register value is "0". If it is "0", the process proceeds to step S1450 if it is determined in step S1448 that it is not an error display time. If it is determined that an error is displayed, the process proceeds to step S1449.

In step S1449, the LED segment table 1 ("TBL_SEG_DATA1" in FIG. 127) is set. This process executes a process of storing the top address of the LED segment table 1 in the HL register.
Next, proceeding to step S1450, the offset for the upper digit is acquired. In this process, if an error has not occurred, an arithmetic operation is performed to divide the acquired sheet data or push order instruction number stored in the A register at this time by "10 (decimal number)", and the quotient is calculated. Store in the A register and store the remainder in the C register. On the other hand, when an error occurs, an operation of dividing the B register value by "10 (decimal number)" is executed, the quotient is stored in the A register, and the remainder is stored in the C register.

  In the next step S1451, it is determined whether there is a display request for the upper digit of the acquisition number display LED 78 or not. This processing determines whether or not the D5 bit (bit corresponding to digit 3) of the AND operation value stored in the D register is "1", and when it is "1", a display request is issued. I will judge. If it is determined that there is a display request, the process proceeds to step S1455. If it is determined that there is no display request, the process proceeds to step S1452.

  In step S1452, it is determined whether there is a display request for the lower digit of the acquisition number display LED 78 or not. This process determines whether the D6 bit (bit corresponding to digit 4) of the above ANDed value stored in the D register is "1", and if it is "1", it is determined that a display request is made. to decide. If it is determined that there is a display request, the process proceeds to step S1454. If it is determined that there is no display request, the process proceeds to step S1453.

In step S1453, bet signal data is acquired. This process is a process of performing an AND operation on the LED display counter and the bet number display data, and acquiring the operation result.
Here, the bet number display data is stored at a predetermined address of the RWM 53 and is as follows.
When betting on 0 sheets: 00000000 B
When placing 1 bet: 00000001B
When 2 bets: 00000011 B
When 3 bets: 00000111 B
Therefore, for example, when the LED display counter value is "00000100B" and the bet number display data is "00000111B", ANDing the both results in "00000100B" and the D2 bit (bit corresponding to the 3-bet display LED) Data that is "1" is created. Then, the process proceeds to step S1456.

If "Yes" in step S1446, or "Yes" in step S1452, and the process advances to step S1454, the offset for the lower digit is acquired. This process is a process of storing data stored in the C register in the A register.
Next, at step S1455, segment output data is acquired. This processing adds the data stored in the HL register (the start address of the LED segment table 1) and the data stored in the A register (the offset value corresponding to the display data), and corresponds to the address after the addition. It is a process of storing data in the D register.
For example,
HL register value = 1816 H (before addition)
A register value = 1H
HL register value = 1817 H (after addition)
D register value = 00000110 (B): “1” display data.
When the push order instruction number is stored in the acquired sheet number data, “=” display data is acquired.

Next, proceeding to step S1456, it is determined whether or not there is a display request for the segment P. Here, data indicating on / off of the status display LEDs 79d to 79g is stored at a predetermined address of the RWM 53. Specifically, it is as follows.
D0 bit: Not used D1 bit: Not used D2 bit: Not used D3 bit: When the game can be started "1", other "0"
D4 bit: Unused D5 bit: "1" when medals can be inserted, other "0"
D6 bit: Replay winning "1", other "0"
D7 bit: When effect display is possible "1", other "0"
The relationship between the bit and the status display LED 79 is the same as that shown in FIG. 132 (A).

  This data is read and stored in the A register, and the value is ANDed with the value stored in the E register (LED display counter). When the calculation result is "0", it is determined that there is no display request. . If it is determined that a segment P display request has been made, the process proceeds to step S1457, and if it is determined that a display request has not been made, the process proceeds to step S1458.

  In step S1457, segment P output data is set. This processing is processing for setting the D7 bit (bit corresponding to the segment P) of the data (display data) stored in the D register to "1". Next, proceeding to step S1458, the LED digit and segment signals are output from output ports 2 and 3. Specifically, data (digit data) stored in the E register is output from the output port 2, and data (segment data) stored in the D register is output from the output port 3. Then, the process shifts to ratio display processing (S_LED_OUT) of step S1459.

FIG. 135 is a diagram showing the ratio display process (S_LED_OUT) in step S1459.
The “ratio” is an abbreviation of management information displayed by the management information display LED 74 in the present embodiment, and is displayed by the digits 6 to 9.
The interrupt processing shown in FIG. 133 and the LED display control program shown in FIG. 134 are stored in the used area of the ROM 54. On the other hand, the program for the ratio display process of FIG. 135 is stored outside the use area of the ROM 54.
In FIG. 134, in the LED display control which is a program in the use area, when the process proceeds to step S1458, the process proceeds to a ratio display process which is a program outside the use area. The process returns to the end and ends the LED display control (step S1460).

  Thus, while the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) is executed by the program stored in the use area of the ROM 54, the ratio display processing (S_LED_OUT) is executed by the program stored outside the use area of the ROM 54. The lighting control of the digits 1 to 5 is performed by a program in the use area, and the lighting control of the digits 6 to 9 (management information (ratio)) is performed by a program outside the use area. Further, as shown in FIG. 127, the data used in the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) is also stored in the data area in the used area of the ROM 54, and the data used in the ratio display processing (S_LED_OUT) is the data of the ROM 54. It is stored in the data area outside the used area.

In FIG. 135, in step S1471, the LED display counter is acquired. This process is the same as the process of acquiring the LED display counter in step S1436. The LED display counter acquired here is stored in the D register.
In the next step S1472, it is determined whether there is a ratio display request. Here, it is determined whether there is a display request for any of the digits 6-9. Specifically, the LED display counter value stored in the D register and “11111000” are ANDed. Then, when the result of the AND operation is not “0”, it is determined that there is no ratio display request, and the processing according to this flowchart is ended (that is, to return to the processing in the use area, the process proceeds to step S1460 in FIG. 134). On the other hand, when the result of the AND operation is “0”, it is determined that a ratio display request has been made, and the process proceeds to step S1473.

In particular,
LED display counter value: 00010000 (digit 2 signal is on)
After the AND operation: 00010000 (≠ “0”) → No ratio display request is required.
Or
LED display counter value: 00000001 (digit 6 signal is on)
After AND operation: 00000000 → It becomes a ratio display request.

In the next step S1473, it is determined whether the LED display counter value stored in the D register is "0". If it is determined that the value is "0", the process proceeds to step S1474. If it is determined that the value is not "0", the process proceeds to step S1475.
In step S1474, a ratio (one digit) display request is set.
Here, although the management information display LED 74 displays four digits by the digits 6 to 9, as shown in FIG. 125 (B),
Digit 9 digit: Ratio (1 digit)
Digit 8 digit: Ratio (10 digits)
Digit 7 digit: Ratio (100 digits)
Digit 6 digit: Ratio (1000 digits)
It is called.

As shown in FIG. 132, when the D0 bit of the LED display counter is “1”, the digit 6 signal is “1”, and when the D1 bit is “1”, the digit 7 signal is “1” and D2 When the bit is "1", the digit 8 signal is "1". When the LED display counter is "0", the digit 9 signal is on.
However, since 9 digits 1 to 9 are managed by the LED display counter of 8 bits, even if digit 9 signal is on, all the bits become data that becomes “0”, which corresponds to digit 9 The bit to be set is not data that becomes "1". Therefore, when the LED display counter is "00000000B" (when digit 9 signal is on), digit data "00001000B" is created with D3 bit set to "1" to allocate digit 9 signal to D3 bit. . In step S1474, this process is executed, and "00001000B" is stored in the D register for this digit data. Then, the process proceeds to step S1475.
In the above step S1471 or S1474, digit data in which one of the digit 6 (D0) to digit 9 (D3) signals is "1" (on) is stored in the D register.

In the next step S1475, a ratio display number is acquired. Here, the ratio display numbers refer to the numbers “1” to “5” shown in FIG. Since the switching display is performed every predetermined time from the “1” numbered advantageous section ratio to the “5” numbered item ratio (total), in this interrupt, which number of management information is displayed get. The acquired ratio display number is stored in the E register.
Next, proceeding to step S1476, the identification segment offset table is set. This process is a process of storing the top address of the identification segment offset table ("TBL_SEGID_DATA" in FIG. 127) in the HL register. In the next step S1477, an identification segment offset value is acquired. Specifically, the offset value corresponding to the ratio display number stored in the E register in step S 1475 is read from the identification segment offset table. For example, the display offset data when the ratio display number is "1" is "7U", and the offset value at this time is "07AH". The display offset data when the ratio display number is "2" is "6y", and the offset value at this time is "06BH". This identification offset value is acquired and stored in the A register.

  In the next step S1478, it is determined whether or not there is a display request (display request for digit 6) of the ratio (1000 digits). Here, it is determined whether the D0 bit of the value stored in the D register is “1”, and when it is “1”, it is determined that the display request is present. Specifically, for example, the D register value and "00000001" are AND-operated, and if the calculation result is "0", it is judged that there is no display request, and if it is not "0", it is judged that there is display request. If there is a display request for the ratio (1000 digits), the process proceeds to step S1482, and if there is no display request, the process proceeds to step S1479.

  In step S1479, it is determined whether there is a display request (display request for digit 7) of the ratio (100 digits). Here, it is determined whether the D1 bit of the value stored in the D register is “1”, and when it is “1”, it is determined that the display request is present. Specifically, for example, the D register value and “00000010” are ANDed, and if the calculation result is “0”, it is determined that there is no display request, and if not “0”, it is determined that there is a display request. If there is a display request for the ratio (100 digits), the process proceeds to step S1483, and if there is no display request, the process proceeds to step S1480.

The process advances to step S1480 when there is no display request for the ratio (1000 digits) and the ratio (100 digit), that is, when there is no display request for the identification segment (information type). Therefore, in step S1480, ratio data is acquired. Here, the "ratio data" corresponds to, for example, "50 (%)" of the advantageous segment ratio in the example of FIG.
In step S1480, a numerical value corresponding to the ratio display number stored in the E register is obtained. For example, when the ratio display number acquired in step S 1475 is “1”, ratio data of the advantageous segment ratio is acquired. The method of acquiring ratio data is the same as that of the first embodiment, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

Next, proceeding to step S1481, it is determined whether there is a display request (display request for the digit 9) of the ratio (one digit). This process is a process of determining whether the D3 bit of the value stored in the D register is "1". Specifically, the D register value and “00000100” are AND-operated, and if the calculation result is “0”, it is judged that there is no display request, and if it is not “0”, it is judged that there is a display request. If there is a display request for the ratio (one digit), the process proceeds to step S1483, and if there is no display request, the process proceeds to step S1482.
If it is determined in step S1481 that no ratio (one digit) display request has been made, it means that there is a ratio (10 digit) display request.

If there is a display request for a ratio (1000 digits) or a ratio (10 digits) by the above processing, the process proceeds to step S1482. If a display request for a ratio (100 digits) or a ratio (1 digit) is performed, the process proceeds to step S1483. .
In step S1482, the upper digit offset is set. At this time, the identification segment offset value (step S1477) or ratio data (step S1480) is stored in the A register. Then, the upper digit is stored in the A register, and the lower digit is stored in the C register. For example, assuming that the identification segment offset value "07AH" of the advantageous section percentage is stored in the A register, "7" is stored in the A register and "A" is stored in the C register.
When "50" is stored in the A register as ratio data, "5" is stored in the A register, and "0" is stored in the C register. Then, the process proceeds to step S1483.

In the next step S1483, the ratio display segment data table (TBL_SEGRATE_DATA) is set. This process is a process of storing the start address of the ratio display segment data table in the HL register in FIG.
Next, at step S1484, segment output data is acquired. This process adds the value stored in the HL register (the start address of the ratio display segment data table) and the value stored in the A register, and adds data corresponding to the address of the ratio display segment data table It is processing to store in E register.

Specifically, for example,
HL register value = 1810 H (before addition; start address value of ratio display segment data table)
A register value = 5H
When
HL register value = 1815H (after addition)
E register value = 01101101 B: "5" display data.

Next, proceeding to step S1485, it is determined whether the segment P is displayed. In this embodiment, when the digits 6 to 9 are displayed, the segment P (dot) of the digit 7 is always displayed. Therefore, when the display request for the ratio (100 digits) is requested, it is determined that the segment P is displayed. . On the other hand, when there is a display request for the ratio (1 digit), the ratio (10 digit), and the ratio (1000 digit), it is determined that the display request for the segment P is not made.
Here, for example, it is determined whether the D1 bit of the value stored in the D register is “1”. When it is “1”, it is determined that there is a display request for segment P, and when it is not “1”. Determines that there is no display request for the segment P.
If it is determined that the display request for the segment P is requested, the process proceeds to step S1486. If it is determined that the display request is not requested, the process proceeds to step S1487.

In step S1486, output data corresponding to segment P is set. The segment P corresponds to the D7 bit of the 8-bit data, so the segment data (E register value) acquired in step S1484 and “10000000” are ORed with “10000000”, the operation result is acquired, and Remember.
In the next step S1487, a segment signal is output from output port 3 and a digit signal is output from output port 4 in order to output a digit signal and a segment signal. At this time, since data corresponding to the digit signal is stored in D register and data corresponding to the segment signal is stored in E register, output port 3 outputs E register value and outputs Port 4 outputs the D register value.
After execution of step S1487, the process returns to the flowchart of FIG. That is, the process advances to step S1460 to end the LED display control.

Subsequently, return impossible error processing will be described. In the present embodiment, return impossible error processing 1 includes return impossible error processing 1 and return impossible error processing 2.
As described above, the types of non-returnable errors (not limited to the errors exemplified here) are:
“E1” error: When it is judged that the return from power-off is not normal “E5” error: When it is judged that the display (stop symbol) error occurred when the reel 31 is stopped “E6” error: step S1408 In the case where it is determined that the set value is not within the normal range, an “E7” error: a case where it is determined in step S1410 that a random number error has occurred, and the like.

  Then, even if any unrecoverable error occurs, an error number is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78. For example, when an “E1” error occurs, “E” is displayed on digit 3 and “1” is displayed on digit 4. The same indication is made at other unrecoverable errors.

Furthermore, it is determined that the recovery from power-off is not normal, and it is determined that an “E1” error occurs during “program start processing (stored in the use area of the ROM 54)” (not shown).
Further, it is determined that a display (stop symbol) error has occurred, and it is determined that an "E5" error is in "main processing (stored in the use area of the ROM 54)" (not shown).

  On the other hand, the “E6” error is an error when it is determined that the set value is not within the normal range in step S1408 during the interrupt processing, but the program in step S1408 (set value error (out of set value range) The discrimination program is stored outside the use area of the ROM 54. In step S1408 in FIG. 133, the setting value error (outside of the setting value range) determining program stored outside the use area is executed, and thereafter, the process is set to return to step S1408.

  Similarly, the “E7” error is an error when it is determined that the random number value is an error in step S1410 during interrupt processing, but the program (random number abnormality check program) of the actual step S1410 is the ROM 54 It is stored outside the used area. In step S1410, the random number abnormality check program stored outside the use area is executed, and thereafter, the process is set to return to step S1410.

When the program in the used area determines that the error is not recoverable, the unrecoverable error processing 1 is executed. When the program outside the used area determines that the error is not recoverable, the unrecoverable error is processed. Execute process 2.
FIG. 136 is a flowchart showing non-returnable error processing 1 (SS_ERROR_STOP1). FIG. 137 is a flowchart showing return impossible error processing 2 (SS_ERROR_STOP2).
The program of the return impossible error process 1 is stored in the use area of the ROM 54, and the program of the return impossible error process 2 is stored outside the use area of the ROM 54.
Further, in the non-returnable error process 1, only digits 3 and 4 (acquisition number display LED 78) are controlled to light. On the other hand, in the non-returnable error process 2, the segments P of the digits 3 and 4 (acquisition number display LED 78) and the digits 6 to 9 (management information display LED 754) are controlled to light.

In FIG. 136, in step S1491, error display data (lower digit) is set. The processing here executes processing for storing data (01000000B) in which only digit 4 is set to "1" in the H register. This value corresponds to data in which the D6 bit of the output port 2 is set to "1".
Next, proceeding to step S1492, the upper digit is set as error display data. The processing here executes processing for storing data (00100000B) in which only digit 3 is “1” in the D register. This value corresponds to data in which the D5 bit of the output port 2 is “1”.

Further, in step S1492, segment data representing the upper digit "E" of the non-returnable error is stored in the E register, that is, "01111001 B".
It is to be noted that, before shifting to the return impossible error processing, segment data indicating the lower digit of the return impossible error is stored in the L register. For example, when the non-returnable error of this time is an "E1" error, since the lower digit is "1", the segment data, that is, "00000110B" is stored.
In the following example, it is assumed that the current non-returnable error 1 is an E1 error.

From the above, the D, E, H, and L register values are now
D register value: Data in which only the high-order digit (digit 3) of a non-recoverable error is "1" (00100000 B)
E register value: Display data indicating upper "E" of unrecoverable error (01111001 B)
H register value: Data in which only the low-order digit (digit 4) of non-recoverable error is "1" (01000000B)
L register value: Display data (00000110B) indicating lower "1" of the current unrecoverable error
It becomes.

In the next step S1493, the output port address to be cleared and the number of output ports are set. In this embodiment, the output ports to be cleared in the unrecoverable error processing 1 are the output ports 0 to 6, and an address is set for each port, so the number of the address and the number of output ports (7) set.
In the next step S1494, output ports 0 to 6 are sequentially turned off. Specifically, all “0” s (“00000000”) are output from the respective addresses indicating output ports 0 to 6 one output port at a time. In step S1495, the next output port address is set. That is, the address indicating the output port is incremented by "1". For example, when the address of output port 0 is “0F1H”, the address “0F2H” of output port 1 is set as the next address.
Next, proceeding to step S1496, it is determined whether all output ports have been completed, ie, whether or not output port 6 has been completed. If it is determined that the process has not ended, the process returns to step S 1494. If it is determined that the process has ended, the process proceeds to step S 1497.

As described above, when all the output ports 0 to 6 are turned off, the active signal output before the processing is performed is turned off. Thereby, the burn-in of the LED, the burn-in of the motor 32, and the swallowing of the medal can be prevented. For example, if a power failure occurs while the blocker signal is being output, the blocker 45 continues to be on (the medal channel is formed) unless the process is performed (detection of medals) A medal is swallowed because processing does not occur).
In addition, when the power is shut off while the excitation signal of the motor 32 is being output, the excitation signal of the motor 32 is continuously output until the reset signal is input unless the process is performed.

  In the next step S1497, display data is output from output ports 2 and 3 in order to display the error upper digit. The output port 2 outputs the data stored in the D register, and the output port 3 outputs the data stored in the E register.

Next, proceeding to step S1498, a standby (wait) for flicker prevention of the LED is executed. Here, although depending on the performance of the LED, how much standby is performed may be set to, for example, “0.1 ms”. Here, for example, a predetermined value (for example, "255") is stored in B register, for example, this value is subtracted by the internal system clock, and when the B register value becomes "0", it is determined that the waiting time has elapsed. And proceed to the next step S1499.
In step S 1499, “0” is output from the output ports 2 and 3. This process is a process for preventing an afterimage as in step S1431 of FIG. 134 described above.

Next, proceeding to step S1500, a standby (wait) for flicker prevention of the LED is executed. After “0” is output from the output ports 2 and 3, it is a process for reliably extinguishing the LED. Next, proceeding to step S1501, the upper digit and the lower digit are switched.
Specifically, the DE register value and the HL register value are interchanged. By this,
<Before replacing>
D register value: Data in which only the upper digit (digit 3) of non-recoverable error is “1” E register value: Display data indicating high “E” of non-recoverable error H register value: lower of non-recoverable error Data in which only the digit (digit 4) is “1” L register value: Display data indicating lower “1” of the error which can not be restored this time <After switching>
D register value: Data in which only the lower digit (impossible to recover) error (digit 4) is “1” E register value: Display data indicating the lower “1” of the error that can not be recovered this time Data in which only the high-order digit (digit 3) of “1” is “1” L register value: Display data that indicates the high “E” of the unrecoverable error.

Then, the process proceeds to step S1502, and display data is output from the output ports 2 and 3 in order to display the error lower digit. As in step S1497, the output port 2 outputs the D register value, and the output port 3 outputs the E register value. As a result, the output port 2 outputs "01000000" in which the digit 4 signal is "1", and the output port 3 outputs display data "00000110" indicating "1".
Next, proceeding to step S1503, a standby for flicker prevention is executed. This process is the same as step S1498. Next, proceeding to step S1504, “0” is output from the output ports 2 and 3 as in step S1499. Further, in the next step S1505, a standby for flicker prevention is executed. This process is the same as step S1500. Then, the process returns to step S1497.

By the above processing, when, for example, an "E1" error occurs, the display of "E" by digit 3 and the display of "1" by digit 4 are alternately and repeatedly displayed at predetermined time intervals.
As described above, LED display control (and ratio display processing) is executed in the timer interrupt process, but in the case of an unrecoverable error, the timer interrupt process is not executed (is prohibited), as shown in FIG. 136. As described above, the display of the non-returnable error is executed by the arithmetic processing using a register and the hardware configuration.

Subsequently, return impossible error processing 2 (SS_ERROR_STOP2) in FIG. 137 will be described. As described above, the non-returnable error processing 2 is processing that is executed when a non-returnable error is determined by a program outside the use area of the ROM 54 (for example, an “E6” error or an “E7” error). .
In FIG. 137, the same process as that of FIG. 136 is denoted by the same step number.
Steps S1491 to S1505 are the same as those in FIG.
In the non-returnable error process 1, an error number is displayed on the digits 3 and 4 (the number-of-acquisitions display LED 78). On the other hand, the non-returnable error process 2 includes a process of displaying an error number on the digits 3 and 4 (acquisition number display LED 78) and displaying predetermined information on the management information display LED 74.

  In FIG. 137, after step S1505, the process proceeds to step S1506. In step S1506, a process of lighting the segment P of the digit 6 is executed. Specifically, a signal of "10000000B" (only segment P is on) is output from output port 3, and a signal of "00000001B" (only digit 6 is on) is output from output port 4. Next, proceeding to step S1507, a standby process for flicker prevention is executed. This process is the same process as step S1498 and the like. Next, proceeding to step S 1508, the output ports 3 and 4 output a signal of “0”. This process is the same process as step S1499.

Next, proceeding to step S1509, a standby process for flicker prevention is executed. This process is the same as step S1500.
The above process is repeated for the digits 7-9. That is,
(1) Output a signal of “10000000B” (only segment P is on) from output port 3 and output a signal with output digit 4 turned on (“1”) from output port 4 (2) For preventing flicker Standby processing (3) Output ports 3 and 4 are turned off ("0" is output)
(4) Execute standby processing for flicker prevention.
By the above processing, the segments P of the digits 6, 7, 8, and 9 sequentially light. After the process of step S1521, the process returns to step S1497.

Twenty-First Embodiment
FIG. 138 is a diagram showing the configuration of the output port in the twenty-first embodiment, and corresponds to FIG. 128 in the twentieth embodiment.
The feature point of the output port of the twenty-first embodiment is that assuming that no digit 5 is provided, there is one output port (digit port) that transmits a digit signal, and an output that transmits a segment signal. One port (segment port) is provided (output port 4).
In the twenty-first embodiment of FIG. 138, unlike the twentieth embodiment, the digit signal is not assigned to the output port 2 (of course, the segment signal is also not assigned).

The output port 3 is set as an output port dedicated to digit signals. Digit 1 to 4 signals and digit 6 to 9 signals are assigned to 8 bits of the output port 3.
Therefore, the digit 5 signal is not assigned to the output port 3. When the number of digits including the digit 5 is nine, when trying to assign this to an 8-bit signal, there is a shortage of one bit. Therefore, the digit 5 is not provided, or, if the digit 5 is provided, it is assigned to another port (for example, the output port 5), and the digits 1 to 4 and 6 to 9 signals are assigned to one output port 3. Even when the digit 5 is provided, the digit 5 is a digit that does not need to be lighted normally during (except during setting change or setting confirmation), so the digits 1 to 4 and 6 to 6 that need to be lighted normally 9 signals are set to be managed by one output port 3.

The output port 4 is a segment dedicated output port, and is the same as the output port 3 of the twentieth embodiment.
In the twenty-first embodiment, when digit 5 is not provided, the setting value is displayed as the stored number display LED 76 (either digit 1 or 2) or acquired number display LED 78 (digit 3 or 4) during setting change or setting confirmation. Displayed on the In this way, it is not necessary to assign a bit dedicated to the digit 5 signal to the output port. In this case, the D5 bit of the output port 5 in FIG. 138 is an unused (vacant) bit.
However, as in the twentieth embodiment, when the set value display LED 73 (digit 5) is provided and the digit 5 signal is output, as shown in FIG. 138, for example, it can be allocated to the D5 bit of the output port 5 .

Also in the twenty-first embodiment, since the output port 3 for outputting a digit signal and the segment output port 4 for outputting a segment signal are continuous output ports, digit data and segment data (total 2 bytes) can be performed at one time. It becomes possible to output.
Further, when the setting value display LED 73 (digit 5) is not provided, a total of eight of the digits 1 to 4 and 6 to 9 are provided, and therefore, the digit can be allocated to each bit of 8-bit data. It has the merit that it can be easily managed since the number of output ports for outputting signals can be one.

FIG. 139 (A) is a diagram showing the relationship between digits and segments in the 21st embodiment, and FIG. 139 (B) is a diagram showing the LED display counter of the 21st embodiment. The example of FIG. 139 shows an example where the digit 5 is not provided.
In the twenty-first embodiment, except that the digit 5 is not provided, assignment of digits and segments is similar to that of the twentieth embodiment (FIG. 126). Therefore, in the twenty-first embodiment, the effect display LED 79 g is not provided among the state display LEDs 79. If the effect display LED 79g is provided, it can be assigned to the segment P of the digit 2.

Further, as shown in FIG. 6B, the signal assigned to the bit of the LED display counter matches the signal assigned to the bit of the output port 3. In the same figure (B), when the bit "1" is shifted to the left by one digit at the interrupt next to the interrupt "8", the LED display counter becomes "0", but when it becomes "0", Initialize the LED display counter to "00000001". Thereby, the LED display counter becomes a counter in which one cycle is eight interrupts.
Furthermore, as in the twentieth embodiment, the 1-bet display signal to the 3-bet display signal are not allocated to the LED display counter. In the twenty-first embodiment, the 1-bet display LEDs 79a to 3-bet display LEDs 79c perform static lighting, not dynamic lighting.
As described above, since the bet number display data is stored at a predetermined address of the RWM 53, this data may be read periodically and the bet display signal may be constantly output from the output port 2.
Furthermore, the assignment of the segment P to the digit signal is the same as in the twentieth embodiment.
In the twenty-first embodiment, the illustration of the circuit wiring diagrams (FIGS. 129 to 131) shown in the twentieth embodiment is omitted.

FIG. 140 is a flowchart showing LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in the twenty-first embodiment, and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 134 in the twentieth embodiment. In the flowchart described below, the same step numbers are assigned to steps that execute the same processes as in the twentieth embodiment, and redundant descriptions will be omitted. Further, in the steps having contents different from the twentieth embodiment, the step numbers are underlined.
First, step S1531 is a step corresponding to step S1431 in FIG. 134. Here, output port 3 (digit port) and output port 4 (segment port) are turned off. By outputting "00000000B" from these output ports 3 and 4, it is temporarily made not to output the digits 1 to 4 and 6 to 9. This is to prevent different LEDs from being simultaneously lit and viewed (displayed as covered) at the same time as switching the display of the LEDs as in the twentieth embodiment (afterimage prevention) ).

In the next step S1433, the LED display counter is updated. Here, as described above, the process of shifting the bit of "1" to the left by one digit is executed. Next, proceeding to step S1532, it is determined whether the LED display counter is "0". If it is determined that it is "0", the process proceeds to step S1435. If it is determined that it is not "0", the process proceeds to step S1436.
In step S1435, the LED display counter is initialized. Here, the process of setting the LED display counter to "00000001" is executed.

Steps S1435 to S1446 are the same as in FIG. 134 (twentieth embodiment). However, in the twenty-first embodiment, there is no process of steps S1441 and S1442 in FIG. In the twentieth embodiment, it is determined whether there is a display request for the digit 5 (setting value display LED 73). In the twenty-first embodiment, in order to display setting values on the digits 3 and 4 (acquisition number display LED 78). In step S1533, setting value display data is acquired.
After step S1446, the process advances to step S1533 to acquire setting value display data, acquired sheet number data, and a pressing order instruction number. If the setting is being changed, the setting value data acquired in step S1533 is displayed on digit 3 or 4 (whichever is optional).

Further, in the twenty-first embodiment, since the 1-bet display LEDs 79a to 79t perform static lighting, the processing of steps S1452 and S1453 in FIG. 134 is not performed.
In FIG. 140, when “No” is determined in step S1451, it is determined that there is a display request for the acquired lower digit (digit 4), and the process proceeds to step S1454.
Step S1534 corresponds to step S1458 in FIG. 134. Here, the digit signal is output from the output port 3 and the segment signal is output from the output port 4. Then, the process advances to step S1535 to proceed to ratio display processing.
Except for the above, this embodiment is the same as the twentieth embodiment.

FIG. 141 is a flowchart showing ratio display processing in the twenty-first embodiment, and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 135 in the twentieth embodiment.
141 is different from FIG. 135 in that steps S1473 and S1474 are not provided. That is, after step S1472, the process proceeds to step S1475.
The LED display counter of the twenty-first embodiment is a counter in which one cycle is eight interrupts as shown in FIG. 139, and when the LED display counter becomes “0” as in the twentieth embodiment. These steps are not required because it is not determined that there is a specific ratio display requirement.
Except for the above, this embodiment is the same as the twentieth embodiment.

Twenty-Second Embodiment
FIG. 142 (A) shows various LEDs on the display substrate 75 in the twenty-second embodiment, and FIG. 142 (B) shows the management information display LED 74 in the twenty-second embodiment more specifically. The same figure (C) is a figure which shows setting value display LED73 in 22nd Embodiment. FIG. 142 is a view corresponding to FIG. 125 of the twentieth embodiment.
In the twentieth embodiment (also in the first embodiment), each LED is divided into digits 1 to 9, but in the twenty-second embodiment, the relationship between the digit and the LED is as follows.
Digit 1a: Upper digit of storage number display LED 76 Digit 2a: Lower digit of storage number display LED 76 Digit 3a: Upper digit of acquisition number display LED 78 Digit 4a: Lower digit of acquisition number display LED 78 Digit 5a: Status display LED 79
Digit 1b: Management information display LED 74 (upper information type (1000 digits))
Digit 2b: Management information display LED 74 (information type low order (100 digits))
Digit 3b: Management information display LED 74 (numeric upper digit (10 digits))
Digit 4b: Management information display LED 74 (numeric low-order digit (1 digit))
Digit 5b: Setting value display LED 73
Furthermore, as described later, the segments of the digits 1a to 5a are segments 1A to 1P, and the segments of the digits 1b to 5b are segments 2A to 2P.

As shown in FIG. 142 (A), each of the digits 1a to 4a is a 7-segment display provided with dot segments (segment 1P) in 7 segments (in this respect, with the digits 1 to 4 in the twentieth embodiment) Different). Therefore, in the twenty-second embodiment, the digits 1a to 4a and 1b to 5b can use the same 7-segment display.
Furthermore, in the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 2, the digit segment, that is, the dot segment (segment P) of the lower digit of the storage number display LED 76 is used as the advantageous section display LED 77. On the other hand, in the twenty-second embodiment, the dot segment (segment 1P) of the digit 4a indicating the lower digit of the acquisition number display LED 78 is used as the advantageous section display LED 77.

Further, in the management information display LED 74, the dot segment (segment 2P) of the digit 2b functions as the digit display LED as in the twentieth embodiment.
Furthermore, the dot segments (segments 2P) of the digits 1b, 3b and 4b function as non-returnable error display LEDs as in the twentieth embodiment.

FIG. 143 is a diagram showing the relationship between digits and segments in the twenty-second embodiment.
As described above, the segments of digits 1a to 5a are segments 1A to 1P, and the segments of digits 1b to 5b are segments 2A to 2P.

In FIG. 143, segments 1P of digits 1a to 3a are unused. On the other hand, the segment 1P of the digit 4a (a digit indicating the lower digit of the acquisition number display LED 78) is used as the advantageous section display LED 77 as described above.
Furthermore, the digit 5a constitutes the status display LED 79, and the segments 1A to 1G and 1P of the digit 5a are, as shown in FIG.
Segment 1A: 1 bet display LED 79a
Segment 1B: 2 bet display LED 79b
Segment 1C: 3 bet display LED 79c
Segment 1D: Game start display LED 79d
Segment 1E: input display LED 79e
Segment 1F: Replay display LED 79f
Segment 1G: Unassigned Segment 1P: Unassigned.
Therefore, for example, when the digit 5 signal is output and the segment 1A signal is output, the 1-bet display LED 79a is lit.
Also, the segment 2P of the digit 5b (set value display LED 73) is unused.

FIG. 144 shows an output port of the twenty-second embodiment.
The feature of the output port of the twenty-second embodiment is that one output port transmits a digit signal (output port 2) and two output ports transmit a segment signal (output ports 3 and 4). It is.
Therefore, the difference from the twentieth embodiment etc. described above is the output port for transmitting the segment signal of the management information display LED 74 (digits 1 b to 4 b) and the segment signal of the stored number display LED 76 etc. (digits 1 a to 4 a) And an output port for transmitting the signal.

  First, in the output port 2, digits 1 to 5 signals are assigned to bits D0 to D4, respectively. Here, the digit 1 signal includes both the digit 1 a signal and the digit 1 b signal, and the same applies to the digit 2 to 5 signals. Therefore, for example, when a signal of "1" is output from bit D0 of output port 2, both digit 1a (storage number display LED 76 (upper digit) and 1b (management information display LED 74 (information type upper)) are driven. A signal is provided.

Also, in the output port 2, the D5 to D7 bits are unused.
The output port 3 is an output port for the segments 1A to 1P signals, and the segments 1A to 1P signals are assigned to bits D0 to D7 respectively.
Similarly, the output port 4 is an output port for the segments 2A to 2P signals, and the segments 2A to 2P signals are assigned to bits D0 to D7 respectively.
The output port 5 is the same as in the twentieth embodiment.

FIGS. 145 to 147 are circuit diagrams showing wiring of electric signals of the main control substrate 50, the display substrate 75, and the digits 1 (1a, 1b) to 5 (5a, 5b), respectively showing the twentieth embodiment It is a figure corresponding to 129-FIG.
In FIG. 145, the illustration of the transistors and the like is omitted as in FIG. 129 of the twentieth embodiment.
FIGS. 145 and 146 show the wiring of electrical signals on the main control substrate 50, and FIG. 147 shows the wiring of electrical signals on the display substrate 75.

As shown in FIG. 146, on the main control board 50, the digit 5b constituting the setting value display LED 73 and the digits 1b to 4b constituting the management information display LED 74 are provided.
Further, as shown in FIG. 147, on the display substrate 75, the digits 1a and 2a constituting the storage number display LED 76, the digits 3a and 4a constituting the acquisition number display LED 78, and six pieces constituting the digit 5a. A status display LED 79 is mounted.

  As shown in FIG. 145, the main CPU 55 is provided on the main control board 50, and the IC2 to IC4 having the output ports 2 to 4 are provided. Although the main control board 50 is actually provided with an IC other than these three, the illustration is omitted in the present embodiment.

IC2 is an IC for controlling digit 1 to 5 signals, and IC3 is an IC for controlling segments 1A to 1P. The IC 4 is an IC related to control of the segments 2A to 2P.
The IC2 to IC4 are similar to those of the twentieth embodiment in that the IC2 to IC4 are respectively provided with clock signal input terminals and the like, and therefore the description will be omitted.

Digits 1 to 5 signal lines are output from the D0 to D4 output terminals of the output port 2, respectively, one is connected to the digits 1b to 5b of the main control substrate 50, and the other is connected to the display substrate 75.
Also, segments 1A to 1P signal lines are output from the D0 to D7 output terminals of the output port 3, respectively, and these signal lines are connected to the display substrate 75.
Furthermore, segments 2A to 2P signal lines are output from the D0 to D7 output terminals of the output port 4, respectively, and these signal lines are connected to the digits 1b to 5b of the main control board 50.

In FIG. 146, digit 1 to 5 signals are connected to drive signal lines of digits 1 b to 5 b, respectively.
Digits 1 b to 5 b are LEDs each having eight segments (segments 2A to 2G and 2P). The LEDs constituting the segments 2A to 2G and 2P of the digits 1b to 5b are connected to the segments 2A to 2G and 2P signal lines, respectively.

As shown in FIG. 147, digits 1 a to 5 a are connected to the display substrate 75. The output terminals of the digit 1 signal line to the digit 4 signal line of the display substrate 75 are connected to the drive signal lines of the digits 1a to 4a.
Further, all of the digits 1a to 4a are LEDs having seven segments (segments 1A to 1G and 1P), similarly to the digits 1b to 5b. The LEDs of the segments 1A to 1G of the digits 1a to 3a are connected to the output terminals of the segments 1A to 1G signal lines, respectively. Since each segment 1P of digits 1a to 3a is unused, it is not connected to the segment 1P signal line.
On the other hand, the segments 1A to 1G and 1P of the digit 4a are connected to the output terminals of the segments 1A to 1G signal lines.
Furthermore, six status display LEDs 79, specifically, 1 bet display LED 79a, 2 bet display LED 79b, 3 bet display LED 79c, game start display LED 79d, closing display LED 79e, and replay display LED 79f are connected to the digit 5 signal line. It is done.

The 1-bet display LED 79a is connected to the output terminal of the segment 1A signal line, the 2-bet display LED 79b is connected to the output terminal of the segment 1B signal line, and the 3-bet display LED 79c is connected to the output terminal of the segment 1C signal line There is.
The game start display LED 79d is connected to the output terminal of the segment 1D signal line, the insertion display LED 79e is connected to the output terminal of the segment 1E signal line, and the replay display LED 79f is connected to the output terminal of the segment 1F signal line.

In the above configuration, for example, when a data signal of "1" is output from the D0 output terminal of the main CPU 55, the data signal is input to the D0 input terminals of IC2 to IC4, respectively. At this moment, the XCS2 output terminal is active. At the same time, the data signal is input to the D0 input terminal of IC2.
As a result, since the digit 1 signal is output, the drive signal is supplied to both the digit 1a (upper digit of the storage number display LED 76) and the digit 1b (upper information type of the management information display LED 74).

Further, when the digit 1 signal is output as described above, for example, when the data signal of "1" is output from the D0 and D1 output terminals of the main CPU 55, and at this moment, the XCS3 output terminal is active, The data signal is input to the D0 and D1 input terminals of IC3. As a result, since the segments 1A and 1B signals are output to the display substrate 75, current can flow in the segments 1A and 1B of the digit 1a.
Of course, the segments 2A and 2B of the digit 1b are not lighted even if the segments 1A and 1B signals are output.

On the other hand, when the digit 1 signal is output as described above, for example, when the data signal of "1" is output from the D0 and D1 output terminals of the main CPU 55 and the XCS 4 output terminal is active at this moment, The data signal is input to the D0 and D1 input terminals of the IC4. As a result, the segment 2A and 2B signals are output to the digit 1b, so that current can flow in the segment 2A and 2B of the digit 1b.
Of course, even if the segment 2A and 2B signals are output, the segments 1A and 1B of the digit 1a are not lit.

Also, for example, if digit 5 signals are output from the D4 output terminal of IC2, and segments 1A, 1B and 1C are output from the D0, D1 and D2 output terminals (segments 1A, 1B and 1C signals) of IC3, then 1 bet The display LED 79a, the 2 bet display LED 79b, and the 3 bet display LED 79c can be lighted.
Even if the digit 5 signal is output, the digit 5b (set value display LED 73) does not light if the segments 2A to 2G signals are not output.
As described above, in the twenty-second embodiment, nine seven segments and six status display LEDs 79 are used for the digits 1 to 5 signals, the segments 1A to 1G and 1P, the segments 2A to 2G, and 2P. Control lighting.

FIG. 148A is a diagram showing a relation among an interrupt, an LED display counter (_CT_LED_DSP) value, a digit signal and a segment signal in the twenty-second embodiment. Further, FIG. 7B is a diagram showing an LED display request flag (_FL_LED_DSP). This FIG. 148 is a figure corresponding to FIG. 132 of the twentieth embodiment.
In FIG. 148 (A), the LED display counter of the twenty-second embodiment advances bit “1” → “2” →... (For each interrupt) to select bit “1” of the LED display counter value. It is updated to shift right by one digit. Then, in the figure, in the interrupt following the interrupt "5", the LED display counter becomes "00000000" by right shift by one digit, but at the time of the interrupt, the LED display counter is initialized and the LED display counter Set to "00010000". Thereby, the LED display counter repeats the value of “5” → “4” →... → “1” → “5” → “4” →. That is, one cycle takes five interrupts.

From the above, the LED display counter value is
"N" interrupting eye: 00010000
"N + 1" interrupting eye: 0000 1000
"N + 2" interruption order: 00000100
"N + 3" interrupt eyes: 00000010
"N + 4" interrupt eyes: 00000001
“N + 5” interrupt: 00000000 → 00010000 (initialization; same value as “N” interrupt)
"N + 6" interrupting eye: 0000 1000
:
It becomes.

  In the twenty-second embodiment, five interrupts constitute one cycle, and the digits 1a to 5a and the digits 1b to 5b are lit. Specifically, in FIG. 148 (A), for example, when the interrupt is “1”, that is, when the LED display counter value is “00010000”, the digit 5 signal is output to output the status display LED 79 and the setting value display LED 73. Enables lighting. At the next interrupt "2", the LED display counter becomes "00001000", and the digit 4 signal is output, and the low-order digit of the acquired number display LED D78 and the numerical low-order digit of the management information display LED 74 can be lit.

Further, as shown in FIG. 7B, the LED display request counter is an 8-bit signal in which the D0 bit is the digit 1 signal, the D1 bit is the digit 2 signal,..., And the D4 bit is the digit 5 signal. It is data. Each bit of the LED display request counter is matched with the bit of the output port 2.
The LED display request counter is different from the twentieth embodiment in that, normally, the D4th bit (a bit corresponding to the digit 5) is "1". During normal operation, the signals 1A to 1G of the digit 5a are output to light the status display LED 79.
In the twentieth embodiment, since one cycle includes five interrupts, the time during which the LED is turned off can be shortened, and the flickering of the LED can be further reduced.

  For example, if the LED display counter is “00010000” and the LED display request flag is “00011111 (normal)”, ANDing the two results in “00010000” and only the digit 5 signal is turned on. However, during normal times, only the segment 1 signal is output to enable lighting of the status display LED 79, but the segment 2 signal is not output and control is performed so as not to light the set value display LED 73 (digit 5b).

On the other hand, during the setting change, for example, the segment 2 signal is output at an interrupt timing (the LED display counter is “00010000”) at which the digit 5 signal is turned on, and the setting value display LED 73 (digit 5 b) can be lit.
Also, during the setting change, for example, at the interrupt timing (the LED display counter is “00000100”) at which the digit 3 signal is turned on, the segment 1 signal is output for the digit 3a (upper digit of the acquisition number display LED 78). Is displayed.

  Furthermore, when the segment 1 signal is generated at the interrupt timing of the LED display counter “00001000” (interrupt “2” in the figure), it is determined whether or not it is in the advantageous section. Whether it is in the advantageous section or not is performed, for example, by determining on / off of the advantageous section flag which is turned on in the advantageous section (the advantageous section flag is stored at a predetermined address of the RWM 53). Then, when it is determined that it is in the advantageous section, a value obtained by OR operation of the generated segment 1 signal and "10000000" is output from the output port 3 as a segment 1 signal. Thereby, when it is in the advantageous section, the segment 1P (the advantageous section display LED 77) of the digit 4a can be lighted.

FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in the twenty-second embodiment, and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 134 of the twentieth embodiment. As described above, in the steps different from the twentieth embodiment, the step numbers are underlined. The same step numbers are assigned to steps for executing the same processing as the twentieth embodiment, and the description will be omitted.
In FIG. 149, in step S1541, the LED digit and segment 1 (output ports 2 and 3) are turned off. This process is a process common to step S1431 in FIG. 134, and is a process of outputting "00000000B" from the output ports 2 and 3. In the next step S1542, the segment 2 (output port 4) is turned off. This process is also a process of outputting "00000000B" from the output port 4 as in the above process.

In step S1453, the LED display counter is updated. In the twenty-second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 148, updating is performed such that bit "1" is shifted to the right by one digit.
In the next step S1544, it is determined whether or not the LED display counter is "0". If it is determined that it is "0", the process proceeds to step S1545. If it is determined that it is not "0", the process proceeds to step S1436. .
In step S1545, the LED display counter is initialized. That is, in the determination of step S1544, when the LED display counter is "00000000", processing to set "00010000" is executed. Then, the process proceeds to step S1436.

Step S1436 is the same process as the twentieth embodiment. In the next step S1546, error display data, LED display data, and bet signal data are acquired. Acquisition of error display data is the same as the processing of step S1439 in FIG. Further, the LED display data is data indicating the on / off of the status display LED 79, and is stored at a predetermined address in the use area of the RWM 53. Specifically, the data is as follows.
D0: Not used D1: Not used D2: Not used D3: When the game start is possible "1", when the game start is impossible "0"
D4: "1" when medal insertion is possible, "0" when medal insertion is not possible
D5: Replay winning "1", Replay non winning "0"
D6: Not used D7: Not used

In the above data, the bits D0 to D7 correspond to the segments 1A to 1P of the state display LED 79 shown in FIG. 143, and this value is acquired.
Also, the bet signal data is the same as the data acquired in step S1454 in FIG.
When betting 0 sheets: 00000000
When placing 1 bet: 00000001
When 2 bets: 00000011
When placing 3 bets: 00000111
Because one of the values is stored at a predetermined address in the use area of the RWM 53, the value is acquired.

Next, proceeding to step S1547, the LED display data and the bet signal data are combined, and the data for the output port 3 is set. This process is a process of ORing the LED display data and the bet signal data and storing the calculation result.
Next, proceeding to step S1548, the segment 2 data for the output port 4 is cleared. This process is a process of clearing a register for setting segment 2 data.
The next steps S1438 to S1455 are the same as in FIG. However, in FIG. 149, step S1439 in FIG. 134 is not included. The error display data is already obtained in step S1546.
If it is determined in step S1451 that there is no request for display of the number-of-earnings upper digit, since there is a request for display of the number-of-earnings lower digit, the determination branch of step S1452 in FIG. 134 is not provided.

After step S1455, step S1549 follows and segment 2 data for output port 4 is set. The data to be set here is segment 2 data (segments 2A to 2G) corresponding to the setting value display data. Since the digit 1b to 4b performs lighting processing in ratio display processing described later, the segment 2 data of the digit 1b to 4b is not set in this flowchart.
Next, proceeding to step S1550, it is determined whether there is a display request for the digit 5b (setting value display LED 73). Here, the request to display the digit 5 b is made when the LED display counter value is “00010000” and the setting is being changed or confirmed. If it is determined that there is a display request for the digit 5b, the process proceeds to step S1554. If it is determined that there is no display request, the process proceeds to step S1551.

  In step S1551, segment 1 (1A to 1G) data for the output port 3 is set. Segment 1 data for output port 3 is stored in a predetermined register in step S1547. Next, proceeding to step S1552, the data of the advantageous zone display LED 77 is set. Here, it is determined whether or not the game is in an advantageous section, for example, by an advantageous section flag which is turned on during the advantageous section. Then, when it is determined that it is in the advantageous section, it is determined whether the digit to be lit in the present interrupt processing is the digit 4 or not. When the LED display counter value is "00001000", it is determined that the digit 4 is on. In this case, data obtained by ORing “1000000” with the segment 1 data set in step S1551 is set as segment 1 data for the output port 3. As a result, data capable of lighting the segment 1P of the digit 4a is set.

Next, proceeding to step S1553, the segment 2 data for the output port 4 set in step S1549 is cleared. When there is no display request for the digit 5 b (set value display LED 73) (“No” in step S 1550), the digit 5 b is not to be lit.
Then, in step S1554, the digit signal is output from the output port 2, and the segment 1 signal is output from the output port 3. Next, at step S1555, the segment 2 signal is output from the output port 4. Here, when the segment 2 data is cleared in step S1553, the output port 4 outputs "00000000". Then, the process advances to step S1556 to shift to a ratio display process outside the use area.

FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing ratio display processing according to the twenty-second embodiment, and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 135 of the twentieth embodiment.
When FIG. 150 and FIG. 135 are compared, they differ in the point which does not have step S1473 and step S1474.
In step S1561, the digit signal is output from the output port 2, and the segment 2 signal is output from the output port 4.
The points other than the above are the same as the twentieth embodiment.

Twenty-Third Embodiment
FIG. 151 is a diagram showing the output ports 2 to 6 in the twenty-third embodiment, and is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 144 of the twenty-second embodiment.
In the twenty-third embodiment, as in the twenty-second embodiment, there are one output port for transmitting digit signals (output port 3) and two output ports for transmitting segment signals (output ports 4 and 6). is there. .
The output port 2 of the twenty-third embodiment is a port for outputting a bet indication signal and a data strobe signal.
In the twenty-second embodiment, the 1-bet display LED 79a to the 3-bet display LED 79c are included in the digit 5a to perform dynamic lighting. On the other hand, in the twenty-third embodiment, static lighting is performed on the 1-bet display LEDs 79a to 3-bet display LEDs 79c in the same manner as in the twenty-first embodiment.

FIG. 152 is a diagram showing the relationship between digits and segments in the twenty-third embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 152, the twenty-third embodiment has the digits 1 to 5 as described above, and these are divided into the digits 1a to 5a and the digits 1b to 4b.
The digit 1a includes a storage number display LED 76 (upper digit) and a game start display LED 79d. The former is composed of the segments 1A to 1G, and the latter is composed of the segment 1P.
The digit 2a is composed of the storage number display LED 76 (lower digit) and the insertion display LED 79e, the former being composed of the segments 1A to 1G and the latter being composed of the segment 1P.

The digit 3a is composed of an acquisition number display LED 78 (upper digit) and a replay display LED 79f, the former being composed of the segments 1A to 1G and the latter being composed of the segment 1P.
The digit 4a is composed of an acquisition number display LED 78 (lower digit) and an advantageous interval display LED 77, the former being composed of the segments 1A to 1G and the latter being composed of the segment 1P.
The digit 5a comprises a setting value display LED 73. Segment 1P of digit 5a is unused.
On the other hand, the digits 1b to 4b are the same as in the twenty-second embodiment (FIG. 143). The digit 5 b is not provided in the twenty-third embodiment.

FIG. 153 (A) is a view showing the relationship among the interrupt, the LED display counter (_CT_LED_DSP) value, the digit signal and the segment signal in the twenty-third embodiment. Further, FIG. 7B is a diagram showing an LED display request flag (_FL_LED_DSP). FIG. 153 is a view corresponding to FIG. 148 of the twenty-second embodiment.
In the twenty-third embodiment, an LED display counter that makes one cycle with five interrupts is used. This LED display counter shifts the bit "1" to the right by one digit for each interrupt as in the twenty-second embodiment (FIG. 148), and when it becomes "0", the initial value "00010000" at the time of the interrupt processing. ". Thus, as in the twenty-second embodiment, the counter has one cycle with five interrupts.

As shown in FIG. 153A, when the interrupt is "1", the digit 5 signal is output, and the setting value display LED 73 becomes an LED to be lit.
When the interrupt is "2", the digit 4 signal is output, and the lower digit of the acquired number display LED 78 and the lower digit of the management information display LED 74 are to be lit.
Furthermore, when the interrupt is "3", the digit 3 signal is output, and the upper digit of the acquired number display LED 78 and the upper digit of the management information display LED 74 are to be lit.
Furthermore, when the interrupt is "4", the digit 2 signal is output, and the lower digit of the storage number display LED 76 and the information type lower of the management information display LED 74 are to be lit.
When the interrupt is "5", the digit 1 signal is output, and the upper digit of the storage number display LED 76 and the information type upper of the management information display LED 74 are to be lit.

  Furthermore, as described above, among the status display LEDs 79, the 1-bet display LEDs 79a to 3-bet display LEDs 79c perform static lighting, and thus are not LEDs to be lit at the time of interrupt processing. Among the status display LEDs 79, the game start display LED 79d is assigned to the segment 1P of the upper digit of the storage number display LED 76, and the insertion indicator LED 79e is assigned to the segment 1P of the lower digit of the storage number display LED 76. Furthermore, the replay display LED 79 f is assigned to the segment 1 P of the upper digit of the acquisition number display LED 78. Further, the advantageous section display LED 77 is assigned to the segment 1P of the lower digit of the acquisition number display LED 78, as in the twenty-second embodiment (FIG. 143). In the twenty-third embodiment, the effect display LED 79g is not provided as in the twenty-second embodiment.

  As described above, if the status display LED 79 excluding the 1-bet display LED 79a to the 3-bed display LED 79c and the advantageous section display LED 77 are allocated to the segment 1P of the digits 1a to 4a, an LED display counter with one cycle of 5 interrupts is used. , The status display LED 79 and the advantageous section display LED 77 can be turned on dynamically.

Twenty-Fourth Embodiment
FIG. 154 is a diagram showing the output ports 2 to 7 in the twenty-fourth embodiment, and is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 128 of the twentieth embodiment.
In the twenty-fourth embodiment, two output ports for outputting digit signals (output ports 3 and 6) are provided, and two output ports for outputting segment signals are provided (output ports 4 and 7). It is characterized by
In the twenty-fourth embodiment, digits 1 to 9 are provided as in the twentieth embodiment.
Also, let the segments of digits 1 to 5 be segments 1A to 1P.
Furthermore, segments of digits 6 to 9 are segments 2A to 2P.
The digit 5 may or may not be provided as in the twenty-third embodiment, and when the digit 5 is not provided, the D4 bit of the output port 3 is an empty bit. Then, in this case, one of the digits 1 to 4 is used as the setting value display LED, as described above.

In the twenty-fourth embodiment, the 1-bet display signal to the 3-bet display signal are allocated to the D0 to D2 bits of the output port 2 as in the twentieth embodiment.
The digit port comprises an output port 3 for outputting digit 1 to 5 signals and an output port 6 for outputting digit 6 to 9 signals.
The segment port comprises an output port 4 for outputting the segments 1A to 1P signals corresponding to the digits 1 to 5 and an output port 7 for outputting the segments 2A to 2P signals corresponding to the digits 6 to 9.

Therefore, for example, when the digits 1 to 5 are lit, the digit signal is output from the output port 3 and the segment 1 signal is output from the output port 4.
When lighting the digits 6 to 9, the digit signal is output from the output port 7, and the segment 2 signal is output from the output port 6.

FIG. 155 is a diagram showing the relationship between digits and segments in the twenty-fourth embodiment. The relationship between the digits 1 to 5 and the segments 1A to 1P is the same as the relationship between the digits 1a to 5a and the segments 1A to 1P in the twenty-third embodiment (FIG. 152).
The relationship between the digits 6 to 9 and the segments 2A to 2P is the same as the relationship between the digits 1b to 4b and the segments 2A to 2P in the twenty-third embodiment (FIG. 152).

FIG. 156 is a diagram of a first example of the LED display counter in the twenty-fourth embodiment. This LED display counter is the same as the LED display counter according to the twenty-third embodiment shown in FIG. 153A, and is a counter that makes one cycle with five interrupts.
Then, for example, the digit 5 signal is output for the interrupt "1", and the digit 4 signal and the digit 9 signal are output for the interrupt "2". In the interrupt "3", the digit 3 signal and the digit 8 signal are output. Furthermore, the interrupt "4" outputs the digit 2 signal and the digit 7 signal. Furthermore, the interrupt "5" outputs the digit 1 signal and the digit 6 signal.

FIG. 157 is a diagram of a second example of the LED display counter in the twenty-fourth embodiment. In this example 2, the LED display counter 1 is provided in the use area of the RWM 53, and the LED display counter 2 is provided outside the use area of the RWM 53.
The LED display counter 1 is a counter for outputting the digit 1 signal to the digit 5 signal at each interruption, and is a counter of which one cycle is five interruptions.
On the other hand, the LED display counter 2 is a counter for outputting the digit 6 signal to the digit 9 signal at each interruption, and is a counter of which one cycle is four interruptions.
As described above, the LED display counter for lighting the digits 1 to 5 and the LED display counter for lighting the digits 6 to 9 may be separately provided. Further, since one cycle of the LED display counters of the both is different, the lighting timings of the digits 1 to 5 and the lighting timings of the digits 6 to 9 are different. There is no particular problem even if the lighting timings are different.

FIG. 158 is a flowchart showing LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in the twenty-fourth embodiment, and corresponds to FIG. 134 in the twentieth embodiment.
The LED display counter is assumed to be Example 1 (FIG. 156).
First, in step S1571, “0” is output from the output ports 3 and 4 in order to turn off the output ports 3 and 4. This is to temporarily turn off the digits 1 to 5 completely.
Next, proceeding to step S1572, “0” is output from the output ports 6 and 7 in order to turn off the output ports 6 and 7. This is to once turn off the digits 6 to 9 completely.

  In step S1573, the value is updated so as to shift bit "1" of the LED display counter to the right by one digit. In the next step S1574, it is determined whether the LED display counter is "0". If it is determined that it is not "0", the process proceeds to step S1436. If it is determined that it is "0", the process proceeds to step S1475. In step S1475, the LED display counter is initialized. That is, as shown in FIG. 156, the value is set to "00010000". Then, the process proceeds to step S1436.

The subsequent steps S1436 to S1451 are the same as in FIG. 134 (twenty-first embodiment).
In the twenty-fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 156, since the 1-bet display LED 79a to the 3-bet display LED 79c perform static lighting, the process of step S1453 in FIG. 134 is not included.
Also, when the determination in step S1451 is "No", it is when there is a display request for the acquired lower digit, so there is no branch for determining whether there is a display request for the acquired lower digit, step S1454 Go to Steps S1454 to S1457 are the same as in FIG. 133 (twentieth embodiment).
After step S1457, the process proceeds to step S1576, where a digit (one of digits 1 to 5) signal is output from output port 3 and a segment 1 signal is output from output port 4. Then, the process proceeds to step S1577.

FIG. 159 is a flowchart showing ratio display processing (S_LED_OUT) in the twenty-fourth embodiment, and corresponds to FIG. 135 in the twentieth embodiment.
If it is determined in step S1472 that a ratio display request has been made, the process proceeds to step S1475 as in the 21st embodiment (FIG. 141).
The processing from step S 1475 to step S 1486 is the same as that of FIG. 135 (twenty-first embodiment). After step S1486, the process proceeds to step S1581, the digit signal is output from the output port 6, and the segment 2 signal is output from the output port 7. Then, the process returns to step S1460 of FIG.

The twentieth to twenty-fourth embodiments have been described above, but the present invention is not limited to the above embodiments, and various modifications can be made as follows.
(1) In the above embodiment, the program for LED display control (I_LED_OUT) is stored in the use area, and the program for ratio display processing (S_LED_OUT) is stored outside the use area. The reason for this setting is to prevent the volume in the use area from being compressed. Therefore, it is possible to store the program of ratio display processing (S_LED_OUT) in the use area if the capacity in the use area has a margin.
Similarly, the out-of-use area data table shown in FIG. 127 can also be stored in the use area.
That is, the program and data for lighting control of the management information display LED 74 need not necessarily be stored outside the use area.

In general, a program for preventing fraud (goto) may be stored outside the use area. Since the display of the management information such as the advantageous section ratio can be said to be for the purpose of fraud prevention, it is stored outside the use area in the above embodiment.
In addition to the above, as the program stored outside the use area, in FIG. 133, a setting value error (outside of the setting value range) determining program used in the processing of step S1408, and a random number abnormality used in the processing of step S1410. A check program, a backflow check program of a medal selector, etc. may be mentioned.

  (2) Taking the twentieth embodiment as an example, as shown in FIG. 134 and FIG. 135, for example, first, the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) (lighting control of digits 1 to 5) is executed, and then ratio display processing Although (S_LED_OUT) (lighting control of the digits 6 to 9) is executed, the present invention is not limited to this order. For example, after performing ratio display processing (S_LED_OUT) which is lighting control outside the use area, it is possible to shift to LED display control (I_LED_OUT) which is lighting control within the use area.

(3) The segment P (or segment 2P) of the digits 6 to 9 (23rd embodiment, the digits 1b to 4b) is a segment to be lit when a non-returnable error occurs.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be set to a segment that lights up when a predetermined condition other than the non-returnable error is satisfied. Alternatively, the segment may be physically present but unused.

The Twenty Fifth Embodiment
In the twenty-fifth embodiment, when a specific symbol combination (combination of symbols in which “cherry” stops in the left middle when the left reel 31 is stopped: middle cherry) becomes a lottery result that can be stopped (small player E1 won) Is always shifted to the advantageous section, and it is indicated by the advantageous section indicator LED 77 that it is the advantageous section.

  Further, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, transition to an advantageous segment is possible when winning 1BBA, and transition to an advantageous segment is not made when winning 1BBB. Further, the winning probability of 1 BBA is set to be the same for all setting values, and the winning probability of 1 BBB is set to be higher as the setting value becomes higher. As a result, the transition probability to the advantageous section at the time of 1BB (sum of 1BBA and 1BBB) winning becomes higher as the set value becomes lower.

  Furthermore, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, the first initialization process (the initialization process at the end of the advantageous section) is executed when the advantageous section ends, and the second initialization process is performed when the set value is changed. Execute (Initialization process when changing settings). Further, in the first initialization process, the transition is made to the normal section while maintaining the RT at the end of the advantageous section, and in the second initialization process, the transition is made to the non-RT and the transition to the normal section. Furthermore, in the first initialization process and the second initialization process, the information on the advantageous section is cleared. As a result, when the first initialization process is performed and when the second initialization process is performed, transition is made to a normal section in which the information on the advantageous section is in the same state.

  Furthermore, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, in the advantageous section, the advantageous section can be ended when the indication function is operated at least once. In the advantageous section, when the player wins 1BB (1BBA or 1BBB) before the first operation of the indication function, it is possible to end the advantageous section without activating the indication function. And, after transition to the advantageous section, until the specific condition is satisfied, even if it becomes a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch 42 (a game when a push order bell (small part B group) is won), the instruction function is activated. I will not let you.

FIGS. 160 to 167 are diagrams showing the item condition device and the winning and replay condition device for each RT, which correspond to FIGS. 17 and 18 in the first embodiment.
If the numerical values shown in FIGS. 160 to 167 are divided by “65536”, the winning probability is obtained. For example, in FIG. 160, the number of 1BBA single winning combinations is set to “70” in both non-RT and RT1 to RT3. Therefore, the probability of becoming a single winner of 1 BBA is "70/65536".

FIG. 160 is a table of the number of condition devices that can be transferred to the common setting and the advantageous section, which corresponds to FIG. 17 of the first embodiment.
Here, “setting common” indicates that there is no setting difference, that is, pointing to having the same number in setting 1 to setting 6 is the same as in the first embodiment.
Further, in FIG. 160, in the normal section, "o" means to shift to the advantageous section, "x" means not to shift to the advantageous section, and in the advantageous section, "Δ" indicates the game of the advantageous section Similar to FIG. 17 of the first embodiment, it means that the number of times can be added, and “x” means that the number of games in the advantageous section is not added.

In FIG. 17 of the first embodiment, 1BBA has a single winning, a double winning with a small winning combination D, and a double winning with a small winning combination E1, but in the 25th embodiment, 1BBA is: It only wins a single prize, and does not have the case of winning a small winning combination. As shown in FIG. 160, the number of units for single winning of 1BBA is “70” in common in setting.
Further, in FIG. 17 of the first embodiment, the small combination E1 has a single winning case and a double winning case with 1BBA, but in the twenty-fifth embodiment, the small combination E1 only has a single winning case. , And do not have the case to be double winning with a special role.

  Furthermore, in FIG. 17 of the first embodiment, when the small winning combination E1 is won, there is a transition from the normal section to the advantageous section and a time when the normal section is not transitioned to the advantageous section. When winning a winning combination E1, always shift from the normal section to the advantageous section. As shown in FIG. 160, the number of single winning combinations of the small winning combination E1 is “1000” in common with the setting. Then, when the small winning combination E1 is won in the normal section, the process always shifts to the advantageous section.

  Furthermore, it is the same as that of FIG. 17 of the first embodiment that the small winning combination D is divided into a number for shifting from the normal section to the advantageous section and a number for not shifting from the normal section to the advantageous section. As shown in FIG. 160, the sum of the single winning combinations for the small part D is “550”, and among them, the loading ratio for shifting from the normal section to the advantageous section is “50”, and from the normal section to the advantageous section The number of units not to be migrated is "500". That is, in the normal section, when the small winning combination D is won alone, when it is elected with the number "50", it shifts to the advantageous section, but when it is won with the number "500" , Do not shift to the advantageous section.

FIGS. 161 to 167 show a table of condition devices which do not shift to the advantageous section and do not add the advantageous section, and correspond to FIG. 18 of the first embodiment.
In FIG. 18 of the first embodiment, the setting numbers of setting 1 and setting 6 are representatively illustrated, but in the twenty-fifth embodiment, setting numbers for setting values of setting 1 to setting 6 are illustrated.
Further, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, transitioning to an advantageous section or adding an advantageous section is limited to the winning of the condition device shown in FIG. 160, and the winning of the condition device shown in FIGS. Also, it does not shift to the advantageous section and does not add the advantageous section.

FIG. 161 illustrates the setting numbers of setting 1 to setting 6 at the non-RT time. Similarly, FIG. 162 illustrates the setting numbers of setting 1 to setting 6 at the time of RT1, FIG. 163 illustrates setting numbers of setting 1 to the setting 6 at the time of RT2, and FIG. 164 illustrates setting 1 at the time of RT3. FIG. 165 illustrates the setting numbers of the setting 6 to the setting number 6, and FIG. 165 illustrates the setting numbers of the setting 1 to the setting 6 at RT4.
Moreover, FIG. 166 illustrates the number of setting 1 to setting 6 during 1 BBA gaming (when 1 BBA is operating), and FIG. 167 illustrates the number of setting 1 to setting 6 during 1 BBB playing (when 1 BBB is operating). It shows.

In FIG. 18 of the first embodiment, 1BBA is won in duplicate with the small winning combination E2 with a probability different for each set value. In addition, 1 BBB has the time when it is elected independently and the time when it is won by a small winning combination D with a probability different depending on each set value.
On the other hand, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 160, 1BBA only wins independently in common in setting, and does not win a dual winning combination with a small winning combination, and performs lottery with different probability for each set value I have nothing to do. Also, as shown in FIG. 161 to FIG. 164, 1 BBB only wins a single winning with a different probability for each set value, and does not have a case in which a small winning combination is won.

As described above, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, the item condition device and the winning and replay condition device for each RT are determined as shown in FIGS.
For this reason, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, when the small winning combination D (watermelon) is won by the combination lottery means 61, the transition to the advantageous section is made and the advantageous section display LED 77 is lighted (indicating that it is the advantageous section) And when the advantageous section display LED 77 does not light (does not indicate that it is the advantageous section).
On the other hand, when the small winning combination E1 (middle row cherry) is won by the combination lottery means 61, the transition to the advantageous section is always made, and the advantageous section display LED 77 is lighted.

In addition, when winning a small role D by the role lottery means 61, transition to the advantageous section, and when the advantageous section display LED 77 is lighted, when transitioning to the instruction game section and when not transitioning to the instruction game section Have.
Furthermore, even when the small winning combination E1 is won by the lottery means 61, the transition to the advantageous section, and the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on, the transition to the instruction game section and the transition to the instruction game section Have.

FIG. 168 (a) is a view showing the transition of the advantageous section at the winning of the rare role in the first embodiment and the presence / absence of lighting of the advantageous section display LED 77, and FIG. 168 (b) is at the winning of the rare role in the twenty-fifth embodiment. FIG. 18 is a view showing the transition of the advantageous section of the second embodiment and the presence or absence of lighting of the advantageous section display LED 77.
As shown in FIG. 168 (a), in the first embodiment, when the small winning combination E1 (middle cherry) is won by the combination lottery means 61, the transition to the advantageous section is made with a probability of "250/65536", and Although the advantageous section display LED 77 lights up, it does not shift to the advantageous section with the probability of “750/65536”, and the advantageous section display LED 77 does not light.

Similarly, in the first embodiment, when the small winning combination D (watermelon) is won by the combination lottery means 61, the transition to the advantageous section is made with a probability of "50/65536", and the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on. At the probability of "500/65536", it does not shift to the advantageous section, and the advantageous section display LED 77 does not light.
Here, in the game in which the small winning combination E1 is won, “cherry” (ie, “middle cherry”) can be stopped at the middle left when the left reel 31 is stopped. In addition, when the small winning combination E1 is won, there is a case where it shifts to the instruction game section after that. Therefore, when the middle row cherry tree is stopped, the player expects to shift to the instructed game section. Thus, the small winning combination E1 is a rare combination with a high degree of expectation of transition to the instruction game section.

However, when the small winning combination E1 wins, when the transition to the advantageous interval and the transition not to the advantageous interval are provided, in the game which has won the small winning combination E1, according to the presence or absence of lighting of the advantageous interval display LED 77 The player knows whether or not to shift. In this case, it is not possible to sustain the player's sense of expectation for the transition to the instruction game section by the small winning combination E1.
On the other hand, when the small winning combination E1 always wins, it shifts to the advantageous segment, and if it shifts to the instruction gaming segment always in this advantageous segment, the small winning combination E1 winning means the transition to the instruction gaming segment, and the game is It becomes monotonous.

Therefore, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 168 (b), the winning combination winning means 61 wins a small winning combination E1 (middle cherry) with a probability of "1000/65536", and at this time, always an advantageous section , And the advantageous zone display LED 77 lights up.
Furthermore, by winning the small winning combination E1 by the role lottery means 61, transition to the advantageous section, and when the advantageous section display LED 77 is lighted, shift to the instruction game section (AT) with probability of "64/256" However, with the probability of "192/256", it does not shift to the instructed game section. As a result, the probability of transition to the instructed game section (AT) when the middle cherry can be stopped is 25%.

  As described above, it is understood that the transition to the advantageous section is always made by shifting to the advantageous section and turning on the advantageous section display LED 77 at the time of winning the small winning combination E1 (middle stage cherry), but it is shifted to the instruction game section Since it does not know whether or not it is not, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the transition to the instructed game section over a plurality of games.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 168 (b), when winning the small part D (watermelon) by the role lottery means 61, it moves to the advantageous section with a probability of "50/65536", and the advantageous section display LED 77 Although it lights up, it does not shift to an advantageous area with the probability of "500/65536", and the advantageous area display LED 77 does not light up.
Furthermore, when the small winning combination D is won by the lottery means 61, the transition to the advantageous section, and the advantageous section display LED 77 is lighted, the transition to the instruction game section (AT) is made with the probability of "32/256". However, with the probability of "224/256", it does not shift to the instruction game section.

  In this manner, when the small winning combination D (watermelon) is won, the player can be notified whether or not to shift to the advantageous section by the presence or absence of the lighting of the advantageous section display LED 77. Furthermore, when the small winning combination D winning, transition to the advantageous section, and when the advantageous section display LED 77 lights up, it will be in a state to know whether to shift to the instruction game section, feeling of expectation for the transition to the instruction game section Can be given to the player over multiple games.

Further, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, when the small winning combination E1 (middle row cherry) is won by the combination lottery means 61, the AT determines whether or not to shift to the instruction game section (AT) separately from the combination lottery means 61. Perform a lottery (two-step lottery).
Furthermore, even when the small winning combination D (watermelon) is won by the number “50”, the AT lottery is performed in the same manner as when the small winning combination E1 is won.
In the twenty-fifth embodiment, the main control substrate 50 is provided with an AT lottery counter which counts a range of “0” to “255” as one cycle. Then, an AT lottery is performed using the 1-byte random number value acquired from the AT lottery counter.

In addition, when winning the small winning combination E1 at AT lottery (decided to shift to the instruction game section), after transition to the advantageous section, until the predetermined number of games (for example, 32 games) have been digested, the instruction game section If it is determined that the predetermined number of games have been taken, the process proceeds to the designated game section. That is, after transitioning to the advantageous section, the game is in the middle (presence) until the predetermined number of games are consumed, and when the predetermined number of games is consumed, the AT is entered.
On the other hand, when the small winning combination E1 is won, if it is not won in the AT lottery (decided not to shift to the instruction game section), the advantageous section may be ended if the instruction function is operated at least once. It becomes possible. That is, it becomes a so-called precursor.

Also, when the small winning combination D is won by the number “50” and the winning combination is won by the AT lottery, as in the winning combination by the AT drawing when winning the small winning combination E1, after transition to the advantageous section, After a omen, I rush into the AT.
Furthermore, even when the minor player D is elected by the number “50” and the player is not elected in the AT lottery, the same as when the minor player E1 is elected in the AT lottery and so on It becomes.

In this way, for the part (small part E1) with a high degree of expectation of the transition to the instruction game segment (AT), regardless of the presence or absence of the transition to the instruction game segment, always turn on the advantageous segment display LED 77 at the time of winning By designing to play the game in the advantageous section (prediction or false genesis), it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the transition to the instructed game section over multiple games.
On the other hand, with regard to the part (small part D) with a low degree of expectation of the transition to the instruction game section (AT), it is designed to have the case of turning on and off the advantageous section display LED 77 at the time of winning. It is possible to prevent the player from having an excessive expectation for the transition to the instructed game section.

Further, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, when the small winning combination D is won by the number “50”, as in the case of winning the small winning combination E1, the transition to the case of transitioning to the instruction game section according to the result of AT lottery Although it is designed to have the case where it does not occur, it may be designed to shift to the instruction game section without fail when the small winning combination D is won by the number “50”.
In this case, the winning combination indicator LED 77 is always turned on at the time of winning, and the small winning combination E1 that can make it possible to shift to a designated gaming segment in the game during the advantageous segment (this sign The role of the small role D, in which it can be immediately determined whether or not to shift to the instructed game section by the presence or absence of lighting, becomes clearer, and it becomes possible to design a game characteristic with sharpness.

FIG. 169 is a diagram showing a 1BB winning probability for each set value and an advantageous section transition probability at the time of 1BB winning in the twenty-fifth embodiment.
The twenty-fifth embodiment has two types of 1BBA and 1BBB as special roles.
Further, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, when 1 BBA is won in a normal section, the section always shifts to an advantageous section. On the other hand, when the player wins 1 BBB in the normal section, it does not shift to the advantageous section.

Furthermore, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 160, the storage unit number for winning the 1BBA is set to “70” in common in both non-RT and RT1 to RT3.
Therefore, as shown in FIG. 169, the winning probability of 1BBA is “70/65536” in both non-RT and RT1 to RT3. That is, the winning probability of 1 BBA is set to be the same for all set values.

Furthermore, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 161 to FIG. 164, when 1 BBB is won, the prefix number for setting 1 is “80” and for setting 2 in any of non-RT and RT1 to RT3. Is set to “88”, “96” for setting 3, “104” for setting 4, “112” for setting 5, and “120” for setting 6.
Therefore, the winning probability of 1 BBB is as shown in FIG. 169, and becomes higher as the set value becomes higher.

In addition, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, the combined value of the 1BB winning box, that is, the combination of the 1BBB winning box and the 1BBB winning box is “150” for setting 1 and “158 for setting 2”. In case of setting 3, "166", in case of setting 4, "174", in case of setting 5, "182" and in case of setting 6, "190".
Therefore, the winning probability of 1BB (the winning probability in the summation of 1BBA and 1BBB) is as shown in FIG. 169, and becomes higher as the set value becomes higher.

Therefore, the transition probability to the advantageous section at the time of 1BB winning becomes “46.7”% (70 ÷ 150 × 100 と き) in case of setting 1. Similarly, “44.3”% for setting 2, “42.2”% for setting 3, “40.2”% for setting 4, and “38.5”% for setting 5. In case of setting 6, it is "36.8"%.
That is, the transition probability to the advantageous section at the 1BB winning becomes higher as the set value becomes lower.

Here, in the slot machine 10, it is general that the winning probability of the special role (1BB) increases as the set value increases.
However, in addition to making it possible to shift to the special game when winning the special part, if it is possible to shift to the advantageous section, the difference in the player's advantage between the low setting time and the high setting time becomes large. There is a risk that it will be too late.

Therefore, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 169, the winning probability of 1BBA capable of shifting to the advantageous section is made the same for all setting values, and the winning probability of 1BBB not shifting to the advantageous section is higher in setting value. Try to get higher according to
Thus, the winning probability of 1BB, that is, the winning probability in 1BBA and 1BBB addition increases as the set value increases, and the transition probability to an advantageous section at 1BB win increases as the set value decreases. Become. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the difference in the player's advantage from becoming too large between the low setting time and the high setting time.

  In addition, although the 1BB winning probability increases as the set value increases, the transition probability to the advantageous section at the 1BB winning becomes higher as the set value decreases, so the transition probability to the advantageous section is higher. It is possible to give the player an impression that there is a setting difference in the transition probability to the advantageous section even though there is no setting difference.

Furthermore, it is possible to make the player estimate the setting value from the probability of transition to the advantageous section when 1BB is won. That is, it is possible to provide the player with an element for estimating the setting value.
Furthermore, although the decision not to shift to the advantageous section is originally intended to disappoint the player, it indicates that the higher the probability of deciding not to shift to the advantageous section when 1BB is won, the higher the set value. Therefore, even if it is decided not to shift to the advantageous section when 1BB is won, the player can be expected to have a high set value, and the player can be prevented from disappointing.

In addition, in the advantageous section, when the indication function is operated at least once, it is possible to end the advantageous section. In particular, in an advantageous section that does not shift to the instruction game section (AT), the instruction function is activated at least once in order to be able to end the advantageous section.
Here, “operation of at least one instruction function” is a condition device (small combination B group) capable of acquiring the maximum payout number (“9”) in a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch 42. It is necessary to do with the game which was elected.
Therefore, even if the instruction function is activated at the time of winning the small winning combination C group (3 sheets at the maximum), it does not fall under the "operation of the instruction function at least once".
Hereinafter, when meaning the push order bell of the small combination B group, it is described as "push order bell (small combination B group)".

In addition, the operation of the at least one instruction function required to enable termination of the advantageous section having no instruction game section may be referred to as "secure navigation" or the like.
Furthermore, when the special winning combination (1BBA or 1BBB) is won before the first indication function is activated, it is possible to end the advantageous section without activating the indication function.
In addition, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, only 1BB (a first-class product continuous operation device) is provided as a special role, and 2BB (a second-type product continuous operation device) is not provided. Even when 2 BB is won before the operation, it is possible to end the advantageous section without activating the instruction function.

Also, the “one-time instruction determination flag” is a flag indicating that at least one instruction function for enabling termination of the advantageous section has been operated.
A storage area for storing the one-time instruction determination flag is provided on the RWM 53.
Then, when the one time instruction determination flag is on, "1" is stored in the storage area of the one time instruction determination flag on the RWM 53, and when the one time instruction determination flag is off, "0" is stored. .

FIG. 170 is a flowchart showing the flow of an indication function activation process according to the twenty-fifth embodiment.
In the instruction function activation process shown in FIG. 170, first, in step S2001, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the pushing order bell (small winning combination B group) is won. Here, if it is determined that the pushing order bell (small winning combination B group) is won, the process proceeds to the next step S2002. On the other hand, if it is determined that the pushing order bell (small winning combination B group) has not been won, the processing according to this flowchart is ended.

In the next step S2002, the main CPU 55 determines whether it is staying in the advantageous section. Here, if it is determined that the user is staying in the advantageous section, the process proceeds to the next step S2003. On the other hand, if it is determined that the user is not staying in the advantageous section (is staying in the normal section), the processing according to this flowchart is ended.
At step S2003, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the user is staying in the instructed game section (AT). Here, if it is determined that the user is staying in the instructed game section, the process proceeds to the next step S2004. If it is determined that the user is not staying in the instructed game section, the process proceeds to step S2007.

In step S2004, the main CPU 55 operates the instruction function to display push order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78. At this time, on the side of the sub control board 80, the image display device 23 notifies the correct pressing order. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S2005.
In step S2005, the main CPU 55 determines whether the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied. Specifically, the number of games played in the advantageous section is digested (the count value of the advantageous section counter 69a becomes "0"), and the instruction function is operated at least once (the correct push order is notified at least once) It is judged whether or) the special role (1 BBA or 1 BBB) is won. Here, if it is determined that the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the process proceeds to the next step S2006. On the other hand, when it is determined that the termination condition of the advantageous section is not satisfied, step S2006 is skipped, and the processing according to this flowchart is ended.

In step S2006, the main CPU 55 executes initialization processing (RAM clear processing) at the end of the advantageous section. In the initialization processing at the end of the advantageous section, the information regarding the advantageous section, including the one-time instruction determination flag, which is stored in the storage area on the RWM 53 is cleared. Then, when the initialization process at the end of the advantageous section is executed, the process according to this flowchart ends.
In step S2007, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the special winning combination (1BBA or 1BBB) is won. Here, if it is determined that the special part has been won, the process proceeds to the next step S2008. On the other hand, if it is determined that the special part has not been won, the process skips step S2008 and proceeds to step S2005.

In step S2008, the main CPU 55 turns on the instruction determination flag once. Specifically, in step S2008, the main CPU 55 does not operate the instruction function, but sets “1” in the storage area of the one-time instruction determination flag on the RWM 53. Then, the process proceeds to step S2005.
In step S2009, the main CPU 55 determines whether the value of the storage area of the one-time instruction determination flag on the RWM 53 is “1”. Here, if it is "1", that is, if it is determined that the one time instruction determination flag is on, the processing according to this flowchart is ended. On the other hand, if it is "0", that is, if it is determined that the one time instruction determination flag is off, the process proceeds to the next step S2010.

At step S2010, the main CPU 55 determines whether or not the specific condition (one-time instruction operation condition) is satisfied.
Here, the "one-time instruction operation condition" is a condition that permits operation of at least one instruction function for enabling termination of the advantageous section.
In the twenty-fifth embodiment, it is determined that "a predetermined number of games (for example," 15 games ") has been digested after shifting to an advantageous section" as the "one-time instruction operation condition".
Further, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, the main control board 50 is provided with a digested game number counter for counting the number of games after transition to the advantageous section.

  Then, in step S2010, main CPU 55 determines whether or not the count value of the number-of-digestions game counter is equal to or more than a predetermined value (for example, “15”). It is determined that the operating condition is satisfied, and the process proceeds to the next step S2011. On the other hand, when it is determined that the value is less than the predetermined value, it is determined that the one-time instruction operation condition is not satisfied, and the processing according to the present flowchart is ended.

In step S2011, the main CPU 55 operates the instruction function to display pressing order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78. Further, the operation of the indication function in step S2011 is to enable the end of the advantageous section. At this time, on the side of the sub control board 80, the image display device 23 notifies the correct pressing order. And if an instruction | indication function is operated, it will progress to following step S2012.
In step S2012, the main CPU 55 sets “1” in the storage area of the one-time instruction determination flag on the RWM 53. Then, the process proceeds to step S2005.

FIG. 171 is a time chart showing an example in which the instruction function is activated when the first push order bell (small group B group) is won after the transition to the advantageous section having no instruction game section (AT).
An advantageous section having no instruction game section can be ended if the instruction function is activated at least once or if the special winning combination is won before the first instruction function is activated.
As shown in FIG. 171, before the transition to the advantageous section, the instruction function is not activated even if the pushing order bell (small part B group) is won. Then, after the transition to the advantageous section, the instruction function is activated in the game in which the first push order bell (small part B group) is won. At this time, the main control board 50 side turns on the instruction determination flag once, and on the sub control board 80 side, the image display device 23 notifies the correct pressing order.

In addition, once the instruction determination flag is turned on, the instruction determination flag is maintained in the on state until the advantageous section ends.
Furthermore, when the one time instruction determination flag is in the on state, the instruction function is not activated even if the pushing order bell (small part B group) is won.
Then, when the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the advantageous section is ended, and an initialization process (RAM clear process) at the end of the advantageous section is performed to turn off the instruction determination flag once.

FIG. 172 is a time chart showing an example of canceling the activation of the indication function by winning the special part after the transition to the advantageous area not having the indication game area and before the activation of the first indication function.
As shown in FIG. 172, before the transition to the advantageous section, even if the winning order bell (small role B group) is won, the instruction function is not activated. Then, in FIG. 172, after the transition to the advantageous section, the special role is won before the first push bell (small role B group) is won, that is, before the operation of the first instruction function. At this time, the instruction function is not activated, but the instruction determination flag is turned on once. Thereafter, the instruction determination flag is maintained in the on state until the advantageous section ends.

In addition, when winning a special part, the winning information of the special part is turned on, and when the winning special part is won, the winning information of the special part is turned off. Furthermore, during the period from winning the special part until winning a prize, it is inside and the special part winning information remains on.
Furthermore, when the one time instruction determination flag is in the on state, the instruction function is not activated even if the pushing order bell (small part B group) is won.
Then, when the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the advantageous section is ended, and an initialization process (RAM clear process) at the end of the advantageous section is performed to turn off the instruction determination flag once.

FIG. 171 shows an example in which the instruction function is activated when the first push order bell (small group B group) is won after the transition to the advantageous section having no instruction game section (AT).
Here, in order to enable the termination of the advantageous section having no instruction game section early, after transitioning to the advantageous section having no instruction game section, at the earliest possible stage when the push order bell (small part B group) is won Preferably, the indication function is activated.

However, in order to pay out as many game media (medals) as possible in the advantageous section having the instruction game section from the viewpoint of the payout ball design, the payout of game media is suppressed as much as possible in the advantageous section having no instruction game section. Is preferred.
That is, the advantageous section having no instruction game section is a game section that performs a false affront that does not need to pay out the medals to the player when the pushing order bell (small part B group) is won, and executes secure navigation in the game section That means that the expected value of the payout number of medals in the advantageous section having the instruction game section has to be set lower accordingly.
Therefore, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, after transitioning to an advantageous section having no instruction game section, even if a winning order bell (small part B group) is won until a specific condition (one-time instruction operation condition) is satisfied, It does not activate the indication function. In addition, as the “one-time instruction operation condition”, “a predetermined number of games (for example,“ 15 games ”) has been digested after transition to the advantageous section” is defined.

Here, as shown in FIG. 172, in the advantageous section not having the instruction game section, when the special winning combination is won before the operation of the first instruction function, the advantageous section is ended without operating the instruction function. It is possible to
For this reason, after transitioning to the advantageous section having no instruction game section, the instruction function is not activated even if the pushing order bell (small group B group) is won until the specific condition (one-time instruction operation condition) is satisfied. By doing this, it is possible to increase the probability of winning the special part before the first instruction function is activated. As a result, the probability that it is possible to end the advantageous section without activating the instruction function can be increased, and thus, the payout of gaming media can be suppressed as much as possible in the advantageous section without the instruction game section. it can.
In this manner, by suppressing the payout of gaming media at unnecessary timings (advantage zone without instruction game zone: Gasse aura), payout of medals can be expected at appropriate timing (instruction game zone: AT) Ball design becomes possible.

In addition, it is possible to set the number of games less than the number of games in the advantageous section (initial value of the advantageous section counter 69a) as the number of games of the one time instruction operation condition. For example, it is possible to set “32 games” as the number of games in the advantageous section, and to set “15 games” as the number of games in the one-time instruction operation condition.
In this case, when the special winning combination is won before the game operation number of the one time instruction operation condition is consumed, the advantageous section can be ended without operating the instruction function.
In addition, after digesting the game number of the one time instruction operation condition, if you win the push order bell (small part B group) before digesting the game number of the advantageous section, the instruction function can be operated at this time Therefore, the advantageous section can be ended simultaneously with the completion of the number of games of the advantageous section.

FIG. 173 is a time chart showing an example in which the instruction function is activated when the first push order bell (small group B group) wins after satisfying the instruction operation condition once in the advantageous section not having the instruction game section .
As shown in FIG. 173, before shifting to the advantageous section, the instruction function is not activated even if the pushing order bell (small part B group) is won. In addition, even after shifting to the advantageous section, the instruction function is not activated even if the pushing order bell (small group B group) is won, until the condition for the one-time instruction operation is satisfied (the predetermined game number is digested).

Then, after the instruction operation condition is satisfied once, the instruction function is operated in the game in which the first push bell (small group B group) is won. At this time, the instruction determination flag is turned on once. Thereafter, the instruction determination flag is maintained in the on state until the advantageous section is ended.
When the instruction determination flag is in the on state, the instruction function is not activated even if the pushing order bell (small group B) is won.
Then, when the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the advantageous section is ended, and an initialization process (RAM clear process) at the end of the advantageous section is performed to turn off the instruction determination flag once.

FIG. 174 is a time chart showing an example in which the operation of the instruction function is canceled by winning the special combination before satisfying the instruction operation condition once in the advantageous section having no instruction game section.
As shown in FIG. 174, even after winning in the push order bell (small role B group), the instruction function is not activated before shifting to the advantageous section. In addition, even after shifting to the advantageous section, the instruction function is not activated even if the pushing order bell (small group B group) is won, until the condition for the one-time instruction operation is satisfied (the predetermined game number is digested).
Then, in FIG. 174, after transitioning to the advantageous section, the special winning combination is won before the one-time instruction operation condition is satisfied. At this time, the instruction function is not activated, but the instruction determination flag is turned on once. Thereafter, the instruction determination flag is maintained in the on state until the advantageous section ends.

In addition, when winning a special part, the winning information of the special part is turned on, and when the winning special part is won, the winning information of the special part is turned off. Furthermore, during the period from winning the special part until winning a prize, it is inside and the special part winning information remains on.
Furthermore, when the one time instruction determination flag is in the on state, the instruction function is not activated even if the pushing order bell (small part B group) is won. In FIG. 174, when the one-time instruction determination flag is in the on state, the pushing order bell (small combination B group) is won three times, but the instruction function is not activated in any case.
Then, when the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the advantageous section is ended, and an initialization process (RAM clear process) at the end of the advantageous section is performed to turn off the instruction determination flag once.

The "one-time instruction operation condition" is not limited to "having digested the predetermined number of games after transition to the advantageous section". For example, it can be determined that "the number of games in the advantageous section has been digested (the count value of the advantageous section counter 69a has become" 0 ")" as the "one-time instruction operation condition".
Here, in the advantageous section having no instruction game section, the number of games in the advantageous section is digested (the count value of the advantageous section counter 69a becomes "0"), and the indication function is operated at least once, or If the special part is won before the first instruction function is activated, it is possible to end.
In addition, as the number of games in the advantageous section not having the instruction game section, for example, "32 games" can be set.

FIG. 175 shows an example of ending the advantageous section by activating the instruction function at the time of winning on the pushing order bell (small group B group) after digesting the number of games of the advantageous section in the advantageous section having no instruction game section It is a time chart.
As shown in FIG. 175, even after winning in the push order bell (small role B group), the instruction function is not activated before shifting to the advantageous section. In addition, even after shifting to the advantageous section, the instruction function is not activated even if the pushing order bell (small part B group) is won until the number of games of the advantageous section (for example, “32 games”) is digested.

Furthermore, in FIG. 175, the instruction function is not activated at the time when the number of games in the advantageous section is digested, and the special part is not won, so even if the number of games in the advantageous section is digested, the advantageous section is It does not end.
Then, in FIG. 175, after digesting the number of games in the advantageous section, the instruction function is activated in the game in which the first push bell (small group B) is won. At this time, the instruction determination flag is turned on once. Then, when the instruction function is operated, the end condition of the advantageous section will be satisfied, and therefore, the advantageous section is ended, and the initialization process at the end of the advantageous section (the RAM clear process) is executed once to instruct Turn off the judgment flag.
In this case, since the advantageous section ends when the instruction function operates (informing of the correct pressing order is performed), the player can play a new game while expecting that the correct pressing order is not notified. Can be provided.

FIG. 176 is a time chart showing an example in which the operation of the instruction function is canceled by winning the special part in the advantageous section having no instruction game section, before the number of games in the advantageous section is consumed.
As shown in FIG. 176, even after the winning order bell (small role B group) is won, the instruction function is not activated before shifting to the advantageous section. In addition, even after shifting to the advantageous section, the instruction function is not activated even if the pushing order bell (small part B group) is won until the number of games of the advantageous section (for example, “32 games”) is digested.
Then, in FIG. 176, after shifting to the advantageous section, the special role is won before the number of games in the advantageous section is consumed. At this time, the instruction function is not activated, but the instruction determination flag is turned on once. Thereafter, the instruction determination flag is maintained in the on state until the advantageous section ends.

In addition, when winning a special part, the winning information of the special part is turned on, and when the winning special part is won, the winning information of the special part is turned off. Furthermore, during the period from winning the special part until winning a prize, it is inside and the special part winning information remains on.
Furthermore, when the one time instruction determination flag is in the on state, the instruction function is not activated even if the pushing order bell (small part B group) is won. In FIG. 176, when the one-time instruction determination flag is in the on state, the pushing order bell (small combination B group) is won twice, but the instruction function is not activated in any case.

And, in FIG. 176, since the special winning combination is won before the number of games in the advantageous section is digested, if the number of games in the advantageous section is digested, the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied. Therefore, when the number of games played in the advantageous section is settled, the advantageous section is ended, and the instruction determination flag is turned off by executing the initialization process (RAM clear processing) at the end of the advantageous section.
In this way, by defining “the number of games played in the advantageous section has been digested” as the “one-time instruction operation condition”, the probability that the advantageous section can be ended without operating the instruction function can be It can be raised.

Here, although the contents partially overlap with those of the first embodiment, setting and change of setting values will be described. In order to set or change the setting value, the power switch 11, the setting key switch 12, and the setting switch 13 are used.
Specifically, when the power switch 11 is turned on and the setting key switch 12 is turned on (the setting key is rotated 90 degrees clockwise), the main CPU 55 changes the setting when the power switch 11 is turned on. In other words, shift to the setting change mode. At this time, the main CPU 55 executes initialization processing (RAM clear processing) at the time of setting change. Also, normal start-up processing is not performed.
The execution timing of the RAM clear process is not limited to the transition to the setting change mode (when the power switch 11 is turned on with the setting key switch 12 turned on).
For example, the RAM clearing process may be executed when the set value is determined (when the start switch 41 is turned on in the setting change mode), or when the setting change mode is ended (the setting key switch 12 is turned off in the setting change mode) RAM clear processing may be performed at the time).

In the setting change mode, the main CPU 55 displays the current setting value on the setting value display LED 73.
Also, in the setting change mode, each time the setting switch 13 is operated (turned on) once, the main CPU 55 displays the setting value by the setting value display LED 73, ... → "1" → "2" → " 3) → "4" → "5" → "6" → "1" → "2" → ... and so on.

Furthermore, in the setting change mode, when the start switch 41 is operated (turned on), the main CPU 55 fixes the setting value by the value displayed on the setting value display LED 73. At this time, the main CPU 55 stores setting value data corresponding to the determined setting value in the setting value data storage area (_NB_RANK) on the RWM 53.
For example, when the setting value is "1", setting value data "0" is stored in the setting value data storage area (_NB_RANK). That is, when the setting value is “N” (N is an integer of “1” to “6”), the setting value data “N−1” is stored in the setting value data storage area (_NB_RANK). As a result, set value data “0” to “5” are stored in the set value data storage area (_NB_RANK).

Then, in the setting change mode, when the setting key switch 12 is turned off (the setting key is rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise), it is possible to play a game with the changed setting value.
When the setting key switch 12 is turned on from the off state (the setting key is turned 90 degrees clockwise) while the power switch 11 is on, the main CPU 55 shifts the setting confirmation mode to the setting confirmation mode. Thus, in the case of only confirming the set value, the on / off of the power switch 11 is unnecessary. During the setting confirmation, the setting value at the present time is displayed on the setting value display LED 73 as in the setting change.

Further, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, the main CPU 55 executes the first initialization processing when the advantageous section ends, and executes the second initialization processing when the set value is changed.
Furthermore, in the first initialization process, while maintaining the lottery state at the end of the advantageous section (RT state), the transition to the normal zone is made, and in the second initialization process, the predetermined lottery state (non-RT) is determined in advance. Transition and transition to the normal section.
Then, in the first initialization process and the second initialization process, the information on the advantageous section stored in the predetermined storage area in the RWM 53 is cleared. As a result, when the first initialization process is performed and when the second initialization process is performed, transition is made to a normal section in which the information on the advantageous section is in the same state.

FIG. 177 shows the information on the RWM 53 cleared in the initialization process (first initialization process) at the end of the advantageous section, the information on the RWM 53 retained even after the initialization process at the end of the advantageous section, and the initial state at the time of setting change It is a figure which shows the information on RWM53 which clears by the conversion process (2nd initialization process).
Information on an advantageous section is stored in a predetermined storage area on the RWM 53.
Further, information on the advantageous section stored on the RWM 53 includes, for example, an advantageous section counter value, an AT counter value, an upper limit counter value, an additional counter value, an advantageous section flag, and a once instruction determination flag.

The advantageous section counter value indicates the number of games played in the advantageous section. When it is determined to shift to the advantageous section, the number of games determined at that time is set in the advantageous section counter 69a on the RWM 53 as the advantageous section counter value. In addition, every time one game is consumed in the advantageous section, the advantageous section counter value is decremented. Then, when the advantageous section counter value becomes "0", the advantageous section is ended.
Further, when the number of games played in the advantageous section is added in the advantageous section, a value corresponding to the number of additions is added to the advantageous section counter value.

The AT counter value indicates the number of games played in the instructed game section (AT). When it is determined to shift to the instructed game section, the number of games determined at that time is set as an AT counter value. In addition, the AT counter value is decremented each time one game is consumed in the instructed game section. When the AT counter value becomes "0", the instruction game section is ended.
In addition, when the number of games in the instructed game section is added in the instructed game section, a value corresponding to the added number is added to the AT counter value.

The upper limit counter value indicates the upper limit game number of the advantageous section. At the start of the advantageous section, “1500” is set as the upper limit counter value in the upper limit counter 69 b on the RWM 53. Also, the upper limit counter value is decremented each time one game is consumed in the advantageous section. Then, when the upper limit counter value becomes "0", the advantageous section and the instruction game section are ended regardless of the advantageous section counter value and the AT counter value.
The additional counter value indicates the number of additions to the number of games in the instruction game section. Every time the number of games in the instructed game section is added, the number of additions is added to the addition counter value.

The advantageous section flag is a flag indicating that the advantageous section is in progress.
A storage area for storing the advantageous section flag is provided on the RWM 53.
Further, when the advantageous section flag is on, "1" is stored in the storage area of the advantageous section flag on the RWM 53, and when the advantageous section flag is off, "0" is stored.
And when it transfers to the advantageous area, the advantageous area flag is turned on. Thereafter, the advantageous section flag remains on until the advantageous section ends, and the advantageous section flag is turned off at the end of the advantageous section.

The one-time instruction determination flag is a flag indicating that at least one instruction function for enabling termination of the advantageous section has been activated.
A storage area for storing the one-time instruction determination flag is provided on the RWM 53.
Also, when the one time instruction determination flag is on, "1" is stored in the storage area of the one time instruction determination flag on the RWM 53, and when the one time instruction determination flag is off, "0" is stored. .
Then, in the advantageous section, when the first indication function is activated or when the special combination is won before the first indication function is activated, the indication determination flag is turned on. After that, until the end of the advantageous section, the one-time instruction determination flag remains on, and at the end of the advantageous section, the one-time instruction determination flag is turned off.

Further, in the predetermined storage area on the RWM 53, as information other than the information related to the advantageous section, for example, stored sheet number data, set value data, RT state data, internal flag, bonus item condition device number data, and bonus item operation Status flags etc. are stored.
The stored sheet number data is data indicating the stored sheet number.
A storage area for stored sheet number data is provided on the RWM 53. Then, data indicating the number of stored sheets (for example, “15” when the number of stored sheets is 15) is stored in the storage area of the stored number data.

The setting value data is data indicating a setting value.
As described above, the setting value data is stored in the setting value data storage area (_NB_RANK) on the RWM 53.
The RT state data is data indicating an RT state (lottery state).
Here, a storage area (_NB_RT) of RT state data is provided on the RWM 53.
Then, data corresponding to RT, for example, “0” for non-RT, “1” for RT1 is stored in the storage area (_NB_RT) of RT state data.

The internal flag is a flag indicating that the game is an internal game carrying over the winning combination of the special part.
Here, a storage area (_FL_PRD_LOT) of the internal middle flag is provided on the RWM 53. Then, "FF (H)" is stored in the storage area for internal flag (_FL_PRD_LOT) when internal, and "0" is stored when not internal.

The item condition device number data is data indicating the item condition device number, that is, the type of the won item condition device (special role).
Here, a storage area (_NB_CND_BNS) of character item condition device number data is provided on the RWM 53. Then, when the item condition device is not won, "0" is stored in the storage area (_NB_CND_BNS) of the item condition device number data, and when any item condition device is won, A value (other than “0”) corresponding to the item condition condition device number is stored.

The item operating condition flag is a flag indicating the operating condition of the item.
Here, on the RWM 53, a storage area (_FL_ACTION) of a bonus item operation state flag is provided. Then, when any item is in operation, the bit in the storage area (_FL_ACTION) of the item action status flag corresponding to the item becomes “1”, and when the item is inactive, the bit is “0” It becomes.

As shown in FIG. 177, at the end of the advantageous section, the main CPU 55 executes a first initialization process. At this time, among the information stored in the storage area on the RWM 53, information related to the advantageous section (such as advantageous section counter value) is cleared, but predetermined information (such as RT status data) other than the information related to the advantageous section is cleared. Hold without.
Further, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, “clearing information stored in the storage area on the RWM 53” means setting the value of the storage area on the RWM 53 to “0”.

Therefore, when the first initialization process (initialization process at the end of the advantageous period) is executed, the advantageous period counter value on the RWM 53, the AT counter value, the upper limit counter value, the additional counter value, the advantageous period flag, and one instruction The values of the storage areas of the determination flags are all "0".
On the other hand, even if the first initialization process is executed, storage area data of stored number data, set value data, RT status data, internal flag, role condition device number data, and role operation status flag on RWM 53 The value of is retained without being cleared.

Therefore, when the advantageous section ends and the first initialization process is performed, the normal section is shifted while maintaining the RT state at the end of the advantageous section. For example, assuming that the user is staying at RT3 at the end of the advantageous section, when the advantageous section ends and the first initialization process is performed, the normal section is shifted while maintaining RT3.
The processing corresponding to the first initialization processing is also performed in the third embodiment (FIGS. 43 to 52). For example, the processing of steps S445 to S447 in FIG. 44 (e) corresponds to the first initialization processing.

  As shown in FIG. 177, at the time of setting change, the main CPU 55 executes a second initialization process. At this time, among the information stored in the storage area on the RWM 53, information related to the advantageous section (such as the advantageous section counter value) is cleared, and predetermined information other than the information related to the advantageous section (such as RT status data) is also cleared. .

Therefore, when the second initialization process (the initialization process at the time of setting change) is executed, the advantageous interval counter value, AT counter value, upper limit counter value, overlay counter value, advantageous interval flag, and one-time instruction determination on RWM 53 The values of the flag storage areas are all "0". In addition, the values of the storage area data of the stored number data, the set value data, the RT state data, the internal flag, the item condition device number data, and the item operation state flag on the RWM 53 all become “0”.
Therefore, when the setting value is changed (including the re-setting of the same setting value) and the second initialization process is performed, the RT state shifts to non-RT and shifts to the normal section. For example, assuming that the user is staying at RT3 before the change of the set value, when the set value is changed and the second initialization process is performed, the non-RT state is entered and the normal period is entered.

Further, in any of the first initialization processing executed at the end of the advantageous section and the second initialization processing executed at the setting change, the information on the advantageous section stored in the storage area on the RWM 53 is cleared.
For this reason, when the first initialization process is performed and when the second initialization process is performed, the process shifts to a normal section in which the information on the advantageous section is in the same state.
Also, “a normal section in which the information related to the advantageous section is in the same state” includes the advantageous section counter value on the RWM 53, the AT counter value, the upper limit counter value, the additional counter value, the advantageous section flag, and the one-time indication determination flag It means a normal section in which the storage area values are all "0".

Here, every time the advantageous section ends, the ease of transition from the normal section to the advantageous section is made different, or when the advantageous section ends and when the set value is changed, the normal section to the advantageous section If the easiness of the transition to another is different, there is a possibility that the fairness among players may be harmed.
Therefore, in the twenty-fifth embodiment, an advantage section stored in a predetermined storage area on the RWM 53 in both the first initialization process executed at the end of the advantage section and the second initialization process executed at the setting change Clear the information
Thereby, every time the advantageous section ends, the ease of transition from the normal section to the advantageous section can be made the same, and when the advantageous section ends and when the set value is changed, Since the ease of transition from the section to the advantageous section can be made the same, fairness among players can be secured.
Modification of the twenty-fifth embodiment

The twenty-fifth embodiment has been described above. However, the present invention is not limited to the above-described content, and various modifications may be made as described below, for example.
(1) In the twenty-fifth embodiment, it is determined by AT lottery (two-step lottery) whether or not to shift to an instruction game section (AT). However, it is not limited to this.
For example, when a predetermined condition is satisfied, for example, the winning combination of a small winning combination E1 and transition to an advantageous section, the number of winnings of a predetermined combination has reached a specified number, or the number of winnings of a predetermined combination has reached a specified number. It may be decided to shift to the command game section.

(2) In FIG. 160, 1BBA does not have a single winning case with a probability of "70/65536" in common with setting, and a double winning with a small winning combination. Also, the small winning combination E1 is single winning with the probability of "1000/65536" in common in setting, and does not have the case of being double winning with the special winning combination. However, it is not limited to this.
For example, 1BBA is elected independently with a probability of "40/65536" in common with settings, and "1BBA + small winning combination E1" is won with a probability of "30/65536" in common with settings, and "1000/65536" in common with settings Alternatively, the small winning combination E1 may be won by probability.

Here, when the small winning combination E1 is won alone, the middle row cherry can be stopped. In addition, even when “1 BBA + small winning combination E1” is won twice, middle row cherry can be stopped. That is, both the single winning combination of the small winning combination E1 and the double winning combination of “1BBA + small winning combination E1” are lottery results in which the middle row cherry can be stopped.
When the single winning combination E1 is won alone, it always shifts to the advantageous section, and the advantageous section display LED 77 lights up, and also when the “1 BBA + small winning combination E1” is double winning, the advantageous section always And the advantageous zone display LED 77 is turned on.

In addition, when it is elected to the small winning combination E1 alone and it shifts to the advantageous section, the medal of game can be inserted next time (bet) becomes possible, until the operation of the settlement switch 46 becomes possible (hereinafter, this timing The advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on (timing 1 in FIG. 23).
On the other hand, when transitioning to the advantageous section by being won by "1 BBA + small winning combination E1", the advantageous section display LED 77 may be turned on by a predetermined timing, and a combination of symbols corresponding to 1 BBA is displayed The advantageous zone display LED 77 may be turned on before the turn on (timing 2 in FIG. 23).
Therefore, the lighting timing of the advantageous section display LED 77 may be the same or different depending on whether the small winning combination E1 is won alone or the double winning combination of “1BBA + small combination playing E1”.

Furthermore, when transitioning to the advantageous game section and the transition to the advantageous section, and when transitioning to the advantageous section during any of the transition to the advantageous section when the dual game is transitioned to the advantageous section, or when transitioning to the advantageous game section, It is made to have the time when it does not shift to the game section.
Even in this case, when it becomes a lottery result that the middle row cherry can be stopped, the transition to the advantageous section is always made, and the advantageous section display LED 77 is lighted. Then, although it is understood that the transition to the advantageous section is made, since it is in a state where it is not known whether or not to shift to the instruction game section, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the transition to the instruction game section over plural games.
In addition, when “1 BBA + small winning combination E1” is dually won and shifted to the advantageous section, it is possible to notify, for example, at the end of the 1 BBA game, to shift to the instructed game section.

(3) FIG. 178 (a) shows a modification of the table (1) in FIG. 160, and FIG. 178 (b) shows the transition of the advantageous section at the time of winning the rare part in FIG. 168 (b) and It is a figure which shows the modification of the presence or absence of lighting of an advantageous area display LED77.
In FIG. 160, the single winning combination of the small winning combination E1 is “1000” in common with setting, and the single winning combination of the small winning combination E2 is not determined, but in FIG. 178 (a), the single low winning combination E1 alone The winning number is "500" in common with the setting, and the single winning number for the small combination E2 is also "500" in common with the setting. Also, in FIG. 178 (a), when the small winning combination E1 is won, the transition from the normal section to the advantageous interval is always made, and also when the small winning combination E2 is won, the normal section is shifted from the normal interval to the advantageous section.

Here, when the small winning combination E1 is won alone, the middle row cherry can be stopped, and also when the small winning combination E2 is singly hit, the middle row cherry can be stopped. That is, both the single winning of the small winning combination E1 and the single winning of the small low binding E2 are the lottery results in which the middle row cherry can be stopped.
Then, as shown in FIG. 178 (b), when the small winning combination E1 is won, the transition to the advantageous section is always made, and the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit.
Furthermore, when it is shifted to the advantageous section by winning the small winning combination E1 and the advantageous section display LED 77 is lighted, the transition to the instructed game section (AT) is made with a probability of "128/256", but "128 It does not shift to the instruction game section with probability of / 256 ". As a result, the probability of transition to the instructed game section (AT) when the middle cherry can be stopped is 25%.
In addition, it is determined by AT lottery (two-step lottery) whether or not to shift to the instruction game section (AT) when the small winning combination E1 is won.

Further, as shown in FIG. 178 (b), also when the small winning combination E2 is won, as in the small winning combination E1 winning, it always shifts to the advantageous section, and the advantageous section display LED 77 is lighted.
Furthermore, when the small winning combination E2 is selected to shift to the advantageous section and the advantageous section display LED 77 is lighted, the command game section is not shifted.

Thus, at the time of the small winning combination E1 and the small winning combination E2 winning, it always shifts to the advantageous section, and turns on the advantageous section display LED 77. Furthermore, when the small winning combination E1 is won, there is a transition to the instruction game section and a transition not to transition to the instruction gaming section, and when the small winning combination E2 is won, the transition to the instructed gaming section is not made.
In this way, when it becomes the lottery result where middle stage cherries can be stopped, although it is understood that it moves to the advantageous section, it will be in the state where it is not understood whether it moves to the instruction game section, so to the instruction game section It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the transition of the game over multiple games.

(4) FIG. 179 (a) shows a modification of the table (1) in FIG. 160, and FIG. 179 (b) shows the transition of the advantageous section at the time of winning the rare part in FIG. 168 (b) and It is a figure which shows the modification of the presence or absence of lighting of an advantageous area display LED77.
In FIG. 178 and FIG. 179, the contents of the number table (1) of (a) are the same, but the contents of the transition of the advantageous section at the time of winning the rare part of (b) and the presence or absence of lighting of the advantageous section display LED 77 are different.

As shown in FIG. 179 (b), when the small winning combination E1 is won, the transition to the advantageous section is constantly made, and the advantageous section display LED 77 is lighted.
In addition, when it moves to the advantageous section by winning the small winning combination E1 and when the advantageous section display LED 77 lights up, it shifts to the instruction game section (AT) with the probability of “64/256”, but “192 It does not shift to the instruction game section with probability of / 256 ".

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 179 (b), when the small winning combination E2 is won, the transition to the advantageous section is always made, and the advantageous section display LED 77 is lighted.
Furthermore, when winning the small winning combination E2, when it moves to the advantageous segment and the advantageous segment display LED 77 lights up, as in the case of the small winning combination E1 winning, the instruction game segment (with a probability of “64/256” Although it shifts to AT), it does not shift to an instruction game section with the probability of "192/256". As a result, the probability of transition to the instructed game section (AT) when the middle cherry can be stopped is 25%.
Whether to shift to the instruction game section (AT) at any of the small winning combination E1 winning and the small winning combination E2 winning is determined by AT lottery (two-step lottery).

In this way, at the time of the small winning combination E1 and the small winning combination E2 winning, always transition to the advantageous section, and turn on the advantageous segment display LED 77, and also at any of the small winning combination E1 winning and the small winning combination E2 winning , When transitioning to the instruction game section, and when not transitioning to the instruction game section.
In this way, when it becomes the lottery result where middle stage cherries can be stopped, although it is understood that it moves to the advantageous section, it will be in the state where it is not understood whether it moves to the instruction game section, so to the instruction game section It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the transition of the game over multiple games.

(5) FIG. 180 (a) shows a modification of the table (1) in FIG. 160, and FIG. 180 (b) shows the transition of the advantageous section at the time of winning the rare part in FIG. 168 (b) and It is a figure which shows the modification of the presence or absence of lighting of an advantageous area display LED77.
In FIG. 180 (a), the number of single winnings for the small winning combination E1 is "250" in common with the setting, and the number of single winnings for the small winning combination E2 is "750" in common for the settings. Further, in FIG. 180 (a), when the small winning combination E1 is won, the transition from the normal section to the advantageous segment is always made, and also when the small winning combination E2 is won, the normal segment is always shifted from the normal section to the advantageous segment.

Also, as shown in FIG. 180 (b), when the small winning combination E1 is won, it always shifts to the advantageous section, and the advantageous segment display LED 77 lights up, and when the small winning combination E2 is won, it shifts constantly to the advantageous section, And the advantageous section display LED 77 lights up.
Furthermore, when the small winning combination E1 is selected, the transition to the advantageous section is made, and when the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on, the transition to the instruction game section is always made.
On the other hand, when the small winning combination E2 is selected to shift to the advantageous section and the advantageous section display LED 77 is lighted, the command game section is not shifted.
As a result, the probability of transition to the instructed game section (AT) when the middle cherry can be stopped is 25%.

In this way, at the time of the small winning combination E1 and the small winning combination E2 winning, always transition to the advantageous section, and turn on the advantageous section display LED 77, and further, when the small combination E1 winning, transition to the instruction game section When the combination E2 is won, it is made not to shift to the instructed game section.
In this way, when it becomes the lottery result where middle stage cherries can be stopped, although it is understood that it moves to the advantageous section, it will be in the state where it is not understood whether it moves to the instruction game section, so to the instruction game section It is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the transition of the game over multiple games.
Furthermore, in any of the modes of FIG. 168 (b), FIG. 178 (b), FIG. 179 (b) and FIG. 180 (b), the transition probability to the instructed game section (AT) at the middle cherry stop possible time is Even if it is 25% and either aspect is adopted, the same effect can be exhibited and the same impression can be given to the player.

(6) In FIG. 161 to FIG. 164, although 1 BBB is elected independently, it is not limited to this.
For example, in FIGS. 161 to 164, instead of a single winning of 1 BBB, a double winning of “1 BBA + small player 34 (“ BELL B ”-“ RED 7 ”-“ RED 7 ”: 1 piece) may be adopted.

Specifically, in FIG. 161 to FIG. 164, the number of duplicate winnings of “1BBA + small role 34” is “80” for setting 1, “88” for setting 2, and “setting 3”. “96” can be set to “104” for setting 4, “112” for setting 5 and “120” for setting 6.
Even in this case, the winning probability of 1BB (the sum of single and double winnings of 1BBA) increases as the set value increases, and the transition probability to the advantageous section at the time of 1BB winning decreases the set value. It can be made to be higher according to

(7) In FIG. 168 (b), when a small winning combination E1 (middle row cherry) is won, transition to the advantageous section and when the advantageous section display LED 77 is lit, the instruction game section (the probability of “64/256” It shifts to AT) and does not shift to an instruction game section with the probability of "192/256". However, it is not limited to this.
For example, in FIG. 168 (b), the game may be shifted to the chance zone (CZ) instead of the command game section (AT).

Specifically, in FIG. 168 (b), when winning the small winning combination E1 (middle level cherry), when shifting to the advantageous section and the advantageous section display LED 77 is lighted, the probability of “64/256” , Shift to the chance zone (CZ), and with the probability of "192/256", it is possible not to shift to the chance zone.
In addition, when it moves to the chance zone, it has the case where it moves to the indication game section (AT) (promotion) and the case where it does not move to the indication game section. For example, in the chance zone, when transition condition to the instruction game segment is satisfied, transition to the instruction game segment is made, and if transition condition to the instruction game segment is not satisfied, the advantageous segment is ended without transition to the instruction game segment Transfer to the normal section.

Furthermore, as a transition condition from the chance zone to the instruction game section, for example, it may be mentioned that the number of winnings of a predetermined combination has reached a specified number or that the number of winnings of a predetermined combination has reached a specified number. it can.
Even in this way, it is understood that transition to the advantageous section is always made by switching to the advantageous section and turning on the advantageous section display LED 77 at the time of winning the small winning combination E1 (middle cherry), but it is shifted to the instruction game section Since it does not know whether or not to be played, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation for the transition to the instructed game section over multiple games.

(8) In the twenty-fifth embodiment, although "the predetermined number of games (for example," 15 games "has been digested after transition to the advantageous section") is defined as "one-time instruction activation condition", it is not limited thereto .
For example, "winning or winning a predetermined combination a predetermined number of times after transition to the advantageous section", specifically, "winning or winning a push bell (small combination B group five times) after transition to the advantageous section", "advantageously It can be defined as “one-time instruction operation condition” or the like that “replay has been won or won seven times after the section transition”.

  Also, for example, "became unwined in the lottery performed at a predetermined time after transition to the advantageous section", specifically, "probability of 50% when winning order bell after transition to the advantageous section (small combination B group) winning" Draw a lottery to win in, and be non-winning in this lottery, "Perhaps after the transition to the advantageous section, perform a lottery to win with a probability of 70% every time a game is played, and became a non-win in this lottery "Etc." can also be defined as "one-time instruction operation condition".

  Furthermore, for example, “the condition determined at the transition to the advantageous section is satisfied”, specifically, “at the transition to the advantageous section, 10 games, 15 games, or 20 games are randomly determined and determined. "I have digested the number of games", "at the transition to the advantageous section, five, seven or ten times is determined by lottery, and then the number of winning bells in the push order bell (small group B group) is determined It can also be determined that "the number of times has been reached" or the like as "one-time instruction operation condition".

Furthermore, for example, “the number of times the wrong push order has been reached when winning replay duplication (Replay B, Replay C group after transition to the advantageous section) has reached three times,” “freeze occurred after the advantageous section transition Or the like may be defined as "one-time instruction operation condition".
Of course, the above-described conditions can be combined appropriately to determine “one-time instruction operation condition”.

  (9) In the twenty-fifth embodiment, at the time of setting change, by executing the second initialization process (initialization process at the time of setting change), the advantageous interval counter value on the RWM 53, the AT counter value, the upper limit counter value, and the addition The counter value, the advantageous section flag, the one time instruction determination flag, the RT state data, the stored sheet number data, the internal flag, the item condition device number data, and the item operation state flag are cleared. However, it is not limited to this.

  For example, at the time of setting change, among the RT status data, the stored number data, the internal flag, the item condition device number data, and the role operating status flag, only the stored number data is cleared, and the RT status data, the internal flag, The item condition device number data and the item operation state flag may be held without being cleared.

Here, "information on the advantageous section" must be cleared at the end of the advantageous section, and must also be cleared at the time of setting change.
In addition, “RT status data”, “internal flag”, “subject condition device number data”, and “subject status flag” must be held without clearing at the end of the advantageous section, and set At the time of change, it may be cleared or may be held without being cleared.

Furthermore, the "stored sheet number data" must be held without clearing at the end of the advantageous section, and must always be cleared when changing the setting.
As described above, the “stored sheet number data” is data on the RWM 53 that is handled differently when the advantageous section ends and when the setting is changed.

(10) In the flowchart shown in the twenty-fifth embodiment, the order of processing is not limited to the order shown in the figure, and when the order of processing can be changed, it is possible to change the order of processing is there.
(11) The twenty-fifth embodiment and the various modifications described above are not limited to being implemented alone, and can be implemented in combination as appropriate.

Twenty-Sixth Embodiment
The twenty-sixth embodiment will now be described.
The twenty-sixth embodiment relates to lighting control of the management information display LED 74 shown in FIG. 3 and FIG. 38 in the first embodiment.
FIG. 181 is a diagram showing management information displayed by the management information display LED 74 in the twenty-sixth embodiment, and corresponds to FIG. 38 of the first embodiment.
In the twenty-sixth embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the advantageous section ratio (in the first embodiment (FIG. 38), the "advantageous section ratio" is displayed, but in the twenty-sixth embodiment, the "advantageous section ratio" is displayed ), Continuous character ratio (6000 times), character ratio (6000 times), continuous character ratio (total), character ratio (total), displayed on the management information display LED 74 (digits 6 to 9) Do.

In the twenty-sixth embodiment, unlike the first embodiment (FIG. 38), the “information type” in FIG. 38 is referred to as “identification segment”, and the “numerical value” is referred to as “ratio segment”. The identification segment corresponds to the digits 6 and 7, and the “ratio segment” corresponds to the digits 8 and 9.
Further, in the twenty-sixth embodiment, as described in the twentieth embodiment, numbers and letters are interchanged in the identification segment as compared with the first embodiment (FIG. 38). Further, when the identification segment is displayed, the "dot (DP)" of the digit 7 corresponding to the lower digit is lit (the dots of the digits 6, 8 and 9 are not lit).
Further, in FIG. 181, the value of the ratio segment is the same as that of FIG.

Furthermore, in the above-mentioned five items, in the slot machine which does not have the function corresponding to the item, the ratio segment is lighted and displayed as "-".
For example, firstly, when the character (BB, RB, CB, etc.) is provided but no advantageous section is provided (for example, it is called a "normal type" having only a bonus without providing an AT etc. In addition, the ratio segment is lighted and displayed as “−−” when displaying the advantageous section ratio. In other words, at the time of displaying the advantageous section ratio, “7 U.” is displayed on the identification segment of the management information display LED 74, and “-” is displayed on the ratio segment.
Also, for example, secondly, when "RB (type 1 special character)" is not provided, there is no continuous character ratio, so when displaying ratio display numbers "2" and "4", the ratio is displayed. The segment is lit and displayed as "-". In other words, when displaying the continuous part ratio (6000 times), "6 y." Is displayed on the identification segment of the management information display LED 74, and "-" is displayed on the ratio segment, and the continuous part ratio (total) is displayed Sometimes, "6 A." is displayed on the identification segment of the management information display LED 74, and "-" is displayed on the ratio segment.

182 and 183 are diagrams showing storage areas of the RWM 53 in the twenty-sixth embodiment. 182 and 183 illustrate a part of the storage area used in the description of the twenty-sixth embodiment, which does not mean that the storage areas shown in FIGS. 182 and 183 are limited.
As shown in FIG. 124 (twentieth embodiment), the RWM 53 is divided into the use area and the outside of the use area, and the addresses “F000 (H)” to “F1FF (H)” are within the use area. The storage area after “F200 (H)” is the storage area outside the use area. In the present embodiment, "F200 (H)" to "F20F (H)" are so-called "unused areas". The unused area is an area where the result of the game obtained by the progress of the game is not stored, and is provided to clearly distinguish the address in the use area from the address outside the use area. For example, it is possible to reduce access to the RWM address outside the use area when the program in the use area is being executed due to runaway of the main program or the like.

In FIG. 182, the address “F000 (H)” is a storage area for storing setting value data, and values “0” to “5” are stored as data. Data “0” is data corresponding to setting value 1, data “1” is data corresponding to setting value 2,..., Data “5” is data corresponding to setting value 6.
The address "F001 (H)" is a storage area of the interrupt counter. The value of the interrupt counter is an increment counter having a range of “0” to “65535 (D)”, and the value is updated (“+1”) every one interrupt (every 2.235 ms). In the twenty-sixth embodiment, since “0” to “65535 (D)” are adopted as the value of the interrupt counter, the 2-byte address “F001 (H)” (lower 8 bits) and “F002 (H)” Although (upper 8 bits) is used, for example, in the case of adopting a range of “0” to “255 (D)”, it is also possible to use only one-byte address “F001 (H)”.
The address "F010 (H)" is a storage area of the operation state flag, and each item is assigned as shown in FIG.
In the present embodiment, only the RB (the type in which the RB operates continuously during 1BB gaming) is provided as a character, and the D3 bit corresponding to the RB is “1” (0000 1000 (B)) , And when the D3 bit is “0” (00000000 (B)), it becomes the non-operation of the gift and the non-operation of the continuous service.
Therefore, unlike the present embodiment, when there is another item such as SB (for example, allocation to D4 bit when SB is provided), CB (D1 bit), etc., any one corresponding to those items is available. Whether or not the accessory is in operation can be determined depending on whether or not the bit is "1".

  The address “F018 (H)” is a storage area of the LED display counter. The LED display counter of the twenty-sixth embodiment is assumed to be the same as the twentieth embodiment (FIG. 132). As described in the twentieth embodiment, the LED display counter specifies a digit to be lit at the time of the interrupt process.

The address “F019 (H)” is a storage area in which the LED display request flag is stored. The LED display request flag is also identical to that of the twentieth embodiment (FIG. 132). As described in the twentieth embodiment, the LED display request flag is a flag for designating a digit which can be lighted in response to the change of the setting or the confirmation of the setting.
The address "F020 (H)" is a game section flag, and is used to determine which of the normal section, the advantageous section, and the standby section.
Specifically, the D0 bit corresponds to the advantageous section flag, and the D1 bit corresponds to the standby section flag. The D2 to D7 bits are unused.
The game section flag is configured to be updated at the game start set time (step S2172 in FIG. 188 described later).

For example, when an advantageous section is won in the "N" game, it becomes an advantageous section from the "N + 1" game. At this time,
"N" game eyes: game section flag "00000000 (B)"
"N + 1" game eyes: game section flag "00000001 (B)"
It becomes.
In addition, when winning in the advantageous section with the “N” game, from the “N + 1” game to the standby section, and from the “N + 3” game with the advantageous section,
"N" game eyes: game section flag "00000000 (B)"
"N + 1" game eyes: game section flag "00000010 (B)"
"N + 2" game eyes: game section flag "00000010 (B)"
"N + 3" game eyes: game section flag "00000001 (B)"
It becomes.
Furthermore, when satisfying the termination condition of the advantageous section with the "N + x" game, and transitioning from the "N + x + 1" game to the normal section,
"N + x" game eyes: game section flag "00000001 (B)"
"N + x + 1" game eyes: game section flag "00000000 (B)"
It becomes.

  The address "F024 (H)" is a storage area of the advantageous section counter. The advantageous section counter counts the number of games played in the advantageous section. As in the other embodiments described above, the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section is set to the "1500" game. Then, in order to count "1500" at the maximum, a 2-byte storage area is provided.

  The memory area of the medal payout number data of the address "F040 (H)" stores the payout number when the small winning combination is won in the game and the payout number is determined (step S2188 in FIG. 188 described later) It is a storage area. When the small winning combination is won, the medal payout processing is executed, but one medal payout (addition of one to the stored number, or one payout of the actual medal (from the hopper 35)) Each time, "1" is subtracted. That is, it has a role as the number of times of performing the payout process. Thus, when the medal payout process is completed, the medal payout number data becomes “0”.

  Similar to the medal payout number data, the medal payout number buffer of the address “F041 (H)” is paid out when the small winning combination is won in the game and the payout number is determined (step S2188 in FIG. 188 described later). It is a storage area in which the number is stored. Here, unlike the medal payout number data, the medal payout number buffer is not decremented for each medal payout process, and the value initially stored is maintained. Then, the value is maintained until the end of the next game. For example, when a small combination of eight payouts is won in the game, "8 (H)" is stored in the medal payout number buffer, and when the combination does not win in the next game, the medal payout number buffer Is overwritten with "0".

The 400 game counter of the address "F 210 (H)" is for adding the number of times of playing, with 400 games as a break. This addition is an addition that circulates “0” to “399 (D)”, and “1” is added for each game. Further, for example, when "399 (D)" is stored, adding "1" results in "0".
Note that, contrary to the above, “399 (D)” may be set as an initial value, and “1” may be subtracted for each game. In this case, when the value is “0”, it is determined that 400 games have been executed. Also, subtracting "1" from "0" resets "399 (D)".

The ring buffer number of the address "F 212 (H)" defines the number of ring buffer to which the data is to be added when medals are paid out in the game, and the medal payout number is updated. It is for specifying a ring buffer. Specifically, any one of “0” to “14 (D)” is stored.
Addresses “F213 (H)” to “F230 (H)” are storage areas of the total payout ring buffer, and consist of fifteen. Each total payout ring buffer is composed of 2 bytes. For example, the total payout ring buffer 0 is composed of the addresses "F213 (H)" and "F214 (H)", the address "F213 (H)" is the lower digit, and the address "F214 (H)" is the upper digit. In FIG. 182 and FIG. 183, the lowest address number is displayed for the storage area whose number of bytes is “2” or more.

The total payout ring buffers 0 to 14 correspond to the 15 ring buffers shown in FIG. 28 (first embodiment) (the address is different from FIG. 28). One ring buffer stores the total number of payouts for 400 games. For example, the number of payouts from the first game to the 400th game is stored in the addresses "F213 (H)" and "F214 (H)", and the number of payouts from the next 401st game to the 800th game is the address " It is stored in F215 (H) "and" F216 (H) ".
Here, it is judged by referring to the 400 game counter of the above-mentioned address "F 210 (H)" whether or not it becomes the 400th game. Further, it is determined by referring to the ring buffer number of the address "F 212 (H)" which ring buffer value the payout number is added to (the value is updated) in the game.

And, as described above, when the total payout number from the first game to the 400th game is stored in the total payout ring buffer 0 of the addresses “F 213 (H)” and “F 214 (H)”, the 5601 th game The total payout number up to the 6000th game is stored in the total payout ring buffer 14 of the addresses "F22F (H)" and "F230 (H)". Next, at the end of the 6000th game, the data stored in the total payout ring buffer 0 of the addresses "F213 (H)" and "F214 (H)" are cleared, and the number of payouts from the 6001th game to the 6400th game Are stored in the total payout ring buffer 0 of the addresses "F213 (H)" and "F214 (H)".
The total payout ring buffers 0 to 14 are each composed of 2 bytes. As described in the first embodiment, assuming that the maximum payout number in one game is "15" (in the first embodiment, it is "10" although it is "10" as shown in the small part 39 of FIG. 11). Since the maximum number of cards to be paid out in 400 games is 6,000 in consideration of the maximum value of “15” in consideration of the maximum value of, it becomes possible to store in 2 bytes of storage capacity.
This point is the same as in the continuous part delivery ring buffers 0 to 14 and the part delivery ring buffers 0 to 14 described later.

The addresses “F231 (H)” to “F24E (H)” are storage areas of the consecutive role delivery ring buffers 0 to 14. This corresponds to that shown in FIG. 29 (first embodiment) (the address is different from FIG. 29).
The addresses “F24F (H)” to “F26C (H)” are storage areas of the feature delivery ring buffers 0 to 14. This corresponds to that shown in FIG. 30 (first embodiment) (the address is different from FIG. 30).

The total game number counter of the addresses “F26D (H)” to “F26F (H)” is a counter for storing the number of times of game play (total), and is composed of 3 bytes. As described in the first embodiment, since it is necessary to count "175000 (D)" games as the total number of games, it is composed of 3 bytes. The storage area of the total game number counter corresponds to the storage areas of "F005 (H)" to "F007 (H)" shown in FIG. 27 (first embodiment).
In the twenty-sixth embodiment, counting continues even if the number of games exceeds “175000 (D)”, and stops counting when 3 bytes are full (“FFFFFF (H)”). Detailed control on this point will be described later.

  The advantageous section game number counters of the addresses "F270 (H)" to "F 272 (H)" count the number of games of the advantageous section, and in FIG. 27 of the first embodiment, "F001 (H)" to It corresponds to "F004 (H)". In the first embodiment, a value obtained by multiplying the number of games played in the advantageous section by 100 (D) is stored, so a 4-byte storage area is used, but in the 26th embodiment, like the total number of games counter, In order to add "1" per game, it is 3 bytes.

The total payout (6000 times) counter of the addresses “F273 (H)” to “F275 (H)” is a counter that counts the total payout number of medals during the 6,000 games. Even if 15 medals of each game are paid out in 6000 games, the total is 90,000, so it can be counted in 3 bytes (a continuous role payout (discussed later) and a bonus The same applies to the payout (6000 times) counter.
This counter corresponds to the counters “F02F (H)” to “F031 (H)” in FIG. 28 (the first embodiment).

Similarly, the consecutive character payout (6000 times) counter of the addresses "F276 (H)" to "F278 (H)" is a counter that counts the number of payouts during continuous character operation during 6000 games.
This counter corresponds to the counters “F06E (H)” to “F070 (H)” in FIG. 29 (first embodiment).
In the first embodiment, a value obtained by multiplying the payout number by “100 (D)” is stored, but in the twenty-sixth embodiment, the payout number itself is stored (added). That is, when the payout number is one, “1” is added.
Furthermore, similarly, the combination payout (6000 times) counter of the addresses "F279 (H)" to "F27B (H)" is a counter for counting the number of payouts at the time of bonus operation during 6,000 games.
This counter corresponds to the counters “F0AE (H)” to “F0B0 (H)” in FIG. 30 (the first embodiment).
Similarly to the above, in the first embodiment, a value obtained by multiplying the number of payouts by "100 (D)" is stored, but in the twenty-sixth embodiment, the number of payouts itself is stored (added).

In the above total payout (6000 times) counter, continuous character product payout (6000 times) counter, and character product payout (6000 times) counter, when there is a payout at the time of continuous character inoperative and at the time of character inoperative , Total payout (6000 times) only the counter is updated (added). In addition, when there is a payout at the time of non-operation of the continuous combination and at the time of combination operation, the total payout (6000 times) counter and the combination withdrawal (6000 times) counter are updated, and the continuous combination payout (6000 times) counter Is not updated.
Furthermore, when there is a payout in the continuous role operation, the total payout (6000 times) counter, the character payout (6000 times) counter, and the continuous role payout (6000 times) counter are all updated.

The values of the total payout (6000 times) counter, the continuous character payout (6000 times) counter, and the character payout (6000 times) counter are updated every 400 games.
The specific control will be described in the flowchart to be described later, but the outline of the control is as follows.
First, when medals have been paid out from the first game to the 6000th game, the total payouts (6000 times) according to the continuous role operating / non-operating time and the bonus operating state / non-operating time, respectively. And the like) are stored (added) in the counter, the continuous character product payout (6000 times) counter, and the character product payout (6000 times) counter.
At the end of the 6000th game, a continuous character ratio (6000 times) and a character ratio (6000 times) described later are calculated. After this calculation, the total number of payouts during the 400 game counts from “400 × 15-1” game (5999 games) to “400 × 15-400” games (5600 games) before the game is the total payout (6000 Times) are respectively subtracted from the counter value, the continuous character product payout (6000 times) counter value, and the character product payout (6000 times) counter value.

For example, when it is the 6000th game, the total payout ring buffer 0 (F213 (H) to F214 (H)) value is subtracted from the total payout (6000 times) counter value. Then, the value of the total payout ring buffer 0 (F213 (H) to F214 (H)) is cleared. Further, the number of payouts from the 6001th game to the 6400th game is added to the total payout ring buffer 0 and the total payout (6000 times) counter.
Similarly, when the 6000th game is reached, the continuous character payout ring buffer 0 (F231 (H) to F232 (H)) value is subtracted from the continuous character payout (6000 times) counter value. Then, the value of the continuous role product payout ring buffer 0 is cleared. Further, the number of payouts at the time of continuous combination product operation from the 6001 game to the 6400 game is added to the continuous combination payout ring buffer 0 and the continuous combination payout (6000 times) counter.
Furthermore, similarly, when the 6000th game is reached, the character payout ring buffer 0 (F24F (H) to F250 (H)) value is subtracted from the character payout (6000 times) counter value. Then, the value of the feature delivery ring buffer 0 is cleared. Further, the number of payouts at the time of the bonus item activation from the 6001 game to the 6400 game is added to the bonus item payout ring buffer 0 and the bonus item payout (6000 times) counter.

More specifically, for example, the total payout ring buffer stores the number of payouts between the following numbers of games.
Total payout ring buffer 0: "1" game ~ "400" game total payout ring buffer 1: "401" game ~ "800" game total payout ring buffer 2: "801" game ~ "1200" game Eye Total Payout Ring Buffer 3: "1201" Game ~ "1600" Game Total Payout Ring Buffer 4: "1601" Game ~ "2000" Game Total Payout Ring Buffer 5: "2001" Game ~ "2400" Game Total Payout Ring Buffer 6: "2401" Play 2-"2800" Play Total Play Ring Buffer 7: "280 1" Play 2-"3200" Play Total Play Ring Buffer 8: "320 1" Play 3-"3600 "Game Items Total Payout Ring Buffer 9:" 3601 "Game Items ~" 4000 "Game Items Total Payout Ring Buffer 10:" 40 01 "game" ~ "4400" game total payout ring buffer 11: "4401" game ~ "4800" game total payout ring buffer 12: "4801" game ~ "5200" game total payout ring buffer 13: "5201" game item ~ "5600" game item total payout ring buffer 14: "5601" game item ~ "6000" game item total payout (6000 times) Counter: "1" game item ~ "6000" game item

Then, assuming that the 6000th game is over, all the total payout ring buffers 0 to 14 store the number of payouts between the numbers of games.
Also, the value of the total payout (6000 times) counter matches the sum of the values stored in the total payout ring buffers 0-14.
Here, assuming that the value stored in the total payout (6000 times) counter at this time is Σ1, and the value stored in the total payout ring buffer 0 is Z1,
Total payout (6000 times) Counter = 1−1-Z1
Perform the operation of
Also,
Total payout ring buffer 0 = 0 (clear)
Perform the operation of
That is, the value “Z1” of the total payout ring buffer 0 storing the number of payouts during the number of 400 games from 5999 (400 × 15-1) to 5600 (400 × 15-400) before the total payout 6000 times) A process of subtracting the value "「 1 "stored in the counter is executed.
Next, processing of clearing the value “Z1” of the total payout ring buffer 0 storing the number of payouts during the number of 400 games from 5999 (400 × 15-1) to 5600 (400 × 15-400) before the game Run.
After calculating in this way, the 6001 game is started. When there are payouts from the 6001th game to the 6400th game (here, it is assumed that the item has not been activated by the 6001th game to the 6400th game), it is added to the total payout ring buffer 0, and Add to the total payout (6000 times) counter.

Next, assuming that the 6400th game is over, the total payout ring buffer stores the number of payouts between the following numbers of games.
Total payout ring buffer 0: "6001" game to "6400" game total payout ring buffer 1: "401" game to "800" game:
Total payout ring buffer 14: "5601" game to "6000" game total payout (6000 times) Counter: "401" game to "6000" game, and "6001" game to "6400" game and Similarly to the above, assuming that the value stored in the total payout (6000 times) counter at this time is 時点 2, and the value stored in the total payout ring buffer 1 is Z2,
Total payout (6000 times) Counter = 2− 2-Z2
I assume.
And
Total payout ring buffer 1 = 0
I assume.
After this calculation, the 6401 game is started. If there is payout by game 6401 to game 6800 (in this case, it is assumed that a feature has not been activated by game 6401 to game 6800), it is added to the total payout ring buffer 1 and Add to the total payout (6000 times) counter. Repeat the above processing.

Further, although the total payout ring buffer and the total payout (6000 times) counter have been described above, the same processing as described above is performed also at the time of role operation or at the time of continuous role operation.
Specifically, at the time of role operation, the total payout ring buffer 0 to 14 was replaced with the role payout ring buffer 0 to 14, and the total payout (6000 times) counter was replaced with the bonus payout (6000 times) counter. Execute the process In addition, at the time of the gift operation, as described above, one of the total payout ring buffers 0 to 14 and the total payout (6000 times) counter are also updated.
Similarly, at the time of continuous service operation, the total payout ring buffer 0 to 14 is replaced with the continuous character payout ring buffer 0 to 14, and the total payout (6000 times) counter is replaced with the continuous bonus discharge (6000 times) counter Execute the process. In addition, at the time of continuous role operation, any of the total payout ring buffers 0-14, any of the bonus payout ring buffers 0-14, the total payout (6000 times) counter, and the bonus payout (6000 times) counter Update will be done together.

The total payout (total) counter of the addresses “F27C (H)” to “F27E (H)” is a counter that counts the total number of payouts, and counts at least the total payout number among the “175000 (D)” games. .
This counter corresponds to the counters “F032 (H)” to “F034 (H)” in FIG. 28 (the first embodiment).
Similarly, the continuous character payout (total) counter at addresses “F27F (H)” to “F281 (H)” is a counter that counts the total number of payouts at the time of continuous character operation, and similarly to the above, At least "175000 (D)" the number of payouts during continuous bonus product operation during the game is counted.
This counter corresponds to the counters “F071 (H)” to “F074 (H)” in FIG. 29 (the first embodiment).
Furthermore, similarly, the character product payout (total) counters of the addresses "F282 (H)" to "F 284 (H)" are counters that count the total of the number of payouts at the time of character product operation, and at least as described above "175000 (D)" The number of payouts at the time of the bonus item operation during the game is counted.
This counter corresponds to the counters “F0B1 (H)” to “F0B4 (H)” in FIG. 30 (first embodiment).
In addition, although the 3 kinds of payout (6000 times) counter mentioned above subtracts the number of payouts from 5999 to 5600 before every 400 games, these 3 types of payout (cumulative) counters reduce the value. There is nothing to do.

In the first embodiment, since the value obtained by multiplying the number of dispensed sheets by "100 (D)" is stored, the storage capacity of the total is four bytes, but in the twenty-sixth embodiment, the number of dispensed sheets is itself Is stored (added), so it consists of 3 bytes.
For example, assuming that there are 15 payouts for each game in 175000 games, “175000 × 15 = 2625000” is obtained, which is smaller than the value that can be stored in 3 bytes. Therefore, storage is possible with 3 bytes of storage capacity.

The advantageous section ratio data of the address “F 285 (H)” is a storage area for storing an advantageous section ratio indicating the ratio of the number of games of the advantageous section to the total number of games.
This storage area corresponds to the storage area (ratio of advantageous intervals) of “F008 (H)” in FIG. 27 (first embodiment).
The continuous character ratio (6000 times) data of the address "F 286 (H)" is a storage area for storing the payout number ratio at the time of continuous character operation to the total payout number among the 6000 games.
This storage area corresponds to the storage area of “F075 (H)” in FIG. 29 (first embodiment).
The character ratio (6000 times) data of the address "F 287 (H)" is a storage area for storing the ratio of the number of payouts at the time of character activation to the total number of payouts among the 6000 games.
This storage area corresponds to the storage area of “F0B5 (H)” in FIG. 30 (first embodiment).

Further, the continuous character ratio (total) data of the address “F288 (H)” is a storage area for storing the payout number ratio at the time of continuous character operation to the total payout number in the total number of games.
This storage area corresponds to the storage area of “F076 (H)” in FIG. 29 (first embodiment).
The character ratio (cumulative) data of the address "F289 (H)" is a storage area for storing the ratio of the number of payouts at the time of the combination operation to the total number of payouts in the total number of games.
This storage area corresponds to the storage area of “F0B6 (H)” in FIG. 30 (first embodiment).

Next, the method of calculating the ratio and the outline of correction of the ratio will be described (the specific process will be described in the flowchart to be described later).
In the following example, an advantageous interval ratio is listed and described using a decimal number. The following ratio calculation method is employed in all of the five types of ratios shown in FIG.
First, it is assumed that the total number of games is "50000" and the number of games in the advantageous section is "13000".
In this case, if division is used, the advantageous interval ratio can be calculated as "13000/50000 = 0.26 (26%)". In addition, in the ratio calculation of the twenty-sixth embodiment, the decimal places are discarded. Therefore, for example, even if it is “18.9%”, it is “18%”.
On the other hand, the one-chip microprocessor (FIG. 124) mounted in this embodiment can not execute an operation of directly dividing a large value. Therefore, an operation is performed in which division is replaced by subtraction.

Here, “Y (divisor) / X (divisor)” is used.
(1) The number of times of the advantageous section game which is the dividend Y is multiplied by 10 (10 × Y). Therefore, “13000 × 10 = 130000” is obtained. The process of multiplying by 10 is executed by a calculation value set (S_VALUE_SET) described later.
(2) Subtracting "50000" which is divisor X from "130000".
130000-50000 = 80000 (the first subtraction)
Here, when the calculation result is larger than the divisor X, the divisor X is again subtracted from the calculation result, and the process is repeated until the calculation result becomes “0” or more and less than the divisor X. And let the number of repetitions be "R1".
That is,
0 ≦ (10 × Y−X × R1) <X
Calculate “R1” that satisfies
In this example
130000-50000 = 80000 (the first subtraction)
80000-50000 = 30000 (subtraction for the second time)
At this point, it becomes "0" or more and less than divisor X.
Then, the number of repetitions of subtraction here is the tenth of the ratio. Assuming that the tenth place of the ratio is “R1”, then “R1 = 2”.

(3) Next, let the remainder in subtraction of "R1" be "Y '". That is,
10 × Y−X × R1 = Y ′
I assume.
Then, this remainder "Y '" is multiplied by 10 (10 x Y'). Therefore, “30000 × 10 = 300000” is obtained.
(4) Subtract "50000" which is divisor X from "300000".
300000-50000 = 250000 (the first subtraction)
Here, similarly to the above, when the operation result is larger than the divisor X, the divisor X is again subtracted from the operation result, and the operation is repeated until the operation result becomes “0” or more and less than the divisor X. And let the repetition frequency be "R2".
That is,
0 ≦ (10 × Y′−X × R2) <X
Calculate “R2” that satisfies
In this example
300000-50000 = 250000 (the first subtraction)
250000-50000 = 200000 (second subtraction)
:
50000-50000 = 0 (sixth subtraction)
At this point, it becomes "0" or more and less than divisor X.
Then, the number of repetitions of subtraction here becomes one place of the ratio. If one place of the ratio is "R2", then "R2 = 6".
(5) Therefore, the ratio is “10 × R1 + R2” and is “26”.

  Further, as described above, when “10 × Y−X × R1 = Y ′”, it is determined whether or not “Y ′ = 0”, and it is determined that “Y ′ = 0”. It is also possible to set “0” as the ratio of one's place and omit the operation for the ratio of one's place. In this case, in the specific ratio, the tens digit is "R1" and the ones digit is "0".

In addition, when there is a relationship of "Y (dividend) = X (divisor)" (for example, when the total number of games and the number of games in the advantageous section coincide with each other), "R1 = 10 (D)" And “R2 = 0”, that is, the ratio is calculated as “100%”. However, as shown in FIG. 125 (twentieth embodiment), since the ratio segment is composed of two digits, it can display only up to two digits as a ratio. Therefore, as a result of calculating the ratio, when it is "100 (D)", the ratio is changed to the correction value "99" and stored. Thus, “99” is displayed in the ratio segment.
As described later, when the ratio is "60" or "70" or more, it is determined that the ratio does not fall within the design value range, and therefore "100" or "99" is determined similarly. There is no big difference in the judgment of the design value.
In addition, when it is going to display "100 (D)" as a ratio, a digit overflow will occur in the 3rd digit, and the display content will be "00". When the display is "00", it can not be determined whether the ratio is "0%" or "100%". Also from this viewpoint, when the calculated ratio is “100 (D)”, “99” is displayed without being displayed as “00”.
However, in the case where the ratio segment is composed of three LEDs, as a result of calculating the ratio, if it is “100 (D)”, it is a matter of course that “100” may be displayed on the ratio segment. .

As described above, the subtraction operation is performed up to 20 times by calculating the tens and ones places respectively by subtraction.
On the other hand, as shown in the first embodiment, for example, when the number of games played in the advantageous section is multiplied by "100", and the total number of games is continuously subtracted from the number of games played in the advantageous section multiplied by "100", It is necessary to perform subtraction 100 times.
Therefore, according to the calculation method of the twenty-sixth embodiment, the time for calculating the ratio can be significantly reduced.

Also, the ratio is not limited to the advantageous interval ratio, and the other four ratios similarly have 1 byte of storage area. Here, when storing the ratio, in the 1-byte storage area, the upper 4 bits are set as the storage area of the tenth place of the ratio, and the lower 4 bits are set as the storage area of the first place of the ratio.
When the ratio is calculated as “26 (D)” as in the above example, the tens digit “2” becomes “10” in binary number and “1” digit “6” becomes “110 (B (B) ). Therefore, “0010/0110 (B)” is stored in the address “F 285 (H)” storing the advantageous section ratio. "/" Indicates the boundary between the upper 4 bits and the lower 4 bits. By storing in this way, the value of the tens of the ratio can be obtained immediately from the upper 4 bits, and the value of the one's digit of the ratio can be obtained immediately from the lower 4 bits. Note that “26 (D)” is “00011010 (B)” in binary notation, but in order to obtain the tens place of the ratio based on this value, it is necessary to perform a predetermined operation. On the other hand, if the upper 4 bits are stored as the tens and the lower 4 bits are stored as the 1st as described above, “10 (B)” of the upper 4 bits is displayed at the time of interrupt processing to display the ratio The segment data can be obtained immediately, as shown in FIG.

In FIG. 183, the calculation result buffer of the address “F28A (H)” is a storage area for temporarily storing the calculation result at the time of the ratio calculation process (S_CAL_SET) described later.
The count upper limit flag of the address "F28B (H)" is the total game number counter (address "F26D (H)" to "F26F (H)") or the total payout number (total) counter (address "F27C (H)" This flag is turned on when the storage capacity of “F 27 E (H)” is the upper limit value (3 bytes full, ie, “FF FFFF (H)”). Of 1 byte (8 bits) data, the "D0" bit is assigned to the upper limit flag of the number of games, and the "D1" bit is assigned to the upper limit flag of the number of payouts. The "D2" to "D7" bits are unused in the twenty-sixth embodiment. For example, when the total game number counter has reached the count upper limit value, the value of the count upper limit flag is "00000001 (B)".

The payout number upper limit buffer of the address “F28C (H)” is 3 bytes full after the addition when the number of payouts in the game is added to the total payout (cumulative) counter and exceeds 3 bytes full. Is a storage area for storing the value of.
For example, when the total payout (total) counter value before payout in the game is "FFFFFE (H)" and the payout number in the game is "8 (H)", the above counter value is "8 (H)". When adding "), a digit overflow will occur. Therefore, a value for full 3 bytes is calculated so as not to cause overflow of the total payout (total) counter value, and the calculation result is stored in the payout number upper limit buffer.
In the above example, since “FFFFFE (H)” + “1 (H)” = “FFFFFF (H)”, “1 (H)” is stored in the payout number upper limit buffer.

The specific method for calculating the payout number upper limit buffer value is as follows.
(1) In the above example, “8 (H)” is added to “FFFFFE (H)”. As a result, an overflow occurs (zero flag = "1").
(2) When digit overflow occurs (zero flag = "1"), "2 (H)" is subtracted from the number of payouts in the game "8 (H)" to obtain "6 (H)". This value is the value after overflow (FFFFFE (H) + 8 (H) = 6 (H)).
(3) Add “1 (H)” to “6 (H)” to obtain “7 (H)”.
(4) Subtract "7 (H)" obtained in (3) from the number of payouts in the game "8 (H)". As a result, it becomes "1 (H)". This “1 (H)” is the payout number upper limit buffer value.
Therefore, "FFFFFE (H)" + "1 (H)" = "FFFFFF (H)"
It becomes.
In addition, even if the number of payouts in the game is added to the total payout (total) counter, if the 3-byte full is not exceeded, the number of payouts in the game is stored in the payout number upper limit buffer. For example, in the case where the number of payouts in the game is "8 (H)" when the number does not exceed 3 bytes full, "8 (H)" is stored in the payout number upper limit buffer.

The blinking request flag of the address “F28D (H)” is a flag for specifying a target that satisfies the blinking display condition when displaying the identification segment and the ratio segment.
FIG. 184 is a diagram illustrating a blinking display condition of the identification segment and the ratio segment.
As shown in FIG. 184, in the identification segment, it blinks depending on whether the total number of games is less than “6000” or less than “175000”. Specifically, with regard to the advantageous section ratio, the continuous character ratio (total), and the character ratio (total), when the total number of games (value stored in the total number of games counter) is less than "175000" , Control to blink the identification segment. In addition, with regard to the continuous character ratio (6000 times) and the character ratio (6000 times), when the total number of games (value stored in the total game number counter) is less than "6000", the identification segment Control to blink.

The identification segments of the continuous character ratio (6000 times) and the character ratio (6000 times) are displayed in blinks, although these ratios are originally among the ratios of 6000 times, the game with less than 6000 times When the ratio is calculated by the number of times, it blinks to indicate that.
Similarly, it is essential to blink the identification segment of the advantageous segment ratio, the continuous character ratio (total), and the character ratio (total), because these ratios are originally between 175000 games (to reduce variation) Although it is desirable that the ratio is the ratio in the case of the ratio calculated by the number of games in less than 175,000 games, it blinks to indicate that.

Furthermore, with regard to the advantageous section ratio and the character item ratio (both 6,000 times and the total), the value is displayed in a blinking manner when the displayed value is "70" or more. Furthermore, with regard to the continuous character product ratio (6000 times, both cumulative), it blinks when the displayed value is "60" or more.
In the slot machine of this embodiment, the advantageous section ratio and the character ratio are designed to be less than 70%, and the continuous character ratio is set to be less than 60%. It is set so that when the measured value does not fall within the range of the design value, it is notified by a blinking display.

Description is returned to FIG. As shown in FIG. 183, in the blink request flag, the D0 bit corresponds to the advantageous section ratio blink flag, the D1 bit corresponds to the continuous character ratio (6000 times) blink flag, ..., and the D6 bit corresponds to the 175000 blink flag. There is.
For example, when the calculated advantageous section ratio is "70" or more, the D0 bit of the blink request flag is "1". Also, when the calculated continuous combination rate (6000 times) is "70" or more, the D1 bit of the blink request flag becomes "1". Furthermore, when the total game number counter value is less than "6000", the D5 bit is "1", and when the total game number counter value is less than "175000", the D6 bit is "1".
For example, when the total number of games is less than "175000" (provided that it is "6000" or more) and the advantageous section ratio is "70"% or more, the value of the blink request flag is " 01000001 (B) ”, and in FIG. 181, when the display order is“ 1 ”, both the identification segment and the ratio segment are to be blinked.

The ratio display number of the address "F28E (H)" is a storage area for storing the ratio number displayed in the interrupt process. Here, the “display number” indicates the display order shown in FIG. 181. For example, when the ratio to be displayed in the interrupt process is the advantageous section ratio, “1 (H)” is stored in the ratio display number. Be done.
The blinking switching flag of the address "F28F (H)" is a flag for determining which time it is on or off when the identification segment or the ratio segment is displayed in a blinking manner during the interrupt processing.
In the present embodiment, when blinking and displaying, it is set to repeat lighting and extinguishing about every 0.3 seconds. Then, the blinking switching flag is "0" (value indicating lighting) for about 0.3 seconds while light is on, and the blinking switching flag is "1" (value indicating light off) for about 0.3 seconds while light is off. It is set to be

The display switching time of the address “F290 (H)” is a counter that counts approximately 5 seconds which is a time for displaying one ratio, and is a counter that updates “1” each time interrupt processing is performed.
In this embodiment, the advantageous section ratio display (about 5 seconds) → the utility continuous ratio (6000 times) display (about 5 seconds) → ... → the feature ratio (total) (approximately 5 seconds) → the advantageous section ratio display (About 5 seconds) → ... is displayed repeatedly. Therefore, the display switching time is stored in order to determine whether approximately 5 seconds have elapsed, that is, whether or not the switching time of the ratio display content has been reached.
The blinking switching time of the address "F292 (H)" is a counter that counts about 0.3 seconds when displaying the identification segment or the ratio segment in a blinking manner as described above, each time interrupt processing is performed once. Is a counter that updates "1".

Here, the display switching time and the blinking switching time will be described.
When the display switching time is 5.0 seconds and the blinking switching time is 0.3 seconds, the blinking cycle is 0.6 seconds. However, multiplying "0.6" by a natural number does not result in "5.0". For example, it is assumed that the display of any ratio is started, the count of 5.0 seconds is started, and the count of 0.3 seconds is started. In this case, the elapsed time when the blink cycle (0.6 seconds) is eight times is 4.8 seconds. Therefore, when it shifts to lighting next, since it will reach 5.0 seconds after progress for 0.2 seconds, display switching time will be satisfied and it will switch to the next ratio display. Therefore, the last lighting time is 0.2 seconds. In this manner, when the display switching time does not become when the flashing cycle is multiplied by a natural number, the light may be turned on or off for a moment immediately before the display switching time is reached.
Therefore, in the present embodiment, the display switching time is set by multiplying the blink cycle by a natural number.
As the precondition, it is assumed that a deviation of ± 10% or less is allowed in 5.0 seconds which is the display switching time. Similarly, it is assumed that a deviation of ± 10% or less is allowed for the blinking cycle of 0.6 seconds.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display switching time and the blinking display time are counted using the number of interrupts. The interrupt time is “2.235” ms as described in the first embodiment.
In the above, assuming that the cycle of display switching time is T, the blinking switching time is S (thus, the blinking cycle is “2 × S”), and the natural number is “n”,
T = 2 × n × S
It is sufficient if
At this time,
T = 2.235 ms × 2144 = 4791.84 ms
S = 2.235 ms × 134 = 299.49 ms
If so, all are in the range of ± 10%.
Also, 134 × 16 = 2144
And “n” is a natural number.

As described above, “2144” is set as the initial value for the display switching time, “1” is subtracted for each interrupt, and when it is “0”, it is determined that the display switching time has been reached. If it is determined that the display switching time is "0", an initial value "2144" is set at the time of the interrupt processing. As a result, the display switching time circulates “0” to “2144”.
Similarly, "134" is set as the initial value for the blink switching time, "1" is subtracted for each interrupt, and when it is "0", the blink switching time (switching from light on to light off) It is determined that the time, or the time to switch from off to on) has been reached. When it is determined that the blinking switching time is "0", an initial value "134" is set at the time of the interrupt processing. As a result, the display switching time circulates from "0" to "134".
Further, as described above, since “n = 16”, the display switching time is reached when the blinking cycle becomes 8 cycles (2 × n).
Furthermore, when any ratio display is started, when the ratio display satisfies the blinking condition, it is started from lighting.
More specifically, for example, when the display is started from the advantageous section ratio of the ratio display number "1", and at least one of the identification segment or the ratio segment of the advantageous section ratio satisfies the blinking display, the following flow is performed.

(1) The display of the advantageous section ratio is started, and the lighting is started (at this point, the blinking switching flag is "0" (lighting). Further, at the start of display of the advantageous section ratio, the counter value of the display switching time is the initial value "2144", and the count value of the blinking switching time is the initial value "134".
(2) When it is determined that the count value of the blinking switching time is "0", an initial value "134" is set as the blinking switching time at the time of the interrupt processing. Further, the blinking switching flag is updated from “0” (lighting) to “1” (lighting off).

(3) After that, when it is determined that the count value of the blinking switching time is “0”, an initial value “134” is set as the blinking switching time at the time of the interrupt processing. Further, the blinking switching flag is updated from "1" (unlit) to "0" (lit).
(4) If it is determined that the count value of the display switching time is "0", an initial value "2144" is set as the display switching time at the time of the interrupt processing. Further, the initial value "134" is set as the count value of the blinking switching time, and the blinking switching flag is updated from "1" (unlit) to "0" (lit). Further, the ratio display number is updated from “1” to “2”.
(5) In the next interrupt process, display of the continuous character ratio (6000 times) of the ratio display number "2" is started. In addition, when it has the identification segment or ratio segment satisfying the blinking display condition, it starts from lighting.

Subsequently, information processing by the main control board 50 (main CPU 55) in the twenty-sixth embodiment will be described based on a flowchart.
The flowchart in the twenty-sixth embodiment consists of the following contents.
Figure 185: Program start (M_PRG_START)
Figure 186: Configuration change process (M_RANK_SET)
Fig. 187: Power recovery process (M_POWER_ON)
Figure 188: Main processing (M_MAIN)
Fig. 189: (a) Update the number of dispensed sheets, (b) Wait for interrupt (C_INTR_WAIT)
Figure 190: Interrupt processing (I_INTR)
Figure 191: Rate set process (S_RATE_SET)
Figure 192: Count upper limit check (S_LIMIT_CHK)
Figure 193: Number of Games Count (S_GAME_CNT)
Figure 194: Counting up (S_CNT_UP)
Figure 195: Number of advantageous section game count (S_ATGAME_CNT)
Figure 196: Disbursed sheet count (S_PAYOUT_CNT)
Figure 197: Set amount for payout (S_PAYOUT_SET)
Figure 198: Ring buffer set (S_RINGADR_SET)
Fig. 199: Number-of-features payout counter (S_BNSPAY_CNT)
Figure 200: Continuous role product payout number count (S_RBPAY_CNT)
Figure 202: Ratio calculation process (S_CAL_SET)
Figure 203: Set of calculated values (S_VALUE_SET)
Figure 204: Ratio calculation execution (S_CAL_EXE)
Figure 205: Ring buffer number update (S_RINGNO_SET)
Figure 206: Ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY)
Figure 207: Flash request flag generation (S_LED_FLASH)
Figure 209: Ratio display timer update (S_RATE_TIME)
Figure 210: Ratio display process (S_LED_OUT)
Further, in the following description, “data (value) stored in a register” is abbreviated as “register value”.

FIG. 185 is a flowchart showing processing (M_PRG_START) when the main control board 50 starts a program.
In FIG. 185, when the program is started in step S2101, the main control board 50 initializes a register in the next step S2102. Specifically, for example, the setting of the communication speed of the serial communication circuit provided in the main CPU 55, the setting of the type of interrupt (for example, setting to a maskable interrupt, etc.) Setting (eg, setting to even parity, etc.). In other words, initial values necessary for the slot machine 10 to operate normally are set in various registers.

  Next, in step S2103, the main control board 50 determines whether the power-off process completion flag is a normal value. In the present embodiment, the power-off execution processing flag is stored at the time of power-off. The power-off execution processing flag is a flag for determining whether or not the previous power-off was normally performed when the power is turned on. If it is determined that the power-off execution processing flag is a normal value, the process proceeds to step S2104. If it is determined that the power-off execution process flag is not a normal value, the process proceeds to step S2106.

In step S2104, calculation of the checksum of RWM 53 is executed. Specifically, the checksum calculation of the same range (for example, a work area used by the program, an unused area, and a stack area) of the RWM 53 performed at the time of the power-off process is performed. Here, in step S2104, 1-byte data stored in the RWM 53 is added.
In step S2105, it is determined whether the range of the RWM 53 for calculating the checksum has been completed. Specifically, the next address is specified from the address of the RWM 53 for which the current checksum has been calculated, and it is determined whether the next address is the address for calculating the checksum. If it is determined that the calculation of the checksum has not been completed, the process returns to step S2104 and continues. On the other hand, if it is determined that the range of the RWM 53 for calculating the checksum has been completed, the process proceeds to step S2106.

Further, also in the subsequent processing, when initializing data stored in a plurality of ranges (addresses) of the RWM 53, in the present embodiment, the same processing is executed within the range of the designated RWM 53.
If it is determined in step S2103 that the power-off execution processing flag is not a normal value, an abnormal value is set as power-off recovery data without executing the checksum calculation of the RWM 53.

  In step S2106, the main control board 50 stores the power failure recovery data in a predetermined register (for example, the B register). Here, when it is determined that the power-off execution processing flag is a normal value, and it is determined that the checksum calculation (full range) of the RWM 53 has ended normally, the normal value is stored as the power-off recovery data. On the other hand, when the power-off execution processing flag is an abnormal value (when “No” in step S2103), or when it is determined that there is an abnormality in the checksum calculation (full range) of RWM 53 in step S2104, the power-off An abnormal value is stored as return data.

  In next step S2107, level data of a predetermined input port is stored in a predetermined register (for example, an A register). Next, proceeding to step S2108, it is determined based on the level data of the predetermined input port whether or not the designated switch is on. Here, in the present embodiment, the “designated switch” is a signal of the door switch 15, a signal of the setting door switch (when the setting door switch is provided), and a signal of the setting key switch 12 among the predetermined input ports. It is one.

Then, the signal of the door switch 15 is on (the front cover (chassis) is open), the signal of the setting door switch is on (the setting door is open), and the setting key switch 12 The setting change is permitted only when the signal of is on (when the setting key is inserted). When all three designated switches are on, it is possible to shift to setting change processing in step S2112, but when at least one designated switch is not on, it is not permitted to shift to setting changing processing in step S2112. .
That is, although the signal of the door switch 15 is off (the front cover is closed) or the signal of the setting door switch is off (the setting door is closed), Since the signal can not be turned on and there is a high possibility of fraud, the transition to the setting change process is not permitted.

Therefore, when it is determined in step S2108 that all designation switches are on, the process proceeds to step S2109. When it is determined that the all designation switches are not on, the process proceeds to step S2111.
In step S2109, the main control board 50 determines whether the power failure recovery data is abnormal. The power failure recovery data is data stored in the register in step S2106.

If it is determined that the power failure recovery data is abnormal, the process proceeds to the setting change processing (M_RANK_SET) of step S2112. If it is determined that the data is not abnormal, the process proceeds to step S2110. In step S2110, it is determined whether the setting change impossible flag is on. Here, the setting change impossible flag is one of the data stored in the RWM 53, and is a flag which is disabled between the role lottery process (step S2180) and the game end check process (step S2196) described later. is there. If the setting change impossible flag is on, the process proceeds to step S2111. If the setting change impossible flag is not on, the process proceeds to the setting change process (M_RANK_SET) of step S2112.
Although the setting change impossible flag is provided in the present embodiment, the setting change impossible flag may not be provided if the setting change is always possible. In that case, the process corresponding to step S2110 is unnecessary.
Further, in the twenty-seventh embodiment (2) (FIG. 216) described later, the setting change flag which is turned on when the setting change is possible is provided, but such a flag may be used.

  In step S2111, the main control board 50 determines whether the power failure recovery data has a normal value. This process is equivalent to step S2109. If it is determined that the power failure recovery data is a normal value, the process proceeds to step S2113 to perform power recovery processing (M_POWER_ON). On the other hand, when it is determined that the power failure recovery data is not a normal value, an “E1” error occurs, and the process proceeds to step S2114 to perform recovery impossible error processing 1 (SS_ERROR_STOP1; FIG. 136).

FIG. 186 is a flowchart showing setting change processing (M_RANK_SET) in step S2112.
First, in step S2121, the "predetermined range" is stored in the register as an initialization range within the use area of the RWM 53 ("F000 (H)" to "F1 FF (H)" in FIG. 124). Here, the “predetermined range” is an initialization range when it is determined that the power-off process has been normally executed, setting value data (address “F000 (H)”), gaming state (for example, RT state), An initialization range in which a flag (address "F010 (H)" or the like) relating to the part drawing is not initialized is set as a "predetermined range".

Next, in step S2122, the main control board 50 determines whether or not the power failure recovery data (the value stored in step S2106) is a normal value. If it is determined that the power failure recovery data is a normal value, the process proceeds to step S2124, and the storage of the "predetermined range" in step S2121 is maintained. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2122 that the power failure recovery data is not a normal value, the process proceeds to step S2123.
In step S2123, the main control board 50 stores the “specific range” in the register as the initialization range in the use area of the RWM 53. Here, the “specific range” is an initialization range when it is determined that the power supply interruption is not normal, and the entire range within the use area including the setting value data (address “F000 (H)”) is the initialization range. Set

  Then, in step S2124, initialization of the predetermined range set in step S2121 or the specific range set in step S2123 (within the use area of the RWM 53) is started. In the next step S2125, it is determined whether the initialization started in step S2124 is completed. If it is determined that the initialization is completed, the process proceeds to step S2126.

  In step S2126, the AF register (A register and F register (flag register)) is saved. Here, the purpose of saving the AF register is to originally save the F (flag) register here, but for convenience of the instruction, the AF register is saved. Then, the process proceeds to step S2127, and a predetermined range is stored as an initialization range outside the use area of RWM 53 (after “F200 (H)” in FIG. 124). Here, the "predetermined range" is an initialization range when it is determined that the power-off process is normally executed, and for example, the address "F28E (H)" or later, or "F293 (H)" or the like (initialization) The range is different depending on the specification etc., and is not constant.

In the next step S2128, as in step S2122, it is determined whether the power failure recovery data (the value stored in step S2106) is a normal value. If it is determined that the power failure recovery data is a normal value, the process proceeds to step S2130, and the storage of the "predetermined range" in step S2127 is maintained. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2128 that the power failure recovery data is not a normal value, the process proceeds to step S2129.
In step S2129, the main control board 50 stores the “specific range” in the register as an initialization range outside the use area of the RWM 53. Here, the “specific range” is an initialization range when it is determined that the power-off is not normal, and the entire range outside the use area after the address “F200 (H)” is set as the initialization range. Therefore, in this case, initialization is performed including the ring buffer and the like.
In step S2130, initialization of the predetermined range set in step S2127 or the specific range set in step S2129 (outside of the use area of the RWM 53) is started.

In the next step S2131, it is determined whether the initialization started in step S2130 is finished. If it is determined that the initialization is completed, the process proceeds to step S2132.
In step S2132, the AF register saved in step S2126 is restored. In the next step S2133, the activation setting of the interrupt processing is performed. Here, various registers corresponding to the interrupt processing designated in step S2102 are set. In the present embodiment, since timer interrupt processing is used as the interrupt processing, processing for setting a timer interrupt cycle (in the present embodiment, “2.235 ms”) or the like corresponds. Then, the interrupt process is executed after the process of step S2133. In other words, interrupt processing is not executed before “interrupt activation”.
In the next step S2134, an output request is set at the start of the setting change. This process is a process of setting (storing) a control command to be transmitted to the sub control board 80 in a register in order to notify the sub control board 80 that the setting change process is to be started.

Although “output request set” is also executed in the process described below, it means a process of setting a control command to be sent to the sub control board 80 as in step S2134. . Moreover, the control command here does not mean only the command to be actually transmitted, but also means the command that is the source of the command to be actually transmitted.
Next, in step S2135, the main control board 50 executes control command set 1. This process is a process of storing a control command to be transmitted to the sub control board 80 in the control command buffer (RWM 53).

  Next, proceeding to step S2136, the main control board 50 stores it in a BC register (a pair register consisting of a B register consisting of 8-bit 1-byte data and a C register) as a register for setting the standby time. In the present embodiment, the number of interrupts “224” (about 500 ms) is set as the standby time at the start of the setting change. Next, proceeding to step S2137, a 2-byte time wait process (wait process) for starting setting change is executed. In the present embodiment, the CPU waits until the number of interrupts “224” is counted (“1” is subtracted for each number of interrupts and the number of interrupts set is “0”). This waiting is also called delaying processing or waiting processing because it does not advance the main processing. During the waiting time (waiting for 2 bytes), the main process is prevented from proceeding, but the interrupt process is executed.

  As described above, execution of the 2-byte time wait process (wait process) in step S2137 is performed while the RWM 53 initialization process on the main control board 50 side is completed in a relatively short time, while the sub control board 80 side is executed. Because it takes time to initialize the RWM 83, the main control board 50 executes a 2-byte time waiting process. In particular, on the side of the main control board 50, it is not possible to know whether or not the initialization processing has been completed on the side of the sub control board 80.

Therefore, when the sub control board 80 side is still in the process of initialization, the initialization is already completed on the main control board 50 side, and the process proceeds further, and the progress of the control process of the main control board 50 and the sub control board It is possible to prevent the synchronization with the progress of the 80 control processes.
Also, after execution of the output request set and control command set 1 at the start of setting change, the sub control board 80 starts initialization of the RWM 83, but sets sufficient time for ending the initialization of the RWM 83 as wait time Do. As a result, after the initialization process of the RWM 83 is completed on the side of the sub control substrate 80, the process on step S2138 and subsequent steps is performed on the side of the main control substrate 50.

  The control command at the start of the setting change set in steps S2134 and S2135 is transmitted to the sub control board 80 even while waiting for the 2-byte time in step S2137. However, while the 2-byte time waiting process is being executed in step S2137, the process does not proceed to the process after step S2138 (the main process does not progress).

After completion of the 2-byte time waiting process in step S2137, the process advances to step S2138 to perform display control (lighting) of the LED whose setting is being changed. Thereby, when the interrupt process is executed after the process, it is possible to light the LEDs (setting value display LED 73 and acquisition number display LED 78) displayed during the setting change. In the present embodiment, the present setting value is displayed on the setting value display LED 73 based on the setting value data, and the value of display data is updated to display “88” on the acquired number display LED 78 (RWM 53 A process of storing data for displaying "88" in the acquired number data is executed.
Note that the display data to be displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 is initialized in step S2124, so that it is “0” before the update.

Next, proceeding to step S2139, an interrupt waiting process (C_INTR_WAIT) is executed. This process is a process of waiting until one interruption time (2.235 ms) elapses. The reason for providing this process will be described later. Further, the details of this process will be described later (FIG. 189 (b)). Then, after one interruption time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S2140.
In step S2140, it is determined whether the operation of the setting switch 13 has been detected. Here, by determining the rising data of the input port including the setting switch 13, it is determined whether the setting key switch 13 is turned on. If it is determined that the operation of the setting switch 13 has been detected, the process proceeds to step S2141, and if it is determined that the operation of the setting switch 13 is not detected, the process proceeds to step S214.
In step S2141, the setting value data is updated. Specifically, the setting value data (address “F000 (H)”) of RWM 53 is stored (updated). In addition, when the interrupt processing is executed after the setting value data is updated, the updated value is displayed on the setting value display LED 73.
The relationship between the operation of the setting switch 13 and the set value is the same as that described in the twenty-fifth embodiment.

In the next step S2142, it is determined whether the operation of the start switch 41 has been detected. In the present embodiment, when the start switch 41 is operated during the setting change, the set value at that time is decided.
If it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S2143. If it is determined that the start switch 41 has not been operated, the process returns to step S2139.

In the above process, step S2139 (waiting for interrupt) is provided to clear the rising data of the setting switch 13.
For example, when the process of step S2139 is not provided, if it is determined in step S2140 that the rising data of the setting switch 13 is on, the setting value data is updated in step S2141 and the start switch 41 is on in the next step S2142. If it is not determined, the process proceeds to step S2140, and it is determined whether the rising data of the setting switch 13 is on.

  If it is determined in step S2140 that the interrupt processing is performed even once, the rising data of the setting switch 13 is turned off. However, until the interrupt processing is executed, it is determined in step S2140 that the rising data of the setting switch 13 is on. As a result, even if the setting switch 13 is operated once, the setting value data continues to increase by "2" or more. Therefore, in step S2139, interrupt waiting processing is executed.

In step S2143, it is determined whether the setting key switch 12 has been turned off. If it is determined that the setting key switch 12 is turned off, the process advances to step S2144 to perform LED display control (turn off) after the setting change is completed. Specifically, first, the set value display LED 73 is turned off. Here, the LED display request flag described in the twentieth embodiment and the like is changed to a value in the middle. Thereby, the setting value display LED 73 (digit 5) does not light up (is turned off) even if the interrupt process is executed thereafter. Second, the storage number display LED 76 and the acquisition number display LED 78 display a normal display. Here, in order to display "00" on the storage number display LED 76 and the acquisition number display LED 78, processing for updating the values of the storage sheet data and the acquisition sheet data of the RWM 53 is executed.
Thus, when the interrupt process is executed after the process, “00” is displayed on the storage number display LED 76 and the acquisition number display LED 78. Note that, instead of displaying “00”, control may be performed so that the storage number display LED 76 and the acquisition number display LED 78 are turned off.

  Next, in step S2145, as in step S2134, an output request is set at the end of the setting change. This process ends the setting change process, and a control command for notifying the sub control board 80 side of the determined set value (specifically, the set value data stored in the address "F000 (H)"). Is a process of setting Next, in step S2146, the main control board 50 executes the control command set 1 as in step S2135. Then, the process advances to step S2147 to shift to main processing (M_MAIN).

FIG. 187 is a flowchart showing the power supply recovery process (M_POWER_ON) of step S2113 in FIG. 185.
First, in step S2151, the stack pointer (SP register) is restored. Here, the stack pointer is an area (stack area) of the RWM 53 that stores data (for example, a register value, instruction processing of main processing before interrupt processing, etc.) at the time of power interruption when a power interruption occurs. Among them, it indicates an area (address) to be stacked next.
In the next step S2152, the setting value data is read, and whether the range of the setting value data is a normal range (is it within the range of setting value 1 to setting value 6), in other words, “F000 (H)” It is determined whether the stored value is in the range of "0 (H)" to "5 (H)". If it is determined that the set value data is within the normal range, the process proceeds to step S2153. If it is determined that the set value data is not within the normal range, an "E6" error occurs, and the process proceeds to step S2164. Transition to FIG. 137).

In step S2153, the initialization range of the unused area in the used area of the RWM 53 is set in the register. Then, in the next step S2154, initialization of the RWM 53 in the range set in step S2153 is executed. Here, it is conceivable that values are stored in the RWM 53 due to noise or the like even in an unused area. If a value is stored in an unused area, it may lead to a fraudulent act, so initialize the unused area (usually once a day) when the power is turned on. There is.
In the next step S2155, it is determined whether the initialization of the RWM 53 (unused area in the used area) has ended, and if it is determined that the RWM 53 has ended, the process proceeds to step S2156.
In step S2156, the AF register is saved. This process is similar to the process of step S2126 described above. In the next step S2157, the initialization range of the unused area outside the used area of RWM 53 is set in the register. Then, in the next step S2158, initialization of the RWM 53 in the range set in step S2157 is executed.
In the next step S2159, it is determined whether or not the initialization of RWM 53 (unused area outside the used area) has been completed, and if it is determined that the process has been completed, the process proceeds to step S2160. In step S2160, the AF register is restored. This process is similar to the process of step S2132 described above.

In the next step S2161, the predetermined input port is read. This process is a process for updating each data (level data, rising data, falling data) of the input port before power-off to the latest data.
Next, proceeding to step S2162, an interrupt is activated. This process is, for example, a process of setting a timer interrupt cycle, and is similar to step S2133 described above.
Next, at step S2163, the power-off process completion flag is cleared, ie, set to "0". Then, the processing according to this flowchart is ended.

In the power supply recovery process described above, the interrupt process is activated (step S2162) after the reading of the input port is executed (step S2161). The reason is as follows.
In the present embodiment, the setting key is inserted during the game standby so that the setting value can be confirmed. Here, when the falling signal of the setting key switch 12 becomes “1”, it is determined that the confirmation of the set value is ended.
However, for example, it is assumed that the power is cut off during the setting confirmation, and the power switch is turned off (with the setting key removed) to start up the power switch.

In this case, since the fall signal of the setting key switch 12 becomes “1” based on the fact that the setting key switch 12 is turned off by the interrupt processing after the power failure and recovery, the falling of the setting key switch is detected. Ru.
As a result, the state at the time of power failure recovery and the state before the power failure are different. Specifically, while the fall signal of the setting key switch 12 is "0" in the state before the power failure, the fall signal of the setting key switch 12 becomes "1" at the time of the power failure recovery.
Thus, in order to avoid different states before and after power off, the value of RWM 53 of the predetermined input port is updated to the latest state when power is restored. Therefore, after executing a predetermined input port reading process, the interrupt process is started.

In the above program start process, setting change process, and power supply recovery process,
(1) In the program start process of FIG. 185, if “No” is determined in step S2103 (when the power-off process flag is an abnormal value) or there is an abnormality at the checksum in step S2104, step S2106 An abnormal value is stored as recovery data after the power is turned off. In this case, since “Yes” is determined in step S2109, the process proceeds to the setting change process (FIG. 186) in step S2112.
Then, in the setting change process of FIG. 186, since “No” is determined in step S2122 and step S2128, initialization of the whole range in the use area and out of the use area of RWM 53, ie, in FIGS. All data after F000 (H) and after F200 (H) are initialized.
In FIG. 183, up to “F293 (H)” is displayed as an address outside the use area of RWM 53, but in actuality, up to the address “F3FF (H)” is provided (see FIG. 124) When an unrecoverable error occurs, all the addresses “F000 (H)” to “F3FF (H)” are initialized.

(2) In the program start process, when it is determined that the power-off process completion flag is a normal value and the checksum is also performed normally, when the process proceeds to the setting change process, step S2122 and step in FIG. Since “Yes” is determined in S2128, the process proceeds to Step S2124 and Step S2130, respectively, and the designated range (within the use area and outside the use area) of the RWM 53 is initialized. When the setting change mode has risen normally, at least the address "F28E (H)" outside the use area is initialized. In particular, in the present embodiment, the addresses “F28A (H)” and thereafter (including “F28A (H)”) outside the use area are initialized.
Therefore, for example, when the character ratio (6000 times) corresponding to the ratio display number "3" is displayed before the setting change, the power is turned off, and when the mode is normally shifted to the setting change mode, the subsequent In the ratio display, it starts from the advantageous section ratio (first ratio) corresponding to the ratio display number "1", and the display switching time and the blinking switching time also start from the initial value.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, and when the mode is normally shifted to the setting change mode, RWM may not be initialized for the ratio display number, and RWM may be initialized for the display switching time and the blinking switching time. Furthermore, when the mode is normally shifted to the setting change mode, RWM initialization may not be performed for any of the ratio display number, the display switching time, and the blink switching time.
In other words, the information on the error system stored in the storage area of the RWM outside the use area and the stack pointer temporary storage buffer 2 are initialized, but the information on the lighting control of the management information display LED 74 is not initialized. It may be done.

  (3) In the program start process, when the power-off process completion flag is determined to be a normal value and the checksum is also performed normally, when the setting change process is not performed, the power recovery process in step S2113 ( Transition to FIG. In this case, if the set value is normal in step S2152 in FIG. 187, initialization of the RWM 53 (in-use area and out-of-use area) at normal power-on is executed. This initialization is a process of initializing the unused area of the RWM 53 as described above. Therefore, unlike when changing the setting, for example, when the character ratio (6000 times) corresponding to the ratio display number "3" is displayed, the power is turned off, and when the power is turned on again, that power In the ratio display after ON, it starts from the character ratio (6000 times) corresponding to the ratio display number "3", and the display switching time and the blinking switching time are also resumed from the time before the power failure.

The present invention is not limited to this, and RWM initialization may be performed including a ratio display number as in the setting change processing. Alternatively, RWM may not be initialized for the ratio display number, but RWM may be performed for the display switching time and the blinking switching time.
Furthermore, it is also possible not to perform processing to initialize the unused area of the RWM 53 when the power is turned on.
As described above, when the ratio display number is initialized, the ratio display number after the initialization is started from the advantageous interval ratio of the ratio display number "1". Further, when the display switching time is initialized, in the ratio display after the initialization, the display for 5.0 seconds is performed for the ratio to be displayed first. Furthermore, when the blinking switching time is initialized, when blinking display is performed in the ratio display after the initialization, it is started from lighting. Thus, information can be displayed on the management information display LED 74 without delay. It should be noted that, when the blinking switching time is initialized, it can be optionally set whether to start from lighting or starting from extinguishing (in the 26th embodiment, starting from lighting) Set as).

FIG. 188 is a flowchart showing main processing (M_MAIN) (step S2147 in FIG. 186) in the present embodiment. Then, during this main processing, interrupt processing (FIG. 190) described later is performed every 2.235 ms.
In FIG. 188, in step S2171, the stack pointer is set. The stack pointer, as described above, refers to the area of the RWM 53 that stores data (for example, a register value, instruction processing of main processing before interrupt processing, etc.) at the time of power interruption when power interruption occurs, The set of stack pointers is the process of setting the register value to the initial value in the area of the RWM 53.

In the next step S2172, a game start set process is performed. This process is a process of generating, updating, storing and the like of the operation state flag.
In the next step S2173, bet medals are read. This process is a process of reading how many medals are bet at the present time.
In the next step S2174, the presence or absence of a bet medal is determined based on the number of bets read in step S2173.

If it is determined in step S2174 that there is a bet medal, the process proceeds to step S2176. If it is determined that there is no bet medal, the process proceeds to step S2175 to perform medal insertion waiting processing, and then the process proceeds to step S2176. In the medal insertion waiting process of step S2175, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 12 is on. When the setting key switch 12 is on, processing such as shifting to a setting confirmation mode is performed.
In step S2176, management processing of the inserted medal is performed. This process is a process of determining whether or not the medal has been maintained, determining whether the settlement switch 46 has been operated, and the like.
In the next step S2177, software random number update processing is performed. This process is a process of updating (for example, adding “1” each) processing random numbers for processing (calculation processing) into random numbers (hard random numbers or built-in random numbers) used by the combination lottery means 61. The soft random numbers are 16-bit random numbers having a range of “0” to “65535 (D)”. Note that, as an update method, processing may be performed in which an interrupt count value (count value (variable) incremented at the time of interrupt) is added to a value before update.

  In the next step S2178, the main control board 50 determines whether the start switch 41 has been operated. If it is determined that the start switch 41 is operated, the process proceeds to step S2179. If it is determined that the start switch 41 is not operated, the process returns to step S2173. In addition, even when the start switch 41 is operated, if the bet number has not reached the defined number of the game, it is determined as "No" in step S2178.

In step S2179, the process at the time of start switch acceptance is performed. This process is a process of setting a setting change impossible flag, setting an output request at the start of reel rotation, setting the number of outputs for outputting a medal insertion signal as an external signal to a hall computer or the like.
In step S2180, the combination lottery means 61 executes a combination lottery at the timing when the start switch 41 is operated, that is, when the operation signal of the start switch 41 is received. Note that the random number value at the time of the role lottery is acquired in step S2179. Then, in step S2180, it is determined whether or not the acquired random number is a random number corresponding to any of the winning combinations using the combination lottery table.

In the next step S2181, reel rotation start preparation processing is executed. This processing is processing for determining whether or not the minimum game time (4.1 seconds) has elapsed.
Next, proceeding to step S2182, the reel control means 65 starts rotating the reels 31. In the next step S2183, the stop acceptance of the reel 31 is checked. Here, it is detected whether or not the operation signal of the stop switch 42 is received, and when the operation signal is received, the stop position of the reel 31 is determined based on the lottery result of the winning combination and the position of the reel 31 Control is performed to stop the reel 31 at the determined position.

  In the next step S2184, the reel control means 65 checks whether or not all the reels 31 have stopped, and proceeds to step S2185. In step S2185, it is determined whether all the reels 31 have stopped. If it is determined that all the reels 31 have stopped, the process proceeds to step S2186. If it is determined that all the reels 31 have not stopped, the process returns to step S2183. .

In step S2186, symbol display determination is performed. Here, it is determined by the prize determination means 66 whether or not the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination has been stopped on the activated line.
In the next step S2187, it is determined whether or not a display error of a symbol has occurred. If it is determined that a display error has occurred, the process proceeds to step S2199. If it is determined that a display error has not occurred, the process proceeds to step S2188. move on.
Here, since the stop of the reel 31 is executed based on the stop position determination table, normally, the reel 31 does not stop at a position other than the position defined by the stop position determination table. However, when a symbol (kicking symbol) that should not be originally displayed is displayed on the effective line as a result of display determination of symbols, it is determined that it is abnormal ("E5" error), and the process proceeds to step S2199. The non-returnable error processing 1 (FIG. 136) is executed.

In step S2187, it is determined that a display error has not occurred, and in step S2188, the medal payout number updating process is executed. The details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.
In the next step S2189, the payout means 67 pays out medals corresponding to the winning combination. Next, proceeding to step S2190, an interrupt waiting process (C_INTR_WAIT) is performed. This process is the same process as step S2139 in FIG. The details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG. In the next step S2191, interrupt processing is inhibited. By the processing of these steps S2190 and S2191, the interruption is prohibited immediately after the interruption.

In the next step S2192, the AF register is saved. This process is the same process as step S2156 of FIG. Next, proceeding to step S2193, a ratio setting process (S_RATE_SET) (FIG. 191 described later) is executed. This ratio setting process is a process executed outside the above-described use area (second program).
Although the ratio setting process will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 191, the process of updating various counter values, calculating a ratio, and the like is performed to display five types of ratios. Then, in step S2194, the AF register saved in step S2192 is restored, and in step S2195, the interrupt is permitted (restarted). In this way, when executing the ratio setting process, the AF register is saved, and the interrupt process is prohibited and then executed.
It should be noted that interrupt processing is prohibited during execution of ratio setting processing because programs in the usage area and programs outside the usage area are executed when interrupt processing is executed while a program outside the usage area is being executed in the main processing. Are mixed, and the processing becomes complicated.

Next, proceeding to step S2196, a game end check process is performed. In this process, a process of clearing a condition device (winning combination) flag is performed. Then, in step S2197, an output request set at the end of the game is set, and control command set 1 is performed in the next step S2198. These processes are similar to the processes in steps S2134 and S2135 in FIG. 186, and are processes for setting control command data for transmitting to the sub control board 80 that one game is over.
Then, when the process of step S2198 ends, the process returns to the main process (step S2147) again.

FIG. 189 (a) is a flowchart showing the medal payout number updating process in step S2188 of FIG.
First, in step S2211, medal payout number data is acquired. Since the winning combination (combination of symbols) can be specified based on the display determination in step S2186 in FIG. 188, the medal payout number corresponding to the combination of the symbols is read from the data table or the like.

  In the next step S2212, the medal payout number data is stored. This processing is processing for storing (storing) the medal payout number data acquired in step S2211 at the address "F040 (H)" (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) in the RWM 53. Since the value of the medal payout number data is “0” at the time of processing in step S 2211, processing for newly writing data is executed. For example, at the time of winning one winning combination, the data value is updated from "0" to "1". In addition, at the time of the non-winning of the combination which has medal payout, it is optional whether the process of step S2211 is performed. For example, there are a method of skipping step S2211 and a method of executing the process of step S2211 and writing "0".

In the next step S2213, the medal payout number data buffer is stored. This processing is processing for storing (storing) the medal payout number data acquired in step S2211 at the address “F041 (H)” (_BF_PAY_MEDAL) in the RWM 53. The value of the medal payout number data buffer is the value written in the previous game, so the number of medal payouts in the game (if there is no medal payout, “0”) is written (overwritten). .
Then, the process according to this flowchart is ended.

In the medal payout number updating process of FIG. 189 (a) described above, the value of the medal payout number data stored in step S2212 is subsequently paid out by the medal payout process by winning in step S2189 in FIG. Each time storage addition of 1 or payout (from hopper 35) of one medal is performed, "1" is subtracted by one, and it becomes "0" at the end of medal payout. That is, in FIG. 188, in step S2189, one medal payout process is continued when the medal payout number data is not “0”, and the medal payout process is ended when the medal payout number data becomes “0”. to decide.
On the other hand, the value of the medal payout number data buffer stored in step S2213 is maintained (unchanged) until the processing of step S2213 is performed in the next game, that is, the next game is updated.

  Therefore, in FIG. 188, in the ratio setting process of step S2193, calculation of the ratio based on the medal payout number of the game is executed, but after the processing of step S2189, the medal payout number data is “0”. The medal payout number of the game can not be read from the medal payout number data. Therefore, when only the medal payout number data is provided, it is necessary to execute the ratio setting process before the process of step S2188. On the other hand, by providing a medal payout number data buffer whose value is not subtracted even by medal payout, the medal payout number in the game can be read from the medal payout number data buffer even after the process of step S2188. The ratio setting process can be performed after the process of step S2188.

FIG. 189 (b) is a flow chart showing interrupt waiting (C_INTR_WAIT) in step S2139 of FIG. 186 and step S2190 of FIG.
First, in the interrupt counter value acquisition in step S2215, the interrupt counter value at the address "F001 (H)" is stored in the A register. Here, in the present embodiment, the interrupt counter value is stored as 16 bits in two addresses of “F001 (H)” and “F002 (H)”, but in step S2215, the lower eight bits of address “F001 ( H) stores the value stored in “A” in the A register.

  Next, proceeding to step S2216, it is determined whether the interrupt counter value (value of lower 8 bits stored in the address "F001 (H)") has changed. Specifically, the "A register value" is subtracted from the "interrupt counter value stored at address" F001 (H) "", and the operation result is "0" (zero flag = "1"). If it is, it is judged as "No". If it is determined that the change has been made, the processing of this flowchart is ended, and if it is determined that the change has not been made, the processing of step S2216 is continued.

In the main processing of FIG. 188, when waiting for interrupt is executed in step S2190, after execution of the interrupt, the process proceeds to step S2191. Then, the next interrupt timing does not come until 2.235 ms elapses from that moment. Here, in the twenty-sixth embodiment, after the interrupt is executed in step S2190, the processing time until the process proceeds to step S2195 is set to be less than 2.235 ms. Therefore, after the interrupt is executed in step S2190, the next interrupt is executed in step S2195 and subsequent steps.
With this setting, the interrupt timing after step S2195 does not change with respect to the interrupt timing until step S2190.
On the other hand, when 2.235 ms elapses from the time when the interrupt is executed in step S2190 before proceeding to step S2195, the interrupt timing comes in a state where the interrupt is prohibited. In this case, after the interrupt is permitted in step S2195, the interrupt is input. Therefore, the interrupt timing after step S2195 may change with respect to the interrupt timing until step S2190.
Also, in the main processing of FIG. 188, even when the process proceeds to step S2191 without executing the interrupt wait of step S2190, the interrupt timings up to now can come before the interrupt is permitted in step S2195. Because there is a possibility, similarly to the above, there is a possibility that the interrupt timing after step S2195 changes with respect to the interrupt timing before step S2191.

FIG. 190 is a flowchart of the interrupt process (I_INTR) according to the twenty-sixth embodiment. FIG. 190 is a modification of FIG. 133 shown in the twentieth embodiment.
In FIG. 190, the same steps as in FIG. 133 carry the same step numbers, and the explanation thereof is omitted. Moreover, different step numbers are assigned to processes different from those in FIG. 133, and the different step numbers are underlined.
190 is different from the flowchart of FIG. 133 in that the ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY) of step S2221 is provided. Others are the same as in the twentieth embodiment.
As shown in FIG. 190, in the twenty-sixth embodiment, after the external signal output of step S1416, the process proceeds to step S2221 to execute ratio display preparation processing. This process is the process of FIG. 206 described later, and is a process of generating a blink request flag, updating a timer related to ratio display, outputting segment data, and the like. The ratio display preparation process is a process executed outside the use area (second program) as in the ratio set process described above.

FIG. 191 is a flowchart showing a rate setting process (S_RATE_SET) in step S2193 of FIG.
First, in the stack pointer save of step S2231, the stack pointer (SP register) stored in the stack area is stored in the stack pointer temporary storage buffer 2 (address "F293 (H)").
As described above, since the ratio setting process is a program that is executed outside the use area, when executing a program outside the use area, the stack pointer is saved and the inside of the use area (first program) Return the stack pointer when returning to.

The “stack area” refers to an area of the RWM 53 which can save (store) various registers and the return address of the program. The stack area holds data in a last-in-first-out structure.
The "stack pointer" is one of the types of registers that hold data, and is also called an SP register. The stack pointer is for holding the address of the recently referenced position in the stack area. When data is stored in the stack area, the value of the stack pointer is configured to increase by that amount of data and to decrease by that amount when it is extracted.

For example, when the stack pointer indicates "F200 (H)", data is saved to "F1 FF (H)" in the stack area.
In particular, the processing in step S2231 stores a "return address" indicating which program should be executed after executing ratio setting processing in the stack area, and temporarily acquires the stack pointer as the stack pointer in order to obtain the return address. This is processing to be stored in the storage buffer 2.

In the next step S 2232, the stack pointer (outside the used area) is set. This process is a process of storing "F400 (H)" in the stack pointer (SP register).
It is the storage area of the RWM 53 outside the used area that can update the data stored in the RWM 53 by the processing by the program outside the used area.
In other words, the addresses are different between the stack area for saving registers and return addresses by processing by a program outside the use area and the stack area for saving registers and return addresses by processing by a program in the use area.
In the present embodiment, the stack area in the use area is set to the addresses “F1C0 (H)” to “F1FF (H)”. In addition, the stack area outside the use area is set to the addresses “F3EC (H)” to “F3FF (H)”.

In the next step S2233, the register is saved. This process is a process of saving various registers in the stack area (outside the used area).
Next, proceeding to step S2234, the upper address of RWM 53 is set in the Q register. This process is a process of storing "F2 (H)" in the Q register.
This process is performed because all the addresses of RWM 53 used by ratio setting process begin with "F2 (H)", so it is possible to simplify the update of the address of RWM 53 etc. and the instruction of the reading process. It is for.

In the next step S2235, a counter upper limit check (S_LIMIT_CHK) is performed. This process is a process shown in FIG. 192 described later, and the count values of the total game number counter (address “F26D (H)”) and the total payout (total) counter (address “F27C (H)”) reach the upper limit It is a process of checking whether or not it is done (the details will be described later).
Note that after this process is executed, the RWM 53 address (F28B (H)) stores the total payout (total) counter value or the count upper limit flag indicating whether the total game number counter value has reached the upper limit value. It is stored in the HL register.

Next, proceeding to step S2236, it is determined whether the number-of-games upper limit flag is on. This determination is “Yes” when the D0 bit of the data (count upper limit flag) stored in the address (F 28 B (H)) indicated by the HL register value is “1”. If it is determined that the number-of-games upper limit flag is on, the process proceeds to step S2239. If it is determined that the number-of-games upper limit flag is not on, the process proceeds to step S2237. That is, when it is determined that the number-of-games upper limit flag is on, the count process relating to the number of times played in steps S2237 and S2238 is not executed.
In step S2237, the game number count (S_GAME_CNT) (FIG. 193) is executed. In the next step S2238, the advantageous section game number counting (S_ATGAME_CNT) (FIG. 195) is executed. The details of the process of counting the number of times of playing and the counting of the number of times of advantageous section counting will be described later, but in the number of times of counting, a process of adding “1” to each game is executed. In addition, in the advantageous section game frequency count, a process of adding "1" to each game is executed during the advantageous section.

  In the next step S2239, the payout number of sheets counting (S_PAYOUT_CNT) (FIG. 196) is executed. Further, in the next step S2240, the number of paid-out characters (S_BNSPAY_CNT) (FIG. 199) is executed, and in the next step S2241, the number of continuously paid-out characters (S_RBPAY_CNT) (FIG. 200) is performed. These processes are processes for updating the total number of payouts, the number of payouts at the time of role operation, and the number of continuous role payouts, respectively, the details of which will be described later.

Next, proceeding to step S2242, the 400 game counter is updated. Here, the following processing is performed.
(1) The address (F210 (H)) of the 400 game counter is stored in the HL register. Specifically, "10 (H)" is stored in the L register, and data (F2 (H)) set in the Q register (described above) is stored in the H register.
(2) “1” is added to the data stored in the address (F 210 (H)) indicated by the HL register value.
Note that this addition is an addition that circulates "0" to "399 (D)", and when "399 (D)" is stored, for example, "1" becomes "0" when "1" is added. . As described above, the 400 game counter may be decremented.

Next, proceeding to step S2243, ratio calculation processing (S_CAL_SET) (FIG. 202) is executed. This process is a process of calculating the five ratios described above and storing the calculated ratio in a predetermined address of the RWM 53. Details of this process will be described later.
Next, proceeding to step S2244, ring buffer update (S_RINGNO_SET) (FIG. 205) is executed. This process is a process of judging whether 400 games have passed since the last update of the ring buffer number, and when it is judged that the game has passed, the ring buffer number is updated. Details of this process will be described later.

Next, proceeding to step S2245, the register is restored. This processing is processing for restoring the various registers saved in step S2233.
In the next step S2246, the stack pointer is returned. This processing is processing for storing the stack pointer saved in step S2231, that is, the data stored in the stack pointer temporary storage buffer 2 in the stack pointer (SP register). Then, the process according to this flowchart is ended.

FIG. 192 is a flowchart showing the count upper limit check (S_LIMIT_CHK) in step S2235 of FIG.
First, in step S2251, data for the number of repetitions and the count upper limit flag is set. This process is a process of storing “2 (H)” in the B register and storing “0” in the C register. The reason for storing “2 (H)” in the B register is to check the upper limit of the total number of games and the total payout (total) two counters in the count upper limit check, so the number of repetitions of steps S2253 to S2257 This is to set "2".

In step S2252, the address of RWM 53 of the total payout (cumulative) counter is set. This process is a process of storing "F27C (H)", which is the address of the total payout (total) counter, in the HL register.
As described above, the total payout (total) counter is composed of 3 bytes, and "F27C (H)" is the lower first byte (first digit) and "F27D (H)" is the lower 2 bytes. The second (second digit), “F 27 E (H)” stores the data of the first byte (third digit) of the upper byte. Then, in this step S2252, the address "F27C (H)" of the lower first byte is stored in the HL register.

Next, proceeding to step S2253, the lower 2 bytes of the target counter are acquired. Here, the following processing is performed.
(1) The data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in the E register.
(2) The result of adding “1” to the HL register value is taken as the HL register value.
(3) The data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in the D register.
(4) The result of adding "1" to the HL register value is taken as the HL register value.
By these processes, data of lower 2 bytes of the total payout (total) counter (repetition count "1") or the total game number counter (repetition count "2") is stored in the DE register.
Further, (4) according to the calculation result, the HL register stores the total payout (total) counter or the address at which the data of the upper first byte of the total game number counter is stored.

In the next step S 2254, the target counter upper 1 byte is acquired. This process is a process of storing data stored in the address indicated by the HL register value in the A register.
In the next step S2255, an upper limit value check is performed. Here, the following processing is performed.
(1) Add “1” to the DE register value, and use the result of the addition as the DE register value. As described above, since the lower 2 bytes of data are stored in the DE register, the carry flag is set to "1" when an overflow occurs when "1" is added.
(2) The result of adding the value of the carry flag to the A register value is stored in the A register. As a result of this operation, when an overflow of the A register occurs, the carry flag = "1". When the carry flag is "0" in the calculation result of (1), there is no change in the A register value.

In the next step S2256, the count upper limit flag data is updated. This process is a process of rotationally shifting the carry flag (CY) and the data stored in the C register to the left. Specifically, the value of the carry flag is a value of D0 bit, and the values of D0 to D6 bits up to that point are values of D1 to D7 bits, respectively.
Here is an example:
Example 1)
When carry flag = "0" and C register = "00000000 (B)"
C register = "00000000 (B)"
It becomes.
Example 2)
When carry flag = "0" and C register = "00000001 (B)"
C register = "00000010 (B)"
It becomes.
Example 3)
When carry flag = "1" and C register = "00000000 (B)"
C register = "00000001 (B)"
It becomes.
Example 4)
When carry flag = “1” and C register = “00000001 (B)”
C register = "00000011 (B)"
It becomes.

In the next step S2257, the address of RWM 53 of the total game number counter corresponding to the repeat number "2" is set. This process is a process of storing the address "F26D (H)" at which the data of the least significant digit is stored among the addresses of the total game number counter in the HL register.
Next, proceeding to step S2258, it is determined whether the number of repetitions has been completed. This process subtracts "1" from the B register value, and determines whether the B register value is "0". When it is "0", it is determined that the repetition has ended.
Since "2 (H)" is set as the B register value in the first step S2251, "No" is set in step S2258 for the first time, and the process returns to step S2253. As a result of this processing, the upper limit of the total payout (total) counter is checked at the first repetition count, and the upper limit of the total game number counter is checked at the second repetition count. In addition, also at the number of times of repetition "2", the address of RWM 53 of the total game number counter is set by step S2257. However, since the number of times of repetition "2" is "Yes" in the determination of step S2258, the upper limit of the total game number counter is not checked again.

If it is determined in step S2258 that the number of repetitions has ended, the process proceeds to step S2259. In step S2259, the count upper limit flag is stored. Here, the following processing is performed.
(1) The address (F28B (H)) of the count upper limit flag is stored in the HL register.
(2) The data stored in the C register is stored at the address indicated by the HL register value.
The data of the count upper limit flag is updated by this process.
When the D0 bit of the count upper limit flag is "1", it indicates that the total game number counter has reached the upper limit value.
Also, when the D1 bit of the count upper limit flag is "1", it indicates that the total payout (total) counter has reached the upper limit value.

FIG. 193 is a flowchart showing the game number count (S_GAME_CNT) in step S2237 in FIG.
First, in step S2271, the address of RWM 53 of the game number counter is set. This process is a process of storing the address (F26D (H)) at which the total game number counter is stored in the DE register.
In the next step S2272, an addition value "1" is set. This process is a process of storing "1" in the A register.

Next, proceeding to step S2273, count up (S_CNT_UP) is performed. This processing is not limited to the number-of-games counting according to this flowchart, but other counting processing (advantage zone game number-counting (S_ATGAME_CNT), payout number count (S_PAYOUT_CNT), payout number set (S_PAYOUT_SET), combination payout number count ( It is also used in S_BNSPAY_CNT) and continuous-service-parts payout number counting (S_RBPAY_CNT).
This count-up determines whether the count upper limit has been reached, and when it is determined that the upper limit has been reached, the upper limit buffer is generated (FIG. 194 described later). By the count-up of this step S 2273, the total game number counter value is incremented by “1”. Then, the process according to this flowchart is ended.

FIG. 194 is a flowchart showing count-up (S_CNT_UP) of step S2273 etc. of FIG.
This process is executed because the DE register stores the address of the RWM 53 to be added, and the A register stores the additional value "1", the medal payout number buffer, or the payout number upper limit buffer. The situation is
First, in step S2281, addition processing of lower 2 bytes is performed. Here, the following processing is performed.
(1) The data of the address indicated by the DE register value is stored in the C register.
(2) The data of the address indicated by the data obtained by adding "1" to the DE register value is stored in the B register.
Even if the process (2) is performed, the DE register value is the same value as in the case (1).
Also, the lower two bytes of data are stored in the BC register by the processes of (1) and (2).
(3) Add the A register value to the BC register value.
Here, the A register value differs depending on which module is called. When an overflow occurs due to this addition process, the carry flag becomes "1".
(4) The BC register value is stored at the address indicated by the DE register value.

Next, proceeding to step S2282, it is determined whether or not there is a carry. In this process, when the carry flag = “1” according to the calculation result of step S2281, it is determined that a carry is present. If it is determined that there is a carry, the process proceeds to step S2283. If it is determined that there is no carry, the processing according to this flowchart ends.
In step S2283, upper one byte addition processing is performed. This processing is processing for adding “1” to the data of the upper byte when the overflow occurs in “adding lower 2 bytes” in step S2281. Here, the following processing is performed.
(1) The value obtained by adding "1" to the DE register value is stored in the DE register.
(2) The value obtained by adding "1" to the DE register value is stored in the DE register.
That is, the DE register value becomes “+2” by the processes of (1) and (2).
In other words, of the three-byte data, data indicating the address at which the upper byte data is stored is stored in the DE register.
(3) “1” is added to the data of the address indicated by the data stored in the address indicated by the DE register value to update the data of the address.
When a digit overflow occurs due to this addition, the upper one byte value becomes “0” (FF (H) +1 (H) = 0 (H), zero flag = “1”).

  In the next step S2284, it is determined whether the count upper limit has been exceeded. Here, when the zero flag becomes “1” in step S2283 (when overflow occurs), it is determined that the count upper limit value is exceeded. If it is determined that the count upper limit has been exceeded, the process proceeds to step S2285. If it is determined that the count upper limit is not exceeded, the processing according to this flowchart is ended.

In addition, in count-up during the number-of-games count in FIG. 193, it is not determined in step S2284 that the count upper limit value is exceeded.
In count-up of the number-of-games count, "1" is added for each game until 3 bytes full is reached. Then, until “3 bytes full” is reached, “No” is determined in step S2284. Therefore, the processes after step S2285 are not executed.
Then, when the total game number counter value becomes 3 bytes full in the game number count in the game, in the ratio setting process of the next game (FIG. 191), the game number upper limit flag is saved in the count upper limit check of step S2235 Ru. Then, in the next step S2236, since it is determined that the game number upper limit flag is on, steps S2237 and S2238 are not executed.

In step S2285, the upper 1 byte is subtracted. This processing is processing for updating data of the address by subtracting “1” from the data stored in the address indicated by the DE register value.
That is, it is a process which performs "0"-"1" and memorize | stores "FF (H)."
In the next step S2286, a payout number upper limit buffer is generated.
Here, the “payout number upper limit buffer” is a storage area for storing a value to be added to the total payout (total).
An example will be described below.
Example 1)
When the total payout (total) is “000010 (H)” and the eight-piece winning combination is won (is paid out), “8 (H)” is added to the total payout (total) as well. Since “FF FFFF (H)” does not hold (3 bytes full), “8 (H)” is stored in the payout number upper limit buffer.
Example 2)
If the total payout (cumulative) is “FFFFFE (H)” and eight winning combinations are won (dispensed), adding “8 (H)” to the total payout (cumulative) gives “FFFFFF ( H) ". Specifically, a digit overflow occurs, resulting in "000006 (H)".
In such a case, “1 (H)” is stored in the payout number upper limit buffer so that the value after addition becomes “FFFFFF (H)”.

The payout number upper limit buffer generation executes the following processing.
(1) The value obtained by subtracting “1” from the DE register value is stored in the DE register.
(2) The value obtained by subtracting “1” from the DE register value is stored in the DE register.
By the processes of (1) and (2), the address of the least significant byte of data composed of 3 bytes is stored in the DE register.
(3) Add "1" to the C register value.
When the process of step S2286 is performed, it is determined that the count upper limit value is exceeded in step S2284, that is, the data composed of 3 bytes exceeds “FFFFFF (H)”. At this time, in the C register, values overflowing from “FF (H)” are stored in the C register by the calculation processing of step S 2281. A specific example is as follows.
Example 1)
When the A register value (for example, "08 (H)") is added when the C register value is "FE (H)", the C register value becomes "06 (H)". Then, by the processing, “1 (H)” is added to the C register value, so the C register value becomes “07 (H)”.
Example 2)
When the A register value (for example, "08 (H)") is added when the C register value is "F9 (H)", the C register value becomes "01 (H)". Then, the C register value becomes “02 (H)” because “1 (H)” is added to the C register value by the processing.

(4) The C register value is subtracted from the A register value, and the subtraction result is stored in the A register. Thereby, the A register value becomes data stored in the payout number upper limit buffer.
A specific example is as follows.
Example 1)
When the A register value is "08 (H)" and the C register value is "07 (H)", "01 (H)" is stored in the A register.
Example 2)
When the A register value is "08 (H)" and the C register value is "02 (H)", "06 (H)" is stored in the A register.

In the next step S2287, the lower 2-byte upper limit value is stored. Here, the following processing is performed.
(1) Store "FFFF (H)" in the BC register.
(2) The BC register value is stored at the address indicated by the DE register.
As a result of these processes, the data of RWM 53 formed of 3 bytes becomes "FFFFFF (H)".
Then, the process according to this flowchart is ended.

FIG. 195 is a flow chart showing the advantageous section game frequency count (S_ATGAME_CNT) of step S2238 in FIG.
First, in step S2291, it is determined whether or not an advantageous section is in progress. Here, when the address (F020 (H)) of the gaming section flag is stored in the DE register, and the bit (D0) corresponding to the advantageous section among the data stored in the address is determined to be “1”, , It is judged that it is in the advantageous section. If it is determined that it is in the advantageous section, the process proceeds to step S2292, and if it is determined that it is not in the advantageous section, the processing according to this flowchart is ended.

In addition to the above, as a method of determining whether or not an advantageous section is in progress, a method using an advantageous section counter (F024 (H)) can be considered.
As described above, the advantageous interval counter is composed of 2 bytes ("F024 (H)" and "F025 (H)"), and stores data of "0" to "1500 (D)".
Here, the advantageous segment counter is a counter updated at least after processing of the advantageous segment game frequency count, and may be either an addition method or a subtraction method.
At this time, when the advantageous section counter is not "0", it can be determined that the advantageous section is in progress.
In the addition method, the advantage zone counter is updated from “0” to “1” before the start switch 41 is operated in the next game of the game winning the advantageous section or the game winning the advantageous section. In addition, for the game during the advantageous section, every game, "1" is added. When the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, it is updated to "0" at the end of the game (initialization process).

In the subtraction method, the advantage zone counter is updated from “0” to “1500” before the start switch 41 is operated in the next game of the game winning the advantageous section or the game winning the advantageous section. Also, for the game during the advantageous section, every game, “1” is subtracted. When the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, it is updated to "0" at the end of the game (initialization process).
Furthermore, as described in the first embodiment, it can be determined from the lighting state of the advantageous section display LED 77 whether or not it is in the advantageous section, and therefore the advantageous section display LED 77 indicates lighting “1” / off “0”. It is also possible to judge from the value of the storage area storing data.

In step S2292, the RWM 53 address of the advantageous section game number counter is set. In this process, the address "F270" storing data of the lowermost digit of the advantageous section game number counter (F270 (H)) is stored in the DE register.
In the next step S2293, the above-described count up (S_CNT_UP) is performed.
In addition, when performing count-up, the additional value "1" set by the number-of-games count (S_GAME_CNT) is stored in the A register. By the count-up of this step S2293, the advantageous section game number counter value is incremented by "1". Then, the process according to this flowchart is ended.

FIG. 196 is a flow chart showing the payout number count (S_PAYOUT_CNT) in step S2239 in FIG.
At the time of execution of this flowchart, the address (F28B (H)) of the count upper limit flag is stored in the HL register.
First, in step S2301, it is determined whether the payout number upper limit flag is on. In this process, when the D1 bit of the data stored in the address (F 28 B (H)) indicated by the HL register value is “1”, it is determined that the payout number upper limit flag is on.
If it is determined that the payout number upper limit flag is on, the process proceeds to step S2305. If it is determined that the payout number upper limit flag is not on, the process proceeds to step S2302.

In step S2302, the address of the RWM 53 of the total payout (cumulative) counter is set. This process is a process of storing, in the DE register, an address (F27C (H)) at which data of the lowest digit of the address of the total payout (total) counter is stored.
In the next step S2303, a payout number set (S_PAYOUT_SET) is executed. This process is the process of FIG. 197 described later, and is a process of acquiring the number of payouts in the game and adding it to the total payout (total) counter. By this processing, the payout number or the payout number upper limit buffer value is added to the total payout (total) counter value.
Note that the A register value may fluctuate due to count-up (S_CNT_UP) while the number of payout sheets is set.
In the next step S2304, the payout number upper limit buffer is set. This process is a process of storing the A register value in the number-of-payouts upper limit buffer (F 28 C (H)). Here, in the process of step S 2303, even if the payout number in the game is added to the total payout (total) counter, if the total payout upper limit (3 bytes full) is not exceeded, the payout number in the game is payout The number limit is set in the buffer. On the other hand, when the payout number in the game is added to the total payout (total) counter and exceeds the upper limit of the total payout, an additional value for the total payout (total) counter value to be 3 bytes full is added to the payout number upper limit buffer set.

Next, proceeding to step S2305, the address of the RWM 53 of the total payout ring buffer is set. This process is a process of storing the address (F213 (H)) storing the lower digit data among the addresses of RWM 53 of the total payout ring buffer 0 in the DE register.
In the next step S2306, a ring buffer set (S_RINGNO_SET) is executed. This process is a process of FIG. 198 described later, and is a process of acquiring a ring buffer number and the like.

The flow then advances to step S2307 to set the RWM 53 address of the total payout (6000 times) counter. This process is a process of storing the address (F 273 (H)) storing the data of the lower digit among the addresses of the total payout (6000 times) counter in the DE register. Next, proceeding to step S2308, the count up (S_CNT_UP) described above is executed. By the process of step S2308, the A register value is added to the total payout (6000 times) counter value. The A register value here is the medal payout for the value (address “F041 (H)”) set in the payout number set (step S2333 in FIG. 198) in the ring buffer set in step S2306 (FIG. 198 described later). Number buffer value, for example, the number of payouts corresponding to the winning of the small winning combination when the small winning combination is won in the game.
Then, the process according to this flowchart is ended.

As apparent from FIG. 196, when the upper limit flag of the payout number is on, the total payout (total) counter is not updated, but the total payout (6000 times) counter is updated.
Similarly, in FIG. 199 to be described later, when the upper limit flag of the payout number is on, the bonus payout (total) counter is not updated, but the bonus payout (6000 times) counter is updated.
Furthermore, similarly, in FIG. 200 described later, when the upper limit flag of the payout number is ON, updating of the continuous winning combination payout (total) counter is not performed, but updating of the continuous winning combination payout (6000 times) counter is performed .

FIG. 197 is a flow chart showing the set number of payout sheets (S_PAYOUT_CNT) of step S2303 etc. in FIG.
First, in step S2321, the value of the medal payout number buffer is acquired. This process is a process of storing data stored in the medal payout number buffer (F041 (H)) in the A register.
Then, the process proceeds to step S2322 to execute count up (S_CNT_UP), and thereafter, the process according to the present flowchart ends.
Therefore, when the number of payout sheets is set in step S2303 during counting of the number of payout sheets in FIG. 196, the total payout (total) counter value is updated.

FIG. 198 is a flowchart showing a ring buffer set (S_RINGNO_SET) in step S2306 and the like of FIG.
At the time of execution of this flowchart, in the DE register, the address of the total payout ring buffer 0 (F213 (H)), the address of the continuous role payout ring buffer 0 (F231 (H)), or the address of the feature payout ring buffer 0 One of (F24F (H)) is stored.
First, in step S2331, the ring buffer number is acquired. This process is a process of acquiring data from the address (F 212 (H)) at which the ring buffer number is stored, and storing the data in the A register.

Next, proceeding to step S2332, the address of RWM 53 of the corresponding ring buffer is set. Here, the following processing is performed.
(1) The A register value and the A register value are added, and the result of the addition is stored in the A register. That is, the ring buffer number is doubled. The reason for doubling is that each ring buffer is composed of 2 bytes.
(2) Add the A register value to the DE register value, and store the result of the addition in the DE register. By this processing, the address of the corresponding ring buffer is stored in the DE register.
Therefore, the address of ring buffer 0 is first set, and the ring buffer number is used as an offset value to obtain the address of the corresponding ring buffer.

For example, when the data stored in the DE register is "F213 (H)" and the data stored in the ring buffer number is "8 (H)",
F 213 (H) + 8 (H) + 8 (H) = F 223 (H)
The address (F 223 (H)) of the RWM 53 corresponding to the total payout ring buffer 8 is stored in the DE register.
Next, proceeding to step S2333, the number of dispensed sheets (S_PAYOUT_SET) is set. This process corresponds to the process of FIG. 197 described above. With this payout number set, the payout number in the game is added to the corresponding ring buffer set in step S2332. Then, the process according to this flowchart is ended.

FIG. 199 is a flowchart showing the bonus game payout number count (S_BNSPAY_CNT) of step S2240 in FIG.
The address (F28B (H)) of the count upper limit flag is stored in the HL register when this processing is executed.
First, in step S2341, it is determined whether or not an accessory is in operation. Here, the following processing is performed.
(1) The data of the operation state flag (F010 (H)) is stored in the A register.
(2) The A register value is AND-operated with "00001000 (B)", and when it is "0", it is determined that a bonus is not in operation. In the present embodiment, only RB is provided as an accessory, so when RB is in operation (D3 bit is “1”), it is determined that an accessory is in operation, and other than that it is not in accessory operation. to decide.
If it is determined in step S2341 that a bonus is in operation, the process proceeds to step S2342, and if it is determined that a bonus is not in operation, it is not necessary to count (update) the number of payouts during bonus operation. End processing by.

In step S2342, it is determined whether the payout number upper limit flag is on. This process determines whether the address indicated by the HL register value (F28B (H)), that is, the D1 bit of the data stored in the address of the count upper limit flag is “0”, and it is not “0”. When it is determined, it is determined that the payout number upper limit flag is on.
If it is determined in step S2342 that the payout number upper limit flag is on, the process proceeds to step S2346. If it is determined not, the process proceeds to step S2343.
As described above, when it is determined in step S2342 that the payout number upper limit flag is not turned on, the processing proceeds to step S2343 and subsequent steps, the bonus payout (total) counter value is updated, and later-described step S2346 and later Proceeding to the process, the corresponding product delivery ring buffer value is updated. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2342 that the payout number upper limit flag is on, the combination payout (total) counter value is not updated, but the processing proceeds to step S2346 and subsequent steps, and the corresponding combination payout ring The buffer value is updated.

In step S2343, the address of the RWM 53 of the feature payout (cumulative) counter is set. In this process, the address "F282 (H)" at which the data of the least significant digit is stored in the address of the character product payout (total sum) counter is stored in the DE register.
In the next step S2344, a payout number upper limit buffer is set. This processing is processing for storing data stored in the payout number upper limit buffer (F 28 C (H)) in the A register.
Next, proceeding to step S2345, count up (S_CNT_UP) is executed. Here, the process shown in FIG. 194 is performed. By this processing, the role payout (cumulative) counter value is updated.
In the next step S2346, the address of the RWM 53 of the character delivery ring buffer is set. This process is a process of storing the address (F24F (H)) of the role delivery ring buffer 0 in the DE register.
Next, proceeding to step S2347, ring buffer set (S_RINGADR_SET) is performed. Here, the process shown in FIG. 198 is performed.
As a result, the value stored in the medal payout number buffer (F041 (H)) is added to the corresponding prize payout ring buffer.

Incidentally, the A register value after the ring buffer setting is completed becomes the value of the medal payout number buffer (F041 (H)).
The reason is that even if the count-up is performed, no carry is generated by the “lower 2-byte addition” process of step S2281 in FIG.
Specifically, since the address of one RWM 53 in the ring buffer can store 2-byte (0 to 65535) data, even if there are 15 payouts in all 400 games, "15 x 400 = 6000". This is because it does not exceed 2 bytes.

In the next step S2348, the address of the RWM 53 of the character payout (6000 times) counter is set. Here, the address (F279 (H)) of the least significant digit of the address of the item payout (6000 times) counter is stored in the DE register.
The flow advances to step S2349 to execute count up (S_CNT_UP). Incidentally, the A register value at the time of executing the count-up becomes the value of the medal payout number buffer (F041 (H)) as described in step S2347. Due to this count-up, the feature payout (6000 times) counter value is updated. Then, the process according to this flowchart is ended.

FIG. 200 is a flow chart showing the continuous character payout number counting (S_RBPAY_CNT) in step S2241 in FIG.
Note that the address (F28B (H)) of the count upper limit flag is stored in the HL register when this processing is executed.
While the process of FIG. 199 described above is a process for a prize, the process of FIG. 200 is a process for a continuous article and is a similar process.
First, in step S2361, it is determined whether RB is in operation. Here, the following processing is performed.
(1) The data of the operation state flag (F010 (H)) is stored in the A register.
(2) The A register value is ANDed with "00000100 (B)", and when it is "0", it is determined that RB is not in operation.

As described in step S2341 above, since the D3 bit of the operation state flag indicates the RB state, it is determined whether or not the continuous service is in operation by determining whether or not the bit is "1". Can be judged.
Further, "the number of consecutive payouts paid out" refers to "the number of payouts during RB operation" in the present embodiment, and also includes the RB operation time during 1 type BB game.
If it is determined that the RB is in operation, the process proceeds to step S2362. If it is determined that the RB is not in operation, the processing according to this flowchart is ended.

In step S2362, it is determined whether the payout number upper limit flag is on. Here, it is determined whether the address indicated by the HL register value (F28B (H)), that is, the D1 bit of the data stored in the address of the count upper limit flag is "0", and it is not "0". When it is determined, it is determined that the payout number upper limit flag is on.
If it is determined in step S2362 that the payout number upper limit flag is on, the process proceeds to step S2366. If it is determined not, the process proceeds to step S2363.
As described above, when it is determined in step S2362 that the payout number upper limit flag is not turned on, the processing proceeds to step S2363 and subsequent steps, and the successive product payout (total) counter value is updated, and step S2366 and later described later The corresponding continuous role delivery ring buffer value is updated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step S2362 that the payout number upper limit flag is on, the continuous product payout (cumulative) counter value is not updated, but the process proceeds to step S2366 and subsequent steps and the corresponding continuous product The payout ring buffer value is updated.

In step S2363, the address of the RWM 53 of the continuous product payout (cumulative) counter is set. Here, the address "F27F (H)" storing the lowest data of the addresses of the continuous winning product payout (total) counter is stored in the DE register.
In the next step S2364, the payout number upper limit buffer is set. Here, the data stored in the payout number upper limit buffer (F 28 C (H)) is stored in the A register. The A register value (disbursed number upper limit buffer value) is a value which is corrected so that the total paid out (cumulative) counter value does not exceed 3 bytes full as described above when it is the value of the number of paid out sheets itself. Have a case.
In the next step S2365, count up (S_CNT_UP) (processing of FIG. 194) is performed. By this processing, the continuous product payout (cumulative) counter value is updated.
In the next step S2366, the address of the RWM 53 of the continuous product delivery ring buffer is set. Here, the address (F 231 (H)) of the continuous prize delivery ring buffer 0 is stored in the DE register.

Next, proceeding to step S2367, ring buffer set (S_RINGADR_SET) is performed. As a result, the value stored in the medal payout number buffer (F041 (H)) is added to the corresponding serial winning item payout ring buffer.
The A register value after step S2367 is executed is the value stored in the medal payout number buffer (F041 (H)).
The reason is similar to that described above. However, even if the count-up process is executed, no carry is generated by the “lower 2-byte addition” process in step S2281 in FIG. is there. Since the address of one RWM 53 in the ring buffer can store 2-byte data, even if there are 15 payouts in all 400 games, "15 x 400 = 6000", which does not exceed 2 bytes. .

  In the next step S2368, the address of the RWM 53 of the continuous character payout (6000 times) counter is set. Here, the address “F 276 (H)” of the least significant digit of the addresses of the continuous product payout (6000 times) counter is stored in the DE register. Then, the process advances to step S2369 to execute count up (S_CNT_UP). The A register value at the time of executing this count-up becomes the data of the medal payout number buffer (F041 (H)) as described in step S2349. By this count-up, the continuous product payout (6000 times) counter value is updated. Then, the process according to this flowchart is ended.

Next, the ratio calculation process (S_CAL_SET) in step S2243 in FIG. 191 will be described. This ratio calculation process is a process for calculating the five ratios shown in FIG. 181 (rules, the ratio that needs to be displayed).
In the present embodiment, the advantageous section ratio is calculated every game.
In addition, for other ratios, addition to the ring buffer (total payout ring buffer, continuous feature payout ring buffer, and feature payout ring buffer) is just 400 games for every 400 games, and this is the addition in this game If the ring buffer number to be played is “N” and the ring buffer number to be added from the next game is “N + 1” (However, when N = 14, “N + 1” = 0), the continuous character ratio (6000) 4) Calculate four ratios: character ratio (6000 times), continuous character ratio (total), and character ratio (total).

First, the address table of the RWM 53 used in the ratio calculation process and the storage area of the ROM 54 will be described.
In FIG. 201, (A) shows a ratio calculation RWM address table (TBL_ADR_CAL) stored in the ROM 54. Further, (B) shows a specific storage area (address and data) of the ROM 54.
As shown in FIG. 201 (A), the address table includes five tables starting with “DEFW”. The five address tables are address tables for the advantageous section ratio, the continuous character ratio (6000 times), the character ratio (6000 times), the continuous character ratio (total), and the character ratio (total).
Each address table has a first group, a second group, and a third group.
The first group is a storage area storing dividend data, the second group is a storage area storing divisor data, and the third group is a storage area storing ratio data.
Here, the relationship between the dividend, the divisor, and the ratio will be described again.
"Dividend" means a number to be divided when calculating a ratio, and "divisor" means a number to be divided when calculating a ratio. That is,
Dividend / divisor = ratio

The data of the first to third groups of five address tables are stored as shown in FIG. 201 (B).
As shown in the figure (B), the head address is "230 B (H)", and the addresses "230 B (H)" to "2310 (H)" are storage areas of data of the advantageous section ratio. Also, addresses “2311 (H)” to “2316 (H)” are storage areas of data of continuous character ratio (6000 times),..., Addresses “2323 (H)” to “2328 (H) ) Is a storage area of data of character ratio (total).
In each of the five storage areas, the storage areas of the first group (divided) (for example, “230 B (H)” and “230 C (H)” in the advantageous section ratio), the second group (divisor) in order from the top Storage area (for example, “230D (H)” and “230E (H)” for the advantageous interval ratio), and a storage area for the third group (ratio) (for example, “230F (H)” for the advantageous interval ratio) It is divided into "2310 (H)".

Note that the address of RWM 53 is expressed by 2 bytes (for example, “F 270 (H)”) and that only 1 byte of data can be stored in the address of ROM 54, RWM 53 using two addresses of ROM 54 The address of one of is stored.
For example, for the address of the first group (dividend) of the advantageous section ratio, the data (F 2 (H)) stored in “230 C (H)” is higher and the data stored in “230 B (H)” (70 It can be expressed as "F270 (H)" in which (H) is subordinate.
In RWM 53, data outside the use area is an address starting with "F2 (H)". Therefore, as shown in FIG. 201 (B), all the data corresponding to the high order of the address are “F2 (H)”.

FIG. 202 is a flowchart showing ratio calculation processing (S_CAL_SET) in step S2243 in FIG.
First, in step S2381, the number of calculations is set. This process is a process of storing "5" in the B register. Here, the number “5” is to execute five ratio calculation processes, and is decremented by “1” each time the process corresponding to one ratio calculation process is completed.
Also, after step S2381, although not shown in the flowchart, the BC register value is saved in the stack area in order to protect the B register value.

In the next step S2382, a calculation number is acquired. This process is a process of storing the B register value in the A register. That is, calculation number = number of calculations.
Here, the relationship between the calculation number (the number of calculations) and the ratio corresponding thereto is as follows.
Calculation number "5": Role ratio (total)
Calculation number "4": Continuous role ratio (total)
Calculation number "3": character ratio (6000 times)
Calculation number "2": Continuous role ratio (6000 times)
Calculation number "1": ratio of advantageous intervals

Next, proceeding to step S2383, it is determined whether the acquired calculation number is an advantageous section ratio calculation number. In this processing, “1” is subtracted from the A register value (calculation number), and when the calculation result is “0”, it is determined to be the advantageous segment ratio calculation number.
If it is determined in step S2383 that it is the advantageous section ratio calculation number, the process proceeds to step S2385, and if it is determined that it is not the advantageous section ratio calculation number, the process proceeds to step S2384.
In step S2384, it is determined whether 400 games have passed. Here, the following processing is performed.
(1) The 2-byte data stored in the 400 game counter (F 210 (H)) is stored in the DE register.
(2) When the DE register value is "0", it is determined that 400 games have passed.
If it is determined in step S2384 that 400 games have passed, the process proceeds to step S2385, and if it is determined that 400 games have not elapsed, the process proceeds to step S2407. That is, only when it is determined that 400 games have passed (once in 400 games), four ratios other than the advantageous interval ratio are calculated.

In step S2385, a ratio calculation RWM address table is set. Here, the following processing is performed.
(1) The B register value is stored in the A register.
(2) The address obtained by subtracting “6 (H)” from the start address (230 B (H)) of the ratio calculation RWM address table (TBL_ADR_CAL) of the ROM 54 is stored in the HL register. That is, "2305 (H)" is stored in the HL register. This address is also referred to as a reference address because it is an address that becomes a reference of subsequent program processing (calculation processing).
(3) The value obtained by multiplying the A register value by 6 is stored in the A register.
Here, any one of "5 (H)", "4 (H)", "3 (H)", "2 (H)" and "1 (H)" is stored in the A register. This operation is performed in the state. Therefore,
"5 (H)" 6 times → 1E (H)
"4 (H)" 6 times → 18 (H)
"3 (H)" 6 times → 12 (H)
"2 (H)" 6 times → C (H)
"1 (H)" 6 times → 6 (H)
It becomes.

(4) Add the A register value to the HL register value, and store the addition result in the HL register. Here, the first HL register value is "2305 (H)". Therefore, the A register value obtained in (3) is added to "2305 (H)" and stored in the HL register. By this process, the address of the ROM 54 in which the first group of addresses is stored is stored in the HL register.
In particular,
At the time of 6 (H) addition → 230 B (H)
At the time of C (H) addition → 2311 (H)
At the time of 12 (H) addition → 2317 (H)
At the time of 18 (H) addition → 231 D (H)
At the time of 1E (H) addition → 2323 (H)
It becomes.

Next, proceeding to step S2386, the dividend RWM address is set. This process is a process of storing the corresponding first group of RWM addresses in the DE register from the HL register value. Also, after this processing, the HL register value is updated to the address of the ROM 54 in which the second group of addresses is stored.
Specifically, in step S2386, the following processing is performed.
(1) The data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in the E register.
(2) Add "1" to the HL register value, and store the result of the addition in the HL register.
(3) The data (F2 (H)) stored at the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in the D register.
By this processing, the following data (address) is stored in the DE register.
At the time of “6 (H) addition” in step S2385 → F 270 (H)
At the time of “C (H)” addition in step S2385 → F276 (H)
When “12 (H)” is added in step S2385 → F27 C (H)
When “18 (H)” is added in step S2385 → F282 (H)
At the time of “1E (H) addition” in step S2385 → F288 (H)
(4) Add “1” to the HL register value, and store the result of the addition in the HL register.
Here, the HL register stores the address of the ROM 54 in which the second group of addresses is stored. For this reason,
At the time of “230 B (H)” before the addition → “230 D (H)” is stored in the HL register.
Before the addition: "2311 (H)"->"2313(H)" is stored in the HL register.
Before the addition: "2317 (H)"->"2319(H)" is stored in the HL register.
When "231D (H)" before addition → "231F (H)" is stored in the HL register.
Before addition: “2323 (H)” “2325 (H)” is stored in the HL register.
Further, although not shown in the flowchart, processing for saving the HL register value to the stack area is executed to protect the HL register.

In the next step S2387, the lower 2 bytes of dividend are acquired. Here, the data stored in the address indicated by the DE register value is stored in the C register, and the data stored in the address obtained by adding “1” to the DE register value is stored in the B register. Thereby, the lower 2 bytes of data are stored in the BC register.
In the next step S2388, the dividend high order 1 byte is acquired. Here, the following processing is performed.
(1) Add “1” to the DE register value, and store the addition result in the DE register.
(2) “1” is added to the DE register value, and the addition result is stored in the DE register.
That is, processing for setting the DE register value to "+2" is executed.
Thus, the DE register value is
F 270 (H) → F 272 (H)
F 276 (H) → F 278 (H)
F27C (H) → F27E (H)
F282 (H) → F 284 (H)
F 288 (H) → F 28 A (H)
It becomes.
In other words, an address indicating the upper digit of each 3-byte data is stored.
(3) The data stored at the address indicated by the DE register value is stored in the A register.
From the above, regarding the dividend,
The first digit of 3-byte data is stored in C register,
The second digit of 3-byte data is stored in B register,
The third digit of 3-byte data is stored in the A register.

In the next step S2389, calculation value set (S_VALUE_SET) (FIG. 203 described later) is performed. In order to calculate the ratio, this process executes a process of multiplying the dividend by 10 and executes a process of acquiring a divisor.
In addition, when calculating the ratio, when the divisor (value of denominator) is “0”, the divisor (value of denominator) is “0” when the set of calculated values is ended in order to not execute the subsequent calculation processing In the case of “0”, the zero flag is set to “1”.
In the next step S2390, it is determined whether there is a divisor. Here, as described above, when the zero flag becomes “1” in step S2389, it is determined that there is no divisor. If it is determined that there is no divisor, the process proceeds to step S2401, and if it is determined that there is a divisor, the process proceeds to step S2391.
If the process proceeds to step S2391 (execution of ratio calculation) without determining whether or not the divisor is included, an infinite loop occurs.

In step S2391, ratio calculation execution (S_CAL_EXE) (FIG. 204 described later) is performed. In this process, calculation is performed using each register set by the calculation value set in step S2389, and the value of the tens place of the ratio is calculated based on the calculation result.
Further, when it is determined that the borrow is not possible (the upper 2 bytes of the number to be divided are “0”) according to the calculation result, the zero flag is “1”.
In the next step S2392, it is determined whether or not the digit reduction is not possible, that is, whether or not the zero flag = “1” is obtained by the calculation in step S2391. When the zero flag = “1”, it is determined that no digit reduction is possible. If it is determined that no digit reduction is possible, the process proceeds to step S2397. If it is determined that no digit reduction is possible (zero flag ≠ "1"), the process proceeds to step S2393.

In step S2393, an operation is performed to add the divisor low order to the dividend low order. Here, the DE register value is added to the BC register value, and the addition result is stored in the BC register. When an overflow occurs due to this addition processing, the carry flag becomes "1".
This process is a process (also referred to as a correction process) for restoring the portion that is excessively subtracted by the calculation of the lower digit by ratio calculation execution. For example, in the process of subtracting the DE register value from the BC register value by ratio calculation execution,
BC register value: 10 (H)
DE register value: 20 (H)
In the process, the BC register value becomes "F0 (H)".
When ratio calculation processing is completed in this state,
BC register value (F0 (H)) + DE register value (20 (H)) = BC register value (10 (H)
By doing this, the BC register value can be restored.

In the next step S2394, it is determined whether there is a carry in the calculation of step S2393. This processing determines that there is a carry when the carry flag = “1” as a result of adding the DE register value to the BC register value. If it is determined that there is a carry, the process proceeds to step S2395. If it is determined that there is no carry, the process proceeds to step S2396.
In step S2395, "1" is added to the upper two bytes of the dividend. This process is a process of adding "1" to the HL register value.

Next, proceeding to step S2396, the divisor high order is added to the dividend high order. This process is a process of adding the A register value to the HL register value and storing the result of the addition in the HL register. This process is a process (also referred to as a correction process) for restoring the portion which is excessively subtracted by the calculation of the upper digit by ratio calculation execution (C_CAL_EXE). Then, the process proceeds to step S2398.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step S2392 that no digit reduction is possible and the process proceeds to step S2397, the divisor low order is added to the dividend low order. This process is a process of adding the DE register value to the BC register value and storing the addition result in the BC register. This process is a process (also referred to as a correction process) for restoring the portion which is excessively reduced by the calculation of the lower digit by ratio calculation execution (C_CAL_EXE). Then, the process proceeds to step S2398.

In step S2398, the calculation result buffer is converted to the upper digit. Here, the following processing is performed.
(1) The L register value is stored in the A register.
(2) The address (F28A (H)) of the calculation result buffer is stored in the HL register.
(3) The upper 4 bits and the lower 4 bits of the data stored in the address indicated by the HL register value are exchanged. By this process, the value executed in the ratio calculation process is stored in the upper 4 bits. That is, in the calculation result buffer, D0 bit and D4 bit, D1 bit and D5 bit, D2 bit and D6 bit, D3 bit and D7 bit are interchanged.
Specifically, when the data stored in the address (F28A (H)) indicated by the HL register value before the operation of (3) is "00000101 (B)", the upper 4 bits and the lower 4 bits are When replaced, the HL register value becomes “01010000 (B)”.

  This process is a process of storing the value stored in the calculation result buffer (the value of the tenth place of the ratio) in the upper 4 bits (D4 to D7 bits) in step S2391 of the ratio calculation process. The value of the tens digit is a value within the range of “00000000 (B)” to “000001010 (B)” when expressed in binary notation (the same applies to the value of the ones digit). Therefore, the value is within the range of 4 bits. Then, with the value in the tens place of the ratio obtained by the process of step S2391 not being cleared but being stored in the calculation result buffer, step S2400 (ratio calculation of one's place) is executed. Then, in step S2400, the value of the one's place of the calculated ratio is added to the value (the value of the tenth place of the ratio) stored in the calculation result buffer. As a result, in the calculation result buffer value, the upper 4 bits become the value indicating the ratio of the tens place, and the lower 4 bits become the value indicating the ratio of the 1 place. In addition, by adopting the above-described method, the same process can be performed by the ratio calculation of the tens place (step S2391) and the ratio calculation of the ones place (step S2400).

Further, although not shown in the flowchart, the following processing is executed.
(1) Execute processing to restore the HL register value stored in the stack area.
(2) Further, in order to protect the HL register value again, a process of saving the HL register value to the stack area is executed.

Next, proceeding to step S2399, the calculation value set (S_VALUE_SET) is executed as in step S2389, and in the next step S2400, ratio calculation execution (S_CAL_EXE) is performed as in step S2391. By the process of step S2399 and step S2400, one place of the ratio is calculated. Also, the one's place of the ratio is stored in the lower 4 bits of the address (F28A (H)) of the calculation result buffer.
In the next step S2401, a calculation result buffer is acquired. Here, the following processing is performed.
(1) The address (F28A (H)) of the calculation result buffer is stored in the HL register.
(2) The data stored in the address (F28A (H)) indicated by the HL register value is stored in the A register.
In the next step S2402, the calculation result buffer is initialized. This process stores "0" in the address (F28A (H)) indicated by the HL register value.
Here, although not shown in the flowchart, processing for restoring the HL register value stored in the stack area is executed.

In the next step S2403, the ratio data RWM address is set. Here, the following processing is performed.
(1) Add "1" to the HL register value.
(2) Add "1" to the HL register value.
(3) The data of the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in the HL register.
By this process, the address of the ROM 54 in which the third group of addresses is stored is stored in the HL register.
Next, proceeding to step S2404, it is determined whether the calculated ratio is "100%". In this processing, “A0 (H)” is subtracted from the A register value, and when there is a carry-down (carry flag = “1”), it is determined that the ratio is not “100%”. If it is determined that the ratio is "100%", the process proceeds to step S2405, and if it is determined that the ratio is not "100%", the process proceeds to step S2406. In other words, when the value of the A register is “A0 (H)”, it indicates that the calculation result (ratio) is 100%.

In step S2405, "99%" is set as the ratio. This process is a process of updating (storing) the value of the A register from “A0 (H)” to “99 (H)”.
It should be noted that since the advantageous section is started from the next game when the advantageous section is won, the advantageous section ratio does not actually become 100%. On the other hand, the other four ratios may be 100%. However, if the (same) program of FIG. 202 is used including the calculation of the advantageous section ratio, it is possible to make the program of the ratio setting process one.
Next, proceeding to step S2406, the ratio data is stored. This process is a process of storing the A register value at the address indicated by the HL register value. As described above, any one of the third group of addresses is stored in the HL register value at this time. Specifically, "F 285 (H)" is used in the HL register when calculating the advantageous interval ratio, and "F 286 (H)" is used in the HL register when calculating the continuous character ratio (6000 times), When calculating the feature ratio (6000 times), "F 287 (H)" in the HL register, and when calculating the continuous ratio (total), "F 288 (H)" in the HL register, When the ratio (total) is calculated, "F 289 (H)" is stored in the HL register. In other words, ratio data is stored in the target RWM address by the processing.
Here, although not shown in the flowchart, processing for restoring the BC register value stored in the stack area is executed.

In the next step S2407, it is determined whether the number of calculations has been completed. Here, the following processing is performed.
When the BC register value stored in the stack area is returned to the original value, the BC register value becomes the value saved after step S2381.
(1) Subtract "1" from the B register value.
(2) If it is determined that the B register value is not "0", it is determined that the number of calculations has not been completed.
If it is determined that the number of calculations has been completed, the processing according to this flowchart is ended. If it is determined that the number of calculations has not been completed, the process returns to step S2382.
According to the above processing, when within the advantageous section, the advantageous section ratio is calculated. In addition, although it is not in the advantageous section, when 400 games have passed, four ratios of continuous character ratio (6000 times), character ratio (6000 times), continuous character ratio (total), and character ratio (total) are calculated. (Steps S2382 to S2407 are repeated four times).

FIG. 203 is a flowchart showing the calculation value set (S_VALUE_SET) executed in step S2389 and step S2399 in FIG.
In this calculation value set, although not shown in the flowchart, first, the data (ratio calculation RWM address table) stored in the current HL register is saved in the stack area in order to protect it.
Also, in the following description, although it is redundant with the above description,
Dividend: the number to be divided in division (the so-called numerator value)
Divisor: The number to divide in division (the so-called denominator value)
1st byte of dividend: 1st digit (least significant digit) (C register)
Dividend 2 byte: 2nd digit (B register)
Third dividend (third register) (register A)
Point to
Further, in this calculated value set, processing for increasing the dividend to be calculated by 10 and processing for setting the divisor are performed.
Here, as a specific example, it will be described below that “FE (H)” is stored in the C register, “40 (H)” is stored in the B register, and “01 (H)” is stored in the A register. In addition, when this numerical value is expressed in decimal number,
254 (D) + 16384 (D) + 65536 (D) = 82174 (D)
It corresponds to

In step S 2411, a process of multiplying the third byte of dividend by 10 is performed. Here, the data of the third byte of the dividend is stored in the A register before this processing. Therefore, the following processing is performed.
(1) The result of multiplying the A register value by 10 and multiplying by 10 is stored in the HL register.
(2) Exchange the HL register value with the DE register value.
Thus, data obtained by multiplying the data of the third byte of the dividend by 10 is stored in the DE register.
In the above example, “000 A (H)” obtained by multiplying “01 (H)” by 10 is stored in the DE register.
More specifically, "00 (H)" is stored in the D register, and "0A (H)" is stored in the E register.
In the next step S 2412, a process of multiplying the 2nd byte of dividend by 10 is performed. Here, the data of the 2nd byte of the dividend is stored in the B register before this processing. Therefore, the following processing is performed.
(1) The B register value is stored in the A register.
(2) The result of multiplying the A register value by 10 and multiplying by 10 is stored in the HL register.
In the above example, “0280 (H)” obtained by multiplying “40 (H)” by 10 is stored in the HL register.
More specifically, "02 (H)" is stored in the H register, and "80 (H)" is stored in the L register.

In the next step S 2413, a process of multiplying the first byte of dividend by 10 is performed. Here, the data of the first byte of the dividend is stored in the C register before this processing. Therefore, the following processing is performed.
(1) The C register value is stored in the A register.
(2) Exchange the HL register value with the BC register value.
Here, data obtained by multiplying the data of the second byte of the dividend by 10 is stored in the HL register by the process of step S 2412. As a result, data obtained by multiplying the data of the second byte of the dividend by 10 is stored in the BC register.
In the above example, “0280 (H)” is stored in the BC register.
More specifically, "02 (H)" is stored in the B register, and "80 (H)" is stored in the C register.
(3) The result of multiplying the A register value by 10 and multiplying by 10 is stored in the HL register.
Here, the A register value before this processing is data of the first byte of the dividend. Therefore, data obtained by multiplying the data of the first byte of the dividend by 10 is stored in the HL register by this processing.
In the above example, “09 EC (H)” obtained by multiplying “FE (H)” by 10 is stored in the HL register.
More specifically, "09 (H)" is stored in the H register, and "EC (H)" is stored in the L register.

The process advances to step S 2414 to add the carry value of the first byte. Here, the following processing is performed.
(1) The H register value is stored in the A register.
(2) Perform an operation of adding the BC register value and the A register value, and store the operation result in the BC register.
In the above example, an operation of adding “0280 (H)” and “09 (H)” is performed. Therefore, "0289 (H)" is stored in the BC register.
More specifically, "02 (H)" is stored in the B register, and "89 (H)" is stored in the C register.
In the next step S 2415, the carry value of the second byte is added. Here, the following processing is performed.
(1) The B register value is stored in the A register.
(2) An operation of adding the DE register value and the A register value is performed, and the operation result is stored in the DE register.
In the above example, an operation of adding "000A (H)" and "02 (H)" is performed. Therefore, "000 C (H)" is stored in the DE register.
More specifically, "00 (H)" is stored in the D register, and "0 C (H)" is stored in the E register.

Next, proceeding to step S2416, lower digit adjustment is performed. Here, the following processing is performed.
(1) The C register value is stored in the B register.
(2) The L register value is stored in the C register.
In the above example, “89 (H)” is stored in the B register, and “EC (H)” is stored in the C register.
As a result of these processes, the data after multiplying the dividend by 10 becomes data of up to 4 bytes. Then, the lower two bytes of data multiplied by 10 are stored in the BC register, and the upper two bytes of data multiplied by 10 are stored in the DE register.
In the above example, “89 EC (H)” is stored in the BC register, and “000 C (H)” is stored in the DE register.
Expressing this value in decimal,
35308 (D) +786432 (D) = 821740 (D)
It becomes.
Therefore, "82174 (D)" illustrated at the beginning is 10 times.
Here, although not shown in the flowchart, the HL register stored in the stack area is restored.

Next, proceeding to step S2417, the divisor RWM address is set. In this process, the data stored in the address indicated by the data stored in the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in the HL register.
Here, the HL register stores the address of the ROM 54 in which the second group of addresses is stored. By this processing, the top address of the second group of RWM addresses is stored in the HL register.
Next, proceeding to step S2418, the divisor high order 1 byte is acquired. This process is a process of storing, in the A register, the data stored in the address indicated by the data obtained by adding “2” to the data stored in the address indicated by the HL register value.

In the next step S2419, the divisor lower 2 bytes are acquired. Here, the following processing is performed.
(1) The data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in the L register.
(2) The data stored in the address indicated by the data obtained by adding “1” to the HL register value is stored in the H register.
(3) Exchange the HL register value with the DE register value.
Thereby, the upper 1 byte of the divisor is stored in the A register, and the lower 2 bytes of the divisor are stored in the DE register.
The value originally stored in the DE register (upper 2 bytes after multiplying the dividend by 10) is stored in the HL register.

In the next step S 2420, it is determined whether the lower 2 bytes of the divisor are “0”. Here, it is determined whether the DE register value is "0", and when the DE register value is "0", it is determined that the lower 2 divisors of the divisor are "0". If it is determined that the lower 2 divisor bytes of the divisor are not "0", this flowchart ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the lower 2 bytes of the divisor is “0”, the process proceeds to step S 2421.
In step S2421, the upper divisor 1 byte is checked. In this process, the A register value and the A register value are ORed, and when the operation result is “0”, the zero flag is set to “1”.
With the above calculation value set (S_VALUE_SET),
The lower 2 bytes of the dividend multiplied by 10 are stored in the BC register,
The upper two bytes of the dividend multiplied by 10 are stored in the HL register,
The upper 1 byte of the divisor is stored in the A register,
The lower 2 bytes of the divisor will be stored in the DE register.
When it is determined that the divisor is "0", the zero flag = "1".

FIG. 204 is a flowchart showing ratio calculation execution (S_CAL_EXE) executed in step S2391 and step S2400 in FIG. When this ratio calculation execution is performed, the calculation value set (S_VALUE_SET) described above is performed before that, and as described above,
BC register: Lower 2 bytes of dividend multiplied by 10 HL register: upper 2 bytes of dividend multiplied by 10 A register: Upper 1 byte of divisor DE register: Executed with lower 2 bytes of divisor stored Ru.
Further, in this ratio calculation execution, as described above, the divisor (X) is subtracted from the dividend multiplied by 10 (10 × Y), and when the divisor can be subtracted from the calculation result, the divisor is subtracted again By repeating that
0 ≦ (10 × Y−X × R) <X
Calculate “R” that satisfies
Then, "R (the number of repetitions of subtraction (the ratio in the digit))" is stored in the calculation result buffer.

First, in step S2431, the divisor low order is subtracted from the dividend low order. This process is a process of subtracting the DE register value from the BC register value and storing the subtraction result in the BC register. When a borrow occurs due to the subtraction result, the carry flag = "1".
In the next step S 2432, it is determined whether or not there is a borrow in the subtraction of step S 2431. When the carry flag = “1”, it is determined that there is a borrow. If it is determined that there is a digit decrease, the process proceeds to step S2433. If it is determined that no digit decrease occurs, the process proceeds to step S2435.

In step S2433, it is determined whether the upper 2 bytes of the dividend are "0". Here, by determining whether the HL register value is "0", it is determined whether the upper two bytes of the dividend are "0". If it is determined that the upper 2 bytes of the dividend are “0”, the processing according to this flowchart is ended. At this time, after the zero flag = "1" is stored, the process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that the upper 2 bytes of the dividend are not "0", the flow proceeds to step S2434.
In step S2434, "1" is subtracted from the upper 2 bytes of the dividend. This process is a process of subtracting "1" from the HL register value.
Next, proceeding to step S2435, the divisor high order is subtracted from the dividend high order. This process is a process of subtracting the A register value from the HL register value and storing the result of the subtraction in the HL register. If the subtraction result indicates that there is a carry, the carry flag is set to "1".

Then, the process proceeds to step S2436, and it is determined whether the calculation ends. If it is determined in step S2435 that the carry flag is "1", it is determined that the calculation is ended, and the processing according to this flowchart is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that the calculation is not completed (when the carry flag is "1"), the process proceeds to step S2437.
In step S2437, "1" is added to the calculation result buffer. This process is a process of adding "1" to the calculation result buffer (address "F28A (H)"). Then, the process returns to step S2431.

FIG. 205 is a flowchart showing ring buffer update (S_RINGNO_SET) in step S2244 of FIG.
First, in step S2441, it is determined whether 400 games have passed since the last 400 games have passed. Here, the following processing is performed.
(1) The data stored in the 400 game counter (address "F210 (H)") is stored in the HL register.
(2) When the HL register value is “0” (second zero flag = “1”), it is determined that 400 games have passed.
If it is determined that 400 games have passed, the process proceeds to step S2442, and if it is determined that 400 games have not passed, the processing according to this flowchart ends. Therefore, the ring buffer update process is performed once in 400 games.

In step S2442, the number of ring buffers is set. This process is a process of storing "3" in the B register. The “3” indicates that the number of ring buffers to be updated is three (total payout ring buffer, continuous role payout ring buffer, and feature payout ring buffer).
In the next step S2443, the ring buffer number is updated. Here, the following processing is performed.
(1) The address at which the ring buffer number is stored, that is, "F212 (H)" is stored in the HL register.
(2) Add "1" to the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value.
Note that this addition is an addition (ICPLD) that circulates “0” to “14 (D)”, and when “14 (D)” is stored, for example, “1” adds “0”. It becomes ".

In addition, after the processing, although the illustration is omitted in the flowchart, the following stack area save is executed.
(1) In order to protect the current B register value (the number of ring buffers), the BC register value is saved to the stack area.
(2) To protect the current HL register value (ring buffer number), save the HL register value to the stack area.

In the next step S2444, the number of ring buffers is set. This process is a process of storing the B register value in the A register.
Next, proceeding to step S2445, an offset of the corresponding ring buffer is generated. Here, the following processing is performed.
(1) The A register value is multiplied by "30 (D)" and the multiplication result is stored in the A register.
(2) Add the A register value and the data stored in the address indicated by the HL register value, and store the result of the addition in the A register.
(3) The A register value is added to the data stored in the address indicated by the HL register value, and the result of the addition is stored in the A register.
By these calculations, an offset value for calculating the RWM address of the ring buffer can be obtained.
The multiplication number “30” in the above (1) indicates “the number of ring buffers (15) × the number of bytes per ring buffer (2)”. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 182 and FIG. 183, the total payout ring buffer 0-14, the continuous character payout ring buffer 0-14, and the character payout ring buffer 0-14 are provided with addresses continuously. .
Thus, the offset values corresponding to the total payout ring buffer, the continuous combination payout ring buffer, and the combination payout ring buffer can be obtained in the same processing by the calculations (1) to (3).

A specific example is as follows.
Example 1) When the ring buffer number is “0” and the number of ring buffers is “3”
Process of (1): 3 × 30 = 90 (register A)
Processing of (2): 0 (ring buffer number) + 90 (A register) = 90 (A register)
Process of (3): 0 (ring buffer number) + 90 (A register) = 90 (A register)
Example 2) When the ring buffer number is "1" and the number of ring buffers is "2"
Process of (1): 2 × 30 = 60 (register A)
Process of (2): 1 (ring buffer number) + 60 (A register) = 61 (A register)
Process of (3): 1 (ring buffer number) + 61 (A register) = 62 (A register)
Example 3) When the ring buffer number is “10” and the number of ring buffers is “1” When expressed in decimal,
Processing of (1): 1 × 30 = 30 (register A)
Process (2): 10 (ring buffer number) + 30 (A register) = 40 (A register)
Process of (3): 10 (ring buffer number) + 40 (A register) = 50 (A register)
It becomes.

Next, proceeding to step S2446, the RWM address of the corresponding ring buffer is set. Here, the following processing is performed.
(1) Store "F1F5 (H)" in the DE register.
(2) Add the A register value to the DE register value, and store the result of the addition in the DE register.
About the said process, if a specific example is given, it is as follows.
Example 1) When "90 (D) (5A (H))" is stored in the A register F1F5 (H) + 5A (H) = F24F (H)
As a result, the leading address of the feature delivery ring buffer 0 is obtained.
Example 2) When “62 (D) (3E (H))” is stored in the A register F1F5 (H) + 3E (H) = F233 (H)
As a result, the leading address of the continuous role delivery ring buffer 1 is obtained.
Example 3) When "50 (D) (32 (H))" is stored in the A register F1 F5 (H) + 32 (H) = F 227 (H)
Thus, the top address of the total payout ring buffer 10 is obtained.
That is, the address “F1F5 (H)” is the reference address, and the value obtained in step S2445 is the offset value.

In the next step S2447, the RWM address of the payout (6000 times) counter is set. In this process, the total payout (6000 times) counter (F 273 (H)), the continuous character delivery (6000 times) counter (F 276 (H)), or the character payout (6000 times) counter (F 279 (H)) It is a process of calculating one of the addresses. Here, the following processing is performed.
(1) Store "F270 (H)" in the HL register.
(2) Store the B register in the A register.
Here, the number of ring buffers (one of “1” to “3”) is stored in the B register.
(3) The data obtained by multiplying the A register value by 3 is stored in the A register.
(4) The A register value is added to the HL register value, and the addition result is stored in the HL register.

In the next step S2448, the lower 2 bytes of the payout counter are obtained. Here, the following processing is performed.
(1) The data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in the C register.
(2) The data stored in the address indicated by the data obtained by adding “1” to the HL register value is stored in the B register.
In the next step S2449, the payout counter upper 1 byte is acquired. This process is a process of storing data stored in an address indicated by data obtained by adding “2” to the HL register value in the A register.
By the processes of (1) and (2) above, the lower 2 bytes of data are stored in the BC register, and the upper 1 byte of data is stored in the A register.

Next, proceeding to step S2450, the corresponding ring buffer is subtracted from the lower 2 bytes of the payout counter. Here, the following processing is performed.
(1) Exchange the DE register value with the HL register value. By this process,
DE register: Start address of the corresponding payout (6000 times) counter RWM address HL register: The start address of the corresponding ring buffer is stored.
(2) The data stored in the address indicated by the HL register value and the address obtained by adding "1" to the HL register value are subtracted from the BC register value (lower 2 bytes data of the payout (6000 times) counter). As a result of subtraction, when a carry occurs, the carry flag = "1".

Next, proceeding to step S2451, it is determined whether there is a borrow. In the process of step S2450, when carry flag = “1”, it is determined that there is a carry.
If it is determined that there is a digit reduction, the process proceeds to step S2452, and if it is determined that there is no digit reduction, the process proceeds to step S2453.
In step S2452, “1” is subtracted from the upper byte of the payout counter. This process is a process of subtracting "1" from the A register value.

In the next step S2453, the corresponding ring buffer is cleared. This processing clears the data stored in the address indicated by the HL register value and the data stored in the address obtained by adding “1” to the HL register value.
That is, in step S2453, the address indicated by the DE register value and the information stored in the next address are cleared to make it possible to store information on the next game and thereafter. In addition, before clearing these pieces of information, based on the information before clearing, the total payout (6000 times) counter (F 273 (H)) and the continuous role payout (6000 times) counter are performed in steps S2484 to S2452. The information of (F 276 (H)) or the feature payout (6000 times) counter (F 279 (H)) is updated.
Thus, when determining the total payout (6000 times) counter value, the continuous character product payout (6000 times) counter value, and the character product payout (6000 times) counter value, all 15 ring buffer values are added, respectively. It is only necessary to subtract the corresponding ring buffer value from the previous 6000 times counter value, not the operation to be performed. Therefore, the processing time for calculating the counter value 6000 times can be shortened, and the program can be simplified.
The flow advances to step S2454 to save the payout (6000 times) counter. Here, the following processing is performed.
(1) Exchange the DE register value with the HL register value. By this processing, the top address of the corresponding ring buffer is stored in the DE register, and the top address of the RWM address of the corresponding payout (6000 times) counter is stored in the HL register.
(2) The C register value is stored at the address indicated by the HL register value.
(3) The B register value is stored at the address indicated by the value obtained by adding "1" to the HL register value.
(4) The A register value is stored at the address indicated by the value obtained by adding "2" to the HL register value.
Then, after this processing, although not shown in the flowchart, the following processing is executed in order to restore the value saved in the stack area.
(1) A process is performed to restore the HL register value stored in the stack area.
(2) A process is performed to restore the BC register value stored in the stack area.

Next, proceeding to step S2455, it is determined whether or not the number of ring buffers has been completed. Here, the following processing is performed.
(1) Subtract "1" from the B register value.
(2) When the B register value is "0", it is determined that the number of ring buffers has been completed.
If it is determined that the ring buffer numbers have been updated for the number of ring buffers, the processing according to this flowchart ends. If it is determined that the number of ring buffers has not been completed, the process returns to step S2444.
The above description is the processing in the main processing (M_MAIN).

FIG. 206 is a flowchart showing preparation for ratio display (S_DSP_READY) in step S2221 of FIG. 190 (interrupt processing).
First, in the stack pointer save of step S2461, the stack pointer (SP register) stored in the stack area is stored in the stack pointer temporary storage buffer 2 (address "F293 (H)").
As described above, since the ratio display preparation is a program to be executed outside the use area, when the program outside the use area is being executed, the stack pointer used in the first program is saved, The stack pointer is restored when it returns to the used area (first program).

In the next step S2462, the stack pointer (outside the used area) is set. This process is a process of storing "F400 (H)" in the stack pointer (SP register).
In the next step S2463, the register is saved. This process is a process of saving various registers in the stack area (outside the used area).
Next, proceeding to step S2464, blink request flag generation (S_LED_FLASH) is executed. This process is a process shown in FIG. 207 described later, and is a process of updating the blink request flag (address “F28D (H)”).

In the next step S2465, the ratio display timer is updated (S_RATE_TIME). This process is a process shown in FIG. 209 to be described later, and the blink switching flag (address “F28F (H)”), the display switching time (address “F290”), and the blink switching time (address “F292 (H)”) Is a process of updating the
In the next step S2466, ratio display processing (S_LED_OUT) is performed. This process is a process shown in FIG. 210 described later, and is a process of actually displaying (turning on or off) the ratio in the interrupt process. In the twentieth embodiment and the like, the ratio display process in the case where blinking is not considered has already been described (FIG. 135 and the like).

Next, proceeding to step S2467, the register is restored. This processing is processing for restoring the various registers saved in step S2463.
In the next step S2468, the stack pointer is returned. This process is a process of storing the stack pointer saved in step S2461, that is, the data stored in the stack pointer temporary storage buffer 2 in the stack pointer (SP register). In other words, the stub pointer indicates an address in the use area by the process. Then, the process according to this flowchart is ended.

FIG. 207 is a flowchart showing the blinking request flag generation (S_LED_FLASH) in step S2464 in FIG.
First, in step S2481, the number of repetitions and an initial value are set. This process is a process of storing “5 (H)” in the B register and “0” in the C register.
Here, the number of repetitions “5” is a value for determining whether or not the ratio segment of 5 items blinks (see FIG. 184).
In the next step S2482, the address of the blink / non-applicable item judgment value table is set. This process is a process of storing the leading address of the blinking / non-corresponding item determination value table (TBL_SEG_FLASH) in the DE register.
FIG. 208 is a diagram showing a blinking / non-corresponding item determination value table (TBL_SEG_FLASH). In this table, predetermined values are determined for the ratio of five items. For example, the advantageous section ratio "70" means that the display blinks when the advantageous section ratio is "70" or more (see FIG. 184).
Also, as shown in FIG. 208, the start address of this table is "2500 (H)". Therefore, "2500 (H)" is stored in the DE register.

Also, “non-applicable item” indicates that the user does not have the capability to display the relevant ratio. For example, when the gaming machine is not equipped with the advantageous section, the advantageous section ratio is not displayed. Thus, when there is a non-applicable item, "-" is displayed in the ratio segment of the advantageous segment ratio.
In the present embodiment, since the advantageous section and the continuous part are provided, the ratio of all five items is displayed. However, when there is a non-applicable item, the address of the ROM 54 corresponding to the non-applicable item in this table is displayed. Stores “DE (H)”.
For example, when the gaming machine does not have the advantageous section, “DE (H)” is stored in the address “2504 (H)” in place of “70 (H)” in FIG.
As described above, even if any game machine (for example, so-called A type or so-called A + ART) is not provided with the advantageous section, the lighting control of the management information can be performed only by correcting a part of data of this table. A control process that makes it possible to Therefore, it is easy to divert the control program to other products.
As described later, the value corresponding to the non-applicable item is not limited to “DE (H)”.

In the next step S2483, the RWM address of the ratio data is set. This process is a process of storing the address (F 289 (H)) at which the feature ratio (total) data is stored in the HL register.
Next, proceeding to step S2484, a blinking or non-applicable item determination value is acquired. Here, the following processing is performed.
(1) The data of the address indicated by the DE register value is stored in the A register.
(2) Subtract "1" from the A register value.
In the next step S2485, it is determined whether it is a non-applicable item value. In this process, “DD (H)” is subtracted from the A register value, and when the operation result is “0” (zero flag = “1”), it is determined that the item value is not a corresponding item.
That is, when it is a non-corresponding item, as described above, “DE (H)” is stored in the blinking / non-corresponding item determination value table, so “1” is subtracted from “DE (H)” After that, when "DD (H)" is further subtracted, it becomes "0", and the zero flag = "1".
When a predetermined value other than "DE (H)" is stored as the value corresponding to the non-applicable item, for example, "predetermined value-1-(predetermined value-1)" is calculated, and the calculation result is "0". When (zero flag = “1”), it is determined that the item value is not applicable.
In addition, “predetermined value” may be a value exceeding “70 (H)” in the case of the advantageous section, the character ratio (total), and the character ratio (6000 times), and the continuous character ratio (total), In the case of the continuous character ratio (6000 times), it may be a value exceeding "60 (H)".
If it is determined that the item value is not the non-applicable item value, the process proceeds to step S2487. If it is determined that the item value is not the non-applicable item value, the process proceeds to step S2486.

In step S2486, ratio data is acquired. This process is a process of storing data stored in the address indicated by the HL register value in the A register.
In the next step S2487, ratio data or non-applicable item values are stored. This process is a process of storing the A register value in the address indicated by the HL register value. Note that this process has the following meaning.
When there is a non-applicable item, no data is stored in the RWM in which the ratio data is stored before the storage process. For example, in the case where the advantageous section is not included, "00 (H)" is stored in the advantageous section ratio data (address "F 285 (H)"). Although details will be described later, when the ratio is displayed on the management information display LED 74, the ratio is displayed based on the information stored in the address. At this time, when “00 (H)” is stored in the advantageous section ratio data, “00” is displayed in the ratio segment of the management information display LED 74 when the advantageous section ratio is displayed. In order to prevent this, “−−” is displayed by storing the value of the A register (“DD (H)” in this embodiment) acquired in step S2485 as ratio data. Specifically, when the offset value is "D (H)", the display data is "-" as shown in FIG.
In addition, the program processing is configured such that the game machine having the non-corresponding item and the game machine not having the non-corresponding item can be commonly used.
In the next step S2488, blink determination is performed. This process is a process of subtracting data of an address indicated by the DE register value from the A register value. As a result of the calculation, when there is a borrow, the carry flag = “1”.
Although details will be described later, when the carry flag = “1”, it means that the item is displayed in a non-flashing mode when displaying the item, and when the carry flag = “0”, It means turning on in a blinking manner when the item is displayed.
Next, proceeding to step S2489, a blink request flag is generated. In this processing, the carry flag and the C register value are subjected to arithmetic processing to rotate shift leftward.
Specifically, assuming that the carry flag value is “CY” and the C register value is “D7, D6, D5, D4, D3, D2, D1, D0”:
“CY”, C register value “D7, D6, D5, D4, D3, D2, D1, D0”
,
"D7", C register value "D6, D5, D4, D3, D2, D1, D0, CY"
Perform the operation to be.
For example, when the C register value is the initial value "00000000 (B)" as shown in step S2481, and the carry flag = "1" in step S2488,
"1", C register value "00000000 (B)"
,
"0", C register value "00000001 (B)"
Perform the operation to be. Therefore, the C register value is "00000001 (B)". The C register value finally becomes a blink request flag.
In other words, the process of step S2488 registers information for determining whether to blink the ratio segment of the item by calculation based on the ratio data and the specific value stored in the blink / non-applicable item determination value table. It is processing to store in (storage area).

In the next step S2490, the RWM address of the next ratio data is set. This process is a process of subtracting "1" from the HL register value. For example, the HL register value in the first blink determination is “F 289 (H)” (subject ratio (total) data) as described above. Here, when “1” is subtracted, the HL register value becomes “F288 (H)” (continuous combination product ratio (total) data) which is the second blink determination target.
In the next step S2491, the address of the next blink / non-applicable item judgment value table is set. This process is a process of adding "1" to the DE register value. For example, when "2500 (H)" is initially stored as the DE register value, "2501 (H)" is obtained by this processing.
Here, as shown in FIG. 208, the address is in the order of character ratio (total), continuous character ratio (total), character ratio (6000 times), continuous character ratio (6000 times), and advantageous interval ratio. The blink / non-applicable item judgment values are stored in “2500 (H)” to “2504 (H)”.
Thus, the initial value of the address (DE register value) of the blink / non-applicable item judgment value table is set to “2500 (H)”, and “1” is added at the next judgment of blink / non-applicable item (step Since the target address can be designated by S2484 to S2492), the processing can be simplified.

Next, proceeding to step S2492, it is determined whether the repetition has been completed. Here, the following processing is performed.
(1) Subtract "1" from the B register value.
(2) When the B register value is not "0", it is determined that the repetition has not ended.
Here, “5” is set in the B register value in the first step S2481, so the number of repetitions becomes “5”. If it is determined that the repetition has been completed, the process proceeds to step S2493, and if it is determined that the repetition is not completed, the process returns to step S2484.
As described above, the five items are determined to blink.

When the blinking determination of the five items is completed and the process proceeds to step S2493, a total game number counter value is acquired. Here, the following processing is performed.
(1) The lower 2 bytes of the total game number counter (address "F26D (H)") are stored in the HL register.
(2) The value of the upper one byte of the total game number counter (address "F26D (H)") is stored in the A register.
As described above, the total game number counter is constituted by 3 bytes, and "F26D (H)" is a storage area for storing the first digit, and its value is stored in the L register.
Also, "F26E (H)" is a storage area for storing the second digit, and the value is stored in the H register.
Furthermore, "F26F (H)" is a storage area for storing the third digit, and the value is stored in the A register.

In the next step S2494, it is determined whether the upper one byte of the total game number counter is "0". In this process, it is determined whether the A register value stored in step S2493 is "0". If it is determined that the value is "0", the process proceeds to step S2495. If it is determined that the value is not "0", the process proceeds to step S2496.
In step S2495, it is determined whether 6000 games have passed. In this process, “6000 (D)” is subtracted from the HL register value (data of lower 2 bytes of the total game number counter). As a result of the calculation, when there is a carry, the carry flag = "1". When the carry flag = “1”, it is determined that the 6000 game has not passed, and the process proceeds to step S 2497.
On the other hand, if it is determined that the 6000 game has passed, the process proceeds to step S2496.

In step S2496, the blink request flag data is updated. This process is a process of setting the D5 bit of the C register to "1". Here, the C register value is set to a value corresponding to the blink request flag of the address “F28D (H)” (however, at this point, the bit is in an inverted state). Therefore, when 6000 games have passed, a process of setting the D5 bit to "1" is executed.
In the next step S 2497, it is determined whether the upper 1 byte of the total game number counter is “2” or more. Here, a process of subtracting "3" from the A register value is performed. If no subtraction occurs in this subtraction, the carry flag is set to "1". Then, when the carry flag is "1", it is determined that the upper one byte of the total game number counter is "2" or more.

In order to determine whether or not 175,000 games have been reached, first, the upper 1 byte is compared with "3". Here, since “175000 (D)” is “2AB 98 (H)” in hexadecimal, it is inevitable that the A register value exceeds “2” (A register value is “3” or more). In this manner, it can be seen that the value of the total game number counter exceeds “175000 (D)”.
If it is determined in step S2497 that the carry flag ≠ is “1”, it is determined that the upper 1 byte of the total game number counter exceeds “2”, and the process proceeds to step S2500. If the carry flag is “1”, the total is It is determined that the upper 1 byte of the game number counter does not exceed "2", and the process proceeds to step S2498.

In step S 2498, it is determined whether the value of the total game number counter is “2”. In this processing, “2” is subtracted from the A register value, and when it is determined that it is not “0”, it is determined that the value of the total game number counter is not “2”. If it is determined that the total game number counter value is not "2", the process proceeds to step S2501, and if it is determined that the total game number counter value is "2", the process proceeds to step S2499.
In step S2499, it is determined whether 175,000 games have passed. In this process, “AB 98 (H)” is subtracted from the HL register value, and as a result of the calculation, the carry flag = “1” when there is a carry. Then, when the carry flag = “1”, it is determined that 175,000 games have not passed.
If it is determined in step S2499 that 175,000 games have passed, the process proceeds to step S2500, and if it is determined that 175000 games have not elapsed, the process proceeds to step S2501.

In step S2500, the blink request flag data is updated. This processing sets the D6 bit of the C register to "1". The D6 bit of the C register corresponds to the D6 bit (175000 game blink flag) of the blink request flag of the address “F28D (H)”. Then, the process proceeds to step S2501.
In step S2501, a blink request flag is generated. Here, the following processing is performed.
(1) Store "01111 111 (B)" in the A register.
(2) An exclusive OR operation (XOR) of the A register value and the C register value is performed, and the operation result is stored in the A register.

As described above, “0” is stored in the blinking item (bit) of the data stored in the C register before execution of the process of step S2501. For example, when 175000 games have passed, as described above, the D6 bit is "1". In other words, when 175000 games have not passed, it is "0".
Therefore, by inverting the bit of the C register value, a blinking request flag is generated so that the blinking item (bit) becomes “1”.
In the next step S2502, the blink request flag generated in step S2501 is stored. Here, the following processing is performed.
(1) The address ("F28D (H)") of the blink request flag is stored in the HL register.
(2) The A register value is stored in the address ("F28D (H)") indicated by the HL register value.
As a result, the blinking item is “1”, and the non-flashing item is “0”. Thus, the information corresponding to each bit is represented by "1" or "0", and the blink request flag for seven items including whether to blink is stored at address "F28D (H)". .

FIG. 209 is a flowchart showing updating of the ratio display timer (S_RATE_TIME) in step S2465 in FIG.
First, in step S 2511, the display switching time is updated. Here, the following processing is performed.
(1) The address ("F290 (H)" which is the start address) storing the display switching time is stored in the HL register.
(2) The data stored in the address indicated by the HL register value is subtracted by "1", and the result of the subtraction is stored in the address.
This processing is to execute cyclic subtraction processing that circulates between “0” and “2144 (D)” when expressed in decimal notation as the display switching time.
Therefore, when the process is performed when the display switching time is "0", "2144 (D)" (860 (H)) is stored as the display switching time.
When the value is "0", the process is performed, and when "2144 (D)" (860 (H)) is stored as the display switching time, the carry flag is "1".
Since the interrupt processing is executed every 2.235 ms, "0" changes to "2144 (D)" every about 4792 ms, and the carry flag becomes "1".
Thereby, switching of the ratio display content is performed about every 5 seconds.

In the next step S 2512, it is determined whether the display switching time has elapsed. This determination is performed to determine whether or not the carry flag is "1" in the process of step S2511. If the carry flag is "1", it is determined that the display switching time has elapsed.
If it is determined that the display switching time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S2513. If it is determined that the display switching time has not elapsed, the process proceeds to step S2518.
In step S 2513, the blink switching time is stored. In this process, “134 (D) (86 (H))” is stored in the address (flicker switching time) indicated by data (that is, “F292 (H)”) obtained by adding “2” to the HL register value.
That is, when it is determined that the display switching time has elapsed, the blinking switching time is stored. A time “2.235 × 134 = 299.49 (ms)” is stored as the blinking switching time.

Next, proceeding to step S 2514, the blinking switching flag is turned off. Here, the following processing is performed.
(1) The address ("F28F (H)") of the blinking switching flag is stored in the HL register.
(2) "0" is stored in the address indicated by the HL register value.
As described above, when the data stored in the blinking switching flag is “0”, it indicates that the data is on, and when it is “1”, it indicates that the data is not.
That is, at the timing when the display switching time has elapsed, the blinking switching flag becomes “0” (lighting).

Next, proceeding to step S 2515, the ratio display number is updated. Here, the following processing is performed.
(1) Subtract “1” from the HL register value.
In other words, the address of the RWM 53 ("F28E (H)") corresponding to the ratio indication number is stored in the HL register.
(2) Add "1" to the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value.
In this process, a cyclic addition process is performed in which the ratio display number is circulated between “0” and “5”. Therefore, when the process is performed when the ratio display number is "5", "0" is stored as the ratio display number. In addition, when the process is performed when the ratio display number is less than "5", the carry flag = "1".

In the next step S 2516, it is determined whether the updated ratio display number is “0”. Here, when the carry flag = “1”, it is determined that the ratio display number is not “0”. In other words, when the ratio display number is “5”, the process of step S 2515 is executed, and when the ratio display number becomes “0”, it is determined that the ratio display number is “0”.
If it is determined in step S 2516 that the ratio display number after update is “0”, the process proceeds to step S 2517. If it is determined that the ratio display number is not “0”, the processing according to this flowchart ends.
In step S2517, the ratio display number is corrected. This process is a process of adding "1" to the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value. By this processing, when "0" is stored in the ratio display number, it is updated to "1". As a result, the ratio display number circulates “1” to “5”. Then, the process according to this flowchart is ended.

In step S 2512, it is determined that the display switching time has not elapsed, and in step S 2518, the blinking switching time is updated. Here, the following processing is performed.
(1) The address ("F292 (H)") of the blink switching time is stored in the HL register.
(2) The data stored in the address indicated by the HL register value is subtracted by "1", and the result of the subtraction is stored in the address.
This process executes cyclic subtraction processing that circulates between “0” and “134 (D)” when expressed in decimal notation as the blinking switching time.
Therefore, if the process is performed when the blinking switching time is "0", "134 (D)" (86 (H)) is stored as the blinking switching time.
When the value is "0", the process is performed, and when "134 (D)" (86 (H)) is stored as the blinking switching time, the carry flag is "1".

Next, proceeding to step S2519, it is determined whether the blink switching time has elapsed. In this determination, it is determined whether the carry flag is "1". If the carry flag is "1", it is determined that the blink switching time has not elapsed. If it is determined that the blink switching time has elapsed, the process proceeds to step S 2520. If it is determined that the blink switching time has not elapsed, the processing according to this flowchart ends.
In step S 2520, the blinking switching flag is updated. Here, the following processing is performed.
(1) The address ("F28F (H)") of the blinking switching flag is stored in the HL register.
(2) “1” is added to the data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value, and the result of the addition is stored in the address.
In this process, a cyclic addition process is performed in which the blinking switching flag is circulated between "0" and "1". Therefore, when this process is performed when the blinking switching flag is "1", "0" is stored as the blinking switching flag.
Then, the process according to this flowchart is ended.

FIG. 210 is a flowchart showing ratio display processing (S_LED_OUT) in step S2466 in FIG.
In the twentieth to twenty-fourth embodiments, the ratio display processing (S_LED_OUT) in the case where blinking is not considered has been described (FIG. 135, FIG. 141, FIG. 150, and FIG. 159).
The twenty-sixth embodiment of FIG. 210 is a flowchart based on FIG. 135 of the twentieth embodiment, and differs from the twentieth embodiment (FIG. 135) in that underlines in FIG. I'm pulling. The processing of the step numbers not underlined is the same as that of the twentieth embodiment (FIG. 135).

In FIG. 210, first, in step S1471, the LED display counter is acquired. This process is a process of acquiring the value of the LED display counter and storing it in the D register.
In the next step S1472, it is determined whether there is a ratio display request. Here, it is determined whether there is a display request for any of the digits 6-9. Specifically, the LED display counter value stored in the D register and “11111000 (B)” are ANDed. Then, when the result of the AND operation is not "0", it is determined that the ratio display request is not made, and the processing according to this flowchart is ended. On the other hand, when the result of the AND operation is “0”, it is determined that a ratio display request has been made, and the process proceeds to step S1473.

In the next step S1473, it is determined whether the LED display counter value stored in the D register is "0". If it is determined that the value is "0", the process proceeds to step S1474. If it is determined that the value is not "0", the process proceeds to step S1475.
In step S1474, a ratio (one digit) display request is set. As described in the twentieth embodiment, when the LED display counter is "00000000 (B)" (when the digit 9 signal is on), the D3 bit is assigned because the digit 9 signal is assigned to the D3 bit. Create digit data "00001000 (B)" with "1". In step S1474, this process is executed, and the digit data "00001000 (B)" is stored in the D register. Then, the process proceeds to step S1475.

In the next step S 1475, a ratio display number (address “F 28 E (H)”) is acquired. In this process, a ratio display number is acquired and stored in the A register, and further, a process of storing the A register value in the E register is executed.
Here, based on the ratio display number, the number of blink bit inspections to be described later is determined. For example, the following is an example.
Example 1)
Ratio display number is “1”: the number of blink bit inspections of the advantageous section ratio is acquired.
Example 2)
The ratio display number "2": The number of blink bit inspections of the continuous character ratio (6000 times) is acquired.
Example 3)
Ratio display number "5": The number of blink bit inspections of the character ratio (total cumulative total) is acquired.
Further, by executing processing for storing the A register value in the E register, the A register value and the E register value become the same value.

In the next step S2531, the address of the blink bit inspection frequency table is set. In this process, the HL register stores an address obtained by subtracting “1” from the start address of the blink bit inspection frequency table (TBL_FLASH_CHK).
FIG. 211 is a diagram of a blink bit inspection frequency table (TBL_FLASH_CHK). As shown in FIG. 211, predetermined values (for example, the value corresponding to the advantageous segment ratio is “7 (H)”) are stored for each ratio.
And the top address is "2510 (H)". Therefore, "250 F (H)" is stored in the HL register.

The “flash bit inspection count” is a value indicating how many bits ahead from the D0th bit in the blink request flag of the address “F28D (H)” reach the bit to be inspected.
For example, in FIG. 211, “7 (H)” is stored in the advantageous section ratio, continuous character product ratio (total), and character product ratio (total), but this is the D0 bit in the blinking request flag It is a value for judging whether or not the value of the seventh D6 bit counted from the eye is "1". The D6th bit is a flag that is "1" when the total number of games has not reached 175,000 times, and when the D6th bit is "1", as shown in FIG. 184, the advantageous interval The identification segments of the ratio, the continuous role ratio (total), and the role ratio (total) are blinked.
Further, in FIG. 211, “6 (H)” is stored in the continuous character ratio (6000 times) and the character ratio (6000 times), which corresponds to the D0 bit from the blinking request flag. This is a value for determining whether or not the sixth D5 bit value is “1”. The D5th bit is a flag which becomes "1" when the total number of games has not reached 6000 times, and when the D5th bit is "1", as shown in FIG. The item segment (6000 times) and the feature segment (6000 times) identification segment are subject to blinking.

In the next step S 2532, the identification segment blink bit inspection count is set. Here, the following processing is performed.
(1) Data obtained by adding the A register value to the HL register value is stored in the HL register.
(2) The data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in the B register.
For example, when the A register value (the ratio display number stored in step S1475) is "3",
250 F (H) + 3 (H) = 2512 (H) (= HL register value)
6 (H) (= B register value)
It becomes.
In other words, "250 F (H)" is the reference address, and the data stored in the ratio display number (address "F 28 E (H)") is used as the offset value to calculate the address of the blink bit inspection table and store it in the address It is possible to obtain the data that is being
In the above example, “6 (H)”, which is information for determining whether to blink the identification segment at the character item ratio (6000 times) stored in the address “2512 (H)”, is acquired Be done.
Next, proceeding to step S1476, the identification segment offset table is set. This process is a process of storing the top address of the identification segment offset table ("TBL_SEGID_DATA" in FIG. 127) in the HL register. Although not shown in FIG. 127, the start address is “2520 (H)” in the twenty-sixth embodiment, and a value (251 F (H)) obtained by subtracting “1” from this address is stored in the HL register. .

In the next step S1477, an identification segment offset value is acquired. This process is a process of reading from the identification segment offset table, using the ratio display number stored in the A register in step S1475 as the offset value.
Specifically, the following processing is performed.
(1) Data obtained by adding the A register value to the HL register value is stored in the HL register.
(2) The data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in the A register.
Thus, for example, when the ratio display number is "1", "2520 (H)" obtained by adding "1 (H)" to "251 F (H)" is stored in the HL register and stored in the address. The stored data "7A (H)" is stored in the A register. Also, when the ratio display number is “2”, “2521 (H)” obtained by adding “2 (H)” to “251 F (H)” is stored in the HL register, and the data stored in the address “6 B (H)” which is

  In the next step S1478, it is determined whether or not there is a display request (display request for digit 6) of the ratio (1000 digits). Here, it is determined whether the D0 bit of the value (LED display counter value) stored in the D register is “1”, and when it is “1”, it is determined that the display request is present. If there is a display request for the ratio (1000 digits), the process proceeds to step S1482, and if there is no display request, the process proceeds to step S1479.

  In step S1479, it is determined whether there is a display request (display request for digit 7) of the ratio (100 digits). Here, it is determined whether the D1 bit of the value stored in the D register is “1”, and when it is “1”, it is determined that the display request is present. If there is a display request for the ratio (100 digits), the process proceeds to step S1483, and if there is no display request, the process proceeds to step S2533.

In step S 2533, the number of rate segment check bit inspections is set. Here, the following processing is performed.
(1) Store the E register value in the A register.
(2) A register value is stored in B register.
Here, the ratio display number acquired in step S1475 is stored in the E register. Therefore, the same value is stored in the E register, the A register, and the B register.
Next, the process proceeds to step S1480. When the process advances to step S1480, there is no display request for the ratio (1000 digits) and the ratio (100 digit), that is, no display request for the identification segment (when the ratio segment is displayed). Therefore, in step S1480, ratio data is acquired.
In step S1480, a numerical value corresponding to the ratio display number stored in the E register is obtained. For example, when the E register value is "00000001 (B)" corresponding to the ratio display number "1", the advantageous interval ratio data is acquired.

The acquisition of specific ratio data is as follows.
(1) The HL register stores a value ("F284 (H)") obtained by subtracting "1" from the address ("F285 (H)") of the RWM 53 in which the advantageous section ratio data is stored.
(2) Data obtained by adding the A register value to the HL register value is stored in the HL register.
(3) The data stored at the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in the A register.
That is, the RWM address at which the ratio data is stored is calculated (designated) using “F284 (H)” as the reference address and the ratio display number as the offset value, and the data stored at the RWM address is registered (storage area) Can be acquired (stored).
As a result of this processing, in the A register, the advantageous interval ratio data, the continuous character ratio data (6000 times), the character ratio data (6000 times), the continuous character ratio data (total), the character ratio data (total) An offset value for storing any ratio is stored. This offset value (A register value) is used when acquiring ratio display segment data in step S1484.

Next, proceeding to step S1481, it is determined whether there is a display request (display request for the digit 9) of the ratio (one digit). This process is a process of determining whether the D3 bit of the value stored in the D register is "1". If there is a display request for the ratio (one digit), the process proceeds to step S1483, and if there is no display request, the process proceeds to step S1482.
If it is determined in step S1481 that no ratio (one digit) display request has been made, it means that there is a ratio (10 digit) display request.

If there is a display request for a ratio (1000 digits) or a ratio (10 digits) by the above processing, the process proceeds to step S1482. If a display request for a ratio (100 digits) or a ratio (1 digit) is performed, the process proceeds to step S1483. .
In step S1482, the upper digit offset is set. When the process proceeds to step S1482, the upper digit of the identification segment or the ratio segment is lit. At this time, the identification segment offset value (step S1477) or ratio data (step S1480) is stored in the A register. And here, the following processing is performed.
(1) Swap the lower 4 bits and the upper 4 bits stored in the A register.
For example, when the data before replacement is “0011/1001 (B)” (“/” indicates the boundary between the upper 4 bits and the lower 4 bits), the lower 4 bits and the upper 4 bits are replaced. And “1001/0011 (B)”.
(2) The A register value and “00001111 (B)” are ANDed with each other, and the operation result is stored in the A register. This process is a process of masking (making “0”) the upper 4 bits in order to use the lower 4 bits of the A register as an offset value.
As described above, among the 1-byte data of the identification segment offset value and the 1-byte data of the offset value for displaying the ratio, the high-order 4 bits correspond to the high-order offset value and the low-order 4 bits are low-order Corresponds to the offset value. Therefore, by performing the above processing, an offset value for acquiring high-order segment data is generated.

In the next step S1483, the ratio display segment data table (TBL_SEGRATE_DATA) is set. This process is a process of storing the start address of the ratio display segment data table in the HL register in FIG.
Although the address is not shown in FIG. 127, in the twenty-sixth embodiment, since the top address is "2530 (H)", "2530 (H)" is stored in the HL register.

Next, at step S1484, segment output data is acquired. In this processing, the A register value (offset value) is added to the HL register value (the start address of the ratio display segment data table), and data corresponding to the address of the ratio display segment data table after addition is stored in the E register. It is a process.
Specifically, for example,
HL register value = 2530 (H) (before addition; start address value of ratio display segment data table)
A register value = 5 (H)
When
HL register value = 2535 (H) (after addition)
E register value = 01101101 (B) ("5" display data)
It becomes.

Next, proceeding to step S1485, it is determined whether the segment P is displayed. In this embodiment, when the digits 6 to 9 are displayed, the segment P (dot) of the digit 7 is always displayed. Therefore, when the display request for the ratio (100 digits) is requested, it is determined that the segment P is displayed. . On the other hand, when there is a display request for the ratio (1 digit), the ratio (10 digit), and the ratio (1000 digit), it is determined that there is no display request for the segment P.
Here, for example, it is determined whether the D1 bit of the value stored in the D register is “1”. When it is “1”, it is determined that there is a display request for segment P, and when it is not “1”. Determines that there is no display request for the segment P. Specifically, the following processing is performed.
(1) Store "00000010 (B)" in the A register.
(2) The A register value and the D register value (the LED display counter value stored in step S1471) are ANDed, and when the calculation result is not "0", it is determined that there is a display request for the segment P.

If it is determined that the display request for the segment P is requested, the process proceeds to step S1486. If it is determined that the display request is not requested, the process proceeds to step S2534.
In step S1486, output data corresponding to segment P is set. Since segment P corresponds to D7 bit of 8-bit data, the segment data (E register value) acquired in step S1484 is ORed with “10000000 (B)”, and the operation result is stored in E register. Remember.

In the next step S2534, a blink request flag is acquired. This process is a process of storing the data of the blink request flag (address "F28D (H)") in the A register.
Next, proceeding to step S2535, the blinking bit inspection is performed. This process is a process of shifting the A register to the right by "1" and storing the result of the shift and overflow in the carry flag. That is, the value of the D0 bit before the shift by "1" is stored in the carry flag. Therefore, if the value of the D0 bit before the "1" shift is "0", the carry flag = "0", and if the value of the D0 bit before the "1" shift is "1", the carry flag = "1" Become.

In the next step S2536, it is determined whether the inspection has been completed. Here, the following processing is performed.
(1) Subtract "1" from the B register value.
(2) If it is determined that the B register value is "0", it is determined that the inspection has ended.
If it is determined that the examination has been completed, the process proceeds to step S2537. If it is determined that the examination is not completed, the process returns to step S2535.
By the above processing, the value of the blink request flag is shifted to the right by the number of times initially stored in the B register, and the result of the shift and overflow is stored in the carry flag.

For example, when the value of the blink request flag is "01000000 (B)" (the 175000 blink flag of the D6th bit is on) and the B register value is "7 (H)",
1st time: "01000000 (B)" → "00100000 (B)", carry flag = "0"
B register value = 7-1 = 6 (H)
Second time: "00100000 (B)" → "00010000 (B)", carry flag = "0"
B register value = 6-1 = 5 (H)
Third time: "00010000 (B)" → "0000 1000 (B)", carry flag = "0"
B register value = 5-1 = 4 (H)
Fourth time: "00001000 (B)" → "00000100 (B)", carry flag = "0"
B register value = 4-1 = 3 (H)
Fifth time: "00000100 (B)" → "00000010 (B)", carry flag = "0"
B register value = 3-1 = 2 (H)
Sixth time: "00000010 (B)" → "00000001 (B)", carry flag = "0"
B register value = 2-1 = 1 (H)
Seventh time: "00000001 (B)" → "00000000 (B)", carry flag = "1"
B register value = 1-1 = 0 (H)
It becomes.

  In step S2537, it is determined whether the blink request flag is on. In this process, it is determined whether or not the carry flag when it is determined in step S2536 that the inspection is finished is "1", and when it is "1", it is determined that the blink request flag is on. If it is determined that the blink request flag is on, the process proceeds to step S2538. If it is determined that the blink request flag is not on, the process proceeds to step S1487.

In step S2538, it is determined whether the blink switching flag is on. Here, the following processing is performed.
(1) The data of the blink switching flag (address "F28F (H)") is stored in the A register.
(2) When the A register value is "0" (second zero flag = "1"), it is determined that the blink switching flag is not on.
If it is determined that the blinking switching flag is on, the process proceeds to step S2539. If it is determined that the blinking switching flag is not on, the process proceeds to step S1487.
Note that from steps S2537 and S2538,
a) If the blink request flag is off ("No" in step S2537), the process does not proceed to step S2538, and therefore the light does not turn off even if the blink switching flag is on.
b) Even if the blink request flag is on ("Yes" in step S2537), if the blink switching flag is off ("No" in step S2538), the light is on.
c) If the blink request flag is on (“Yes” in step S2537) and the blink switching flag is on (“Yes” in step S2538), the process proceeds to step S2539, and is therefore unlit.

In step S2539, the segment data is cleared. This process is a process of storing the B register value in the E register.
Here, the B register value is always "0" when it is determined in step S2536 that the inspection is completed. Therefore, this process is a process of setting "0" in the E register. That is, when the blink request flag is on (“1”) and the blink switching flag is on (“1”, ie, off), the display to be lit is turned off in the interrupt processing, so the segment In order to set data (E register value) to "00000000 (B)", the process of step S2539 is executed. Then, the process proceeds to step S1487.

In step S1487, a segment signal is output from output port 3 and a digit signal is output from output port 4 in order to output a digit signal and a segment signal. Here, the following processing is performed.
(1) Exchange the DE register value with the HL register value.
Here, a digit signal is stored in the D register. In addition, segment signals are stored in the E register. And
Replace the data stored in the D register with the data stored in the H register,
Interchange the data stored in the E register with the data stored in the L register.
By this,
A digit signal is stored in the H register,
A segment signal is stored in the L register.
(2) The L register value is output to the output port 3, and the H register value is output to the output port 4.
As a result, the process according to this flowchart is ended, and the process proceeds to step S2467 in FIG.

Twenty-Seventh Embodiment
In the twenty-sixth embodiment, ratio setting processing is executed in step S2193 during the main processing of FIG. 188, and ratio calculation processing is executed in step S2243 in this ratio setting processing (FIG. 191).
On the other hand, in the twenty-seventh embodiment, one item is calculated by one interruption for the ratio of five items and ring buffer number updating (total six items). In the twenty-seventh embodiment, the ring buffer number update is included and referred to as “ratio calculation”.

  Here, it is of course possible to execute ratio calculation of six items at one interruption. However, since interrupt processing includes various processing (see FIG. 190), it is desirable to minimize the time required for ratio calculation. Therefore, in the twenty-seventh embodiment, ratio calculation of one item is executed in one interruption process.

Three examples (1) to (3) will be given as a twenty-seventh embodiment. And the process corresponding to each embodiment is as follows.
a) Twenty-seventh embodiment (1)
Main processing (M_MAIN): The same as in the 26th embodiment. Rate setting processing (S_RATE_SET): FIG. 212
Ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY): Fig. 213
Ratio calculation management (S_CAL_CTL): Fig. 214 (process unique to the 27th embodiment)
Ratio calculation process (S_CAL_SET): Figure 215
Ring buffer number update (S_RONGNO_SET): identical to the 26th embodiment (FIG. 205)
Ratio display processing (S_LED_OUT): identical to the 26th embodiment (FIG. 210)

b) 27th embodiment (2)
Main processing (M_MAIN): Figure 216
Ratio set processing (S_RATE_SET): Fig. 217
Ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY): identical to the 26th embodiment (FIG. 206)
Ratio calculation management (S_CAL_CTL): identical to the 27th embodiment (1) (FIG. 214)
Ratio calculation process (S_CAL_SET): identical to the 27th embodiment (1) (FIG. 215)
Ring buffer number update (S_RONGNO_SET): identical to the 26th embodiment (FIG. 205)
Ratio display processing (S_LED_OUT): identical to the 26th embodiment (FIG. 210)

b) 27th embodiment (3)
Setting change process (M_RANK_SET): Figure 218
Power-on ratio calculation (S_CAL_PWON): Fig. 219
Main processing (M_MAIN): Figure 220
Rate setting process (S_RATE_SET): identical to the twenty-seventh embodiment (2) (FIG. 217)
Ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY): identical to the 26th embodiment (FIG. 206)
Ratio calculation management (S_CAL_CTL): identical to the 27th embodiment (1) (FIG. 214)
Ratio calculation process (S_CAL_SET): identical to the 27th embodiment (1) (FIG. 215)
Ring buffer number update (S_RONGNO_SET): identical to the 26th embodiment (FIG. 205)
Ratio display processing (S_LED_OUT): identical to the 26th embodiment (FIG. 210)

Twenty-Seventh Embodiment (1)>
In the twenty-seventh embodiment (1), ratio calculation is performed during interrupt processing.
FIG. 212 is a flowchart showing a rate setting process (S_RATE_SET) of the twenty-seventh embodiment (1), and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 191 of the twenty-sixth embodiment.
In the twenty-seventh embodiment (1), step S2550 in FIG. 212 is executed instead of step S2193 in the main processing (M_MAIN) in FIG.
In the description of the twenty-seventh embodiment, steps carrying out the same processing as in the twenty-sixth embodiment are denoted with the same step numbers, and the explanation will be omitted. Also, in the steps different from the twenty-sixth embodiment, the underlines are drawn below the step numbers.

As shown in FIG. 212, in the ratio setting process, after updating the 400 game counter in step S2242, the process proceeds to step S2551 to execute calculation count setting. In the twenty-seventh embodiment, a storage area of “number of calculations” is provided in the RWM 53. Then, in step S2551, "6" is set in the "calculation count" storage area. In addition, the storage area of the “number of calculations” is set to be out of the range to be cleared at the time of setting change. By doing this, the power is turned off before the calculation of the six items described below is completed, and the power is turned on under the condition where the setting key switch is turned on (transition condition of the setting change mode) Even when the RWM clear is executed at the time of (1), it is possible to execute the computation from the middle without performing the computation from the beginning. In addition, "6" is the interrupt process of six times, advantageous section ratio, continuous character ratio (6000 times), character ratio (6000 times), continuous character ratio (total), character ratio (total ), Which means to perform six items of calculation of ring buffer number update.
If the "calculation count" storage area is cleared at the time of transition to the setting mode, there arises a disadvantage that a part of the ratio is not calculated. For example, when the number of calculations is “4”, the mode is changed to the setting change mode, and if the number of calculations is cleared, the ratio after “3” is not calculated (Note that the relationship between the number of calculations and the ratio See below). Specifically, the character ratio (total), the continuous character ratio (total) will be the latest ratio data, but the character ratio (6000 times), the continuous character ratio (6000 times), the advantageous interval ratio, And the ring buffer number will not be the latest ratio data.
For this reason, even when the mode is shifted to the setting change mode, the storage area of “number of calculations” is not cleared.

In particular, in the present embodiment, the following ratio is calculated according to the number of calculations.
Number of calculations "5" after update (when "1" is subtracted): Role ratio (total)
Number of calculation times after update (when subtracting "1") "4": Continuous part ratio (total)
Number of calculations "3" after update (when subtracting "1"): Feature ratio (6000 times)
Number of calculations after update (when subtracting "1") "2": Continuous part ratio (6000 times)
Number of calculations after update (when subtracting “1”) “1”: Number of calculations after advantage interval ratio update (when subtracting “1”) “0”: Number of ring buffer number update Number of calculations before update “0”: No calculation Also, in the ratio set process of FIG. 212, unlike the twenty-sixth embodiment (FIG. 191), the ratio calculation process (S_CAL_SET) of step S2243 and ring buffer number update (S_RINGNO_SET) of step S2244 are provided in FIG. Absent. These processes are to be executed in the interrupt process.

FIG. 213 is a flowchart showing preparation for ratio display (S_DSP_READY) in the twenty-seventh embodiment (1), and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 206 in the twenty-sixth embodiment.
In the twenty-seventh embodiment (1), step S2560 in FIG. 213 is executed instead of step S2221 in the interrupt processing (I_INTR) in FIG.
In the ratio display preparation of the twenty-seventh embodiment (1), ratio calculation management (S_CAL_CTL) of step S2561 between the register save of step S2463 and the flashing request flag generation (S_LED_FLASH) of step S2464 (FIG. 214 described later) Run. Others are the same as the twenty-sixth embodiment (FIG. 206).

FIG. 214 is a flowchart showing ratio calculation management (S_CAL_CTL) in step S2561 of FIG.
First, in step S2571, the number of calculations is updated. This process is a process of subtracting “1” from the number of calculations of the RWM 53 described above. Here, the following processing is performed.
(1) The address of the number of calculations is stored in the HL register.
(2) The value stored at the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in the A register.
(3) Subtract "1" from the A register value.
(4) The data stored in the A register is stored at the address indicated by the HL register value.

In the next step S2572, it is determined whether the number of calculations before updating in step S2571 is "0". For example, when the A register value in (2) is “0”, it is determined that the number of calculations before updating is “0”. If it is determined that the number of calculations before updating is "0", the processing according to this flowchart is executed. If it is determined that it is not "0", the process proceeds to step S2573.
In step S2573, it is determined whether the number of calculations after the update in step S2571 is "0". For example, when the A register value after subtraction of (3) is “0”, it is determined that the number of calculations after updating is “0”. If it is determined that the number of calculations after update is "0", the process proceeds to step S2575 (ring buffer number update), and if it is determined not to be "0", the process proceeds to step S2574 (ratio calculation process).

In step S2574, ratio calculation processing (S_CAL_SET) (FIG. 215) is executed, and the processing according to this flowchart is ended.
On the other hand, in step S 2575, ring buffer number update (S_RINGNO_SET; FIG. 205) is executed, and the processing according to this flowchart is ended.
As described above, when the number of calculations before updating is not "0" and the number of calculations after updating is not "0", one of five ratios shown in FIG. Do. When the number of calculations before update is not "0" and the number of calculations after update is "0", ring buffer number update is performed.

FIG. 215 is a flowchart showing ratio calculation processing (S_CAL_SET) in step S2574 of FIG. In FIG. 215, the points different from the twenty-sixth embodiment (FIG. 202) are underlined in the step numbers as described above.
First, in the process of FIG. 215, unlike the process of FIG. 202, the process of step S2381, step S2382, and step S2407 in FIG. 202 is not performed. As described above, the number of calculations in the ratio calculation process is one.
After the ratio calculation RWM address table set in step S2385, the process proceeds to step S2581.

In step S 2581, the count upper limit flag (address “F 28 B (H)”) is acquired. Next, proceeding to step S 2582, it is checked whether ratio calculation should be performed. In the twenty-seventh embodiment, when it is determined by the count upper limit flag that the number of games has reached the count upper limit, it is determined that the advantageous section ratio is not calculated. When it is determined by the count upper limit flag that the payout number has reached the count upper limit, it is determined that the combination ratio (6000 times and total) and the continuous combination ratio (6000 times and total) are not calculated.
In this point, the twenty-seventh embodiment differs from the twenty-sixth embodiment (in the twenty-sixth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 202, the ratio is uniformly determined without determining whether the count upper limit value has been reached or not. I performed the calculation.).
Next, proceeding to step S 2583, it is determined whether or not ratio calculation processing is to be performed. For example, in the case of calculating the advantageous section ratio in the present interrupt processing, when the gaming number upper limit flag of the count upper limit flag is “0”, it is determined to calculate the advantageous section ratio. On the other hand, when the number-of-games upper limit flag of the count upper limit flag is "1", it is determined that the calculation of the advantageous segment ratio is not performed.

Further, for example, when calculating the combination ratio (total) in the interrupt processing of this time, when the payout number upper limit flag of the count upper limit flag is "0", it is determined to calculate the combination ratio (total) . On the other hand, when the payout number upper limit flag of the count upper limit flag is "1", it is determined that the calculation of the character ratio (total) is not performed.
If it is determined in step S 2583 that the calculation is to be performed, the process proceeds to step S 2386. If it is determined that the calculation is not to be performed, the process according to this flowchart ends.

Twenty-Seventh Embodiment (2)
In the twenty-seventh embodiment (2), as in the twenty-sixth embodiment, ratio calculation is performed during main processing.
FIG. 216 is a flowchart showing the main processing (M_MAIN) of the twenty-seventh embodiment (2), and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 188 of the twenty-sixth embodiment.
In the twenty-seventh embodiment (2), a setting change flag is provided as a flag stored in the RWM 53. When the setting change flag is on, it means that the setting can be changed, and when it is off, it means that the setting can not be changed.
In FIG. 216, after the end of the game start setting in step S2172, the process proceeds to step S2591 and the setting change flag is turned on. When the operation of the start switch 41 is detected in step S2178, the setting change flag is turned off in the next step S2592. Thereby, during the game standby (before the game start (operation of the start switch 41)), the setting can be changed, and after the game is started (after the start switch 41 is operated), the setting can not be changed.

Such setting is made in the twenty-seventh embodiment to calculate the ratio of one item in one interruption process. Specifically, since ratio calculation (ratio setting process in step S 2593) is performed after medals are paid out during the main processing, the process shifts to setting change processing before all calculations (six times) are completed, and RWM 53 clear processing is performed. If it is done, when performing ratio display by subsequent interrupt processing, calculation is completed for one ratio, but calculation is not completed for another ratio, and updating of the ring buffer number is normal. In order to prevent the occurrence of abnormalities such as not being performed, a setting change prohibited section is provided.
In the example of FIG. 216, the setting changeable section is from the game start setting to before the operation of the start switch 41, and the setting change impossible section from the operation of the start switch 41 to before the game start setting for the next game. Therefore, even if the power is turned off while looping steps S2190 to S2594, the process does not shift to the setting change process.

  In addition, if interruption is permitted after ratio setting processing in step S 2593 to execute six calculations after medal payout (step S 2195), the process proceeds to step S 2594 and whether the number of calculations is “0” or not If it is not "0", the process returns to step S2190 to execute interrupt waiting processing. After that, when interrupt processing is performed, ratio setting processing (one-time ratio calculation) is performed again in step S2593. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2594 that the value is "0", then the process proceeds to step S2196 to execute game end check processing.

FIG. 217 is a flowchart showing a rate setting process (S_RATE_SET) in the twenty-seventh embodiment (2), which is the process of step S 2593 in FIG.
In the twenty-seventh embodiment (1), ratio calculation management (S_CAL_CTL) is not executed in the ratio setting process (S_RATE_SET; FIG. 212), and ratio calculation in step S2561 in the ratio display preparation (S_DSP_READY) of FIG. Management (S_CAL_CTL) was executed.
On the other hand, in the twenty-seventh embodiment (2), ratio calculation management (S_CAL_CTL) is executed in the ratio setting process (S_RATE_SET) of FIG. 217 (step S2603). Therefore, ratio calculation management (S_CAL_CTL) is not executed in preparation for ratio display. The ratio display preparation of the twenty-seventh embodiment (2) is the same as that of the twenty-sixth embodiment (FIG. 206) as described above.

In FIG. 217, after the process of step S2234, the process proceeds to step S2601, and it is determined whether the number of calculations is “0”. If it is determined that the number of calculations is not "0", the process proceeds to step S2603 (ratio calculation management). On the other hand, if it is determined that the number of calculations is "0", the process proceeds to step S2235 (count upper limit check).
Further, after the processing of step S2242, the processing proceeds to step S2602 to set the number of calculations (“6”) as in the twenty-seventh embodiment (1) (in FIG. 212, step S2551). Accordingly, when it is determined in step S2601 that the number of calculations is "0", the number of calculations is set to "6" in step S2602.

Twenty-Seventh Embodiment (3)>
In the twenty-seventh embodiment (3), ratio calculation is performed during setting change processing and main processing.
FIG. 218 is a flowchart showing setting change processing (M_RANK_SET) in the twenty-seventh embodiment (3), and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 186 of the twenty-sixth embodiment.
The setting change process in FIG. 218 is different from that in the twenty-sixth embodiment (FIG. 186) in that when initialization (outside the use area) is finished in step S2131, power on ratio calculation (S_CAL_PWON) in step S2611 is performed. . In this power on ratio calculation, ratio calculation of six items is performed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2133 to activate an interrupt. In the twenty-seventh embodiment (3), ratio calculation is not performed in interrupt processing.

FIG. 219 is a flowchart showing power-on ratio calculation (S_CAL_PWON) in step S2611 of FIG.
First, in step S2621, the stack pointer is saved. In this process, the stack pointer (SP register) stored in the stack area is stored in the stack pointer temporary storage buffer 2 (address "F293 (H)").
As described above, since the ratio calculation is a program that is executed outside the used area, when executing a program outside the used area, the stack pointer is saved and the program is executed in the used area (first program). Return stack pointer when returning.
In the next step S2622, the stack pointer (outside the used area) is set. This process is a process of storing "F400 (H)" in the stack pointer (SP register).
In the next step S2623, the register is saved. This process is a process of saving various registers in the stack area (outside the used area).
Next, proceeding to step S2624, the upper address of RWM 53 is set in the Q register. This process is a process of storing "F2 (H)" in the Q register.

In the next step S2625, ratio calculation management (S_CAL_CTL) is executed. This ratio calculation management is processing similar to that of the twenty-seventh embodiment (1) (FIG. 214). Then, in the next step S2626, it is determined whether or not the number of calculations has become "0". If it is determined that the number of calculations is “0”, the process proceeds to step S2627. If it is determined that the number of calculations is not “0”, the process returns to step S2625 to execute ratio calculation.
Then, after the ratio calculation of the six items is completed and the process proceeds to step S2627, the register is restored. This processing is processing for restoring the various registers saved in step S2623.
In the next step S2628, the stack pointer is returned. This processing is processing for storing the stack pointer saved in step S2621, that is, the data stored in the stack pointer temporary storage buffer 2 in the stack pointer (SP register). Then, the process according to this flowchart is ended.

FIG. 220 is a flow chart showing the main processing (M_MAIN) in the twenty-seventh embodiment (3) (transition is made after the setting change processing in FIG. 218) and is a flow chart corresponding to FIG. 188 of the twenty-sixth embodiment .
In the twenty-seventh embodiment (3), as in the twenty-sixth embodiment, ratio calculation (ratio setting process in step S2641) is executed during the main process. This ratio setting process is the same process as the twenty-seventh embodiment (2) (FIG. 217). That is, ratio calculation management (S_CAL_CTL) (FIG. 214) is executed until the number of calculations becomes “0”.
In addition, every time ratio setting processing is executed, the processing proceeds to step S2642, and it is determined whether or not the number of calculations is "0". If it is determined that "0", then the game ending check processing of step S2196 is performed. The process proceeds to step S2190 when it is determined that the value is not "0", and the ratio setting process (step S2641) is executed again.
In the main processing of the twenty-seventh embodiment (3), ratio calculation is performed in both setting change processing and main processing, and in setting change processing, ratio calculation is performed before interrupt processing. As in the main process 2) (FIG. 216), there is no need to provide a setting change impossible period.

The twenty-sixth and twenty-seventh embodiments of the present invention have been described above, but the twenty-sixth and twenty-seventh embodiments are not limited to the above-described embodiments, and various modifications may be made as described below, for example. .
(1) In the twenty-sixth embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 188 and 191, the count upper limit check (S_LIMIT_CHK) is performed for each game. Therefore, the count upper limit flag is updated every game.
On the other hand, it is also possible to update the count upper limit flag only in the game in which the number of games or the number of payouts has reached the upper limit.
In this case, in FIG. 192, the value of the count upper limit flag is determined first (before step S2251), and when the D0 and D1 bits are “1”, the process of count upper limit check may be ended. .
In addition, without providing a count upper limit flag, it is determined whether or not the total game number counter and the total payout (total) counter is 3 bytes full, and if 3 bytes full, it is determined that it is a count upper limit. Is also possible. Examples of this method include the following a) the first method and b) the second method.

a) First Method The total game number counter and the total payout (cumulative) counter are each composed of 3 bytes. Here, the most significant byte is the A byte, and the lower two bytes are the B byte and the C byte (the least significant byte is the C byte).
Then, it is calculated as follows whether or not all the A, B, and C bytes are full (3 bytes full ("FFFFFF (H)")).
First, the A-th byte and the B-th byte are ANDed. Next, “FF (H)” is subtracted from the result of the AND operation. As a result, when it becomes "0" (zero flag = "1"), it shifts to the next calculation. When the zero flag ≠ “1”, it is determined that the 3-byte is not full at that point, and the operation is completed.
In the next operation, the A-th byte and the C-th byte are ANDed. Next, “FF (H)” is subtracted from the result of the AND operation. As a result, when “0” (zero flag = “1”) is obtained, it is determined that the 3-byte is full, and when the zero flag is “1”, it is determined that the 3-byte is not full.

In the above calculation, if “FF (H)” and “FF (H)” are ANDed, the calculation result is “FF (H)”, and “FF (H)” to “FF (H)” This is because the zero flag = "1" is obtained by subtracting.
Then, if the zero flag = "1" as the calculation result of the A byte and the B byte, and if the zero flag = "1" as the calculation result of the A byte and the C byte, then the A byte and the B byte , And C byte are all "FF (H)".
The above is applied not only to the total game number counter but also to the total payout (total) counter.

b) Second method Of the 3-byte counter, the B byte and C byte, which are the lower 2 bytes, are stored, for example, in the HL register. Then, "1" is added to the HL register value. By this addition, when the carry flag = “1”, the operation proceeds to the next operation, and when the carry flag ≠ “1”, the operation ends at this point. The carry flag ≠ “1” means that the HL register value is not “FF”.
When carry flag = “1”, the A byte which is the upper 1 byte is stored in the A register. Then, carry flag = “1” is added to the A register. As a result, when carry flag = “1”, it is determined that the 3-byte is full, and when carry flag ≠ “1”, it is determined that the 3-byte is not full.
If it is calculated as described above, it is necessary to calculate every time it is judged whether or not 3 bytes are full, but it is not necessary to have the count upper limit flag of the address "F28B (H)".

(2) In the above embodiment, the ratio display switching time "about 5.0 seconds" is set to the number of interrupts "2144 (D)", and the blinking switching time "about 0.3 seconds" is the number of interrupts "134". (D) was set. As a result, when the identification segment or the ratio segment is displayed in a blinking manner, it is possible to switch the content of the ratio display at the timing of switching from off to on.
However, the present invention is not limited to this. The display switching time may be the number of interrupts closest to "about 5.0 seconds", and the blink switching time may be the number of interrupts closest to "about 0.3 seconds". .
For example, the number of interrupts for counting the display switching time may be “2237 (D)” (2237 × 2.235 ≒ 4999.695 ms).
The number of interrupts closest to “about 0.3 seconds” at the time of flickering switching is “134 (D)”, and so is the same as the twenty-sixth embodiment.

When setting in this way, it is conceivable that “5.0” seconds of the display switching time will be reached immediately after switching the identification segment or ratio segment from off to on. In this case, for example, when the display is switched to the next display immediately after switching from the non-lighting to the lighting, the display content is switched after being lighted for a moment.
For example, when it is time to switch from on to off, and when to switch off from on to turn off (does not look good, does not make you think you may be out of order) When it arrives, the remaining time of the display switching time is determined, and when the remaining time is, for example, "0.3" seconds or less, the blinking switching timer may not be updated.

  As a specific example, for example, when the identification segment or the ratio segment is flickering, when the remaining time of the display switching time becomes, for example, "0.3" seconds or less, the current time until the display switching time arrives, Maintain (extend) the lighted or unlit state as it is. Then, when the display switching time comes, the display is switched to the next ratio display (at this switching time, the blinking switching time is reset). Here, when the display switching time becomes “0” while maintaining the unlit state, when blinking the next ratio display, it may be started from the lit state. On the other hand, when the display switching time becomes “0” while maintaining the lighted state, when blinking the next ratio display, it may be started from the lighted state.

(3) Contrary to the above example, the display switching time may be varied based on the blinking switching time. For example, as in the case of the twenty-sixth embodiment, the blinking cycle is set to "0.6" seconds (light on "0.3 seconds", light off "0.3" seconds).
Then, when switching from on to off and when switching from off to on, the remaining time of the display switching time is determined, and when the remaining display time is, for example, “0.2” seconds or less, the current time The ratio display may be ended and the next ratio display may be started (the display switching time may be reset).
Here, when the ratio display is switched, when the next ratio display also satisfies the blinking condition, it may be started from either lighting or extinguishing. In addition, when the previous ratio display ends with the light off, the next ratio display may start from lighting, and when the previous ratio display ends with the light, the next ratio display may start from light extinguished.

(4) The clear (initialization) range when the RWM error after power-on occurs / when it does not occur shown in the twenty-sixth embodiment is an example, and the present invention is not limited to this.
For example, first, the RWM 53 address for calculation and display (for example, "F210 (H)" to "F289 (H)") is cleared as a clear range of RWM when it is not determined that RWM is abnormal at power on. The address of the RWM 53 related to the timer or the like (for example, “F28A (H)” and thereafter) may be set to the clear range without setting the range. In this case, after RWM is cleared, display is started from the advantageous section ratio. In addition, the display time of the advantageous section ratio is an initial setting value (about 5 seconds).
Second, as the clear range of RWM when it is not determined that the RWM is abnormal when the power is turned on, the address of RWM 53 regarding calculation, display, and timer (for example, “F210 (H)” to “F292 (H)” ) May not be set in the clear range, and the addresses of the other RWMs 53 (for example, “F293 (H)” and thereafter) may be set in the clear range. In this case, the display is not necessarily started from the advantageous segment ratio after the RWM is cleared. Specifically, the display is started from the display item displayed when the power is turned off. Further, the display time of the display item is not necessarily displayed for about 5 seconds. For example, if the power is turned off after "T" seconds have elapsed since the display of the character ratio (6000 times), the display of the character ratio (6000 times) starts after the RWM clears, and The display time is "5-T" seconds.

(5) In the twenty-sixth embodiment, medal payout number data (F040 (H)) and medal payout number buffer (F041 (H)) are provided as storage areas of the RWM 53. On the other hand, it is also possible to execute counting of the number of payouts using only medal payout number data without providing the medal payout number buffer.
As described above, the medal payout number data is decremented by “1” each time the stored number of 1 sheet addition or 1 medal payout process is executed once.
Therefore, each time the stored number-of-sheets addition or the medal-of-a-day payout processing is performed once, “1” may be added to the storage area storing the number of payouts for ratio calculation.

(6) In the twenty-sixth embodiment, in the ratio calculation process (S_CAL_SET), the dividend of the tens place and the one's place are multiplied by 10 (calculated value set (S_CAL_SET)). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the value of the dividend may be multiplied by 100, and the divisor may be repeatedly subtracted until it becomes "0" or more and less than the divisor.
Specifically, in the calculation of “Y (dividend) / X (divisor)”,
a) Calculate "100 x Y" where "Y" is multiplied by 100.
b) Subtracting “X” from “100 × Y”, and if the value after the subtraction is “X” or more, by repeatedly subtracting “X” from the value after the subtraction,
0 ≦ (100 × Y−X × R) <X
There is a method of calculating “R” (ratio) satisfying

(7) As a method of setting 99% in the ratio calculation processing (S_CAL_SET), methods other than the method shown in FIG. 202 are also possible.
FIG. 221 is a flowchart showing another example of the process after step S2400 in FIG. In FIG. 221, underlines are drawn below the step numbers for processes different from those in FIG.
In FIG. 221, after performing ratio calculation execution (S_CAL_EXE) of one's place in step S2400, the process proceeds to S2651 and 99% is set as the ratio. Specifically, processing of storing “99 (H)” is executed at the RWM address corresponding to the calculated ratio.

In the next step S2652, it is determined whether the calculated ratio is "99" or more. When the calculated ratio is "99" or "100", it becomes "Yes". If it is determined that the calculated ratio is "99" or more, the process proceeds to step S2402, and if it is determined that the calculated ratio is not "99" or more, the process proceeds to step S2401. In step S2401, as described above, the calculation result buffer is acquired. Therefore, when the calculated ratio is "99" or more, the ratio "99" set in step S2651 is maintained, and the process proceeds to step S2402 without performing the process of step S2401 (acquisition of calculation result buffer). initialize. The subsequent processing is the same as that of the twenty-sixth embodiment (FIG. 202).
Also in the twenty-seventh embodiment (1) (FIG. 215), FIG. 221 (however, there is no processing in step S2407) can be applied.

(8) In the twenty-sixth and twenty-seventh embodiments, for example, as shown in step S2390 in FIG. 202, when the divisor (the value of the denominator) is “0”, ratio calculation is not performed. Here, in the calculation value set of step S2389, in order not to execute the ratio calculation process when the divisor is “0”, the zero flag is set to “1”.
However, the present invention is not limited to this, in the calculated value set of step S2389 (FIG. 203), before step S2411, it is determined whether the dividend (the numerator value) is “0” or not. When it is determined, the zero flag may be set to “1” (note that when it is determined that the dividend is “0”, the processing according to this flowchart is ended without executing the processing of step S 2411 and subsequent steps). ). As a result, at the end of the calculation value set, when either the divisor or the dividend is “0”, the zero flag is “1”. Then, the process proceeds to step S2390 in FIG. 202, and it is determined whether or not either the divisor or the dividend is “0”, and when any is “0” (ie, when the zero flag = “1”) The step S2407 may proceed to the step S2407 without calculating the ratio after the step S2391.

(9) In the twenty-sixth embodiment, in the ratio calculation process (FIG. 202), a process of subtracting “A0 (H)” from the calculated ratio is performed in step S2404, and when there is no borrow, the ratio is “100”. It is judged that it is%.
On the other hand, before performing the ratio calculation process, it is possible to determine whether the ratio is 100%, and when it is determined that the ratio is 100%, it is possible not to execute the ratio calculation process. . For example, the dividend (number to be divided) and the divisor (number to be divided) are compared to determine whether they match or not, and when it is determined that they match, it can be determined that the ratio is 100%. However, if it is determined whether at least one of the dividend or the divisor is “0” and it is determined that at least one of the dividend or the divisor is “0”, the ratio is determined not to be 100% (divided or When at least one of the divisors is "0", the ratio is 0%.
Therefore, when the ratio calculation process of FIG. 202 is started, the following process is provided before the process of step S2381.

a) The dividend (number to be divided) and the divisor (number to be divided) are compared with each other to determine whether they coincide. If it is determined that they match, the process proceeds to b) below. If it is determined that they do not match, the process proceeds to step S2381 in FIG.
b) Determine whether the dividend is "0". If it is determined that it is not "0", the process proceeds to c) below, and if it is determined that it is "0", the process proceeds to step S2407 in FIG. 202 without performing the ratio calculation.
c) Determine whether the divisor is "0". If it is determined that the dividend is not “0”, the dividend and the divisor match, and neither the dividend nor the divisor is “0”. Therefore, the processing proceeds to step S2405 in FIG. On the other hand, if it is determined to be "0", the process proceeds to step S2407 in FIG. 202 without performing ratio calculation.
Since the above process includes the determination of whether or not the divisor is “0”, the process of step S2390 in FIG. 202 is unnecessary.

  (10) In the present embodiment, in the storage area of the RWM 53 (for example, the total number-of-games counter at the address "F26D (H)") storing the number of games, "1" is stored each time the number of games is digested by "1". Was added. Similarly, "1" is added to the storage area of the RWM 53 (for example, the total payout (total) counter of the address "F27C (H)") storing the number of payouts, each time one medal is paid out. Thus, the number to be added is made the same value with respect to the number of games and the number of payouts. However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, each time the number of games is digested by “1” and / or each medal is paid out, for example, “2”, “10”, etc. It is also possible to store values other than 1 '. For example, in the number of times of advantageous section games according to the first embodiment, "100 (D)" is added every time one advantageous section is digested. Thus, the number of times played or the number of payouts and the value to be added to the RWM 53 may not necessarily be the same value. Therefore, when adding the number of games, a value corresponding to the number of games may be added, and when adding the number of payouts, a value corresponding to the number of payouts may be added. In the following, for example, the first invention 52 etc., "corresponding value" means this.

  (11) Instead of the storage area (address "F290 (H)") for storing the display switching time, a display switching counter (a storage area of 1 byte) may be provided. In this case, when the blinking switching time has elapsed, updating of the blinking switching flag (address “F28F (H)”) and updating of the display switching counter (“1” addition) are performed. For example, the display switching counter is an increment counter that circulates "0" to "15 (D)", and when "15 (D)" is stored, "1" is added, the ratio display Control to update the number. When "15 (D)" is stored in the display switching counter, "1" is controlled so that "0" is stored. The reason for this control is that “flashing switching time × 16 = display switching time”. With such a configuration, the storage area of the RWM can be reduced. Furthermore, the blink cycle and the display information can be synchronized.

(12) Ratio setting process (for example, in the 26th embodiment shown in FIG. 191, in the 27th embodiment (1) in FIG. 212, in the 27th embodiment (2) in FIG. 217), count upper limit check in step S2335, and step S2236 It is also possible not to provide a judgment as to whether or not the number-of-games upper limit flag is on.
It is also possible not to execute the process after step S2284 in the count-up of FIG. 194 (when “Yes” in step S2282, after performing step S2283, the process according to this flowchart is ended). is there.
When control is performed as described above, processing is performed as follows.
First, in the number-of-games count in FIG. 193, it is determined whether the number-of-games upper limit flag is on before the process of step S2271 (substantially the same process as step S2236). When it is determined that the number-of-games upper limit flag is on, the number-of-games count ends.

Further, after the step S2273 is executed in the number-of-games counting in FIG. 193, it is determined whether or not the carry flag is "1". When the carry flag is not "1", the game count count is ended. On the other hand, when the carry flag is "1", the D0 bit (game number upper limit flag) of the count upper limit flag (address "F28B (H)") is set to "1". Here, when the carry flag is “1”, “1” is added in step S 2273 (count up) in FIG. 193 when the total game number counter is the upper limit value (FFFFFF (H)). It is time. In this case, processing is performed to correct the total game number counter to a specific value (here, “FFFFFF (H)”). Then, the game count count ends.
Here, as a reason for correcting the total game number counter to a specific value, it is determined whether or not to blink the identification segment depending on whether 6000 or 175000 games have been executed. This is because the game number counter is referred to. Therefore, the specific value stored in the total game number counter does not necessarily have to be "FFF FFFF (H)", and it can be determined that 175,000 times has been reached, for example, "F 00000 (H)" (in decimal) 15728640 (D) or the like.

Further, in the advantageous section game count in FIG. 195, when “Yes” is determined in step S2291, it is determined whether the number-of-games upper limit flag is on, and when it is determined to be on, the advantageous section game count If it is determined that the count is off and the process is off, the process proceeds to step S2292.
By doing this, it is possible not to add the value of the advantageous section game frequency count from when the total game frequency counter exceeds the upper limit value.

Furthermore, it is also possible not to provide the payout number upper limit buffer set in step S2304 in the payout number counting of FIG.
In this case, it is determined whether or not the carry flag is “1” after the count-up in step S2322 in FIG. 197 in the payout number set in step S2303 in FIG. 196, and the carry flag is “1”. If the carry number is "1", the D1 bit (payout number upper limit flag) of the count upper limit flag (address "F28B (H)") is set to "1", and then the payout is made. Set the number of sheets. Here, the case where the carry flag becomes “1” means that the upper limit (“FFFFFF (H)”) when the number of payout sheets is added to the total payout (total) counter value at count-up in step S2322 in FIG. It is time to exceed).
For example, it is assumed that when the total payout (cumulative) counter value at the time of the “X” game is “FFFFFE (H)”, the small winning combination of eight payouts is won. At this time, "000006 (H)" is stored in the total payout (total) counter by counting up in step S2322. At this time, the carry flag is "1". In this case, the consecutive part payout (total) counter and the combination payout (total) counter after the game including the “X” game are not updated.
In addition, when comprised in this way, the continuous character ratio (cumulative) data of "X-1" game eyes and the character ratio (cumulative) data are data after the said game eyes including "X" game eyes It becomes. This can be achieved by executing a process similar to the process of steps S2581 to S2583 described in FIG. 215 of the twenty-seventh embodiment (1).
Note that the count upper limit flag needs to be stored in a storage area that is not cleared even when the setting change mode is entered.

(13) In the embodiment described above, the winning probability (including single winning and double winning with other roles) of the special roles (in the first embodiment, 1BB (1BBA and 1BBB)) includes the normal section and the advantageous section However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is possible to set different winning probabilities for the normal section and the advantageous section (increase the performance of the bonus during the advantageous section).
Specifically, the winning probability of the special part in the regular section (a combined value including single winning and overlapping winning with another part. Hereinafter, the same applies in the description of (11) and (12) described later), For example, it is set to "1/250" (hereinafter also referred to as "normal probability" in the description of (11) and (12)). Then, in the normal section, the winning probability ratio (hereinafter referred to as BR ratio) of 1BB and RB (newly provided) is set to, for example, “1: 6” (RB is more likely to be won). In addition, the payout number expected value in the 1BB game is premised on exceeding the payout number expected value in the RB game.
After winning the special part in the normal section and ending the special game, it shifts to an advantageous section (optionally whether it is non-AT or AT). Then, in at least a part of the advantageous sections, the winning probability of the special part is set to be higher than the normal probability (for example, it may be set to about “1/30”. Hereinafter, (11) and (12) In the description of 2.), it is also referred to as "high probability".

In this case, first, during the advantageous section, it is possible to set the winning probability of the special combination to the high probability all the time.
Second, in the advantageous section, the winning probability of the first special combination is set to the high probability A, and the winning probability of the second special combination is set to the high probability B (B <A), and the third time Setting the winning probability of the special part to high probability C (C <B) (Similarly, similarly, A>B>C>D> ...) can be mentioned.
Thirdly, the following method may be mentioned.
When the special role is won during the normal section, after the end of the special game, it is shifted to the advantageous section and the first specific RT (finite RT). In the first specific RT, the BR ratio is set to "2: 1" (the 1BB is more likely to be won). When the number of games played in the first specific RT is consumed without winning the special part in the first specific RT, the first specific RT is shifted to the second specific RT. In the second specific RT, the BR ratio is set to, for example, “1: 4”. As a result, since the RB is more likely to be elected, the second specified RT has a lower expected value of the number of medals paid out than the first specified RT. On the other hand, when the special role is won during the first specific RT and it shifts to the special game, the first specific RT is started after resetting the number of times of the first specific RT after the end of the special game.
In addition, the so-called loop rate (probability of winning the special part before digesting the number of times of the first specific RT) from the limited number of games of the first specific RT and the winning probability of the special part during the first specific RT It can be set.

Further, when the special role is won during the second specific RT and the special game is ended, the transition to the first specific RT is made on condition that the end condition of the advantageous section is not satisfied. By setting in this way, for example, if the special winning combination is won during the advantageous section, it is possible to shift to the first specific RT again.
Also, when staying at the first specific RT and at the second specific RT, for example, when reaching the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section, the first specific RT or the second specific RT is satisfied, respectively. 2 Complete the specific RT, and shift to the normal section (RT for the normal section). Also, the winning probability of the special part is also the normal probability. When shifting to RT for the normal section, initializing all the parameters related to the advantageous section is the same as in the third embodiment (for example, steps S445, S446, S447, and S471 in FIG. 44D). .

Furthermore, during the regular section, when the special section is transferred to the advantageous section without winning the special role (without passing through the special game), the first stay RT may be set as the first specific RT. Alternatively, it may be a second specific RT.
Furthermore, as described above, when the winning probability of the special part is set to a high probability in the advantageous section, for example, during the advantageous section and during the non-special game (when the item is inactive), the payout rate is If it is set to less than "," it is possible to set a lower rate of increase in the number of balls out in the advantageous section with respect to the normal section. However, as in the third embodiment, it is a matter of course that “the advantageous section = AT” may be adopted.

In addition, it is also possible to change the winning probability of the special part in the advantageous section depending on the trigger when the normal section shifts to the advantageous section. For example, in the normal section, it is relatively easy to shift to the advantageous section by winning the special part (for example, as described above, the probability of “1/250”). On the other hand, in the normal section, the player is won the role of rare (rea cherry, rear play, etc.), and the probability of shifting to the advantageous section without passing through the special game is set to, for example, "1/16384" (very low probability). Do. When the special section is shifted to the advantageous section triggered by the winning of the special part from the normal section, the winning probability of the special part is set to a high probability. On the other hand, when transitioning from the normal section to the advantageous section triggered by the winning of the rare role, it is shifted to a special RT, and the winning probability of 1BB is set to, for example, "1/20" (extremely high probability) Is also possible.
Furthermore, when transitioning to the advantageous section from the normal section triggered by the winning of the special part, the game after the end of the special game is set to non-AT, and from the normal section to the advantageous section triggered by the winning of the rare part. Is set to AT from the first game of the advantageous section.

In addition, when transitioning from the normal section to the advantageous section and setting the winning probability of the special combination to a high probability, the winning probability of the AT is also set to a high probability only during a period in which the winning probability of the special combination is high. B) setting the AT winning probability to a normal probability during a period where the winning probability of the special winning combination is high, c) regardless of the period in which the winning probability of the special winning combination is set to a high probability, AT And the like, etc. may be set.
Furthermore, when the probability of winning a special winning combination is set to a high probability by shifting to an advantageous segment, an upper limit (limiter) may be provided to the number of winnings of the special winning combination in the advantageous segment. For example, after the transition to the advantageous section, the winning probability of the special combination is set to a high probability, but when the special combination is won, for example, 5 times, the special combination is won on the regular section even after the next It may be set to the same or slightly higher degree as the probability.
Here, after shifting to the advantageous section, the AT winning probability is set to the normal probability while the winning probability of the special winning combination is high, and after the period in which the winning probability of the special winning combination is high, the AT is completed. It is possible to set the winning probability of to a high probability. Alternatively, conversely to this, when transitioning to an advantageous section, at first, the AT winning probability is set to a high probability, and when the number of AT winnings, the number of games, the number of payouts exceeds a predetermined threshold, the AT It is also possible to set the winning probability of to be the normal probability and to set the winning probability of the special part to a high probability.

(14) In the modification of (13) described above, the winning probability of the special combination is set to a high probability during the advantageous section. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and a combination of a regular section / favorable section and a winning combination of special roles (normal probability / high probability) may be provided. For example,
Favorable section and special role high probability winning section (section 1)
An advantageous section and a special role normal probability winning section (section 2)
Regular section and special role high probability winning section (section 3)
Normal section and special role normal probability winning section (section 4) (so-called normal)
It is possible to provide
Then, for example, in the case of being single winner in 1BBA in FIG. 17 of the first embodiment during the normal section, when it is elected in the case of box number “20”, transition to the advantageous zone is made. When it is elected, it does not shift to the advantageous section. In this case, when the player is elected to the number "20", the game after the end of the special game is set to the section 1 or 2 and when the number "10" is elected, the special game is ended. Setting a later game to section 3 or section 4 can be mentioned.
Furthermore, when transitioning to the advantageous section, various transition conditions from Section 1 to Section 2 and transition conditions from Section 2 to Section 1 can be set. For example, the promotion (fall) combination winning or winning, the shift to RT, the digestion of the predetermined number of games, the promotion (or fall) lottery performed every game may be mentioned.

(15) In the flowcharts shown in the twenty-sixth and twenty-seventh embodiments, the order of processes is not limited to the order shown in the figure, and when the order of processes can be changed, the order of processes should be changed Is also possible.
Further, the twenty-sixth and twenty-seventh embodiments and the above-described various modifications are not limited to being implemented alone, and can be implemented in combination as appropriate.

Twenty-Eighth Embodiment
In the twenty-eighth embodiment, it is possible to confirm whether or not there is a failure in the acquired number display LED 78 (digit 3, digit 4) where push order instruction information is displayed, and whether there is a failure in a signal line that transmits a signal to the acquired number display LED 78 It is

That is, under the situation where the number of medals acquired is displayed, the upper digit of the number of acquired cards is displayed on digit 3 in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is “00100000 (B)”, and the LED display counter value is “01000000 In the interrupt processing of (B), the lower digit of the number of acquired sheets is displayed on the digit 4.
Further, under the condition of displaying push order instruction information, “=” which is a part of push order instruction information is displayed on the digit 3 in the interrupt process when the LED display counter value is “00100000 (B)”. In the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is “01000000 (B)”, one of “1” to “3”, which is another part of the push order instruction information, is displayed on the digit 4.

Furthermore, under the condition where the set value can be changed (during setting change), seven segments A to G of digit 3 are lit in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is “00100000 (B)” ( In the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is “01000000 (B)”, “7” is displayed for the segments A to G possessed by the digit 4 (“8” for the digit 4). Show).
Thus, by turning on the seven segments A to G possessed by the digits 3 and 4 during the setting change, the digits 3 and 4 on which the push order instruction information is displayed in the instructed game section are not broken. , And digits 3 and 4 can be confirmed that there is no failure in the signal lines for transmitting segment signals.

Also, while the setting is changed, for example, seven of segments A to G possessed by digit 3 are lit, and among seven segments possessed by digit 4, six of segments A and C to G are illuminated, When the segment B does not light, it can be determined that the segment B of the digit 4 has a possibility of failure.
Furthermore, during setting change, for example, six segments A to E and G possessed by digit 3 are lit, but segment F is not illuminated, and six segments A to E and G possessed by digit 4 are not. It lights up, but when segment F does not light, there is a possibility that not only the possibility that the segment F of the digit 3 and 4 is broken but also that the signal line for transmitting the segment signal to the segment F is damaged It can be judged.

The twenty-eighth embodiment will be described in more detail below.
In the twenty-eighth embodiment, the digits 1 to 5 and the circuit configuration for lighting them are the same as in the twentieth embodiment.
Here, although the contents partially overlap with those of the twentieth embodiment, digits 1 to 5 and a circuit configuration for lighting them will be described.
As shown in FIG. 125 (A), there are a storage number display LED 76 composed of digits 1 and 2, an acquisition number display LED 78 composed of digits 3 and 4, and a setting value display LED 73 composed of digits 5. Have.
Also, as shown in FIG. 126, digits 1 to 5 have seven segments of segments A to G.

Furthermore, the main control board 50 is provided with output ports 2 and 3.
Further, as shown in FIG. 128, digit 1 to 5 signals indicating which digit is to be lighted are output from output port 2, and segment A which indicates which segment to be lighted from output port 3 A ~ G signal is output.

Further, as shown in FIG. 129, IC2 and IC3 are provided on the main control board 50.
Furthermore, the IC 2 is an IC for controlling the digit 1 to 5 signals, and has an output port 2 composed of D0 to D7 output terminals.
Furthermore, the IC 3 is an IC for controlling the segments A to G signals, and has an output port 3 configured of D0 to D7 output terminals.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 129 and 131, the digit 1 signal line is output from the D3 output terminal of the output port 2 of the IC 2 and connected to the drive signal line of the digit 1.
Similarly to the digit 1 signal line, the digit 2 to 5 signal lines are respectively output from the D4 to D7 output terminals of the output port 2 of the IC 2 and connected to the drive signal lines of the digits 2 to 5 respectively.

Also, as shown in FIGS. 129 and 131, the segment A signal line is output from the D0 output terminal of the output port 3 of the IC 3 and connected to the segment A of the digits 1 to 5.
Similarly to the segment A signal lines, the segment B to G signal lines are respectively output from the D1 to D6 output terminals of the output port 3 of the IC 3 and connected to the segments B to G of the digits 1 to 5, respectively.
Thus, in the digits 1 to 5, the segments A to G signals are shared.

  Also, for example, when the digit 3 signal is output from the D5 output terminal of the output port 2, the segments A to G of the digit 3 can be lit. At this time, for example, when the segment B signal is output from the D1 output terminal of the output port 3 and the segment C signal is output from the D2 output terminal of the output port 3, the segments B and C of the digit 3 are lit. As a result, "1" is displayed on the digit 3.

Further, in the interrupt processing, only one of the digits 1 to 5 is set to be able to be lit, and the digit to be lit is sequentially switched every interrupt processing executed in a 2.235 ms cycle. To go. That is, dynamic lighting is performed.
In particular, in interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is "00001000 (B)", a signal of "00001000 (B)" is output from output port 2 so that the digit 1 signal is output from the D3 output terminal of output port 2. As it is output, digit 1 can be lit.

Similarly, in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is "00010000 (B)", digit 2 can be lit, and in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is "00100000 (B)", digit 3 is lit. It becomes possible.
In the interrupt process when the LED display counter value is "01000000 (B)", the digit 4 can be lit, and in the interrupt process when the LED display counter value is "10000000 (B)", the digit 5 can be lit. It becomes.

Also, as shown in FIG. 132 (B), the LED display request flag is “01111111 (B)” during normal, “11100000 (B)” during setting change, and “11111000 (B)” during setting confirmation. It becomes ".
Then, in the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) shown in FIG. 134, the LED display counter and the LED display request flag are ANDed with each other, and the digit corresponding to the calculation result is lit.

FIG. 222 is a diagram showing the address, the label, and the content of data stored in the RWM 53.
The data shown in FIG. 222 is for use in the description of the twenty-eighth embodiment, and the data stored in the RWM 53 is not limited to these.

The address “F000 (H)” is a setting value data storage area (_NB_RANK).
As described in the twenty-fifth embodiment, when the setting value is “N”, the setting value data “N−1” is stored in the setting value data storage area (_NB_RANK).
In the present embodiment, setting values “1” to “6” are provided. Therefore, any value of the set value data “0” to “5” is stored in the set value data storage area (_NB_RANK).
Further, “N” obtained by adding “1” to the setting value data “N−1” stored in the setting value data storage area (_NB_RANK) is displayed on the setting value display LED 73 as a setting value.

The address "F010 (H)" is a stored sheet number data storage area (_NB_CREDIT), and in the present embodiment, any one of "0" to "50" is stored as stored sheet data.
For example, when 50 medals are stored, the stored number data “50” is stored in the stored number data storage area (_NB_CREDIT).

Then, in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is "00001000 (B)", the upper digit of the value (the number of stored sheets) stored in the stored number data storage area (_NB_CREDIT) is digit 1 (stored number display LED 76 Displayed in the upper digit).
Further, in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is “00010000 (B)”, the lower digit of the value (the number of stored sheets) stored in the stored number data storage area (_NB_CREDIT) is displayed in the digit 2.

The address “F011 (H)” is an acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT). In the present embodiment, the acquired sheet data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) stores acquired sheet data, display data during setting change, or a push order instruction number.
At the time of payout of the medal, any value of “0” to “9” is stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) as acquired number data.

Further, during the setting change, “88” is stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) as display data during the setting change.
Furthermore, at the time of pushing order instruction (when notifying the pushing order of the stop switch 42 which is advantageous to the player in the instructing game section), the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) is used as a pushing order instruction number. The value of either “A0 (H)”, “A1 (H)”, “A2 (H)” or “A3 (H)” is stored.

  For example, when nine medals are won and nine medals are paid out, "0" is first stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) as acquired number data. After that, every time one medal is paid out, “1” is added to the value of the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT). That is, the value of the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) is updated according to the payout of medals as “0” → “1” → “2” → “3” →... → “9” Go. When the ninth medal is paid out, the value of the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) becomes “9”.

  Then, in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is “00100000 (B)”, the upper digit of the value stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) is the digit 3 (upper digit of the acquired number display LED 78). Is displayed. At this time, if acquired sheet data is stored in the acquired sheet data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT), the upper digit of the acquired sheet is displayed in digit 3; if display data is being changed, setting change is in progress. If the value of "8" indicating that there is a digit 3 is displayed and the push order instruction number is stored, push order instruction information (indicating that it is push order instruction information) "=" is displayed on the digit 3 Be done.

  In the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is “01000000 (B)”, the lower digit of the value stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) is the digit 4 (lower digit of acquired number display LED 78) Is displayed. At this time, if acquired sheet data is stored in acquired sheet data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT), the lower digit of acquired sheet is displayed on digit 4 and if display data is being changed, setting change is in progress. If a value of "8" indicating that there is a digit 4 is displayed on the digit 4 and the push order instruction number is stored, any value of push order instruction information (indicating the push order) is "0" to "3". Displayed in digit 4.

The address "F012 (H)" is the LED display counter value storage area (_CT_LED_DSP), and every time interrupt processing is performed, "00000001 (B)"->"00000010(B)"->"00000100(B)"-> ... → "10000000 (B)" → "00000000 (B)" → "00000001 (B)" and so on.
The address “F013 (H)” is the LED display request flag storage area (_FL_LED_DSP), and as shown in FIG. 222, a value corresponding to the normal, during setting change, or setting confirmation is stored.

The address "F014 (H)" is an error number storage area (_NB_ERROR).
When a recoverable error has not occurred, "00 (H)" is stored in the error number storage area (_NB_ERROR).
Then, when a recoverable error occurs, an error number corresponding to the type of the recoverable error that occurred is stored in the error number storage area (_NB_ERROR). In this embodiment, ten types of errors shown in FIG. 222 are detected as recoverable errors. The recoverable error is not limited to these.
Also, until the error is released, the value of the error number storage area (_NB_ERROR) is maintained, and when the error is released (when the error is recovered), “00 (H) is stored in the error number storage area (_NB_ERROR) again. Is stored.

  For example, when an HP error (a medal clogging error) occurs, “0E (H)” (“14” in decimal) is stored as an error number in the error number storage area (_NB_ERROR). In this case, in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is “00100000 (B)”, the character “H” is displayed on digit 3 (upper digit of the acquired number display LED 78), and the LED display counter value is “01000000 ( In the interrupt processing in the case of “B)”, the letter “P” is displayed on the digit 4 (lower digit of the acquisition number display LED 78). That is, an offset value for displaying the character of “H” in digit 3 and the character of “P” in digit 4 from the value of “0E (H)” stored in the error number storage area (_NB_ERROR) Is calculated.

The address "F040 (H)" is a medal payout number data storage area (_NB_PAY_MEDAL), and in the present embodiment, any value of "0" to "9" is stored as medal payout number data.
In the present embodiment, since the maximum number of medals paid out in one game is nine, the medal paid-out number data is “0” to “9”. The medal payout number data is “0” to “15”.

The address "F041 (H)" is the medal payout number data buffer (_BF_PAY_MEDAL), and in the present embodiment, "0" to "9" as in the medal payout number data storage area (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) of the address "F040". Any value is stored.
When the winning determination is performed, the values of both the medal payout number data storage area (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) and the medal payout number data buffer (_BF_PAY_MEDAL) are updated. At this time, the same value is stored in both addresses. For example, when nine winning combinations are won, "9" is stored in both addresses.

Thereafter, the value of the medal payout number data storage area (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) is decremented by “1” each time one medal is paid out, and becomes “0” at the end of medal payout. That is, the value of the medal payout number data storage area (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) corresponds to the payout of medals as “9” → “8” → “7” →... “2” → “1” → “0” Will be updated.
On the other hand, the value of the medal payout number data buffer (_BF_PAY_MEDAL) is not updated by the payout of medals, and is maintained until it is updated at the next game winning determination.

FIG. 223 is a diagram showing an LED segment table 1 (TBL_SEG_DATA1) and an LED segment table 2 (TBL_SEG_DATA2) in the twenty-eighth embodiment, and is a diagram corresponding to the in-use area data table of FIG. 127 in the twentieth embodiment. .
In FIG. 223, LED segment table 1 (TBL_SEG_DATA1) is different from the in-use area data table in FIG. 127 in that “01011110 (B)” is displayed as “d” display data in the LED segment table 1 (TBL_SEG_DATA1). It is identical to the data table.

FIG. 224 is a diagram showing the address of each data of the LED segment table 1 and the LED segment table 2 stored in the use area of the ROM 54.
The start address of the LED segment table 1 is set to “1811 (H)”, and each data of the LED segment table 1 is stored in order from “1811 (H)”.
Further, in the LED segment table 2, the head address is set to "1817 (H)", and the respective data of the LED segment table 2 are stored in order from "1817 (H)".
Furthermore, the LED segment table 1 and the LED segment table 2 are stored at consecutive addresses.

Thus, when "1811 (H)" is designated as the start address, each data of the LED segment table 1 and the LED segment table 2 can be represented by the offset value from the start address "1811 (H)".
When “1817 (H)” is specified as the start address, each data of the LED segment table 2 can be represented by an offset value from the start address “1817 (H)”.

For example, when the H0 error (abnormality of the payout sensor) occurs, the head address “1811 (H)” of the LED segment table 1 is designated. Also, “1” is calculated as the upper digit offset value from the error number “10 (H)” (decimal number “16”) of the H0 error, and “6” is calculated as the lower digit offset value.
Then, “H” can be displayed on the digit 3 by reading the data obtained by adding the high-order offset value “1” to the start address “1811 (H)”, that is, “1812 (H)”. .
Similarly, "0" can be displayed on the digit 4 by reading the data obtained by adding the lower-digit offset value "6" to the start address "1811 (H)", that is, "1817 (H)" data. it can.

FIG. 225 is a diagram showing the address of the push order designation number table stored in the use area of the ROM 54, which corresponds to the address in FIG. 19 of the first embodiment.
In the push order instruction number table, the start address is set to “1900 (H)”, and push order instruction numbers corresponding to the condition device numbers “0” to “30” are stored sequentially from “1900 (H)”. ing.

For example, when the small winning combination B1 of the condition device number "11" is won, the condition device number "11" is set as the offset value, and the offset value "11" is added to the head address "1900 (H)" of the push order indication number table. By reading the added address, that is, the data of “190 B (H)”, it is possible to obtain the push order instruction number “A 1 (H)” corresponding to the condition device number “11”.
The pushing order instruction number (* 1) at the winning of the small winning combination A and the pushing order indication number (* 2) at the winning of the small combinations E1 and E2 are the same as those of FIG. 19 of the first embodiment.

Subsequently, information processing by the main control board 50 (main CPU 55) in the twenty-eighth embodiment will be described.
When the power switch 11 of the slot machine 10 is turned on, the main control board 50 executes program start processing.
Further, in the program start process, the signal of the door switch 15 is on (the front door is open), the signal of the setting door switch is on (the setting door is open), and the setting key switch 12 When it is determined that the signal of is on (the setting key is inserted and rotated 90 degrees clockwise), the process proceeds to the setting change process (M_RANK_SET) shown in FIG. That is, when the power switch 11 is turned on with the setting key switch 12 turned on, the setting is changed (setting change mode).

Furthermore, in the program start process, when it is determined that the signal of the door switch 15 is off, the signal of the setting door switch is off, and the signal of the setting key switch 12 is off, the power failure recovery data is Determine whether it is a normal value.
When it is determined that the power failure recovery data is a normal value, the process proceeds to the power recovery processing, and after the interrupt processing (I_INTR) shown in FIG. 133 is started in the power recovery processing, the main processing (M_MAIN shown in FIG. Go to).
On the other hand, when it is determined that the power failure recovery data is not a normal value, an “E1” error (power failure recovery error) occurs, and the process proceeds to the recovery impossible error processing 1 (SS_ERROR_STOP1) shown in FIG.

In addition, when an "E1" error occurs and the process proceeds to return impossible error processing 1 (SS_ERROR_STOP1), the interrupt processing (I_INTR) shown in FIG. 133 is not executed, therefore the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) shown in FIG. . Then, when an “E1” error occurs, “E” is displayed on the digit 3 and “1” is displayed on the digit 4 by the return impossible error processing 1 (SS_ERROR_STOP1) shown in FIG. Specifically, the process of displaying "E" on the digit 3 and the process of displaying "1" on the digit 4 are alternately repeated at predetermined time intervals.
Furthermore, when an unrecoverable error occurs, the power switch 11 is once turned off. Then, the setting key switch 12 is turned on by inserting the setting key and rotating 90 degrees clockwise, and in this state, the power switch 11 is turned on again. As a result, in the setting change process (M_RANK_SET) described later, the predetermined range of the RWM 53 is cleared, and the “E1” error is canceled.

FIG. 226 is a flowchart showing setting change processing (M_RANK_SET).
First, in step S2121, the "predetermined range" is stored in the register as an initialization range within the use area of the RWM 53 ("F000 (H)" to "F1 FF (H)" in FIG. 124). Here, the “predetermined range” is an initialization range when it is determined that the power-off process is normally executed, and initialization is performed so that at least the setting value data (address “F000 (H)”) is not initialized. Let the range be a "predetermined range".
In addition to the setting value data, an initialization range in which the gaming state (for example, the RT state) and all or part of the winning flags are not initialized may be set as the “predetermined range”.

Next, in step S2122, the main control board 50 determines whether the power failure recovery data has a normal value. If it is determined that the power failure recovery data is a normal value, the process proceeds to step S2124, and the storage of the "predetermined range" in step S2121 is maintained. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2122 that the power failure recovery data is not a normal value, the process proceeds to step S2123.
In step S2123, the main control board 50 stores the “specific range” in the register as the initialization range in the use area of the RWM 53. Here, the “specific range” is an initialization range when it is determined that the power supply interruption is not normal, and the entire range within the use area including the setting value data (address “F000 (H)”) is the initialization range. Set

  Then, in step S2124, initialization of the predetermined range set in step S2121 or the specific range set in step S2123 (within the use area of the RWM 53) is started. In the next step S2125, it is determined whether the initialization started in step S2124 is completed. If it is determined that the initialization is completed, the process proceeds to step S2126.

  In step S2126, the AF register (A register and F register (flag register)) is saved. Here, the purpose of saving the AF register is to originally save the F (flag) register here, but for convenience of the instruction, the AF register is saved. Then, the process proceeds to step S2127, and a predetermined range is stored as an initialization range outside the use area of RWM 53 (after “F200 (H)” in FIG. 124). Here, the "predetermined range" is an initialization range when it is determined that the power-off process is normally executed, and for example, the address "F28E (H)" or later, or "F293 (H)" or the like (initialization) The range is specified according to the specification etc.).

  In the next step S2128, as in step S2122, it is determined whether the power failure recovery data is a normal value. If it is determined that the power failure recovery data is a normal value, the process proceeds to step S2130, and the storage of the "predetermined range" in step S2127 is maintained. On the other hand, if it is determined in step S2128 that the power failure recovery data is not a normal value, the process proceeds to step S2129.

In step S2129, the main control board 50 stores the “specific range” in the register as an initialization range outside the use area of the RWM 53. Here, the “specific range” is an initialization range when it is determined that the power-off is not normal, and the entire range outside the use area after the address “F200” is set as the initialization range. Therefore, in this case, initialization is performed including the ring buffer and the like.
In step S2130, initialization of the predetermined range set in step S2127 or the specific range set in step S2129 (outside of the use area of the RWM 53) is started.

In the next step S2131, it is determined whether the initialization started in step S2130 is finished. If it is determined that the initialization is completed, the process proceeds to step S2132.
In step S2132, the AF register saved in step S2126 is restored. In the next step S2133, the activation setting of the interrupt processing is performed. In the present embodiment, since timer interrupt processing is used as the interrupt processing, processing for setting a timer interrupt cycle (in the present embodiment, “2.235 ms”) or the like corresponds. Then, the interrupt process is executed after the process of step S2133. In other words, interrupt processing is not executed before “interrupt activation”.

In the next step S2134, an output request is set at the start of the setting change. This process is a process of setting (storing) a control command to be transmitted to the sub control board 80 in a register in order to notify the sub control board 80 that the setting change process is to be started.
Although “output request set” is also executed in the processing described below, processing for setting a control command to be transmitted to the sub control board 80 in a register is performed as in step S2134. means. Moreover, the control command here does not mean only the command to be actually transmitted, but also means the command that is the source of the command to be actually transmitted.
Next, in step S2135, the main control board 50 executes control command set 1. This process is a process of storing the control command (control command set in the register) to be transmitted to the sub control board 80 in the control command buffer (RWM 53).

  Next, proceeding to step S2136, the main control board 50 stores the standby time in a BC register (a pair register consisting of a B register capable of storing 8-bit data (1-byte data) and a C register). In the present embodiment, the number of times of interrupt processing “224” (about 500 ms) is set as the standby time at the start of the setting change. Next, proceeding to step S2137, a 2-byte time wait process (wait process) for starting setting change is executed. In the present embodiment, until the number of interrupt processing “224” is counted (“1” is subtracted each time interrupt processing is performed, and the set number of interrupt processing becomes “0”). During this waiting time (while waiting for 2 bytes), the setting change process does not proceed, but the interrupt process is executed.

  As described above, the reason why the 2-byte time wait process (wait process) is executed on the main control board 50 side in step S2137 is because it takes time to initialize the RWM 83 on the sub control board 80 side. In particular, on the side of the main control board 50, it is not possible to know whether or not the initialization processing has been completed on the side of the sub control board 80.

Therefore, while the sub control board 80 side is still in the process of initialization, the process proceeds on the main control board 50 side, and the progress of the control process of the main control board 50 and the progress of the control process of the sub control board 80 It is possible to prevent losing synchronization.
That is, since the sub control board 80 starts the initialization of the RWM 83 after the execution of the output request set and the control command set 1 at the start of the setting change, a sufficient time for ending the initialization of the RWM 83 is set as a wait time. There is a need to. As a result, after the initialization process of the RWM 83 is completed on the side of the sub control substrate 80, it is possible to proceed to the process after step S4001 on the side of the main control substrate 50.

  The control command at the start of the setting change set in steps S2134 and S2135 can execute interrupt processing even while waiting for the 2-byte time in step S2137, so it is necessary to It is transmitted to the control board 80. However, while the 2-byte time waiting process is being executed in step S2137, the process does not proceed to the process after step S4001 (the setting change process does not proceed first).

After completion of the 2-byte time waiting process in step S2137, the process advances to step S4001 and “88” (“01011000 (B) in binary number”) is displayed in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) to indicate that the setting is being changed. Remember.
Next, proceeding to step S4002, the "11100000 (B)" corresponding to the setting change is stored in the LED display request flag storage area (_FL_LED_DSP).

By the process of step S4002, when the interrupt process is executed after the process, it is possible to light the digits 3 to 5 (the acquisition number display LED 78 and the setting value display LED 73).
Specifically, in the interrupt process executed after the process of step S4002, “8” can be displayed on digits 3 and 4 (“88” is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78), and digit 5 (setting value display) The current set value can be displayed on the LED 73).
In addition, since the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) and the LED display request flag storage area (_FL_LED_DSP) are initialized by the initialization process in the use area of RWM 53 in step S2124, the value before step S4001 is “ It is 0 ".

Next, proceeding to step S2139, an interrupt waiting process is executed. This process is a process of waiting until an interrupt process is executed (2.235 ms elapses). The reason for providing this process will be described later. Then, the process proceeds to step S2140.
In step S2140, it is determined whether the operation of the setting switch 13 has been detected. Here, by determining the rising data of the input port including the setting switch 13, it is determined whether the setting switch 13 is turned on. If it is determined that the operation of the setting switch 13 has been detected, the process proceeds to step S2141, and if it is determined that the operation of the setting switch 13 is not detected, the process proceeds to step S214.

In step S2141, the setting value (setting value data) is updated. Specifically, the value of the setting value data storage area (_NB_RANK) is updated. In addition, when the interrupt processing is executed after the setting value is updated, the setting value display LED 73 displays the updated setting value.
As described above, when the setting value is “N”, the setting value data “N−1” is stored in the setting value data storage area (_NB_RANK).
Therefore, when setting value data "N-1" is stored in the setting value data storage area (_NB_RANK), "N" obtained by adding "1" to setting value data "N-1" is used as the setting value. Display on digit 5 (setting value display LED 73).

In the next step S2142, it is determined whether the operation of the start switch 41 has been detected. In the present embodiment, when the start switch 41 is operated during the setting change, the set value at that time is decided.
If it is determined that the start switch 41 has been operated, the process proceeds to step S2143. If it is determined that the start switch 41 has not been operated, the process returns to step S2139.

In the above process, step S2139 (interrupt waiting process) is provided to clear the rising data of the setting switch 13.
For example, when the process of step S2139 is not provided, if it is determined in step S2140 that the rising data of the setting switch 13 is on, the setting value is updated in step S2141 and the start switch 41 is not on in the next step S2142. If it is determined that the condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S2140, and it is determined whether the rising data of the setting switch 13 is on.

  If it is determined in step S2140 that the interrupt processing is performed even once, the rising data of the setting switch 13 is turned off. However, until the interrupt processing is executed, it is determined in step S2140 that the rising data of the setting switch 13 is on. As a result, if the setting switch 13 is operated only once, the setting value continues to increase by 2 or more. Therefore, in step S2139, interrupt waiting processing is executed.

In step S2143, it is determined whether the setting key switch 12 has been turned off. If it is determined that the setting key switch 12 is turned off, the process proceeds to step S4003, where the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) is cleared (the value is set to "0").
Next, proceeding to step S4004, the corresponding “01111111 (B)” is stored in the LED display request flag storage area (_FL_LED_DSP) during the normal operation.

The display of the digits 3 and 4 (acquisition number display LED 78) changes from "88" to "00" by the interrupt processing executed after the processing of step S4003.
Further, “0” is displayed on each of the digits 1 and 2 (“00” is displayed on the storage number display LED 76) by the interrupt processing executed after the processing of step S4004. Thereby, the display of the digits 1 to 4 (the storage number display LED 76 and the acquisition number display LED 78) becomes "0000". Also, the digit 5 (setting value display LED 73) is turned off.
The digits 1 to 4 (the storage number display LED 76 and the acquisition number display LED 78) may be turned off.

Next, in step S2145, as in step S2134, an output request is set at the end of the setting change. This process is a process of ending the setting change process and setting a control command for notifying the sub control board 80 side of the determined setting value.
Next, in step S2146, the main control board 50 executes the control command set 1 as in step S2135. Then, the process advances to step S2147 to shift to main processing (M_MAIN).

FIG. 227 is a flowchart showing main processing (M_MAIN) processing.
In step S2171, a stack pointer is set. The stack pointer refers to the area of the RWM 53 that stores data (for example, register value, instruction processing of main processing before interrupt processing, etc.) at the time of power interruption when a power failure occurs, and a set of stack pointers Is a process of setting the register value to the initial value in the area of the RWM 53.

In the next step S2172, a game start set process is performed. This process is a process of generating, updating, storing and the like of the operation state flag.
In the next step S4011, the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) is cleared (the value is set to "0"). For example, it is assumed that the payout amount display LED 78 (digits 3 and 4) displays the number of medals paid out in the previous game (the number obtained by the player). In this case, the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 becomes “00” by the interrupt process executed after the process of step S4011.

In the next step S2173, bet medals are read. This process is a process of reading how many medals are bet at the present time.
In the next step S2174, the presence or absence of a bet medal is determined based on the number of bets read in step S2173.
If it is determined in step S2174 that there is a bet medal, the process proceeds to step S2176. If it is determined that there is no bet medal, the process proceeds to step S2175 to perform medal insertion waiting processing, and then the process proceeds to step S2176. In the medal insertion waiting process of step S2175, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 12 is on. When the setting key switch 12 is on, processing such as shifting to setting confirmation (setting confirmation mode) is performed.

In step S2176, management processing of the inserted medal is performed. This process is a process of determining whether or not the medal has been maintained, determining whether the settlement switch 46 has been operated, and the like.
In the next step S2177, software random number update processing is performed. This process is a process of updating (for example, adding “1” each) processing random numbers (soft random numbers) for processing (calculation processing) to the built-in random numbers (hard random numbers) used by the combination lottery means 61. Soft random numbers are 16-bit random numbers having a range of 0-65535. Note that, as an update method, processing may be performed in which an interrupt count value (count value (variable) incremented during interrupt processing) is added to the value before update.

  In the next step S2178, the main control board 50 determines whether the start switch 41 has been operated. If it is determined that the start switch 41 is operated, the process proceeds to step S2179. If it is determined that the start switch 41 is not operated, the process returns to step S2173. Note that even when the start switch 41 is operated, if the bet number has not reached the specified number of games, it is determined as "No" in step S2178.

In step S2179, the process at the time of start switch acceptance is performed. This process is a process of setting a setting change impossible flag, setting an output request at the start of reel rotation, setting the number of times of output of a medal insertion signal, and the like.
In step S2180, the combination lottery means 61 executes a combination lottery at the timing when the start switch 41 is operated, that is, when the operation signal of the start switch 41 is received. In addition, the random number value at the time of the role lottery (random number value of hard random number) is acquired in step S2179. Then, in step S2180, the random number value of the processing random number is added to the acquired random number value, and whether or not the random number value after the addition is a random number value corresponding to one of the winning combinations is used Process to determine.

In the next step S4012, push order instruction number set processing (M_ORD_INF) is executed.
This processing stores the pressing order instruction number in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) of RWM 53 when it becomes a game having an advantageous pressing order (for example, a game when winning a small winning combination B group) in the instructed game section. It is processing to be equal.
If it progresses to step S4012, it will transfer to the process of FIG. 228 mentioned later. Although details will be described later, in the game having an advantageous pushing order, pushing order instruction information (for example, “= 1”) is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 (digits 3 and 4) by interrupt processing executed after this process Be done.

In the next step S2181, reel rotation start preparation processing is executed. This processing is processing for determining whether or not the minimum game time (4.1 seconds) has elapsed.
Next, proceeding to step S2182, the reel control means 65 starts rotating the reels 31. In the next step S2183, the stop acceptance of the reel 31 is checked. Here, it is detected whether or not the operation signal of the stop switch 42 is received, and when the operation signal is received, the stop position of the reel 31 is determined based on the lottery result of the winning combination and the position of the reel 31 Control is performed to stop the reel 31 at the determined position.

In the next step S2184, the reel control means 65 checks whether or not all the reels 31 have stopped, and proceeds to step S2185.
In step S2185, it is determined whether all the reels 31 have stopped. If it is determined that all the reels 31 have stopped, the process proceeds to step S4013, and if it is determined that all the reels 31 have not stopped, the process returns to step S2183. .

In step S4013, the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) is cleared (the value is set to "0"). For example, it is assumed that the game has an advantageous pushing order in the instructed game section, and pushing order instructing information (for example, “= 1”) is displayed on the winning number display LED 78 (digits 3 and 4). In this case, the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 becomes “00” by the interrupt process executed after the process of step S 4013.
Note that the acquisition number display LED 78 may be turned off. Specifically, “00011111 (B)” may be stored in the LED display request flag storage area (_FL_LED_DSP), and “off” display data (00000000B) may be provided instead of “0” display data. It is also good.

In step S2186, symbol display determination (winning determination) is performed. Here, it is determined by the prize determination means 66 whether or not the combination of symbols corresponding to the winning combination has been stopped on the activated line.
In the next step S2187, it is determined whether or not a display error of a symbol has occurred, and if it is determined that a display error has occurred, the process proceeds to return impossible error processing 1 (SS_ERROR_STOP1), and no display error has occurred. If it is determined, the process proceeds to step S4014.
Here, since the stop of the reel 31 is executed based on the stop position determination table, normally, the reel 31 does not stop at a position other than the position defined by the stop position determination table. However, when a symbol (kicking symbol) that should not be originally displayed is displayed on the effective line as a result of the display determination of the symbol, it is determined as abnormal ("E5" error), and return shown in FIG. 136 Execute Impossible Error Handling 1 (SS_ERROR_STOP1).

If it is determined in step S2187 that a display error has not occurred and the process proceeds to step S4014, the medal payout number updating process is executed. The details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.
In the next step S4015, the payout means 67 executes medal payout processing by winning. This process is a process of paying out the medal corresponding to the winning combination (small role), and when the number of stored sheets is less than "50", the process of adding the number of stored sheets until the number of stored sheets reaches "50" When the stored number is "50" or more, the hopper motor 36 is driven to control to pay out the medals from the hopper 35 to the player. The details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, proceeding to step S2190, interrupt waiting processing is performed. This process is the same process as step S2139 in FIG.
In the next step S2191, interrupt processing is inhibited. By the processing of steps S2190 and S2191, interrupt processing is inhibited immediately after the interrupt processing.
In the next step S2192, the AF register is saved. This process is the same process as step S2126 in FIG.

Next, proceeding to step S2193, ratio setting processing is executed. This ratio setting process is a process executed outside the use area.
Ratio set processing, management information display LED74 (digits 6 to 9), advantageous section ratio, continuous character ratio (6000 times), character ratio (6000 times), continuous character ratio (cumulative), and character ratio In order to display (total), processing of updating various counter values, processing of ratio calculation, etc. is executed.

  Then, in step S2194, the AF register saved in step S2192 is restored, and in step S2195, the interrupt is permitted (restarted). In this way, when executing the ratio setting process, the AF register is saved, and the interrupt process is prohibited and then executed. The reason for prohibiting interrupt processing during ratio setting processing is that programs in the usage area and programs outside the usage area are mixed if interrupt processing is performed when executing a program outside the usage area in the main processing. Processing is complicated.

Next, proceeding to step S2196, a game end check process is performed. In this processing, clearing processing of a condition device flag (winning combination flag, winning flag) is performed. Then, in step S2197, an output request set at the end of the game is set, and control command set 1 is performed in the next step S2198. These processes are similar to the processes in steps S2134 and S2135 in FIG. 226, and are processes for setting control command data for transmitting to the sub control board 80 that one game is over.
Then, when the process of step S2198 ends, the process returns to the main process (step S2147) again.

FIG. 228 is a flow chart showing the pushing order designation number setting process (M_ORD_INF) in step S4012 of FIG.
In step S4021, it is determined whether it is an instruction game section (AT).
Here, when it is determined that it is an instruction game section, the process proceeds to the next step S4022.
On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not the instructed game section, the processing according to this flowchart is ended. In this case, since the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) is cleared in step S4011 of FIG. 227 and step S4026 is skipped, the value of the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) remains “0”. Therefore, the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 (digits 3 and 4) remains "00".

In step S4022, the condition device number is set. The condition device number determined in the winning lottery process in step S2180 in FIG. 227 is stored in the winning and replay condition device number storage region (_NB_CND_NOR) of the RWM 53 and the item condition device number storage region (_NB_CND_BNS). Then, in step S4022, the value of the winning and replay condition device number storage area (_NB_CND_NOR) is stored in the A register.
Next, proceeding to step S4023, the push order instruction number table is set. In step S4023, the top address "1900 (H)" of the push order designation number table shown in FIG. 225 is stored in the HL register. As a result, the HL register value becomes "1900 (H)". Then, the process proceeds to the next step S4024.

In step S4024, designated address data is set. In step S4024, a value obtained by adding the A register value to the HL register value is set as a new HL register value, and the data stored in the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in the A register.
That is, the data stored in the winning and replay condition device number (_NB_CND_NOR) is used as the offset value, and the data corresponding to the address obtained by adding the offset value to the head address of the push order designation number table is acquired.

For example, when the small winning combination B1 is won in the part drawing process in step S2180 of FIG. 227, the condition winning equipment number "11" of the small winning combination B1 is stored in the winning and replay condition device number storage area (_NB_CND_NOR). Therefore, after the process of step S4022, the A register value is "11".
Further, the A register value “11” is added to the HL register value “1900 (H)” after the process of step S4023 to obtain a new HL register value “190 B (H)”. In this way, the address of the storage area of the pressing order instruction number of the small winning combination B1 can be calculated.
Then, the push order instruction number “A1 (H)” corresponding to the address “190 B (H)” of the push order instruction number table is stored in the A register. Accordingly, the A register value after the process of step S4024 becomes "A1 (H)".

Next, proceeding to step S4025, the push order instruction number is stored in the RWM 53. That is, the A register value is stored in the storage area of the push order instruction number in the RWM 53.
As described above, the push order instruction number corresponding to the condition device number is calculated and stored in the RWM 53 by performing arithmetic processing using the data stored in the winning and replay condition device number storage area (_NB_CND_NOR) as the offset value. be able to.

In the next step S4026, the A register value (push order instruction number) is stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT). Then, the process according to this flowchart is ended.
When the push order instruction number is stored in the acquired sheet count data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) in step S4026 in FIG. 228, the push processing is performed to indicate the push order display LED 78 (digits 3 and 4). Information is displayed.
For example, it is assumed that "A2 (H)" is stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) as the pressing order instruction number. In this case, the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) in FIG. 134 calculates “10” as the upper digit offset value from the push order indication number “A2 (H)”, and “2” as the lower digit offset value. Do.

Then, by reading the data obtained by adding the high-order offset value "10" to the start address "1817 (H)" of the LED segment table 2, that is, "1821 (H)" data, "=" is displayed in the digit 3 indicate.
Similarly, the address obtained by adding the offset value "2" of the lower digit to the start address "1817 (H)" of the LED segment table 2, that is, "2" in the digit 4 by reading data of "1819 (H)" Display
In this way, the pressing order indication information “= 2” is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78.

FIG. 229 is a flowchart showing the medal payout number updating process in step S4014 of FIG.
First, in step S4031, medal payout number data is acquired. Since the winning combination (combination of symbols) can be specified based on the display determination (winning determination) in step S2186 of FIG. 227, the medal payout number corresponding to the combination of the symbols is read from the data table or the like.

In the next step S4032, the medal payout number data acquired in step S4031 is stored (stored) in the medal payout number data storage area (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) of the RWM 53.
Since the value of the medal payout number data storage area (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) is “0” at the time of processing in step S4031, processing for newly writing data is executed. For example, at the time of winning one winning combination, the data value is updated from "0" to "1".
Note that when the combination having a medal payout is not won, it is optional whether or not the process of step S4031 is performed. For example, there are a method of skipping step S4031 and a method of executing the process of step S4031 and writing a data value "0".

In the next step S4033, the medal payout number data acquired in step S4031 is stored (stored) in the medal payout number data buffer (_BF_PAY_MEDAL) of the RWM 53.
Since the value written in the previous game remains in the medal payout number data buffer (_BF_PAY_MEDAL), the processing for writing (overwriting) medal payout number data (“0” when there is no medal payout in the game) Run.
Then, the process according to this flowchart is ended.

In the medal payout number updating process of FIG. 229 described above, the value of the medal payout number data storage area (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) stored in step S4032 is subsequently decremented by “1” each time one medal payout is made, and the medal payout is made. It will be "0" at the end.
On the other hand, the value of the medal payout number data buffer (_BF_PAY_MEDAL) stored in step S4033 is maintained until the next game is updated, that is, until the process of step S4033 is performed in the next game (changed Absent).

FIG. 230 is a flow chart showing medal payout processing (MS_WIN_PAY) by winning in step S4015 of FIG.
First, in step S4041, medal payout number data is acquired. This processing is processing for storing the value of the medal payout number data storage area (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) of the RWM 53 in the A register. Thus, the medal payout number data is stored in the A register.

  Next, proceeding to step S4042, it is determined whether there is a payout of medals. Specifically, it is determined whether the value (register A value) of the medal payout number data storage area (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) is “0”. Then, when it is determined that it is "0", that is, when it is determined that there is no payout of medals, the processing according to this flowchart is ended. On the other hand, when it is determined that it is not "0", that is, when it is determined that medals are paid out, the process proceeds to step S4043.

In step S4043, the stored number is read. Specifically, the value of the storage quantity data storage area (_NB_CREDIT) of the RWM 53 is acquired.
Next, proceeding to step S4044, it is determined whether or not the number of stored medals reaches the limit value. Specifically, when the stored sheet data acquired in step S4043 is "50", it is determined that the stored sheet number is the limit value, and the process proceeds to step S4083, and the acquired stored sheet data is less than "50". If it is determined that the number of stored sheets is not the limit value, the process proceeds to step S4045.

In step S4045, the standby time at the time of accumulated medal addition is set. In this embodiment, in order to set about 100 ms as the wait time, the number of times of interrupt processing “46” (46 × 2.235 ms = about 100 ms) is set. Therefore, "00000000 (B)" is set as the B register value, and "00101110 (B)" is set as the C register value.
Next, proceeding to step S4046, a 2-byte time waiting process is executed. This process is a process of subtracting the BC register value for each interrupt process and waiting until it becomes "0".

When the 2-byte time waiting process of step S4046 is completed, the process proceeds to step S4047, and the one-sheet adding process of the number of stored sheets is executed. Specifically, "1" is added to the value of the storage quantity data storage area (_NB_CREDIT) of the RWM 53. Then, the display of the digits 1 and 2 (the storage number display LED 76) is “+1” by the interrupt processing executed after the processing of step S4047. For example, the display of the storage number display LED 76 changes from “08” to “09”.
When the process of step S4047 ends, the process proceeds to step S4049.

  When the process proceeds from step S4044 to step S4048, one medal payout process (process of paying out actual medals from the hopper 35 to the player) is executed. By the above processing, the number of stored sheets is added until the number of stored sheets reaches the limit value, and when the number of stored sheets is the limit, a process of paying out an actual medal from the hopper 35 is executed.

  In step S 4049, “1” is added to the value of the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) of the RWM 53. The display of the digits 3 and 4 (acquisition number display LED 78) is “+1” by the interrupt process executed after the process of step S4049. For example, the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 changes from "02" to "03".

In the next step S 4050, “1” is subtracted from the value of the medal payout number data storage area (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) of the RWM 53.
In step S 4050, only the value of the medal payout number data storage area (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) is updated, and the value of the medal payout number data buffer (_BF_PAY_MEDAL) is not updated.

  Next, proceeding to step S4051, it is determined whether medal payout has ended. This process is a process of judging whether or not the value of the medal payout number data storage area (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) after the update becomes "0". If it is determined that the value of the medal payout number data storage area (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) is “0”, the processing according to this flowchart is ended, and it is determined that the value of the medal payout number data storage area (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) is not “0”. The process returns to step S4043.

In the above-described payout process, when a payout is performed to add one stored sheet, the waiting time for about 100 ms is set by the processes of steps S4045 and S4046. As a result, the player can be shown to count up the display of the stored number display LED 76. For example, when the display of the storage number display LED 76 before storage addition is “08” and 8 medals are stored and added to this, “display“ 08 ”→ wait processing of 100 ms → display“ 09 ”→ 100 ms Weight processing of ... → → 100 ms weight processing → display "16". On the other hand, if the standby time is not provided when the number of stored sheets is one, the display "08" appears to be instantaneously changed to the display "16".
Then, as in the present embodiment, when adding the number of stored sheets, a two-byte time waiting process is performed for each addition so that a payout sound ("Plurl ...) output from the sub control board 80 side. Can be synchronized with the count-up of the number of stored sheets.

On the other hand, when the number of stored sheets exceeds the maximum number "50" and medals are actually paid out in the process of step S4048, the 2-byte time waiting process of steps S4046 and S4047 is not provided.
This is because, in order to pay out one actual medal, the hopper motor 36 is driven to pay out, and it takes about 100 ms to pay out one sheet. As a result, since the payout time per medal is about 100 ms, when an actual medal is paid out, a 2-byte time waiting process is not provided. Therefore, when the medals are actually paid out, it is possible to synchronize with the payout sound output from the sub control board 80 side without providing the 2-byte time waiting process.

FIG. 231 (1) is a diagram showing a state where “88” is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 during setting change (the seven segments A to G possessed by the digits 3 and 4 are lit). is there.
As described above, in step S4001 of the setting change process (M_RANK_SET) in FIG. 226, “88 (D)” (in binary notation) indicating that the setting is being changed in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) of RWM 53. 01011000 (B) ”is stored, and in the next step S4002,“ 11100000 (B) ”corresponding to the setting change is stored in the LED display request flag storage area (_FL_LED_DSP) of the RWM 53. Then, “88” is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 by the interrupt process executed after this process.

Here, when “88 (D)” is stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT), in step S1447 of the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) of FIG. 134, “88 (D)” is stored from the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT). D) is acquired and stored in the A register.
In step S1450 of FIG. 134, an operation of dividing the A register value "88 (D)" by "10 (D)" is executed, and the quotient "8 (D)" is stored in the A register as the upper digit offset value. The remainder "8 (D)" is stored in the C register as the lower digit offset value.

  Furthermore, in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is "00100000 (B)", the upper address offset value "8 (D)" is added to the start address of the LED segment table 2 in FIG. By the addition, “8” display data (address “181 F (H)” in FIG. 224) is obtained as segment output data. Then, in step S1458, "8" is displayed on digit 3 (upper digit of the number-of-captures display LED 78).

  Also in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is “01000000 (B)”, the LED of FIG. 224 is displayed in step S1455 of FIG. 134 as in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is “00100000 (B)”. By adding the lower digit offset value “8 (D)” to the start address of the segment table 2, “8” display data is obtained as segment output data. Then, in step S1458, "8" is displayed on the digit 4 (lower digit of the acquisition number display LED 78).

Thus, "88" is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 during the setting change.
Further, the display of “88” is continued until the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) is cleared in step S4003 of the setting change process of FIG. Then, when the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) is cleared, the display of the acquired number display LED 78 (digits 3 and 4) changes from "88" to "00" by the interrupt process executed after this process.

FIG. 231 (2) is a diagram showing a state in which “= 1” is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 (digits 3 and 4) as push order instruction information in the instructed game section.
As described above, when proceeding to the pressing order indication number setting process (M_ORD_INF) in step S4012 in the main process (M_MAIN) of FIG. A push order instruction number is stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT).
Then, when the push order instruction number is stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT), the push order instruction information is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 (digits 3 and 4) by the interrupt processing executed after this process. Ru.

For example, it is assumed that the push order instruction number "A3 (H)" is stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT). In this case, in step S1447 of the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) of FIG. 134, “A3 (H)” is acquired from the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) and stored in the A register.
In step S1450 of FIG. 134, an operation of dividing the A register value “A3 (H)” by “10 (D)” is executed, and “A (H)” (“10 (D)” is set as the upper digit offset value. Is acquired and stored in the A register, and “3 (H)” (“3 (D)”) is acquired as the lower digit offset value and stored in the C register.

  Furthermore, in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is "00100000 (B)", the upper address offset value "10 (D)" is added to the start address of the LED segment table 2 in FIG. By adding, “=” display data (address “1821 (H)” in FIG. 224) is acquired as segment output data. Then, in step S1458, "=", which is a part of the push order instruction information, is displayed on digit 3 (upper digit of acquired number display LED 78).

  Also, in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is "01000000 (B)", the lower address offset value "3 (D)" is added to the top address of the LED segment table 2 in FIG. By the addition, “3” display data (address “181A (H)” in FIG. 224) is obtained as segment output data. Then, in step S1458, "3", which is another part of the push order instruction information, is displayed on digit 4 (lower digit of acquired number display LED 78).

Thus, when it becomes a game having an advantageous pushing order in the instructed game section, pushing order instructing information "= 3" is displayed on the number-of-gains display LED 78.
Further, the display of the push order instruction information “= 3” continues until the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) is cleared in step S4013 of the main processing of FIG. Then, when the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) is cleared, the display of the acquired number display LED 78 (digits 3 and 4) changes from “= 3” to “00” by the interrupt process executed after this process. .

FIG. 231 (3) detects a “dE” error (opening of the front door) which is one of the recoverable errors, and displays “dE” on the acquisition number display LED 78 (digits 3 and 4). FIG.
When the front door is opened, the door switch 15 is turned on. At this time, when it is detected that the door switch 15 is turned on in the input port reading process of step S1407 in the interrupt process of FIG. 133, “dE” is stored in the error number storage area (_NB_ERROR) of RWM 53 as an error number. “35 (H)” corresponding to the error is stored (FIG. 222).

Then, when “35 (H)” is stored in the error number storage area (_NB_ERROR), “dE error” is shown in the acquisition number display LED 78 (digits 3 and 4) by the interrupt processing executed after this processing. "dE" is displayed.
Here, when “35 (H)” is stored in the error number storage area (_NB_ERROR), the error number storage area (_NB_ERROR) is displayed as the error number “35 (H)” in step S1439 of the LED display control of FIG. Is acquired and stored in the B register.

In step S1448 of FIG. 134, it is determined that an error is displayed ("Yes") because the B register value is not "0", and in the next step S1449, the B register value is set in the A register. The start address of the segment table 1 is set in the HL register.
Further, in step S1450 of FIG. 134, an operation of dividing the A register value “35 (H)” (“53 (D)”) by “10 (D)” is executed, and the quotient “5 (D)” is high It is stored in the A register as the digit offset value, and the remainder "3 (D)" is stored in the C register as the lower digit offset value.

  Then, in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is “00100000 (B)”, the upper address offset value “5 (D)” is added to the head address of the LED segment table 1 in FIG. 224 in step S1455 in FIG. By adding, “d” display data (address “1816 (H)” in FIG. 224) is obtained as segment output data. Then, in step S1458, "d" is displayed on digit 3 (upper digit of the acquisition number display LED 78).

  Also, in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is "01000000 (B)", the lower address offset value "3 (D)" is added to the start address of LED segment table 1 in FIG. 224 in step S1455 in FIG. By adding, “E” display data (address “1814 (H)” in FIG. 224) is obtained as segment output data. Then, in step S1458, "E" is displayed on the digit 4 (lower digit of the acquisition number display LED 78).

Thus, when an "dE" error occurs, "dE" is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78. Further, the display of "dE" can not be resolved simply by closing the front door and turning off the door switch 15, and continues until the error is cleared.
When the door key is inserted into the keyhole of the front door and rotated 90 degrees counterclockwise, the reset switch 14 is turned on. At this time, when it is detected that the reset switch 14 is turned on by the input port reading process of step S1407 in the interrupt process of FIG. 133, “no error data is shown in the error number storage area (_NB_ERROR) of RWM 53“ 00 (H) is stored (FIG. 222).

This cancels the error. Then, due to the interrupt processing executed after this processing, the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 (digits 3 and 4) returns from “dE” to the original display (for example, the acquired number “09”).
As described above, when a recoverable error occurs, it is possible to recover from the error by removing the cause of the error and operating the reset switch 14 without performing the on / off operation of the power switch 11. .
The “dE” error may be canceled by closing the front door and turning off the door switch 15.

In FIG. 231 (4), an “E1” error (an error indicating that the return from the power-off is judged not to be normal), which is one of the non-returnable errors, becomes “E1” as an acquisition number display LED 78 (digit It is a figure which shows the state currently displayed on 3 and 4).
In the program start process executed when the power switch 11 of the slot machine 10 is turned on, if it is determined that the power failure recovery data is not a normal value, an “E1” error will occur, and the recovery impossible error processing shown in FIG. Go to 1 (SS_ERROR_STOP1).

In the non-returnable error processing 1, the interrupt processing (I_INTR) shown in FIG. 133 is not executed, and therefore the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) shown in FIG. 134 is not executed either.
Then, when an “E1” error occurs, “E” is displayed on the digit 3 and “1” is displayed on the digit 4 by the return impossible error processing 1.

Here, if it is determined that a non-returnable error has occurred, segment data for displaying the low-order digit of the non-returnable error that has occurred is stored in the L register before shifting to non-returnable error processing.
In the program start process, if it is determined that the “E1” error has occurred, a segment for displaying the low-order digit “1” of the “E1” error in the L register before shifting to the return impossible error processing 1 Data "00000110 (B)" is stored.

In step S1491 of FIG. 136, digit data "01000000 (B)" for lighting digit 4 is stored in the H register.
Furthermore, in step S1492 of FIG. 136, digit data "00100000 (B)" for lighting digit 3 is stored in D register, and upper digit "E" of "E1" error is displayed in E register. The segment data “01111001 (B)” for this purpose is stored.

Then, in step S1497 in FIG. 136, the output port 2 outputs the data (digit signal) stored in the D register, and the output port 3 outputs the data (segment signal) stored in the E register. As a result, “E” is displayed on the digit 3 (upper digit of the number-of-acquisitions display LED 78).
In step S1501 of FIG. 136, the DE register value and the HL register value are exchanged, and in the next step S1502, the data stored in the D register is output from output port 2 as in step S1497, and the output port From 3 outputs the data stored in the E register. As a result, “1” is displayed on the digit 4 (lower digit of the acquisition number display LED 78).

Thereafter, the process of displaying “E” on the digit 3 and the process of displaying “1” on the digit 4 are alternately repeated until the return process is performed.
Thus, when an “E1” error occurs, “E1” is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78.
Also, when an unrecoverable error occurs, the power switch 11 is once turned off. Then, the setting key switch 12 is turned on by inserting the setting key and rotating 90 degrees clockwise, and in this state, the power switch 11 is turned on again. As a result, the predetermined range of the RWM 53 is cleared by the initialization process in the setting change process (M_RANK_SET) of FIG. 226, and the return process is performed.

In FIG. 231 (5), the storage number display LED 76 (digits 1 and 2) displays the storage number “50”, and the acquisition number display LED 78 (digits 3 and 4) displays the acquisition number “09”. FIG.
When the stored number of medals is 50, the stored number data “50” is stored in the stored number data storage area (_NB_CREDIT) of the RWM 53.
Further, when the number of medals paid out (the number obtained by the player) is 9, finally, the acquired number data “9” is stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) of the RWM 53.

  Furthermore, when the stored sheet data "50" is stored in the stored sheet data storage area (_NB_CREDIT), the stored sheet data storage area data ("_NB_CREDIT") is stored in step S1443 of the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) of FIG. 50 "is acquired and stored in the A register. At the next step S1444, an operation of dividing the A register value “50” by “10” is executed, the quotient “5” is stored in the A register as the upper digit offset value, and the remainder “0” is lower digit It is stored in the C register as an offset value.

  Then, in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is "00001000 (B)", the upper address offset value "5" is added to the head address of the LED segment table 2 in FIG. 224 in step S1455 in FIG. Thus, “5” display data (address “181 C (H)” in FIG. 224) is acquired as segment output data. Then, in step S1458, "5" is displayed on digit 1 (upper digit of storage number display LED 76).

Also, in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is “00010000 (B)”, the lower digit offset value “0” is added to the head address of the LED segment table 2 of FIG. 224 in step S1455 of FIG. Thus, “0” display data (address “1817 (H)” in FIG. 224) is acquired as segment output data. Then, in step S1458, "0" is displayed on digit 2 (the lower digit of the storage number display LED 76).
Thus, “50” is displayed on the storage number display LED 76.

  Also, when acquired sheet data "9" is stored in acquired sheet data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT), acquired sheet data "from acquired sheet data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) in step S1447 of LED display control (I_LED_OUT) of FIG. 9 "is acquired and stored in the A register. Further, when the process proceeds to step S1450 in FIG. 134, an operation of dividing the A register value “9” by “10” is executed, the quotient “0” is stored in the A register as the upper digit offset value, and the remainder “9”. Is stored in the C register as the lower digit offset value.

  Then, in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is “00100000 (B)”, the high-order offset value “0” is added to the head address of the LED segment table 2 of FIG. 224 in step S1455 of FIG. Thus, “0” display data (address “1817 (H)” in FIG. 224) is acquired as segment output data. Then, in step S1458, “0” is displayed on digit 3 (upper digit of acquired number display LED 78).

Also, in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is "00010000 (B)", the lower digit offset value "9" is added to the head address of the LED segment table 2 in FIG. 224 in step S1455 in FIG. Thus, “9” display data (address “1820 (H)” in FIG. 224) is acquired as segment output data. Then, in step S1458, "9" is displayed on the digit 4 (lower digit of the acquisition number display LED 78).
Thus, "09" is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78.

Here, the operation information of the stop switch which is advantageous to the player is important information related to the presence or absence of the payout of the medal.
However, if the segments possessed by the acquisition number display LED 78 (digits 3 and 4) fail or there is a failure in the signal line for transmitting signals to these segments, the operation information of the stop switch which is advantageous to the player is acquired. The number display LED 78 does not display correctly, which may cause a disadvantage to the player.

Here, it is assumed that the small winning combination B5 is won in the instruction game section. At this time, if none of the segments have failed and there is no failure in any of the signal lines that transmit signals to the segments, the acquisition number display LED 78 displays “= 2” indicating the first stop in the middle. Should be displayed (Figures 19 and 20).
However, for example, it is assumed that segment E of digit 4 has failed or that a signal line transmitting a signal to segment E has failed. In this case, when the small winning combination B5 is won in the instructed game section, segments A, B, D and G of digit 4 are lit, and segments C, E and F are extinguished. In this case, the player is displayed whether "= 2" indicating the first stop in the middle is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 or "= 3" indicating the first right stop is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78, or the player Can not be determined.

  Then, the player who sees digit 4 with segments A, B, D and G turned on and segments C, E and F turned off guesses that "3" is displayed on digit 4 and right It is assumed that the stop switch 42 is operated in the pushing order of the first stop. In this case, the number of medals obtained by the player will be 1 or 0 (FIG. 14), and it would have been obtained if “= 2” indicating the first stop in the middle is correctly displayed on the number-of-ears display LED 78 The player can not obtain nine medals.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, during the setting change, seven segments A to G of the digit 3 are lit in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is “00100000 (B)” (“8 In the interrupt process when the LED display counter value is “01000000 (B)”, seven segments A to G of the digit 4 are lit (“8” is displayed on the digit 4).

  In this manner, by turning on the seven segments A to G possessed by the digits 3 and 4 during setting change, the digits 3 and 4 for which push order instruction information is displayed during the instructed game section are not broken. In addition, it is possible to confirm that the signal lines for transmitting segment signals to the digits 3 and 4 are not impaired.

  Also, while the setting is changed, for example, seven of segments A to G possessed by digit 3 are lit, and among seven segments possessed by digit 4, six of segments A and C to G are illuminated, When the segment B does not light, it can be determined that the segment B of the digit 4 has a possibility of failure.

  Furthermore, during setting change, for example, six segments A to E and G possessed by digit 3 are lit, but segment F is not illuminated, and six segments A to E and G possessed by digit 4 are not. It lights up, but when segment F does not light, there is a possibility that not only the possibility that the segment F of the digit 3 and 4 is broken but also that the signal line for transmitting the segment signal to the segment F is damaged It can be judged. In particular, since the setting change is performed by the store clerk in the hall before the opening of the hall, the shop clerk in the hall can confirm the presence or absence of the segment failure and the signal line failure before the opening of the hall. It is possible not to penalize the player.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when an “dE” error occurs, “d” is displayed on the digit 3 in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is “00100000 (B)”, and the LED display counter value is “01000000 ( In the interrupt processing in the case of B), "E" is displayed on the digit 4.

Here, when “d” is displayed on the digit 3, the segments B, C, D, E and G of the digit 3 are lit. This makes it possible to confirm that these segments have not failed and that the signal lines for transmitting segment signals to these segments have not failed.
Also, when displaying "E" in the digit 4, the segments A, D, E, F and G of the digit 4 are lit. This makes it possible to confirm that these segments have not failed and that the signal lines for transmitting segment signals to these segments have not failed.

  Furthermore, in the digits 3 and 4, the segments A to G signals are shared. Therefore, it is confirmed that segments B, C, D, E and G of digit 3 are turned on, and segments A, D, E, F and G of digit 4 are turned on, thereby providing segments A to G signals. It is possible to confirm that no failure occurs in the portion common to the digits 3 and 4 among the lines.

Of the segment A to G signal lines, a portion common to the digits 3 and 4 is a branch portion where the signal line branches from the output port 3 (output terminals D0 to D7 of IC 3) to digit 3 and digit 4 Means up to.
Further, among the segments A to G signal lines, portions common to the digits 3 and 4 include a harness and a connector for connecting the main control substrate 50 and the display substrate 75.
Therefore, by confirming that segments B, C, D, E and G of digit 3 are lit and segments A, D, E, F and G of digit 4 are lit, display is made from main control board 50 It can be confirmed that the harnesses and connectors for transmitting the digit signal and the segment signal to the substrate 75 have not failed.

In particular, when the store clerk in the hall opens the front door, for example, to supply the medals to the hopper 35 before or during opening of the hall, the door switch 15 is turned on, and "dE" is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 Is displayed. As a result, since the store clerk in the hall can confirm the presence or absence of the breakdown of the segment and the presence of the failure of the signal line before or during the opening of the hall, the player can be prevented from being disadvantaged.
In addition, while the setting is being checked, unlike when the setting is being changed, "88" is not displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78, but if the front door is open, the door switch 15 remains on and the acquisition number display LED 78 Continues to display "dE". As a result, the store clerk in the hall can confirm the presence or absence of the failure of the segment and the presence or absence of the failure of the signal line, so that the player can be prevented from being disadvantaged.

  In addition, when the setting is changed during the confirmation, a “menu screen” which is one of the screens for the store clerk in the hall is displayed on the image display device 23. The menu screen displays items such as “volume setting” and “history of setting change”, “current volume”, “date and time of last setting change”, and the like. Then, when the cross key 24 is operated to select the item “history of setting change” and the menu button 25 is operated in this state, a “setting change history screen” is displayed on the image display device 23. On the setting change history screen, "time and date when the setting was changed" and "set value after change" can be confirmed for a plurality of times.

As described above, during setting confirmation, the set value can be confirmed while looking at the image display device 23 provided on the front side of the front door, so "dE" is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 similarly provided on the front side of the front door. It is easy to check whether the is displayed correctly.
However, it is not preferable to display the setting value on the image display device 23 under the situation where the player can visually recognize the image display device 23. Therefore, when the setting is shifted during the setting confirmation, the image display device 23 is first set. A menu screen with no value is displayed.
Under the condition where the player can visually recognize the image display device 23, the store clerk in the hall may check the set value with the set value display LED 73 provided inside the slot machine 10.

In addition, in order to change the setting or confirm the setting, there is a case where a fraudulent act of opening the front door without permission to the store clerk in the hall is performed. Furthermore, in order to prevent the store clerk in the hall from noticing that such an illegal operation is being performed, the illegal operation such as destroying the sub control substrate 80 or cutting off the power supply to the sub control substrate 80 is It may be done.
If the sub control board 80 is broken or the power supply to the sub control board 80 is cut off, the effect lamp 21, the speaker 22 and the image display device 23 become inoperable, and an error notification using these is performed. It disappears.

Here, if the sub control board 80 is broken or the power supply to the sub control board 80 is cut off, the effect lamp 21, the speaker 22 and the image display device 23 become inoperable, and therefore the pushing order using these No notification will be given.
However, in the present embodiment, since the push order indication information is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78, even if the sub control board 80 is destroyed or the power supply to the sub control board 80 is cut, the person who performs the fraudulent act is You will be informed of the favorable push order.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the opening of the front door is detected, “dE” is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78. As a result, even if the sub control board 80 is broken or the power supply to the sub control board 80 is cut off, the store clerk in the hall can know that the front door has been opened.
In addition, when the acquisition number display LED 78 is destroyed, "dE" is not displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78, but the pressing order instruction information is not displayed either. This makes it impossible for the perpetrator to know the favored push order. Therefore, destruction of the acquired number display LED 78 can be suppressed by displaying the pressing order instruction information on the acquired number display LED 78.
That is, by displaying both the error information and the push order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78, even if the sub control board 80 is destroyed, the destruction of the acquisition number display LED 78 is suppressed while the error information is displayed. can do.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when an “E1” error occurs, the interrupt processing is not performed, but a digit signal is output from the output port 2 so that “E” is displayed on the digit 3 and a segment signal from the output port 3 And a process of outputting a digit signal from the output port 2 and a process of outputting a segment signal from the output port 3 so as to display “1” in the digit 4 are alternately repeated.

Here, when "E" is displayed on the digit 3, the segments A, D, E, F and G of the digit 3 are lit. This makes it possible to confirm that these segments have not failed and that the signal lines for transmitting segment signals to these segments have not failed.
When the digit 4 displays "1", the segments B and C of the digit 4 are lit. This makes it possible to confirm that these segments have not failed and that the signal lines for transmitting segment signals to these segments have not failed.

Furthermore, since the segments A to G signals are shared in the digits 3 and 4, the segments A, D, E, F and G of the digit 3 are lit, and the segments B and C of the digit 4 are lit. By confirming that, it is possible to confirm that no failure occurs in the portions common to the digits 3 and 4 among the segment A to G signal lines.
That is, it can be confirmed that the harness and the connector for transmitting the digit signal and the segment signal from the main control substrate 50 to the display substrate 75 are not damaged.

In particular, when the power switch 11 is turned on for the first time after factory shipment, it is determined in the program start process that the power failure recovery data is not a normal value. For this reason, when the power switch 11 is first turned on after factory shipment, an “E1” error always occurs, and the process proceeds to return impossible error processing 1 (SS_ERROR_STOP1) in FIG.
When an "E1" error occurs, the power switch 11 is turned off, and then the setting key is rotated 90 degrees clockwise to turn on the setting key switch 12, and in this state, the power switch 11 is turned on again. Make it As a result, the process proceeds to setting change processing (M_RANK_SET), the predetermined range of the RWM 53 is cleared, and the “E1” error is canceled.

As described above, when the power switch 11 is turned on first after factory shipment, “E1” is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78. In addition, when an operation to cancel the “E1” error is performed, the process proceeds to setting change processing (M_RANK_SET), and “88” is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78.
As a result, when the power switch 11 is turned on for the first time after shipment from the factory, the store clerk in the hall can confirm the presence or absence of the failure of the segment and the presence or absence of the failure of the signal line. be able to.
In particular, during transportation from the factory to the hall or installation in the hall, the harnesses and connectors for transmitting digit signals and segment signals may be damaged. For this reason, when the power switch 11 is first turned on, confirming that “E1” is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 is effective to confirm that the harness and the connector have not failed. It is.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is "00001000 (B)", the upper digit of the number of stored sheets is displayed on digit 1, and the LED display counter value is "00010000 (B)" The lower digit of the number of stored sheets is displayed on the digit 2 in the interrupt process of Furthermore, in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is "00100000 (B)", the high-order digit of the acquired number is displayed on the digit 3 and in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is "01000000 (B)" The lower digit of the acquired number is displayed on the digit 4.

  Here, if it can be confirmed that the numerical value from "0" to "2" is displayed in digit 1, that segments A to G in digit 1 are not broken, and segments A to G signals in digit 1 It can be confirmed that no failure has occurred in the signal line to be transmitted. The same applies to the digits 2 to 4.

  In addition, since the segments A to G signals are shared in the digits 1 to 4, by confirming that the segments A to G of the digit 1 are lit, the digits 1 to 4 of the segment A to G signal lines As for the common part in 4, it can be confirmed that no failure has occurred. That is, it can be confirmed that the harness and the connector for transmitting the digit signal and the segment signal from the main control substrate 50 to the display substrate 75 are not damaged.

Here, when the player inserts medals from the medal insertion slot 43 in a state where the number of stored medals is zero, the first three medals are bet for the game without being stored (credited) (bet And the fourth and subsequent medals are stored.
Therefore, for example, when the player inserts five medals from the medal insertion slot 43 in a state where the number of stored medals is zero, two medals are stored, so the stored number display LED 76 (digit 1 And the display of 2) changes as “00” → “01” → “02”. As a result, the numerical values from "0" to "2" are sequentially displayed on digit 2 (the lower digit of storage number display LED 76), so that the player confirms segments A to G of digit 2 It can be confirmed that there is no failure in the signal line transmitting the segment A to G signals to the digits 1 to 4.

  In addition, in the hall where 50 medals can be borrowed for 1,000 yen, when the player borrows 50 medals at the start of the game and inserts all 50 medals from the medal insertion slot 43, the number of medals stored becomes 47 . At this time, numerical values from "00" to "47" are sequentially displayed on the storage number display LED 76, so that the segments A to G of the digits 1 and 2 are broken when the player confirms this. It can be confirmed that there is no failure in the signal lines that transmit the segment A to G signals to the digits 1 to 4.

The Twenty-ninth Embodiment
In the twenty-ninth embodiment, the digit 5 is not provided. Then, under the situation where the number of medals acquired is displayed, the number of acquired medals is displayed on the digits 3 and 4 (acquisition number display LED 78), and under the situation where the pushing order instruction information is displayed, the pushing order instruction information is displayed on the digits 3 and 4 Is displayed, and the setting value is displayed on the digit 4 under the condition where the setting value can be changed.
Further, also in the twenty-ninth embodiment, as in the twenty-eighth embodiment, when the “dE” error occurs, “dE” is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78, and when the “E1” error occurs, the acquisition number display LED “E1” Is displayed.

Here, in the twenty-ninth embodiment, the digits 1 to 4 and the circuit configuration for lighting them are the same as in the twenty-first embodiment.
That is, as shown in FIG. 138, the output port 3 outputs digit 1 to 4 and 6 to 9 signals, and the output port 4 outputs segment A to G signals. Also, the segments A to G signals are shared by the digits 1 to 4.

Further, as shown in FIG. 139 (B), in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is "00000001 (B)", the digit 1 can be lit and the LED display counter value is "00000010 (B)" The digit 2 can be lit in the interrupt process of Also, in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is "00000100 (B)", the digit 3 can be lit, and in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is "00001000 (B)", the digit 4 can be lit. It becomes.
As described above, the digit to be lit is sequentially switched every interrupt processing. That is, dynamic lighting is performed.

FIG. 232 is a diagram showing addresses, labels, and contents of data stored in the RWM 53 in the twenty-ninth embodiment, and corresponds to FIG. 222 in the twenty-eighth embodiment.
In the twenty-eighth embodiment, display data during setting change ("88") is stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) during setting change, but in the twenty-ninth embodiment, display data during setting change is substituted for display data. And store the setting value display data (any value of “1” to “6”).
In addition, although storing the LED display request flag in the LED display request flag storage area (_FL_LED_DSP) is the same in the twenty-eighth embodiment and the twenty-ninth embodiment, the value of the LED display request flag is the twenty-eighth embodiment. And the twenty-ninth embodiment.
Except for the above, it is the same as FIG. 222 of the twenty-eighth embodiment.

FIG. 233 is a diagram showing a relation between setting value data, setting value display data and setting value display.
As described above, the setting value data is stored in the setting value data storage area (_NB_RANK).
The setting value display data is data obtained by adding “1” to the setting value data, and is stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) during setting change.
When the set value is "N", the set value data "N-1" is stored in the set value data storage area (_NB_RANK), and at this time, when shifting to the setting change, the acquired number data storage area The set value display data "N" is stored in (_NB_PAYOUT), and the set value "N" is displayed in the digit 4 (the lower digit of the acquired number display LED 78).

FIG. 234 is a flowchart showing setting change processing (M_RANK_SET) in the twenty-ninth embodiment, and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 226 in the twenty-eighth embodiment.
In the flowchart described below, the same step numbers are assigned to steps that execute the same processes as those in the twenty-eighth embodiment, and overlapping descriptions will be omitted. Further, in the steps having contents different from the twenty-eighth embodiment, the step numbers are underlined.

Step S4101 is a step corresponding to step S4001 in FIG. 226. Here, setting value display data is generated and stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT). The details of this process will be described later with reference to FIG.
The next step S4102 is a step corresponding to step S4002 in FIG. 226. Here, “00001100 (B)” corresponding to the setting change is stored in the LED display request flag storage area (_FL_LED_DSP).
By the process of step S4102, illumination of the digits 3 and 4 (acquisition number display LED 78) becomes possible. Then, the present setting value is displayed on the digit 4 (the lower digit of the acquisition number display LED 78) by the interrupt process executed after the process of step S4102.

In step S4103, as in step S4101, the setting value display data is generated and stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT). Note that the step corresponding to step S4103 is not provided in FIG.
The next step S4104 is a step corresponding to step S4004 in FIG. 226. Here, “11111111 (B)” corresponding to the normal time is stored in the LED display request flag storage area (_FL_LED_DSP).
Then, the display of the digits 1 to 4 (the storage number display LED 76 and the acquisition number display LED 78) becomes “0000” by the interrupt processing executed after the processing of step S4104. Note that the storage number display LED 76 and the acquisition number display LED 78 may be turned off.
Except for the above, the flowchart is the same as the flowchart of the twenty-eighth embodiment shown in FIG.

FIG. 235 is a flowchart showing set value display data setting processing in steps S4101 and S4103 in FIG.
First, in step S4111, setting value data is acquired from the setting value data storage area (_NB_RANK), and in the next step S4112, “1” is added to the setting value data to generate setting value display data. Then, the process proceeds to the next step S4413.
In step S4113, the setting value display data is stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT). Then, the process according to this flowchart is ended.

FIG. 236A is a diagram showing a state in which setting values “1” to “6” are displayed on the digit 4 (lower digit of the acquisition number display LED 78) during setting change.
As described above, in step S4101 of the setting change process of FIG. 234, the setting value display data is generated and stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT), and in the next step S4102, the LED display request flag storage area ( In _FL_LED_DSP), the corresponding LED display request flag “00001100 (B)” is stored during the setting change. Then, the setting value is displayed on the digit 4 by the interrupt process executed after this process.

  Here, it is assumed that, for example, “6” is stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) as the setting value display data. In this case, in the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) of FIG. 134, in step S1447, the setting value display data “6” is acquired from the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) and stored in the A register. In step S1450, an operation of dividing setting value display data "6" stored in register A by "10" is executed, and the quotient "0" is stored in register A as the upper digit offset value, and the remainder is "6" is stored in the C register as the lower digit offset value.

  Furthermore, in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is "00001000 (B)", the lower digit offset value "6" is added to the head address of the LED segment table 2 of FIG. 224 in step S1455 of FIG. Thus, “6” display data (address “181 D (H)” in FIG. 224) is obtained as segment output data. Then, in step S1458, "6" is displayed on the digit 4 (lower digit of the acquisition number display LED 78).

  Also, when the operation of the setting switch 13 is detected in step S2140 in FIG. 234, the process proceeds to step S2141, where setting value data of the setting value data storage area (_NB_RANK) is updated, and in the next step S4103, setting is performed. Value display data is generated and stored in the acquired sheet number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT). Then, the updated set value is displayed on the digit 4 by the interrupt process executed after this process.

Further, when the process proceeds to step S2140 in FIG. 234, thereafter, the process of steps S2140 to S4103 is repeated until the operation of the start switch 41 is detected in step S2142. As a result, the display of the digit 4 is switched as “1” → “2” →... → “5” → “6” → “1” →... As shown in FIG. 236 (1).
Thus, while the setting is being changed, the setting value is displayed on the digit 4.
Further, the display of the setting value continues until the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) is cleared in step S4003 of the setting change process of FIG. Then, when the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) is cleared, the display of the digit 4 is performed from the set value (one of values “1” to “6”) by the interrupt process executed after this process. It will be "0".

FIG. 236 (2) is a diagram showing a state in which push order instruction information “= 1” is displayed on the number-of-acquisitions display LED 78 in the instruction game section. The process for displaying the pressing order instruction information on the acquisition number display LED 78 is the same as that shown in FIG. 231 (2).
Further, FIG. 236 (3) is a diagram showing a state in which the acquired number “09” is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78. The process for displaying the number of acquisitions on the acquisition number display LED 78 is the same as that shown in FIG. 231 (5).

As described above, in the twenty-ninth embodiment, during the setting change, the setting value is displayed on the digit 4 (lower digit of the acquisition number display LED 78) in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is "00001000 (B)". Do.
In addition, during setting change, each time the setting switch 13 is operated, the display (setting value) of the digit 4 is displayed as "1" → "2" → ... → "5" → "6" → "1" → Switch to ....

Here, if it can be confirmed that, for example, numerical values from "2" to "4" are displayed in digit 4, that segments A to G in digit 4 have not failed, and segments A to G signals in digit 4 It can be confirmed that there is no failure in the signal line that transmits the
Also, since the segments A to G signals are shared in the digits 3 and 4, by confirming that the segments A to G of the digit 4 are lit, the digits 3 and 3 of the segment A to G signal lines are As for the common part in 4, it can be confirmed that no failure has occurred. That is, it can be confirmed that the harness and the connector for transmitting the digit signal and the segment signal from the main control substrate 50 to the display substrate 75 are not damaged. In particular, since it can be confirmed when the store clerk in the hall changes the set value before the opening of the hall, the player will not be disadvantaged.

<Modification of the 28th and 29th embodiment>
As described above, the twenty-eighth and twenty-ninth embodiments have been described. However, the present invention is not limited to the above-described contents, and various modifications may be made as described below, for example.
(1) In the twenty-eighth embodiment, when it becomes a game having an advantageous pushing order in the instructed game section, the order is pushed to digit 3 in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is “00100000 (B)”. In the interrupt processing when “=” which is a part of the instruction information is displayed and the LED display counter value is “01000000 (B)”, the digit 4 is “1” which is another part of the push instruction information. "3" was displayed. However, it is not limited to this.

(2) In the circuit configuration of the twenty-eighth embodiment, when it becomes a game having an advantageous pushing order in the instructed game section, the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is "00100000 (B)", digit 3 The pressing order instruction information "1" to "3" may be displayed.
For digit 4, “0” or “=” may be displayed in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is “01000000 (B)”, or non-display (segments A to G are turned off ) May be used.

(3) In the circuit configuration of the twenty-eighth embodiment, when the push order instruction information "1" to "3" is displayed on the digit 3, the LED display counter value is "00100000 (B)" during the setting change. In the interrupt processing, “8” may be displayed on the digit 3 (segments A to G are lit).
This makes it possible to confirm that the segments A to G of the digit 3 have not failed and that the signal line for transmitting the segments A to G to the digit 3 has not failed.

(4) In the circuit configuration of the twenty-eighth embodiment, when the push order instruction information "1" to "3" is displayed on the digit 3, the LED display counter value is "01000000 (B)" during the setting change. In the interrupt processing, “8” may be displayed on the digit 4 (segments A to G are lighted).
Thus, by confirming that the segments A to G of the digit 4 are turned on, it is possible to confirm that no failure occurs in the portions common to the digits 3 and 4 among the segment A to G signal lines.

(5) In the circuit configuration of the twenty-eighth embodiment, when the push order instruction information "1" to "3" is displayed on the digit 3, the numerical value from "0" to "2" may be displayed on the digit 3 .
This also makes it possible to confirm that the segments A to G of the digit 3 have not failed and that the signal line for transmitting the segments A to G to the digit 3 has not failed.

(6) In the circuit configuration of the twenty-eighth embodiment, even when the push order instruction information "1" to "3" is displayed on the digit 3, the LED display counter value is "00100000 (B)" when the "dE" error occurs. “D” may be displayed on the digit 3 in the interrupt processing when “”, and “E” may be displayed on the digit 4 in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is “01000000 (B)”.
As a result, it is confirmed that segments B, C, D, E and G of digit 3 are turned on, and segments A, D, E, F and G of digit 4 are turned on, thereby providing segments A to G signals. It is possible to confirm that no failure occurs in the portion common to the digits 3 and 4 among the lines.

(7) In the circuit configuration of the twenty-eighth embodiment, even in the case where push order instruction information "1" to "3" is displayed on digit 3, a process of displaying "E" on digit 3 when an "E1" error occurs. And the process of displaying “1” in the digit 4 may be alternately repeated.
Thus, by confirming that segments A, D, E, F and G of digit 3 are lit, and confirming that segments B and C of digit 4 are lit, digit 3 of the segment A to G signal lines And 4 can confirm that there is no failure in the common part.

(8) In the circuit configuration of the twenty-eighth embodiment, even when the push order instruction information "1" to "3" is displayed on the digit 3, interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is "00001000 (B)" The upper digit of the stored sheet number is displayed on the digit 1, and the lower digit of the stored sheet number is displayed on the digit 2 in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is "00010000 (B)". In the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is "00100000 (B)", the high-order digit of the acquired number is displayed on the digit 3, and in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is "01000000 (B)", The lower digit of the acquired number is displayed on the digit 4.
As a result, by confirming that the segments A to G are lit for the digits 1 to 4, it is confirmed that no failure occurs in the portions common to the digits 1 to 4 among the segments A to G. it can.

  (9) In the circuit configuration of the twenty-eighth embodiment, when it becomes a game having an advantageous pushing order in the commanded game section, the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is "00100000 (B)", digit 3 "0" is displayed on the screen or digit 3 is not displayed (segments A to G are turned off), and digit 4 is pressed in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is "01000000 (B)". 1 "to" 3 "may be displayed.

(10) In the circuit configuration of the twenty-eighth embodiment, when push order instruction information “1” to “3” is displayed on the digit 4, the LED display counter value is “01000000 (B)” during the setting change. In the interrupt processing, “8” may be displayed on the digit 4 (segments A to G are lighted).
This makes it possible to confirm that the segments A to G of the digit 4 have not failed and that the signal lines for transmitting the segments A to G to the digit 4 have not failed.

(11) In the circuit configuration of the twenty-eighth embodiment, when pressing order instruction information "1" to "3" is displayed on the digit 4, the LED display counter value is "00100000 (B)" during the setting change. In the interrupt processing, “8” may be displayed on the digit 3 (segments A to G are lit).
Thus, by confirming that the segments A to G of the digit 3 are lit, it is possible to confirm that no failure occurs in the portions common to the digits 3 and 4 among the segment A to G signal lines.

(12) In the circuit configuration of the twenty-eighth embodiment, when the push order instruction information "1" to "3" is displayed on the digit 4, the numerical value from "0" to "2" may be displayed on the digit 4 .
This also makes it possible to confirm that the segments A to G of the digit 4 have not failed and that the signal lines for transmitting the segments A to G to the digit 4 have not failed.

(13) Even when the pressing order instruction information "1" to "3" is displayed on the digit 4 in the circuit configuration of the twenty-eighth embodiment, the LED display counter value is "00100000 (B)" when the "dE" error occurs. “D” may be displayed on the digit 3 in the interrupt processing when “”, and “E” may be displayed on the digit 4 in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is “01000000 (B)”.
As a result, it is confirmed that segments B, C, D, E and G of digit 3 are turned on, and segments A, D, E, F and G of digit 4 are turned on, thereby providing segments A to G signals. It is possible to confirm that no failure occurs in the portion common to the digits 3 and 4 among the lines.

(14) A process of displaying "E" on digit 3 when an "E1" error occurs, even when digit order 4 displays push order instruction information "1" to "3" in the circuit configuration of the twenty-eighth embodiment. And the process of displaying “1” in the digit 4 may be alternately repeated.
Thus, by confirming that segments A, D, E, F and G of digit 3 are lit, and confirming that segments B and C of digit 4 are lit, digit 3 of the segment A to G signal lines And 4 can confirm that there is no failure in the common part.

(15) In the circuit configuration of the twenty-eighth embodiment, even when the push order instruction information "1" to "3" is displayed on the digit 4, interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is "00001000 (B)" The upper digit of the stored sheet number is displayed on the digit 1, and the lower digit of the stored sheet number is displayed on the digit 2 in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is "00010000 (B)". In the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is "00100000 (B)", the high-order digit of the acquired number is displayed on the digit 3, and in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is "01000000 (B)", The lower digit of the acquired number is displayed on the digit 4.
As a result, by confirming that the segments A to G are lit for the digits 1 to 4, it is confirmed that no failure occurs in the portions common to the digits 1 to 4 among the segments A to G. it can.

  (16) In the twenty-ninth embodiment, when it becomes a game having an advantageous pushing order in the instructed game section, the order of pushing the digit 3 is performed in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is “00000100 (B)”. In the interrupt processing when “=” which is a part of the instruction information is displayed and the LED display counter value is “00001000 (B)”, the digit 4 is “1” which is another part of the push instruction information. "3" was displayed. However, it is not limited to this.

(17) In the circuit configuration of the twenty-ninth embodiment, when it becomes a game having an advantageous push order in the commanded game section, the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is "00000100 (B)", digit 3 The pressing order instruction information "1" to "3" may be displayed.
For digit 4, “0” or “=” may be displayed in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is “00001000 (B)”, or non-display (segments A to G are turned off ) May be used.

(18) In the circuit configuration of the twenty-ninth embodiment, when push order instruction information "1" to "3" is displayed on the digit 3, the LED display counter value is "00001000 (B)" during the setting change. The set value may be displayed on the digit 4 in the interrupt process.
In addition, during setting change, each time the setting switch 13 is operated, the display (setting value) of the digit 4 is displayed as "1" → "2" → ... → "5" → "6" → "1" → Switch to ....

Then, if it can be confirmed that, for example, numerical values from "2" to "4" are displayed in digit 4, that segments A to G in digit 4 have not failed, and segments 4 to A signals in digit 4 It can be confirmed that no failure has occurred in the signal line to be transmitted.
Further, since the segments A to G signals are shared in the digits 3 and 4, by confirming that the segments A to G of the digit 4 are lit, the digits 3 and 4 among the segment A to G signal lines In the common part, it can be confirmed that no failure has occurred.

(19) In the circuit configuration of the twenty-ninth embodiment, when it becomes a game having an advantageous push order in the commanded game section, the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is "00001000 (B)", digit 4 The pressing order instruction information "1" to "3" may be displayed.
For digit 3, "0" may be displayed in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is "00000100 (B)", or non-display (segments A to G may be turned off). .

(20) In the circuit configuration of the twenty-ninth embodiment, when push order instruction information "1" to "3" is displayed on the digit 4, the LED display counter value is "00001000 (B)" during the setting change. The set value may be displayed on the digit 4 in the interrupt process.
In addition, during setting change, each time the setting switch 13 is operated, the display (setting value) of the digit 4 is displayed as "1" → "2" → ... → "5" → "6" → "1" → Switch to ....
Then, if it can be confirmed that, for example, numerical values from "2" to "4" are displayed in digit 4, that segments A to G in digit 4 have not failed, and segments 4 to A signals in digit 4 It can be confirmed that no failure has occurred in the signal line to be transmitted.

  (21) In the twenty-ninth embodiment, the setting value is displayed on the digit 4 (lower digit of the acquisition number display LED 78) during setting change, but at this time, regarding the digit 3 (upper digit of the acquisition number display LED 78), “0” may be displayed, “_” may be displayed (only segment D is on), or non-display (segments A to G may be off).

  (22) In the twenty-eighth and twenty-ninth embodiments, as shown in FIG. 20 and FIG. 225, as advantageous push sequences, there are three types of left first stop, middle first stop, and right first stop, The push order instruction number has four types of “A0 (H)” to “A3 (H)”, and the push order instruction information has four types of “= 0” to “= 3”. However, it is not limited to this.

(23) As shown in FIG. 237, as an advantageous pushing order, 9 kinds including 6 pushing orders such as 123 (left, middle, right) are provided in addition to the pushing order of 3 choices such as left first stop; Ten types of “A0 (H)” to “A9 (H)” may be provided as push order instruction numbers, and ten types of “= 0” to “= 9” may be provided as push order instruction information.
Also in this case, by storing the push order indication number in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT), the push order indication information “= 0” to “= 9” is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 (digits 3 and 4). can do.

(24) In FIG. 237, although the push order instruction number corresponding to the left first stop is "A1 (H)" and the push order instruction information is "= 1", for example, the push order corresponding to left middle, right The instruction number may be “A1 (H)”, and the push order instruction information may be “= 1”.
Similarly, the push order instruction number corresponding to the left first stop may be "A7 (H)", and the push order instruction information may be "= 7".
Thus, the relationship between the advantageous pushing order, the pushing order instruction number, and the pushing order instruction information can be set as appropriate.

Specifically, for example, the push order instruction numbers may be “1A (H)” to “9A (H)”, and “1” to “9” may be displayed on the digit 3 as push order instruction information. At this time, the digit 4 is not displayed (segments A to G are turned off). In this case, it is necessary to provide non-display data "00000000 (B)" in place of the "=" display data.
For example, the push order instruction numbers may be “A1 (H)” to “A9 (H)”, and “1” to “9” may be displayed on the digit 4 as push order instruction information. At this time, the digit 3 is not displayed (segments A to G are turned off). Also in this case, it is necessary to provide non-display data "00000000 (B)" instead of the "=" display data.

  Furthermore, for example, the push order instruction number may be “1” to “9”, and “01” to “09” may be displayed on the digits 3 and 4 as push order instruction information, and the push order instruction number “10” to “90” may be displayed, and “10”, “20”, “30”... “80” or “90” may be displayed on the digits 3 and 4 as pressing order instruction information, and pressing Set the order indication number to “1A (H)” to “9A (H)”, press the digits 3 and 4 as the order indication information “1 =”, “2 =”, “3 =” ... “8 =” Alternatively, "9 =" may be displayed.

  (25) In the twenty-eighth and twenty-ninth embodiments, the winning number display LED 78 (digits 3 and 4) when there is no advantageous push order (push order instruction number "A0 (H)") in the instructed game section, Although the push order instruction information “= 0” is displayed, the acquisition number display LED 78 may not be displayed (“A” to “G” are turned off) without displaying “0”.

(26) When it becomes a game having an advantageous pushing order in the instruction game section, pushing order instruction information is displayed on digit 3 (upper digit of acquired number display LED 78), and digit 4 (acquired number display LED 78) In the lower digit), information (next operation instruction information) indicating the stop switch 42 to be operated next may be displayed.
Of course, contrary to the above, the next operation instruction information may be displayed on the digit 3 and the push order instruction information may be displayed on the digit 4.

Here, for push order instruction information, "left middle right" is set to "1", "right and left middle" to "2", "middle left and right" to "3", and "middle right and left" to "4", Set “right and left middle” to “5” and “right, middle and left” to “6”. Also, "left first stop" is "7", "middle first stop" is "8", and "right first stop" is "9".
Furthermore, for the next operation instruction information, “left” is “1”, “middle” is “2”, and “right” is “3”. Further, when there is no stop switch 42 to be operated next, the next operation instruction information is set to “0”.

In this case, when the advantageous push order is "middle left and right" and the stop switch 42 to be operated next is "middle", "3" is displayed on the digit 3 as push order instruction information, and the digit 4 is next "2" is displayed as the operation instruction information. At this time, “32” is stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT).
Also, when the advantageous push order is "middle left and right" and the stop switch 42 to be operated next is "left", "3" is displayed on the digit 3 as push order instruction information, and the next operation is made on the digit 4 “1” is displayed as instruction information. At this time, “31” is stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT).

Furthermore, when the advantageous push order is "right first stop" and the stop switch 42 to be operated next is "right", "9" is displayed on the digit 3 as push order instruction information, and the digit 4 is displayed. "3" is displayed as next operation instruction information. At this time, “93” is stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT).
Furthermore, when the advantageous push order is “right first stop” and there is no stop switch 42 to be operated next, “9” is displayed on the digit 3 as push order instruction information, and the next operation instruction is displayed on the digit 4 Display "0" as information. At this time, “90” is stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT).
When there is no stop switch 42 to be operated next, the next operation instruction information may be “4” instead of “0”. Also, the digit on which the next operation instruction information is displayed may be hidden (segments A to G are turned off).

(27) In the command game section, when it becomes a game having an advantageous pushing order, the condition device number may be displayed on the number-of-gains display LED 78 (segments 3 and 4).
For example, in the instruction game section, when winning a small combination B2 of the condition device number "12", in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is "00100000 (B)", digit 3 (upper number of winning number display LED78 The high-order digit “1” of the condition device number “12” is displayed in digit, and the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is “01000000 (B)”, digit 4 (lower digit of acquired number display LED 78) The lower digit "2" of the condition device number "12" is displayed on.

In addition, in the instruction game section, when it wins the replay B3 of the condition device number “4”, “0” is displayed on the digit 3 in the interrupt process when the LED display counter value is “00100000 (B)” In the interrupt process when the LED display counter value is “01000000 (B)”, the condition device number “3” is displayed on the digit 4.
As described above, when the condition device number is a single digit, “0” may be displayed on the digit 3, but the digit 3 may not be displayed (the segments A to G are turned off).

Furthermore, when the condition device number "0" is not won in the instruction game section, "0" may be displayed on digits 3 and 4 respectively, and both digits 3 and 4 are not displayed (segment A to G may be turned off).
Furthermore, in the command game section, when it becomes a condition device without an advantageous push order such as Replay A (condition device number "1") or small combination F (condition device number "29"), digit 3 and The condition device number may be displayed at 4, “0” may be displayed at the digits 3 and 4 respectively, and both the digits 3 and 4 may be non-display (segments A to G are turned off).

(28) In the command game section, when it becomes a game having an advantageous pushing order, the pushing order indication number is made by the lighting or extinguishing pattern of the segments A to G possessed by the digit 4 (lower digit of the acquisition number display LED 78). The numerical value corresponding to may be displayed in binary.
In this case, the push order instruction numbers are not “A1 (H)” to “A9 (H)” but “1” to “9”.
The numerical value corresponding to the push order instruction number may be displayed in binary according to the pattern of lighting or extinguishing the segments A to G possessed by the digit 3 instead of the digit 4.

FIG. 238 is a diagram showing the relationship between segments A to G and bits 0 to 6.
As shown in FIG. 238, segment A corresponds to bit 0 and segment B corresponds to bit 1. Similarly, segments C through G correspond to bits 2 through 6, respectively.
When the numerical value corresponding to the push order instruction number is expressed in binary, if bit 0 is “0”, segment A of digit 4 is extinguished, and if bit 0 is “1”, digit 4 Turn on segment A of The same applies to the segments B to G.

FIG. 239 is a diagram showing the relationship between push order instruction number, display data, digit display, and advantageous push order.
As shown in FIG. 239, when the push order instruction number “1 (D)” is represented by a binary number, it is “00000001 (B)”, which is used as display data (segment output data) of segments A to G of digit 4 When used, the segment A of the digit 4 can be turned on and the segments B to G can be turned off.
As described above, the push order instruction number can be represented by a binary number, and this can be displayed by the lighting or extinguishing pattern of the segments A to G that the digit 4 has. In this case, the LED segment table 1 (TBL_SEG_DATA1) and the LED segment table 2 (TBL_SEG_DATA2) are not used. The same applies to push order instruction numbers “2 (D)” to “9 (D)”.

For example, it is assumed that the small winning combination B12 is won in the instructed game section. The advantageous pushing order corresponding to the small winning combination B12 is "right first stop", and the pushing order instruction number is "3 (D)".
In this case, in the push order instruction number setting process (M_ORD_INF), the push order instruction number “3 (D)” (“00000011 (B) in binary”) corresponding to the winning combination B12 is indicated by the push order of the RWM 53. Store in the number storage area. Further, the push order instruction number is not stored in the acquired sheet number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT).
Then, in the LED display control (I_LED_OUT), in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is “01000000 (B)” (digit 4 signal is on), the push order stored in the push order designation number storage area of RWM 53 The instruction number "00000011 (B)" is acquired as display data (segment output data), and this is output from the output port 3 (output port 4).

Thereby, the segments A and B of the digit 4 can be turned on and the segments C to G can be turned off.
In this manner, by the lighting or extinguishing patterns of the segments A to G of the digit 4, it is possible to display the numerical value corresponding to the push order instruction number in binary.
When the numerical value corresponding to the push order instruction number is displayed in binary on digit 4, the digit 3 may be hidden (segments A to G are unlit), and the next operation instruction information is displayed in binary. May be

FIG. 240 is a diagram showing the relationship between next operation instruction information, display data, digit display, and the stop switch 42 to be operated next.
As shown in FIG. 240, when the stop switch 42 to be operated next is the left, the next operation instruction information is “1”, which is “00000001 (B)” in binary. Therefore, when the next operation instruction information "1" is displayed on the digit 3 in binary notation, the segment A of the digit 3 is turned on and the segments B to G are turned off. The same applies to the next operation instruction information "2" to "4".
Note that the numerical value corresponding to the push order instruction number may be displayed on the digit 3 in binary instead of the digit 4. In this case, the digit 4 may not be displayed (segments A to G are turned off), and the next operation instruction information may be displayed in binary.

(29) In the command game section, when it becomes a game having an advantageous push order, the condition device number is indicated by the lighting or extinguishing pattern of the segments A to G possessed by the digit 4 (lower digit of the number-of-ears display LED 78). It may be displayed in binary.
FIG. 241 is a view exemplifying the relationship between the condition device number, the display data, the display of digits, and the advantageous push order for the small winning combination B1 to B12.
As shown in FIG. 241, the condition device number of the small winning combination B1 is “11”, which is “00001011 (B)” in binary. For this reason, when the condition device number "11" is displayed on the digit 4 in binary notation, the segments A, B and D of the digit 4 are turned on and the segments C and E to G are turned off. The same applies to other condition device numbers.

Specifically, in the instruction game section, when the small winning combination B1 of the condition device number "11" is won, the condition device number "11"("00001011(B)" in binary number), the winning and replay of RWM53 The condition device number storage area (_NB_CND_NOR) is stored.
Then, in the LED display control (I_LED_OUT), in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is “01000000 (B)” (digit 4 signal is on), it is stored in the RWM 53 winning and replay condition device number storage area (_NB_CND_NOR) The condition device number “00001011 (B)” being acquired is acquired as display data (segment output data), and this is output from output port 3 (output port 4).

Thereby, the segments A, B and D of the digit 4 can be turned on, and the segments C and E to G can be turned off.
In this way, the condition device number can be displayed in binary by the lighting or extinguishing pattern of the segments A to G of the digit 4.

When the conditional device number is displayed in binary numbers in the digit 4, the digit 3 may be not displayed (segments A to G are unlit), and the next operation instruction information may be displayed in binary numbers.
Furthermore, the condition device number may be displayed in binary number 3 instead of digit 4. In this case, the digit 4 may not be displayed (segments A to G are turned off), and the next operation instruction information may be displayed in binary.

  (30) In the twenty-eighth and twenty-ninth embodiments, in the same interrupt processing, the digit capable of being lit is made different depending on the LED display counter value. For example, in the twenty-eighth embodiment, when the LED display counter value is "00100000 (B)" in the same interrupt processing, digit 3 can be lit and the LED display counter value is "01000000 (B)". , Digit 4 can be lit. However, the display control of the LED including the digits 3 and 4 is not limited to the case of executing the same interrupt processing.

  For example, the interrupt processing A is executed, and the interrupt processing B is executed independently of the interrupt processing A. That is, a plurality of interrupt processes are executed. Then, in the interrupt process A, the display of the digit 3 is controlled, and in the interrupt process B, the display of the digit 4 is controlled. In this manner, the display of the LED including the digits 3 and 4 may be controlled by a plurality of separate and independent interrupt processes.

(31) In the twenty-eighth and twenty-ninth embodiments, the display of digits 3 and 4 is controlled by the non-returnable error process 1 (SS_ERROR_STOP1) shown in FIG. However, the display control of the LED at the time of the non-returnable error is not limited to this.
For example, interrupt processing may be executed even in the case of a non-returnable error, and this interrupt processing may control display of LEDs including the digits 3 and 4.
In this case, when a non-recoverable error occurs, an error number corresponding to the type of the non-recoverable error that occurred is stored in the error number storage area (_NB_ERROR) of the RWM 53.

Specifically, when an “E1” error occurs, the error number “25 (H)” of the “E1” error is stored in the error number storage area (_NB_ERROR) of the RWM 53.
Further, in step S1439 of the LED display control of FIG. 134, the error number "25 (H)" is acquired from the error number storage area (_NB_ERROR) and stored in the B register.
Furthermore, in step S1448 of FIG. 134, it is determined that an error is displayed (“Yes”) because the B register value is not “0”, and in the next step S1449, the B register value is set in the A register, The top address of the LED segment table 1 is set in the HL register.

Further, in step S1450 in FIG. 134, the A register value “25 (H)” (“37 (D)”) is divided by “10 (D)” and the quotient “3 (D)” is ranked high. It is stored in the A register as the digit offset value, and the remainder "7 (D)" is stored in the C register as the lower digit offset value.
Then, in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is “00100000 (B)”, the upper address offset value “3 (D)” is added to the top address of the LED segment table 1 in FIG. 224 in step S1455 in FIG. By adding, “E” display data (address “1814 (H)” in FIG. 224) is obtained as segment output data. Then, in step S1458, "E" is displayed on digit 3 (upper digit of the number-of-acquisitions display LED 78).

Also, in the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is “01000000 (B)”, the lower address offset value “7 (D)” is added to the start address of LED segment table 1 in FIG. 224 in step S1455 in FIG. By adding, “1” display data (address “1818 (H)” in FIG. 224) is obtained as segment output data. Then, in step S1458, "1" is displayed on the digit 4 (lower digit of the acquisition number display LED 78).
In this manner, when the “E1” error occurs, “E1” can be displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 by the interrupt processing. The same applies to other unrecoverable errors.

(32) In the twenty-eighth embodiment, "88" is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 (digits 3 and 4) during the setting change.
However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, during setting change, "88" may be displayed on the storage number display LED 76 (digits 1 and 2) in addition to the acquisition number display LED 78. That is, while the setting is changed, “8888” may be displayed on the storage number display LED 76 and the acquisition number display LED 78 (digits 1 to 4).

Specifically, for example, in the setting change process (M_RANK_SET), “88 (D)” (in binary, “01011000 (binary number) in the acquired sheet data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) and the stored sheet data storage area (_NB_CREDIT) of RWM 53, respectively. B) ") is stored.
Further, during the setting change, “11111000 (B)” is stored as the LED display request flag in the LED display request flag storage area (_FL_LED_DSP) of the RWM 53.
Then, “8888” is displayed on the storage number display LED 76 and the acquisition number display LED 78 (digits 1 to 4) by the interrupt processing executed after these processings.

Further, for example, dynamic storage is used for the storage number display LED 76 and the acquisition number display LED 78 (digits 1 to 4), and static lighting is performed for the setting value display LED 73 (digit 5). Then, during the setting change, “01111000 (B)” is output as a digit signal from the output port 2 for each interrupt processing, and “01111 1 1 (B)” is output from the output port 3 as a segment signal. As a result, during setting change, “8” can be simultaneously displayed on the digits 1 to 4 for each interrupt processing.
In setting change processing (M_RANK_SET), output port 2 may output “01111000 (B)” as a digit signal, and output port 3 may output “01111 111 (B)” as a segment signal. .

  (33) In the twenty-ninth embodiment, when the operation of the setting switch 13 is detected in step S2140 in FIG. 234, the setting value data (the value of the setting value data storage area (_NB_RANK)) is updated in step S2141 and in step S4103 The setting value display data is generated from the setting value data after update, and stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT). However, it is not limited to this.

FIG. 242 is a flowchart showing setting change processing (M_RANK_SET) in the modification of the twenty-ninth embodiment, and is a flowchart corresponding to FIG. 234 of the twenty-ninth embodiment.
In the flowchart described below, the same step numbers are assigned to steps that execute the same processes as those in the twenty-ninth embodiment, and the redundant description will be omitted. Further, in the steps having contents different from the twenty-ninth embodiment, the step numbers are underlined.

First, in FIG. 242, step S4121 is provided instead of steps S2141 and S4103 of FIG. In step S4121, the setting value display data (the value of the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT)) is updated.
For example, when the setting value display data “1” is stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT), when the operation of the setting switch 13 is detected in step S2140, the acquired number data storage area ( The set value display data “2” is stored in _NB_PAYOUT).
When the setting value display data “6” is stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT), when the operation of the setting switch 13 is detected in step S2140, the acquired number data storage area ( The set value display data “1” is stored in _NB_PAYOUT). Then, the process proceeds to the next step S2142.

Also, in FIG. 242, step S4122 is newly provided between step S2142 and step S2143. In step S4122, the setting value data (value of the setting value data storage area (_NB_RANK)) is updated.
For example, when the setting value display data "1" is stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT), when the operation of the start switch 41 is detected in step S2142, the setting value display data "1" is detected in step S4122. “0” obtained by subtracting “1” from “2” is stored as setting value data in the setting value data storage area (_NB_RANK).
Further, when the setting value display data "6" is stored in the acquired number data storage area (_NB_PAYOUT), when the operation of the start switch 41 is detected in step S2142, the setting value display data "6" is displayed in step S4122. “5” obtained by subtracting “1” from “2” is stored as setting value data in the setting value data storage area (_NB_RANK). Then, the process proceeds to the next step S2143.

(34) In the twenty-eighth and twenty-ninth embodiments, when the setting value is "N", the setting value data "N-1" is stored in the setting value data storage area (_NB_RANK). However, it is not limited to this.
For example, when the setting value is "N", the setting value data "N" may be stored in the setting value data storage area (_NB_RANK). In this case, the setting value display data can be obtained without adding "1" to the setting value data. That is, when the setting value data is "N", the setting value display data is also "N".

(35) In the flowcharts shown in the twenty-eighth and twenty-ninth embodiments, the order of processes is not limited to the order shown in the figure, and when the order of processes can be changed, the order of processes should be changed Is also possible.
(36) The twenty-eighth and twenty-ninth embodiments and the various modifications described above are not limited to being implemented alone, and can be implemented in combination as appropriate.

The thirtieth embodiment
Subsequently, a thirtieth embodiment will be described.
FIG. 243 is a diagram showing a storage area of the RWM 53 described in the thirtieth embodiment.
In FIG. 243, the advantageous section type flag (_NB_ADV_KND) is a flag indicating whether the current game section is a normal section, a standby section, or an advantageous section. This advantageous section type flag is substantially the same as the game section flag (address “F020 (H)”) shown in FIG. 182 in the twenty-sixth embodiment.
In the advantageous section type flag, when it is a normal section, the value is "00000000 (B)", and when shifting from the normal section to the advantageous section, the D0th bit is "1". Further, when transitioning from the normal section to the standby section, the D1 bit becomes “1”. Furthermore, when shifting from the standby section to the advantageous section, the first bit “1” is shifted to the right by one. Furthermore, when moving from the advantageous section to the normal section, the D0 bit is changed from "1" to "0".
The timing at which the advantageous section type flag is updated will be described later.

The advantageous section clear counter (_CT_ADV_CLR) is “0” during the normal section and the standby section (it will be “FFFF (H)” for a moment, though the details will be described later), and shifts to the advantageous section. When this is done, "1500 (D)" is set as the initial value (specific value). Further, the advantageous section flag counter is set to be decremented by "1" per game, not only during the advantageous section, but also during the normal section or the standby section. However, the minimum value is "0". For this reason, in the normal section or the standby section, when “1” is subtracted when the advantageous section clear counter (before subtraction) is “0”, a borrow occurs (although it becomes “FFFF (H)”) Set to “0” when there is a borrow. Therefore, during the normal section and the standby section, although "1" is subtracted for each game, "0" is maintained. In other words, when “0” is stored in the advantageous section clear counter, it is a normal section or a standby section (non- advantageous section).
In addition, "1" is subtracted per one game during the advantageous section. For example, as described above, when "1500 (D)" is set as the initial value (specific value), in the next game, the advantageous section clear counter becomes "1499 (D)".
The advantageous section clear counter is composed of 2 bytes because it stores the initial value "1500 (D)" at the maximum. In other words, when a value other than “0” is stored in the advantageous section clear counter, it is an advantageous section.

The maximum payout notification flag (_FL_ADV_ORD) is “0” during the normal section and the standby section. Then, after transitioning to the advantageous section, when the player is first elected to a pushing order bell capable of acquiring the maximum payout number in the slot machine (when the instruction function is operated to obtain the maximum payout number (display correct pressing order) ) Is “00000001 (B)”.
Here, taking the first embodiment as an example, the pushing order bell capable of acquiring the maximum payout number in the first embodiment is when the small winning combination B is won (see FIG. 14 and FIG. Payout). Therefore, after shifting to the advantageous section, when the small winning combination B is won and the instruction function is activated, the maximum payout notification flag is updated to "1" at a predetermined timing.

  Therefore, for example, when the small winning combination C is won in the first embodiment (in the correct pressing order, the number of payouts is three) does not correspond to the “maximum payout” here. For example, even if an advantageous push order is displayed at the time of replay replay winning, it does not correspond to the "maximum payout" here. Furthermore, for example, in the first embodiment, the player is selected to win a small winning combination F (10 payouts) or a small winning combination G (9 payouts), and effects which suggest the small winning combination F or the small winning combination G respectively. Even if it is output, it does not correspond to the "maximum payout" here.

The maximum payout notification flag is
a) Win a condition device having an advantageous operating mode of the stop switch 42,
b) Among the condition devices having an advantageous operation mode, the condition device that has won is the one having the largest payout number when the stop switch 42 is operated in the advantageous operation mode,
c) When operating the indication function during AT, etc. (when displaying push order indication information)
The first game of is one of the conditions to be updated from "0" to "1".

In addition, the maximum payout notification flag may be “1” even when the advantageous operation mode for maximum payout is not displayed.
Examples of this include:
a) Win a special role (which includes a double win with a special role and other small roles or replays) with no set difference, and based on the special role win (when the special role wins, the special role wins When transitioning to the advantageous section), after winning the special role, at the predetermined timing (when the special role is won, from when the special role is won until the special role wins, the special role wins At the time of special game start, special game in progress, special game end, etc.), the maximum payout notification flag is updated to “1”. That is, when shifting to the advantageous section based on the winning of the special part, the maximum payout notification flag is updated to “1” based on the winning of the special part.
b) After winning a rare small combination (for example, small combination D, small combination E1 in the first embodiment) and shifting to an advantageous section, a special combination (special combination with setting difference or no setting difference) Thereafter, the maximum payout notification flag is updated to “1”.
In the case of the above a) or b), the timing at which the maximum payout notification flag is “1” is set at the special winning combination in the 30th embodiment. However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, at the time of winning the special part, the predetermined timing from the time of winning the special part to the time of winning, the special game, the end of the special game, or the predetermined timing after the end of the special game. May be

The maximum payout notification flag is a flag that is referred to when it is determined whether it is possible to end the advantageous section. When the maximum payout notification flag is "1", it is possible to end the advantageous section. Therefore, after shifting to the advantageous section, when the small winning combination B which is the maximum payout is won, the instruction function can be operated, and when the maximum payout notification flag becomes “1”, the advantageous section can be ended.
Further, as described above, when the maximum payout notification flag becomes “1” based on the winning of the special part, thereafter, it is possible to end the advantageous section without activating the instruction function even once. .

When the maximum payout notification flag is "0", in principle, the advantageous section can not be ended. After shifting to the advantageous section, after waiting for the maximum payout notification flag to be updated to “1”, the advantageous section is ended.
However, when the maximum payout notification flag remains “0” and reaches “1500” game, which is the upper limit game frequency of the advantageous section, ie, during the advantageous section of 1500 games, the small winning combination B is won once as well. If not, even if the maximum payout notification flag is "0", the upper limit number "1500" of the number of times of playing of the advantageous section is prioritized, and the advantageous section can be ended.
Also, after the transition to the advantageous section, when the maximum payout notification flag becomes "1", it is updated to "0" at the end of the advantageous section (based on the end of the advantageous section). In this embodiment, the timing of changing from “1” to “0” is the RWM initial stage of step S2746 during the advantageous section setting (M_ADV_SET; FIG. 246) in step S2724 in the game start set (MS_GAME_SET; FIG. 245) described later. (M_RWM_CLEAR; FIG. 248) (these processes will be described later). Note that the maximum payout notification flag may be updated to "0" not only in this, but also in a game end check process (M_GAME_CHK) (described later) or the like that is executed in the final game of the advantageous section.

The advantageous section display LED flag is a flag which is "0" when in the normal section or the standby section (that is, when it is not the advantageous section) and is "1" when it is the advantageous section. Then, when the advantageous section display LED flag is “1”, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on, and when the advantageous section display LED flag is “0”, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned off.
Here, in the 30th embodiment, as shown in FIG. 142 (22nd embodiment), the advantageous segment display LED 77 starts from the segment 1P (decimal point (DP)) of the digit 4a (lower digit of the acquisition number display LED 78). It shall be comprised.
Transition to the advantageous section and changing the advantageous section display LED flag from “0” to “1” is performed by setting the advantageous section (M_ADV_SET) in the game start set (MS_GAME_SET). Also, ending the advantageous section and changing the advantageous section display LED flag from "1" to "0" is performed by RWM initialization (M_RWM_SET) in the advantageous section setting (M_ADV_SET) in the game start set (MS_GAME_SET). . Details of these processes will be described later.

The AT game number counter (_CT_ART) is a decrement counter that counts the number of games played by AT (including ART), and is similar to the AT counter of the third embodiment (for example, FIG. 43).
In addition, unlike the advantageous section clear counter, when it becomes "0", the subsequent counting (subtraction) is stopped.
Updating (subtraction) of the AT game number counter during AT is immediately after the start switch 41 is operated during main processing (step S2702 in FIG. 244 described later).

Further, in the present embodiment, as the initial value of the AT game frequency may exceed "255 (D)", a 2-byte counter is used. When the AT game frequency is at most "255 (D)" or less, it may be a 1-byte counter.
When AT starts (or when it shifts during AT preparation), an AT game frequency counter is set to an initial value. The initial value may be a fixed value, or may be determined by lottery or the like when AT is won. Moreover, after determining the initial value, the AT game frequency may be updated to “0” without being changed thereafter. Alternatively, the AT game frequency may be increased when it is determined that the AT game frequency is to be added during the AT (when winning by the additional lottery, etc.). In this case, the increase is added to the AT game number counter.

Also, in FIG. 243, the address of each data is not shown, but when arranged at consecutive addresses, for example,
F020 (H): advantageous section type flag F021 (H) and F022 (H): advantageous section clear counter F023 (H): maximum payout notification flag F024 (H): advantageous section display LED flag F025 (H) and F026 (H ): AT game number counter It is arranged in the storage area of RWM53 like.
Also, some or all of the addresses may not be continuous. For example,
F020 (H): advantageous section type flag F021 (H) and F022 (H): advantageous section clear counter F030 (H): maximum payout notification flag F031 (H): advantageous section display LED flag F032 (H) and F033 (H ): AT game number counter may be arranged.
However, in the case of a storage area consisting of 2 bytes as in the advantageous section clear counter and the AT game frequency counter, the storage area of the upper digit and the storage area of the lower digit are continuous for the convenience of the calculation. It is preferable to use an address.

FIG. 244 is a flowchart showing main processing in the thirtieth embodiment, and is a flowchart corresponding to the twenty-sixth embodiment shown in FIG. In FIG. 244, the same process as that of FIG. 188 is denoted by the same step number, and a different or added process is denoted by a different step number, and the step number is underlined.
In FIG. 244, the game start set (M_GAME_SET) of step S2701 is a process corresponding to step S2172 in FIG. 188 (26th embodiment). In the game start set, at the end of the advantageous section, a process of clearing data on the advantageous section (data shown in FIG. 243) is executed. This process will be described later.

After the start switch is received in step S2179, the process advances to step S2702 to update the AT game number counter. This process is a process of subtracting "1" from the above-mentioned AT game number counter when AT is in progress. Therefore, this process is not performed in the normal section, the standby section, and the advantageous section in the non-AT.
In addition, whether or not to add the AT game frequency during AT is performed based on the result of the role lottery by the role lottery process in step S2180. For example, when winning the role of rare, it can be mentioned to determine the number of additional games AT. Therefore, when the AT game frequency is added and the added amount is added to the AT game frequency counter, it is executed after the process of step S2180 (not shown in FIG. 244).
In the present embodiment, after receiving the start switch (step S2179), the AT game frequency counter is updated in step S2702. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and may be performed after the winning lottery process in step S2180.

Further, after the combination lottery process of step S2180, the process proceeds to step S2703, and the advantageous segment type update is performed. This process is a process shown in FIG. 249 described later, and is a process of updating the value of the above-described advantageous section type flag according to any of the normal section, the standby section, and the advantageous section.
Next, proceeding to step S2704, a push order instruction number set (M_ORD_INF) is performed. This process is a process corresponding to the pressing order instruction number set of the twenty-eighth embodiment shown in FIG. This process will be described later with reference to FIG. The pushing order instruction number set is a process of generating pushing order instruction data and displaying the pushing order when operating an instructing function in the game. Furthermore, in the thirtieth embodiment, the above-described maximum payout notification flag may be updated during this process.

  The game end check process (M_GAME_CHK) of step S2705 is a process corresponding to step S2196 in the twenty-sixth embodiment shown in FIG. In the thirtieth embodiment, it is determined in the game end check process whether or not the advantageous section is to be ended, and when the advantageous section is to be ended, preparation for the termination of the advantageous section is performed. Details of this process will be described later (FIGS. 252 and 253).

FIG. 245 is a flowchart showing the game start set (M_GAME_SET) in step S2701 in FIG.
Note that 1BB in the thirtieth embodiment is a special part having no setting difference. In addition, when it is elected 1BB, after the end of 1BB game, it moves to the advantageous section. That is, at the same time as the 1BB is won, the advantageous section is also won.

  First, in step S 2711, the game standby display time is set (stored in a predetermined storage area (not shown) of the RWM 53). In the present embodiment, the “26846” interrupt (≒ 60000 ms, ie, about 60 seconds (one minute)) is set as the game standby display time. When the game standby display time is set in step S2701, the value is decremented by one each time the interrupt processing is performed from this time.

When the game standby display time is "0", the acquired number data is cleared in step S2175 (waiting for medal insertion) in FIG. This processing is processing for clearing the storage area (_NB_PAYOUT) of the acquired number data at the address “F011 (H)” shown in FIG. 222 (the twenty-eighth embodiment).
As a result, "00" is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78. For example, even if the number of medals paid out for the previous game is "9" and the player settles by operating the settlement switch 46 and the game is over, "00" is displayed after about one minute. Be done. This has the effect that the number of vacant tables can be reduced by the fact that a store clerk or another player in the hall can recognize them as vacant tables.
In addition, not only displaying "00" on the acquisition number display LED 78, the acquisition number display LED 78 (upper digit and lower digit) may be extinguished, and the upper digit of the acquisition number LED 78 is extinguished, and the lower digit is displayed. May indicate "0". In any case, a display may be executed so that a store clerk or another player in the hall can recognize it as a vacant platform.

Next, proceeding to step S2712, initialization processing of the push order instruction number is executed. This process is a process of clearing the storage area of the push order designation number stored at the address of the RWM 53.
In the next step S2713, data of a symbol combination display flag is acquired. In this process, symbol combinations (data of symbol combination display flags (not shown) provided on the RWM 53) on the activated line after stopping the reels 31 in the previous game are acquired.

In the next step S2714, it is determined whether or not the 1BB operation symbol has been displayed. In this process, among the data of the symbol combination display flag, when the bit corresponding to 1BB is "1", it is determined as "Yes", and when it is "0", it is determined as "No". When it is determined that the 1BB operating symbol is displayed, the process proceeds to step S2715, and when it is determined that the 1BB operating symbol is not displayed, the process proceeds to step S2719.
The respective bits of the symbol combination display flag and the respective bits of the operation state flag are set to correspond to each other. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 182 (the 26th embodiment), since the D2 bit of the operation state flag of the address "F010 (H)" is a bit corresponding to 1BB, a bit corresponding to 1BB of the symbol combination display flag Are also D2 bits.

In step S2715, it is determined whether or not the standby section is in progress. In this determination, the value of the advantageous segment type flag is determined in FIG. 243, and when the D1th bit is “1”, it is determined that the segment is a standby segment. If it is determined that the section is a standby section, the process proceeds to step S2716, and if it is determined that the section is not a standby section, the process proceeds to step S2718.
In step S2716, the bit of the advantageous segment type flag is shifted to the right by "1". That is,
Before shift: 0000010 (B)
After shift: 00000001 (B)
It becomes.
Thus, the advantageous section type flag is updated from the value indicating the standby section to the value indicating the advantageous section.

Next, proceeding to step S2717, "1" is stored (stored) in the maximum payout notification flag. That is,
Before (storage): 00000000 (B)
After storage (storage): 00000001 (B)
It becomes.
As a result, as shown in FIG. 243, the value of the maximum payout notification flag becomes other from the notification unreported state.
When the maximum payout notification flag has already been set to “1”, the maximum payout notification is set (for example, when the processing proceeds to step S 2812 in FIG. 251 described later). The flag is overwritten with "1".
Through the above steps S2716 and S2717, based on the winning of 1BB, update of the advantageous section classification flag (update from the standby section to the advantageous section) and update of the maximum payout notification flag (update from not notified to others) are performed.

In step S2718, the obtainable number of sheets during 1BB operation (1BB game time) is stored. This processing is processing for storing the maximum obtainable number of pieces in 1BB gaming in a predetermined storage area of the RWM 53. Then, the process proceeds to step S2719.
In the next step S2719, an operation status flag (_FL_ACTION) is generated. This operation state flag is the same as that shown in the twenty-sixth embodiment (address "F010 (H)") of FIG. In this step S2719, the value of the operation state flag is generated based on the symbol combination display flag.
In the next step S2720, the operation state flag is stored (stored). This process is a process of storing the generated operation state flag (at this point, for example, stored in the A register) at the above-mentioned address "F010 (H)" of the RWM 53. As a result, the information of the operation state flag updated in step S2720 is replaced with the information of the operation state flag up to that point.
For example, when a combination of symbols of 1BB is displayed (at the time of 1BB winning), the D2 bit corresponding to 1BB of the operation state flag changes from "0" to "1".

  In the next step S2722, it is determined whether the RB operation has started. In the present embodiment, in the 1BB game, the RB operation flag is turned off (“0”) at the end of the second game (or when winning twice), but when the end condition of the 1BB game is not satisfied ( When the D2 bit corresponding to 1BB of the operation state flag is "1") is set to "1" in this game start set. If it is determined in step S2715 that the RB is in operation, the process proceeds to step S2723. If it is determined that the RB is not in operation, the process proceeds to step S2724.

  In the next step S2723, the number of games and the number of winnings at the time of RB operation are stored. In this process, “2 (H)” is stored (stored) in a storage area (not shown) of the game number counter at the time of RB operation provided in RWM 53, and at the time of RB operation provided in RWM 53 It is a process of storing “2 (H)” in a storage area (not shown) of the winning number counter. Then, the process proceeds to step S2724.

  In addition, the game frequency counter at the time of RB operation and the number-of-times-of-plays counter at the time of RB operation are each set to “2 (H)” as the initial value, and each time the number of games or the number of wins increases by “1” Is a counter that is decremented by one. However, the present invention is not limited to this, setting the initial value of these counter values to "0", incrementing "1" each time the number of games or the number of wins increases by "1", and these counter values H) may be determined.

In the next step S2724, an advantageous interval setting (M_ADV_SET) is performed. This process is a process shown in FIG. 246 described later, and performs updating of the advantageous section clear counter and the like.
Here, the advantageous section clear counter is a counter that is decremented by one for each game in all gaming sections (all of the normal section, the standby section, and the advantageous section), not only during the advantageous section. In this respect, it differs from the counter which counts only during the advantageous period, like the advantageous period counter shown in the third embodiment of FIG.
In step S501 shown in FIG. 46 (e), although the advantageous interval counter value is updated ("1" is added), this process is a process executed only during the advantageous interval, so before this process, It is necessary to determine whether the game is an advantageous segment this time. However, in the present embodiment, the advantageous section clear counter is decremented by “1” for each game without determining whether or not it is the advantageous section, so the processing can be simplified accordingly. Thereby, the program capacity can be reduced (the storage capacity of the ROM 54 can be reduced).
And even if any game section, the value of the advantageous section clear counter is decremented by "1", the value of the advantageous section clear counter is "0" if it is the normal section and the standby section. It becomes.
Moreover, when the start condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the value of the advantageous section clear counter is set to “1500 (D)”, and if it is a value other than “0”, “1” Update to the subtracted value.
Then, when it becomes “0” by subtracting “1”, it can be determined that the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied.
Further, when there is a borrow by subtracting “1”, it can be determined that the previous game is a normal section or a standby section.
In this way, program processing can be reduced (simplified).

  In the next step S2725, it is determined based on the data of the symbol combination display flag acquired in step S2713 whether or not the combination of symbols of replay is displayed (replay has won). If it is determined that the combination of symbols of replay is displayed, the process proceeds to step S2716. If it is determined that it is not displayed, the process proceeds to step S2728.

In step S2726, the main control board 50 reads bet medals. This process is a process of reading the number of medals betted in the previous game. Next, proceeding to step S2727, automatic bet amount data is set. This process is a process of updating the data of the storage area of the number of automatic bets provided in the RWM 53 (store “3 (H)”).
Next, proceeding to step S2728, an operating state output request is set. In the next step S2729, control command set 1 is executed. Specifically, information indicating that the replay has been activated or that 1BB has been activated is transmitted to the sub control board 80. Then, the processing according to this flowchart is ended.

FIG. 246 is a flowchart showing setting of the advantageous section (M_ADV_SET) in step S2724 in FIG.
First, in the advantageous section clear counter RWM address set in step S2741, the address of the advantageous section clear counter shown in FIG. 243 is stored. Here, the advantageous section clear counter is composed of 2 bytes, and stores data of lower byte. Therefore, when the address of the advantageous section clear counter is, for example, “F021 (H)” and “F 022 (H)” described above, the address (F 021 (H)) of the lower byte is designated. Then, the data of the lower byte is stored in the HL register.

Next, proceeding to step S2742, a 2-byte countdown (M_W_CNT_DOWN) is executed. Here, a process of subtracting "1" from the value of the advantageous section clear counter is executed. The details will be described later (FIG. 247).
In the 2-byte countdown, when the operation result is “0” (ie, when the value before the operation is “1”), the zero flag is “1”.
Also, in the 2-byte countdown, when a carry occurs as a result of operation (that is, when the value before operation is "0"), the carry flag becomes "1".

Here, the zero flag and the carry flag will be described.
An F (flag) register is provided as one of the registers (A register, H register, etc.) used in the present embodiment. The F register is made up of D0 to D7 bits, like the other registers. A carry flag is assigned to the D0 bit, and a zero flag is assigned to the D6 bit.
The carry flag executes arithmetic processing (for example, addition processing, subtraction processing, AND operation processing, OR operation processing, exclusive OR operation, etc. The same applies hereinafter), and an overflow or borrow occurs depending on the operation result. Sometimes it will be '1'. On the other hand, when the arithmetic processing is executed and the overflow or the borrow does not occur according to the operation result, it becomes “0”.
In addition, the zero flag performs arithmetic processing and becomes “1” when the arithmetic result becomes “0”. On the other hand, when the arithmetic processing is executed and the arithmetic result does not become "0", it becomes "0".

Next, proceeding to step S2743, it is determined whether the advantageous section clear counter before calculation is "0". In this determination, when the carry flag described above becomes “1” after the 2-byte countdown operation, it is determined that the advantageous section clear counter before the operation is “0”, and the carry flag is not “1”. Determines that the advantageous interval clear counter before the operation is not "0".
If it is determined that the advantageous section clear counter before the calculation is "0", the process proceeds to step S2747, and if it is determined not to be "0", the process proceeds to step S2744. Here, "the advantageous section clear counter before calculation is" 0 "indicates that the previous game is a normal section or a standby section (non- advantageous section).

In step S2744, it is determined whether the advantageous section clear counter after the 2-byte countdown operation is "0". In this judgment, when the above-mentioned zero flag becomes “1” after the operation, it is judged that the advantage section clear counter after the operation is “0”, and when the zero flag is not “1”, the advantage after the operation is It is determined that the section clear counter is not "0". Here, “the advantage zone clear counter after calculation is not“ 0 ”” indicates that the previous game and the current game are the advantage zone.
If it is determined that the advantageous section clear counter after calculation is “0”, the process proceeds to step S2745, and if it is determined not to be “0”, the processing according to this flowchart ends. Here, "the advantageous section clear counter after the operation is" 0 "", although the previous game was an advantageous section, this game is a normal section (non- advantageous section) (from the advantageous section to the normal section Show that).
In step S2745, the number of RWM initialization bytes is set. This process stores the total value of the number of initialization bytes in the B register. For example, when the number of initialization bytes is 20 (H), "20 (H)" is set in the B register value.

  Next, proceeding to step S2746, RWM initialization (M_RWM_CLEAR) is executed. Since this initialization is processing performed when the advantage interval clear counter value becomes “0” after “1” subtraction (that is, when the end condition of the advantage interval is satisfied), the data of the storage area related to the advantage interval Is a process to initialize (clear). Therefore, data (such as a counter or a flag) as shown in FIG. 243, for example, is cleared. The RWM initialization will be described later (FIG. 248).

Next, proceeding to step S2747, it is determined whether the advantageous segment type flag is "1". This process determines whether the D0 bit of the advantageous section type flag is "1", determines "Yes" when it is "1", and determines "No" when it is not "1". . That is, this process determines whether the transition condition from the normal section or the standby section (non-advantage section) to the advantageous section is satisfied.
If it is determined that the game section type flag is "1" (the transition condition to the advantageous section is satisfied), the process proceeds to step S2748, and it is not "1" (the transition condition to the advantageous section is not satisfied) When it is determined, the process according to this flowchart is ended.

In step S2748, the initial value is stored (stored) in the advantageous section clear counter. The initial value of the present embodiment is set to "1500 (D)". Therefore, "DC (H)" is stored in the address indicated by the HL register value, and "5 (H)" is stored in the address indicated by the value obtained by adding "1" to the HL register value. Since “F021 (H)” is stored in the HL register in step S2741 described above, at the time of step S2748, the HL register value indicates the address of the lower bit of the advantageous section clear counter.
Therefore,
F021 (H) (advantage zone clear counter lower byte): DC (H)
F022 (H) (advantage zone clear counter upper byte): 5 (H)
It becomes.
Note that “5DC (H)” = “1500 (D)”.

Next, proceeding to step S2749, “1” is stored (stored) in the advantageous section display LED flag. Then, the processing according to this flowchart is ended. When “1” is stored in the advantageous section display LED flag in step S2749, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on when the digit 4a is turned on in the interrupt processing executed thereafter.
Here, LED display control for lighting the advantageous section display LED 77 will be described. The LED display control of the thirtieth embodiment can be described using the LED display control (I_LED_OUT) of FIG. 149 (22nd embodiment).

  In FIG. 149, when the interrupt processing corresponds to the interrupt “2” in FIG. 148 (A), the lighting timing of the advantageous section display LED 77 is obtained. Therefore, even if the advantageous section display LED flag is “1”, the lighting process of the advantageous section display LED 77 is executed only when the interrupt is “2” by dynamic lighting, and the interrupts “1”, “3” If “5”, step S 1552 is not executed in FIG.

In the thirtieth embodiment, referring to FIG. 149, in step S1552, whether or not the value of the advantageous section display LED flag is “1” is referred to. Then, when it is determined that the advantageous section display LED flag is “1”, it is determined whether the digit to be lit in the present interrupt processing is the digit 4 or not. When the LED display counter value is "00001000 (B)", it is determined that the digit 4 is on. In this case (when the advantageous section display LED flag is “1” and digit 4 is lit), data obtained by ORing “1000000 (B)” and segment 1 data set in step S1551 is output Set as segment 1 data for port 3. As a result, data capable of lighting the segment 1P of the digit 4a (that is, the advantageous section display LED 77) is set.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the advantageous section display LED flag is not "1", the OR operation described above is not performed or the segment 1 data set in step S1551 is ORed with "00000000 (B)" Data is set as segment 1 data for output port 3.

FIG. 247 is a flowchart showing the 2-byte countdown (M_W_CNT_DOWN) in step S2742 in FIG.
In the 2-byte countdown, 2-byte data subtraction in step S2761 is performed. This process is performed as follows.
When the process proceeds to step S2761, as described above, the lower digit address of the advantageous section clear counter is stored in the HL register in step S2741 of FIG. Therefore, the value stored at the address indicated by the HL register value is data of the lower digit of the advantageous section clear counter. Further, the value stored in the address indicated by the value obtained by adding "1" to the HL register value is data of the upper digit of the advantageous section clear counter.
Then, when the carry flag becomes “1” as a result of subtracting “1” (example 4 described later), “0” is stored in the address indicated by the HL register value, and “1” is stored in the HL register value. "0" is stored in the address indicated by the value obtained by adding "." That is, “0” is stored in the upper byte of the advantageous section clear counter, and “0” is stored in the lower byte.

A specific example is as follows.
(Example 1)
Data stored in the address of HL register value + 1 (upper digit): 05 (H)
Data stored in the address of the HL register value (lower digit): DC (H)
If you subtract "1" when
Data stored in the address of HL register value + 1 (upper digit): 05 (H)
Data stored in the address of the HL register value (lower digit): DB (H)
The carry flag = “0” and the zero flag = “0”.
(Example 2)
Data stored in the address of HL register value + 1 (upper digit): 01 (H)
Data stored in the address of the HL register value (lower digit): 00 (H)
If you subtract "1" when
Data stored in the address of HL register value + 1 (upper digit): 00 (H)
Data stored in the address of the HL register value (lower digit): FF (H)
The carry flag = “0” and the zero flag = “0”.

(Example 3)
Data stored in the address of HL register value + 1 (upper digit): 00 (H)
Data stored in the address of the HL register value (lower digit): 01 (H)
If you subtract "1" when
Data stored in the address of HL register value + 1 (upper digit): 00 (H)
Data stored in the address of the HL register value (lower digit): 00 (H)
The carry flag = “0”, and the zero flag = “1”.
(Example 4)
Data stored in the address of HL register value + 1 (upper digit): 00 (H)
Data stored in the address of the HL register value (lower digit): 00 (H)
If you subtract "1" when
Data stored in the address of HL register value + 1 (upper digit): 00 (H)
Data stored in the address of the HL register value (lower digit): 00 (H)
The carry flag = “1”, and the zero flag = “0”.

  In Example 4, when “1” is actually subtracted, a borrow occurs at that point (the high-order digit “FF (H)” and the low-order digit “FF (H)”), as described above, “0” is stored in the address indicated by the HL register value, and “0” is stored in the address indicated by the value obtained by adding “1” to the HL register value. Thus, both the data (lower digit) stored in the address indicated by the HL register value and the data (upper digit) stored in the address indicated by the value obtained by adding "1" to the HL register value are "0". It becomes.

FIG. 248 is a flowchart showing RWM initialization (M_RWM_CLEAR) in step S2746 in FIG.
Before this RWM initialization is performed, the number of initialization bytes is stored in the B register in step S2745 of FIG. In the above example, "20 (H)" is set in the B register value. Also, in the HL register, the address of the lower byte of the advantageous section clear counter is stored in step S2741 of FIG. In the above example, "F021 (H)" is stored in the HL register.
In FIG. 248, in step S2771, RWM initialization data is set. In this process, the A register value and the A register value are subjected to an XOR operation, and the operation result is stored in the A register. By this operation, the A register value becomes “0 (H)”.

Next, proceeding to step S2772, the RWM is initialized. This process is a process of storing the A register value (that is, "0 (H)") at the address indicated by the HL register value. As a result of this processing, the data of "F021 (H)" to be initialized first becomes "0".
Next, proceeding to step S2773, the RWM initialization address is changed. This process is a process of adding "1" to the HL register value.
In the next step S2774, it is determined whether the initialization of the RWM has been completed. In this process, “1” is subtracted from the B register value, it is determined whether the B register value after subtraction is “0”, and when it is determined to be “0”, initialization of RWM is completed. I will judge.
If it is determined that the initialization of the RWM is completed, the processing according to this flowchart is ended. If it is determined that the RWM initialization is not completed (B register value ≠ “0”), the process returns to step S2772 to continue the initialization.

According to the above flow chart, the number of bytes corresponding to the number set in the B register is initialized. Also, initialization is performed in address order. Therefore, if the addresses of RWMs to be initialized are sequentially arranged at the end of the advantageous section, the smallest address is specified first, and the number of bytes to be initialized is set in the B register. You can initialize all the data that needs to be
Here, the five data shown in FIG. 243 are all data to be initialized by this RWM initialization.
On the other hand, data used continuously in the next game after the end of the advantageous section regardless of whether or not the advantageous section has ended, for example, setting value information (“F000 (H)” in the example of FIG. 182), RT The state number, the stored number data, the LED display counter ("F018 (H)" in the example of FIG. 182), and the like are not targets for initialization.
Further, data to be initialized by RWM initialization is limited to data in the use area shown in the twentieth embodiment and the twenty-sixth embodiment, and data outside the use area is not to be initialized.

  In the example of RWM initialization in FIG. 248, the addresses of data relating to the advantageous section to be initialized are continuously arranged at the end of the advantageous section, and the address to be initialized is updated by one each in step S2773. I made it. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even if the addresses of the data to be initialized do not continue, the program can be specified to individually address the addresses of the data to be initialized. Data can be initialized.

FIG. 249 is a flowchart showing updating of the advantageous segment type in step S2703 in FIG.
First, in step S2781, it is determined whether or not an advantageous section has been won. In addition, about election of an advantageous section, it may be a thing of any embodiment mentioned above. For example, when the first embodiment is taken as an example, as shown in FIG. 17, one that is elected as the advantageous section simultaneously with the election of the specific condition device can be mentioned. Alternatively, apart from the lottery of the condition device (combination), for example, in FIG. 244, the advantageous section lottery may be performed after the combination lottery of step S2180. If the lottery of the advantageous section conforms to, for example, the first embodiment, it is a condition that there is no difference in the winning probability depending on the set value.

If it is determined in step S2781 that the advantageous section has been won, the process proceeds to step S2782, and if it is determined that the advantageous section is not won, the processing according to this flowchart ends.
In step S2782, it is determined whether to shift to a standby section. When winning the advantageous section, it can be arbitrarily set whether to shift to the advantageous section or to shift to the standby section before the start of the next game. For example, if FIG. 23 of the first embodiment is taken as an example, as in “timing 1” in FIG. 23, when an advantageous section is won based on the winning of the rare role without winning the special role, the standby section It is judged that it shifts to the advantageous section without passing through.

On the other hand, as shown in “timing 2” in FIG. 23, when the special section (1 BBA) is won and the advantageous section is won, it is determined to shift to the standby section.
If it is determined in step S2782 that transition to the standby section is made, the process proceeds to step S2783, and if it is determined that transition to the standby section is not made (transition to the advantageous section), the process proceeds to step S2784.
In step S2783, the advantageous segment type flag is updated (stored) to "00000010 (B)". Then, the processing according to this flowchart is ended.
On the other hand, in step S2784, the advantageous segment type flag is updated (stored) to "00000001 (B)". Then, the processing according to this flowchart is ended.

In the above, when the process proceeds to step S2783 and the advantageous segment type flag is updated (stored) to “00000010 (B)”, the process proceeds from step S2714 and step S2715 to step S2716 in FIG. The advantageous segment type flag is shifted to the right by "1".
As a result of step S2716, the advantageous segment type flag is
Before update: 0000010 0 (B) (Indicates a standby section)
After update: 00000001 (B) (shows the advantageous section)
It becomes.

On the other hand, in the above, when the advantageous section classification flag is updated (stored) to "00000001 (B)" in step S2784, the value of the advantageous section classification flag is maintained thereafter until the advantageous section ends. .
Also, when RWM initialization is performed in step S2746 of FIG. 246 described above when ending the advantageous section, the advantageous section type flag is also initialized at this time. As a result, the advantageous segment type flag becomes “00000000 (B)”, and is updated to a value indicating a normal segment.

FIG. 250 is a flowchart showing the pushing order designation number set (M_ORD_INF) in step S2704 in FIG.
Although the push order instruction number set is described in FIG. 228 (28th embodiment), it will be described again in the 30th embodiment.
First, in step S2791, it is determined whether or not the operation condition of the instruction function is satisfied in the game. In the present embodiment, it is determined that the operation condition of the instruction function is satisfied when a condition device having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch 42 is won during AT or the like.
Here, whether or not AT is in progress reads the value of the AT game frequency counter, and when it is not "0", it is determined that AT is in progress. Further, as a method of determining whether or not the AT is in progress, in addition to determining the value of the AT game frequency counter, for example, an address of RWM storing the main gaming state is provided, and the value of the main gaming state is AT When it is a value corresponding to inside, judging that it is in AT is mentioned.
In addition, as in the third embodiment, when “advantage zone = AT”, when the advantageous zone clear counter is a value other than “0”, it is in AT (conditions for operating the indication function) It may be determined that

Furthermore, not only during AT, but also during an advantageous interval and before the start of AT (AT precursor, during AT preparation, etc.), and in a state where it has not been decided to start AT (AT cassette precursor, CZ, etc.) It may be judged that the operation condition of the instruction function is satisfied. For example, there may be a case where the maximum payout notification flag is "0" after the transition to the advantageous section. In such a case, the instruction function is activated when the first small winning combination B is won, and the maximum payout notification flag is set to "1" as soon as possible. As a result, after that, when the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the advantageous section can be ended. Therefore, in the case where the operation condition of the instruction function is satisfied in step S2791,
(1) When in the AT and winning a conditional device having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch 42 (2) In the advantageous section, when it is necessary to promote RT (for example, Replay B of the first embodiment) When the group is won)
(3) After shifting to the advantageous section, when the maximum payout notification flag is "0" in a state where AT has not started yet (AT precursor, AT preparation, AT gas precursor, CZ, etc.) When the group is won, it is mentioned.

When the AT is in progress, even if the maximum payout notification flag is already “1”, when the condition device having the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch is won, it is determined that the operation condition of the instruction function is satisfied.
On the other hand, if the maximum payout notification flag is still "0" in the case of the advantageous section but the AT has not yet been executed (such as the above-mentioned AT precursor, AT preparation, AT gas precursor, CZ, etc.) It is determined that the operation condition of the instruction function is satisfied at the time of the small winning combination B group winning. On the other hand, when the maximum payout notification flag is “1”, it is determined that the operating condition of the instruction function is not satisfied even when the small winning combination B is won.
If it is determined in step S2791 that the condition for operating the instruction function is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S2792. If it is determined that the condition for operating the instruction function is not satisfied, the processing according to this flowchart is ended.

In step S2792, the condition device number is set. When the winning lottery is performed in step S2180 in FIG. 244, the condition device number selected in the game is stored at a predetermined address of RWM 53. Then, in step S2792, the value stored at this address is stored in the A register.
In the example of this flowchart, in FIG. 14, it is assumed that the small winning combination B1 of the condition device number "11" is won. Therefore, “11 (D)”, that is, “B (H)” is stored in the storage area of the condition device number of the RWM 53 and the A register.
Next, proceeding to step S2793, the maximum payout notification flag is updated. This process will be described later.

In the next step S2794, a push order instruction number table is set. This process is, for example, a process of storing the head address “1900 (H)” of the push order designation number table in the HL register in FIG. 225, taking the twenty-eighth embodiment of FIG. 225 as an example.
Next, at step S2795, designated address data is set. In step S2795, a value obtained by adding the A register value to the HL register value is set as a new HL register value, and the data stored in the address indicated by the HL register value is stored in the A register.

That is, the data of the condition device number stored in the RWM 53 is used as the offset value, and the data corresponding to the address obtained by adding the offset value to the head address of the push order designation number table is acquired.
Therefore, since the HL register value at this point is “1900 (H)” as described above, the A register value “B (H)” is added to this value to obtain a new HL register value “190 B ( H) ”
Then, as shown in FIG. 225, the push order instruction number “A1 (H)” corresponding to the address “190 B (H)” of the push order instruction number table is stored in the A register.

Next, proceeding to step S2796, the push order instruction number is stored in the RWM 53. That is, the A register value is stored in the storage area of the push order instruction number in the RWM 53.
In the next step S2797, the A register value (push order instruction number) is stored in the acquired number data storage area. In the example of FIG. 222 (28th embodiment), the address is stored in the address “F011 (H)”. Then, the process according to this flowchart is ended.

  When the push order instruction number is stored in the storage area of the acquired sheet number data in step S2797, in the interrupt process executed after this process, the push order instruction is given to the acquired number display LED 78 at the lighting timing of digit 3a and digit 4a. Information is displayed. For example, when the push order designation number “A1 (H)” is stored as described above, “=” is displayed on the digit 3 a at the time of the interrupt processing for lighting the digit 3 a and the interrupt processing for lighting the next digit 4 a Sometimes the digit 4a is displayed as "1".

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the operation condition of the instruction function is not satisfied in step S2791 and the processing according to this flowchart is ended, the storage area of acquired number data is cleared in the game start set in step S2701 in FIG. Because of this, the value of the storage area of the acquired number data remains “0”. Therefore, the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 (digit 3a and digit 4a) remains "00".

FIG. 251 is a flowchart showing updating of the maximum payout notification flag in step S2793 in FIG. 250.
First, in step S2811, it is determined whether or not the small winning combination B (one of B1 to B12) is won in the game. Before proceeding to this processing, in step S2792, the condition device number that has won the game is stored in the A register, so that the value of the A register corresponds to the condition device numbers “11 (D)” to “22 (D It is determined whether or not any of “0 B (H)” to “16 (H)” is applicable. If it is determined that the small winning combination B has been won, the process proceeds to step S2812, and if it is determined that the small winning combination B is not won, the processing according to this flowchart is ended.
In step S2812, "1" is stored (stored) as the maximum payout notification flag. Then, the process according to this flowchart is ended.

From the above FIGS. 250 and 251, even if the AT is in progress, the maximum payout notification flag does not become “1” unless the small winning combination B is won. For example, even if the small winning combination C is won during AT and the correct pressing order is displayed by the operation of the instruction function, the maximum payout notification flag does not become "1".
Also, after the AT is started, the maximum payout notification flag is set to "1" when the first small winning combination B is won. For this reason, during the AT after that, the maximum payout notification flag “1” may be overwritten each time a small winning combination B is won, or after the maximum payout notification flag is once set to “1”, as shown in FIG. During 250, step S2793 may be skipped.
Furthermore, in the thirtieth embodiment, when the small winning combination B is won for the first time during AT, substantially the maximum payout is made before the push order instruction number is stored in the acquired number data (in FIG. 250, step S2797). The notification flag is updated to "1". However, the present invention is not limited to this. Even after the push order instruction number is stored in the acquired sheet number data, that is, substantially after the push order instruction information is displayed, the maximum payout notification flag may be updated to "1". Good.

FIG. 252 is a flowchart showing the game end check processing (M_GAME_SET) in step S2705 in FIG.
In the various embodiments described above, the type that terminates the advantageous section at the same time as terminating the AT (for example, the third embodiment) and the termination condition of the advantageous section for the advantageous section even when the AT is terminated. And the type that does not end the advantageous section (for example, the fifth embodiment (example 2 shown in FIG. 61) shown in a 9) In the following example, the type that terminates the advantageous section at the same time when the AT is ended. It is assumed that
First, in step S2821, it is determined whether the AT game frequency is "0". This process is performed by determining whether the AT game number counter is "0". If it is determined that the AT game frequency is "0", the process proceeds to step S2822. If it is determined that the AT game frequency is not "0," the process proceeds to step S2824.

In step S 2822, it is determined whether the maximum payout notification flag is “1”. If the maximum payout notification flag is "1", the advantageous section can be ended, but if it is not "1", the advantageous section can not be ended (however, there are some exceptions as described later).
If it is determined in step S2822 that the maximum payout notification flag is “1”, the process proceeds to step S2823. If it is determined that the maximum payout notification flag is not “1”, the process proceeds to step S2824.
In step S2823, preparation for ending the advantageous section (M_ADVEND_STNBY) is performed. Details of this process will be described later (FIG. 253).

  In step S2824, processing is performed to clear the flag of the condition device. This processing is processing for clearing other than the special combination condition device, and when it is determined that the combination of symbols corresponding to the special combination has stopped on the effective line, processing is also performed to clear the special combination condition device. In the next step S2825, the process of turning off the replay display LED is performed. This processing corresponds to processing for setting a bit (for example, D3 bit) corresponding to the replay of the medal management flag stored in the predetermined storage area of the RWM 53 to “0”. Next, at step S2826, the replay operation flag is cleared. This processing is processing for setting the bit to “0”, for example, when it is not shown in the twenty-sixth embodiment of FIG. 182, but has a bit corresponding to replay in the operation state flag.

  In the next step S2827, 1BB operation management is performed. This processing is processing to determine whether or not the end condition of the 1BB game is satisfied during the 1BB game. In the next step S2828, it is determined whether or not RB is in operation. In this processing, it is determined whether the D4 bit is “0” in the operation status flag shown in the twenty-sixth embodiment of FIG. 182, and when it is determined not to be “0” (zero flag ≠ 1) (RB operation When it is determined that it is time), the process proceeds to step S2829 to execute RB operation management, and when it is determined that it is “0” (not during RB operation), the processing according to this flowchart ends.

FIG. 253 is a flowchart showing preparation for ending the advantageous section (M_ADVEND_STNBY) in step S2823 in FIG.
In FIG. 253, in step S 2841, “1” is stored in the advantageous section clear counter. This process executes the following process.
(1) Store "1 (H)" in the HL register. As a result, the H register value becomes “0 (H)” and the L register value becomes “1 (H)”.
(2) Next, the L register value "1 (H)" is stored in the lower address of the advantageous section clear counter, and the H register value "0 (H)" is stored in the upper address.
Then, the process according to this flowchart is ended. From the above, the upper byte of the advantageous section clear counter is "00000000 (B)", and the lower byte is "00000001 (B)".

  In addition, although this advantageous section end preparation is executed at the game end check as described above, when returning to the game start set (FIG. 245) in the main processing (FIG. 244), the advantageous section setting (FIG. 245) Is executed. In the advantageous section setting (FIG. 246), “1” is subtracted from the advantageous section clear counter value in steps S2741 and S2742, so “Yes” is determined in the determination of step S2744. Thus, the process proceeds to steps S2745 and S2746, where RWM initialization of data relating to the advantageous section is performed.

When the advantageous section clear counter shifts to the advantageous section, “1500 (D)” is set as an initial value (specific value), and thereafter, each game is decremented by “1”.
And in the 30th embodiment, since it is the specification which ends an advantageous section simultaneously with the end of AT, when the number of times of AT play becomes "0", preparation for the end of the advantageous section is performed. For example, after transitioning to the advantageous section, when transitioning to AT of "100" gaming after "50" gaming, it is counted as follows. The following numbers are all shown in decimal.
a) At the time of transition to the advantageous section: The advantageous section clear counter: "1500"
AT game number counter: "0"
b) At AT transition advantageous section clear counter: "1450"
AT number of times counter: "100"
c) AT end AT game number counter: "0"
Advantage section clear counter: Update from '1350' to '1' d) At the game start set after c) above AT game number counter: '0'
Advantage zone clear counter: "0"

With the above-described preparation for ending the advantageous section, storing “1” in the advantageous section clear counter makes it unnecessary to store data indicating whether or not the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied in the predetermined address of the RWM 53.
Temporarily, when the data which shows whether the completion | finish conditions of the advantageous area satisfy | fill conditions are memorize | stored in the predetermined | prescribed address of RWM53, the capacity | capacitance of RWM53 will be pressed that much.
Further, when the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, it is necessary to store data indicating that the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied at a predetermined address of the RWM 53. Furthermore, every game, the data stored in the predetermined address is read, and it is necessary to determine whether the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied or not. Therefore, only the program capacity is required, and the capacity of the ROM 54 is compressed.
On the other hand, in the present embodiment, only by storing “1” in the advantageous section clear counter in preparation for the advantageous section end, the advantageous section clear counter becomes “0” in the advantageous section setting (FIG. 246) executed thereafter. Therefore, the processing at the end of the advantageous section (clearing processing of RWM 53) can be executed.

In FIG. 252, the determination in step S2821 is that when the AT game frequency counter changes from “1” to “0” in the relevant game (step S2702 in FIG. 244), “Yes” is determined. It is assumed. Therefore, when the AT is not in the first place, it is also possible not to execute the processing of steps S2821 to S2823 in FIG.
However, even in the normal section, the process of step S2821 in FIG. 252 may be executed for each game, and the process may proceed from step S2821 to step S2822 and may proceed to step S2824 when "No" is determined in step S2822.

Further, in the flowchart of FIG. 252, when the maximum payout notification flag remains “0” and the number of games in the advantageous section reaches “1500” which is the continuation upper limit, the following occurs.
After shifting to the advantageous section, the advantageous section clear counter is decremented by “1” in the advantageous section setting (FIG. 246) in each game and the game start set. Then, when the advantageous section clear counter becomes “0” as a result of subtraction in the game, “Yes” is determined in the judgment of step S2744 in FIG. 246, so initialization of RWM is executed. Thereby, it shifts to a usual section at the time of the game start of the game concerned.
Therefore, in such a case, the advantageous section ends without the preparation for the advantageous section end preparation shown in FIG.

Although the thirtieth embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above description, and various modifications can be made as follows.
(1) The subtraction of the game section clear counter was executed at the game start set, but immediately after the start switch operation (for example, after step S2178 in FIG. 244) and after all reels stop (after step S2187 in FIG. 244) It may be executed at any timing such as the game end check process (step S2705 in FIG. 244).
(2) The value set in the advantageous section clear counter when shifting to the advantageous section is set to “1500 (D)” in the present embodiment. This is based on the fact that the upper limit value of the number of games in the advantageous section is "1500" and that in the advantageous section, "1" is subtracted per one game. Therefore, the initial value set in the advantageous interval clear counter is not necessarily limited to "1500 (D)", and a value less than "1500 (D)" or a value exceeding "1500 (D)" It may be For example, "3000 (D)" may be set as an initial value in the advantageous section clear counter, and "1" may be subtracted for each payout of one medal.

Further, the number of times per game may be 10 (D) per game, for example, for convenience of operation. In this case, “15000 (D)”, for example, is set as the initial value of the advantageous interval clear counter.
Note that it is necessary to set the initial value of the advantageous section clear counter when shifting to the advantageous section after the subtraction timing of the advantageous section clear counter.
That is, when the advantageous interval clear counter value before the subtraction process is "0" and the advantageous interval type flag is "1", an initial value is set to the advantageous interval clear counter.

  (3) In preparation for the end of the advantageous section (FIG. 253), "1" is stored in the advantageous section clear counter. This is to set the advantageous section clear counter to "0" in the game start set to be executed thereafter, as described above. However, the present invention is not limited thereto. For example, when it is determined to end the advantageous section (and AT) after the "10" game, the value of the advantageous section clear counter is "10 (D)" at that time. It is also possible to update to As described above, in preparation for the end of the advantageous section, it is not a condition that the value of the advantageous section clear counter is always set to “1”, and an arbitrary value can be set.

  (4) In the present embodiment, the advantage interval clear counter value in the waiting interval is “0”, and the advantage interval clear counter value is set to “1500 (D)” when transitioning from the wait interval to the advantage interval . However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, when an advantageous section is won in a normal section, "1500 (D)" is set in the advantageous section clear counter value and when transitioning from a normal section to a standby section During the section, control may be performed to maintain the advantageous section clear counter value "1500 (D)" throughout. For example, even during the standby section, “1” is subtracted from the advantageous section clear counter value for each game, but only during the standby section, a process of adding “1” may be added thereafter. Thus, when the advantageous section is won in the normal section, it is possible to uniformly set the advantageous section clear counter value to "1500 (D)" at that time.

(5) In the present embodiment, even if the maximum payout notification flag is “0” after winning in the advantageous section, it is set that the advantageous section may be ended when 1 BB is won. Here, there are various examples as to which special combination is set to be able to end the advantageous section even when the maximum payout notification flag is “0” when the special winning combination is won.
For example, with regard to 1BB, RB, 2BB (MB), when any of these wins, it is set that the advantageous section may be ended even if the maximum payout notification flag is "0". Be
On the other hand, with regard to SB (single bonus) and CB (challenge bonus), even if they win, it is possible to set that the advantageous section can not be ended unless the maximum payout notification flag is "1". .
Even when the maximum payout notification flag is “0”, the advantageous section clear counter is “0”, in other words, when the continuous section upper limit of the advantageous section (the number of games is 1500 or the number of payouts is 3000) Can end the advantageous section.

  (6) Although the advantageous section display LED flag is provided in the present embodiment, it is possible not to provide the advantageous section display LED flag. For example, when the advantageous section clear counter is "0", control is made to turn off the advantageous section display LED 77, and when the advantageous section clear counter is not "0" (however, "1" is subtracted from "0") At the time of digit shift "except FFFF (H)", the advantageous section display LED 77 may be controlled to light up.

When set in this manner, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on after the interruption process for lighting the digit 4 a after the advantageous section clear counter has been updated from “0” to “1500 (D)”. Therefore, in this case, in FIG. 246, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on in the interrupt processing to turn on the digit 4a after step S2748.
Further, since it is step S2742 in FIG. 246 that the advantageous section clear counter changes from “1” to “0” after shifting to the advantageous section, the advantageous section in the interrupt processing for lighting the digit 4a after step S2742 The display LED 77 turns off.

On the other hand, when turning on the advantageous section display LED 77 based on the advantageous section display LED flag as in the present embodiment, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned on in the interrupt processing to turn on the digit 4a after step S2749 in FIG.
In addition, since it is step S2746 in FIG. 246 that the advantageous section display LED flag changes from “1” to “0” after shifting to the advantageous section, the digit 4a after step S2746 is lit in the same manner as described above. In the interrupt processing to be performed, the advantageous section display LED 77 is turned off.

(7) The advantageous section type flag is "00000000 (B)" in the normal section, "00000010 (B)" in the standby section, and "00000001 (B)" in the advantageous section. However, the present invention is not limited to these values, and may be set to any value as long as the normal section, the standby section, and the advantageous section can be determined. For example, "10 (D)" in the normal section, "11 (D)" in the standby section, and "12 (D)" in the advantageous section may be mentioned.
Further, in the present embodiment, when transitioning from the standby section to the advantageous section, the processing (shift instruction) of shifting the bit of the advantageous section type flag to the right by "1" is executed. However, in the advantageous section type flag, when the value is set to an arbitrary value as the value of the standby section or the advantageous section as described above, when transitioning from the standby section to the advantageous section, the shift section is not used and It is sufficient to execute a processing instruction in which the corresponding value is stored.

  (8) The maximum payout notification flag is “0” when the notification is not yet made, and the other (notified and the like) is “1”. However, it is not limited to these values. For example, it is also possible to set the value of "not informed" of the maximum payout notification flag to "1 (H)" and set the value of "other (notified etc.)" to "FF (H)". In other words, any value may be used as long as data is stored that can determine whether or not the advantageous interval can be ended.

  (9) In the RWM initialization (FIG. 248) in the present embodiment, the head address is specified in the address range to be initialized, and initialization is performed in ascending order of addresses. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to designate the last address in the address range to be initialized and to decrement "1" by updating the address (initialization in descending order of the address).

  (10) In the example of the advantageous section type update shown in FIG. 249, after first determining whether or not the advantageous section was won in step S2781, it is determined whether to shift to the standby section next. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to collectively update the advantageous section type flag to the standby section or the advantageous section based on the condition device that has won. For example, in FIG. 17, when it corresponds to "winning that includes 1 BBA", the advantageous segment type flag is updated to the standby segment (00000010 (B)), and "number of units of small player D" 50 "or When the winning number "250" is won, the advantageous section type flag may be updated to the advantageous section (00000001 (B)).

(11) In the flowchart shown in the thirtieth embodiment, the order of processing is not limited to the order shown in the figure, and when the order of processing can be changed, it is possible to change the order of processing is there.
(12) The thirtieth embodiment and the various modifications described above are not limited to being implemented alone, and can be implemented in combination as appropriate.

The thirty-first embodiment
Subsequently, a thirty first embodiment will be described.
In the 31st embodiment, the description of the flowchart mainly describes the flowchart in the 30th embodiment as an example, but the flowchart of the 31st embodiment is meant to be limited to the flowchart of the 30th embodiment. It is not something to do.
The thirty-first embodiment is provided with a difference number counter, and when the value of the difference number counter (hereinafter, abbreviated as "difference number counter value") becomes a value satisfying the end condition of the advantageous period, the advantageous period is ended. It is In particular, in the following embodiment, when the difference number counter value exceeds “2400 (D)” (960 (H)), control is performed to end the advantageous section.

Therefore, in the thirty-first embodiment, the advantageous section is ended when either 1500 game completions or 3000 payouts are reached, or the difference counter value exceeds either "2400 (D)". . In other words, when the difference number counter value exceeds "2400 (D)", even if the number of games in the advantageous section has not reached 1500 games or has not reached 3000 payouts, the advantageous section Finish.
Although details will be described later, the difference number counter value “2400 (D)” and the difference number “2400 sheets” in the advantageous section have a case where they coincide and a case where they do not.

The meanings of terms in the thirty-first embodiment will be described below.
The "number of bets" is the number of bets when starting a game, and may be referred to as the "prescribed number" (see FIGS. 7 to 12) or the "number of insertions". However, even if the medal is "inserted", when the medal is stored without being betted, the medal is not included in the bet number.
The "automatic bet" indicates that the same number as the bet number in the game is automatically bet for the next game based on the replay being won. Thus, an automatic bet is also one of bets.
The “number of payouts” indicates the number of benefits to be given to the player when the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination has stopped on the active line. In addition to the fact that the medals are actually paid out from the hopper 35 by the medal payout device, the term "payout" is meant to include the addition of the storage number by credits.

Further, as described later, when the replay is won and the automatic betting process is executed, the difference counter is updated assuming that the same number of medals as the bet in the game in which the replay is won is paid out. In the case of playing the game, there is a case in which the difference number counter is updated on the assumption that no medals are paid out.
For example, when the prescribed number of games this time is “3”, the replay of this game is won, and the prescribed number of games next time is “2”, the bet number “3” of this time is maintained. Alternatively, the predetermined number "2" of the next game may be automatically betted. Similarly, when the prescribed number of games this time is "2", the replay is won in this game, and the prescribed number of games next time is "3", the bet number "2" of this time is maintained. Instead of this, "3", which is the prescribed number for the next game, may be automatically betted.
Therefore, when the bet is automatically bet based on the replay being won, the same number as the bet number in the current game may not be bet.

  The “difference number” has the same meaning as the “difference number” described in “0045” of the first embodiment, and is a value calculated by “the number of payouts−the number of bets”. For example, when “the number of payouts> the number of bets”, such as the number of payouts “9” and the number of bets “3”, the difference number is a positive value (“+6” in this example). Further, for example, when "the number of payouts = the number of bets", such as the number of payouts "3" and the number of bets "3", the difference number is "0". Furthermore, for example, when “the number of payouts <the number of bets” such as the number of payouts “0” and the number of bets “3”, the difference number is minus (“−3” in this example).

Although the “number of differences” is referred to in the thirty-first embodiment, the term “number of differences” does not mean that the game medium is limited to medals. The same applies to the “number of bets” and the “number of payouts”.
In the thirty-first embodiment, the "number of bets" in the first embodiment is referred to as the "number of bets", and the "number of payouts" in the first embodiment is referred to as the "number of payouts".

As mentioned above, the difference number may be negative. However, in the calculation inside the main CPU 55, the calculation result that becomes negative is a digit reduction.
For example, in 1-byte data, the value obtained by subtracting "3 (H)" from "0 (H)" is "FD (H)" based on the fact that the difference number is "-3".
Thus, for example, when the bet number is “3” and the payout number is “0”, “−3” is the difference number, and “FD (H)” is the difference number data. Therefore, it is "difference number difference number data".

The thirty-first embodiment is provided with a difference number counter that stores a value corresponding to the cumulative value of difference number data.
Here, the difference number counter does not simply store the cumulative value of the difference number data itself, but stores a “corresponding value” as the cumulative value of the difference number data. For example, as described above, when the difference number data becomes a value corresponding to minus, the value is corrected to “0 (H)” (this point will be described later). Therefore, “cumulative value of difference data” is “difference counter value of difference data”.
The difference number counter is an increment counter for determining whether difference number data in the advantageous section has exceeded "2400 (D)". For this reason, the difference number counter is composed of a 2-byte storage area.

The difference number counter only needs to count the cumulative value of the difference number data in the advantageous section, and may not count in the non-preferred section (for example, the normal section).
Here, when updating the difference number counter value on condition that it is an advantageous section, it is necessary to determine whether each game is an advantageous section or not. For this reason, in the present embodiment, the difference sheet counter value is updated including the non-advantage interval, for example, in the normal interval. In this way, since it is possible to update the difference number counter value without determining whether or not the game is an advantageous section for each game, the process can be simplified.

Furthermore, even when the difference number becomes minus in the current game and the difference number data becomes a carry-down data, the difference number data is added to the difference number counter value to update the difference number counter value. However, as a result of the calculation, when the difference number counter is carry-down data, the difference number counter value is corrected to “0”.
For example, when the difference number counter up to the previous game is "01 (H)" and the difference number data in this game is "FD (H)" (difference number = "-3"), When difference number data is added to the difference number counter value, “FE (H)” is obtained. This value is data that has been brought down. When the data is a carry-down, the difference counter value is corrected to “0”. The method of determining whether or not the carry-down has occurred will be described later.

  Due to such updating of the difference number counter value, for example, when the number of payouts is larger than the bet number, that is, when the difference number is increasing, the difference number counter value increases as the game progresses. On the other hand, when the number of payouts falls below the number of bets, for example, in a game during a normal section, the difference number counter value increases by the number of payouts when there is a payout based on a small winning combination, but then the number of payouts Becomes less than the number of bets, it will eventually become "0".

As a specific example (a difference number counter value before the first game is "0 (H)"),
1st game: When the bet number is “3” and the payout number is “0”, the difference number “−3”, the difference number counter “FD (H)”, the corrected difference number counter “0 (H)”
Second game: When the bet number is “3” and the payout number is “9”, the difference number “+6”, the difference number counter value “6 (H)”
Third game: When the bet number is “3” and the payout number is “0”, the difference number “−3”, the difference number counter value “3 (H)”
Fourth game: When the bet number is “3” and the payout number is “1”, the difference number “−2”, the difference number counter value “1 (H)”
Fifth game: When the bet number is “3” and the payout number is “0”, the difference number “−3”, the difference number counter value “FE (H)”, the corrected difference number counter “0 (H)”
It will be updated as
In addition, even if the difference count value of the previous game is “0 (H)” and the difference count value of the current game is “0 (H)”, the difference count value reflects the difference count of the game. Is a result of calculating again, and in this case also, it corresponds to "update" of the difference number counter value.
In addition, when it is “0 (H)” as a result of calculating difference number data, it is also possible to omit updating of the difference number counter value.

FIG. 254 is a diagram (slump graph) for explaining the concept of the difference number counter value, in which (a) shows Example 1 and (b) shows Example 2. FIG. In FIG. 254, the horizontal axis is the number of games, and the vertical axis is the number of differences.
Example 1 shows an example in which the difference number first proceeds in the negative direction with the progress of the game, but, for example, the difference number turns to rise along with the start of the advantageous section (AT) from the middle. And since the difference number counter value is counted as "0" when the difference number becomes the lowest value in the game progressing process, the range indicated by the arrow in the figure is used as the difference number increase amount by the difference number counter. Will be counted. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the difference number counter value exceeds "2400 (D)", the advantageous section is ended (the next game is controlled to be a normal section game).

It should be noted that the judgment as to whether the difference number counter value has exceeded “2400 (D)” is not limited to reading and judging the difference number counter value stored in RWM 53, but it may be temporarily stored in a register for updating etc. The determination of the stored difference number counter value is also included (the same applies to the following).
If it is determined that “2400 (D)” is not exceeded when “2400 (D)” is determined based on the difference counter value temporarily stored in the register, The difference count value of the register is stored (saved) in the RWM 53. On the other hand, when it is determined that "2400 (D)" is exceeded, control is performed so that the difference counter value is not stored in RWM 53, and the difference counter value stored in RWM 53 is cleared. It is also possible.

  In Example 2, as in Example 1, the difference number proceeds in the negative direction with the progress of the game, but, for example, the difference number has been increased as the advantageous section (AT) is started. Is shown. In Example 2, even when the difference number counter value exceeds “2400 (D),” the accumulated value of the difference number is not positive, but even in such a case, the advantageous section is ended. . That is, regardless of the accumulated value of the difference number accompanying the progress of the game until then, counting from the time when the difference number reaches the lowest value, if the difference number counter value exceeds "2400 (D)", the advantageous section (The next game is controlled to be a game on a normal section).

When the difference number counter value is updated during the normal section, the difference number counter value may exceed “2400 (D)” even during the normal section. For example, such things may occur if the special role is won many times and the special game is repeated. In such a case,
(1) A method of updating the difference number counter value as it is until the advantageous section is started,
(2) When “2400 (D)” is exceeded, there is a method of temporarily resetting the difference number counter value to “0” at that time.
For example, when the difference number counter value exceeds “2400 (D)” during the advantageous period, when the difference number counter value is cleared based on the end of the advantageous period, the processing is during the advantageous period If the process is executed regardless of whether or not it is cleared even when the difference number counter value exceeds “2400 (D)” during the normal section.

On the other hand, if the process of clearing the difference number counter value is a process unique to the advantageous section, the difference number counter value is not cleared even if the difference number counter value exceeds “2400 (D)” during the normal period. .
Note that when the advantageous section is started (the first game of the advantageous section), the difference number counter value is cleared (an initial value "0" is set). Therefore, there is no problem regardless of the number of difference counter values before the start of the advantageous section.
Then, when the difference number counter value exceeds “2400 (D)” during the advantageous section, or when the number of games reaches 1500 games or when the number of payouts reaches 3000, the ending condition of the advantageous section is When the condition is satisfied and the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, the difference number counter value is cleared (initialized). The reason for clearing the difference number counter value at the end of the advantageous section is to prevent the data (value) regarding the advantageous section from being carried over to the normal section when the advantageous section is ended and the game is shifted to the normal game. Clearing of the difference number counter value is executed, for example, in step S2746 in FIG. 246 (30th embodiment).

FIG. 255 is a diagram (slump flag) showing the relationship between the difference number counter value and the advantageous section, in which (a) shows Example 1 and (b) shows Example 2. FIG.
In Example 1, in the normal section, the number of differences decreases with the progress of the game, and the number of differences further decreases from when the advantageous section is started (“A” in the figure) until it proceeds to “B” in the figure. An example is shown. It should be noted that the AT does not start at the same time as the start of the advantageous section, and the beginning of the advantageous section is CZ, a precursor, or AT preparation (for example, when the RT state is a low probability state, the RT state is transitioned from a low probability state to a high probability state) In the case of the specification that starts from the middle of waiting for the winning of the replay, the difference number may decrease even after the advantageous section is started. In addition, even when AT is started, the difference number may decrease if a situation in which the player does not win in the push order bell continues.

Since the difference number counter value is initialized at the start of the advantageous section, it is "0" at the time of "A" in the figure. Further, as described above, under the situation where the difference number is decreasing, the difference number counter value is maintained at “0”. Therefore, in the figure, from the point of “A” to the point of “B”, the difference number counter value remains “0”.
Moreover, the difference number has shown the example which turned to increase from the "B" point. Thereby, the difference number counter value also increases. Then, when it is determined that the difference number counter value exceeds “2400 (D)” (when the point “C” is reached in the figure), it is determined that the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, and the advantageous section is ended. (Move to the normal section).

  Thus, the difference counter starts counting positive by the difference counter from the time when the difference number reaches the lowest value (“B”) after the start of the advantage section, not the difference number from the start of the advantage section. The player is not awarded medals beyond the range where the number of balls is increased (the range from "B" to "C" in FIG. 255A). In this way, it is possible to make the player's irritability go off.

The above points will be more specifically described by taking numerical values as an example.
For example, in the case where the AT is started by lottery after starting the advantageous section, when the advantageous section and the non-AT are selected, the number of differences may decrease as the game progresses.
For example, it is assumed that the player X wins the advantageous section and the advantageous section is started, but the AT is not started and the game is abandoned when the difference number becomes “−200 sheets”.
Next, when the player Y starts playing a game with the gaming machine, it is further assumed that the AT is won when the difference number becomes “−50”, and the AT is started. Then, after starting the advantageous section, when the advantageous section (AT) is continued until the difference number exceeds "+2400 sheets", the player Y can obtain medals of "2400 + 250 = 2650 sheets". .
Therefore, as described above, after starting the advantageous section, by setting an end condition such as "from the time when the difference number reaches the minimum value to" more than +2400 sheets "", for example, the amount of jamming of other players Also, it prevents you from being able to acquire it, and it is trying not to give up a jealousy.

Example 2 shown in (b) of FIG. 255 shows an example in which the difference number decreases in the normal section, and turns from the point "D" in the middle to plus, and further, the advantageous section is started from the point "E". In such a case, as described above, when the difference counter value is updated including the normal section, the difference counter value is positive immediately before “E” in the drawing. However, the difference counter value is initialized (cleared, ie updated to "0") at the start of the advantageous section ("E" in the figure).
Therefore, the increment before the advantageous interval (the increment from "D" to "E") is not counted by the difference number counter. Therefore, the difference number counter continues to be positively counted from the “E” point, and the advantageous section ends when “2400 (D)” is exceeded.

  FIG. 256 is a diagram showing a storage area of the RWM 53 related to the thirty-first embodiment and is a diagram corresponding to FIG. 182 of the twenty-sixth embodiment (a part of which overlaps with FIG. 182). Also in the thirty-first embodiment, although other storage areas are provided in addition to the storage area shown in FIG. 256, the description will be omitted.

In FIG. 256, the operation status flag (_FL_ACTION) of the address “F010 (H)” is the same as that shown in FIG. However, in FIG. 182 (the twenty-sixth embodiment), the operation state flag is for accessory operation, but in the thirty-first embodiment, the replay is allocated to the D0 bit in order to determine the operation state of the replay (FIG. MB and CB are deleted during the operation state flag of 182).
The operation state flag is updated in the game start setting process in step S 2701 in FIG. 244 (step S 2720 in FIG. 245). For example, in step S2719 in FIG. 245, bit D0 of a symbol combination display flag described later is read (processing similar to step S2725), and when it is determined that bit D0 is "1", symbol combination corresponding to replay is stopped It is determined that the D0 bit of the operation state flag is set to "1".
The replay operation status flag (D0 bit) is cleared in step S2826 in FIG. 252 (game end check processing).
Further, the operation state flag of the bonus is cleared in step S2827 (flag of 1BB) or step S2829 (flag of RB) in FIG. 252 (check processing of game end).

The symbol combination display flag (_FL_WIN) of the address "F030 (H)" is an area for storing the symbol combination stopped and displayed, and in this embodiment, the replay is assigned to the D0 bit and 1BB is assigned to the D2 bit. . That is, the symbol combination display flag Replay and 1BB bits are assigned to the same bits as the Replay and 1BB bits assigned by the operation state flag, respectively.
For example, when it is determined that the symbol combination corresponding to the replay has stopped on the active line (when a prize is won), the D0 bit is set to "1". The symbol combination display flag is updated in step S2186 (display determination) in FIG.

In step S2186 of FIG. 244, the prize determination means 66 determines whether or not the combination of the symbols corresponding to the winning combination has been stopped on the activated line. Then, the symbol combination display flag is updated according to the combination of the stopped symbols. For example, when it is determined that the symbol combination of replay has stopped at the effective line, the D0 bit of the symbol combination flag is set to "1".
Then, in the next game, for example, in the game start set process of FIG. 245, the symbol combination display flag is acquired (step S2713), and the operation state flag is updated (step S2720).
The symbol combination display flag is cleared at the start of the next game, for example, at step S2179 in FIG.

The automatic bet number data (_NB_REP_MEDAL) at the address "F031 (H)" is an area for storing data indicating the number of medals to be automatically bet at the time of replay winning, and "2" or "3" is stored in this embodiment. Be done.
The bet number data (_NB_PLAY_MEDAL) of the address "F032 (H)" is an area for storing data of the bet number in the game, and in this embodiment, any one of "0" to "3" is stored. Be done.
The automatic bet number data is set, for example, in step S2727 in FIG.

Here, the process of steps S2725 to S2727 in FIG. 245 will be described again.
In step S2725, it is determined based on the data of the symbol combination display flag acquired in step S2713 whether or not the symbol combination of replay is displayed (replay has won). If it is determined that the symbol combination of replay is displayed, the process proceeds to step S2726. If it is determined that the symbol combination is not displayed, the process proceeds to step S2728.

  In step S2726, the main control board 50 reads bet medals. This process is a process of reading the number of medals betted in the previous game, and the value of the bet number data is read. Next, proceeding to step S2727, automatic bet amount data is set. This process is a process of storing the value of the bet number data in the previous game in the automatic bet number data.

In FIG. 256, the payout number data (_NB_PAY_MEDAL) of the address “F040 (H)” and the payout number data buffer (_BF_PAY_MEDAL) of the address “F041 (H)” respectively receive the medal payout of the twenty-sixth embodiment (FIG. 182). It is the same as the number data and the medal payout number data buffer.
The number-of-payouts data and the number-of-payouts data buffer are updated in the medal payout number update in step S2188 in FIG. 244 of the thirtieth embodiment, for example. The processing for updating the number of medals paid out is the same as the processing shown in FIG. 189 (a) (the twenty-sixth embodiment).
Further, the payout amount data is updated (subtracted) in step S2189 of FIG. On the other hand, the payout amount data buffer is not updated until the medal payout number update process of step S2188 of FIG. 244 is executed in the next game.

That is, for example, even if the small winning combination is won in the game and the payout number data is updated in step S2188 in FIG. 244, the payout number data is updated (subtracted) in the medal payout process by winning in the next step S2189. ).
Here, the medal payout process by winning in step S2189 will be described in more detail.
In the medal payout process by winning, first, it is determined whether or not there is a medal payout. Before this processing, the payout number data is stored in a predetermined register, and "1" is subtracted from the predetermined register value (payout number data) to determine whether the value after subtraction is "0" or not. . When it is “0”, it is judged that there is no medal payout, and when it is not “0”, it is judged that there is medal payout.

  If it is determined that medals are paid out, the stored number is read next. This process is a process of reading a value of storage number display data (address "F043 (H)") described later. Next, based on the stored number display data read, it is determined whether the stored number is at the limit value. When the value of the stored number display data read is "50", it is judged that the stored number is at the limit value, and when it is less than "50", it is judged that the stored number is not at the limit value .

If it is determined that the storage number is less than "50", the storage number is incremented by "1". This process is a process of adding “1” to the storage number display data of the address “F043 (H)”.
On the other hand, when it is determined that the stored number is "50", the hopper motor 36 is drive-controlled to execute payout processing of medal "1" which actually pays out one medal.
When the above storage number “1” addition or medal “1” sheet payout processing is executed, next, the acquired number display is set to “+1”. This process is a process of adding “1” to the acquired number data of the address “F042 (H)” described later.

  Further, next, a process of subtracting "1" from the payout amount data of the address "F032 (H)" is performed. Next, it is determined whether or not medal payout has ended. In this process, it is determined whether or not the updated payout amount data has become "0". When it is determined that the payout number data is “0”, the medal payout process by winning is ended, and when it is determined that the payout number data is not “0”, the process returns to the above-described reading of the storage number.

By repeating the above process, at the time of the small winning combination, the number-of-earnings data is incremented by one and the number-of-payouts data is decremented by one. Therefore, in the game end check process of step S2705 in FIG. 244, the number-of-payouts data is “0”. Therefore, when updating the difference number counter value in the game end check process, when reading the number of payouts of the game, the value is read from the number-of-payouts data buffer.
However, if it is possible to update the difference number counter value in the game before the payout number data is subtracted, the payout number of the game can be read by reading the value of the payout number data. For example, in FIG. 244, if the difference number counter value is updated between step S2188 and step S2189, it is possible to read the number of payouts from the number-of-payouts data. In other words, it is also possible to update the difference number counter value without reading the value from the number-of-payouts data buffer.

  In FIG. 256, the acquired number data (_NB_PAYOUT) of the address “F042 (H)” is an area for storing acquired number data. When the small winning combination is won and the medal is paid out, the number of acquisitions is stored in the acquired number data. And based on this data, the display of the acquisition number display LED 78 is controlled. For example, when the acquired number data is “1”, this data “1” is read, and “01” is displayed on the acquired number display LED 78 (digits 3 and 4).

Here, for the payout number data of the address "F040 (H)" described above, "9" is stored, for example, when nine winning combinations are won, and at the time of medal payout (including addition to credits), "9 “→” “8” → “7” →... → ”0” is a counter that is decremented according to the number of payouts.
On the other hand, the acquired number data of the address "F042 (H)" is, for example, "9" → "1" → "2" → "3" → ... → "9" when nine winning combinations are won. Is a counter that is added according to medal payout.
The display by the acquisition number display LED 78 is performed using the acquisition number data.

The stored number display data (_NB_CREDIT) of the address "F043 (H)" stores data for displaying the stored number at that time in the stored number display LED 76.
Here, in the present embodiment, although the data itself is a hexadecimal value (H), a value obtained by converting the storage number into a decimal number is stored. For example, when the storage number to be displayed is "29", the value "29 (H)" is stored. In other words, “00101001 (B)” is stored in the address “F043 (H)”. Thus, the lower 4 bits D0 to D3 of the address "F043 (H)" are used to indicate the lower digit ("9" in this example) of the storage number, and the upper 4 bits D4 to D7 are The upper digit ("2" in this example) of the storage number is stored as data for displaying. In the present embodiment, since the upper limit value of the storage number is “50 (D)”, the stored data value is in the range of “0” to “50”.

  And in this embodiment, the address of RWM53 which memorizes storage number data itself is not provided, but storage number display data is provided as display data of storage number display LED76. However, the stored number display data is the stored number data itself.

Next, specific update contents of the bet number, the payout number, the difference number, the difference number data, and the difference number counter value will be described.
As described above, when the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped on the activated line, the automatic betting is performed, and the replay can be executed. The automatic bet number at this time may be a payout number or a payout number.
FIG. 257 is a diagram for explaining the update contents of the number of payouts, the difference number, the difference number data, and the difference number counter value.
Example 1 of (a) shows a way of thinking that the automatic bet number is not the payout number of the game and the automatic bet number is not the bet number of the next game.
Example 2 of (b) shows the concept of setting the automatic bet number as the payout number of the game and the automatic bet number as the bet number of the next game.
In FIG. 257, the value of the difference number counter before the first game is "0 (H)". Further, in both of the example 1 and the example 2, it is assumed that the replay is won in the first game, and the 4 small winning combination is won in the second game.

In Example 1, the bet amount is acquired by reading the bet amount data. For example, assuming that the game is started with three bets in the first game, since "3" is stored in the bet number data, this value is read and the bet number is set to "3".
Then, at the end of the first game, the number of payouts in the game is read from the number-of-payouts data buffer. At the time of replay winning, the number-of-payouts data buffer is “0”, so the number of payouts in the game is “0”.
Therefore,
Number of bets = 3
Number of payouts = 0
Than,
Difference number = -3
Because it becomes
Difference data = FD (H) (digit reduction)
It becomes.

Also, the difference counter value is
Difference counter value = 0 (H) + FD (H) = FD (H)
And will be updated.
When the most significant bit of the difference counter value after the operation is “1” (details will be described later), it is determined that a borrow has occurred, and correction is performed to “0 (H)”.
By this,
Difference counter value (before correction): FD (H)
Difference counter value (after correction): 0 (H)
Is calculated (updated).

Next, in the second game (the current game), when the replay is won in the first game (the previous game) and the prescribed number of the current game is “3”, the automatic bet number data is “3”. And the bet number data of the current game is "3". Therefore, when the bet number is read from the bet number data in the current game, it is "3", but the replay is won in the previous game by judging whether the D0 bit of the operation state flag is "0" or "1". If it is determined that the replay has won in the previous game, the bet number is calculated as “0” in the current game.
It should be noted that it is determined whether the replay has been won in the previous game by determining whether the D0 bit of the symbol combination display flag, which is set at the end of the game, is "0" or "1". If it is determined that the replay has been won in the previous game, it may be calculated that the current game bet number is “0”. In other words, the bet number of the current game is calculated as “0” or the bet number actually bet (in this example, “in this example, It is decided whether to calculate using 3 ").

Further, at the end of the game, when the 4-piece small winning combination is won, the payout number data buffer is "4".
Therefore,
Number of bets = 0
Number of payouts = 4
Than,
Difference number = + 4
Because it becomes
Difference data = 4 (H)
It becomes.
Also, the difference counter value is
Difference counter value = 0 (H) + 4 (H) = 4 (H)
And will be updated.
Furthermore, since the most significant bit of the difference counter value after calculation is “0”, the correction is not performed as described above.

In FIG. 257, (b) Example 2 is a calculation method based on the idea that the number of payouts in the game in which the replay is won is the number of bets of the corresponding game and the number of bets of the next game is the actual number of bets.
First, the bet number reads the bet number data, and the value is used as the bet number at the time of updating the difference number counter value. It is also possible to read not the bet amount data but the automatic bet amount data.
The first game in Example 2 assumes that the game has been started with the bet number “3”, and shows an example when the replay is won in the first game.

When the game is over, the D0 bit of the symbol combination display flag is read. Then, when the D0 bit is “1” (replay winning), the value stored in the bet number data or the automatic bet number data of the game is read, and the value is the difference number in the game (first game) The number of payouts when updating the counter value. In this example, “3” is stored in the bet number data or the automatic bet number data at the end of the first game, so the payout number at the time of updating the difference number counter value is “3”.
Further, when the D0 bit "0" of the symbol combination display flag is "0" (when replay is not won), the value stored in the payout amount data buffer is read, and the value is used as the difference number counter value in the relevant game And the number of payouts at the time of renewal.

  That is, by determining whether the D0 bit of the symbol combination display flag, which is set at the end of the game, is "0" or "1", it is determined whether or not the replay has won in the current game, and the replay in the current game is performed. When it is determined that a prize has been won, the payout number is calculated as "the bet number bet this time in the game". In other words, it is calculated using the value of the “number-of-payouts data buffer” as the number of payouts, based on information that can be determined whether the replay has won in the current game, or the value bet in the current game In the example, it is determined whether to calculate using "bet number data").

Therefore,
Number of bets = 3
Number of payout = 3
Than,
Difference number = 0
Because it becomes
Difference data = 0 (H)
It becomes.
Also, the difference counter value is
Difference counter value = 0 (H) + 0 (H) = 0 (H)
And will be updated.
Furthermore, no correction is performed because the most significant bit of the difference counter value after the operation is “0”.

Next, in the second game, as in the first game, the bet number data or the automatic bet number data is read, and the value is set as the bet number of the second game.
For example, when the specified number of the second game is “3”, the bet number is “3”.

  Then, at the end of the second game, the D0 bit of the symbol combination display flag is read. In this example, since the D0 bit of the symbol combination display flag is determined to be "0", the value stored in the payout amount data buffer is read. Since "4" is stored in the payout number data buffer, this value is read, and the payout number of the second game at the time of updating the difference number counter is set to "4."

Therefore,
Number of bets = 3
Number of payouts = 4
Than,
Difference number = +1
Because it becomes
Difference data = 1 (H)
It becomes.
Also, the difference counter value is
Difference counter value = 0 (H) + 1 (H) = 1 (H)
And will be updated.
Furthermore, no correction is performed because the most significant bit of the difference counter value after the operation is “0”.

As is clear from the example 1 and the example 2, depending on whether the number of automatic bets at the time of replay winning or the number of bets bet made in the game at the time of replay winning is the payout number, Difference count value of the next game) is different. Such a result is because even if the difference number is "-3" in the first game of Example 1, the difference number counter value becomes "0 (H)" by being corrected. .
Either of Example 1 and Example 2 may be used as the method of calculating the difference number counter value. However, if the difference number counter value is updated by the method of Example 2, it is possible to prevent an increase in the difference number counter value based on the replay winning.
On the other hand, if the difference number counter value is updated by the method of Example 1, the operation status flag and the symbol combination display flag do not need to be read when reading the bet number and the payout number, so the calculation is simplified and the program capacity is reduced. be able to.

  In Example 2 of FIG. 257, when obtaining the number of payouts for updating the difference number counter value, the value of the symbol combination display flag is read. However, it is also possible to read the value of the operation state flag and acquire the number of payouts for updating the difference number counter value. In the thirtieth embodiment, the operation state flag is updated at the time of the game start set of the next game after the replay is won. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and after the replay is won, it is also possible to update the operating state flag for the next game during the game. In such a case, after the operating state flag is updated, it is determined whether the D0 bit of the operating state flag is “1” or “0”, and the payout number for updating the difference number counter value is acquired, The difference number counter may be updated. In other words, based on the information that can be judged whether the replay has won in the current game, in the game in which the replay has not won, the value stored in the payout number data buffer is used as the payout number of the current game. In the game in which the replay is calculated, it is determined whether the bet is calculated using the bet number (in this example, “3”).

FIG. 258 is a diagram for explaining the update timing of the difference number counter value, in which (a) shows an example 1 and (b) shows an example 2. FIG.
In the following description, the difference number counter value is indicated by 2 bytes, and the number of inputs and the number of payouts are indicated by 1 byte. In addition, Replay shall not be won.
In Example 1, when the start switch 41 is operated, the difference number counter value is updated based on the bet number, and when the game is over, the difference number counter value is updated based on the payout number. Therefore, the difference number counter value is updated twice in one game.

On the other hand, Example 2 does not update the difference number counter value when the start switch 41 is operated, and updates the difference number counter value based on the bet number and the payout number in the game at the end of the game.
In (a) Example 1 of FIG. 258, as the specific timing of updating when the start switch 41 is operated, for example, in FIG. 244 (main processing of the thirtieth embodiment), specifically after step S2178 in step S2702. Before and after the AT game frequency counter renewal in and the like. In addition, after the start switch 41 is operated, the difference number counter value is updated after the bet number in the game is determined.

  In the update at the time of operation of the start switch 41, “difference number counter value = difference number counter value−bet number” is updated. The bet amount is read from bet amount data or automatic bet amount data. For example, in a normal game, the bet number is “3”, so when the difference number counter value before calculation is “0000 (H)”, the difference number counter value can be obtained by subtracting “03 (H)”. Becomes “FFFD (H)”.

Next, as the process (1) at the end of the game, a process of adding the number of payouts to the difference number counter value is executed. As the timing of this process, in the above-described FIG. 244 (main process of the thirtieth embodiment), “difference number counter value updating process based on the number of payouts” may be provided in step S2705 (game end check process) .
This process is a process of reading out the number of payouts from the number-of-payouts data buffer and adding it to the difference number counter value.

  Next, as the process of (2) at the end of the game, when the difference number counter value is a value corresponding to minus, the correction to "0" is executed. By adding the number of payouts to the difference counter value before the addition of the number of payouts, the difference counter value never becomes negative. However, since the bet number is subtracted from the difference number counter value at the start of the game, it may be negative at this point and may be negative even after the addition of the payout number.

  Whether or not the difference number counter value is negative is determined by judging whether the most significant bit of the 2-byte data of the difference number counter value is "1". When the most significant bit is "1", it is determined that the difference number counter value is negative. For example, when the difference number counter value is “FFFD (H)”, it is “11111111/11111101 (B)” (“/” is shown between the upper 8 bits and the lower 8 bits). Therefore, the most significant bit (leftmost bit) in the 16 bits is "1".

In addition, since the difference counter value needs to be “32768 (D)” in order to make the most significant bit “1” when the difference counter value is a positive value, it may actually occur. Absent. When the difference number counter value exceeds "2400 (D)", the advantage section is ended and the difference number counter value becomes "0", and the special game is continuously the difference number counter value during the normal period. Is increased at the beginning of the advantageous section.
Therefore, when the most significant bit of the difference number counter value is “1”, the difference number counter value is a value at the occurrence of a borrow, and it can be said that it is a negative value.
When it is determined that the difference counter value is negative, the difference counter value is corrected to "0 (H)". Then, the corrected difference counter value is stored.

  In Example 2 of FIG. 258, unlike Example 1, the difference number counter value is not updated when the start switch 41 is operated. In Example 2, the difference number counter value is updated only at the end of the game. When the difference number counter value is updated only at the end of the game, it is performed, for example, in step S2705 (game end set process) of FIG.

The processing procedure at that time is as follows.
As the process of (1), the bet number is subtracted from the payout number to calculate difference number data in the game. The bet number is read from the bet number data, and the payout number is read from the payout number data. A dedicated storage area (RWM 53) may be provided to store the difference number data calculated at this time, but if there is a register that is empty at the time of this processing, it may be stored in that register Good.
Next, the difference number counter value is read from the RWM 53, and the difference number data (calculated above) is added from the difference number counter value. Then, the addition result is used as a difference number counter value.
Next, as the process (2), as in Example 1, it is determined whether or not the difference number counter value is minus, and if it is minus, the difference number counter value is corrected to "0 (H)" . And it memorizes in RWM53.

In Example 2, “the number of payouts−the number of bets (= difference number data)” is calculated first, and then the difference number data is added to the difference number counter value. However, not limited to this,
(1) The number of payouts is added to the difference number counter value. Next, the bet number is subtracted from the difference number counter value.
Or
(2) The bet number is subtracted from the difference number counter value. Next, the number of payouts is added to the difference number counter value.
The operation may be in the order of In this way, it is not necessary to temporarily store difference number data.

In the process of adding the number of payouts to the difference number counter value, for example, when the number of payouts is “3”, the “1” addition process described above is more than adding “3” to the difference number counter value temporarily. Similarly, repeating “1” addition of the difference number counter value is simplified as a program. In this case, in FIG. 244, “difference number counter value updating (addition) processing” may be executed in step S2189 (the medal payout processing by winning).
In the method of Example 2, it is necessary to read the bet number at the end of the game.
Here, if the bet number data and the automatic bet number data are not cleared at the time of the difference number counter value update process at the end of the game, the game at the end of the game by reading the bet number data or the automatic bet number data. The bet number (the bet number used to update the difference number counter value) can be read.
On the other hand, when the bet number data and the automatic bet number data are cleared at the time of difference number counter value update processing at the end of the game, the bet number data or the automatic bet number data is stored in the register etc. It may be stored and held until the updating process of the difference number counter value.

Subsequently, the relationship between the calculation of the difference number counter value and the number of bytes of each data will be described.
As described above, the bet amount data, the automatic bet amount data, and the payout amount data buffer are all 1-byte data. This is to count the range of “0 to 15 (D)”. On the other hand, the difference number counter is composed of 2-byte data in order to count the range of "0 to 2400 (D)". Therefore, although it can be executed without any problem in the operation of one byte to another, correction may be necessary when operating two bytes and one byte.

FIG. 259 is a diagram for explaining the relationship between the calculation of the difference number counter value and the number of bytes of each data.
Example 1 shown in (a) of FIG. 259 is an example in the case where calculation is performed as in Example 1 of FIG. When the start switch 41 is operated, it is necessary to calculate "difference number counter value-bet number", but the difference number counter value is 2 bytes and the bet number is 1 byte. Here, for example, when the difference number counter value before calculation is "0000 (H)" and the bet number is "03 (H)", the difference number counter value is calculated according to "difference number counter value-bet number". Becomes “FFFD (H)”. Therefore, no correction is necessary in this case.

Next, when calculating "difference number counter value + payout number" at the end of the game, for example, the difference number counter value before calculation is "FFFD (H)" and the number of payouts is "01 (H)" At this time, the difference number counter value becomes “FFFE (H)”.
Then, next, as described above, when the difference number counter value is negative, it is corrected to “0”. Therefore, “FFFE (H)” → “0 (H)” is corrected.

Example 2 shown in (b) of FIG. 259 is an example of updating the difference number counter value only at the end of the game as in Example 2 of FIG.
First, “payout number−bet number” (difference number data) is calculated. In this case, since both are 1-byte data, they can be calculated as they are. For example, when the number of payouts is “0” and the number of bets is “3”, “number of payouts-number of bets” is “FD (H)”.
Next, the calculation result of "the number of payouts-the number of bets" is converted into 2 bytes.
First, when the upper 1 byte of the operation result is “0”, 1 byte data of “0x (H)” is converted to “000 x (H)” of 2 byte data. When the upper one byte of the operation result is "1" as in "Fx (H)", it is converted to "FFF x (H)" of 2-byte data.

Then, “number of payouts−number of bets” (2-byte data after correction) is added to the difference number counter value (2 byte data) to calculate the updated difference number counter value (2 byte data).
For example, when the difference number counter value before calculation is “0” and the “payout number−bet number” after correction is “1”, the difference number counter value is “1”.
When the difference counter value before calculation is “0” and the “payout number-bet number” after correction is “FFFD (H)”, the difference counter value is “FFFD (H)”. Become.
Next, when the difference number counter value is negative (when the most significant bit is “1”), “0” is set by correction.
In the above example, when the difference number counter value is “1”, it is not corrected and remains “1”. On the other hand, when the difference number counter value is “FFFD (H)”, the correction results in “0”.

As described above, in the method of Example 1 of FIG. 259 (Example 1 of FIG. 258), it is necessary to update the difference number counter value when the start switch 41 is operated and at the game end (twice in one game) . However, since processing for converting 1-byte data into 2-byte data is not necessary, calculation time can be shortened.
On the other hand, in the method of Example 2 of FIG. 259 (Example 2 of FIG. 258), the difference number counter value is updated only at the end of the game, so that one calculation can be made in one game, simplifying the program. Can be However, it is necessary to convert 1-byte data into 2-byte data.

In the thirty-first embodiment, when the difference number counter value exceeds “2400 (D)”, it is determined that the end condition of the advantageous section (AT) is satisfied.
On the other hand, the sub control board 80 can display the total acquisition number in the AT on the image display device 23 (hereinafter, this display is referred to as "sub display"). In this case, when the total acquisition number displayed on the image display device 23 is a half value, the difference number counter value may exceed “2400 (D)”. Therefore, even if the total number of acquisitions displayed on the image display device 23 is a half value, it may be necessary to end the advantageous section (AT).
Specifically, “difference number counter value ≧ total acquisition number by sub display” is satisfied.

FIG. 260 is a diagram showing the relationship between the difference number counter value and the sub display.
In Example 1 and Example 2 of FIG. 260, there is shown an example of transitioning to CZ (chance zone) of several games (for example, about 5 games) without immediately starting AT at the transition to the advantageous section. And the example which started AT after completion | finish of CZ is shown. In such a case, in CZ, the indication function may or may not be activated. Also, it is conceivable that the push order bell is won during CZ and the case where it is not won. Therefore, during CZ, both increase and decrease of medals can be considered.
In addition, even after AT transition, the difference number does not necessarily increase from the beginning of AT. For example, when it is not easy to win the bell order, the difference number may decrease even during AT.

In Example 1 shown in FIG. 260 (a), the slump graph [1] indicated by the solid line shows an example in which the difference number decreases during CZ and increases after the start of AT. In this case, since the lowest value of the difference counter is at the time of AT start, the difference counter value matches the total number of acquisitions by the sub display.
On the other hand, the slump graph [2] indicated by a broken line shows an example in which the difference number decreases until the point of “A” after the start of AT, and then the difference number increases.
Here, in the sub-display, since the total number of acquisitions since the start of the AT is displayed, the total number of acquisitions including the decrease in the number of differences from the start of the AT to the time "A" is displayed. The display of the total number of acquisitions from the start of the AT to the time "A" may be indicated by a minus display, or may be indicated by "0" but internally calculated as a minus.

In the case of the slump graph [2], the lowest value of the difference counter is at the “A” time point. Therefore, the difference number counter value becomes positive from time "A". As a result, the difference number counter value is different from the total acquisition number by the sub display.
For example, when the difference between the start of AT and the time "A" is "-15", when the difference counter reaches "2400 (D)", the total number of acquisitions by the sub display is " It will be 2385 sheets. Therefore, the advantageous section (AT) ends before the total acquisition number by the sub-display reaches "2400".

In the thirty-first embodiment, the main control board 50 transmits the difference number counter value to each sub control board 80 (for example, by the processing of the control command set 1 in step S2198 in FIG. 244). Therefore, the sub control board 80 can determine to what extent the advantageous section (AT) ends. In this way, it is easy to adjust the start and end timings of the ending effect on the sub control board 80 side.
Therefore, when it is determined that the advantageous section (AT) ends before the total number of wins in the sub-display reaches "2400", the sub-control board 80 notifies the player to that effect with the image display device 23. It is preferable to notify. The contents of the notification may include, for example, the following method.

(1) As in the above example, when the advantageous section (AT) is scheduled to end when the total number of acquisitions in the sub display exceeds "2385", for example, the display of the total number of acquisitions is "2365" When it becomes "," it will display as "it will complete | finish AT with 20 more sheets etc." etc., and it can be mentioned alerting | reporting an advantageous period (AT) completion timing.
(2) For example, at a predetermined timing in the AT, notification may be made that "This AT ends when the total number of obtained 2385 cards is reached."

(3) For example, when the total number of acquisitions exceeds "2300", the display of the total number of acquisitions by the image display device 23 may be "????" and the accurate total number of acquisitions may not be displayed. .
Furthermore, when “????” is displayed, an effect is output as if the AT end lottery is being played every game. For example, an effect that the main character and the enemy character confront each other is output. Then, when the difference number counter exceeds “2400 (D)”, there is a method of outputting an effect such that the main character loses (or wins) the enemy character, and ending the AT.

Example 2 shown in FIG. 260 (b) is an example in which the number of differences in CZ is increased after the start of the advantageous section. In this case, since the start of the advantageous section (CZ) becomes the lowest value of the difference counter during the advantageous section, the difference counter value becomes positive from the start of the advantageous section.
On the other hand, the total acquisition number by sub-display starts at the same time as AT start. Therefore, also in this case, as in Example 1, the difference number counter value exceeds “2400 (D)” before the total acquisition number by the sub-display reaches “2400”. Therefore, the same effect as in Example 1 is output.
If the number of medals increases during CZ, the increase can be included in the total number of wins in the sub-display during AT. If this setting is made only when the medals increase during CZ, the difference number counter value (decimal number) and the total acquisition number by the sub-display match, so the total acquisition number of the advantageous section (AT) is "2400. When the number of sheets is exceeded, the advantageous section (AT) can be ended.

Next, new game play when ending the advantageous section (AT) based on the difference number counter value will be described.
As in the thirty-first embodiment, when the advantageous section is ended when the difference number counter value exceeds "2400 (D)", the advantageous section (AT) is ended with the smallest possible number of games (hereinafter referred to as " In the case of digesting the game to nearly 1,500 games which is the number of continuing upper limit games of the advantageous section while making the difference number counter value not to exceed “2400 (D)” and “case 1”. It can be considered.

Here, when it does not shift to the advantageous section unless it wins the special part winning (special game) (for example, in the first embodiment, when the winning of 1 BBA becomes the condition to start the advantageous section). And when it is possible to shift to an advantage section only by winning the rare role (rare small role, reali play) without winning the special role (for example, in the first embodiment, it is advantageous by winning the small role E1) In the case where it is possible to shift to a section, it may be considered as "specification 2" hereinafter).
Here, in the case of the specification 1, the progress of the game by the case 2 is advantageous.

  Specifically, it is because it is necessary to wait for the winning of the special part in the normal section (playing state in which the number of differences decreases) when the advantageous section is ended quickly and the next special role is to be won. On the other hand, after the start of the advantageous section (AT), the difference number counter value is immediately raised to "2400 (D)", and thereafter, the number of differences is approximately until the number of games in the advantageous section becomes close to 1,500. This is because if the current state is maintained, it is possible to wait for the special part to be won without reducing the number of differences.

On the other hand, in the case of the specification 2, it can not be generally said which of the case 1 and the case 2 is advantageous. This is because, as in Case 2, in the situation where the difference number is maintained at present while maintaining the advantageous section (AT), it is not elected to the advantageous section (AT) again.
However, as described above, in the specification 1 gaming machine, it is advantageous to wait for the special part to be won while lengthening the number of games in the advantageous section (AT), so in the 31st embodiment, the game characteristic in that case. I will provide a.

FIG. 261 is a diagram illustrating an example in which the notification modes are different in the thirty-first embodiment.
In (a) of the figure, when the advantageous section (AT) is started, when the push order bell is won, the indication function is activated and push order indication information is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78 (FIG. 20, FIG. 26). Further, the correct pressing order is displayed on the image display device 23 (FIG. 26).
Then, the above notification is executed until the difference number counter becomes close to “2400 (D)” (until “2350 (D)” is reached in the example of FIG. 261). The notification by the sub control board 80 in this case is referred to as a "reporting mode A". The notification mode A is a notification mode similar to the notification described in the first embodiment.

Then, when the difference number counter value exceeds "2350 (D)", the notification mode such as the correct pressing order (notification by the sub control board 80) displayed by the image display device 23 is (Informing mode B ≠ informing mode A). For example, the notification mode B has a smaller image display area in the correct pressing order than the notification mode A, a different color when notifying the correct pressing order, and a position on the image display device 23 that notifies the correct pressing order. , The volume of the speaker 22 is small when the correct pressing order is voice-outputted, and the like.
However, in both of the notification modes A and B, the correct answer pressing order to be notified itself is the same (the pressing order other than the correct answer pressing order can not be notified).
Further, in any of the notification modes A and B, the operation of the instruction function executed on the main control board 50 side is the same, and the same pressing order instruction information (in FIG. 1) is displayed on the acquisition number display LED 78.

Here, in the notification of the pressing order of the correct answer by the notification mode B, the player that the difference number counter value approaches “2400 (D)”, that is, the player ends the advantageous section (AT) if the difference number increases as it is It will tell you. Therefore, when the player changes from the notification mode A to the notification mode B, the difference counter value must exceed "2400 (D)" in a short time (a few minutes after the advantageous section (AT) ends). You can know
In the example of FIG. 261, when the difference number counter value reaches "2350 (D)", the notification mode A is changed to the notification mode B, but the present invention is not limited thereto. When “2300 (D)” is exceeded, “2380 (D)” is exceeded, etc., it is possible to set various threshold values.

For a player who wants to end the advantageous section (AT) at an early stage, in any of the notification modes A or B, if the stop switch 42 is operated in accordance with the notified correct press order, the advantageous section ( It is possible to end AT).
On the other hand, for a player who wants to make the number of games in the advantageous section (AT) as long as possible, after the notification mode B is notified, the player can intentionally make a pushing order different from the correct pushing order. It is possible to intentionally carry out a small role or drop-off without winning a prize.

In the first embodiment, since the high order small winning combination at the time of winning bell order is nine pieces, for example, when the correct pressing order is notified by the notification mode B, the correct pressing at a rate of once in about four times If the stop switch 42 is operated in order and the others are operated in an incorrect pressing order (a pushing order different from the informed correct pushing order), it is considered that the difference number can be maintained substantially at the current state.
In the first embodiment, at the time of fraudulent order at the time of winning bell order, one winning combination is won with a probability of “1⁄4”, and the winning combination will be missed with a probability of “3/4”. The expected value of the difference in the game is "-2.75".

Therefore, for the player who wants to make the advantageous section (AT) as long as possible, the game proceeds with the operation of the stop switch 42 as described above, while maintaining the difference number counter value in front of “2400 (D)”. The game can be advanced without reducing the medals until reaching 1500 games which is the upper limit number of continuations of the advantageous section. In other words, it is possible to wait for the special role (BB) to be won while keeping the difference number counter value in front of “2400 (D)” (while maintaining the medals as it is).
It should be noted that the player is penalized because the stop switch 42 is not operated according to the pushing order instruction information displayed by the operation of the instructing function and the correct pushing order displayed on the image display device 23. Nothing is as stated above ("0020").

In addition, when the special part is won and it shifts to the special game, the difference number increases. For example, in the example of the first embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13, 150 1BBA games and 200 1BBB games are paid out, so the difference number counter value is maintained “2400 (D)” When the player wins 1BB and shifts to 1BB gaming, the difference number counter value exceeds “2400 (D)”. Thus, the advantageous section (AT) ends during the 1BB game.
In (a) of FIG. 261, the notification by the notification mode B is performed, and the difference number counter value is elected to BB under the situation where it is positioned almost at present near “2350 (D)”. An example is shown in which the counter value exceeds “2400 (D)” and the advantageous section (AT) is ended.

On the other hand, FIG. 261 (b) shows an example in which BB was not won even if the number of games in the advantageous section becomes close to 1,500 after the notification by the notification mode B is performed. In this example, for example, when the number of games in the advantageous section reaches 1480, the notification mode B is switched to the notification mode A again. Switching from the notification mode B to the notification mode A informs the player that the number of games in the advantageous section approaches 1500 games.
Then, when the player switches to the notification mode A, the player operates the stop switch 42 in the correct pressing order when the subsequent bell is won. Thereby, in most cases, the difference number counter value exceeds “2400 (D)”, and the advantageous section (AT) ends.
The “1480 game” for switching from the notification mode B to the notification mode A is a standard, and can be set in various ways such as 1400 games, 1450 games, and 1470 games.

Although the thirty-first embodiment of the present invention has been described above, the present invention is not limited to the above description, and various modifications can be made as follows.
(1) The difference number counter is an increment counter that counts up from the initial value “0 (H)”. However, the present invention is not limited to this. First, it may be a decrement counter that counts down from a predetermined value, for example, "2400 (D)".
In this case, for example, when the difference number counter is updated from the start of the advantageous section, “2400 (D)” is set at the start of the advantageous section. Then, when the difference number counter value falls below "0 (H)", that is, when a borrow occurs, it can be judged that the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied.
In addition, even when the difference number counter value is counted down from “2400 (D)”, the difference number counter value may be updated every game, including the normal section. In this case, a method of updating the difference number counter value as it is in the normal section and whether or not each game is "2400 (D)" in the normal section is judged, and when it is not judged "2400 (D)" And the method of setting the initial value "2400 (D)".

(2) As the termination condition of the advantageous section based on the difference number counter value, in the thirty-first embodiment, the difference number is set to 2400. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and 2000 sheets, 2200 sheets, 2500 sheets, etc. can be set variously.
In the thirty-first embodiment, the number is set to 2400 by the following standard.
Currently, there is a trend that "the payout rate should not exceed 150% in 1600 games." In this case, if it is assumed that the number of bets is “3” for every game in 1600 games,
1600 × 3 = 4800 sheets (total bet number in 1500 games)
It becomes.
Therefore, the payout number when the payout rate is 150% is
4800 × 1.5 (150%) = 7200 sheets.
Therefore,
7200 (the number of payouts)-4800 (the number of bets) = 2400 sheets (the number of differences)
It becomes.
That is, the fact that the difference number does not exceed 2400 means that the payout rate does not exceed 150% after 1600 game times.

(3) The difference number counter value can be set to “0 (H)” when the difference number becomes the lowest value after starting the advantageous period, and the advantageous period can be continued from there until “2400 (D)” is exceeded. And
However, after the start of the advantageous section, the time when the difference number becomes the lowest value may be “F 6 A 0 (H)” corresponding to “−2400 (D)”, and counting up may be performed from that time. Then, when a carry occurs and exceeds "0000 (H)", it may be determined that the advantageous section is ended.

(4) In the thirty-first embodiment, when the difference number counter value exceeds "2400 (D)", it is determined that the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied, but the difference number counter value is "2400 (D)" or more When it becomes (when it reaches), it may be judged that the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied.
When the difference counter is a decrement counter, the initial value is set to "2400 (D)", and when it falls below "0 (H)" (when a borrow occurs), the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied. It may be determined that the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied when the value becomes "0 (H)" or less.

(5) In the thirtieth embodiment, the initial value of the advantageous section clear counter is set to "1500 (D)" to count down. Setting the advantageous section clear counter in this way sets the initial value "1500 (D)" only at the beginning of the advantageous section, and thereafter continues to subtract each game "1" every time from "1" to "0." It is because the program can be simplified if it is judged whether or not it becomes (FIG. 246).
On the other hand, in the thirty-first embodiment, the initial value of the difference counter is set to "0", and count-up is performed until "2400 (D)" is exceeded. When correcting the difference number counter value, it is possible to simplify the program by correcting to “0”, and for that purpose, it is more convenient to count up.
However, the advantageous section clear counter is not limited to the countdown, and the difference counter is not limited to the count up.

(6) The timing to set an initial value (for example, "0") to the difference number counter can be set variously at the game end check processing, etc., but the advantageous value clear counter has an initial value "1500 (D)". It is preferable to set the initial value "0" in the difference counter at a timing close to the timing to set it. This is to reduce the period in which the difference between the value of the advantageous section clear counter and the value of the difference counter is as small as possible.
For example, after the process of step S2748 in FIG. 246 in the thirtieth embodiment, the difference number counter may be set to an initial value “0”.

In the thirtieth embodiment, updating of the advantageous section clear counter (subtracting “1”) is performed at the game start (step S2724 in FIG. 245, step S2742 in FIG. 246). However, if updating of the advantageous section clear counter is performed at the start of the game and updating of the difference number counter value is performed at the end of the game (for example, in FIG. 244, the game end check processing), the update timings of both counters are updated. Would be different. Specifically, the update timing of the difference number counter value is the end of the game of the game, and the update timing of the advantageous section clear counter is the time of the start of the next game.
Therefore, if the update timing of the advantageous section clear counter is performed, for example, within the game end check processing, and the update of the advantageous section clear counter (subtracting “1”) and the update processing of the difference number counter are performed in successive steps, More preferable.

(7) In the sub-display during AT, the total acquisition number in AT is displayed as an image. However, in addition to this, the difference number counter value received from the main control board 50 may be displayed together with the total acquisition number. For example, “total acquisition number ○, difference number ××” and the like. Then, if a difference number (difference number counter value) is used as a reference to output an effect or the like indicating that the advantageous section (AT) is ended, it is considered that the misunderstanding of the player is reduced. When the difference number counter value is displayed, it may be displayed when the difference number counter value exceeds a specific value (for example, the remaining "100") or when it becomes equal to or more than the specific value.
Further, a difference number indicator (for example, the same as the management information display LED 74) electrically connected to the main control board 50 is provided so as to be visible from the outside, and the difference number counter value is displayed on this difference number indicator. It is also possible.

  (8) In the example of FIG. 261, the image display by the image display device 23 is different between the notification mode A and the notification mode B. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the notification mode may be the same, the lighting pattern of the lamp 21 may be different, and / or the sound sound from the speaker 22 may be different. Furthermore, it is also possible to make the lighting pattern of the lamp 21 different and / or make the sound sound from the speaker 22 different at the same time as making the image display by the image display device 23 different.

(9) In the thirty-first embodiment, when the advantageous section is started, the advantageous section is continued until the difference number counter value exceeds "2400 (D)". However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for each start time of the advantageous section, the number of differences serving as the end condition in the advantageous section may be determined by lottery or the like.
In addition, when the advantageous section start condition A is satisfied and the transition to the advantageous section (for example, when 1 BBA is won in the first embodiment), the advantageous section start condition B (the advantageous section start condition A) is satisfied and the transition to the advantageous section Depending on the time (for example, when the small winning combination E1 is won in the first embodiment), it is also possible to make the difference number serving as the end condition in the advantageous section different.

(10) In the thirty-first embodiment, a storage area for storing the difference number counter value is provided. On the other hand, the storage area of the difference number data calculated by subtracting the bet number from the payout number may or may not be provided in the RWM 53. When a storage area for storing difference number data is not provided in the RWM 53, after calculating the difference number data, it may be stored in the register until the difference number counter value is calculated.
In FIG. 258, in the operation of Example 1, since the process of subtracting the number of bets from the difference counter value and the process of adding the number of payouts to the difference counter value are performed respectively, Since the difference number data is not calculated, it is not necessary to store the difference number data.

  Also, in the calculation of Example 2 in FIG. 258, the difference number data is calculated from "the number of payouts-the number of bets", and when the difference number data is added to the difference number counter value, the calculated difference number data is stored. Is required. However, in Example 2, if “difference number counter value = difference number counter value + payout number” is calculated and “difference number counter value = difference number counter value−bet number” is calculated, the difference number data Memory is unnecessary.

(11) In Example 1 of FIG. 258, when the start switch 41 is operated, the difference number counter value is calculated, and when the game is finished, the difference number counter value is calculated again. After calculation, the difference number counter value may be stored in the RWM 53, but if the calculated difference number counter value can be stored in the register until the end of the game, it is stored until the end of the game (RWM 53 May not be stored). And, at the end of the game, when the calculation of the difference number counter value is finished (if the difference number counter value is corrected to "0 (H)", the difference number counter value after correction) is stored in RWM 53 You may
Similarly, after the calculation of the difference number counter value is completed, before the difference number counter value is stored in the RWM 53, using the difference number counter value stored in the register, the difference number counter value is the ending condition of the advantageous section. The difference count value may be stored in the RWM 53 (the corrected difference count value after correction may be stored in the RWM 53 as necessary).
When the difference counter value calculated when the start switch 41 is operated is stored in the RWM 53, at the end of the game (when the process of adding the payout number to the difference counter value is executed), a process of reading the value again occurs. It is because processing increases.

(12) In the thirty-first embodiment, a slot machine has been exemplified as an example of a game machine, but the invention can be applied to, for example, a casino machine and an enclosed type game machine (a medalless game machine).
(13) The thirty-first embodiment and the various modifications described above (including the contents of the first to thirty embodiments) are not limited to being implemented alone, but may be implemented in combination as appropriate. It is.

<Supplementary Note>
The inventions described in the initial specification and the like of the present application (initial inventions) may include, for example, the following initial inventions 1 to 75, and each solves the problems to be solved by the respective initial inventions and the problems related to the initial inventions. The means for achieving the object and the effects of the first invention are as follows. However, the invention described in the present specification is not meant to be limited to the first inventions 1 to 75.

1. Initial invention 1
(A) Problem to be Solved by Invention 1 Initially, the invention relates to a slot machine provided with an advantageous section capable of executing an instruction function operating game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch.
In the conventional slot machine, it is known to manage the AT with the main control board in addition to managing the AT with the sub control board (see, for example, JP-A-2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section which is a game section capable of executing AT. Here, when the upper limit (for example, upper limit game frequency) is provided in the advantageous section, as a result of performing addition of the number of games during the advantageous section and the AT, the upper limit of the advantageous section may be exceeded. In such a case, appropriate control is required to be performed.
The problem to be solved by the invention at first is to prevent the player from giving an impression that the game can be played beyond the upper limit when extending the instruction game section (AT) exceeds the upper limit of the advantageous section. is there.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the First Invention 1 (Here, the corresponding embodiments will be described in parentheses.)
The first solution (third embodiment; Example 2 of FIG. 55) is
A game (a game when a small winning combination B is won) having an advantageous operation mode (a correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an indication function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Of the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function activation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game can be executed,
In an advantageous section, the game has an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, and an instruction function operating game is always executed or an instruction gaming section (AT) with a high execution frequency.
Game control means (main control board 50) for controlling the start and end of the advantageous section and the start and end of the instruction game section;
A presentation control means (sub control board 80) for outputting a presentation relating to the instruction game section;
The game control means
In the advantageous section, when the upper limit (1500 games) of the advantageous section is reached, the advantageous section is ended,
In the advantageous section, when the start condition of the instruction game section is satisfied, the instruction game section is started,
In the instruction game section, when the condition for the extension of the instruction game section (addition of the number of games) is satisfied, the instruction game section can be extended,
Send information (AT counter value, superimposition counter value, upper limit counter value, etc.) regarding the instruction game section to the effect control means,
The effect control means is
Based on the information received from the game control means, even if the instruction game zone is extended but does not exceed the continuation upper limit of the advantageous zone, predetermined information on the extension of the instruction game zone (AT remaining game after the addition) Display the number of times)
Based on the information received from the game control means, the extension of the instruction game segment will exceed the continuation upper limit of the advantage segment, or after the instruction game segment reaches the continuation upper limit of the advantage segment When determined, it is characterized in that specific information ("holiday", "congratulation", etc.) different from the predetermined information is displayed.

According to a second solution, in the first solution,
The effect control means is
Information which can grasp how much the instruction game section has been extended is displayed as the predetermined information (a specific number of times of game is displayed),
As the specific information, it is possible to know that some determination regarding the extension of the instruction game section has been made, but displays information that can not be grasped about the extent of the extension of the instruction game section (display the specific number of games do not do)
It is characterized by

(C) Effects of the First Invention 1 According to the first invention, when extending the instruction game zone exceeds the continuation upper limit of the advantage zone, or after the instruction game zone reaches the continuation upper limit of the advantage zone When the extension is determined, the predetermined information on the extension of the instructed game section is not displayed, so it is possible to prevent the player from misunderstanding if the instructed game section continues beyond the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section. be able to.

2. Initial invention 2
(A) Problems to be solved by the first invention 2 The same as the first invention.
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of Initial Invention 2 (The corresponding embodiments will be described in parentheses.)
The first invention (third embodiment; example 3 of FIG. 55) is
A game (a game when a small winning combination B is won) having an advantageous operation mode (a correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an indication function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Of the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function activation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game can be executed,
In an advantageous section, the game has an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, and an instruction function operating game is always executed or an instruction gaming section (AT) with a high execution frequency.
Game control means (main control board 50) for controlling the start and end of the advantageous section and the start and end of the instruction game section;
A presentation control means (sub control board 80) for outputting a presentation relating to the instruction game section;
The game control means
In the advantageous section, when the upper limit (1500 games) of the advantageous section is reached, the advantageous section is ended,
In the advantageous section, when the start condition of the instruction game section is satisfied, the instruction game section is started,
In the instruction game section, when the condition for the extension of the instruction game section (addition of the number of games) is satisfied, the instruction game section can be extended,
Send information (AT counter value, superimposition counter value, upper limit counter value, etc.) regarding the instruction game section to the effect control means,
The effect control means, based on the information received from the game control means, when the instructed game section or the advantageous section reaches a predetermined threshold (the total number of ATs of the game is 1,500 games), the instructed game section is the advantageous section It is characterized in that it is possible to output an effect (ending effect) that indicates that the upper limit of the continuation is approaching.

(C) Effects of the First Invention 2 According to the first invention, since the effect to indicate that the command game section is approaching the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section is output, the instruction game section continues beyond the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section The player can be informed that he does not do so.

3. Initial invention 3
(A) Problems to be solved by the first invention 3 The same as the first invention 1.
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the First Invention 3 (The corresponding embodiments will be described in parentheses.)
The first invention (third embodiment; Example 1 of FIG. 55) is
A game (a game when a small winning combination B is won) having an advantageous operation mode (a correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an indication function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Of the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function activation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game can be executed,
In an advantageous section, the game has an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, and an instruction function operating game is always executed or an instruction gaming section (AT) with a high execution frequency.
Game control means (main control board 50) for controlling the start and end of the advantageous section and the start and end of the instruction game section;
A presentation control means (sub control board 80) for outputting a presentation relating to the instruction game section;
The game control means
In the advantageous section, when the upper limit (1500 games) of the advantageous section is reached, the advantageous section is ended,
In the advantageous section, when the start condition of the instruction game section is satisfied, the instruction game section is started,
In the command game section, when the extension condition of the command game section is satisfied, the command game section can be extended,
Send information (AT counter value, superimposition counter value, upper limit counter value, etc.) regarding the instruction game section to the effect control means,
The effect control means is
Based on the information received from the game control means, when extending the instruction game section does not exceed the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section, information on the extension of the instruction game section (the number of AT remaining games after the addition) is displayed ,
Based on the information received from the game control means, the extension of the instruction game segment will exceed the continuation upper limit of the advantage segment, or after the instruction game segment reaches the continuation upper limit of the advantage segment When determined, it is characterized by not displaying information on the extension of the instructed game section (the number of AT remaining games after the addition).

(C) Effects of the First Invention 3 According to the first invention, when extending the instruction game zone exceeds the continuation upper limit of the advantage zone, or after the instruction game zone reaches the continuation upper limit of the advantage zone When the extension is determined, the information on the extension of the instructed game section is not displayed, so that it is possible to prevent the player from being misunderstood if the instructed game section continues beyond the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section.

4. Initial invention 4
(A) Problems to be solved by the first invention 4 The same as the first invention 1.
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the First Invention 4 (The corresponding embodiments will be described in parentheses.)
The first solution (third embodiment; example 4 of FIG. 55) is
A game (a game when a small winning combination B is won) having an advantageous operation mode (a correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an indication function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Of the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function activation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game can be executed,
In an advantageous section, the game has an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, and an instruction function operating game is always executed or an instruction gaming section (AT) with a high execution frequency.
Game control means (main control board 50) for controlling the start and end of the advantageous section and the start and end of the instruction game section;
A presentation control means (sub control board 80) for outputting a presentation relating to the instruction game section;
The game control means
In the advantageous section, when the upper limit (1500 games) of the advantageous section is reached, the advantageous section is ended,
In the advantageous section, when the start condition of the instruction game section is satisfied, the instruction game section is started,
In the command game section, when the extension condition of the command game section is satisfied, the command game section can be extended,
Send information (AT counter value, superimposition counter value, upper limit counter value, etc.) regarding the instruction game section to the effect control means,
The effect control means is characterized by displaying game information ("It will be ended in 10 more games, etc.") indicating that the instruction game section is not executed beyond the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section.

According to a second solution, in the first solution,
The effect control means, based on the information received from the game control means, when extending the instruction game section will exceed the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section or after the instruction game section reaches the continuation upper limit of the advantage section The game information is displayed when extension of the instructed game section is determined.

(C) Effects of the First Invention 4 According to the first invention, it is possible to prevent the player from being misunderstood when the instructed game section continues beyond the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section.

5. Initial invention 5
(A) Problem to be Solved by Invention 5 The present invention relates to a slot machine provided with an advantageous section capable of executing an instruction function operating game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch.
In the conventional slot machine, it is known to manage the AT with the main control board in addition to managing the AT with the sub control board (see, for example, JP-A-2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section which is a game section capable of executing AT. Here, when the upper limit (for example, upper limit game frequency) is provided to the advantageous section, as a result of performing addition of the number of games during the advantageous section and AT, there is a possibility that the upper limit of the advantageous section is exceeded. Need to get rid of it.
The problem to be solved by the invention at first is to ensure that the instructed game section (such as AT) does not exceed the upper limit of the advantageous section.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of Initial Invention 5 (The corresponding embodiments will be described in parentheses.)
In the first invention (third embodiment; FIGS. 44 to 46),
A game (a game when a small winning combination B is won) having an advantageous operation mode (a correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an indication function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Of the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function activation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game can be executed,
In an advantageous section, the game has an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, and an instruction function operating game is always executed or an instruction gaming section (AT) with a high execution frequency.
Game control means (main control board 50) for controlling the start and end of the advantageous section and the start and end of the instruction game section;
The game control means
After the start of the advantageous section, when the continuous upper limit (1500 games) of the advantageous section is reached (for example, when "Yes" in step S443 of FIG. 44), the advantageous section is ended,
In the advantageous section, when the start condition of the instruction game section is satisfied, the instruction game section is started,
In the instruction game section, it is possible to determine whether or not to extend the instruction game section,
When it is determined to extend the instruction game section, when the instruction game section has reached the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section before the determination of the extension (for example, in the case of “Yes” in step S451 of FIG. 44), It is characterized by clearing the decision result concerning the extension.

(C) Effects of the First Invention 5 According to the first invention, even when it is determined to extend the instructed game section, when the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section is reached, the determination result of the extension is used. Since clearing is performed, it is possible to prevent the instructed game section from exceeding the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section.

6. Initial invention 6
(A) Problem to be Solved by Invention 6 The invention at the beginning relates to a slot machine provided with an advantageous section capable of executing an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch.
In the conventional slot machine, it is known to manage the AT with the main control board in addition to managing the AT with the sub control board (see, for example, JP-A-2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section which is a game section capable of executing AT. Here, when the upper limit (for example, upper limit game frequency) is provided in the advantageous section, as a result of performing addition of the number of games during the advantageous section and the AT, the upper limit of the advantageous section may be exceeded.
The problem to be solved by the invention at first is to make it difficult for the indicated game section or the advantageous section to reach the upper limit of the advantageous section.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of Initial Invention 6 (The corresponding embodiments will be described in parentheses.)
The first invention (third embodiment; FIGS. 47 to 49) is
A game (a game when a small winning combination B is won) having an advantageous operation mode (a correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an indication function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Of the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function activation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game can be executed,
In an advantageous section, the game has an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, and an instruction function operating game is always executed or an instruction gaming section (AT) with a high execution frequency.
Game control means (main control board 50) for controlling the start and end of the advantageous section and the start and end of the instruction game section;
The game control means
After starting the advantageous section, when it reaches the continuation upper limit (1500 games) of the advantageous section, the advantageous section is ended,
In the advantageous section, when the start condition of the instruction game section is satisfied, the instruction game section is started,
In the instruction game section, it is possible to determine whether or not to extend the instruction game section,
It has an extension determination table (lottery table A or B) used when determining the degree of extension of the instruction game section,
The extension determination table is
at least,
A first extension determination table (in FIG. 47 to FIG. 49, a lottery table A);
A second extension determination table (lottery table B in FIGS. 47 to 49) having a smaller expected value of the degree of extension (the number of overlays) determined than the first extension determination table;
The first extension determination table is used to determine the degree of extension until the designated game section or the advantageous section reaches the predetermined threshold (the number of AT games is 1000), and the designated game section or the advantageous section is the predetermined threshold. When it reaches, the second extension determination table is used to determine the degree of extension.

(C) Effects of the First Invention 6 According to the first invention, when the instruction game section or the advantageous section reaches the predetermined threshold, the extension determination table is used to determine the extension degree with a small expectation value of the extension degree. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the instructed game section to reach the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section.

7. Initial invention 7
(A) Problems to be solved by the first invention 7 The same as the first invention 6.
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the First Invention 7 (The corresponding embodiments will be described in parentheses.)
The first invention (third embodiment; FIGS. 50 to 52)
A game (a game when a small winning combination B is won) having an advantageous operation mode (a correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an indication function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Of the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function activation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game can be executed,
In an advantageous section, the game has an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, and an instruction function operating game is always executed or an instruction gaming section (AT) with a high execution frequency.
Game control means (main control board 50) for controlling the start and end of the advantageous section and the start and end of the instruction game section;
The game control means
It is equipped with the role lottery means (61) which performs the lottery of the role,
It is possible to determine whether or not to extend the instruction game section based on the winning combination in the combination drawing by the combination drawing means,
When the first combination (for example, the small combination E1) is won by the combination lottery by the combination lottery means, the degree of extension (the number of the tops) determined than when the second combination (for example, the small combination D) is elected The expected value of is large,
When the designated game section or the advantageous section has not reached the predetermined threshold (the number of AT games played 1000 games), when the first combination is won, extension of the specified game range based on the selection of the first combination Determine the degree (in FIG. 50 to FIG. 52, step S 541),
When the instruction game section or the advantageous section has not reached the predetermined threshold, when the second combination is won, the degree of extension of the instruction game range is determined based on the selection of the second combination,
When the instruction game section or the advantageous section has reached the predetermined threshold value, when the first combination is won, the degree of extension of the instruction game section is determined as in the case of the second combination (FIG. 50) -Figure 52, step S543)
It is characterized by

(C) Effects of the First Invention 7 According to the first invention, when the command game section or the advantageous section reaches the predetermined threshold, the command game section is extended so that the expected value of the degree of the extension to be determined becomes small. Since the degree is determined, it is possible to make it difficult for the instructed game section to reach the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section.

8. Initial invention 8
(A) Problem to be Solved by Invention 8 The present invention relates to a slot machine provided with an advantageous section capable of executing an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch.
In the conventional slot machine, it is known to manage the AT with the main control board in addition to managing the AT with the sub control board (see, for example, JP-A-2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section, which is a game section capable of executing AT, and to provide an upper limit (for example, an upper limit game frequency) to the advantageous section.
Also, during AT, an external signal indicating AT is output, and during a special game, an external signal indicating special game is output. However, when the external signal of these external signals and the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached Because it is mixed, it is necessary to make the on / off timing of the external signal unnatural.
The problem to be solved by the invention at first is to prevent the on / off of the external signal indicating the instructed game section and the external signal indicating the special game from becoming unnatural when the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of Initial Invention 8 (The corresponding embodiments will be described in parentheses.)
The first solution (fourth embodiment; FIG. 57) is
A game (a game when a small winning combination B is won) having an advantageous operation mode (a correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an indication function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Of the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function activation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game can be executed,
In an advantageous section, the game has an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, and an instruction function operating game is always executed or an instruction gaming section (AT) with a high execution frequency.
Game control means (main control board 50) for controlling the start and end of the advantageous section and the start and end of the instruction game section;
The game control means
Part lottery means (61) which performs lottery of a role including a special role (BB) for shifting to a special game (BB game),
An external signal transmission means (70) and
Execute a special game based on having won the special part by the part lottery means,
The external signal transmission means
When the instruction game section is started, the first external signal (external signal 2) indicating the instruction game section is turned on, and when the instruction game section is ended, the first external signal is turned off,
When the special game is started, the second external signal (external signal 1) indicating the special game is turned on, and when the special game is ended, the second external signal is turned off,
When the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section is reached when the special game is not in progress during the instruction game section, the first external signal is turned off (example 1 in FIG. 57).
When the special role is won during the instruction game section and the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section is reached during the special game, the first external signal and the second external signal are turned off when the special game is ended (FIG. 57) Example 2)
It is characterized by

According to a second solution, in the first solution,
It has an advantageous section display (an advantageous section display LED 77) indicating that it is an advantageous section;
When the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section is reached, the display indicating the advantageous section by the advantageous section display device is ended even during the special game (example 2 in FIG. 57).
It is characterized by

(C) Effects of the First Invention 8 According to the first invention, even when the special game crosses the continuing upper limit of the advantageous section, the first external signal indicating the instructed game section can be turned off at a natural timing. .

9. Initial invention 9
(A) Problem to be Solved by Invention 9 The present invention relates to a slot machine provided with an advantageous section capable of executing an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch.
In the conventional slot machine, it is known to manage the AT with the main control board in addition to managing the AT with the sub control board (see, for example, JP-A-2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section, which is a game section capable of executing AT, and to provide an upper limit (for example, an upper limit game frequency) to the advantageous section.
Also, although an external signal indicating AT is output during AT, when AT is executed until the upper limit of the advantageous interval is reached, the problem is how to control the external signal indicating AT It becomes.
The problem to be solved by the invention at first is to appropriately control the external signal indicating the instructed game section when the instructed game section is executed until the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of Initial Invention 9 (The corresponding embodiments will be described in parentheses.)
The first invention (the fourth embodiment; FIG. 58) is
A game (a game when a small winning combination B is won) having an advantageous operation mode (a correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an indication function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Of the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function activation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game can be executed,
In an advantageous section, the game has an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, and an instruction function operating game is always executed or an instruction gaming section (AT) with a high execution frequency.
Game control means (main control board 50) for controlling the start and end of the advantageous section and the start and end of the instruction game section;
The game control means includes an external signal transmission means (70).
The external signal transmission means
When the instruction game section is started, a predetermined external signal indicating the instruction game section is turned on, and when the instruction game section is ended, the predetermined external signal is turned off,
The predetermined external signal is turned off when reaching the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section during the instruction game section.

(C) Effects of the First Invention 9 According to the first invention, it is possible to match the time when the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section is reached and the timing at which the predetermined external signal indicating the instructed game section is turned off.

10. Initial invention 10
(A) Problem to be Solved by Invention 10 Initially, the invention relates to a slot machine provided with an advantageous section capable of executing an instruction function operating game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch.
In the conventional slot machine, it is known to manage the AT with the main control board in addition to managing the AT with the sub control board (see, for example, JP-A-2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section, which is a game section capable of executing AT, and to provide an upper limit (for example, an upper limit game frequency) to the advantageous section.
In addition, although an external signal indicating AT is output during AT, the external signal, the start and end of the special game, and the reaching of the upper limit of the advantageous section are mixed, so It is necessary to make the on / off timing unnatural.
The problem to be solved by the invention at first is to prevent the unnaturalness of turning on / off of the external signal indicating the start and end of the special game, and the start and end of the special game section when the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of Initial Invention 10 (The corresponding embodiments will be described in parentheses.)
The first invention (the fourth embodiment; FIGS. 57 and 58)
A game (a game when a small winning combination B is won) having an advantageous operation mode (a correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an indication function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Of the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function activation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game can be executed,
In an advantageous section, the game has an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, and an instruction function operating game is always executed or an instruction gaming section (AT) with a high execution frequency.
Game control means (main control board 50) for controlling the start and end of the advantageous section and the start and end of the instruction game section;
The game control means
Part lottery means (61) which performs lottery of a role including a special role (BB) for shifting to a special game (BB game),
An external signal transmission means (70) and
Execute a special game based on having won the special part by the part lottery means,
The external signal transmission means
When the instruction game section is started, the predetermined external signal (external signal 2) indicating the instruction game section is turned on, and when the instruction game section is ended, the predetermined external signal is turned off (example 1 of FIG. 57) ,
When the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section is reached when the special game is not in progress during the instruction game section, the predetermined external signal is turned off (FIG. 58),
When the special role is won during the instruction game section and the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section is reached during the special game, the predetermined external signal is turned off when the special game is ended (example 2 of FIG. 57)
It is characterized by

(C) Effects of the First Invention 10 According to the first invention, the timing at which the special game ends when the reaching the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached and the timing at which the predetermined external signal indicating the instructed game section is turned off are matched. Can.

11. Original invention 11
(A) Problem to be Solved by Invention 11 Initially, the invention relates to a slot machine provided with an advantageous section capable of executing an instruction function operating game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch.
In the conventional slot machine, it is known to manage the AT with the main control board in addition to managing the AT with the sub control board (see, for example, JP-A-2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section which is a game section capable of executing AT.
When such an advantageous section is provided, it becomes a problem at what timing to start the AT and at what timing to end the AT.
The problem originally intended to be solved by the invention is to enable a wide range of gameplay design by giving characteristics to the start and end timings of the instruction game section during the advantageous section.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of Initial Invention 11 (The corresponding embodiments will be described in parentheses.)
The first invention (the fifth embodiment; FIG. 60 (a)) is
A game (a game when a small winning combination B is won) having an advantageous operation mode (a correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an indication function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Of the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function activation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game can be executed,
In an advantageous section, the game has an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, and an instruction function operating game is always executed or an instruction gaming section (AT) with a high execution frequency.
Game control means for controlling the start and end of the advantageous section and the start and end of the command game section;
The game control means is provided with a role lottery means (61) for performing a lottery of roles.
The first lottery state (for example, RT5) and the second lottery state (for example, RT2) in which the winning probability of at least one replay player combination is different are provided as the lottery state (RT) in which the lottery of roles is performed by the role lottery means.
In the advantageous section and the first lottery state, the instruction game section can be executed,
In the instruction game section and the first lottery state, when transitioning to the second lottery state due to satisfying the predetermined condition (having digested 50 games), ending both the advantageous section and the instruction game section It features.

(C) Effects of the First Invention 11 According to the first invention, it is possible to start or end an advantageous section or an instruction game section triggered by the transition of the lottery state. This enables a wide range of gameplay designs.

12. Original invention 12
(A) Problems to be solved by the first invention 12 The same as the first invention 11.
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of Initial Invention 12 (The corresponding embodiments will be described in parentheses.)
The first solving means (fifth embodiment; FIG. 61) is
A game (a game when a small winning combination B is won) having an advantageous operation mode (a correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an indication function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Of the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function activation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game can be executed,
In an advantageous section, the game has an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, and an instruction function operating game is always executed or an instruction gaming section (AT) with a high execution frequency.
Game control means (main control board 50) for controlling the start and end of the advantageous section and the start and end of the instruction game section;
The game control means includes at least a first control state (a sign, CZ, AT, etc.) and a second control state (normal) as the states controlled by the game control means.
It is possible to shift to the first control state (precursor) on condition that it is an advantageous section,
In the first control state (AT), the instruction game section is started,
When the transition condition to the second control state (normal) is satisfied in the advantageous section and the first control state (AT pullback period, CZ, CZ pullback period), the state shifts to the second control state and the advantageous section is ended. It is characterized by
According to a second solution, in the first solution,
In the first control state which is an instruction game section, when transition conditions to the second control state are satisfied, the second control state is transitioned, and both the advantageous section and the instruction game section are ended. .

(C) Effects of the First Invention 12 According to the first invention, it is possible to start or end the advantageous section or the instruction game section, triggered by the transition of the control state. This enables a wide range of gameplay designs.

13. Initial invention 13
(A) Problems to be solved by the first invention 13 The same as the first invention 11.
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the First Invention 13 (The corresponding embodiments will be described in parentheses.)
The first solution (fifth embodiment; FIGS. 60 and 61)
A game (a game when a small winning combination B is won) having an advantageous operation mode (a correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an indication function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Of the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function activation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game can be executed,
In an advantageous section, the game has an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, and an instruction function operating game is always executed or an instruction gaming section (AT) with a high execution frequency.
Game control means (main control board 50) for controlling the start and end of the advantageous section and the start and end of the instruction game section;
The gaming state (RT (lottery state), AT, CZ, precursor, normal (control state)) controlled by the game control means includes at least a first gaming state and a second gaming state.
In the first gaming state (RT5 and AT), the advantageous section is executed and the instruction game section can be started,
When the instruction game section is started in the first gaming state and the predetermined number of games have been consumed, the game mode is shifted to the second game state (RT2 and normal), and the instruction game section is ended.

According to a second solution, in the first solution,
When the predetermined number of times of gaming in the first game state instruction game zone has been digested, the second game state is entered, and both the advantageous zone and the instruction game zone are ended.

(C) Effects of the First Invention 13 According to the first invention, it is possible to start or end the instructed game section, triggered by the transition of the gaming state. This enables a wide range of gameplay designs.

14. Original invention 14
(A) Problem to be Solved by Invention 14 The first invention relates to a slot machine provided with an advantageous section capable of executing an instruction function operating game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch.
In the conventional slot machine, it is known to manage the AT with the main control board in addition to managing the AT with the sub control board (see, for example, JP-A-2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section, which is a game section capable of executing AT, and to provide an upper limit (for example, an upper limit game frequency) to the advantageous section.
However, the gaming nature of ending only when the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached is not sufficient to differentiate itself from other models.
The problem to be solved by the invention at first is to execute a game not limited to the upper limit of the advantageous section by making the advantageous section intermittently executable even if the advantageous section has an upper limit.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of Initial Invention 14 (The corresponding embodiments will be described in parentheses.)
The first solution means (sixth embodiment; FIG. 62) is
A game (a game when a small winning combination B is won) having an advantageous operation mode (a correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an indication function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Of the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function activation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game can be executed,
In an advantageous section, the game has an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, and an instruction function operating game is always executed or an instruction gaming section (AT) with a high execution frequency.
Game control means (main control board 50) for controlling the start and end of the advantageous section and the start and end of the instruction game section;
The game control means is provided with a role lottery means (61) for performing a lottery of roles.
As a lottery state in which the lottery of the role is performed by the role lottery means, a first lottery state (RT3), a second lottery state (RT6), and a third lottery state (for example, RT2) in which the winning probability of at least one replay player is different Equipped with
When a predetermined condition is satisfied before reaching the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section in the instruction game section in the first lottery state (when Replay 06 is displayed), the state shifts to the second lottery state, and the advantageous section and the instruction game section End both sides,
In the second lottery state, a normal section is started, and it is determined whether or not to shift to an advantageous section (a lottery of "1/32" is executed),
In the normal section of the second lottery state, when a specific condition for transitioning to the advantageous section is satisfied (when the lottery of “1/32” is won), the transition is made to the advantageous section and the transition to the advantageous section Enable to start the instruction game section based on
In the normal section of the third lottery state, when the specific condition is satisfied, the transition to the advantageous section is made, but the command game section is not started based on the transition to the advantageous section.

The second solution (sixth embodiment; FIG. 62) is
A game (a game when a small winning combination B is won) having an advantageous operation mode (a correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an indication function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Of the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function activation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game can be executed,
In an advantageous section, the game has an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, and an instruction function operating game is always executed or an instruction gaming section (AT) with a high execution frequency.
Game control means (main control board 50) for controlling the start and end of the advantageous section and the start and end of the instruction game section;
The game control means is provided with a role lottery means (61) for performing a lottery of roles.
As a lottery state in which a lottery of a role is performed by the role lottery means, a first lottery state (RT3), a second lottery state (RT6), and a third lottery state (non-RT) with different winning probabilities of at least one replay player Equipped with
When a predetermined condition is satisfied before reaching the continuation upper limit of the advantageous section in the instruction game section in the first lottery state (when Replay 06 is displayed), the state shifts to the second lottery state, and the advantageous section and the instruction game section End both sides,
In the second lottery state, a normal section is started, and it is determined whether or not to shift to an advantageous section (a lottery of "1/32" is executed),
In the second lottery state, when the end condition of the second lottery state is satisfied (when 50 games are digested), the third lottery state is entered,
There is a case of transitioning to the third lottery state without passing through the second lottery state,
In the normal section of the third lottery state that has shifted without passing through the second lottery state, it is determined whether or not to shift to the advantageous section,
If it is decided to shift to the advantageous section in the second lottery state, then the instruction game section can be started,
When it is decided to shift to the advantageous section without passing through the second lottery state, the command game section is not started.

(C) Effects of the First Invention 14 According to the first invention, the command game section in the first lottery state is shifted to the second lottery state to end the advantageous section and the command game section, and thereafter, it is shifted to the advantageous section again. Since it is possible to start the instruction game section, it is possible to execute a game not bound by the upper limit of the advantageous section.
In addition, by adding a condition under which the instruction game section can be started (in the first solution means, the specific condition is satisfied in the second lottery state, and in the second solution means, the second lottery state is passed). It can be suppressed that the instruction game section becomes easy to be executed more than necessary.

15. Initial invention 15
(A) Problem to be Solved by Invention 15 Initially, the invention relates to a slot machine provided with an advantageous section capable of executing an instruction function operating game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch.
In the conventional slot machine, it is known to manage the AT with the main control board in addition to managing the AT with the sub control board (see, for example, JP-A-2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section which is a game section capable of executing AT. It has also been proposed to indicate to the player that it is an advantageous section during the advantageous section. Here, it is conceivable to provide a case where the advantageous section is started based on the winning of the special part. In this case, it is desirable not to reduce the expectation of the player even during the special game.
The problem to be solved by the invention at first is to make it possible to keep giving a sense of expectation to the player even during the special game.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the First Invention 15 (The corresponding embodiments will be described in parentheses.)
The first solution (eighth embodiment; FIGS. 64 and 65)
A game (a game when a small winning combination B is won) having an advantageous operation mode (a correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an indication function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Of the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function activation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game can be executed,
Advantage section display means (advantage section display LED 77) for displaying that it is an advantageous section;
A unit (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13 or the like) for determining any one of a plurality of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6);
Part lottery means (61) which performs lottery of part,
A presentation control unit (sub control board 80) for controlling the output of the presentation;
The role lottery means performs a lottery of roles so as to have a case of winning a special role (1BBA) for shifting to a special game (1BBA game),
The winning probability of the special part is the same for all set values,
It is possible to start an advantageous section based on winning the special role,
Win special role, transition to special game based on the stop of the combination of symbols corresponding to the special role,
An advantageous section started on the basis of winning the special role ends when the special game ends (example 1 or example 2 in FIG. 64) and continues after the special game ends (FIG. 65) Example 3) and
The effect control means is capable of outputting a continuous effect for a plurality of games in connection with the continuation of the advantageous section during the special game.

According to a second solution, in the first solution,
The continuous effect is an effect indicating whether or not the advantageous section continues even after the end of the special game.

(C) Effects of the First Invention 15 According to the first invention, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation whether or not the advantageous section will continue until the end of the special game.

16. Original invention 16
(A) Problem to be Solved by Invention 16 The first invention relates to a slot machine provided with an advantageous section capable of executing an instruction function operating game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch.
In the conventional slot machine, it is known to manage the AT with the main control board in addition to managing the AT with the sub control board (see, for example, JP-A-2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section which is a game section capable of executing AT. It has also been proposed to indicate to the player that it is an advantageous section during the advantageous section. Here, it is conceivable to provide a case where the advantageous section is started based on the winning of the special part. In this case, it is desirable not to reduce the expectation of the player even after the end of the special game.
The problem to be solved by the invention at first is to make it possible to keep giving a sense of expectation to the player even after the end of the special game.
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the First Invention 16 (The corresponding embodiments will be described in parentheses.)
The first solution (eighth embodiment; FIG. 66) is
A game (a game when a small winning combination B is won) having an advantageous operation mode (a correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an indication function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Of the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function activation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game can be executed,
Advantage section display means (advantage section display LED 77) for displaying that it is an advantageous section;
A unit (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13 or the like) for determining any one of a plurality of setting values;
Part lottery means (61) which performs lottery of part,
A presentation control unit (sub control board 80) for controlling the output of the presentation;
The role lottery means performs a lottery of roles so as to have a case of winning a special role (1BBA) for shifting to a special game (1BBA game),
The winning probability of the special part is the same for all set values,
It is possible to start an advantageous section based on winning the special role,
Win special role, transition to special game based on the stop of the combination of symbols corresponding to the special role,
The advantageous section started based on winning the special role is ended when the predetermined number of games (5 games) end after the end of the special game (example 4) and when continuing beyond the predetermined number of games (example) 5) and
The effect control means is capable of outputting a predetermined effect relating to continuation of the advantageous section in at least a part of the predetermined number of games after the end of the special game.

According to a second solution, in the first solution,
The predetermined effect is an effect that indicates whether or not the advantageous section continues even if the predetermined number of games is exceeded after the end of the special game.

(C) Effects of the First Invention 16 According to the first invention, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation whether the advantageous section continues even after the end of the special game.

17. Original invention 17
(A) Problem to be Solved by Invention 17 The first invention relates to a slot machine provided with an advantageous section capable of executing an instruction function operating game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch.
In the conventional slot machine, it is known to manage the AT with the main control board in addition to managing the AT with the sub control board (see, for example, JP-A-2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section in which an instruction function operating game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch can be performed. Here, it is conceivable to shift to the advantageous section based on the winning of the special part. In this case, the player's skill can not be exhibited only by starting the advantageous section uniformly based on the winning of the special part.
The problem to be solved by the invention is to make the profit on the advantageous section differ depending on the skill of the player when transitioning to the advantageous section based on the winning of the special character.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of Initial Invention 17 (The corresponding embodiments will be described in parentheses.)
The first invention (the ninth embodiment (FIG. 67)) is
A game (a game when a small winning combination B is won) having an advantageous operation mode (a correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an indication function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Of the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function activation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game can be executed,
A unit (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13 or the like) for determining any one of a plurality of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6);
Role lottery means (61) for performing a lottery of roles, and
The role lottery means performs a lottery of roles so as to have a case of being a specific winning (1BBA + small role E1),
The specific winning is a special winning including the special role (1BBA) carrying over the winning to the next game until the combination of the symbols is stopped, and the predetermined role (small playing E1) not to carry the win to the next game,
The winning probability of a specific winning is the same for all set values,
In the case where it is decided to shift to the advantageous section in the game ("N" game eyes) that became the specific winning, and the combination of the symbols corresponding to the special part is not stopped and the special part is carried over to the next game. The game is characterized in that the advantageous section is started from a game ("N + 2" game eyes) in which the combination of symbols corresponding to the special part carrying over the winning has become stoppable.

(C) Effects of the First Invention 17 According to the first invention, according to the first invention, it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, and in the first game in which the combination of the symbols corresponding to the special character becomes stopable, the symbols corresponding to the special character It is possible to make a difference in the profit obtained in the advantageous section between the player who has stopped the combination and the player who can not stop the combination. Thereby, the profit obtained on the advantageous section can be made different depending on the skill of the player.

18. Original invention 18
(A) Problem to be Solved by Invention 18 Initially, the invention relates to a slot machine provided with an advantageous section capable of executing an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch.
In the conventional slot machine, it is known to manage the AT with the main control board in addition to managing the AT with the sub control board (see, for example, JP-A-2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section which is a game section capable of executing AT. Here, although it is possible to execute AT addition based on the winning of the special part having no setting difference, it is conceivable that AT addition can not be performed based on the winning of the special part having the setting difference. ing.
However, in this case, there is a problem that it is not possible to give the player the expectation of the addition of the AT when the special part with the setting difference is won during the AT.
The problem to be solved by the invention at first is to make it possible to add an instruction game section (AT) even when a special combination with a set difference is won.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the First Invention 18 (The corresponding embodiments will be described in parentheses.)
The first invention (the tenth embodiment (FIG. 22)) is
A game (a game when a small winning combination B is won) having an advantageous operation mode (a correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an indication function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Of the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function activation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game can be executed,
In an advantageous section, a command game section (AT) which always executes an instruction function operation game or increases the execution frequency in a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch.
A unit (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13 or the like) for determining any one of a plurality of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6);
Role lottery means (61) for performing a lottery of roles, and
The role lottery means performs a lottery of roles so as to have a winning case of a special role (for example, 1BBA) for shifting to a special game (for example, 1BBA game),
Win special role, transition to special game based on the stop of the combination of symbols corresponding to the special role,
The first lottery state (RT2) and the second lottery state (RT3) having different winning probabilities of at least one replay player as lottery states in which the lottery of the roles is performed by the role lottery means,
After the end of the special game, in order to shift to the second lottery state, it is necessary to go through the first lottery state,
When transitioning to the special game based on winning the special part during the instruction game section, after the end of the special game, the instruction game section can be extended based on the transition from the first lottery state to the second lottery state age,
When transitioning from the first lottery state to the second lottery state without transitioning to the special game during the instruction game section, the instruction game section is not extended based on that.

(C) Effects of the First Invention 18 According to the first invention, the instruction game section can be extended when transitioning from the first lottery state to the second lottery state on condition that the special game is performed. . As a result, regardless of whether or not the winning special part has a setting difference, it is possible to extend the instructed game section after the end of the special game. Furthermore, it is possible to set the instruction game section not to be extended only by shifting from the first lottery state to the second lottery state without going through the special game.

19. First invention 19
(A) Problem to be Solved by Invention 19 Initially, the invention relates to a slot machine provided with an advantageous section capable of executing an instruction function operating game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch.
In the conventional slot machine, it is known to manage the AT with the main control board in addition to managing the AT with the sub control board (see, for example, JP-A-2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section in which an instruction function operating game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch can be performed. Here, it is desired to provide new playability using the instruction function operation game.
The problem that the invention is originally intended to solve is to provide new playability using an instruction function operation game.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the First Invention 19 (The corresponding embodiments will be described in parentheses.)
The first solution (the eleventh embodiment; FIG. 68) is
A game (a game when a small winning combination B is won) having an advantageous operation mode (a correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an indication function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Of the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function activation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game can be executed,
In an advantageous section, a command game section (AT) which always executes an instruction function operation game or increases the execution frequency in a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch.
A unit (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13 or the like) for determining any one of a plurality of setting values;
Part lottery means (61) which performs lottery of part,
A presentation control unit (sub control board 80) for controlling the output of the presentation;
The role lottery means performs a lottery of roles so as to have a case of winning a predetermined role (small role E1),
The winning probability of the predetermined part is the same for all set values,
When a predetermined combination is won in the combination drawing by the combination drawing means, the next game is transferred to the advantageous section,
The advantageous section to shift based on the winning of the predetermined part is
A first advantageous section (Example 1 in FIG. 68) in which at least one command function operation game is executed but the command game section is not executed;
Having a second advantageous section (example 2 in FIG. 68) for executing the instruction game section;
The effect control means is characterized in that continuous effect is output in an advantageous section shifted based on the winning of a predetermined combination.

According to a second solution, in the first solution,
The effect control means is characterized in that the continuous effect is started after one instruction function operation game is executed.
According to a third solution, in the first or second solution,
The continuous rendition is a rendition that indicates whether it is a first advantageous section or a second advantageous section.

(C) Effects of the First Invention 19 According to the first invention, even when shifting to the advantageous section, the case where the instruction game section is executed and the case where the instruction function operation game is executed at least once but the instruction game section is not executed As a result, it is possible to give the player a sense of expectation even after shifting to the advantageous section. As a result, it is possible to keep the game characteristic of transitioning to / without transitioning to the advantageous section.

20. Initial invention 20
(A) Problem to be Solved by Invention 20 The present invention relates to a slot machine provided with an advantageous section capable of executing an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch.
In the conventional slot machine, it is known to manage the AT with the main control board in addition to managing the AT with the sub control board (see, for example, JP-A-2014-161344).
Recently, it has been considered to provide an advantageous section in which an instruction function operating game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch can be performed. Here, it is conceivable to set an upper limit to the advantageous section. On the other hand, it is also conceivable that the condition device (role) having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch is not won even after shifting to the advantageous section.
The problem to be solved by the invention at first is to balance the termination condition (including the upper limit) of the advantageous section with the execution of the instruction function activation game.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the First Invention 20 (The corresponding embodiments will be described in parentheses.)
The first invention (the eleventh embodiment; FIG. 69) is
A game (a game when a small winning combination B is won) having an advantageous operation mode (a correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an indication function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Of the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function activation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game can be executed,
A unit (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13 or the like) for determining any one of a plurality of setting values;
Role lottery means (61) for performing a lottery of roles, and
The role lottery means performs a lottery of roles so as to have a case of winning a predetermined role (small role E1),
The winning probability of the predetermined part is the same for all set values,
When the player wins the predetermined combination in the combination drawing by the combination drawing means, the game may shift to the advantageous section from the next game,
When the predetermined end condition of the advantageous section is reached in the advantageous section, the advantageous section is ended,
When the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached in the advantageous section, the advantageous section is ended,
In the advantageous section, when there is no game having the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch until reaching the predetermined end condition, the advantageous section is ended until at least one indication function operation game is executed. If you have not played a game with the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch before reaching the upper limit of the advantageous section, although it is not allowed (Example 3 in FIG. 69), it is advantageous without executing the instruction function activation game End the section (Example 4 in FIG. 69)
It is characterized by

(C) Effects of the First Invention 20 According to the first invention, in the advantageous section, “perform at least one command function operation game” and “end the advantageous section when the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached”. You can balance it with things.

21. Initial invention 21
(A) Problem to be Solved by Invention 21 Initially, the invention relates to a slot machine provided with an advantageous section capable of executing an instruction function operating game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch.
In the conventional slot machine, it is known to manage the AT with the main control board in addition to managing the AT with the sub control board (see, for example, JP-A-2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section in which an instruction function operating game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch can be performed. Here, it is conceivable to set an upper limit to the advantageous section. Furthermore, it is possible to win a special part during the advantageous section and shift to a special game. In this case, when the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached during the execution of the special game, the advantageous section ends at that point, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.
The problem to be solved by the invention at first is to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable when the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached during the execution of the special game.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the First Invention 21 (Here, the corresponding embodiments will be described in parentheses.)
The first invention (12th embodiment; FIG. 70) is
A game (a game when a small winning combination B is won) having an advantageous operation mode (a correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an indication function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Of the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function activation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game can be executed,
A unit (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13 or the like) for determining any one of a plurality of setting values;
Part lottery means (61) which performs lottery of part,
A presentation control unit (sub control board 80) for controlling the output of the presentation;
The role lottery means performs a lottery of roles so as to have a winning case of a special role (for example, 1BBA) for shifting to a special game (for example, 1BBA game),
The effect control means is
When a predetermined condition is satisfied in the advantageous section (for example, when approaching the upper limit of the advantageous section), a specific effect (ending effect) is started,
When the upper limit (1500 games) of the advantageous section is reached during the output of the specific effect, the advantageous section is ended and the specific effect is ended,
Even when the special role is won during the output of the specific effect, and it is shifted to the special game, the specific effect is continued,
When the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached during the special game and the output of the specific effect, the advantageous section is ended, but the specific effect is continued until the special game is ended.

(C) Effects of the First Invention 21 According to the first invention, when the upper limit of the advantageous section is reached during the special game, the advantageous section is ended, but the signal is output during the advantageous section until the special game is ended. Continue specific effects. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the specific effect in the advantageous section from ending suddenly in the middle of the special game, and to make the player feel uncomfortable.

22. Original invention 22
(A) Problem to be Solved by the First Invention 22 The first invention relates to a slot machine provided with a plurality of lottery states in which the winning probability of at least one replay player is different.
In the conventional slot machine, it is known to manage the AT with the main control board in addition to managing the AT with the sub control board (see, for example, JP-A-2014-161344).
Further, for example, a slot machine is known which shifts RT (lottery state) in order to execute an AT.
In the prior art, it is known that RT transition is performed, for example, by winning a specific condition device and stopping a specific symbol combination. However, there is a problem that RT's ease of transition may differ depending on the set value.
The problem to be solved by the invention at the outset is to make RT's ease of transition insensitive to the set value.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the First Invention 22 (The corresponding embodiments will be described in parentheses.)
The first solving means (13th embodiment; FIG. 71) is
A unit (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13 or the like) for determining any one of a plurality of setting values (setting 1 to setting 6);
Role lottery means (61) for performing a lottery of roles, and
As the lottery state in which the lottery of the role is performed by the role lottery means, the first lottery state (RT2), the second lottery state (RT3), and the third lottery state (RT4) in which the winning probability of at least one replay player is different Equipped
In the first lottery state, the role lottery means performs a lottery of roles so as to have a case where a specific combination (Replay B group) is won.
When the specific winning combination is won in the first lottery state and the predetermined symbol combination is stopped, the second lottery state is entered,
The winning probability of the specific part in the first lottery state is the same for all set values,
The role lottery means performs a lottery of roles so as to have a winning case of a special role (for example, 1 BBB) for shifting to a special game (for example, 1 BBB game),
When the special winning combination is won in any of the drawing states, and the combination of symbols corresponding to the special drawing is not stopped, the third drawing state is entered,
The winning probability of the special part is characterized by being different according to the set value.

According to a second solution, in the first solution,
A game (a game when a small winning combination B is won) having an advantageous operation mode (a correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an indication function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Of the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function activation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game can be executed,
In an advantageous section, a command having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch always performs an instruction function operation game or an instruction game section (AT) in which the execution frequency is increased;
The instruction game section can be executed at least in the second lottery state,
When you win the special part during the instruction game section, it is necessary to go through the first lottery state to shift to the second lottery state after the end of the special game,
After the end of the special game, the command game section can be extended based on the transition from the first lottery state to the second lottery state.

According to a third solution, in the first or second solution,
The instruction game section is executable in the third lottery state,
When the instruction game section and the third lottery state are established, the instruction game section is not extended.

(C) Effects of the First Invention 22 According to the first invention, the winning probability of the specific combination that triggers the transition from the first lottery state to the second lottery state is the same for all set values, so from the first lottery state The ease of transition to the second lottery state can be prevented from being affected by the set value.

23. Initial invention 23
(A) Problems to be solved by the first invention 23 The same as the first invention 22.
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of Initial Invention 23 (The corresponding embodiments will be described in parentheses.)
The first invention (13th embodiment; FIG. 71) is
A game (a game when a small winning combination B is won) having an advantageous operation mode (a correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an indication function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Of the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function activation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which an instruction function operation game can be executed,
In an advantageous section, a command game section (AT) which always executes an instruction function operation game or increases the execution frequency in a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch.
A unit (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13 or the like) for determining any one of a plurality of setting values;
Role lottery means (61) for performing a lottery of roles, and
The first lottery state (RT2) and the second lottery state (RT3) having different winning probabilities of at least one replay player as lottery states in which the lottery of the roles is performed by the role lottery means,
The instruction game section can be executed at least in the second lottery state,
The role lottery means performs a lottery of roles so as to have a case where a specific replay player (Replay C group) is elected in the second lottery state,
In the second lottery state, when a specific replay player combination is won and the combination of predetermined symbols is stopped, the first lottery state is entered,
The winning probability of a specific replay player in the second lottery state is the same for all set values,
In the second lottery state, the role lottery means performs a lottery so as to have a case where a predetermined replay player combination (Replay A) is won.
Even if the player wins the predetermined replay player in the second lottery state and stops the combination of symbols corresponding to the predetermined replay player, it does not shift to the first lottery state.
The winning probability of the predetermined re-play combination in the second lottery state is characterized by being different according to the set value.

(C) Effects of the First Invention 23 According to the first invention, since the winning probability of a specific replay player who triggers the transition of the lottery state is the same for all set values, the ease of transition of the lottery state is the set value It is possible not to be affected by the Furthermore, in the second lottery state, the winning probability of a predetermined replay player who does not become a transition trigger of the lottery state is made different according to the set value, so for example, the higher the setting, the higher the payout rate in the instruction game section can do.

24. Original invention 24
(A) Problem to be solved by the first invention 24 The same as the first invention 22.
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the First Invention 24 (The corresponding embodiments will be described in parentheses.)
The first solving means (13th embodiment; FIG. 71) is
Part lottery means (61) which performs lottery of part,
Means for determining one of the plurality of setting values (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13 etc.),
The first lottery state (RT1) and the second lottery state (RT2) having different winning probabilities of at least one replay player are provided as lottery states in which the lottery of the roles is performed by the role lottery means,
In the first lottery state, when the predetermined condition is satisfied, the second lottery state is entered,
In the first lottery state, the combination lottery means performs a combination lottery so that the first combination (small combination B group) having the possibility of satisfying the predetermined condition is won.
The winning probability of the first combination in the first lottery state is the same for all set values,
In the first lottery state, the combination lottery means performs a combination lottery so as to have a case of winning of a second combination (small combination D) having no possibility of satisfying the predetermined condition,
The winning probability of the second part in the first lottery state differs depending on the set value,
In the first lottery state, the combination lottery means performs a combination lottery so as to have a case where a third combination (small combination E1) having no possibility of satisfying the predetermined condition is won,
The winning probability of the third part in the first lottery state is the same for all set values,
The maximum payout when the combination of symbols corresponding to the first combination is stopped D1 (9 sheets), the maximum payout when the combination of symbols corresponding to the second combination is stopped D2 (15 sheets), the third combination When the maximum payout when the combination of the corresponding symbols is stopped is D3 (two pieces),
D2>D1> D3
Meet the requirements.

According to a second solution, in the first solution,
A game (a game when a small winning combination B is won) having an advantageous operation mode (a correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an indication function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Of the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function activation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section capable of executing an instruction function operation game, and
When winning the third part in the lottery of the part by the part lottery means during the normal section, it is characterized in that there is a possibility of transition to the advantageous section.

(C) Effects of the First Invention 24 According to the first invention, since the winning probability of the first combination having the possibility of shifting to the second lottery state in the first lottery state is made equal to all set values, the first lottery state It is possible to make it easy to shift from the second to the second lottery state not to be affected by the set value.
Furthermore, since the winning probability of the second combination with the largest payout is made to differ according to the set value, the payout rate can be largely changed according to the set value.

25. Original invention 25
(A) Problem to be Solved by Invention 25 Initially, the invention relates to a slot machine provided with an advantageous section capable of executing an instruction function operating game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch.
In the conventional slot machine, it is known to manage the AT with the main control board in addition to managing the AT with the sub control board (see, for example, JP-A-2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section in which an instruction function operating game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch can be performed. Here, after starting the advantageous section, it is conceivable to change the ending condition of the advantageous section. In addition, in the advantageous section, it is considered that it is necessary to execute at least one pointing function activation game.
The problem to be solved by the invention at first is to make it possible to end the advantageous section at the intended timing while making it possible to change the ending condition of the advantageous section.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of Initial Invention 25 (The corresponding embodiments will be described in parentheses.)
The first invention (14th embodiment; FIG. 72) is
A game (a game when a small winning combination B is won) having an advantageous operation mode (a correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an indication function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Of the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function activation game is not executed,
And an advantageous section in which it is necessary to execute at least one instruction function activation game among the game sections.
When the transition conditions to the advantageous section are satisfied in the normal section, the process shifts to the advantageous section,
When a predetermined condition (extension condition of the advantageous section) is satisfied during the advantageous section, change the ending condition (30 games) of the advantageous section up to that time (add 50 games),
In the advantageous section, after executing the at least one command function operation game, when changing the termination condition of the advantageous section based on satisfying the predetermined condition, the command function operation game is changed after the termination condition is changed 1 It is possible to end the advantageous section without executing it repeatedly (example 1 in FIG. 72),
After changing to the advantageous section, if you change the ending condition of the advantageous section based on that the predetermined condition is satisfied before executing the first indication function operation game, at least one time after changing the ending condition If the instruction function operation game is not executed, the advantageous section can not be ended even if the ending condition is satisfied (example 2 in FIG. 72).
It is characterized by

(C) Effects of the First Invention 25 According to the first invention, since it is possible to change the ending condition of the advantageous section up to that point after starting the advantageous section, the advantageous section does not fix the ending condition of the advantageous section. Can not be monotonous. In addition, while making it possible to change the ending condition of the advantageous section, at the timing that the advantageous section intended because the instruction function activation game has not been executed even once even though the ending condition of the advantageous section is satisfied. It can suppress that it can not finish.

26. Original invention 26
(A) Problem to be Solved by the First Invention 26 The first invention relates to a slot machine provided with an advantageous section capable of executing an instruction function operating game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch.
In the conventional slot machine, it is known to manage the AT with the main control board in addition to managing the AT with the sub control board (see, for example, JP-A-2014-161344).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section in which an instruction function operating game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch can be performed. Here, it is conceivable to execute freezing at the end of the advantageous section. However, if the freeze is uniformly executed even when the advantageous section ends without giving a sufficient profit to the player, the player may be uncomfortable.
The problem to be solved by the present invention is to properly execute freezing at the end of the advantageous section.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of Initial Invention 26 (The corresponding embodiments will be described in parentheses.)
The first solving means (fifteenth embodiment; FIG. 73) is
A game (a game when a small winning combination B is won) having an advantageous operation mode (a correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42),
In a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, an indication function operation game for operating an instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode;
Of the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function activation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section capable of executing an instruction function operation game, and
When the transition conditions to the advantageous section are satisfied in the normal section, the process shifts to the advantageous section,
At least two types of first end conditions and second end conditions as end conditions of the advantageous section,
The advantageous section of the first ending condition has a larger expected value of the profit obtained during the advantageous section than the advantageous section of the second ending condition,
It has freeze control means to control freeze which temporarily stops the progress of the game,
The freeze control means does not execute freezing when ending the advantageous section under the second termination condition (termination condition of CZ), and freezes when terminating the advantageous section under the first termination condition (termination condition of AT). It is characterized by performing.

According to a second solution, in the first solution,
During the freezing, it is characterized in that a display is made on the profit obtained during the advantageous section.

(C) Effects of the First Invention 26 According to the first invention, when freeze is performed according to the expected value of the profit obtained during the advantageous section (when the expected value of the profit obtained during the advantageous section is large), By setting the case where freezing is not performed (when the expected value of the profit obtained during the advantageous interval is small), the freezing can be appropriately performed at the end of the advantageous interval.

27. Initial invention 27
(A) Problem to be Solved by the Invention 27 The invention originally comprises an advantageous section capable of executing an instruction function operating game for operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, and shifts to this advantageous section The present invention relates to a slot machine that determines the effect on the main control board side.
In the conventional slot machine, a slot machine is known which performs lottery of a role on the main control board side and determines whether or not an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch is to be displayed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-150881) No. 2).
Here, if it is decided on the main control board side whether or not the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch is to be displayed, data and programs for performing processing concerning this decision become necessary, and accordingly, the memory on the main control board side Requires capacity.
On the other hand, the memory capacity on the main control board side has certain limitations.
The problem originally intended to be solved by the invention is to provide an advantageous section capable of executing an instruction function operation game for operating an instruction function to display an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, and to shift to this advantageous section to the main control board side In the slot machine determined by the above, it is necessary to appropriately perform processing regarding determination of transition to the advantageous section within a fixed memory capacity range.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of Initial Invention 27 (The corresponding embodiments will be described in parentheses.)
The first solution (sixteenth embodiment; FIG. 89) is
A game having an advantageous operation mode (a correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (for example, a game when winning a small winning combination B group),
In the game having the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, the instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode is activated (the push number indication LED 78 is displayed on the winning number display LED 78).
Among the game sections, a normal section in which the indication function activation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the indication function activation game can be executed,
And a winning number determination means (internal lottery 1 in FIG. 87 and lottery determination in FIG. 88) for determining a winning number based on a random number value.
As a winning number, it has a specific winning number (for example, "44") indicating that it will be a specific winning (for example, a double winning of 1BBA and a small winning combination D) and a transition to an advantage section.
It has a predetermined storage means (storage area “_NB_CND_AT” of RWM 53) capable of storing information on transition to the advantageous section,
When a value other than a predetermined value (“0”) is stored in the predetermined storage means when the winning number determined by the winning number determination means is a specific winning number, it is stored in the predetermined storage means (Step S1044 is skipped when "No" in step S1044 in FIG. 89), and
When the predetermined number is stored in the predetermined storage unit when the winning number determined by the winning number determination unit is the specific winning number, the value stored in the predetermined storage unit can be updated. (If “Yes” in step S1044 of FIG. 89, the process proceeds to the next step S1045, and data corresponding to the address indicated by the HL register is stored in the storage area “_NB_CND_AT” of the RWM 53)
It is characterized by

According to a second solution, in the first solution,
It is equipped with a specific storage means (storage area “_NB_CND_BNS” of RWM 53) capable of storing winning information of special role,
When the winning number determined by the winning number determining means is a specific winning number, when a value other than the specific value (“0”) is stored in the specific storing means, the predetermined storing means has a predetermined value Even if is stored, the value stored in the predetermined storage unit is maintained (when "No" in step S1043 of FIG. 89, steps S1044 to S1046 are skipped, so the value of "_NB_CND_AT" is " Even if it is "0", the value of "_NB_CND_AT" will be maintained.)
It is characterized by

(C) Effects of the First Invention 27 According to the first invention, when the winning number is determined as the specific winning number, when a value other than the predetermined value is stored in the predetermined storage means, the value is maintained, When the predetermined value is stored, the value can be updated.
As a result, the winning number can be determined by the same process regardless of whether or not it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, so that the advantageous section is shifted to within the certain memory capacity range. It is possible to properly process the decision.

28. Original invention 28
(A) Problems to be solved by the first invention 28 The same as the first invention 27.
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of Initial Invention 28 (The corresponding embodiments will be described in parentheses.)
The first solution (sixteenth embodiment; FIG. 89) is
A game having an advantageous operation mode (a correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (for example, a game when winning a small winning combination B group),
In the game having the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, the instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode is activated (the push number indication LED 78 is displayed on the winning number display LED 78).
Among the game sections, a normal section in which the indication function activation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the indication function activation game can be executed,
And a winning number determination means (internal lottery 1 in FIG. 87 and lottery determination in FIG. 88) for determining a winning number based on a random number value.
As a winning number, it has a specific winning number (for example, "44") indicating that it will be a specific winning (for example, a double winning of 1BBA and a small winning combination D) and a transition to an advantage section.
First storage means (storage area “_NB_CND_AT” of RWM 53) capable of storing information on transition to the advantageous section;
And a second storage unit (storage area “_NB_CND_BNS” of the RWM 53) capable of storing the winning combination information of the special part, and
When a value other than the predetermined value (“0”) is stored in the second storage unit when the winning number determined by the winning number determination unit is the specific winning number, it is stored in the first storage unit. (If "No" in step S1043 of FIG. 89, the value of "_NB_CND_AT" is maintained by skipping steps S1044 to S1046),
When the predetermined number is stored in the second storage unit when the winning number determined by the winning number determination unit is the specific winning number, the value stored in the first storage unit can be updated. (If “Yes” in step S1043 in FIG. 89, the process proceeds to step S1044, and if “Yes” at this time, the process proceeds to step S1045, and the value of “_NB_CND_AT” can be updated.)
It is characterized by

According to a second solution, in the first solution,
In the case where the winning number determined by the winning number determining means is the specific winning number, when a value other than the specific value ("0") is stored in the first storage means, the predetermined value is stored in the second storage means. Even if is stored, the value stored in the first storage unit is maintained ("Yes" in step S1043 of FIG. 89, and even if the process proceeds to step S1044, if "No" in step S1044, (Which will keep the value of "_NB_CND_AT")
It is characterized by

(C) Effects of the First Invention 28 According to the first invention, when the winning number is determined to be the specific winning number, when a value other than the predetermined value is stored in the second storage unit, the first storage unit is stored. The stored value is maintained, and when the predetermined value is stored in the second storage unit, the value stored in the first storage unit can be updated.
As a result, the winning number can be determined by the same process regardless of whether or not the special role is won and whether it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, so that a fixed memory capacity can be obtained. Within the range, it is possible to appropriately perform processing regarding the decision to shift to the advantageous section.

29. Original invention 29
(A) Problems to be solved by the first invention 29 The same as the first invention 27.
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of Initial Invention 29 (The corresponding embodiments will be described in parentheses.)
The first solution (sixteenth embodiment; FIG. 89) is
A game having an advantageous operation mode (a correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (for example, a game when winning a small winning combination B group),
In the game having the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, the instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode is activated (the push number indication LED 78 is displayed on the winning number display LED 78).
Among the game sections, a normal section in which the indication function activation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the indication function activation game can be executed,
And a winning number determination means (internal lottery 1 in FIG. 87 and lottery determination in FIG. 88) for determining a winning number based on a random number value.
As a winning number, it has a specific winning number (for example, "43") indicating that it will win a special role (for example, 1BBA) and that it shifts to an advantageous section,
First storage means (storage area “_NB_CND_AT” of RWM 53) capable of storing information on transition to the advantageous section;
And a second storage unit (storage area “_NB_CND_BNS” of the RWM 53) capable of storing the winning combination information of the special part, and
When the winning number determined by the winning number determining means is the specific winning number, the information stored in the first storage means may be updated based on the information stored in the second storage means (If “Yes” in step S1043 in FIG. 89, and “Yes” in step S1044, the process advances to step S1045, and the value of “_NB_CND_AT” is updated),
After executing the process related to the update of the information stored in the first storage unit, the information stored in the second storage unit is updated (after the value of “_NB_CND_AT” is updated in step S1045, “in step S1046 Update the value of _NB_CND_BNS)
It is characterized by

The second solution (sixteenth embodiment; FIG. 89) is
A game having an advantageous operation mode (a correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (for example, a game when winning a small winning combination B group),
In the game having the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, the instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode is activated (the push number indication LED 78 is displayed on the winning number display LED 78).
Among the game sections, a normal section in which the indication function activation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the indication function activation game can be executed,
And a winning number determination means (internal lottery 1 in FIG. 87 and lottery determination in FIG. 88) for determining a winning number based on a random number value.
As a winning number, it has a specific winning number (for example, "44") indicating that it will be a specific winning (for example, a double winning of 1BBA and a small winning combination D) and a transition to an advantage section.
The specific winning is a double winning including a special role (for example, 1BBA) and a specific role (for example, small role D),
First storage means (storage area “_NB_CND_AT” of RWM 53) capable of storing information on transition to the advantageous section;
Second storage means (storage area “_NB_CND_BNS” of RWM 53) capable of storing the winning combination information of the special part;
And third storage means (storage area “_NB_CND_NOR” of RWM 53) capable of storing the winning information of the specific part.
When the winning number determined by the winning number determining means is the specific winning number, the information stored in the first storage means may be updated based on the information stored in the second storage means (If “Yes” in step S1043 in FIG. 89, and “Yes” in step S1044, the process advances to step S1045, and the value of “_NB_CND_AT” is updated),
After executing the processing related to the update of the information stored in the first storage unit, the information stored in the second storage unit and the third storage unit is updated (after the value of “_NB_CND_AT” is updated in step S1045) At step S1046, the value of "_NB_CND_BNS" is updated, and at step S1047, the value of "_NB_CND_NOR" is updated.
It is characterized by

(C) Effects of the First Invention 29 According to the first invention, when the winning number is determined to be the specific winning number, it is stored in the first storage means based on the information stored in the second storage means. A process regarding updating of information is performed, and thereafter, the information stored in the second storage unit is updated.
Thus, regardless of whether or not the special winning combination is made and whether or not it is determined to shift to the advantageous section, the winning number can be determined in the same process.
In addition, even without having a flag indicating whether or not carry over special character winning information, it is possible to determine whether the special role is won in the current game or whether it has been won before the previous game.
Therefore, it is possible to appropriately perform processing regarding the decision to shift to the advantageous section within the fixed memory capacity range.

30. Initial invention 30
(A) Problem to be solved by the first invention 30 The same as the first invention 27.
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the First Invention 30 (The corresponding embodiments will be described in parentheses.)
The first solution (Modification of the sixteenth embodiment; FIG. 92) is
A game having an advantageous operation mode (a correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (for example, a game when winning a small winning combination B group),
In the game having the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, the instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode is activated (the push number indication LED 78 is displayed on the winning number display LED 78).
Among the game sections, a normal section in which the indication function activation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the indication function activation game can be executed,
And a winning number determination means (internal lottery 1 in FIG. 87 and lottery determination in FIG. 88) for determining a winning number based on a random number value.
As a winning number, it has a specific winning number (for example, "43") indicating that it will win a special role (for example, 1BBA) and that it shifts to an advantageous section,
If you win the special role, carry over the winning information of the special role until the combination of the symbols corresponding to the special role is stopped,
First storage means (storage area “_NB_CND_AT” of RWM 53) capable of storing information on transition to the advantageous section;
Second storage means (storage area “_NB_CND_BNS” of RWM 53) capable of storing the winning combination information of the special part;
And a third storage unit (storage area "_FL_PRD_LOT" of the RWM 53) capable of storing carryover information indicating that the special character winning information has been carried over.
There is a case where the information stored in the second storage means is updated based on the fact that the winning number determined by the winning number determining means is the specific winning number (in the case of "Yes" in step S1073, Update the value of "_NB_CND_BNS" in step S1074),
When the predetermined value ("0") is stored in the third storage unit after the processing related to the update of the information stored in the second storage unit, the information stored in the first storage unit is There is a case to update (it is determined in step S1073 whether the value of "_NB_CND_BNS" is "0" or not, and after updating the value of "_NB_CND_BNS" in step S1074, "0" is stored in "_FL_PRD_LOT" in step S1078. If it is, update the value of "_NB_CND_AT" in step S1079)
It is characterized by

The second solution (Modification of the sixteenth embodiment; FIG. 92) is
A game having an advantageous operation mode (a correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (for example, a game when winning a small winning combination B group),
In the game having the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, the instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode is activated (the push number indication LED 78 is displayed on the winning number display LED 78).
Among the game sections, a normal section in which the indication function activation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the indication function activation game can be executed,
And a winning number determination means (internal lottery 1 in FIG. 87 and lottery determination in FIG. 88) for determining a winning number based on a random number value.
As a winning number, it has a specific winning number (for example, "44") indicating that it will be a specific winning (for example, a double winning of 1BBA and a small winning combination D) and a transition to an advantage section.
The specific winning is a double winning including a special role (for example, 1BBA) and a specific role (for example, small role D),
If you win the special role, carry over the winning information of the special role until the combination of the symbols corresponding to the special role is stopped,
First storage means (storage area “_NB_CND_AT” of RWM 53) capable of storing information on transition to the advantageous section;
Second storage means (storage area “_NB_CND_BNS” of RWM 53) capable of storing the winning combination information of the special part;
Third storage means (storage area “_FL_PRD_LOT” of RWM 53) capable of storing carryover information indicating that the special character winning information is carried over;
And a fourth storage means (storage area "_NB_CND_NOR" of RWM 53) capable of storing winning information of a specific part, and
There is a case where the information stored in the second storage unit and the fourth storage unit is updated based on the fact that the winning number determined by the winning number determining unit is the specific winning number ("Yes in step S1073 In the case of “], the value of“ _NB_CND_BNS ”is updated in step S1074, and the value of“ _NB_CND_NOR ”is updated in step S1075),
When the predetermined value is stored in the third storage unit after the processing relating to the update of the information stored in the second storage unit and the fourth storage unit, the information stored in the first storage unit is There is a case to update (it is determined in step S1073 whether the value of "_NB_CND_BNS" is "0" or not, and after updating the value of "_NB_CND_BNS" in step S1074 and updating the value of "_NB_CND_NOR" in step S1075, If “0” is stored in “_FL_PRD_LOT” in step S1078, the value of “_NB_CND_AT” is updated in step S1079)
It is characterized by

According to a third solution, in the first or second solution,
When a value other than the specific value (“0”) is stored in the second storage unit when the winning number determined by the winning number determination unit is the specific winning number, the second storage unit stores the value. It is characterized by maintaining the same value.

(C) Effects of the First Invention 30 According to the first invention, the process related to the update of the information stored in the second storage unit is executed based on the fact that the winning number is determined as the specific winning number, and thereafter, When the predetermined value is stored in the third storage unit, the information stored in the first storage unit is updated.
As a result, the winning number can be determined by the same process regardless of whether or not the special role is won and whether it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, so that a fixed memory capacity can be obtained. Within the range, it is possible to appropriately perform processing regarding the decision to shift to the advantageous section.
In addition, after the processing relating to the update of the information stored in the second storage means, the register storing the winning combination of the special part can be used for other processing.

31. First invention 31
(A) Problem to be solved by the first invention 31 The same as the first invention 27.
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the First Invention 31 (The corresponding embodiments will be described in parentheses.)
The first solution (the seventeenth embodiment; FIG. 99) is
A game having an advantageous operation mode (a correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (for example, a game when winning a small winning combination B group),
In the game having the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, the instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode is activated (the push number indication LED 78 is displayed on the winning number display LED 78).
Among the game sections, a normal section in which the indication function activation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the indication function activation game can be executed,
And a winning number determination means (internal lottery 1 in FIG. 87 and lottery determination in FIG. 88) for determining a winning number based on a random number value.
A specific winning number (for example, "38" to "42") which can execute a transition lottery (two-step lottery in FIG. 100 and no setting difference lottery in FIG. 101) for determining whether to shift to an advantageous section as a winning number. Number),
It has a predetermined storage means (storage area “_NB_CND_AT” of RWM 53) capable of storing information on transition to the advantageous section,
In the case where the winning number determined by the winning number determining means is a specific winning number, the transition lottery is not performed when a value other than the predetermined value (“0”) is stored in the predetermined storage means (see FIG. If "No" in the step S1114 of 99, the two-step lottery is not executed by skipping the steps S1115 and S1116)
It is characterized by

The second solution (the seventeenth embodiment; FIG. 99) is
A game having an advantageous operation mode (a correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (for example, a game when winning a small winning combination B group),
In the game having the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, the instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode is activated (the push number indication LED 78 is displayed on the winning number display LED 78).
Among the game sections, a normal section in which the indication function activation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the indication function activation game can be executed,
And a winning number determination means (internal lottery 1 in FIG. 87 and lottery determination in FIG. 88) for determining a winning number based on a random number value.
A specific winning number (for example, "38" to "42") which can execute a transition lottery (two-step lottery in FIG. 100 and no setting difference lottery in FIG. 101) for determining whether to shift to an advantageous section as a winning number. Number),
It has a predetermined storage means (storage area “_NB_CND_AT” of RWM 53) capable of storing information on transition to the advantageous section,
In the case where the winning number determined by the winning number determining means is the specific winning number, when a value other than the predetermined value (“0”) is stored in the predetermined storage means, even if the transition lottery is executed. And maintaining the value stored in the predetermined storage means.

(C) Effects of the First Invention 31 According to the first invention, in the case where the winning number is determined to be the specific winning number, if a value other than the predetermined value is stored in the predetermined storage means, is the transition to an advantageous zone? Do not execute the transition lottery to determine whether or not.
As a result, the winning number can be determined by the same process regardless of whether or not it is decided to shift to the advantageous section, so that the advantageous section is shifted to within the certain memory capacity range. It is possible to properly process the decision.

32. Original invention 32
(A) Problems to be Solved by the Invention 32 The same as the invention 27 is.
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the First Invention 32 (The corresponding embodiments will be described in parentheses.)
The first solution (the seventeenth embodiment; FIG. 99) is
A game having an advantageous operation mode (a correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (for example, a game when winning a small winning combination B group),
In the game having the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, the instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode is activated (the push number indication LED 78 is displayed on the winning number display LED 78).
Among the game sections, a normal section in which the indication function activation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the indication function activation game can be executed,
And a winning number determination means (internal lottery 1 in FIG. 87 and lottery determination in FIG. 88) for determining a winning number based on a random number value.
A specific winning number (for example, "38" to "42") which can execute a transition lottery (two-step lottery in FIG. 100 and no setting difference lottery in FIG. 101) for determining whether to shift to an advantageous section as a winning number. Number),
It has a specific storage means (storage area “_NB_CND_BNS” of RWM 53) capable of storing winning information of special role (for example 1 BBA),
In the case where the winning number determined by the winning number determining means is a specific winning number, when a value other than the specific value (“0”) is stored in the specific storage means, the transition lottery is not executed (see FIG. If "No" in step S1113 of 99, the two-step lottery is not executed by skipping steps S1114 to S1116)
It is characterized by

The second solution (the seventeenth embodiment; FIG. 99) is
A game having an advantageous operation mode (a correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (for example, a game when winning a small winning combination B group),
In the game having the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, the instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode is activated (the push number indication LED 78 is displayed on the winning number display LED 78).
Among the game sections, a normal section in which the indication function activation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the indication function activation game can be executed,
And a winning number determination means (internal lottery 1 in FIG. 87 and lottery determination in FIG. 88) for determining a winning number based on a random number value.
A specific winning number (for example, "38" to "42") which can execute a transition lottery (two-step lottery in FIG. 100 and no setting difference lottery in FIG. 101) for determining whether to shift to an advantageous section as a winning number. Number),
First storage means (storage area “_NB_CND_AT” of RWM 53) capable of storing information on transition to the advantageous section;
And a second storage unit (storage area “_NB_CND_BNS” of RWM 53) capable of storing winning information of a special role (for example, 1 BBA),
In the case where the winning number determined by the winning number determining means is a specific winning number, even if a value other than the specific value (“0”) is stored in the second storage means, even if the transition lottery is executed. And maintaining the values stored in the first storage means.

(C) Effects of the First Invention 32 According to the first invention, in the case where the winning number is determined to be the specific winning number, if a value other than the specific value is stored in the specific storage means, is the transition to an advantageous interval? Do not execute the transition lottery to determine whether or not.
Thereby, regardless of whether or not the special winning combination is made, the winning number can be determined including the specific winning number capable of executing the transition lottery, so that within the certain memory capacity range, the advantageous section It is possible to appropriately perform processing regarding the decision to shift to

33. Initial invention 33
(A) Problems to be solved by the first invention 33 The same as the first invention 27.
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of Initial Invention 33 (The corresponding embodiments will be described in parentheses.)
The first solution (the seventeenth embodiment; FIG. 99) is
A game having an advantageous operation mode (a correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (for example, a game when winning a small winning combination B group),
In the game having the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, the instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode is activated (the push number indication LED 78 is displayed on the winning number display LED 78).
Among the game sections, a normal section in which the indication function activation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the indication function activation game can be executed,
And a winning number determination means (internal lottery 1 in FIG. 87 and lottery determination in FIG. 88) for determining a winning number based on a random number value.
Specific winning numbers (for example, "38" to "40") which can execute a transition lottery (two-step lottery in FIG. 100 and lottery with no setting difference in FIG. 101) for determining whether to shift to an advantageous section as a winning number. Number),
The specific winning number is a winning number indicating that the special role (for example, 1BBA) has been won,
It has a predetermined storage means (storage area “_NB_CND_BNS” of RWM 53) capable of storing the winning information of the special part,
The case where the transition lottery is executed based on the fact that the winning number determined by the winning number determining means is the specific winning number (when the winning number is determined to be "38" to "40") If "Yes" in step S1113, "Yes" in step S1114, and "No" in step S1115, a two-step lottery is executed in step S1116),
After executing the process relating to the transition lottery, the special winning combination information is stored in the predetermined storage unit (after performing the two-step lottery in step S1116, the value of "_NB_CND_BNS" is updated in step S1117)
It is characterized by

The second solution (the seventeenth embodiment; FIG. 99) is
A game having an advantageous operation mode (a correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (for example, a game when winning a small winning combination B group),
In the game having the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, the instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode is activated (the push number indication LED 78 is displayed on the winning number display LED 78).
Among the game sections, a normal section in which the indication function activation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the indication function activation game can be executed,
And a winning number determination means (internal lottery 1 in FIG. 87 and lottery determination in FIG. 88) for determining a winning number based on a random number value.
As a winning number, a specific winning number (for example, “39” or “40”) which can execute a transition lottery (two-step lottery in FIG. 100 and no setting difference lottery in FIG. 101) for determining whether to shift to an advantageous section. Number),
The specific winning number is a winning number indicating that the special winning combination (for example, 1BBA) and the specific winning combination (small playing combination D) have been dually won,
Predetermined storage means (storage area “_NB_CND_BNS” of RWM 53) capable of storing winning information of special role, and
And a specific storage unit (storage area "_NB_CND_NOR" of the RWM 53) capable of storing winning information of a specific combination.
It has a case where a transition lottery is executed based on the fact that the winning number determined by the winning number determining means is a specific winning number (when the winning number is determined to be "39" or "40") If "Yes" in step S1113, "Yes" in step S1114, and "No" in step S1115, a two-step lottery is executed in step S1116),
After executing the processing relating to the transition lottery, the special winning combination information is stored in the predetermined storage unit, and the winning combination of the specific combination is stored in the specific storage unit (after performing the two-step lottery in step S1116, step In S1117, the value of "_NB_CND_BNS" is updated, and in step S1119, the value of "_NB_CND_NOR" is updated.
It is characterized by

According to a third solution, in the first or second solution,
In the case where the winning number determined by the winning number determining means is the specific winning number, the transition lottery is not executed when the winning information of the special combination is stored in the predetermined storage means (step S1113 in FIG. 99). If "No", steps S1114 to S1117 are skipped, so the two-step lottery of step S1116 is not executed)
It is characterized by

According to a fourth solution, in any one of the first to third solutions,
Advantageously section information storage means (storage area “_NB_CND_BNS” of RWM 53) capable of storing information on transition to an advantageous section;
In the case where the winning number determined by the winning number determining means is the specific winning number, and the information regarding the transition to the advantageous section is stored in the advantageous section information storage means, the transition lottery is not executed (FIG. 99) If “No” in step S1114 of step S11, steps S1115 and S1116 are skipped, so the two-step lottery in step S1116 is not executed)
It is characterized by

(C) Effects of the First Invention 33 According to the first invention, when the winning number is determined to be the specific winning number, it is possible to execute the transition lottery. Then, after the processing concerning the transition lottery is executed, the winning combination information of the special part is stored in the predetermined storage means.
As a result, even if it does not have a flag indicating whether or not the special character winning information has been carried over, it is determined whether the special character is won in the current game or the special character is won before the previous game, It is possible to decide whether or not to execute the lottery.
Therefore, it is possible to appropriately perform processing regarding the decision to shift to the advantageous section within the fixed memory capacity range.

34. Original invention 34
(A) Problems to be solved by the first invention 34 The same as the first invention 27.
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the First Invention 34 (The corresponding embodiments will be described in parentheses.)
The first solving means (modification of the seventeenth embodiment; FIG. 103) is
A game having an advantageous operation mode (a correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (for example, a game when winning a small winning combination B group),
In the game having the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, the instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode is activated (the push number indication LED 78 is displayed on the winning number display LED 78).
Among the game sections, a normal section in which the indication function activation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the indication function activation game can be executed,
And a winning number determination means (internal lottery 1 in FIG. 87 and lottery determination in FIG. 88) for determining a winning number based on a random number value.
Specific winning numbers (for example, "38" to "40") which can execute a transition lottery (two-step lottery in FIG. 100 and lottery with no setting difference in FIG. 101) for determining whether to shift to an advantageous section as a winning number. Number),
The specific winning number is a winning number indicating that the special role (for example, 1BBA) has been won,
If you win the special role, carry over the winning information of the special role until the combination of the symbols corresponding to the special role is stopped,
First storage means (storage area “_NB_CND_BNS” of RWM 53) capable of storing winning information of special roles,
And a second storage unit (storage area “_FL_PRD_LOT” of the RWM 53) capable of storing carryover information indicating that the special character winning information has been carried over.
Based on the fact that the winning number determined by the winning number determining means is the specific winning number, the information stored in the first storage means is updated (the winning number is determined to be "38" to "40"). When it is determined, "Yes" is set in step S1153 of FIG. 103, and the value of "_NB_CND_BNS" is updated in step S1154),
Based on the information stored in the second storage means, there is a case where the transition lottery is performed and a case where the transition lottery is not performed (when "No" in step S1158 of FIG. Execute, and if "Yes" in step S1158, step S1116 is skipped, so the two-step lottery in step S1116 is not executed)
It is characterized by

The second solution (Modification of the seventeenth embodiment; FIG. 103) is
A game having an advantageous operation mode (a correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (for example, a game when winning a small winning combination B group),
In the game having the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, the instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode is activated (the push number indication LED 78 is displayed on the winning number display LED 78).
Among the game sections, a normal section in which the indication function activation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the indication function activation game can be executed,
And a winning number determination means (internal lottery 1 in FIG. 87 and lottery determination in FIG. 88) for determining a winning number based on a random number value.
As a winning number, a specific winning number (for example, “39” or “40”) which can execute a transition lottery (two-step lottery in FIG. 100 and no setting difference lottery in FIG. 101) for determining whether to shift to an advantageous section. Number),
The specific winning number is a winning number indicating that the special winning combination (for example, 1BBA) and the specific winning combination (small playing combination D) have been dually won,
If you win the special role, carry over the winning information of the special role until the combination of the symbols corresponding to the special role is stopped,
First storage means (storage area “_NB_CND_BNS” of RWM 53) capable of storing winning information of special roles,
Second storage means (storage area “_FL_PRD_LOT” of RWM 53) capable of storing carryover information indicating that the special character winning information has been carried over;
And third storage means (storage area “_NB_CND_NOR” of RWM 53) capable of storing the winning information of the specific part.
Based on the fact that the winning number determined by the winning number determining means is the specific winning number, the information stored in the first storage means and the third storage means is updated (the winning number is "38" to " If it is determined to be No. 40, the result is "Yes" in step S1153 of FIG. 103, the value of "_NB_CND_BNS" is updated in step S1154, and the value of "_NB_CND_NOR" is updated in step S1155),
Based on the information stored in the second storage means, there is a case where the transition lottery is performed and a case where the transition lottery is not performed (when "No" in step S1158 of FIG. Execute, and if "Yes" in step S1158, step S1116 is skipped, so the two-step lottery in step S1116 is not executed)
It is characterized by

According to a third solution, in the first or second solution,
When the winning number determined by the winning number determining means is the specific winning number, when the winning information of the special combination is stored in the first storage means, the information stored in the first storage means is maintained. (If "No" in step S1153 of FIG. 103, the value of "_NB_CND_BNS" is maintained by skipping step S1154)
It is characterized by

(C) Effects of the First Invention 34 According to the first invention, when the winning number is determined to be the specific winning number, the information stored in the first storage means is updated. Then, based on the information stored in the second storage unit, there are a case where the transition lottery is performed and a case where it is not performed.
Thereby, regardless of whether or not the special winning combination is made, the winning number can be determined including the specific winning number capable of executing the transition lottery, so that within the certain memory capacity range, the advantageous section It is possible to appropriately perform processing regarding the decision to shift to
In addition, after the information stored in the first storage means is updated, the register storing the winning combination information of the special part can be used for other processing.

35. Initial invention 35
(A) Problem to be solved by the first invention 35 The same as the first invention 27.
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the First Invention 35 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The first solution (the eighteenth embodiment; FIGS. 105 to 108) is
A game having an advantageous operation mode (a correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (for example, a game when winning a small winning combination B group),
In the game having the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, the instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode is activated (the push number indication LED 78 is displayed on the winning number display LED 78).
Among the game sections, a normal section in which the indication function activation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the indication function activation game can be executed,
Winning number determination means (internal lottery 1 in FIG. 87 and lottery determination in FIG. 88) for determining a winning number based on a random number value;
A lottery data table (all RT common lottery table (8) in FIG. 105 to all RT common lottery table (11) in FIG. 108) used when determining the winning number;
The lottery data table is
Winning number data (for example, "@BBA" = "38") indicating winning number, probability data (for example, "10") indicating winning probability, and advantageous section data (for example, "@ LT_AT1" indicating transition to an advantageous section) A first data group (for example, 1BBA condition device lottery data shown in FIG. 106) associated with
Second data group associating winning number data (for example, "@BBA" = "38") with probability data (for example, "10") and not associating advantage segment data (for example, 1BBA condition device lottery in FIG. 105) For the data) and
The first data group and the second data group are characterized by defining the same winning number data.

(C) Effects of the First Invention 35 According to the first invention, the same winning number is determined when either of the first data group and the second data group is used, but when the first data group is used, It is decided to shift to the advantageous section, and when using the second data group, it is decided not to shift to the advantageous section.
As a result, by performing lottery using one lottery data table, it is possible to determine the winning number and to determine whether or not to shift to an advantageous section, so that it is within the range of a fixed memory capacity. Thus, the processing relating to the determination to shift to the advantageous section can be appropriately performed.

36. Original invention 36
(A) Problems to be solved by the first invention 36 The same as the first invention 27.
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the First Invention 36 (Here, in parentheses, the corresponding embodiments will be described.)
The first solving means (19th embodiment; FIG. 121) is
A game having an advantageous operation mode (a correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (for example, a game when winning a small winning combination B group),
In the game having the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, the instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode is activated (the push number indication LED 78 is displayed on the winning number display LED 78).
Among the game sections, a normal section in which the indication function activation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the indication function activation game can be executed,
Random number generation means,
Part lottery means (internal lottery 2 in FIG. 119 and condition device number set 6 in FIG. 120) performing lottery so as to have a case of winning a predetermined combination (for example, replay A) based on random number values acquired from the random number generation means )When,
Transition lottery means for determining whether or not to shift to the advantageous section based on the random number value acquired from the random number generation means (advantageous section shift lottery in FIG. 121);
It has a first gaming state (for example, RT1) and a second gaming state (for example, RT2) that differ in the probability of winning a predetermined combination in a lottery by the combination lottery means,
The transition lottery means executes the transition lottery when the predetermined condition is satisfied (not at the time of the product operation ("No" at step S1323 in FIG. 120), and not inside ("Yes" at step S1324). And when it is not an advantageous section ("Yes" in step S1325), the process proceeds to step S1326 to execute an advantageous section transition lottery),
In the transition lottery, it is decided to shift to the advantageous section when the random number value falls within the predetermined range (when the random value falls within the range of “0” to “177”, it is decided to shift to the advantageous section 2 When the random number value falls within the range of “178” to “344”, it is decided to shift to the advantageous section 1),
The combination to be won by the combination lottery means when the random number value falls within the predetermined range is the same between the first gaming state and the second gaming state (when the random number falls within the range of “0” to “344”) In order to determine the winning number using the all RT common lottery table (12) of FIG. 114 to the all RT common lottery table (14) of FIG. 116, the condition device to be elected is non-RT, RT1, RT2, RT3, or Whichever RT4 is the same)
It is characterized by

The second solution (Modification of the nineteenth embodiment; FIG. 121) is
A game having an advantageous operation mode (a correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (for example, a game when winning a small winning combination B group),
In the game having the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, the instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode is activated (the push number indication LED 78 is displayed on the winning number display LED 78).
Among the game sections, a normal section in which the indication function activation game is not executed,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the indication function activation game can be executed,
Random number generation means,
Part lottery means (internal lottery 2 in FIG. 119 and condition device number set 6 in FIG. 120) performing lottery so as to have a case of winning a predetermined combination (for example, replay A) based on random number values acquired from the random number generation means )When,
The transition lottery means (the advantageous section transition lottery in FIG. 121) that determines whether or not to shift to the advantageous section based on the random number value acquired from the random number generation section and predetermined storage section capable of storing information regarding the transition to the advantageous section (RWM 53 storage area “_NB_CND_AT”) and
It has a first gaming state (for example, RT1) and a second gaming state (for example, RT2) that differ in the probability of winning a predetermined combination in a lottery by the combination lottery means,
The transition lottery means decides to shift to the advantageous section when the random number value falls within the predetermined range (shifts to the advantageous section 2 when the random value falls within the range of “0” to “177” When the random number value falls within the range of “178” to “344”, it is decided to shift to the advantageous segment 1)
When the transition lottery is executed under the condition satisfying the specific condition, the information stored in the predetermined storage means is maintained (when the bonus is in operation ("Yes" in step S1356 of FIG. When the internal flag is on (when “Yes” in step S1357 in FIG. 123), and when the advantageous section number is not “0” (when “No” in step S1358 in FIG. 123), In this case, even if the advantageous section transition lottery is executed, the advantageous section number is maintained by skipping step S1338 of FIG. 121 (maintaining the value of “_NB_CND_AT” ),
The combination to be won by the combination lottery means when the random number value falls within the predetermined range is the same between the first gaming state and the second gaming state (when the random number falls within the range of “0” to “344”) In order to determine the winning number using the all RT common lottery table (12) of FIG. 114 to the all RT common lottery table (14) of FIG. 116, the condition device to be elected is non-RT, RT1, RT2, RT3, or Whichever RT4 is the same)
It is characterized by

(C) Effects of the First Invention 36 According to the first invention, the combination lottery means performs lottery of the roles based on one random number value acquired from the random number generation means, and the transitional lottery means transitions to the advantageous section It is decided whether or not to Then, when it is determined by the transition lottery means that the transition to the advantageous section is made, the combination lottery means wins the same combination of the first gaming state and the second gaming state.
As described above, since one random number can be used to draw a lottery for a winning combination and it can be determined whether or not to shift to an advantageous section, it is possible to select an advantageous section within a fixed memory capacity range. It is possible to appropriately perform processing regarding the decision to shift.

37. Original invention 37
(A) Problem to be Solved by the First Invention 37 The first invention relates to a technology for outputting LED digit signals and segment signals from an output port in a game machine.
Conventionally, dynamic lighting of a 7-segment display (7 segments) has been known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 09-225091).
For example, the above publication describes the assignment of output ports for digit signals and segment signals.
At present, it is considered to mount 7 segments capable of displaying an advantageous section ratio etc. on a main control board of a gaming machine (slot machine).
On the other hand, conventionally, the gaming machine is provided with 7 segments for displaying the storage number, 7 segments for displaying the acquisition number, and the like.
When the number of 7 segments increases in this way, it becomes a problem how to design each 7 segment digit signal and segment signal and an output port.
The problem to be solved by the present invention is to properly design digit (drive) signals and segment signals and output ports and to execute efficient signal output processing.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of Initial Invention 37 (The corresponding embodiments will be described in parentheses.)
The first solution means (twentieth embodiment; FIG. 128) includes
A display unit having a plurality of lightable segments (segments A to P) and displaying predetermined information (the number of storage, the number of acquisitions, error information, push order instruction number, gaming state, or setting value) by lighting of the segments (A first display means having one or more (digits) (storage number display LED 76, acquisition number display LED 78, status display LED 79, or setting value display LED 73);
A second display unit (management information display LED 74) having one or more of the display units;
A first output port (output port 2) capable of outputting a drive signal (digit signal) to the display unit of the first display means;
A second output port (output port 4) capable of outputting a drive signal to the display unit of the second display means;
A third output port (output port 3) capable of outputting a segment signal to a segment of the display unit of the first display means and the second display means;
First output processing (LED display control; FIG. 134) of outputting a drive signal from the first output port to the display unit of the first display means and outputting a segment signal from the third output port to the segment;
A second output process (ratio display process; FIG. 135) of outputting a drive signal from the second output port to the display unit of the second display means and outputting a segment signal from the third output port to the segment;
Clear signal output processing (steps S1431 and S1432 in FIG. 134) for outputting clear signals from the first output port, the second output port, and the third output port before the first output processing and the second output processing Run
The time from the output timing of the clear signal to the output timing of the drive signal and segment signal in the first output process (the time from step S1431 and step S1432 to step S1458) is "t1", and the output timing of the clear signal is the second output When the time until the output timing of the drive signal and the segment signal in the process (the time from step S1431 and step S1432 to step S1487) is "t2," the process is performed so as to satisfy "t1 <t2". I assume.

According to a second solution, in the first solution,
A display counter (LED display counter; FIG. 132) updated at a predetermined timing;
The first output process is performed when the display counter has a first value, and the second output process is performed when the display counter has a second value (second value / first value). Do.

(C) Effects of the First Invention 37 According to the first invention, since the segment signal is output using the output port common to the first display means and the second display means, the IC cost can be reduced, and the drive signal (digit Signal and segment signals can be output.
In addition, when the first display means is a display means visible to the player and the second display means is a display means invisible to the player, the output process of the first display means is performed before the second display means. Thus, the flicker prevention of the first display means can be performed with priority.
Further, according to the second solution means, it is possible to execute the output process to the first display means and the output process to the second display means by using one display counter.

38. Original invention 38
(A) Problem to be solved by the first invention 38 The same as the first invention 37.
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the First Invention 38 (The corresponding embodiments will be described in parentheses.)
The first solution (the twenty-first embodiment; FIG. 138) is
A display unit (digit) having a plurality of littable segments (segments A to P) and displaying predetermined information (number of stored, number of earned, error information, push order instruction number, or gaming state) by lighting of the segments A first display means (storage number display LED 76, acquisition number display LED 78, or status display LED 79) having one or more
A second display unit (management information display LED 74) having one or more of the display units;
A first output port (output port 3) capable of outputting a drive signal (digit signal) to the display unit of the first display means and the display unit of the second display means;
A second output port (output port 4) capable of outputting a segment signal to the segment of the display unit of the first display means and the segment of the display unit of the second display means;
First output processing (LED display control; FIG. 140) of outputting a drive signal from the first output port to the display unit of the first display means and outputting a segment signal from the second output port to the segment;
A second output process (ratio display process; FIG. 141) of outputting a drive signal from the first output port to the display unit of the second display means and outputting a segment signal from the second output port to the segment;
Before the first output process and the second output process, execute a clear signal output process (step S1531 in FIG. 140) of outputting a clear signal from the first output port and the second output port,
The time from the output timing of the clear signal to the output timing of the drive signal and the segment signal in the first output processing (the time from step S1531 to step S1534) is "t1", and the output timing of the clear signal is the drive in the second output processing When the time until the output timing of the signal and the segment signal (the time from step S1531 to step S1487) is "t2," the processing is performed so as to satisfy "t1 <t2."

According to a second solution, in the first solution,
A display counter (LED display counter; FIG. 139 (B)) updated at a predetermined timing;
The first output process is performed when the display counter has a first value, and the second output process is performed when the display counter has a second value (second value / first value). Do.

(C) Effects of the First Invention 38 In addition to the effects of the first invention 37, the number of output ports can be reduced because the number of output ports for driving signals can be one and the number of output ports for segment signals can be one. it can.

39. First invention 39
(A) Problems to be solved by the first invention 39 The same as the first invention 37.
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the First Invention 39 (The corresponding embodiments will be described in parentheses.)
The first solution (the twenty-second embodiment; FIG. 144) is
A display unit having a plurality of lightable segments (segments A to P) and displaying predetermined information (the number of storage, the number of acquisitions, error information, push order instruction number, gaming state, or setting value) by lighting of the segments (1) display means (storage number display LED 76, acquisition number display LED 78, or status display LED 79) having one or more (digits);
A second display unit (management information display LED 74) having one or more of the display units;
A first output port (output port 2) capable of outputting a drive signal (digit signal) to the display unit of the first display means and the display unit of the second display means;
A second output port (output port 3) capable of outputting segment signals (segments 1A to 1P signals) to the segments of the display unit of the first display means;
A third output port (output port 4) capable of outputting segment signals (segments 2A to 2P) in the segment of the display unit of the second display means;
First output processing (LED display control; FIG. 149) of outputting a drive signal from the first output port to the display unit of the first display means and outputting a segment signal from the second output port to the segment;
A second output process (ratio display process; FIG. 150) of outputting a drive signal from the first output port to the display unit of the second display means and outputting a segment signal from the third output port to the segment;
Clear signal output processing (steps S1541 and S1542 in FIG. 149) of outputting clear signals from the first output port, the second output port, and the third output port before the first output processing and the second output processing Run
The time from the output timing of the clear signal to the output timing of the drive signal and segment signal in the first output process (the time from step S1541 and step S1542 to step S1554 and step S1555) is "t1", and the output timing of the clear signal When the time until the output timing of the drive signal and the segment signal in the second output process (the time from step S1541 and step S1542 to step S1561) is "t2," the process is performed such that "t1 <t2". It is characterized by

According to a second solution, in the first solution,
The display counter (LED display counter; FIG. 148) updated at a predetermined timing;
The first output process is performed when the display counter has a first value, and the second output process is performed when the display counter has a second value (second value / first value). Do.
(C) Effects of the First Invention 39 The same as the First Invention 37.

40. Original invention 40
(A) Problem to be solved by the first invention 40 The same as the first invention 37.
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the First Invention 40 (Here, in parentheses, the corresponding embodiments will be described.)
The first solution (24th embodiment; FIG. 154) is
A display unit having a plurality of lightable segments (segments A to P) and displaying predetermined information (the number of storage, the number of acquisitions, error information, push order instruction number, gaming state, or setting value) by lighting of the segments (A first display means having one or more (digits) (storage number display LED 76, acquisition number display LED 78, status display LED 79, or setting value display LED 73);
A second display unit (management information display LED 74) having one or more of the display units;
A first output port (output port 3) capable of outputting a drive signal (digit signal) to the display unit of the first display means;
A second output port (output port 6) capable of outputting a drive signal (digit signal) to the display unit of the second display means;
A third output port (output port 4) capable of outputting a segment signal to the segment of the display unit of the first display means;
And a fourth output port (output port 7) capable of outputting a segment signal to the segment of the display section of the second display means, and
First output processing (LED display control; FIG. 158) of outputting a drive signal from the first output port to the display unit of the first display means and outputting a segment signal from the third output port to the segment;
A second output process (ratio display process; FIG. 159) of outputting a drive signal from the second output port to the display unit of the second display means and outputting a segment signal from the fourth output port to the segment;
Clear signal output processing for outputting a clear signal from the first output port, the second output port, the third output port, and the fourth output port before the first output processing and the second output processing (step S1571 in FIG. 158) And step S1572) and
The time from the output timing of the clear signal to the output timing of the drive signal and segment signal in the first output process (the time from step S1571 and step S1572 to step S1576 and step S1577) is "t1", and the output timing of the clear signal is When the time until the output timing of the drive signal and the segment signal in the second output process (the time from step S1571 and step S1572 to step S1581) is “t2”, the process is performed such that “t1 <t2”. It is characterized by

According to a second solution, in the first solution,
A display counter (LED display counter; FIG. 156) updated at a predetermined timing;
The first output process is performed when the display counter has a first value, and the second output process is performed when the display counter has a second value (second value / first value). Do.
(C) Effects of the First Invention 40 The same as the First Invention 37.

41. First invention 41
(A) Problem to be Solved by the First Invention 41 The first invention relates to a technology for outputting LED digit signals and segment signals from an output port in a game machine.
Conventionally, dynamic lighting of a 7-segment display (7 segments) has been known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 09-225091).
For example, the above publication describes the assignment of output ports for digit signals and segment signals.
At present, it is considered to mount 7 segments capable of displaying an advantageous section ratio etc. on a main control board of a gaming machine (slot machine).
On the other hand, conventionally, the gaming machine is provided with 7 segments for displaying the storage number, 7 segments for displaying the acquisition number, and the like.
As described above, when the number of seven segments increases, the program becomes complicated because the lighting control of each seven segment is performed.
The problem to be solved by the invention at first is to efficiently store and execute a program for controlling the lighting of the LED.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the First Invention 41 (Note that the corresponding embodiments will be described in parentheses.)
The original invention is
A display unit having a plurality of lightable segments (segments A to P) and displaying predetermined information (the number of storage, the number of acquisitions, error information, push order instruction number, gaming state, or setting value) by lighting of the segments (A first display means having one or more (digits) (storage number display LED 76, acquisition number display LED 78, status display LED 79, or setting value display LED 73);
A second display unit (management information display LED 74) having one or more of the display units;
A first program (LED display control) for outputting a drive signal (digit signal) to the display unit of the first display means and outputting a segment signal to a segment of the display unit of the first display means 1 for outputting a drive signal (digit signal) to one storage area (within the use area of the ROM 54) and the display unit of the second display means, and outputting a segment signal to the segment of the display unit of the second display means Storage means (ROM 54) having a second storage area (outside of the use area of the ROM 54) storing the second program (ratio display process);
After executing the first program, execute the second program,
A drive signal is output to the display unit of the first display unit, and a clear signal is output to the first display unit and the second display unit before the segment signal is output to the segment of the display unit of the first display unit. A clear signal output process (for example, steps S1431 and S1432 during the LED display control of FIG. 134) is provided.

(C) Effects of the First Invention 41 According to the first invention, the programs of the first display means and the second display means are stored separately, and the second program is executed after the execution of the first program. And can be performed efficiently.
Further, since the clear signal output process is performed when the first program is executed, it is possible to prevent an afterimage.

42. Original invention 42
(A) Problem to be Solved by the First Invention 42 The first invention relates to a technology for outputting LED digit signals and segment signals from an output port in a game machine.
Conventionally, dynamic lighting of a 7-segment display is known (for example, JP-A-09-225091).
For example, the above publication describes the assignment of output ports for digit signals and segment signals.
At present, it is considered that a 7-segment (management information display LED) capable of displaying an advantageous section ratio etc. is mounted on a main control board of a gaming machine (slot machine).
On the other hand, although 7 segments are composed of segments A to G, there may be a case where a segment P (also referred to as segment DP) which is a dot segment is further provided.
Then, when the management information display LED has a dot segment, how to use the dot segment becomes a problem.
The problem to be solved by the invention at first is to display specific information using dot segments.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the First Invention 42 (Here, the corresponding embodiments will be described in parentheses.)
The first solution is
A first display unit (digit 7) and a second display unit (digit) that have a plurality of lightable segments (segments A to P) and display predetermined information (management information such as advantageous section ratio) by lighting of the segments 6, 8, 9),
A display counter (LED display counter) updated at a predetermined timing, and
When it is time to turn on the first display section by the display counter, turn on the segments including the specific segment (segment P),
At any timing of the display counter, the specific segment of the second display unit is not turned on,
When a specific error (unrecoverable error 2) occurs, the update (interruption) of the display counter is stopped, and the specific error processing (unrecoverable error process 2) for lighting the specific segment of the second display unit is performed. It is characterized by performing.

According to a second solution, in the first solution,
The specific error processing is characterized in that processing for lighting the specific segments of all the display units including the first display unit and the second display unit is performed.
According to a third solution, in the first or second solution,
A first storage area (within the use area of the ROM 54) storing a program (for example, a main process) for executing control processing on a game, and a storage area divided from the first storage area, the specific error processing is executed A storage means (ROM 54) having a second storage area (outside of the use area of the ROM 54) for storing the program (impossible return error process 2) is provided.

(C) Effects of the First Invention 42 According to the first invention, different information can be displayed on the specific segment of the first display unit and the specific segment of the second display unit. In particular, by turning on a specific segment of the first display unit, it is possible to display a break of information. On the other hand, the lighting of the specific segment of the second display unit can notify the occurrence of the specific error.

43. Original invention 43
(A) Problem to be Solved by Invention 43 The invention originally has an advantageous section operable to display an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, and the main control board side indicates that transition to this advantageous section is made. It relates to the slot machine to be determined.
In the conventional slot machine, a slot machine is known in which a main control board side performs lottery of a role and decides whether or not to display an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch (for example, JP-A-2014-161344) No. 2).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section which is a game section in which AT can be executed, and to indicate that it is an advantageous section by the advantageous section display device when shifting to the advantageous section.
Here, when there is a transition to the advantageous section and a time when the transition to the advantageous section is not made when the rare character is elected, the game is transitioned to the advantageous section according to the contents of the display by the advantageous section display device in the game winning the rare role. The player knows whether or not to. In this case, it is not possible to maintain the player's sense of expectation for AT execution by winning the rare part.
On the other hand, if AT is always executed at the time of winning the role of rare, the winning of the role of rare means AT execution, and the game becomes monotonous.
The problem to be solved by the invention at the outset is that, when it becomes a lottery result (a rare prize winning) that a combination of specific symbols can be stopped, the expectation for the transition to the instruction game section (AT) is played over multiple games To give people

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the First Invention 43 (Here, in parentheses, the corresponding embodiments will be described.)
The first solution means (25th embodiment) is
A game having an advantageous operation mode (a correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (for example, a game when winning a small winning combination B group),
An instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode in a game having the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch;
Of the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function is not operated,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the instruction function can be operated,
In an advantageous section, a command game section (AT) in which a pointing function is always operated or an operating frequency is increased in a game having an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch.
An advantageous section display (an advantageous section display LED 77) indicating that the section is an advantageous section;
A combination of symbols (left reel) in which a predetermined combination of symbols (combination of symbols having "watermelon" aligned in a straight line in the diagonal right-up direction) can be stopped can be stopped (small winning combination D won) The lottery means (role lottery means 61) for performing the lottery so as to have a case where the combination of symbols in which "cherry" stops at the middle left of 31 at the time of stop 31 becomes the stoppable lottery result (small winning combination E1 winning) Equipped
When it becomes a lottery result in which the combination of the predetermined symbols can be stopped by the lottery means, transition to the advantageous section and displaying that the advantageous section is displayed by the advantageous section display device, the advantageous section And when it is not indicated that it is an advantageous section by the advantageous section display device,
Whenever it becomes a lottery result in which the combination of the specific symbols can be stopped by the lottery means, the transition to the advantageous section is always made, and the advantageous section is displayed by the advantageous section display device.
When the transition to the advantageous section is made and the advantageous section is displayed by the advantageous section display device, the designated game section is indicated by the lottery result in which the combination of the specific symbols can be stopped by the lottery means. And when not transitioning to the instruction game section.

(C) Effects of the First Invention 43 According to the first invention, whenever it becomes a lottery result in which a combination of specific symbols can be stopped, it shifts to the advantageous section and is the advantageous section by the advantageous section display device Show that. And, in this case, since there is a transition to the instruction game section and a time not to transition to the instruction game section, the transition to the instruction game section when it becomes a lottery result in which the combination of specific symbols can be stopped Can give the player a sense of expectation for multiple games.

44. First invention 44
(A) Problem to be Solved by Invention 44 The invention originally has an advantageous section capable of operating an indication function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, and the main control board side indicates that the transition to this advantageous section is made. It relates to the slot machine to be determined.
In the conventional slot machine, a slot machine is known in which a main control board side performs lottery of a role and decides whether or not to display an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch (for example, JP-A-2014-161344) No. 2).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section which is a game section capable of executing AT.
Here, every time the advantageous section ends, the ease of transition from the normal section to the advantageous section is made different, or when the advantageous section ends and when the set value is changed, the normal section to the advantageous section If the easiness of the transition to another is different, there is a possibility that the fairness among players may be harmed.
The problem to be solved by the invention at first is to make the transition from the normal section to the advantageous section the same ease every time the advantageous section ends, and when the advantageous section ends and when the set value is changed. Then, the ease of transition from the normal section to the advantageous section is to be the same.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the First Invention 44 (The corresponding embodiments will be described in parentheses.)
The first solution means (25th embodiment) is
A game having an advantageous operation mode (a correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (for example, a game when winning a small winning combination B group),
An instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode in a game having the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch;
Of the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function is not operated,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the instruction function can be operated,
First storage means (predetermined storage area of RWM 53) for storing information on the advantageous section;
A unit (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13 or the like) for determining any one of a plurality of setting values;
Second storage means (a set value data storage area (_NB_RANK) on the RWM 53) for storing the set values;
Part lottery means (61) for performing a lottery of the part so as to have a case of winning the re-play part;
A plurality of lottery states (RT states (non-RT, RT1, RT2, RT3 or RT4)) in which at least one replay player winning probability is different;
When the advantageous section ends, the first initialization process (initialization process at the end of the advantageous section) is executed,
When the set value stored in the second storage unit is changed, the second initialization process (the initialization process at the time of setting change) is executed,
In the first initialization process, while maintaining the lottery state at the end of the advantageous section, transition to the normal section,
In the second initialization process, transition to a predetermined specific lottery state (non-RT), and transition to a normal section,
In the first initialization process and the second initialization process, when the first initialization process is executed by clearing the information on the advantageous section stored in the first storage unit, the second initialization process It is characterized in that, when executed, it shifts to a normal section in which the information on the advantageous section is in the same state.

(C) Effects of the First Invention 44 According to the first invention, the information on the advantageous section is cleared in both the first initialization process executed at the end of the advantageous section and the second initialization process executed at the setting change. Thereby, every time the advantageous section ends, the ease of transition from the normal section to the advantageous section can be made the same, and when the advantageous section ends and when the set value is changed, Since the ease of transition from the section to the advantageous section can be made the same, fairness among players can be secured.

45. First invention 45
(A) Problem to be Solved by Invention 45 According to the invention, the main control board has an advantageous section capable of operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, and that the transition to the advantageous section is made on the main control board side. It relates to the slot machine to be determined.
In the conventional slot machine, a slot machine is known in which a main control board side performs lottery of a role and decides whether or not to display an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch (for example, JP-A-2014-161344) No. 2).
Recently, it has been proposed to provide an advantageous section which is a game section capable of executing AT.
Here, in the slot machine, it is general that the winning probability of the special part becomes higher as the setting value becomes higher.
However, when it is possible to shift to the advantageous section when winning a special part, there is a possibility that the difference in the player's degree of advantage between the low setting time and the high setting time becomes too large.
The problem to be solved by the invention at first is to prevent the difference in the player's degree of advantage between the low setting time and the high setting time from becoming too large.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the First Invention 45 (The corresponding embodiments will be described in parentheses.)
The first solution means (25th embodiment) is
A game having an advantageous operation mode (a correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (for example, a game when winning a small winning combination B group),
An instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode in a game having the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch;
Of the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function is not operated,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the instruction function can be operated,
A unit (setting key switch 12, setting switch 13 or the like) for determining any one of a plurality of setting values;
The role lottery means (61) for performing the lottery of the roles so as to have a case where the first special role (1BBA) and the second special role (1BBB) are won as a special role (1BB) for shifting to the special game Equipped
When the first special role is won by the above-mentioned lottery means, it is possible to shift to an advantageous section,
When the second special role is won by the above-mentioned lottery means, it does not shift to the advantageous section,
The winning probability of the first special part is set the same for all set values,
Since the winning probability of the second special part is set to be higher as the set value becomes higher, the transition probability to the advantageous section when winning the special part (sum of 1BBA and 1BBB) has a set value It is characterized in that it becomes higher as it gets lower.

(C) Effects of the First Invention 45 According to the first invention, the winning probability of the first special part that can be transferred to the advantageous section is the same for all set values, and the winning probability of the second special part that is not transferred to the advantageous section is The higher the setting value, the higher. As a result, the winning probability of the special role (the sum of the first special role and the second special role) increases as the set value increases, and the transition probability to the advantageous section when the special role is won has a low set value. As it becomes higher accordingly, it is possible to prevent the difference in the player's degree of advantage between the low setting time and the high setting time from becoming too large.

46. Original invention 46
(A) Problem to be Solved by Invention 46 First, the invention comprises an advantageous section operable to indicate the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, and the main control board side indicates that the transition to this advantageous section is made. It relates to the slot machine to be determined.
In the conventional slot machine, a slot machine is known in which a main control board side performs lottery of a role and decides whether or not to display an advantageous operation mode of a stop switch (for example, JP-A-2014-161344) No. 2).
Recently, there is provided an advantageous section capable of operating an instruction function for displaying an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, and further, in the advantageous section, an instruction game section in which the instruction function is always activated or operated frequently. Proposed.
Here, an advantageous section having an instruction game section and an advantageous section not having an instruction game section can be provided, but from the viewpoint of ball design, in the advantageous section having an instruction game section, as many game media as possible In order to pay out, it is preferable to suppress the payout of game media as much as possible in an advantageous section having no instruction game section.
The problem to be solved by the invention at the outset is to minimize the payout of game media in an advantageous section that does not have a command game section.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the First Invention 46 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The first solution means (25th embodiment) is
A game having an advantageous operation mode (a correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42) (for example, a game when winning a small winning combination B group),
An instruction function for displaying the advantageous operation mode in a game having the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch;
Of the game sections, a normal section in which the instruction function is not operated,
Among the game sections, an advantageous section in which the instruction function can be operated,
Role lottery means (61) for performing a lottery of roles so as to have a case of winning of a special role (1BBA or 1BBB) for shifting to a special game;
In the advantageous section, it is possible to end the advantageous section when the indication function has been activated at least once,
In the advantageous section, when the special winning combination is won by the combination drawing means before the first instruction function is activated, it is possible to end the advantageous section without activating the instruction function,
After transitioning to the advantageous section, the indicator function is not activated even if it becomes a game having the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch, until the specific condition is satisfied (one-time instruction operation condition is satisfied: 15 games are consumed). It is characterized by

(C) Effects of the First Invention 46 According to the first invention, after transitioning to the advantageous section, the game does not activate the indication function even if it becomes a game having the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch until it satisfies the specific condition. It is possible to increase the probability of winning the special part before the first instruction function is activated. As a result, the probability that it is possible to end the advantageous section without activating the instruction function can be increased, and consequently, the payout of gaming media can be suppressed as much as possible in the advantageous section having no instruction game section. .

47. Original invention 47
(A) Problem to be Solved by the First Invention 47 The first invention relates to a gaming machine capable of switching and displaying a plurality of types of game information at predetermined time intervals.
Conventionally, a gaming machine has been known that stores a cumulative value of the number of payouts and displays a graph (so-called slump graph) indicating the transition of the cumulative value of the number of payouts (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-125121).
However, the display in the above-mentioned prior art is used as a reference material for the player to check the number of payouts (disbursed balls) of the gaming machine and to decide whether or not to play a game, for example It can not be determined whether the predetermined ratio is within the range of predetermined design values.
The problem to be solved by the invention at the outset is to display game information which can be used to determine whether a predetermined ratio of balls or the like is within a predetermined design value range. Furthermore, in performing the display, it is to be made not to be mistaken as having failed.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the First Invention 47 (Here, the corresponding embodiments will be described in parentheses.)
The first invention (26th embodiment) is
A plurality of types (5 items) of game information (advancing section ratio, continuous character ratio (6000 times), character ratio (6000 times), continuous character ratio (total), character ratio (total)) for a predetermined time (total time) Equipped with a display unit (management information display LED 74 (digits 6 to 9)) that can be switched and displayed every approximately 5 seconds,
In the display of game information for the predetermined time, when the game information is displayed in a lit state (for example, in the case of displaying the advantageous section ratio, the number of games is "175000" or more and the ratio is less than "70" When and at least a part of the information of the game information is displayed in a blinking manner (for example, in the case of displaying the advantageous section ratio, the identification segment is displayed in a blinking manner when the number of games is less than "175000" times) When it is “70” or more, the ratio segment is displayed blinking),
When at least a part of the game information is displayed in a blinking manner, the lighting and extinguishing are alternately repeated every specific time (about 0.3 seconds),
In the case where the next game information is displayed after displaying the game information for the predetermined time, when at least a part of the information on the next game is blinked, the predetermined time is counted (the number of interruptions “2144” 209) (step S2511 in FIG. 209), and starts counting the specific time (counting of the number of interrupts "134") (step S2518 in FIG. 209).
It is characterized by

(C) Effects of the First Invention 47 According to the first invention, it is possible to match the timing at which the display of game information is switched to the next game information and the blink start timing when the game information is blinked. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game information from being turned on for only a moment or to turn off the game information for only a moment, and it is possible to prevent the display section from being misidentified as faulty.

48. Original invention 48
(A) Problem to be solved by the first invention 48 The same as the first invention 47.
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the First Invention 48 (The corresponding embodiments will be described in parentheses.)
The first invention (26th embodiment) is
A plurality of types (5 items) of game information (advancing section ratio, continuous character ratio (6000 times), character ratio (6000 times), continuous character ratio (total), character ratio (total)) for a predetermined time (total time) Equipped with a display unit (management information display LED 74 (digits 6 to 9)) that can be switched and displayed every approximately 5 seconds,
In the display of game information for the predetermined time, when the game information is displayed in a lit state (for example, in the case of displaying the advantageous section ratio, the number of games is "175000" or more and the ratio is less than "70" When and at least a part of the information of the game information is displayed in a blinking manner (for example, in the case of displaying the advantageous section ratio, the identification segment is displayed in a blinking manner when the number of games is less than "175000" times) When it is “70” or more, the ratio segment is displayed blinking),
When at least a part of the game information is displayed in a blinking manner, the lighting and extinguishing are alternately repeated every specific time (about 0.3 seconds),
Interrupt processing (Fig. 190) can be performed at fixed time intervals (2.235 ms),
When the number of interrupts is “Y” (2144), it is determined that the predetermined time has elapsed (“Yes” in step S 2512 in FIG. 209),
When the number of interrupts is "X" (134), it is determined that the specific time has elapsed ("Yes" in step S2519 in FIG. 209),
Y = 2 x n x X ("n" is a natural number) (2144 = 2 x 8 x 134)
It is characterized in that it is set to satisfy.
(C) Effects of the First Invention 48 The same as the First Invention 47.

49. Original invention 49
(A) Problem to be Solved by the First Invention 49 The first invention relates to a gaming machine capable of switching and displaying a plurality of types of game information in a predetermined order at predetermined time intervals.
Conventionally, a gaming machine has been known that stores a cumulative value of the number of payouts and displays a graph (so-called slump graph) indicating the transition of the cumulative value of the number of payouts (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-125121).
However, the display in the above-mentioned prior art is used as a reference material for the player to check the number of payouts (disbursed balls) of the gaming machine and to decide whether or not to play a game, for example It can not be determined whether the predetermined ratio is within the range of predetermined design values.
The problem to be solved by the invention at the outset is to provide a display capable of judging whether or not a predetermined ratio of balls or the like is within a predetermined design value range. Furthermore, appropriate processing for displaying the game information is executed at the time of normal power on and at the time of transition to the setting change state.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the First Invention 49 (The corresponding embodiments will be described in parentheses.)
The first invention (26th embodiment) is
Game information of multiple types (5 items) (“1” advantageous section ratio, “2” continuous character ratio (6000 times), “3” character ratio (6000 times), “4” continuous character ratio (total) , “5” role ratio (total) in a predetermined order (“1” → “2” →... →→ “5” → “1” → “2” →...) For a predetermined time (approximately 5 With a display unit (management information display LED 74 (digits 6 to 9)) that can be switched and displayed every second),
A counter for counting the predetermined time (display switching time of the address “F290 (H)”);
The power is turned off during the display of the "n" (n ≧ 2) -th game information (for example, when displaying the continuous character ratio (6000 times) when "n = 2"), and the setting key switch When the power is turned on under the condition that is off (initialization of the unused area in step S2158 in FIG. 187), the display of the "n" -th game information and the counting of the predetermined time can be resumed,
When the power is turned off while the "n" -th game information is being displayed, and the power is turned on with the setting key switch turned on (when the process of changing the setting shown in FIG. 186 is performed), After the value is cleared (step S2130 in FIG. 186), the display of the first game information (“1” advantageous section ratio) is started (in FIG. 209, step S2517), and the counting of the predetermined time is started. (Step S2511 in FIG. 209)
It is characterized by

(C) Effects of the First Invention 49 According to the first invention, since the value of the counter is not initialized at the time of normal power on (setting up) not to shift to the setting change state, display of gaming information from the state immediately before power off It can be resumed. On the other hand, when transitioning to the setting change state, the value of the counter is cleared, so that it is possible to start from the display of the first game information. As described above, processing for displaying game information can be appropriately performed at the time of normal power-on and at the time of transition to the setting change state.

50. Original invention 50
(A) Problem to be Solved by the First Invention 50 The first invention relates to a gaming machine capable of switching and displaying a plurality of types of game information in a predetermined order at predetermined time intervals.
Conventionally, a gaming machine has been known that stores a cumulative value of the number of payouts and displays a graph (so-called slump graph) indicating the transition of the cumulative value of the number of payouts (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-125121).
However, the display in the above-mentioned prior art is used as a reference material for the player to check the number of payouts (disbursed balls) of the gaming machine and to decide whether or not to play a game, for example It can not be determined whether the predetermined ratio is within the range of predetermined design values.
The problem to be solved by the invention at the outset is to display game information which can be used to determine whether a predetermined ratio of balls or the like is within a predetermined design value range. Furthermore, when transitioning to the setting change state, appropriate processing for displaying the game information is executed depending on whether or not the specific condition is satisfied.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the First Invention 50 (The corresponding embodiments will be described in parentheses.)
The first invention (26th embodiment) is
Game information of multiple types (5 items) (“1” advantageous section ratio, “2” continuous character ratio (6000 times), “3” character ratio (6000 times), “4” continuous character ratio (total) , “5” role ratio (total) in a predetermined order (“1” → “2” →... →→ “5” → “1” → “2” →...) For a predetermined time (approximately 5 Equipped with a display unit (management information display LED 74 (digits 6 to 9)) that can be switched and displayed every second),
The game information has identification information (identification segment) and numerical information (ratio segment),
Numeric information storage area for storing numerical information in gaming information (advantage ratio data of address "F285 (H)" to symbol ratio (total data) of address "F289 (H)"),
A counter for counting the predetermined time (display switching time of the address “F290 (H)”);
The power is turned off during the display of the "n" (n ≧ 2) -th game information (for example, when displaying the continuous character ratio (6000 times) when "n = 2"), and the setting key switch If the power is turned on under the condition that the power is on, the condition under the specific condition is satisfied (in FIG. 185, the checksum in step S2104 is normal and the power failure recovery is normal (Fig. 185). During 186, in the case of “Yes” in step S2128), based on the value stored in the numerical information storage area and the value of the counter, the display of the “n” -th game information and the counting of the predetermined time (The ratio display number of address "F28E (H)" and the display switching time of address "F290 (H)" are not initialized),
When the power is turned off while the "n" -th game information is being displayed and the power is turned on under the condition that the setting key switch is turned on, a condition that does not satisfy a specific condition (FIG. 185, step When the checksum of S2104 is abnormal and / or when the power failure recovery is abnormal ("No" in step S2128 in FIG. 186), the value stored in the numerical value information storage area After the value of the counter is cleared (steps S2129 and S2130 in FIG. 186), display of the first game information with numerical information as an initial value is started (step S2517 in FIG. 209) and the predetermined time Start counting (step S2511 in FIG. 209).
It is characterized by

(C) Effects of the First Invention 50 According to the first invention, when transitioning to the setting change state, the processing for displaying the game information is appropriately determined depending on whether or not the specific condition is satisfied. Can be done. In addition, even under the condition that does not meet the specific condition, the display of the first game information with the numerical value as the initial value is started, so the message that the specific condition is not met (error) is not displayed. It is possible to immediately shift to the display of game information.

51. Original invention 51
(A) Problems to be Solved by the First Invention 51 The first invention relates to a gaming machine capable of displaying a plurality of types of game information.
Conventionally, a gaming machine has been known that stores a cumulative value of the number of payouts and displays a graph (so-called slump graph) indicating the transition of the cumulative value of the number of payouts (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-125121).
However, the display in the above-mentioned prior art is used as a reference material for the player to check the number of payouts (disbursed balls) of the gaming machine and to decide whether or not to play a game, for example It can not be determined whether the predetermined ratio is within the range of predetermined design values.
The problem to be solved by the invention at the outset is to display game information which can be used to determine whether a predetermined ratio of balls or the like is within a predetermined design value range. Furthermore, when it is necessary to blink the game information, it is possible to execute appropriate processing for the blink display of the game information according to the situation when the power is turned on.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the First Invention 51 (The corresponding embodiments will be described in parentheses.)
The first solution means (26th embodiment) is
It is possible to display multiple types (five items) of game information (advancing section ratio, continuous character ratio (6000 times), character ratio (6000 times), continuous character ratio (total), character ratio (total)) Display unit (management information display LED 74 (digits 6 to 9)),
In the case where the game information is lighted and when at least a part of the game information is blinked (see FIG. 184), for example, when the advantageous section ratio is displayed, when the number of games is less than "175000" times, Blinks the identification segment),
When at least a part of the game information is displayed in a blinking manner, the lighting and extinguishing are alternately repeated every specific time (about 0.3 seconds),
And a counter (flashing switching time of the address "F292 (H)") for counting the specific time,
The power is turned off when at least a part of the specific game information blinks and the at least a part of the information is off, and the power is turned on with the setting key switch turned on. When (when transitioning to the setting change state), counting of the specific time starts, and the at least partial information of the specific game information blinks so that the at least partial information starts to light. (The step S2130 in FIG. 186 initializes the address “F292 (H)” of the RWM 53, and the initial value “134 (D)” is set in step S2520 in FIG. 209)
It is characterized by

The second solution means (26th embodiment) is
It is possible to display multiple types (five items) of game information (advancing section ratio, continuous character ratio (6000 times), character ratio (6000 times), continuous character ratio (total), character ratio (total)) Display unit (management information display LED 74 (digits 6 to 9)),
The game information has identification information (identification segment) and numerical information (ratio segment),
When both the identification information and the numerical information are lighted and when at least one of the identification information and the numerical information is blinked (see FIG. 184, for example, when the advantageous section ratio is displayed, the number of games is "175000") When it is less than the number of times, the identification segment is displayed in a blinking manner, and when the ratio is "70" or more, the ratio segment is displayed in a blinking manner.
When at least one of the identification information and the numerical information is displayed in a blinking manner, lighting and extinguishing are alternately repeated every a specific time (about 0.3 seconds),
And a counter (flashing switching time of the address "F292 (H)") for counting the specific time,
The power is turned off when at least one of the identification information and the numerical information blinks and the at least one of the information is turned off, and the power is turned on with the setting key switch turned on. At the time of transition to the setting change state, at least one of identification information and numerical information is displayed in a blinking manner so that counting of the specific time starts and the at least one information starts from lighting (FIG. 186). In step S2130, initialize the address "F292 (H)" of the RWM 53, and set the initial value "134" in step S2520 in FIG.
It is characterized by

(C) Effects of the First Invention 51 According to the first invention, game information can be checked more quickly. Also, when the count of the specific time before turning off the power is taken over to the setting change state and the display of game information is started in the setting change state, it can be prevented from turning on only for a moment and then turning off. . This makes it possible to prevent the display unit from being mistakenly identified as broken.

52. Original invention 52
(A) Problem to be Solved by the Invention 52 The invention at the beginning relates to a gaming machine which stores a value corresponding to the total number of games or the number of games in a predetermined game section.
Conventionally, a gaming machine has been known that stores a cumulative value of the number of payouts and displays a graph (so-called slump graph) indicating the transition of the cumulative value of the number of payouts (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-125121).
However, the display in the above-mentioned prior art is used as a reference material for the player to check the number of payouts (sent balls) of the gaming machine and to decide whether or not to play a game, and for the total number of games It was not possible to determine the ratio of the number of games played in the predetermined game section.
The problem to be solved by the invention at first is to make it possible to determine the ratio of the number of games in a predetermined game section to the total number of games. Furthermore, when the ratio is calculated, control is performed so as to be a correct value.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of Initial Invention 52 (The corresponding embodiments will be described in parentheses.)
The first solution means (26th embodiment) is
A first storage area (total game number counter with address “F26D (H)”) storing a value corresponding to the total game number;
A second storage area (advantage zone game frequency counter of address “F270 (H)”) storing a value corresponding to the game frequency of the predetermined game interval (advantage zone);
Third storage area (address “F28B (H)” upper limit flag stores information indicating whether the value stored in the first storage area has reached a specific value (3 bytes full (FFFFFF (H))) Of the D0 bit) and of the
It is determined whether the value stored in the first storage area has reached the specific value (step S2255 in FIG. 192);
When the value stored in the first storage area reaches the specific value, information indicating that the specific value has been reached is stored in the third storage area (steps S2256 and S2259).
When information indicating that the specific value has been reached is stored in the third memory area (when "Yes" is determined in step S2236 in FIG. 191), even during the predetermined game section , And do not update the values stored in the first storage area and the second storage area (do not execute the processing of steps S2237 and S2238)
It is characterized by
According to a second solution, in the first solution,
The specific value is an upper limit value ("FFFFFF (H)") of a storage capacity (3 bytes) storable in the first storage area.

(C) Effects of the First Invention 52 According to the first invention, it is possible to prevent the storage capacity of the first memory area from being exceeded and updating the value even after overflow occurs. In particular, when the value stored in the first storage area has reached the specific value, the value of the second storage area is not updated, so unnecessary updates can be eliminated. Furthermore, by updating the value of the second storage area when digit overflow occurs in the first storage area, it is prevented that the number of games in a predetermined game section can not be calculated correctly with respect to the total number of games can do.

53. Initial invention 53
(A) Problem to be Solved by the First Invention 53 The first invention relates to a gaming machine which stores a value corresponding to the total number of games or the number of games in a predetermined game section.
Conventionally, a gaming machine has been known that stores a cumulative value of the number of payouts and displays a graph (so-called slump graph) indicating the transition of the cumulative value of the number of payouts (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-125121).
However, the display in the above-mentioned prior art is used as a reference material for the player to check the number of payouts (disbursed balls) of the gaming machine and to decide whether or not to play a game. It was not possible to determine the proportion of the number of payouts during the special game.
The problem to be solved by the present invention is to make it possible to determine the ratio of the number of payouts during special games to the total number of payouts of game media. Furthermore, when the ratio is calculated, control is performed so as to be a correct value.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the First Invention 53 (Here, the corresponding embodiments will be described in parentheses.)
The first solution means (26th embodiment) is
A first storage area (total payout (total) counter of address "F27C (H)") storing a value corresponding to the total payout number of gaming media;
A continuous game payout (cumulative) counter of a second storage area (address “F27F (H)” that stores a value corresponding to the number of payouts of gaming media during special game (when a bonus product is activated or continuous bonus product activated) Or a character product payout (cumulative) counter at the address "F282 (H)",
Third storage area (address “F28B (H)” upper limit flag stores information indicating whether the value stored in the first storage area has reached a specific value (3 bytes full (FFFFFF (H))) Of the D1 bit of
It is determined whether the value stored in the first storage area has reached the specific value (step S2255 in FIG. 192);
When the value stored in the first storage area has reached the specific value, information indicating that the specific value has been reached is stored in the third storage area (steps S2256 and S2259).
When information indicating that the specific value is reached is stored in the third storage area, the information is stored in the first storage area and the second storage area even if game media are paid out during the special game. The value is not updated (in FIG. 196, when “Yes” is determined in step S2301, the processing of steps S2302 to S2304 is not performed. When “Yes” is determined in step S2342 in FIG. 199). , Steps S2343 to S2345 are not performed.)
It is characterized by
According to a second solution, in the first solution,
The specific value is an upper limit value ("FFFFFF (H)") of a storage capacity (3 bytes) storable in the first storage area.

(C) Effects of the First Invention 53 According to the first invention, the storage capacity of the first memory area is exceeded, and it is possible to prevent the value from being updated even after overflow occurs. In particular, when the value stored in the first storage area has reached the specific value, the value of the second storage area is not updated, so unnecessary updates can be eliminated. Furthermore, by updating the value of the second storage area when a digit overflow occurs in the first storage area, it is possible to prevent that the number of payouts during this game for the total payout number can not be calculated correctly. be able to.

54. Original invention 54
(A) Problem to be Solved by the First Invention 54 The first invention relates to a gaming machine capable of reading the number of payouts of gaming media at a timing necessary for control processing.
Conventionally, a gaming machine has been known that stores a cumulative value of the number of payouts and displays a graph (so-called slump graph) indicating the transition of the cumulative value of the number of payouts (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-125121).
As in the above-mentioned prior art, the method of simply updating the cumulative value of the number of game media paid out is easy in control.
On the other hand, in the gaming machine, at the time of winning a small winning combination, the number of payouts corresponding to the small winning combination is stored in the RWM, and the number of RWM payouts is reduced by “1” for each payout Control may be performed.
In the case where such control is performed, when all the gaming media have been paid out, the number of payouts stored in the RWM becomes “0”. Therefore, after the payout of the game medium is completed, the number of payouts in the game can not be read. For this reason, there is a problem that after the end of the payout of the game medium, it is not possible to read the number of payouts in the game and calculate the ratio etc. regarding the number of payouts of the game medium.
The problem to be solved by the invention at first is to enable calculation processing such as a ratio related to the number of payouts of game media, even after the payout of game media is completed.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of Initial Invention 54 (The corresponding embodiments will be described in parentheses.)
The first invention (26th embodiment) is
The first storage area (the medal payout number data of the address "F040 (H)") storing the number of payouts of gaming media when the small winning combination is made and the medal payout number of the second storage area (the address "F041 (H)") Buffer),
The number of payouts stored in the first storage area is subtracted along with the payout of gaming media,
The number of payouts stored in the second storage area is maintained without being reduced even by the payout of gaming media (FIG. 189, step S2213),
After the payout of gaming media (step S2189 in FIG. 188) is performed, predetermined calculations related to gaming are performed using the number of payouts of gaming media in the gaming (steps S2193 in FIG. 188, and steps S2239 to S2241 in FIG. 191). , S2243) can be executed,
When executing the predetermined operation, the number of payouts stored in the second storage area is used (FIG. 197).
It is characterized by

(C) Effects of the First Invention 54 According to the first invention, since the number of payouts stored in the second storage area is used when the predetermined calculation after the payout processing is performed, the predetermined calculation is the payout processing It can be performed at different times. In addition, even when a predetermined operation is performed, the payout process is not affected.

55. Original invention 55
(A) Problem to be Solved by the First Invention 55 The first invention relates to a gaming machine which displays a payout ratio of gaming media.
Conventionally, a gaming machine has been known that stores a cumulative value of the number of payouts and displays a graph (so-called slump graph) indicating the transition of the cumulative value of the number of payouts (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-125121).
However, the display in the above-mentioned prior art is used as a reference material for the player to check the number of payouts of the gaming machine and to decide whether or not to play a game, for example, the design value in which the number of payouts is predetermined. It was not possible to judge whether it was within the range of
The problem to be solved by the invention at first is to display a payout ratio which can be judged whether or not it is within a predetermined design value range. Furthermore, as a result of calculating the payout ratio, for example, when the value can not be displayed, the calculated payout ratio can be corrected.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the First Invention 55 (Note that the corresponding embodiments will be described in parentheses.)
The first solution means (26th embodiment) is
A first storage area (total payout (total) counter of address "F27C (H)") storing a value corresponding to the total payout number of gaming media;
A second storage area (for example, a feature payout (total) counter with an address “F282 (H)”) storing a value corresponding to the number of payouts of gaming media in the special game;
Based on the values stored in the first storage area and the second storage area, the payout ratio indicating the number of payouts of gaming media during the special game to the total number of payouts of gaming media can be calculated,
A third storage area for storing a value corresponding to the calculated payout ratio (for example, character ratio (cumulative value) data of the address “F289 (H)”);
A display unit (management information display LED 74 (digits 6 to 9)) capable of displaying the payout ratio based on the value stored in the third storage area;
As a result of calculating the payout ratio, when the specific value (100%) is obtained, the specific value is changed to the correction value (99%) (step S2405 in FIG. 202), and the correction value is stored in the third storage area. It is characterized in that it is stored (step S2406), and the payout ratio can be displayed on the display unit based on the correction value stored in the third storage area.

The second solution is
Display unit (management information display LED 74 (digits 6 to 9)),
A first storage area (total payout (total) counter of address "F27C (H)") storing a value corresponding to the total payout number of gaming media;
A second storage area (for example, a feature payout (total) counter with an address “F282 (H)”) storing a value corresponding to the number of payouts of gaming media in the special game;
If it is determined that the value stored in the first storage area matches the value stored in the second storage area and the value stored in the first storage area is not “0”, the third storage area For example, the correction value (99 (H)) is stored in the character ratio (total data) of address "F 289 (H)", and the payout ratio is displayed on the display unit based on the correction value stored in the third storage area. It is characterized in that it can be displayed on

The third solution is
Display unit (management information display LED 74 (digits 6 to 9)),
A first storage area (total payout (total) counter of address "F27C (H)") storing a value corresponding to the total payout number of gaming media;
A second storage area (for example, a feature payout (total) counter with an address “F282 (H)”) storing a value corresponding to the number of payouts of gaming media in the special game;
If it is determined that the value stored in the first storage area matches the value stored in the second storage area and the value stored in the second storage area is not “0”, the third storage area For example, the correction value (99 (H)) is stored in the character ratio (total data) of address "F 289 (H)", and the payout ratio is displayed on the display unit based on the correction value stored in It is characterized in that it can be displayed on

(C) Effects of the First Invention 55 According to the first invention, since the payout ratio indicating the number of payouts in the special game to the total payout number is displayed, it is easily determined whether the payout ratio is an appropriate value. be able to.
In addition, when the calculated payout ratio is a specific value, the payout ratio is changed to the correction value, so that the payout ratio can be set to a value suitable for display.
Furthermore, according to the second solution means or the third solution means, when the value stored in the first storage area or the second storage area is “0”, the change to the correction value is prevented. be able to.

56. Original invention 56
(A) Problem to be Solved by the First Invention 56 The first invention relates to a gaming machine which stores a value capable of calculating the payout ratio of gaming media.
Conventionally, a gaming machine has been known that stores a cumulative value of the number of payouts and displays a graph (so-called slump graph) indicating the transition of the cumulative value of the number of payouts (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-125121).
However, the display in the above-mentioned prior art is used as a reference material for the player to check the number of payouts of the gaming machine and to decide whether or not to play a game, for example, the design value in which the number of payouts is predetermined. It was not possible to judge whether it was within the range of
Further, since the accumulated value of the number of payouts can not be stored infinitely, and the storage capacity of the RWM is limited, the upper limit value is reached someday. However, when the upper limit is reached, if no processing is performed, the storage area overflows and the correct value can not be stored.
The problem to be solved by the invention at first is to store a value that can be calculated a payout ratio that can determine whether it is within the range of a predetermined design value. Furthermore, according to whether or not the number of payouts stored has reached the upper limit value of the storage capacity of the storage area, a more correct value can be stored even after reaching the upper limit value. .

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the First Invention 56 (Here, in parentheses, the corresponding embodiments will be described.)
The first invention (26th embodiment) is
A first storage area (total payout (total) counter of address "F27C (H)") storing a value corresponding to the total payout number of gaming media;
A second storage area (for example, a feature payout (total) counter with an address “F282 (H)”) storing a value corresponding to the number of payouts of gaming media in the special game;
When there are payouts of gaming media during the special game, the values of the first storage area and the second storage area are updated,
If it does not exceed the upper limit of the storage capacity of the first storage area even if the value corresponding to the number of payouts in the game is added to the value stored in the first storage area, it corresponds to the number of payouts in the game The value is added to the value stored in the first storage area (in FIG. 197, when the process proceeds to step S 2322, the process proceeds to FIG. 194, and when “No” in step S 2282 or “No” in step S 2284 in FIG. End counting up),
When the value corresponding to the number of payouts in the game is added to the value stored in the first storage area and exceeds the upper limit value of the storage capacity of the first storage area (in FIG. 194, "Yes" in step S2284) Calculates the correction value (the number-of-payouts upper limit buffer value in step S2286 in FIG. 194) which becomes the upper limit value of the storage capacity of the first storage area when the value is added to the value stored in the first storage area The correction value is added to the first storage area and the second storage area (step S2287)
It is characterized by

(C) Effects of the First Invention 56 According to the first invention, since the values corresponding to the total number of payouts and the number of payouts during the special game are stored, the ratio of the number of payouts during the special game to the total number of payouts is calculated. Can be displayed. Further, when the value corresponding to the total number of payouts exceeds the upper limit value of the storage capacity of the first storage area, the upper limit value is stored, so that the overflow of the first storage area is prevented and a more correct value is stored. Can be

57. Original invention 57
(A) Problem to be Solved by the First Invention 57 The first invention relates to a gaming machine which displays a payout ratio of gaming media.
Conventionally, a gaming machine has been known that stores a cumulative value of the number of payouts and displays a graph (so-called slump graph) indicating the transition of the cumulative value of the number of payouts (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-125121).
However, the display in the above-mentioned prior art is used as a reference material for the player to check the number of payouts of the gaming machine and to decide whether or not to play a game, for example, the design value in which the number of payouts is predetermined. It was not possible to judge whether it was within the range of
Furthermore, even with the graph showing the transition of the cumulative value of the number of payouts, even if the number of payouts is an abnormal value among the specific number of games, it can not be easily determined.
The problem to be solved by the invention at first is to store a value capable of calculating a payout ratio which can determine whether or not it is within a predetermined design value range during a predetermined number of games.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of Initial Invention 57 (The corresponding embodiments will be described in parentheses.)
The first solution means (26th embodiment) is
First payout number storage area (total payout ring buffer of addresses “F213 (H)” to “F22 F (H)” for storing a value corresponding to the number of payouts of gaming media among “X” (400) game counts ,
The second payout number storage area (for example, the address “F24F (H)” to “F26B (H)” bonus payouts storing the value corresponding to the number of payouts of the special game during the “X” game count Ring buffer),
“X × Y” (6000) third payout number storage area (total payout (6000 times) counter of address “F273 (H)”) storing a value corresponding to the number of payouts of gaming media between the number of times played,
Fourth payout number storage area (for example, feature payout (6000 times) counter at address "F279 (H)") storing a value corresponding to the payout number of gaming media in the special game during the "X × Y" game count )When,
Payout ratio storage area (for example, address ratio (6000 times) data of address “F 287 (H)” storing a value corresponding to the payout ratio indicating the number of payouts of gaming media in special game to the total payout number of gaming media ) And
Each of the first payout number storage area and the second payout number storage area is provided “Y” (15),
"N"("n" = 1 to Y) first payout storage area (for example, total payout ring buffer 0) and the second payout storage value corresponding to the payout number of gaming media during the number of times of "X" games When it is stored in the area (for example, the feature payout ring buffer 0), the value corresponding to the number of payouts of gaming media during the next “X” number of games is “n + 1” (where “n” = Y Stores “n + 1” = 1.) In the first payout storage area (for example, total payout ring buffer 1) and the second payout storage area (for example, bonus payout ring buffer 1),
Based on the values stored in the third payout count storage area and the fourth payout count storage area for each “X” game count, the number of payouts during the special game with respect to the total payout count during the “X × Y” game count A value corresponding to the payout ratio indicated is calculated (in FIG. 202, steps S2385 to S2400), and the value stored in the payout ratio storage area is updated based on the calculation result (step S2406),
In the game in which the value stored in the payout ratio storage area is updated after the “X × Y” game,
a) The value corresponding to the number of payouts during the number of times of “X” game from “X × Y-1” game (5999 game before) to “X × Y-X” game (5600 game) is stored. A value stored in the third payout amount storage area by subtracting the value "Z1" of the 1 payout number storage area from the value stored in the third payout number storage area (steps S2450 and S2452 in FIG. 205) Is updated (step S2454),
b) The value corresponding to the number of payouts during the number of “X” games from “X × Y-1” (before 5999 games) to “X × Y-X” games (before 5600 games) is stored. The value stored in the fourth payout number storage area by subtracting the value “Z2” of the two payout number storage area from the value stored in the fourth payout number storage area (steps S2450 and S2452 in FIG. 205) Is updated (step S2454)
It is characterized by

According to a second solution, in the first solution,
In the game in which the value stored in the payout ratio storage area is updated after the “X × Y” game, the value “Z1” of the first payout number storage area and the value “Z2” of the second payout number storage area are cleared. (Step S2453 in FIG. 205),
Between the “X × Y” game number of times and the “X” number of games starting from the next game after updating the value stored in the payout ratio storage area,
a) A value corresponding to the number of payouts of the game medium is stored in the first payout number storage area where the value "Z1" is cleared,
b) A value corresponding to the number of payouts of gaming media in the special game is stored in the second payout number storage area where the value “Z2” is cleared.

(C) Effects of the First Invention 57 According to the first invention, “X” times between “X × Y” game times are used for each “X” game frequency using “Y” first memory amount areas and second memory areas. The payout ratio can be stored. Thereby, the payout ratio can be displayed by reading the payout ratio.

58. Original invention 58
(A) Problems to be Solved by Invention 58 The invention relates to a gaming machine that displays the payout ratio of gaming media.
Conventionally, a gaming machine has been known that stores a cumulative value of the number of payouts and displays a graph (so-called slump graph) indicating the transition of the cumulative value of the number of payouts (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2007-125121).
However, the display in the above-mentioned prior art is used as a reference material for the player to check the number of payouts of the gaming machine and to decide whether or not to play a game, for example, the design value in which the number of payouts is predetermined. It was not possible to judge whether it was within the range of
Similarly, in the case of a so-called AT, it can not be determined whether or not the AT section for all game sections is within a predetermined design value range.
On the other hand, when calculating the ratio by which it is possible to determine whether the payout number or AT is within the range of a predetermined design value, calculation may take time if executed by a one-chip microprocessor specific to a gaming machine. If the operation time is long, there is a possibility that other processes may be affected.
The problem originally intended to be solved by the present invention is to use a one-chip microprocessor specific to a gaming machine to calculate a ratio capable of judging whether it is within a predetermined design value range simply and in a short time. It is.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the First Invention 58 (The corresponding embodiments will be described in parentheses.)
The first solution means (the twenty-sixth embodiment etc.) is
A first storage area (total game number counter with address “F26D (H)”) storing a value corresponding to the total game number;
And a second storage area (advantage zone game frequency counter of address “F270 (H)”) for storing a value corresponding to the game frequency in a predetermined game interval (advantage zone),
The value stored in the first storage area is "X",
The value stored in the second storage area is "Y"
And when
a) “10 × Y” is calculated by multiplying “Y” by 10 (in FIG. 202, the calculated value set in step S2389 (in FIG. 203, steps S2411 to S2413)),
b) Subtract “X” from “10 × Y”, and if the value after the subtraction is “X” or more, by repeatedly subtracting “X” from the value after the subtraction,
0 ≦ (10 × Y−X × R1) <X
Calculating “R1” satisfying the condition (in FIG. 202, step S2391 (FIG. 204; ratio calculation execution)),
c) “10 × Y ′” is obtained by multiplying “Y ′” by 10 when “10 × Y−X × R1 = Y ′” is calculated (in FIG. 202, the calculated value set in step S2399 (FIG. 203 (FIG. 203) Step S2411 to S2413)),
d) Subtracting “X” from “10 × Y ′”, and if the value after the subtraction is “X” or more, by repeatedly subtracting “X” from the value after the subtraction,
0 ≦ (10 × Y′−X × R2) <X
Calculate “R2” that satisfies the condition (in FIG. 202, step S2400 (FIG. 204; ratio calculation execution)),
e) A specific ratio in which the tens digit is “R1” and the ones digit is “R2” is calculated (in FIG. 202, step S2401)
It is characterized by

The second solution means (the 26th embodiment etc.) is
A first storage area (total game number counter with address “F26D (H)”) storing a value corresponding to the total game number;
And a second storage area (advantage zone game frequency counter with address “F270 (H)”) for storing a value corresponding to the game frequency in a predetermined game interval.
The value stored in the first storage area is "X",
The value stored in the second storage area is "Y"
And when
a) “10 × Y” is calculated by multiplying “Y” by 10 (in FIG. 202, the calculated value set in step S2389 (in FIG. 203, steps S2411 to S2413)),
b) Subtract “X” from “10 × Y”, and if the value after the subtraction is “X” or more, by repeatedly subtracting “X” from the value after the subtraction,
0 ≦ (10 × Y−X × R1) <X
Calculating “R1” satisfying the condition (in FIG. 202, step S2391 (FIG. 204; ratio calculation execution)),
c) When "10 '= Y'", if "10 '= Y'", a specific ratio where the tens place is "R1" and the one place is "0" It is characterized by calculating.

According to a third solution, in the first or second solution,
A display unit (management information display LED 74 (digits 6 to 9)) capable of displaying the calculated specific ratio;
As a result of calculating the specific ratio, when it becomes the specific value (100%) (when “Yes” in step S2404 in FIG. 202), the specific value is changed to the correction value (99%) (step S2405) The correction value may be displayed on the display unit as a specific ratio.

(C) Effects of the First Invention 58 According to the first invention, the ratio can be calculated by a method of dividing into tens and ones and repeating subtraction respectively. As a result, since only 20 subtractions at the maximum are required, the operation time (processing time) can be shortened, and the operation can be simplified.

59. Original invention 59
(A) Problem to be Solved by the First Invention 59 The first invention relates to a slot machine provided with a display unit having a plurality of segments and displaying on this display unit operation information of a stop switch which is advantageous to the player. .
In the conventional slot machine, the main control board determines whether or not to notify the player of stop switch operation information which is advantageous to the player, and when it is determined to notify, the operation information is connected to the main control board There is known a slot machine for displaying on a 7-segment display (see, for example, JP-A-2014-150881).
Here, the operation information of the stop switch which is advantageous to the player is important information related to the presence or absence of the payout of the medal.
However, if the segment of the 7-segment display is broken or there is a failure in the signal line for sending signals to the segment, the operation information of the stop switch that is advantageous to the player is not displayed correctly on the 7-segment display. This may cause a disadvantage to the player.
Therefore, the problem to be solved by the invention is to provide a slot machine having a display unit (a 7-segment display) having a plurality of segments and displaying on this display unit operation information of a stop switch which is advantageous to the player, It is possible to check whether there is a failure of a segment and whether there is a failure of a signal line that transmits a signal to the segment.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of Initial Invention 59 (The corresponding embodiments will be described in parentheses.)
The first solution means (28th embodiment) is
It has a first display unit (digit 3) and a second display unit (digit 4) that have at least seven segments (segments A to G) that can be lit and display predetermined information by lighting of the segments;
Under the condition of displaying information (the number of medals acquired) on the number of acquired game media (when proceeding to the medal payout process by the winning of step S4015 in the main process of FIG. 227), the first interrupt process (LED display counter value) The first digit (upper digit) of the information relating to the number of acquired game media is displayed on the first display portion in the interrupt processing when “00100000 (B)” is selected, and the second interrupt processing (LED display counter value is The second digit (lower digit) of the information relating to the number of acquired game media is displayed on the second display section in the interrupt processing of "01000000 (B)",
Under circumstances where the operation information (pushing order instruction information) of the stop switch (42) which is advantageous to the player is displayed (when the process proceeds to the pushing order instruction number setting process of step S4012 in the main process of FIG. 227), at least Displaying at least a part of the operation information on the first display unit in the first interrupt process;
Under circumstances where the set value relating to the player's advantage can be changed (when the process proceeds to steps S4001 and S4002 in the setting change process of FIG. 226), at least seven of the first display portions have in the first interrupt process. It is characterized by lighting individual segments.

The second solution is
It has at least seven segments that can be lit, and has a first display unit and a second display unit that display predetermined information by lighting the segments,
In the first display unit and the second display unit, a segment signal indicating which segment is to be lighted is shared.
Under the situation where information regarding the number of game media acquired is displayed, a segment signal is output to display the first digit of the information regarding the number of game media acquired in the first interrupt processing on the first display unit, and Outputting a segment signal so as to display the second digit of the information relating to the number of game media acquired in the second interrupt processing in the second interrupt processing,
Under the condition of displaying the operation information of the stop switch which is advantageous to the player, at least a segment signal is outputted so that at least a part of the operation information is displayed on the first display portion in the first interrupt process,
In a situation where it is possible to change the set value relating to the player's advantage, the segment signal is output so as to light at least seven segments of the second display at least in the second interrupt process. I assume.

The third solution is
It has at least seven segments that can be lit, and has a first display unit and a second display unit that display predetermined information by lighting the segments,
Under the situation where information regarding the number of game media acquired is displayed, the first display of the first digit of information regarding the number of game media acquired is displayed in the first interrupt process, and the game medium is displayed in the second interrupt process. Display the second digit of the information on the number of
Under the condition where the operation information of the stop switch which is advantageous to the player is displayed, at least a part of the operation information is displayed on the second display unit in the second interruption process,
In a situation where it is possible to change the set value relating to the player's degree of advantage, at least seven segments included in the second display section are lit in the second interruption process.

The fourth solution is
It has at least seven segments that can be lit, and has a first display unit and a second display unit that display predetermined information by lighting the segments,
In the first display unit and the second display unit, a segment signal indicating which segment is to be lighted is shared.
Under the situation where information regarding the number of game media acquired is displayed, a segment signal is output to display the first digit of the information regarding the number of game media acquired in the first interrupt processing on the first display unit, and Outputting a segment signal so as to display the second digit of the information relating to the number of game media acquired in the second interrupt processing in the second interrupt processing,
Under the condition of displaying the operation information of the stop switch which is advantageous to the player, a segment signal is outputted so that at least a part of the operation information is displayed on the second display unit in the second interrupt process
A segment signal is output so as to light at least seven segments of the first display portion at least in the first interrupt processing under a situation where the set value relating to the player's advantage can be changed. I assume.

The fifth solution is
It has at least seven segments that can be lit, and has a first display unit and a second display unit that display predetermined information by lighting the segments,
Under the situation where information regarding the number of game media acquired is displayed, the first display of the first digit of information regarding the number of game media acquired is displayed in the first interrupt process, and the game medium is displayed in the second interrupt process. Display the second digit of the information on the number of
Under the condition where the operation information of the stop switch which is advantageous to the player is displayed, a part of the operation information is displayed on the first display portion in the first interrupt processing, and the other of the operation information is displayed in the second interrupt processing. Part of the display on the second display,
Under the situation where the set value relating to the player's advantage can be changed, at least seven segments of the first display are lit in the first interrupt process, and the second display has the second interrupt process. At least seven segments are lighted.

(C) Effects of the First Invention 59 According to the first invention, the first display unit can be checked by checking whether the seven segments of the first display unit light up in a situation where the set value can be changed. It is possible to check whether there is a failure of the seven segments that the D. has and a failure of the signal line that transmits signals to the seven segments that the first display unit has.

60. Original invention 60
(A) Problem to be solved by the first invention 60 The same as the first invention 59.
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the First Invention 60 (The corresponding embodiments will be described in parentheses.)
The first solution means (29th embodiment) is
It has a plurality of lightable segments (segments A to G), and includes a first display unit (digit 3) and a second display unit (digit 4) for displaying predetermined information by lighting of the segments.
In the first display unit and the second display unit, segment signals (segments A to G signals) indicating which segment is to be lighted are shared.
Under the condition of displaying information (the number of medals acquired) on the number of acquired game media (when proceeding to the medal payout process by the winning of step S4015 in the main process of FIG. 227), the first interrupt process (LED display counter value) To output a segment signal to display the first digit (upper digit) of the information relating to the number of acquired game media in the interrupt processing when “00100 (B)” is A segment signal so as to display the second digit (lower digit) of the information relating to the number of acquired game media in the interrupt processing (the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is “00001000 (B)”) Output
Under circumstances where the operation information (pushing order instruction information) of the stop switch (42) which is advantageous to the player is displayed (when the process proceeds to the pushing order instruction number setting process of step S4012 in the main process of FIG. 227), at least Outputting a segment signal so that at least a part of the operation information is displayed on the first display unit in the first interrupt process;
Under the circumstances where the set value relating to the player's advantage can be changed (when the process proceeds to step S 4101 and S 4102 in the setting change process of FIG. 234), at least information on the set value in the second interrupt process (set value “ A segment signal is output to display any one of 1) to 6) on the second display unit.

The second solution is
It has a plurality of segments that can be lit, and has a first display unit and a second display unit that display predetermined information by lighting the segments,
Under the situation where information regarding the number of game media acquired is displayed, the first display of the first digit of information regarding the number of game media acquired is displayed in the first interrupt process, and the game medium is displayed in the second interrupt process. Display the second digit of the information on the number of
Under the condition where the operation information of the stop switch which is advantageous to the player is displayed, at least a part of the operation information is displayed on the second display unit in the second interruption process,
Under the condition where the set value relating to the player's advantage can be changed, at least information on the set value is displayed on the second display unit in the second interrupt process.

The third solution is
It has a plurality of segments that can be lit, and has a first display unit and a second display unit that display predetermined information by lighting the segments,
In the first display unit and the second display unit, a segment signal indicating which segment is to be lighted is shared.
Under the situation where information regarding the number of game media acquired is displayed, a segment signal is output to display the first digit of the information regarding the number of game media acquired in the first interrupt processing on the first display unit, and Outputting a segment signal so as to display the second digit of the information relating to the number of game media acquired in the second interrupt processing in the second interrupt processing,
Under the condition where the operation information of the stop switch which is advantageous to the player is displayed, a segment signal is outputted so that a part of the operation information is displayed on the first display portion in the first interrupt process, and the second Outputting a segment signal so that another part of the operation information is displayed on the second display unit in the interrupt processing;
A segment signal is output so that information on the setting value is displayed on the second display section at least in the second interrupt processing under a situation where the setting value relating to the degree of advantage of the player can be changed. .

(C) Effects of the First Invention 60 According to the first invention, the segment signal is shared in the first display unit and the second display unit. Therefore, by confirming whether the segments of the first display unit and the second display unit are lit, the first display of the signal lines for transmitting signals to the segments of the first display unit and the second display unit It is possible to confirm the presence or absence of a fault in the common part between the unit and the second display unit.
In addition, by displaying on the first display unit the first digit of information related to the number of acquired game media, it is confirmed whether or not the segment of the first display unit is lit, thereby causing the failure of the segment of the first display unit. It is possible to check the presence or absence of a signal line that transmits a signal to the segment of the first display unit.

61. Original invention 61
(A) Problems to be solved by the first invention 61 The same as the first invention 59.
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the First Invention 61 (Note that the corresponding embodiments will be described in parentheses.)
The first solution means (28th embodiment) is
A first display unit (digit 1) having a plurality of lightable segments (segments A to G) and displaying predetermined information by lighting of the segments, a second display unit (digit 2), a third display unit (digits) 3), and a fourth display unit (digit 4),
In the first display unit, the second display unit, the third display unit, and the fourth display unit, segment signals (segments A to G signals) indicating which segment is to be lighted are shared.
Under the situation where the information on the number of game media stored (the number of stored medals) is displayed (when the process proceeds to the main processing in FIG. 227), at least the first interrupt process (the LED display counter value is "00001000 (B)" Output a segment signal to display the first digit (upper digit) of the information relating to the number of game media stored in the interrupt processing of step Outputs a segment signal so that the second display unit displays the second digit (lower digit) of the information relating to the number of stored game media in the interrupt processing when “00010000 (B)” is displayed,
Under the condition of displaying information (the number of medals acquired) of the number of game media acquired (when proceeding to the medal payout process by the winning of step S4015 in the main process of FIG. 227), at least the third interrupt process (LED display) In the interrupt processing when the counter value is “00100000 (B)”, a segment signal is output to display the first digit (upper digit) of the information relating to the acquired number of gaming media on the third display unit, and In the fourth interrupt processing (the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is “01000000 (B)”), the second digit (lower digit) of the information relating to the number of acquired game media is displayed on the fourth display unit, Output segment signal,
Under circumstances where the operation information (pushing order instruction information) of the stop switch (42) which is advantageous to the player is displayed (when the process proceeds to the pushing order instruction number setting process of step S4012 in the main process of FIG. 227), at least A segment signal is output to display at least a part of the operation information on the third display unit in the third interrupt process.

The second solution is
It has a plurality of segments that can be lit, and includes a first display unit that displays predetermined information by lighting the segments, a second display unit, a third display unit, and a fourth display unit.
In the first display unit, the second display unit, the third display unit, and the fourth display unit, segment signals indicating which segments are to be lighted are shared.
Under the situation where information on the number of game media stored is displayed, a segment signal is output so that at least the first digit of the information on the number of game media stored in the first interrupt processing is displayed on the first display unit. Outputting a segment signal to display the second digit of the information relating to the number of stored game media in the second interrupt process in the second interrupt process,
Under the situation where information regarding the number of game media acquired is displayed, a segment signal is output so as to display the first digit of the information regarding the number of game media acquired in the third interrupt processing at least in the third interrupt process. Outputting a segment signal so as to display on the fourth display unit the second digit of the information relating to the number of acquired game media in the fourth interrupt processing,
Outputting a segment signal so that at least a part of the operation information is displayed on the fourth display unit at least in the fourth interrupt processing under a condition where the operation information on the stop switch which is advantageous to the player is displayed. It is characterized by

The third solution is
It has a plurality of segments that can be lit, and includes a first display unit that displays predetermined information by lighting the segments, a second display unit, a third display unit, and a fourth display unit.
In the first display unit, the second display unit, the third display unit, and the fourth display unit, segment signals indicating which segments are to be lighted are shared.
Under the situation where information on the number of game media stored is displayed, a segment signal is output so that at least the first digit of the information on the number of game media stored in the first interrupt processing is displayed on the first display unit. Outputting a segment signal to display the second digit of the information relating to the number of stored game media in the second interrupt process in the second interrupt process,
Under the situation where information regarding the number of game media acquired is displayed, a segment signal is output so as to display the first digit of the information regarding the number of game media acquired in the third interrupt processing at least in the third interrupt process. Outputting a segment signal so as to display on the fourth display unit the second digit of the information relating to the number of acquired game media in the fourth interrupt processing,
Under the condition where the operation information of the stop switch which is advantageous to the player is displayed, a segment signal is output so that at least a part of the operation information is displayed on the third display unit in the third interrupt process, A segment signal is output so as to display another part of the operation information on the fourth display unit in the interrupt processing of No. 4.

(C) Effects of the First Invention 61 According to the first invention, the segment signal is shared in the first display unit to the fourth display unit. Therefore, by confirming whether the segments of the first display unit to the fourth display unit are lit, the first display of the signal lines for transmitting signals to the segments of the first display unit to the fourth display unit It is possible to confirm the presence or absence of a fault in the part common to the part to the fourth display part.
In addition, by displaying on the third display unit the first digit of information related to the number of acquired game media, it is confirmed whether or not the segment of the third display unit is lit, thereby causing the failure of the segment of the third display unit. It is possible to check the presence or absence of the signal line transmitting the signal to the segment of the third display unit.

62. Original invention 62
(A) Problems to be solved by the first invention 62 The same as the first invention 59.
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the First Invention 62 (The corresponding embodiments will be described in parentheses.)
The first solution means (28th embodiment) is
It has a plurality of lightable segments (segments A to G), and includes a first display unit (digit 3) and a second display unit (digit 4) for displaying predetermined information by lighting of the segments.
In the first display unit and the second display unit, segment signals (segments A to G signals) indicating which segment is to be lighted are shared.
Under the condition of displaying information (the number of medals acquired) on the number of acquired game media (when proceeding to the medal payout process by the winning of step S4015 in the main process of FIG. 227), the first interrupt process (LED display counter value) A segment signal to display the first digit (upper digit) of the information relating to the number of acquired game media in the interrupt processing when “00100000 (B)”, and A segment signal so as to display the second digit (lower digit) of the information relating to the acquired number of gaming media in the interrupt processing (the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is “01000000 (B)”) Output
Under circumstances where the operation information (pushing order instruction information) of the stop switch (42) which is advantageous to the player is displayed (when the process proceeds to the pushing order instruction number setting process of step S4012 in the main process of FIG. 227), at least Outputting a segment signal so that at least a part of the operation information is displayed on the first display unit in the first interrupt process;
Under a condition where specific error information ("E1" error) is displayed (when an unrecoverable error occurs), part of the specific error information is displayed on the first display without executing interrupt processing. Processing for outputting segment signals (error upper digit display output processing in step S1497 in return impossible error processing 1 of FIG. 136) and displaying another part of the specific error information on the second display unit As described above, a process of outputting a segment signal (error lower digit display output process of step S1502 in return impossible error process 1 of FIG. 136) is repeatedly executed.

The second solution is
It has a plurality of segments that can be lit, and has a first display unit and a second display unit that display predetermined information by lighting the segments,
In the first display unit and the second display unit, a segment signal indicating which segment is to be lighted is shared.
Under the situation where information regarding the number of game media acquired is displayed, a segment signal is output to display the first digit of the information regarding the number of game media acquired in the first interrupt processing on the first display unit, and Outputting a segment signal so as to display the second digit of the information relating to the number of game media acquired in the second interrupt processing in the second interrupt processing,
Under the condition of displaying the operation information of the stop switch which is advantageous to the player, a segment signal is output so that at least a part of the operation information is displayed on the second display unit in at least the second interrupt process,
A process of outputting a segment signal so as to display a part of the specific error information on the first display without executing interrupt processing under the condition of displaying the specific error information; and the specific error information And the process of outputting the segment signal so as to display the other part of the display on the second display unit.

The third solution is
It has a plurality of segments that can be lit, and has a first display unit and a second display unit that display predetermined information by lighting the segments,
In the first display unit and the second display unit, a segment signal indicating which segment is to be lighted is shared.
Under the situation where information regarding the number of game media acquired is displayed, a segment signal is output to display the first digit of the information regarding the number of game media acquired in the first interrupt processing on the first display unit, and Outputting a segment signal so as to display the second digit of the information relating to the number of game media acquired in the second interrupt processing in the second interrupt processing,
Under the condition where the operation information of the stop switch which is advantageous to the player is displayed, a segment signal is outputted so that a part of the operation information is displayed on the first display portion in the first interrupt process, and the second Outputting a segment signal so that another part of the operation information is displayed on the second display unit in the interrupt processing;
A process of outputting a segment signal so as to display a part of the specific error information on the first display without executing interrupt processing under the condition of displaying the specific error information; and the specific error information And the process of outputting the segment signal so as to display the other part of the display on the second display unit.

(C) Effects of the First Invention 62 According to the first invention, the segment signal is shared in the first display unit and the second display unit. Therefore, by confirming whether the segments of the first display unit and the second display unit are lit, the first display of the signal lines for transmitting signals to the segments of the first display unit and the second display unit It is possible to confirm the presence or absence of a fault in the common part between the unit and the second display unit.
In addition, by displaying the first digit of the information regarding the number of acquired game media and a part of the specific error information on the first display unit, it is confirmed whether or not the segment of the first display unit is lit. It is possible to confirm the presence or absence of a failure of the segment of the first display unit and the presence or absence of a failure of a signal line transmitting a signal to the segment of the first display unit.

63. Original invention 63
(A) Problems to be solved by the first invention 63 The same as the first invention 59.
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the First Invention 63 (Here, in parentheses, the corresponding embodiments will be described.)
The first solution means (28th embodiment) is
It has a plurality of lightable segments (segments A to G), and includes a first display unit (digit 3) and a second display unit (digit 4) for displaying predetermined information by lighting of the segments.
In the first display unit and the second display unit, segment signals (segments A to G signals) indicating which segment is to be lighted are shared.
Under the condition of displaying information (the number of medals acquired) on the number of acquired game media (when proceeding to the medal payout process by the winning of step S4015 in the main process of FIG. 227), the first interrupt process (LED display counter value) A segment signal to display the first digit (upper digit) of the information relating to the number of acquired game media in the interrupt processing when “00100000 (B)”, and A segment signal so as to display the second digit (lower digit) of the information relating to the acquired number of gaming media in the interrupt processing (the interrupt processing when the LED display counter value is “01000000 (B)”) Output
Under circumstances where the operation information (pushing order instruction information) of the stop switch (42) which is advantageous to the player is displayed (when the process proceeds to the pushing order instruction number setting process of step S4012 in the main process of FIG. 227), at least Outputting a segment signal so that at least a part of the operation information is displayed on the first display unit in the first interrupt process;
Under a condition of displaying predetermined error information ("dE" error) (when returnable error occurs), a part of the predetermined error information is displayed on the first display unit in the first interrupt process. Outputting a segment signal, and outputting a segment signal such that another part of the predetermined error information is displayed on the second display unit in the second interrupt process.

The second solution is
It has a plurality of segments that can be lit, and has a first display unit and a second display unit that display predetermined information by lighting the segments,
In the first display unit and the second display unit, a segment signal indicating which segment is to be lighted is shared.
Under the situation where information regarding the number of game media acquired is displayed, a segment signal is output to display the first digit of the information regarding the number of game media acquired in the first interrupt processing on the first display unit, and Outputting a segment signal so as to display the second digit of the information relating to the number of game media acquired in the second interrupt processing in the second interrupt processing,
Under the condition of displaying the operation information of the stop switch which is advantageous to the player, a segment signal is output so that at least a part of the operation information is displayed on the second display unit in at least the second interrupt process,
Under the condition of displaying predetermined error information, a segment signal is output so that a part of the predetermined error information is displayed on the first display unit in the first interrupt process, and the predetermined process is performed in the second interrupt process. The segment signal is output so as to display another part of the error information on the second display unit.

The third solution is
It has a plurality of segments that can be lit, and has a first display unit and a second display unit that display predetermined information by lighting the segments,
In the first display unit and the second display unit, a segment signal indicating which segment is to be lighted is shared.
Under the situation where information regarding the number of game media acquired is displayed, a segment signal is output to display the first digit of the information regarding the number of game media acquired in the first interrupt processing on the first display unit, and Outputting a segment signal so as to display the second digit of the information relating to the number of game media acquired in the second interrupt processing in the second interrupt processing,
Under the condition where the operation information of the stop switch which is advantageous to the player is displayed, a segment signal is outputted so that a part of the operation information is displayed on the first display portion in the first interrupt process, and the second Outputting a segment signal so that another part of the operation information is displayed on the second display unit in the interrupt processing;
Under the condition of displaying predetermined error information, a segment signal is output so that a part of the predetermined error information is displayed on the first display unit in the first interrupt process, and the predetermined process is performed in the second interrupt process. The segment signal is output so as to display another part of the error information on the second display unit.

(C) Effects of the First Invention 63 According to the first invention, the segment signal is shared in the first display unit and the second display unit. Therefore, by confirming whether the segments of the first display unit and the second display unit are lit, the first display of the signal lines for transmitting signals to the segments of the first display unit and the second display unit It is possible to confirm the presence or absence of a fault in the common part between the unit and the second display unit.
In addition, by displaying the first digit of the information regarding the number of game media acquired and a part of the predetermined error information on the first display unit, it is confirmed whether the segment of the first display unit is lit or not. It is possible to confirm the presence or absence of a failure of the segment of the first display unit and the presence or absence of a failure of a signal line transmitting a signal to the segment of the first display unit.

64. Original invention 64
(A) Problem to be Solved by Invention 64 In the prior art, a counter is required to count the advantageous mode. Therefore, it is necessary to execute a process of determining whether the game (current state) is in the advantageous mode, and a process of updating the counter when it is determined that the advantageous mode is in effect.
The problem to be solved by the invention at first is to simplify information processing by updating the advantage interval counter without determining whether it is an advantage interval.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the First Invention 64 (Note that the corresponding embodiments will be described in parentheses.)
The first invention (30th embodiment) is
Advantage mode display means (acquisition number display LED 78) for displaying an advantageous operation mode (a correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42);
A normal section (including a standby section) which can not display an advantageous operation mode by the above-mentioned advantageous mode display means;
An advantageous section in which an advantageous operation mode by the advantageous mode display means may be displayed;
Advantage section information storage means (RWM 53) capable of storing information indicating an advantageous section (bit D0 of the advantageous section type flag);
An advantageous interval counter (an advantageous interval clear counter) and
When starting an advantageous interval, a specific value (1500 (D)) is stored in the advantageous interval counter,
Regardless of whether or not it is an advantageous section, “1” can be subtracted from the advantageous section counter at a predetermined timing (step S2742 in FIG. 246) based on the progress of the game.
After the start of the advantageous section, when the value of the advantageous section counter becomes “0” (when “Yes” in step S2744 in FIG. 246), the advantageous section ends (FIG. 246, step S2746),
As a result of subtracting "1" from the advantageous section counter, when a borrow occurs, "0" is stored in the advantageous section counter (in FIG. 247, step S2761), and the advantageous section is stored in the advantageous section information storage means. When the information to be indicated is not stored (“No” in step S2747 in FIG. 246), the value of the advantageous section counter is not changed from “0”.

(C) Effects of the First Invention 64 According to the first invention, it is possible to update the advantage zone counter without determining whether it is an advantage zone.

65. Original invention 65
(A) Problem to be solved by the first invention 65 The same as the first invention 64.
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the First Invention 65 (The corresponding embodiments will be described in parentheses.)
The first invention (30th embodiment) is
Advantage mode display means (acquisition number display LED 78) for displaying an advantageous operation mode (a correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42);
A normal section (including a standby section) which can not display an advantageous operation mode by the above-mentioned advantageous mode display means;
An advantageous section in which an advantageous operation mode by the advantageous mode display means may be displayed;
Advantage section information storage means (RWM 53) capable of storing information indicating an advantageous section (bit D0 of the advantageous section type flag);
An advantageous interval counter (an advantageous interval clear counter) and
Regardless of whether or not it is an advantageous section, “1” can be subtracted from the advantageous section counter at a predetermined timing (step S2742 in FIG. 246) based on the progress of the game.
As a result of subtracting "1" from the advantageous section counter, when a borrow occurs, "0" is stored in the advantageous section counter (in FIG. 247, step S2761), and the advantageous section is stored in the advantageous section information storage means. When the information shown is stored ("Yes" in step S2747 in FIG. 246), a specific value (1500 (D)) is stored in the advantageous section counter,
After the start of the advantageous section, when the value of the advantageous section counter becomes “0” (when “Yes” in step S2744 in FIG. 246), the advantageous section is ended.
(C) Effects of the First Invention 65 The same as the First Invention 64.

66. Original invention 66
(A) Problems to be solved by the first invention 66 The same as the first invention 64.
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the First Invention 66 (The corresponding embodiments will be described in parentheses.)
The first solution means (30th embodiment) is
Advantage mode display means (acquisition number display LED 78) for displaying an advantageous operation mode (a correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42);
A normal section (including a standby section) which can not display an advantageous operation mode by the above-mentioned advantageous mode display means;
An advantageous section in which an advantageous operation mode by the advantageous mode display means may be displayed;
When it is decided to shift to the advantageous section in the normal section, a standby section which can be shifted before shifting to the advantageous section, and
A standby section information storage unit (RWM 53) capable of storing information indicating the standby section (bit D1 of the advantageous section type flag);
An advantageous interval counter (an advantageous interval clear counter) and
When starting an advantageous interval, a specific value (1500 (D)) is stored in the advantageous interval counter,
Regardless of whether or not it is an advantageous section, “1” can be subtracted from the advantageous section counter at a predetermined timing (step S2742 in FIG. 246) based on the progress of the game.
After the start of the advantageous section, when the value of the advantageous section counter becomes “0” (when “Yes” in step S2744 in FIG. 246), the advantageous section is ended,
As a result of subtracting "1" from the advantageous section counter, when a borrow occurs, "0" is stored in the advantageous section counter (step S2761 in FIG. 247), and the waiting section is stored in the waiting section information storage means. When the information to be shown is stored, the value of the advantageous section counter is not changed from "0"("No" in step S2747 in FIG. 246)
It is characterized by
According to a second solution, in the first solution,
Advantageously section information storage means (RWM 53) capable of storing information indicating an advantageous section (bit D0 of the advantageous section type flag);
As a result of subtracting "1" from the advantageous section counter, when a borrow occurs, "0" is stored in the advantageous section counter (in FIG. 247, step S2761), and the advantageous section is stored in the advantageous section information storage means. When the information to be indicated is not stored, the value of the advantageous section counter is not changed from "0" (in FIG. 246, "No" in step S2747).
It is characterized by
(C) Effects of the First Invention 66 The same as the First Invention 64.

67. Original invention 67
(A) Problem to be solved by the first invention 67 The same as the first invention 64.
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the First Invention 67 (The corresponding embodiments will be described in parentheses.)
The first invention (30th embodiment) is
Advantage mode display means (acquisition number display LED 78) for displaying an advantageous operation mode (a correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42);
A normal section (including a standby section) which can not display an advantageous operation mode by the above-mentioned advantageous mode display means;
An advantageous section in which an advantageous operation mode by the advantageous mode display means may be displayed;
Advantage section information storage means (RWM 53) capable of storing information indicating an advantageous section (bit D0 of the advantageous section type flag);
An advantageous interval counter (an advantageous interval clear counter) and
When starting an advantageous interval, a specific value (1500 (D)) is stored in the advantageous interval counter,
Regardless of whether or not it is an advantageous section, “1” can be subtracted from the advantageous section counter at a predetermined timing (step S2742 in FIG. 246) based on the progress of the game.
When "0" is obtained as a result of subtracting "1" from the advantageous section counter ("Yes" in step S2744 in FIG. 246), at least the information stored in the advantageous section information storage unit is cleared ( In FIG. 246, step S2746) is characterized in that the advantageous section is ended.
(C) Effects of the First Invention 67 According to the first invention, it is possible to update the advantage zone counter without determining whether it is an advantage zone. Further, the information stored in the advantageous section information storage means can be cleared at an appropriate timing when the advantageous section is ended.

68. Original invention 68
(A) Problem to be solved by the first invention 68 The same as the first invention 64.
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the First Invention 68 (The corresponding embodiments will be described in parentheses.)
The first invention (30th embodiment) is
Advantage mode display means (acquisition number display LED 78) for displaying an advantageous operation mode (a correct answer pressing order) of the stop switch (42);
A normal section (including a standby section) which can not display an advantageous operation mode by the above-mentioned advantageous mode display means;
An advantageous section in which an advantageous operation mode by the advantageous mode display means may be displayed;
Advantage section information storage means (RWM 53) capable of storing information indicating an advantageous section (bit D0 of the advantageous section type flag);
An advantageous interval counter (an advantageous interval clear counter) and
When starting an advantageous interval, a specific value (1500 (D)) is stored in the advantageous interval counter,
Regardless of whether or not it is an advantageous section, “1” can be subtracted from the advantageous section counter at a predetermined timing (step S2742 in FIG. 246) based on the progress of the game.
There is a case where the end condition of the advantageous section is satisfied before the value of the advantageous section counter becomes "0",
When the ending condition of the advantageous section is satisfied before the value of the advantageous section counter becomes "0", "1" is stored in the advantageous section counter (step S2823 in FIG. 252), and then the section in the advantageous section is performed. Based on the execution of the game, "1" is subtracted from the advantageous section counter (in FIG. 246, step S2742) and the advantageous section counter becomes "0" (in FIG. 246, "Yes" in step S2744) , And clears the information stored in at least the advantageous section information storage means (step S2746 in FIG. 246), and ends the advantageous section.

(C) Effects of the First Invention 68 According to the first invention, it is possible to update the advantage zone counter without determining whether it is an advantage zone. Further, even when the advantageous section counter is not "0", even when the advantageous section is ended, the advantageous section counter can be set to "0", and the information stored in the advantageous section information storage means can be cleared at an appropriate timing.

69. Original invention 69
(A) Problem to be Solved by the First Invention 69 The first invention relates to a gaming machine capable of ending the advantageous section based on the value of the difference number counter.
In a conventional gaming machine, there is known a technique of providing an advantageous section and terminating the advantageous section when the maximum of 1,500 games or 3,000 payouts is reached (see, for example, Japanese Patent No. 6112524).
However, in the above-described conventional technology, when the advantageous section is set to 1500 games or 3000 pieces at maximum, the advantageous section becomes uniform.
The problem to be solved by the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of ending the advantageous section based on the difference number of game media in the advantageous section.

(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the First Invention 69 (The corresponding embodiments will be described in parentheses.)
The original invention is
A normal section in which it is not possible to report an advantageous operation mode (a correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42),
An advantageous section in which an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch may be notified;
A difference number counter storing a value corresponding to an accumulated value of difference number data indicating a difference between the bet number of gaming media and the number of payouts (including addition to credits);
Regardless of whether it is a normal section or an advantageous section, the process of updating the difference number counter can be executed for each game,
Set the value of the difference counter to the initial value (0 (H)) based on the start of the advantageous interval,
When the value of the difference number counter in the advantageous section becomes a value satisfying the end condition of the advantageous section (when it exceeds 2400 (D)), the advantageous section is ended.

(C) Effects of the First Invention 69 According to the first invention, since it is possible to end the advantageous section based on the value of the difference number counter, "the number of games in the game section reaches a predetermined upper limit number of games (for example, 1,500 games) It is possible to end the advantageous section regardless of the end condition of the advantageous section "when the number of payouts in the advantageous section reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3000 sheets)".
Also, regardless of whether it is a normal section or an advantageous section, the value of the difference number counter can be updated, and the value of the differential number counter is made an initial value based on the start of the advantageous section. It is not necessary to update the value of the difference number counter after determining whether there is any, and simplification of processing and reduction of program capacity can be achieved.

70. Original invention 70
(A) Problem to be solved by the first invention 70 The same as the first invention 69.
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the First Invention 70 (Note that the corresponding embodiments will be described in parentheses.)
The original invention is
An advantageous section in which an advantageous operation mode (a correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42) may be notified;
A difference number counter storing a value corresponding to an accumulated value of difference number data indicating a difference between the bet number of gaming media and the number of payouts (including addition to credits);
At least in the advantageous section, it is possible to execute the process of updating the difference number counter for each game,
In the game in which the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed, the difference number counter is updated with the number of payouts being “0” (example 1 in FIG. 257),
When the symbol combination corresponding to the replay in the previous game is stopped and displayed, in this game, the bet number of the game medium is set to “0” and the difference number counter is updated ((a) Example 1 of FIG. 257),
When the value of the difference number counter in the advantageous section becomes a value satisfying the end condition of the advantageous section (when it exceeds 2400 (D)), the advantageous section is ended.

(C) Effects of the First Invention 70 According to the first invention, since the advantageous section can be ended based on the value of the difference number counter, "the number of games in the game section reaches a predetermined upper limit number of games (for example, 1,500 games) It is possible to end the advantageous section regardless of the end condition of the advantageous section "when the number of payouts in the advantageous section reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3000 sheets)".
Further, since the value of the difference number counter is updated with the number of payouts in the game in which the replay is won and the number of bets in the next game being "0", the calculation can be simplified and the program capacity can be reduced.

71. Original invention 71
(A) Problem to be solved by the first invention 71 The same as the first invention 69.
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the First Invention 71 (Note that the corresponding embodiments are described in parentheses.)
The original invention is
An advantageous section in which an advantageous operation mode (a correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42) may be notified;
A difference number counter storing a value corresponding to an accumulated value of difference number data indicating a difference between the bet number of gaming media and the number of payouts (including addition to credits);
At least in the advantageous section, it is possible to execute the process of updating the difference number counter for each game,
In the game in which the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed, the difference number counter is updated with the bet number in the game or the automatic bet number as the payout number (example 2 of (b) in FIG. 257),
When the symbol combination corresponding to the replay in the previous game is stopped and displayed, the difference bet counter is updated with the automatic bet number based on the symbol combination corresponding to the replay being stopped displayed (FIG. b) Example 2),
When the value of the difference number counter in the advantageous section becomes a value satisfying the end condition of the advantageous section (when it exceeds 2400 (D)), the advantageous section is ended.

(C) Effects of the First Invention 71 According to the first invention, since the advantageous section can be ended based on the value of the difference number counter, "the number of games in the game section reaches a predetermined upper limit number of games (for example, 1,500 games) It is possible to end the advantageous section regardless of the end condition of the advantageous section "when the number of payouts in the advantageous section reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3000 sheets)".
In addition, in the game in which the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed, the value of the difference counter is updated based on the bet number in the game or the automatic bet number as the payout number, and the difference counter is It is possible to prevent the value from increasing.

72. Original invention 72
(A) Problem to be solved by the first invention 72 The same as the first invention 69.
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the First Invention 72 (Here, in parentheses, the corresponding embodiments will be described.)
The original invention is
An advantageous section in which an advantageous operation mode (a correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42) may be notified;
Payout number storage means (payout number data buffer) for storing the number of payouts (including addition to credits) of gaming media in the current game
When,
A difference number counter storing a value corresponding to an accumulated value of difference number data indicating a difference between the bet number of gaming media and the number of payouts (including addition to credits);
At least in the advantageous section, it is possible to execute the process of updating the difference number counter for each game,
When the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination is stopped and displayed, the number of payouts is stored in the payout number storage means,
In the game in which the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination is stopped and displayed, the difference number counter is updated based on the bet number of game media and the payout number stored in the payout number storage means (FIG. 257),
When the difference number counter is updated based on the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination being stopped, “1” is added to the difference number counter for each “1” payout of gaming media,
In the game in which the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed, the predetermined flag (symbol combination display flag) is updated based on the symbol combination corresponding to the replay being stopped and displayed,
In the game in which the symbol combination corresponding to the replay is stopped and displayed, the difference number counter is updated based on the bet number of game media and the predetermined flag (example 2 of (b) in FIG. 257).
When the value of the difference number counter in the advantageous section becomes a value satisfying the end condition of the advantageous section (when it exceeds 2400 (D)), the advantageous section is ended.

(C) Effects of the First Invention 72 According to the first invention, since the advantageous section can be ended based on the value of the difference number counter, "the number of games in the game section reaches a predetermined upper limit number of games (for example, 1,500 games) It is possible to end the advantageous section regardless of the end condition of the advantageous section "when the number of payouts in the advantageous section reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3000 sheets)".
Further, since the value of the difference counter is updated based on a predetermined flag relating to the replay winning, even if there is no payout due to the replay winning, the value of the difference counter can be correctly updated.

73. Original invention 73
(A) Problems to be solved by the first invention 73 The same as the first invention 69.
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the First Invention 73 (Here, in parentheses, the corresponding embodiments will be described.)
The original invention is
An advantageous section in which an advantageous operation mode (a correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42) may be notified;
A difference number counter storing a value corresponding to an accumulated value of difference number data indicating a difference between the bet number of gaming media and the number of payouts (including addition to credits);
At least in the advantageous section, it is possible to execute the process of updating the difference number counter for each game,
If the specific bit (most significant bit) of the value of the calculated difference counter is "1", the value of the difference counter is set to the initial value (0 (H)) (FIG. 258),
When the value of the difference number counter in the advantageous section becomes a value satisfying the end condition of the advantageous section, it is characterized in that the advantageous section is ended.

(C) Effects of the First Invention 73 According to the first invention, since the advantageous section can be ended based on the value of the difference number counter, "the number of games in the game section reaches a predetermined upper limit number of games (for example, 1,500 games) It is possible to end the advantageous section regardless of the end condition of the advantageous section "when the number of payouts in the advantageous section reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3000 sheets)".
In addition, when the value of the difference number counter is set to the initial value, it is only necessary to determine whether the most significant bit is “1”, so that the program can be simplified.

74. Original invention 74
(A) Problems to be solved by the first invention 74 The same as the first invention 69.
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the First Invention 74 (Here, in parentheses, the corresponding embodiments will be described.)
The original invention is
An advantageous section in which a notification game may be performed to notify an advantageous operation mode (a correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42);
A difference number counter storing a value corresponding to an accumulated value of difference number data indicating a difference between the bet number of gaming media and the number of payouts (including addition to credits);
Main control means (main control board 50) for controlling the progress of the game;
And sub control means (sub control board 80) for controlling the output of the effect,
The main control means can execute a process of updating the difference number counter for each game in the advantageous section,
The difference counter counts so as to become positive from the time when the accumulated value of the difference becomes the lowest value during the advantageous interval,
The main control means can transmit the value of the difference number counter to the sub control means,
The sub-control means makes it possible to display the total number of game media acquired based on fulfillment of predetermined conditions relating to the execution of a notification game (AT) (FIG. 260).
When the value of the difference number counter in the advantageous section becomes a value satisfying the end condition of the advantageous section, it is characterized in that the advantageous section is ended.

(C) Effects of the First Invention 74 According to the first invention, since the advantageous section can be ended based on the value of the difference number counter, "the number of games in the game section reaches a predetermined upper limit number of games (for example, 1,500 games) It is possible to end the advantageous section regardless of the end condition of the advantageous section "when the number of payouts in the advantageous section reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3000 sheets)".
Also, since the difference number counter is counted so as to become positive after the cumulative value of the difference number becomes the lowest value in the advantageous section, the value of the difference number counter and the game medium to be executed by the sub control means The total number of wins may differ. However, since the main control means transmits the value of the difference number counter to the sub control means, the sub control means is appropriate (for example, misunderstood the player based on the value of the difference number counter and the total winning number). It is possible to output a display etc.).

75. First invention 75
(A) Problems to be solved by the first invention 75 The same as the first invention 69.
(B) Means for Solving the Problems of the First Invention 75 (The corresponding embodiments will be described in parentheses.)
The original invention is
An advantageous section in which a notification game (AT) may be performed to notify an advantageous operation mode (a correct pressing order) of the stop switch (42);
A difference number counter storing a value corresponding to an accumulated value of difference number data indicating a difference between the bet number of gaming media and the number of payouts (including addition to credits);
Main control means (main control board 50) for controlling the progress of the game;
And sub control means (sub control board 80) for controlling the output of the effect,
The main control means can execute a process of updating the difference number counter for each game in the advantageous section,
The main control means can transmit the value of the difference number counter to the sub control means,
The sub-control means makes it possible to make the notification mode different when notifying the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch according to the value of the difference number counter in the notification game (FIG. 261).
When the value of the difference number counter in the advantageous section becomes a value satisfying the end condition of the advantageous section, it is characterized in that the advantageous section is ended.

(C) Effects of the First Invention 75 According to the first invention, since the advantageous section can be ended based on the value of the difference number counter, "the number of games in the game section reaches a predetermined upper limit number of games (for example, 1,500 games) It is possible to end the advantageous section regardless of the end condition of the advantageous section "when the number of payouts in the advantageous section reaches a predetermined number (for example, 3000 sheets)".
Further, since the sub control means can vary the notification mode when notifying an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch according to the value of the difference number counter, for example, the value of the difference number counter indicates the termination condition of the advantageous section. It becomes possible to output a notification or the like for alerting the player when approaching a value satisfying the above.

DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 base part 10 slot machine 11 power switch 12 setting key switch 13 setting switch 14 reset switch 15 door switch 16 board case 16a caulking part 17 display window 21 presentation lamp 22 speaker 23 image display device 24 cross key 25 menu button 31 reel 32 motor 33 Reel Sensor 35 Hopper 36 Hopper Motor 37 Payout Sensor 40a 1 Bed Switch 40b 3 Bed Switch 41 Start Switch 42 Stop Switch 43 Medal Entry Port 43a Passage Sensor 44 Entry Sensor 45 Blocker 46 Settlement Switch 50 (50A, 50B) Main Control Board ( Main control means)
51 input port 52 output port 53 RWM
54 ROM
55 Main CPU
61 winning combination lottery means 62 winning flag control means 63 push order instruction number selection means 64 effect group number selection means 65 reel control means 66 prize determination means 67 payout means 68 RT control means 69 advantage zone control means 69a advantage zone counter 69b upper limit counter 70 External signal transmission means 71 Control command transmission means 72 Management information control means 73 Setting value display LED
74 Management information display LED
75 Display board 76 Storage number display LED
77 advantage zone indicator LED
78 Acquisition number display LED
79 status display LED
79a 1 bet display LED
79b 2 bet display LED
79c 3 bed display LED
79d Game start display LED
79e input LED
79f Replay Display LED
79g effect display LED
80 Sub control board (sub control means)
81 Input port 82 Output port 83 RWM
84 ROM
85 sub CPU
91 Production output control means 100 External concentrated terminal board 200 Hall computer

Claims (1)

A normal section in which the advantageous operation mode of the stop switch can not be notified,
An advantageous section in which an advantageous operation mode of the stop switch may be notified;
A difference number counter storing a value corresponding to an accumulated value of difference number data indicating a difference between the bet number of gaming media and the number of payouts (including addition to credits);
Regardless of whether it is a normal section or an advantageous section, the process of updating the difference number counter can be executed for each game,
Based on the start of the advantageous interval, the value of the difference number counter is made an initial value,
A gaming machine characterized by ending the advantageous section when the value of the difference number counter in the advantageous section becomes a value satisfying the end of the advantageous section.

Images